THE “WHITEBOOK”

Standard Specications For

Public Works Construction

2021

Edition

THE “WHITEBOOK” |

THE

“WHITEBOOK”

ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING & PARKS DIVISION

STANDARDS & CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION

525 B STREET STE. 750

SAN DIEGO, CA 92101

DOCUMENT NUMBER: ECPI010122-02

Standard Specications

For Public Works Construction

2021 Edition

INTRODUCTION

Use the “WHITEBOOK” (also known as the City Supplement) in conjunction with the Standard

Specifications for Public Works Construction (“The GREENBOOK”), 2021 Edition

(http://www.greenbookspecs.org/

To address the special conditions of alternative contracting methods, Part 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

and Part 4 – EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS, have been divided as follows:

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS (A). These provisions apply to all contracts.

2. GENERAL PROVISIONS (B). When applicable, these additional provisions to GENERAL

PROVISIONS (A) apply to the alternative project contracting methods “Design-Build” (DB) and

“Multiple Award Construction Contract” (MACC).

3. GENERAL PROVISIONS (C). When applicable, these additional provisions to GENERAL

PROVISIONS (A) apply to the alternative project contracting method “Job Order Contracting”

(JOC).

4. EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS (A). These provisions apply to all contracts.

5. EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS (B). When applicable, these additional provisions to EXISTING

IMPROVEMENTS (A) apply to the alternative project contracting methods “Design-Build” (DB)

and “Multiple Award Construction Contract” (MACC) only.

STYLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

The City has standardized the style and language of The “WHITEBOOK”. This style follows the Federal

guidelines for “Plain Language” (http://www.plainlanguage.gov/

) to the extent possible. Therefore,

when used in the Contract Documents, statement or command phrases (active voice and imperative

mood) refer to and are directed at the “Bidder” or “Contractor” as applicable. The specifications are

written to the “Bidder” before award and the “Contractor” after award.

Before award, interpret sentences written in the imperative mood as starting with “The Bidder shall”.

Interpret the term “you” as “the Bidder” and interpret the term “your” as “the Bidder’s”.

After award, interpret sentences written in the imperative mood starting with “The Contractor shall”.

Interpret the term “you” as “the Contractor” and interpret the term “your” as “the Contractor’s.

DOCUMENT AVAILABILITY AND COMMENTS

An electronic copy of The “WHITEBOOK” is available for download from the City’s web site:

http://www.sandiego.gov/publicworks/edocref/greenbook.shtml

The City of San Diego is committed to the quality of this publication and desires to correct any errors,

omissions, or ambiguities. If you have any suggestions, comments, corrections, or additions, you may

submit them to: engineering@sandiego.gov

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

The continuous contribution and support in standardizing and updating these specifications of the

following members and subject matter experts of the 2021 “WHITEBOOK” Committee are

acknowledged:

CITY ATTORNEY

Christina Rae, Adam Wander

RISK MANAGEMENT

Claudia Castillo DelMuro, Carla Stephens

PUBLIC UTILITIES

Tung Phung, John Miller, Andrea Demich, Anh Nguyen

ENGINEERING & CAPITAL PROJECTS

Ahmed Aburahmah, Alaine James, Angelita Jaro, Catherine Dungca, Ramesis Bustamante, Maryam

Jirjis Nakasha, Christopher Naval, Dwayne Abbey, Fletcher Callanta ,John Butcher, Harry Nguyen,

Nibras Romaya, Nabil Batta, Nikki Lewis, Randy Encinas, Sarah Chavez, Dino Ciafre-Garay, James

Arnhart, Nicole Salem, Yoftahe Ghiliamichael, Yousef Benyamin, Jacob Randles, Jayna Straughn, Maad

Al Kushaba, Darren Genova, Shannon Scoggins

PURCHASING & CONTRACTING

Claudia Abarca, Cindy Crocker, Stephen Samara

TRANSPORTATION

Duncan Hughes, Brian Genovese, Steve Celniker,

Joshua Lahmann, Edgar Puente, Gary Pence, Alexander Lukes, Mariana Sadek

STORM WATER

Michael Phillips, Chris Gascon, Jake Valencia, Jillian Haynes

PARKS & RECREATION

Charles Daniels

MOBILITY

Alex Warner

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS

GENERAL PROVISIONS (A)

SECTION 1 - GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE, AND

SYMBOLS .............................................................................................................................. 11

SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF THE WORK .......................................................................................... 26

SECTION 3 - CONTROL OF THE WORK .................................................................................... 34

SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS ................................................................................... 76

SECTION 5 - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................... 82

SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK ................................................. 122

SECTION 7 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ......................................................................... 141

SECTION 8 - FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL ............................................................... 154

GENERAL PROVISIONS (B) - DESIGN-BUILD (DB) AND MULTIPLE AWARD

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (MACC) CONTRACTING ONLY

SECTION 1 - GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE, AND

SYMBOLS ............................................................................................................ 158

SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF THE WORK ........................................................................................ 161

SECTION 3 - CONTROL OF THE WORK .................................................................................. 165

SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS ................................................................................. 170

SECTION 5 - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................... 171

SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK ............................................... 174

SECTION 7 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................................... 175

GENERAL PROVISIONS (C) - JOB ORDER CONTRACTING (JOC) ONLY

SECTION 1 - GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE, AND

SYMBOLS ............................................................................................................ 178

SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF THE WORK ........................................................................................ 183

SECTION 3 - CONTROL OF THE WORK .................................................................................. 184

SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK ............................................... 185

SECTION 7 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................................... 186

PART 2 – CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

SECTION 200 - ROCK MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 188

SECTION 201 - CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS ...................................... 194

SECTION 203 - BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ............................................................................. 197

SECTION 206 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS ................................................................... 207

SECTION 207 - GRAVITY PIPE ................................................................................................ 208

SECTION 209 - PRESSURE PIPE .............................................................................................. 219

SECTION 210 - PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS ............................................................ 231

SECTION 211 - MATERIAL TESTS ........................................................................................... 232

SECTION 212 - WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM VALVES AND APPURTENANCES .......................... 233

SECTION 213 - ENGINEERING GEOSYNTHETICS ................................................................... 239

SECTION 217 – BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIALS ......................................................... 241

SECTION 218 - DETECTABLE WARNING TILES (DWT) ........................................................... 242

PART 3 – CONSTRUCTION METHODS

SECTION 300 - EARTHWORK .................................................................................................. 244

SECTION 301 - SUBGRADE PREPARATION, TREATED MATERIALS, AND PLACEMENT OF

BASE MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 247

SECTION 302 - ROADWAY SURFACING ................................................................................. 253

SECTION 303 - CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION .............................................. 268

SECTION 304 - METAL FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION .............................................. 275

SECTION 306 - OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION ................................................. 276

SECTION 307 - JACKING AND TUNNELING ........................................................................... 313

SECTION 308 - MICROTUNNELING ....................................................................................... 314

SECTION 309 - MONUMENTS ................................................................................................ 315

SECTION 314 - TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS, AND PAVEMENT

MARKERS ....................................................................................................... 316

SECTION 315 - HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING ....................................................... 317

SECTION 316 - PIPE BURSTING.............................................................................................. 324

SECTION 317 - PIPE FUSION .................................................................................................. 327

PART 4 – EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS

EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS (A) – GENERAL

SECTION 400 - PROTECTION AND RESTORATION ............................................................... 336

SECTION 401 - REMOVAL ....................................................................................................... 343

SECTION 402 - UTILITIES........................................................................................................ 346

SECTION 403 – MANHOLE, SURVEY MONUMENT, AND GATE VALVE FRAMES AND COVERS

ADJUSTMENT AND RECONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 350

SECTION 404 - COLD MILLING .............................................................................................. 353

EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS (B) - DESIGN-BUILD (DB) AND MULTIPLE AWARD

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (MACC) CONTRACTING ONLY

SECTION 402 - UTILITIES........................................................................................................ 359

PART 5 – PIPELINE SYSTEM REHABILITATION

SECTION 500 - PIPELINE REHABILITATION .......................................................................... 361

SECTION 501 - SERVICE LATERAL CONNECTION SEALING .................................................. 374

SECTION 502 - MANHOLE AND STRUCTURE REHABILITATION .......................................... 378

SECTION 503 - SERVICE LATERAL REHABILITATION ............................................................ 381

PART 6 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

SECTION 600 - ACCESS ........................................................................................................... 386

SECTION 601 - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE

WORK ZONES ................................................................................................ 391

PART 7 – STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 700 - MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 408

SECTION 701 - CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................ 459

PART 8 – LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

SECTION 800 - MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 464

SECTION 801 - INSTALLATION .............................................................................................. 490

SECTION 802 - NATIVE HABITAT PROTECTION, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, AND

MONITORING ................................................................................................ 510

PART 9 – WATER WORKS

SECTION 900 - MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 524

SECTION 901 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION ............................................................. 531

PART 10 – STORM WATER

SECTION 1000 - GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 547

SECTION 1001 - CONSTRUCTION BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPs) ....................... 549

SECTION 1002 - PERMANENT BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPs) ............................ 576

INDEX ............................................................................................................................... 599

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 11

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS (A)

SECTION 1 - GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE,

AND SYMBOLS

1-1 GENERAL. ADD the following:

1. The word “provide” shall mean “furnish and install”, unless otherwise stated.

1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Acceptance – When all of the Contract Work, including all Punchlist items, is

deemed officially complete by the City Asset Owning Department or Deputy

City Engineer.

2. Addendum - Written or graphic instrument issued prior to the opening of Bids

which clarifies, corrects, or changes the Contract Documents. The term

"Addendum" shall include bulletins and all other types of written notices

issued to potential bidders prior to opening of the Bids.

3. Agency - The City of San Diego.

4. Agreed Price - The cost for new or unforeseen Work, or for adjustments in the

Contract Unit Price for changes in the character of the Work as specified in 7-

3.7, “Agreed Prices”, established by mutual agreement between you and the

City.

5. Agreement - See Contract.

6. Allowance (AL) - Payment under Allowance Bid items, denoted as “AL”, shall

be based on the actual expenditures and for pre-authorized items of the Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents. The unused portions of the Allowances

shall revert to the City upon Acceptance of the Project.

7. Apparent Low Bidder - The Bidder whose Bid having been publicly opened,

initially meets the material requirements of the Bid Documents and whose Bid

price is the lowest received.

8. Applicable Laws - Laws, statutes, ordinances, rules, orders, and regulations of

governmental authorities and courts having jurisdiction over the Project.

9. As-Builts - The CADD drawings prepared from the approved Red-lines for

record keeping purposes.

10. Award of Contract (Award) - The date on which the Mayor or designee

executes the Contract.

11. Assessment Act Contract - A Contract financed by special assessments

authorized under a State Act or procedural ordinance of a City or County.

12. Base - A layer of specified material of planned thickness placed immediately

below the pavement or surfacing.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 12

THE “WHITEBOOK”

13. Bid - The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form

setting forth the prices for the Work.

14. Bidder - Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or combination

thereof, submitting a Bid for the Work, acting directly or through a duly

authorized representative.

15. Board - The officer or body constituting the awarding authority of the City.

16. Bond - Bid, performance, payment bond, or other instrument of security.

17. Business Day - See Working Day.

18. Calendar Day - See Days.

19. Caltrans - The State of California Department of Transportation.

20. Cash Contract - A Contract financed by means other than special assessments.

21. Certificate of Compliance - A written document signed and submitted by a

supplier or manufacturer that certifies that the material or assembled material

supplied to the Work site conforms to manufacturer’s installation

requirements and the requirements of the Contract Documents.

22. Change Order - An amendment to the agreement signed by the City

authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in

the Contract Price or the Contract time issued after the effective date of the

Contract. A Change Order may or may not also be signed by you.

23. City - The City of San Diego. See also Agency.

24. City Forces - The City’s employees who perform construction work.

25. City Supplement - the City of San Diego Standard Specifications for Public

Works Construction, the “WHITEBOOK”.

26. Code - Refer to the statutes of the State of California.

27. Contract - The written agreement between the City and you that covers the

Work.

28. Contract Documents - Contract Documents include the following: The signed

Agreement, Addenda, Notice Inviting Bids, funding agency provisions, Bid and

documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-bid documentation

submitted prior to the Notice of Award when attached as an exhibit to the

Contract, Bonds, Permits, CEQA documents, Supplementary Special Provisions

(SSP), City’s EOCP Requirements, Standard Specifications (the “GREENBOOK”), City

Supplement (the “WHITEBOOK”), Plans, Standard Drawings, Construction

Documents, Reference Specifications listed in the Notice Inviting Bids, and

Change Orders. Contract Documents, when applicable, shall also include: Site

and Coastal development permits, NEPA documents, re-vegetation plans,

biological letters or technical reports, habitat mitigation plans, storm water

documents, and local, state, and federal resource agency permits.

29. Contractor - The individual, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or other

legal entity having a Contract with the City to perform the Work. In the case of

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 13

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Work being done under a permit issued by the City, the Contractor shall also

be construed as the permittee. The Contractor is referred to as “you”.

30. Contract Price - The total amount of money for which the Contract is

awarded.

31. Contract Unit Price - The amount stated in the Bid for a single unit of an item

of Work.

32. Construction Work - The portion of the Work to construct the Project as set

forth in the Contract Documents in conformance with 2-1, “WORK TO BE

DONE”.

33. Construction Documents - Your plans and details, including plans showing

installation of major systems, equipment, fixed furnishings and graphics, the

technical specifications and all other technical drawings, schedules, diagrams

and specifications, accepted Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and

submittals that are necessary to set forth in detail the requirements for the

Project.

34. Contract Time - The number of Working Days to complete the Work as

specified in the Contract Documents. Contract Time begins at Notice to

Proceed (NTP) and ends at Acceptance.

35. County Sealer - The Sealer of Weights and Measures of the county in which

the Contract is awarded.

36. Days - Days shall mean consecutive Calendar Days unless otherwise

specified in the Special Provisions.

37. Defective Work - Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.

38. Disputed Work - Work in which you and City are in disagreement.

39. Drawings - See Plans.

40. Electrolier - Street light assembly complete, including foundation, standard,

mast arm, luminaire, and etc.

41. Extra Work - New or unforeseen Work not covered by a Contract Unit Price or

Stipulated Unit Price.

42. Engineer - The City Engineer, Director, or other person designated, acting

either directly or through authorized agents such as the Resident Engineer.

43. Field Book - The City of San Diego Sewer Field Book or Water Gate Book

showing sewer and water facilities.

44. Field Order - A Field Order is a written agreement by the Engineer to

compensate you for Work items in accordance with 2-8, “EXTRA WORK” or 2-9,

“CHANGED CONDITIONS”. A Field Order does not change the Contract Price,

Contract Time, or the scope intent of the Contract. The unused portion of the

Field Order shall revert to the City upon Acceptance.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 14

THE “WHITEBOOK”

45. Final Environmental Document - The CEQA document issued for the Project,

such as a certified environmental impact reports, mitigated negative

declarations (MNDs), negative declarations, or exemptions.

46. Final Payment - The last payment for the Contract made to you, excluding

Retention.

47. Holiday - Holidays observed by the City are listed below:

Holiday Observed On

New Year’s Day January 1

Martin Luther King Day 3rd Monday in January

Presidents’ Day 3rd Monday in February

Caesar Chavez Day March 31

Memorial Day Last Monday in May

Independence Day July 4

Labor Day 1st Monday in September

Veteran’s Day November 11

Thanksgiving Day 4th Thursday in November

Christmas Day December 25

If any Holiday listed falls on a Saturday, the Saturday and the preceding Friday

are both legal Holidays. If the Holiday falls on a Sunday, both Sunday and the

following Monday shall be legal Holidays. Unless specified otherwise in the

Contract Documents or authorized by the Engineer, do not work on

Holidays.

48. House Connection Sewer - A sewer, within a public street or right-of-way,

proposed to connect any parcel, lot, or part of a lot with a mainline sewer.

49. Limited Notice To Proceed (LNTP) - A written notice given from the City that

authorizes you to start a limited amount of Work that, as described in the

notice, is not Construction Work.

50. Luminaire - The lamp housing including the optical and socket assemblies

(and ballast if so specified).

51. Mast Arm - The structural member, or bracket, which, when mounted on a

Standard, supports the luminaire.

52. Mayor or Designee - The City’s Mayor or a designated representative.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 15

THE “WHITEBOOK”

53. Modification - Includes Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements. A

Modification may only be issued after the effective date of the Contract.

54. Night Work - See Working Night.

55. Normal Working Hours - Normal Working Hour core periods shall be 7:00 AM

to 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday, inclusive. Saturdays, Sundays, and City

Holidays are excluded. Unless otherwise specified, on the Traffic Control

Permits, Normal Working Hours in the are defined as 8:30 AM to 3:30 PM.

56. Notice of Award - The written notice by the City to the successful Bidder

stating that, upon its compliance with the required conditions, the City shall

execute the Contract.

57. Notice of Completion (NOC) - A document recorded with the County of San

Diego to signify that the Contract Work has been completed and accepted by

the City.

58. Notice to Proceed (NTP) - A written notice given by the City to you fixing the

date on which the Contract time shall start.

59. Occupancy – When the Owner deems a building is ready for use, the Owner

will issue a certificate of Occupancy in writing.

60. Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Instructions - Documents published

by manufactures of pre-manufactured products describing operation,

maintenance, and any other action that shall be performed by the City as a

condition for the manufacture to honor the specified warranty.

61. Owner - See City.

62. Party or Parties - The City, you, or both, their respective permitted successors

or assigns, and any other future signatories to the Contract.

63. Person - Any individual, firm, association, partnership, corporation, trust, joint

venture, or other legal entity.

64. Plans - The Drawings, profiles, cross sections, Standard Plans, Working

Drawings, and Shop Drawings, or reproductions thereof, approved by the

Engineer, which show the location, character, dimensions, or details of the Work.

65. Prime Contractor - See Contractor.

66. Private Contract - Work subject to City inspection, control, and approval,

involving private funds, not administered by the City.

67. Private Development Projects - See Private Contract.

68. Project - The object of the Contract to be designed, constructed, or both by

you as specified, described, and shown in the Contract Documents.

69. Project Site (Site) - Areas where the Work is performed pursuant to the Contract.

70. Proposal - See Bid.

71. Punchlist - A list of items of Work or corrections generated after a Walk-through

that is conducted when you consider that the Work and Services are complete,

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 16

THE “WHITEBOOK”

71. Punchlist - A list of items of Work or corrections generated after a Walk-through

that is conducted when you consider that the Work and Services are complete,

and as verified by the Owner. The Punchlist may be completed in phases if defined

in the Contract.

72. Quality Control Standards and Procedures - The standards and procedures

that are stated in a written manual that can be furnished to the Engineer upon

request. The standards and procedures are followed by the Supplier in the

production of materials supplied to the Work site.

73. Red-lines - Plans with annotations of changes made during construction to

reflect the actual product built during construction whether concealed or

visible.

74. Reference Specifications - The latest edition, including amendments, in effect

as of the date of advertisement of the Contract or issuing the permit, unless

otherwise specified, of the following:

a) Bulletins

b) Standards

c) Rules

d) Methods of analysis or testing

e) Codes

f) Installation instructions

g) Specifications of other agencies, engineering societies, manufactures,

or industrial associations referred to in the Contract Documents.

75. Retention - The amount withheld from the money due to you in accordance

with 7-3.2, “Partial and Final Payment”.

76. Roadway - The portion of a street reserved for vehicular use.

77. Samples - Physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment, or

workmanship and which establish standards that the Work shall be evaluated.

78. Schedule - A Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule prepared by you in

accordance with 6-1, “CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF

THE WORK” and accepted by the Engineer.

79. Scope of Work (SOW) - Labor, materials, equipment, facilities, and services

required to be performed or provided by you to complete the entire Project or

the various separately identifiable parts of the Project pursuant to the

provisions of the Contract Documents.

80. Services - Professional services such as design, engineering, and construction

management of the Project that are required in accordance with the Contract

Documents. Services are included in the Work.

81. Service Connection - All or any portion of the conduit cable or duct, including

meter, between a utility distribution line and an individual consumer.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 17

THE “WHITEBOOK”

82. Service Lateral Connection - The interface of the House Connection Sewer

with the host pipe.

83. Separate Contractors - Those individuals or entities that have entered into

arrangements with the City for the provision of labor, materials, or other services

in connection with the Project who are not under contract with you.

84. Sewer - Any conduit intended for the reception and transfer of sewage and

fluid industrial waste.

85. Shop Drawings - Drawings showing details of manufactured or assembled

products proposed to be incorporated into the Work.

86. Signal Pre-Check - The procedure that the City uses to evaluate traffic signal

systems prior to Signal Turn-On and generating a Punchlist.

87. Signal Turn-On - The day the City activates new traffic signals.

88. Special Provisions - Additions and revisions to the Standard Specifications

setting forth conditions and requirements peculiar to the Work. Examples

include the City’s EOCP Requirements, provisions for Design-Build and Job

Order Contracting Contracts, funding agency provisions, technical

specifications prepared in CSI format, the “WHITEBOOK” (City Supplement),

and Supplementary Special Provisions (SSP).

89. Specifications - Standard Specifications, Reference Specifications, Special

Provisions, and specifications in Change Orders or Supplemental Agreements

between you and the City.

90. Standard (Signal and Lighting) - The shaft or pole used to support street

lighting luminaires, traffic signal heads, mast arms, and etc.

91. Standard Plans - Details of standard structures, devices, or instructions

referred to on the Plans or in the Specifications by title or number.

92. Standard Specifications - The Standard Specifications for Public Works

Construction (SSPWC), the “GREENBOOK”.

93. State - State of California.

94. Stipulated Unit Price - Unit prices established by the City in the Contract

Documents.

95. Storm Drain - Any conduit and appurtenances intended for the reception and

transfer of storm water.

96. Street - Any road, highway, parkway, freeway, alley, walk, or way.

97. Subbase - A layer of specified material of planned thickness between the base

and the subgrade.

98. Subcontractor - An individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract

with you or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the

Work.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 18

THE “WHITEBOOK”

99. Subgrade - For roadways, that portion on which pavement, surfacing, base,

subbase, or a layer of other material is placed. For structures, the soil prepared

to support a structure.

100. Substantial Completion – When all Contract Work is deemed complete by the

Contractor in writing, and as verified by the Owner. Substantial Completion

may be completed in phases if defined in the Contract.

101. Supervision - Supervision, where used to indicate supervision by the

Engineer, shall mean the performance of obligations, and the exercise of

rights, specifically imposed upon and granted to the City in becoming a party to

the Contract. Except as specifically stated herein, supervision by the City shall not

mean active and direct superintendence of details of the Work.

102. Supplemental Agreement – An additional agreement to the Contract

Documents signed by you and the City.

103. Surety - The company who issued the performance and payment bond.

104. Utility - Tracks, overhead or underground wires, pipelines, conduits, ducts,

structures, sewers, or storm drains owned, operated, or maintained in or

across a public right of way or private easement.

105. Walk-through - An inspection the City uses to verify the completion of the

Project or phase of the Project and to generate a Punchlist prior to Acceptance.

106. Work - That which is proposed to be constructed or done under the Contract

or permit, including the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and

services.

107. Working Day - Any day other than Holidays, Saturdays, and Sundays.

108. Working Night (Night Work) - Night Work is allowed only on Sunday through

Thursday.

109. Working Drawings - Drawings showing details not shown on the Plans which

are required to be designed by you.

110. Work Site - See Project Site (Site).

1-3.2 Common Usage. ADD the following:

1. AML ........................ Approved Material List

2. CADD ..................... Computer Aided Design and Drafting

3. CA MUTCD ............ California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices

4. CCT ........................ Correlated Color Temperature

5. CEQA ..................... California Environmental Quality Act

6. CFR ......................... Code of Federal Regulations

7. CIPM ...................... Cured-In-Place-Manhole

8. CMS ....................... Content Management System Database

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 19

THE “WHITEBOOK”

9. CNC ........................ Computer Numerical Control

10. CRI .......................... Color Rendering Index

11. CSA ........................ Canadian Standards Association

12. DBE ........................ Disadvantaged Business Enterprise

13. DCE ........................ Data Computer Equipment

14. DG .......................... Decomposed Granite

15. DVBE ...................... Disabled Veteran Business Enterprise

16. DWT ....................... Detectable Warning Tiles

17. EBE ......................... Emerging Business Enterprise

18. ELBE ....................... Emerging Local Business Enterprise

19. EOCP ...................... Equal Opportunity Contracting Program

20. ESL ......................... Environmentally Sensitive Lands

21. ESO ........................ Electrical Service Orders

22. FRP ......................... Fiberglass Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic

23. GFE......................... Good Faith Effort

24. GMT ....................... Greenwich Mean Time

25. GPS ........................ Global Positioning System

26. IDA ......................... International Dark Sky Association

27. IP ............................ Ingress Protection

28. LCD ........................ Liquid Crystal Display

29. LD ........................... Laser Diode

30. LER ......................... Luminaire Efficiency Rating

31. MBE ....................... Minority Business Enterprise

32. MDFT ..................... Minimum Dry Film Thickness

33. MHPA .................... Multiple Habitat Planning Area

34. MHs ....................... Manholes

35. MIL ......................... Military

36. MJ .......................... Mechanical Joint

37. M&M ...................... Maintenance and Monitoring

38. MMC ...................... Mitigation and Monitoring Coordination

39. MOV ....................... Metal Oxide Varistor

40. NA .......................... Numerical Aperture

41. NC .......................... Not connected

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 20

THE “WHITEBOOK”

42. NEPA ...................... National Environmental Policy Act of 1969

43. NEXT ...................... Near End Crosstalk

44. NCHRP ................... National Cooperative Highway Research Program

45. NOC ....................... Notice of Completion

46. NTP ........................ Notice to Proceed

47. OC .......................... On Center

48. ODP ....................... Open Drip Proof

49. ONFR ..................... Optical Fiber Nonconductive Riser

50. OTDR ..................... Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

51. PB ........................... Pull Box

52. PCMS ..................... Portable Changeable Message Signs

53. PCU ........................ Photoelectric Control Unit

54. PEP ......................... Plant Establishment Period

55. PIC .......................... Polyethylene Insulated Cable

56. RFP ......................... Request for Proposal

57. RPMS ..................... Rubber Polymer Modified Slurry

58. SIC .......................... Standard Industry Classification

59. SLBE ....................... Small Local Business Enterprise

60. SMS ........................ Short Message Service

61. SMTP ..................... Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

62. SOW ....................... Statement of Work

63. SOV ........................ Schedule of Values

64. SPDT ...................... Single Pole Double Throw

65. SSD ........................ Surge Suppression Devices

66. TDR ........................ Time Domain Reflectometer

67. TEES ....................... Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications

68. TFFN ...................... Thermoplastic Flexible Fixture Wire Nylon Jacketed

69. TIG ......................... Tungsten Inert Gas

70. UF ........................... Underground Feeder

71. UPRR ...................... Union Pacific Railroad Company

72. VAC ........................ Volts AC

73. VPC ........................ Vitrified Polymer Composite

74. WBE ....................... Women Business Enterprise

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 21

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1-3.3 Institutions. ADD the following:

1. AMTRACK .............. American Track National Railroad Passenger Corp.

2. BNSF ...................... Burlington Northern Santa Fe Railway

3. DSD ........................ Development Services Department

4. IPCEA ..................... Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association

5. IES .......................... Illuminating Engineering Society (Photometric Data)

6. ISO ......................... International Organization for Standardization

7. MTS ........................ San Diego Metropolitan Transit System

8. NACE ...................... National Association of Corrosion Engineers

9. NAFP ...................... National Association of Pipe Fabricators

10. NCTD ..................... North County Transit District

11. NFPA ...................... National Fire Protection Association

12. PCI .......................... Prestressed Concrete Institute

13. PUD ........................ Public Utilities Department

14. SANDAG ................ San Diego Association of Governments

15. SD&AE ................... San Diego & Arizona Eastern Railroad

16. SDTI ....................... San Diego Trolley, Inc.

17. SDUSD ................... San Diego Unified School District

18. UPRR ...................... Union Pacific Railroad Company

1-6.2 Subcontractor Listing. ADD the following:

1. The use of Subcontractors in no way relieves you of any obligations or

responsibilities under the Contract.

2. For Subcontractor Extra Work, you shall submit Form CC10, “CONTRACT

CHANGE ORDER (CCO)” with each CCO proposal. Form CC10 is available for

download from the City’s EOCP internet site: http://www.sandiego.gov/eoc/

1-7.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1-7.1 Standard Contract Provisions.

1-7.1.1 Successor's Obligations.

1. All grants, covenants, provisions and claims, rights, powers, privileges and

abilities contained in the Contract Documents shall be read and held as made

by and with, and granted to and imposed upon, you, the City, and your and the

City’s respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 22

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1-7.1.2 Waiver of Legal Rights.

1. The City’s failure to insist, in any one or more instances, upon the performance

of any provision of the Contract, or to exercise any right therein, shall not be

construed as a waiver or relinquishment of such provisions or rights.

2. Any waiver of any breach of the Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of

any other or subsequent breach.

3. Any waiver the City issues to any provision of the Contract shall only be

effective if it is agreed upon in writing by the City and if it is specific to the

particular matter concerned.

1-7.1.3 Requests for Information (RFI).

1. Should you discover a conflict, omission, errors in the Contract Documents,

differences with existing field conditions, or have any questions concerning

interpretation or clarification of Contract Documents, or when you propose

deviations to the standards or design, you shall submit a Request for

Information (RFI) to the City regarding your question or clarification within 1

Working Day.

2. Your RFI shall meet the following requirements:

a) All RFIs, whether by you or your Subcontractor or supplier at any tier,

shall be submitted by you to the City.

b) RFIs shall be numbered sequentially.

c) You shall clearly and concisely set forth the single issue for which

interpretation or clarification is sought, indicate Specification Section

numbers, Contract Drawing numbers, and details, or other items

involved, and state why a response is required from the City.

d) RFIs shall be submitted within 1 Working Day in order that they may

be adequately researched and answered before the response affects

any critical activity of the Work.

e) Should you believe that a response to an RFI causes a change to the

requirements of the Contract, you shall, before proceeding, give

written notice to the City, indicating that you believe that City response

to the RFI to be a Change Order. Failure to give such written notice

within 5 Working Days of receipt of the City’s response to the RFI shall

waive your right to seek additional time or cost.

3. The City will respond to RFIs within 5 Working Days unless the City notifies

you in writing that a response will take longer. The 5 Working Days shall begin

when the RFI is received and dated by the City. Responses from the City will

not change any requirement of the Contract unless so noted by the City in the

response to the RFI. The City will not issue a Change Order for Extra Work or

additional time when the issue raised in the RFI was due to your fault, neglect,

or any unauthorized deviations from the project design or specifications.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 23

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. If you proceed in resolving a conflict, omission, or any error in the Contract

Documents without sending the City an RFI in accordance with the

requirements stated above, the City may require you to remove such work at

your cost or back charge You the cost to remove this work.

1-7.1.4 Assignment to Awarding Body.

1. In accordance with §7103.5(b) of the California Public Contract Code, you and

your Subcontractors shall conform to the following requirements:

a) In entering into a public works contract or a Subcontract to supply goods,

services, or materials pursuant to a public works contract, you or your

Subcontractor offer and agree to assign to the awarding body all rights,

title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under §4 of the

Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2

(commencing with §16700) of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and

Professions Code) arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials

pursuant to the public works contract or the Subcontract.

b) This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the

awarding body tenders to you, without further acknowledgment by the

Parties.

1-7.2 Contract Bonds. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Before execution of the Contract, file payment and performance bonds with

the City to be approved by the Board in the amounts and for the purposes

noted. Bonds shall be executed by a responsible surety as follows:

a) If the Work is being funded with state or local money, consistent with

California Code of Civil Procedure §995.670, the Surety shall be an

“admitted surety” authorized by the State of California Department of

Insurance to transact surety insurance in the State.

b) If the Work is being funded with federal money, the Surety shall be

listed in the U.S. Treasury Department Circular 570 and shall be in

conformance with the specified Underwriting Limitations.

2. Each bond shall incorporate, by reference, the Contract and shall be signed by

both the Bidder and the Surety. The signature of the authorized agent of the

Surety shall be notarized. You shall provide the following bonds:

a) For Contracts less than $10,000:

i. A “Payment Bond” (Materials and Labor Bond) is optional. If

no bond is submitted, no payment shall be made until 35

Calendar Days after Acceptance and any lien requirements

have been fulfilled. If a bond is submitted, progress payments

shall be made in accordance with these Specifications.

ii. A “Faithful Performance Bond” is not required.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 24

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) For Contracts over $10,000 and less than $25,000:

i. A “Payment Bond” (Materials and Labor Bond) is optional. If

no bond is submitted, progress payments may be made with a

minimum of 20% retention. If a bond is submitted, progress

payments shall be made in accordance with these

Specifications.

ii. A “Faithful Performance Bond” is not required.

c) For Contracts over $25,000 and less than $100,000:

i. A “Payment Bond” (Materials and Labor Bond) for not less than

100% of the Contract Price to satisfy claims of material

Suppliers and of mechanics and laborers employed on the

Work. You shall maintain the bond in full force and effect until

Acceptance and until all claims for materials and labor are paid

and shall otherwise comply with the Government Code.

ii. A “Faithful Performance Bond” is not required.

d) For Contracts over $100,000:

i. A “Payment Bond” (Materials and Labor Bond) for 100% of the

Contract Price to satisfy claims of material Suppliers and of

mechanics and laborers employed on the Work. You shall

maintain the bond in full force and effect until Acceptance and

until all claims for materials and labor are paid and shall

otherwise comply with the Government Code.

ii. A “Faithful Performance Bond” for 100% of the Contract Price to

guarantee faithful performance of Work, within the time

prescribed and in a manner satisfactory to the City, that materials

and workmanship shall be free from original or developed

defects.

e) For Contracts over $100,000 which include Community Development

Block Grant (CDBG) - HUD Program Funds:

i. A “Payment Bond” (Material and Labor Bond) for 100% of the

Contract Price to satisfy claims of material Suppliers and of

mechanics and laborers employed on the Work. You shall

maintain the bond in full force and effect until the Acceptance and

until all claims for materials and labor are paid and shall

otherwise comply with the Government Code.

ii. A “Faithful Performance Bond” for 100% of the Contract Price

to guarantee faithful performance of Work, within the time

prescribed and in a manner satisfactory to the City, that materials

and workmanship shall be free from original or developed

defects.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 25

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Should any bond become insufficient, renew the bond within 10 Days after

receiving notice from the City. Should any surety at any time be unsatisfactory to

the Board, notice to that effect shall be given. No further payments shall be

deemed due or shall be made under the Contract until a new surety qualifies and

is accepted.

4. Changes in the Work or extensions of time, made pursuant to the Contract, shall

in no way release you or the Surety from its obligations. Notice of such changes

or extensions shall be waived by the Surety.

5. The bond shall remain in effect until the end of warranty period set forth in

the Contract Documents.

6. If the Surety on any bond furnished by you is declared bankrupt, becomes

insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part

of the Project is located, immediately notify the Engineer and immediately

substitute another bond and surety acceptable to the City.

7. You shall require the Surety to mail its standard “Bond Status” form to the

Engineer at the following address:

Deputy Director

Construction Management and Field Engineering Division

9573 Chesapeake Drive San Diego, CA 92123

ADD:

1-7.2.1 Payment.

1. The Bid item for “Bonds (Payment and Performance)” includes full

compensation for actual costs of payment and performance bonds. You may

submit a request for payment of actual invoiced costs up to the bid amount,

but not to exceed 2.5% of the Contract Price, no less than 10 Working Days

after the award of the Contract.

2. If the Bid item for “Bonds (Payment and Performance)” exceeds actual invoiced

costs, any such differential amount up to the bid amount shall be paid as a

part of the Final Payment.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 26

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF THE WORK

2-1 WORK TO BE DONE. ADD the following:

1. Where approval or acceptance by the City is required, you shall understand it

to be a general approval only and that it does not relieve you from your

responsibility for complying with all applicable laws, codes, and best industry

practices.

2. In accordance with the provisions of California Law, you shall possess or

require your Subcontractor(s) to possess valid appropriate license(s) for the

Work being performed as conveyed in the bidding documents.

2-2 PERMITS. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

2-2 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES.

1. You shall obtain and pay for all business taxes, permits, and fees required for

constructing the Project and licenses and inspections necessary for the proper

execution and completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise in the

Contract Documents.

a) To the extent that there is a change in the type or cost of any of such

permits, fees, licenses, or inspection occurring after Award of Contract,

there shall be an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price on

account of such change under the Extra Work provisions.

b) You shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws.

You are not entitled to damages or additional payment for delays

attributable to the acquisition of permits.

c) You shall pay the City for regulatory fees, fines, or penalties imposed

on the City arising from your failure to complete the Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

2-2.1 Building Permits.

1. You shall obtain the required building permits from DSD. Any prior approval

obtained for the Plans shall not in any way waive this requirement.

2. Request inspections in accordance with the building codes in effect on the

permitted plans and by DSD. Any Work performed without the benefit of the

required permit and subsequent inspection shall be removed and replaced at

the discretion of the City Building Inspector at no additional cost.

2-2.2 Caltrans Encroachment Permit.

1. Unless specified otherwise, the City has applied for the Caltrans

Encroachment Permit.

a) You shall pay for and secure the permit prior to construction.

b) You shall arrange and pay for inspection as required by Caltrans.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 27

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. You are solely responsible for permit processing delays to the Contract Time

that result from incomplete or inaccurate information provided by you to the

City or Caltrans.

2-2.3 Payment.

1. The payment for procuring Building Permits shall be included in the Allowance

Bid item for “Building Permits”.

2. When provided, the Allowance Bid item for “Caltrans Encroachment Permit

Submittal” shall include the payment for applying and obtaining the Caltrans

Encroachment Permit and shall include costs for preparing plans and

addressing Caltrans comments.

2-3 RIGHT-OF-WAY. ADD the following:

1. You shall be responsible for coordinating with property owners on the timing

of accessing private property when the City has already obtained rights of

entry. You shall protect any private improvements.

2-5.2 Temporary Utility Services. ADD the following:

1. You shall provide and pay for all electrical, gas, and water required for

construction and maintenance activities until Acceptance.

ADD:

2-5.2.1 Water for Construction Purposes.

1. You shall purchase all water for construction such as water used for initial

filling and final flushing of new pipeline, Site maintenance, and maintenance

of the vegetation and landscaping items of the Work.

2. You shall use the 2.5-inch (63.5 mm) fire hydrant port.

3. You shall obtain a meter and comply with the Fire Hydrant Meter Policy, Water

Department Instruction, Department Instruction #55.27, dated April 21, 2000,

that will be attached to the Contract. Violation of these requirements shall

be subject to fines or penalties pursuant to the City municipal code, §§67.15

and 67.37.

ADD:

2-5.2.2 Payment.

1. Providing and paying for all electrical, gas, and water required for construction

and maintenance activities until Acceptance shall be included in the Contract

Price.

2-6 CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. ADD the following:

1. Any plan or method of Work suggested to you by the City, but not specified or

required by the Contract or Change Order, which is adopted or followed by

you in whole or in part shall be done at your sole risk and responsibility.

2. The Contract Price is not subject to adjustment for any type of tax increases

after the Award.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 28

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

2-6.1 Cost Reduction Proposal.

1. You may submit to the Engineer in writing, proposals for modifying the Plans,

Specifications, or other requirements of the Contract for the sole purpose of

reducing the total cost of construction.

2. The cost reduction proposal shall not impair, in any manner, the essential

functions or characteristics of the Project such as service life, economy of

operation, ease of maintenance, desired appearance, or design and safety

standards.

3. Include the following information in the cost reduction proposal:

a) A description of both the existing Contract requirements for

performing the Work and the proposed changes.

b) An itemization of the Contract requirements that shall be changed if

the proposal is adopted.

c) A detailed estimate of the cost of performing the Work under the

existing Contract and under the proposed change.

d) A statement of the time within which the Engineer shall make a

decision.

e) The Contract items of Work affected by the proposed changes,

including any quantity variation attributable thereto.

4. This subsection does not require the Engineer to consider any cost reduction

proposal. The City shall not be liable to you for not approving or acting upon

any cost reduction proposal you submitted nor for any delays to the Work

attributable to the proposal.

5. If a cost reduction proposal is similar to the information included in the

Contract Documents or adopted by the City after the advertisement for the

Contract, the Engineer will not accept such proposal and reserves the right to

make such changes without compensation to you under the provisions of this

subsection.

6. You shall continue to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements

of the Contract until a Change Order incorporating the cost reduction proposal

has been issued.

7. The Engineer is the sole judge of the acceptability of a cost reduction proposal

and the estimated net savings. In determining the estimated net savings, the

City has the right to disregard the Contract Bid prices if, in the judgment of the

Engineer, such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value of the Work

to be performed or to be deleted.

8. The City reserves the right to require you to share in the City’s costs of

investigating your cost reduction proposal. When this is required, you shall

indicate your acceptance in writing allowing the City to deduct amounts

payable to you.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 29

THE “WHITEBOOK”

9. If the Engineer accepts your cost reduction proposal in whole or in part, the

Engineer shall issue a Change Order to incorporate the changes in the Plans

and Specifications which are necessary to permit the cost reduction proposal

or such part of it as has been accepted to be put into effect. If the Engineer’s

approval is conditional, the Change Order shall include any conditions upon

which the Engineer's approval is based.

10. The Change Order also includes the estimated net savings in the cost of

performing the Work due to the accepted cost reduction proposal and

provides that the Contract cost be adjusted by crediting the City with 50% of

estimated net savings amount.

11. The Contract Time shall not be extended by the acceptance of the cost

reduction proposal and the performance of the Work unless specified

otherwise in the Change Order.

12. The amount specified as payable to you in the Change Order is full

compensation for the cost reduction proposal and the performance of the

Work.

13. The City expressly reserves the right to adopt a cost reduction proposal for

general use on contracts administered by the City when it determines that said

proposal is suitable for application to other contracts. When an accepted cost

reduction proposal is adopted for general use, only the Contractor who first

submitted such proposal shall be eligible for compensation subject to this

subsection, and in that case, only for contracts awarded prior to submission

of the accepted cost reduction proposal.

14. The cost reduction proposals identical or similar to previously submitted

proposals shall be eligible for consideration and compensation under the

provisions of this subsection if the identical or similar previously submitted

proposals were not adopted for general application to other contracts

administered by the City.

15. Subject to the provisions contained herein, the City or any other public agency

shall have the right to use all or any part of any submitted cost reduction

proposal without obligation or compensation of any kind to you.

16. You shall bear all costs to revise bonds for the Project to include the cost

reduction incentive proposal Work.

2-7.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The Engineer may substitute specific sites for asphalt overlay, slurry seal, or

concrete ramp and sidewalk replacement due to utility or construction

conflicts or urgent community needs. The Engineer will adjust the location list

provided in the Contract Documents as needed.

2-8 EXTRA WORK. ADD the following:

1. Any request by you for Extra Work shall be in writing to the Engineer and shall

include itemized estimates. You shall fully itemize your Extra Work cost

estimates such as labor and payroll costs, quantities, crew composition,

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 30

THE “WHITEBOOK”

production rates, material costs, Subcontractor and Supplier costs, equipment

costs, supplemental costs, and time impact.

2. Compensation for “Time-and-Material” emergency Contracts:

a) You will be compensated for charges directly associated with the

project. staff

b) Any invoiced off site work shall include a summary of work.

c) Markup for off site work shall be the same as on site work.

ADD:

2-10.1 Claims.

1. A Claim is a written demand by you that seeks an adjustment in the Contract

Price, Contract Time, or other relief associated with a dispute arising under or

relating to the Contract, including a breach of any provision thereof. A voucher,

invoice, or other routine request for payment is not a Claim.

2. A Claim shall conform to these specifications and may be considered after the

City has previously denied a request by you for a Change Order seeking the

demanded relief.

3. You shall submit a Claim to the Engineer if a dispute occurs that arises from or

relates to the Contract. The Claim shall seek all relief to which you assert you

are entitled as a result of the event(s) giving rise to the dispute. Your failure to

process a Claim in accordance with these specifications shall constitute a

waiver of all relief associated with the dispute. Claims are subject to 6-10,

“Right to Audit”.

4. You shall continue to perform the Services and Work and shall maintain the

Schedule during any dispute proceedings. The Engineer will continue to make

payments for undisputed Services and Work.

5. The City’s Claims process specified herein shall not relieve you of your

statutory obligations to present claims prior to any action under the California

Government Code.

2-10.1.1 Initiation of Claim.

1. You shall promptly, but no later than 30 Days after the event(s) giving rise to

the Claim, deliver the Claim to the Engineer.

2. You shall not process a Claim unless the Engineer has previously denied a

request by you for a Change Order that sought the relief to be pursued in the

claim.

2-10.1.1.1 Claim Certification Submittal.

1. If your Claim seeks an increase in the Contract Price, the Contract Time, or

both, submit with the Claim an affidavit certifying the following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 31

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) The Claim is made in good faith and covers all costs and delays to

which you are entitled as a result of the event(s) giving rise to the

Claim.

b) The amount claimed accurately reflects the adjustments in the

Contract Price, the Contract Time, or both to which you believe you are

entitled.

c) All supporting costs and pricing data are current, accurate, and

complete to the best of your knowledge. The cost breakdown per item

of Work shall be supplied.

d) You shall ensure that the affidavit is executed by an official who has

the authority to legally bind you.

2-10.1.2 Initial Determination.

1. The Engineer will respond in writing to your Claim within 30 Days of receipt of

the Claim.

2-10.1.3 Settlement Meeting.

1. If you disagree with the Initial Determination, you shall request a Settlement

Meeting within 30 Days. Upon receipt of this request, the Engineer will

schedule the Settlement Meeting within 15 Working Days.

2-10.1.4 City’s Final Determination.

1. If a settle agreement is not reached, the City shall make a written Final

Determination within 10 Working Days after the Settlement Meeting.

2. If you disagree with the City’s Final Determination, notify the Engineer in

writing of your objection within 15 Working Days after receipt of the written

determination and file a “Request for Mediation” in accordance with 2-10.2,

“Dispute Resolution Process”.

3. Failure to give notice of objection within the 15 Working Days period shall

waive your right to pursue the Claim.

2-10.1.5 Mandatory Assistance.

1. If a third party dispute, litigation, or both arises out of or relates in any way to

the Services provided under the Contract, upon the City’s request, you shall

agree to assist in resolving the dispute or litigation. Your assistance includes,

but is not limited to the following:

a) Providing professional consultations.

b) Attending mediations, arbitrations, depositions, trials, or any event

related to the dispute resolution and litigation.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 32

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2-10.1.5.1 Compensation for Mandatory Assistance.

1. The City will reimburse you for reasonable fees and expenses incurred by you

for any required assistance rendered in accordance with 2-10.1.5, “Mandatory

Assistance” as Extra Work.

2. The Engineer will determine whether these fees and expenses were necessary

due to your conduct or failure to act.

3. If the Engineer determines that the basis of the dispute or litigation in which

these fees and expenses were incurred were the result of your conduct or your

failure to act in part or in whole, you shall reimburse the City for any payments

made for these fees and expenses.

4. Reimbursement may be through any legal means necessary, including the

City’s withholding of your payment.

ADD:

2-10.2 Dispute Resolution Process.

2-10.2.1 Mandatory Non-binding Mediation.

1. If a dispute arises out of or relates to the Contract, or the breach thereof, and

if said dispute cannot be settled through contract provisions provided for

claim settlement or negotiations, the parties agree to first endeavor to settle

the dispute in an amicable manner, using mandatory mediation under the

Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association

before having recourse in a court of law.

2. To initiate mediation, the initiating party shall serve a Request for Mediation

at the American Arbitration Association (AAA).

2-10.2.2 Mandatory Mediation Costs.

1. The expenses of witnesses for either side shall be paid by the party producing

such witnesses. All other expenses of the mediation, including required

traveling and other expenses of the mediator and the cost of any proofs or

expert advice produced at the direct request of the mediator, shall be borne

equally by the parties, unless they agree otherwise.

2-10.2.3 Selection of Mediator.

1. A single mediator, knowledgeable in construction aspects and acceptable to

both parties, shall be used to mediate the dispute.

2. If AAA is used, the initiating party shall concurrently file with AAA a “Request

for Mediation” along with the appropriate fees, a copy of requested mediators

marked in preference order, and a preference for available dates.

3. If AAA is selected to coordinate the mediation (Administrator), within 10

Working Days from the receipt of the initiating party’s Request for Mediation,

the opposing party shall file the following:

a) A copy of the list of the preferred mediators listed in preference order

after striking any mediators to which they have any objection.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 33

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) A preference for available dates.

c) Appropriate fees.

4. If the parties cannot agree on a mediator, then each party shall select a

mediator and those mediators shall select the neutral third party to mediate

the matter.

2-10.2.4 Conduct of Mediation Sessions.

1. Mediation hearings shall be conducted in an informal manner and discovery

shall not be allowed.

2. Discussions, statements, and/or admissions shall be confidential to the

proceedings and shall not be used for any other purpose as it relates to the

party’s legal position. The parties may agree to exchange any information they

deem necessary.

3. Both parties shall have an authorized representative attend the mediation.

Each representative shall have the authority to recommend entering into a

settlement. Either party may have attorney(s), witnesses, or expert(s) present.

Either party may request a list of witnesses and notifications of whether

attorney(s) shall be present.

4. Any resulting agreements from mediation shall be documented in writing.

Mediation results and documentation, by themselves, shall be “non-binding”

and inadmissible for any purpose in any legal proceeding, unless such

admission is otherwise agreed upon in writing by both parties. Mediators shall

not be subject to any subpoena or liability and their actions shall not be subject

to discovery.

ADD:

2-10.3 Forum for Litigation.

1. It is the express intention that all legal actions and proceedings related to the

Contract or Agreement with the City or to any rights or any relationship

between the parties arising therefrom shall be solely and exclusively initiated

and maintained in courts of the State of California for the County of San Diego.

ADD:

2-10.4 Pre-judgment Interest.

1. The parties stipulate that if a judgment is entered against a party for breaching

this Contract, the pre-judgment interest shall be two percent (2%) per annum.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 34

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 3 – CONTROL OF THE WORK

3-3 SUBCONTRACTORS. ADD the following:

1. You shall incorporate these Specifications in your subcontracts for the Work

being performed by your Subcontractor.

2. You shall obtain or require that each Subcontractor obtains insurance policies

in accordance with 5-4, “INSURANCE” which shall be kept in full force and effect

for the duration of the Contract and in any attached supplemental

agreements.

3. In any dispute between you and your Subcontractors, the City shall not be made

a party to any judicial or administrative proceeding to resolve the dispute.

4. You shall ensure that your Subcontractors are appropriately licensed for the

duration of the Work that is performed under the subcontracts in accordance

with 2-1, “WORK TO BE DONE”. In the event the Subcontractor is not properly

licensed, you shall cease payment to the Subcontractor for all Work performed

when the Subcontractor was not properly licensed. You shall return to the City

any payment you made to a Subcontractor for Work performed when the

Subcontractor was not licensed.

5. Where the Contract Documents require that a particular product be installed

or applied by an applicator approved by the manufacturer, ensure the

Subcontractor or Supplier employed for such Work is approved by the

manufacturer.

6. When a Subcontractor fails to prosecute a portion of the Work in a manner

satisfactory to the City, you shall remove such Subcontractor immediately

upon written request of the City, and shall request approval of a replacement

Subcontractor to perform the Work in accordance with California Public

Contract Code (PCC), Subletting and Subcontracting, Section 4107, at no added

cost to the City.

3-4 AUTHORITY OF THE BOARD AND THE ENGINEER. DELETE in its entirety and

SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The City has the final authority

in all matters affecting the Work. Within the

scope of the Contract, the Resident Engineer has the authority to

enforce

compliance with the Plans and Specifications. You shall promptly comply with

instructions from the Resident Engineer.

2. The decision of the Resident Engineer is final and binding on all questions

relating to: quantities; acceptability of material, equipment, or work;

execution, progress or sequence of work; requests for information (RFI), and

interpretation of the Plans, Specifications, or other Contract Documents. This

shall be precedent to any payment under the Contract.

3. The Resident Engineer shall be the single point of contact and shall be included

in all communications.

3-5 INSPECTION. ADD the following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 35

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1. The City may utilize consultants to assist the Engineer during construction in

observing your performance. The consultant is for the purpose of assisting the

Engineer and shall not be confused with a building inspector with the City or

with a Special Inspector.

2. Code compliance testing (including Special inspection and all Geotechnical

requirements) and inspections required by codes or ordinances is your

responsibility.

3. Your quality control testing and inspections is your responsibility. Coordinate

and schedule all inspections and tests. Give the Engineer notice of when and

where tests and inspections are to be made by others. Give at least 5 Working

Days of notice for offsite inspection. Notices are not deemed effective until the

Engineer has responded and agreed to your schedule.

4. The City shall make any inspections and tests as the City deems necessary to

ensure the Work is accomplished in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents (other than inspections for Work performed in

accordance with a permit). You are responsible for the inspection of all Work

performed in accordance with a permit.

5. Provide access in accordance with Cal-OSHA Standards where necessary.

6. Remove and replace any items of Work performed without the required

permit. For required subsequent inspection, remove and replace Work at the

discretion of Engineer at no additional cost to the City. Inspection of the Work

does not relieve you of full compliance with the Contract Documents.

7. Do not cover the Work prior to inspection, testing, or approval required by the

Contract Documents, the Engineer’s prior written request, or by other

agencies. If any item of Work is covered prior to obtaining the required

approvals, when requested by the Engineer, uncover the Work for inspection,

testing, and/or approval. Upon successful completion of the inspection,

testing, or approval, cover the Work afterwards again where required. You

bear all direct and indirect costs and damages of such uncovering and re-

covering and are not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or the

Contract Time, unless you have given the Engineer and any other affected

agencies written notice of your intention to cover the Work and the Engineer

has not acted in response to such notice.

8. When specified, make arrangements for tests, inspections, and approvals

with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Engineer,

or with the appropriate public authority. The payment for such tests,

inspections, and approvals are included in the Contract Price.

9. Unless specified otherwise, you shall pay the cost of inspections and tests.

In the event that inspections or tests reveal non-compliance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents, you shall bear the cost of corrective

measures deemed necessary by the Engineer and the cost of the City’s

subsequent re-inspection and re-testing.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 36

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

3-5.1 Remote Control Camera Inspection.

3-5.1.1 General.

1. A time lapse video robotic camera shall be installed on all stationary project

sites and Group Jobs where open trench pipe installation is to take place. A

camera is not required for Operations and Maintenance type projects such as

slurry, overlay, and sidewalk panel replacement. The camera shall be installed

at a location where most construction activity shall be captured and remain

operational throughout the project. The selected location shall be approved

by the Engineer prior to installation.

a) The camera(s) shall be operational during all hours and days when

excavation, pipe installation, and backfill is taking place. Time lapse

video robotic cameras shall provide a clear view of backfill and

compaction operations. For Group Jobs or other linear projects, the

camera shall be mounted on a portable tower or similar device and

repositioned as Work progresses.

b) The camera shall be Heavy Duty Outdoor Vehicle Mounted RobotCam

System manufactured by EarthCam, Inc. or approved equal.

c) The camera shall be removed when installed on permanent project

locations or fixtures. Electrical services shall be deactivated and

properly concealed and mounting hardware shall be removed to the

satisfaction of the Engineer.

3-5.1.2 System Requirements.

1. The camera system shall feature:

a) An outdoor robotic infrared camera system.

b) A compact and rugged PTZ camera designed to endure the harsh

elements from extreme temperatures and caustic environments such

as salt air.

2. The system shall include:

a) A vibration isolation feature, providing jitter-free video for applications

that call for mobility.

b) A heavy-duty camera, video web caster, and matched cellular modem

in a rugged all weather enclosure with 12 VDC Power cord with lugs for

vehicle battery power connection with Fuse/Diode-protected power

cord.

3. The indoor and outdoor robotic camera system shall consist of nitrogen

charged powder coated aluminum housing with an impact resistant viewing

window and fiberglass equipment enclosure.

4. The camera shall have the ability to take still images every 5 minutes and shall

have the ability to provide live video at 1 frame per second (FPS).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 37

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. The camera shall upload the still images over a wireless cellular modem or

hardwire connection to a DSL or cable modem.

6. The content shall be sent to a secure and password protected website with

interface and online software features provided by the vendors as a managed

service.

7. The system shall operate on 12 VDC and shall have a maximum power

consumption of 30 W.

8. The system shall be available with an optional wiper and sun shield.

3-5.1.3 Equipment.

1. The robotic camera shall be a pressurized marine grade robotic outdoor

infrared camera with a remotely controlled focal lens with the following

features:

a) Pan angle range 440°

b) Tilt angle range 240°

c) Max pan speed 135°/s

d) Max tilt speed 50°/s

e) Pan/tilt encoder resolution 0.5

f) Housing material cast aluminum

g) Vibration 3 grms 3 axis, random, 5 to 1000 Hz

h) Temperature -4° F to 158° F (-20° C to 70° C)

i) Mounting quick connect

j) Zoom 26x optical, 12x digital

k) Imaging code color/near infrared

l) Resolution 470NTSC, 460PAL TV Lines

m) Pixel count 680,000 NTSC / 800,000 PAL

n) Dynamic range 50 dB

o) Light sensitivity 0.05 Lux NIR mode

p) Auto features Focus, ISO, iris, shutter, and white balance

q) Optional Infrared camera core 320 x 240

r) Heater built in thermostatically controlled

s) Window impact resistant viewing window

t) Window wiper remotely controlled

u) Sun shield optional

v) Dimensions 6.73 inch (171 mm) W x 7.8 inch (198 mm) H, and 7 inch

(180 mm) in diameter

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 38

THE “WHITEBOOK”

w) Power 12 VDC, 2A peak

x) Weight of 9.04 lbs (4.1kg)

3-5.1.4 Electronics Enclosure.

1. The electronic enclosure shall conform to the following:

a) IP66 fiberglass enclosure.

b) EVDO-RevA cellular modem built in.

c) EarthCam video webcaster built-in.

d) Dimensions: 14.55 inch H x 12.55 inch W x 8.31 inch D (37 cm H x 31.9

cm W x 21.1 cm D).

e) Operational Voltage: 12 VDC.

3-5.1.5 Interface and Online Software.

1. Online interface shall feature the following:

a) Software delivered by vendor as a managed service.

b) Displays agency logo and project name.

c) Capable of viewing live video.

d) Robotic pan, tilt, zoom control of camera system.

e) Calendar based navigation system for selecting specific images.

f) Multifunction images browsing.

g) Record up to 120 hours of video.

h) Share image snapshots, video clips, and entire events seamlessly.

i) A multi-view screen to view all cameras for the Project at the same

time.

j) Graphical mark-up tools for detailing and creating overlays on images.

k) Graphical weather applet displaying 10 points of location weather

data.

l) Share image tools allowing for saving, printing, emailing, and posting

to message boards or mobile devices.

m) Aerial and satellite photography library.

n) Time lapse features that include instant time lapse play back by day,

week, month, or year.

o) Machine to machine self-healing technology automating maintenance

of camera up to 288 times daily.

p) Account security features that include 4 levels of password protection,

IP address blocking/permission, and SSL protection of User Login

Password.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 39

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3-5.1.6 Payment.

1. The payment for the remote control camera inspection shall be included in the

Bid item for “Remote Control Camera Inspection”.

3-6 THE CONTRACTORS REPRESENTATIVE. ADD the following:

1. Both the representative and alternative representative shall be your

employees and shall not be assigned to a Subcontractor unless otherwise

approved by the City in writing.

ADD:

3-6.1 Project Meetings.

1. Your project team shall attend scheduled construction meetings as required

by the Engineer. If any of your staff cannot attend, you shall notify the Engineer

a minimum of 24 hours in advance, prior to the start of the scheduled meeting.

If you do not provide the required notification, you shall pay for the costs of

the City’s staff, Consultants, or both that attended. You shall be charged a

minimum of 2 hours of the attendee’s time.

ADD:

3-6.1.1 Payment.

1. The payment for your attendance to Project meetings is included in the

Contract Price. The Engineer shall deduct costs assessed to you for not

attending the meetings from the monthly progress payment via Change

Order.

3-7.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Specifications and Plans are divided into groups by engineering discipline for

the City’s convenience. These divisions are not for the purpose of apportioning

the Work or responsibility for the Work among Subcontractors and Suppliers.

2. You shall supply any Work that may reasonably be inferred from the

Specifications or Plans as being required to produce the intended result

whether or not it is specifically called for, at no additional cost to the City.

3. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization,

references to those documents means the replacement documents issued or

otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement.

3-7.2 Precedence of Contract Documents. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. If there is a conflict between any of the Contract Documents, the document

highest in the order of precedence shall control. If there is a conflict between

any of the Contract Documents and the Municipal Code, the most stringent

requirements shall control. The order of precedence, from highest to lowest,

shall be as follows:

a) Permits (issued by jurisdictional regulatory agencies including

environmental documents).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 40

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements; whichever occurs last.

c) The signed written Agreement.

d) Addenda.

e) Bid / Proposal.

f) Supplemental Special Provisions.

g) Project Plans.

h) Standard Drawings.

i) “WHITEBOOK” (City Supplement).

j) “GREENBOOK” (Standard Specifications for Public Works

Construction).

k) Reference Specifications.

2. When additional EOCP requirements by funding sources are included in the

Contract Documents, the funding source’s requirements shall govern.

3. With reference to the Drawings, the order of precedence shall be as follows:

a) Figures govern over scaled dimensions.

b) Detail Drawings govern over general Drawings.

c) Addenda and Change Order Drawings govern over Plans.

d) Plans govern over Standard Drawings.

4. When a conflict exists between the ADA, Title 24, City Standards Drawings, and

the City Supplement, the most restrictive requirement shall be followed.

5. When there is a conflict between 700-1.2, “Standards, Poles, Steel Pedestals,

and Posts” and the current adopted edition of Caltrans Standard Specifications

and/or Standard Plans, the Caltrans standards shall control.

ADD:

3-7.3 Red-lines and Record Documents.

3-7.3.1 General.

1. Keep to the satisfaction of the Engineer accurate, legible, and current records

on a set of full size Plans of additions and deletions to the Work and of changes

in location, elevation, and character of the Work not otherwise shown or noted

in the Contract Documents.

2. Coordinate Red-lines drawings with field measurements, approved Shop

Drawings, Working Drawings, samples, product data, and available records.

You shall immediately give written notice of any conflicts between these

documents to the Engineer.

3. Keep the Red-lines current with entries checked by the Engineer before the

Work is buried or covered. Your failure to update and deliver Red-lines

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 41

THE “WHITEBOOK”

information monthly to the Engineer for review and approval may result in the

withholding of monthly progress payments.

4. Note the source identification, such as RFI numbers and Change Order

numbers, as required identifying the source of the change to the Contract

Documents.

5. Deliver the Red-lines to the Engineer upon completion of the construction

Work.

3-7.3.2 Asset Specific Red-lines.

1. Irrigation System Red-lines: Red-lines shall clearly record by dimension from

2 known fixed points and by depth of underground facilities all deviations,

modifications, and changes in the Work. Records, deviations, modifications,

and changes on the day the Work is performed shall reflect the actual Work

location and shall be marked in red at the scale of the Plan sheet on which

they are recorded. Red-lines shall show the equipment locations and

associated information for the following:

a) Water Meter - Size, type of water (potable or reclaimed), and water

meter address.

b) Electrical Meter, including meter address.

c) Backflow Device - Size, available static pressure in psi, the psi and flow

in gallons per minutes for which the irrigation system is designed, and

device serial number.

d) Irrigation Controller - Location, number of stations, identifying call-out.

e) Master Control Valve.

f) Flow Sensor.

g) Pressure Regulator Valve.

h) Isolation Valves.

i) Remote Control Valves - Size, irrigation controller, valve station

number, and flow demand in gallons per minute.

j) Quick Coupling Valves and Size.

k) Irrigation Mainline and Size.

l) Potable Water Mainline and Size.

m) Irrigation Lateral Line and Size.

n) Irrigation Sleeves and Size.

o) Remote Control Valve Wiring.

p) Communication Cables.

q) Pull Boxes.

r) Rain Shut Off Switch.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 42

THE “WHITEBOOK”

s) Electrical lines from electrical meter to irrigation controller, including

the power disconnect switch.

t) Irrigation sprinkler heads which have been added or deleted from the

approved plans. Changes in manufacturer nozzle size shall be noted

on the red-lined drawings including operating pressure, gallons per

minute, and radius of throw.

2. Re-vegetation Red-lines:

a) Within 4 weeks of the end of the Plant Establishment Period, as

determined and accepted by the Project Biologist, furnish and submit

to the Engineer 1 full scale Red-lines set showing field changes to

grade, erosion control, and seeding for the re-vegetated areas.

3. Utility Red-lines: Utility Red-lines shall show the location of the following:

a) Blow off valves by stationing and offsets.

b) Air vacuum valves by stationing and offsets.

c) Water meter boxes replaced.

d) Locations of all sewer laterals and cleanouts.

e) Items abandoned in place.

f) Items abandoned in place following dewatering operation.

4. Building Red-lines: Building Red-lines shall show the following:

a) Location by dimension and the depth by elevation of underground

lines, valves, plugged tees, and capped ends.

b) By dimension or scale plans, wiring, conduits, and pull boxes as

installed.

c) Information necessary to maintain and service concealed items of

Work.

d) Dimensional changes to the drawings.

e) Revisions to details shown on the drawings.

f) Depths of foundations below the first floor.

g) Locations and depths of underground utilities.

h) Revisions to the routing of piping and conduits.

i) Revisions to electrical circuitry.

j) Actual equipment locations.

k) Duct size and routing.

l) Locations of concealed internal utilities.

m) Changes made by Change Orders.

n) Details not shown on original Plans.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 43

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. Traffic Signals and Street Lighting:

a) Provide the Engineer with a cable route diagram indicating the actual

cable route and meter marks for all intersections, directional change

points in the cable routing, and all termination points. Record these

points during cable installation. Provide cable system Red-lines

showing the accurate cable route to the Engineer. Record information

such as the location of slack cable and its quantity in the cable route

diagram.

b) Provide 3 copies of D-Sheet sized Red-lines.

6. SWPPP:

a) Upon completion of construction, submit the SWPPP and all of its

appendices, records, reports, and maps to the Engineer with the Red-

lines.

7. Slurry Seal and Asphalt Concrete Overlay:

a) Clearly record on the forms the City provides in MS Excel format the

actual dates and quantity of each Bid item applied to each street

segment and comments regarding each segment. Record reasons if no

Work is performed.

8. Fiber Optic and WIFI Device Red-lines: Fiber Optic and WIFI Device Red-lines

shall clearly record by dimension from 2 known fixed points and by depth of

underground facilities all deviations, modifications, and changes in the Work.

Records, deviations, modifications, and changes on the day the Work is

performed shall reflect the actual Work location and shall be marked in red at

the scale of the Plan sheet on which they are recorded. Red-lines shall show

the equipment locations and associated information for the following:

a) Locations and depths of underground utilities.

b) Revisions to the routing of piping and conduits.

c) Actual equipment locations.

d) Pull Boxes.

e) Electrical Meter, including meter address.

f) Items abandoned in place.

3-7.3.3 Payment.

1. The payment for Red-lines Drawings shall be included in the Contract Price.

ADD:

3-7.4 Measurements and Dimensions.

1. Scaled dimensions are approximate. Before ordering materials or

commencing the Work, measure the Site for proper size and fit. Verify

dimensions and quantities by taking measurements in the field. You shall be

responsible for their accuracy.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 44

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3-8.1 General. ADD the following:

1. For products for which a City Approved Materials List (AML) is available,

products listed in the AML shall be used. For more information, visit the City’s

website at:

https://www.sandiego.gov/ecp/edocref/

2. A submittal review shall be conducted for products not identified on an AML

on a case-by-case basis when:

a) The product type or category is not in the AML.

b) The AML does not list at least two available manufacturers of the

product.

c) The material or manufacturer listed in the AML is no longer available.

Documentation to substantiate the product is no longer available or in

production is required as part of the submittal.

i. In the case of conducting a submittal review when required by

the Plans or Special Provisions or when requested by the

Engineer, all submittals shall be accompanied by the City’s

submittal form. The Product Submittal Form is available for

download at:

https://www.sandiego.gov/ecp/edocref/

3-8.2 Working Drawings. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Working Drawings shall be of a size and scale to clearly show all necessary

details.

2. Six (6) copies and 1 reproducible shall be submitted. If no revisions are

required, 3 of the copies shall be returned. If revisions are required, the

Engineer shall return 1 copy along with the reproducible for resubmission.

Upon acceptance, the Engineer shall return 2 of the copies and retain the

remaining copies and the reproducible.

3. Working Drawings are required in the subsections shown in table below.

TABLE 3-8.2

Item

Section/Drawing

Number

Title Subject

1 3-12.5.2

Sewage Bypass and

Pumping Plan

Sanitary Sewers

2 3-12.8.2 Dewatering Plan Water Pollution Control

3 5-7.2.2 Shoring Plan Safety

4 300-3.2 Cofferdams Structure Excavation & Backfill

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 45

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Item

Section/Drawing

Number

Title Subject

5 303-1.6.1 General Falsework

6 303-1.7.1 General Placing Reinforcement

7 303-3.1 General Prestressed Concrete Construction

8 304-1.1.2 Falsework Plans Structural Steel

9 306-3.3.5.3

Asbestos Cement Pipe

Submittals

Asbestos Cement Pipe

Work Plan

Submittal

306-8.8

SDW-154*

Valves, Hydrants, and

Appurtenances

Water Valve Bypass Details For

Mainlines 16-Inch And Larger

11 306-8.8.3

Thrust Blocks and Anchor

Blocks

Unless specified otherwise, design

of all size water main thrust blocks

and anchor blocks

12 307-1.1 General Jacking Operations

13 307-2.1 General Tunneling Operations

14 308-3 Submittals Microtunneling

15 601-2.1.2

Engineered Traffic

Control Plan (TCP)

Temporary Traffic Control For

Construction And Maintenance Work

Zones

16 1001-3

Storm Water Pollution

Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

Water Pollution Control

17 1001-4

Water Pollution Control

Plan (WPCP)

Water Pollution Control

Note: The distance dimensions shown between the bypass pipes and the mainlines are subject

to change to field conditions.

4. Items listed in Table 3-8.2, except for items 1, 2 and, 5, shall be prepared by a

Civil or Structural Engineer registered by the State of California.

5. Item 16 shall be prepared by a Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD) in

accordance with 1001-3, “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)”.

6. Item 17 shall be prepared in accordance with 1001-4, “Water Pollution Control

Plan (WPCP)”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 46

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3-8.4 Supporting Information. ADD the following:

1. Submit samples of the materials with cut sheets of the products. Organize cut

sheets in a binder for review and approval by the Engineer prior to use on the

Project. Identify deviation from any of the specified material clearly, including

cut sheets and samples of both the specified material and basis for the

substitution. Include the City’s Project Name, Project Number, and the

Engineer’s name, Contractor Name, and Submittal Number and clearly

indicate the specific product to be used.

2. When photos of material are required, they shall be clear in resolution, identify

the specific item for review, and shall indicate the name of the item, source,

and date taken. The material shown in the photo shall be currently available

for use on the Project.

3. For landscaping and irrigation materials, submit samples and test results to

the Engineer within 15 Working Days of the NTP.

3-8.6 Manufacturer's Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Instructions. To sentence (1),

DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

For each pre-manufactured product covered by a manufacturer's warranty, you shall

submit 1 electronic copy and 3 bound original or legal copies prior to acceptance of

the Contract.

ADD:

3-8.7 Contractor’s Quality Control Plan (QCP).

1. You shall establish, implement, and maintain an effective Quality Control Plan

(QCP) to perform quality control inspection and testing for all items of paving

Work required by the Contract Documents, including those performed by

subcontractors and material suppliers.

2. The QCP shall ensure conformance to applicable specification and plan

requirements with respect to materials, workmanship, construction, finish,

and functional performance.

3. The QCP shall detail the methods and procedures that will be taken to ensure

that all materials and construction required for street pavement restoration

will conform to the Contract Documents, and to ensure that information

included will be recorded in Daily Quality Control (QC) Inspection Reports for

the Engineer’s verification and approval.

4. You shall establish a level of control that will:

a) Provide for the production and delivery of acceptable quality

materials.

b) Provide documentation that construction meets Contract

requirements.

5. During the pre-construction meeting, you shall be prepared to discuss and

present details of your QCP. You shall not begin any production of materials

or construction of surface preparation, pavement restoration, and other

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 47

THE “WHITEBOOK”

related work until your QCP has been reviewed and approved by the Engineer.

No partial payment will be made for materials subject to specific quality

control requirements until the QCP has been approved.

6. The quality control requirements contained in this section and elsewhere in

the Contract Documents are in addition to and separate from the acceptance

testing requirements discussed elsewhere.

3-8.7.1 QCP Submittal.

1. Submit the QCP in a written document to the Engineer at the pre-construction

meeting. The QCP shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to the

start of any material delivery or paving work.

2. The QCP shall be organized to address, at a minimum, the following items:

a) Quality Control Administrator

b) Surface preparation and paving schedule

c) Inspection and documentation requirements (Daily Quality Control

Inspection Report)

d) Material quality control testing plan

e) Documentation of quality control activities

f) Procedures for corrective action when quality control and/or

acceptance criteria are not met

g) If paving Work will be in areas prone to shade, provide curing time of

product

3. You are encouraged to add any additional elements to the QCP as deemed

necessary to adequately control all production and construction processes

required by Contract Documents.

3-8.7.2 QCP Administrator.

1. You shall designate a QCP Administrator to implement the QCP.

a) The QCP Administrator shall be your full-time employee or your

consultant. The QCP Administrator shall have full authority to institute

any and all actions necessary for the successful implementation of the

QCP to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents.

b) The QCP Administrator shall ensure that the following functions are

performed and documented:

i. Inspection of all materials, construction, plant, and equipment

for conformance to the specifications.

ii. Performance of all quality control tests as required by the

Contract Documents.

iii. Performance of density tests for the Engineer when required.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 48

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3-8.7.3 Inspection Requirements.

1. Quality control inspection functions shall be organized to provide inspections

for all definable features of Work. You shall document all inspections.

2. Inspections shall be performed daily to ensure continuing compliance with

contract requirements until completion of the particular feature of Work.

These shall include the following minimum requirement:

a) During field operations, quality control test results and periodic

inspections shall be utilized to ensure the quality of all materials and

workmanship meets the requirements of the contract. All equipment

utilized in placing, finishing, and compacting shall be inspected to

ensure its proper operating condition and to ensure that all such

operations are in conformance to the specifications and are within the

plan dimensions, lines, grades, and tolerances specified. The QCP shall

document how these and other quality control functions will be

accomplished and utilized.

3-8.7.4 Documentation.

1. You shall maintain current quality control records of all inspections

performed. These records shall include factual evidence that the required

inspections or tests have been performed, including type and number of

inspections or tests involved; results of inspections or tests; nature of defects,

deviations, causes for rejection, etc.; proposed remedial action; and corrective

actions taken.

2. These records shall cover both conforming and defective or deficient features

and shall include a statement that all supplies and materials incorporated in

the Work are in full compliance with the terms of the Contract. Legible copies

of these records for the entire week of paving work shall be furnished to the

Engineer after 2 Working Days. The records shall cover all Work placed

subsequent to the previously furnished records and shall be verified and

signed by the QCP Administrator.

3. Specific QCP records required for the Contract shall include, but are not

necessarily limited to, the following records:

a) Daily Quality Control (QC) Inspection Reports. The QCP

Administrator shall maintain a daily log of all inspections performed

for both Contractor and subcontractor operations. These daily QC

inspection reports shall provide factual evidence that continuous

quality control inspections have been performed and shall, as a

minimum, include the following items:

i. Date and location/s of paving work performed.

ii. Asphalt mix specifications and supplier.

iii. Dig out locations.

iv. Tack coat application rate for each location.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 49

THE “WHITEBOOK”

v. Asphalt temperature at placement for each location.

vi. Asphalt depth for each location.

vii. Compaction test results for each location.

viii. Documentation that the following have been verified to be in

compliance:

• Proper storage of materials and equipment.

• Proper operation of all equipment.

• Adherence to plans and technical specifications.

• Review of quality control tests.

• Safety inspection.

• Mixing properties of products against the approved

submittal limits.

viii. Location and nature of defects with remedial and corrective

actions.

ix. Presence of City Laboratory representative.

x. Deviations from QCP.

xi. Signature of QCP Administrator.

The daily QC inspection reports shall identify inspections conducted,

results of inspections, location and nature of defects found, causes for

rejection, and remedial or corrective actions taken or proposed.

b) The daily QC inspection reports shall be signed by the QCP

Administrator. The Engineer shall be provided at least 1 copy of each

daily QC inspection report for the entire week 2 Working Days

following the end of the week.

c) When applicable, a sample of the daily QC inspection report will be

included in your Contract Documents. An updated version of this

sample report will be provided at the pre-construction meeting and

can be found at the link below:

https://www.sandiego.gov/ecp/edocref/

3-8.7.5 Corrective Action Requirements.

1. The QCP shall indicate the appropriate action to be taken when a process is

deemed, or believed, to be out of control (out of tolerance) and detail what

action will be taken to bring the process into control.

2. The requirements for corrective action shall include both general

requirements for operation of the QCP as a whole and for individual items of

Work contained in the specifications.

3. The QCP shall detail how the results of quality control inspections will be used

for determining the need for corrective action and shall contain clear sets of

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 50

THE “WHITEBOOK”

rules to gauge when a process is out of control and the type of correction to

be taken to regain process control.

3-8.7.6 Noncompliance.

1. The Engineer will notify you of any noncompliance with any of the foregoing

requirements. You shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take

corrective action. Any notice, when delivered by the Engineer to you, shall be

considered sufficient notice.

2. In cases where quality control activities do not comply with either the QCP or

the contract provisions, or where you fail to properly operate and maintain an

effective QCP, as determined by the Engineer, the Engineer may:

a) Require replacement of ineffective or unqualified QCP personnel or

subcontractors.

b) Stop operations until appropriate corrective actions are taken.

3-8.7.7 Payment.

1. The payment for preparation, submittal, implementation, and maintenance of

the Quality Control Plan in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be

included in the Contract Price.

3-9 SUBSURFACE DATA. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

3-9 TECHNICAL STUDIES AND SUBSURFACE DATA.

1. If reports of explorations and tests of Site conditions are referenced in the

Contract Documents, you are encouraged to inspect the Site, acquire and

review these reports, and take other necessary steps to thoroughly familiarize

yourself with the Site conditions. If a review of the documents and Site

inspection indicate an obstruction or utility conflict with the proposed Work,

immediately notify the Engineer.

2. Subsurface data shall include geotechnical reports, groundwater

elevations,

soil analyses and characterization, and other information included or

referenced in the

Special Provisions and shall apply only at the location of the

test holes and to the depths indicated.

3. Additional exploration may be performed at your own expense.

4. The indicated groundwater elevation is that which existed on the date

specified in the data. It shall be your responsibility to determine and allow for

the groundwater elevation on the date the Work is performed. A difference in

groundwater elevation between what is shown in soil boring logs and what is

actually encountered during construction shall not be considered as a basis

for Extra Work in accordance with 2-8, “Extra Work”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 51

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3-10 SURVEYING. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

3-10 SURVEYING (DESIGN-BID-BUILD).

3-10.1 General.

1. You shall provide all required site layout and general grade checking work not

specified in 3-10.2, “Survey Services Provided by City”.

2. Notify the City, in writing, at least 2 Working Days prior to requesting survey

services provided by the City.

3-10.2 Survey Services Provided by City.

1. Monument Perpetuation, including mark-outs. You are responsible for

requesting the coordination of these services.

a) If at any time a monument will be destroyed or covered, such

monument shall be perpetuated in accordance with state law. Inform

the City Engineering Support & Technical Services Division’s Land

Survey Section (LSS), via project Resident Engineer, if any monument

will be destroyed or covered during any construction activity.

2. The following surveying services (including construction staking), as defined in

California Business & Professions Code §8726, shall be provided by the City:

a) Locating or establishing alignment or elevations of all features or

structures shown on project Plans.

b) Locating or establishing geodetic control points for all site feature or

structure locations.

c) Produce topographic as-built data.

d) Locating, establishing, or re-establishing monuments, property lines,

right-of-way lines, or easement lines.

e) Verifying structure finish grade elevations.

3. All construction survey stakes, control points, and other survey related marks

provided by the City shall be preserved for the duration of the Project. If any

construction survey stakes, control points, or other survey related marks are

lost or disturbed and need to be replaced, such replacement shall be

performed at your expense.

3-10.3 Payment.

1. The payment for site layout and general grade checking Work, coordination,

and preservation of all survey related marks shall be included in the Contract

Price.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 52

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3-11 CONTRACT INFORMATION SIGNS. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

3-11 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNS.

3-11.1 Street Name Signs.

1. Upon the completion of rough grading and prior to underground construction,

provide and maintain temporary street name signs at each intersection until

the permanent street name signs have been placed.

2. Construct and place temporary street name signs to the following

requirements:

a) 5 inch (127 mm) high black lettering on 8 inch by 32 inch (203.2 mm by

812.8 mm) white blades.

b) The bottom of the blades shall be at least 7 feet (2.1 m) above ground

line and mounted on white 4 inch by 4 inch (101.6 mm by 101.6 mm)

posts.

c) Posts shall be placed radial to the mid-point of curb returns, 15 feet

(4.6 m) in from the future face of curb.

3-11.2 Project Identification Signs.

1. The City shall provide 1 to 4 signs. Project signs will include the funding source

if the project is funded in part by State Gas Tax Revenue (SB1). Contact the

Engineer to pick up the Project signs, install them at the Work location(s), and

maintain them in a manner approved by the Engineer.

2. Display project identification signs as follows:

a) Utility Group Projects. Display a project identification sign and a

project location sign at the beginning and ending of the street where

construction is actively occurring.

b) Open Sites. For Work locations that are open and accessible to the

public, mount the signs on a standard Type II barricade and display

them every day during Work hours, then remove and store during non-

Work hours.

c) Secure and Confined Sites. For Work locations that are closed and

secure from public access, mount the signs continuously, as directed

by the Engineer, and display them for the duration of the Contract.

3. Remove and return the signs to City locations designated by the Engineer upon

Acceptance.

3-11.3 Contract Information Signs.

1. The names, addresses, and specialties of you, your Subcontractors, architects,

or engineers may be displayed on removable signs. The size, location, and

details shall conform to the details specified in the Contract Documents or

as shown on the Plans.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 53

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Commercial advertising matter shall not be attached to or painted on the

surfaces of buildings, fences, canopies, or barricades.

3. Any advertisement referring to the City as a user of a product, material, or

service by you or your Subcontractor and Supplier is expressly prohibited

without the City’s prior written approval.

3-11.4 Payment.

1. The payment for Street Name and Project Identification signs shall be included

in the Bid item for “Traffic Control” in accordance with 601-7, “Payment”. If no

“Traffic Control” Bid item exists, the payment shall be included in the Contract

Price.

3-12.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Maintain Site improvements including any temporary facilities, equipment, or

other materials. Remove graffiti encountered on the Site within 24 hours. See

also SECTION 400 - PROTECTION AND RESTORATION.

2. When specified, you shall provide a PM-10 certified self-loading motorized

street sweeper equipped with a functional water spray system for this project.

ADD:

3-12.1.1 Affidavit of Legal Disposal.

1. As a condition of Final Payment, you shall submit a signed and notarized

affidavit stating that all brush, trash, debris, and surplus materials resulting

from this Project have been disposed of in a legal manner. See the Affidavit of

Disposal in the Contract Documents. Disposal of refuse generated as a result

of the Contract at the City landfills shall be subject to a fee. Contact the Refuse

Disposal Division at (858) 573-1418 for fee information.

ADD:

3-12.1.2 Sanitation.

1. If required in the Special Provisions, provide and maintain enclosed toilets

for the use of the City’s and your officers, employees, or agents. Keep these

accommodations in a neat and sanitary condition and ensure that they comply

with all applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to public

health and sanitation of dwellings and camps.

ADD:

3-12.1.3 Payment.

1. The payment for Work Site maintenance, as described in 3-12.1, “General”

through 3-12.4, “Storage of Equipment and Materials” shall be included in the

Contract Price.

2. Disposal of refuse generated as a result of the Contract at the City landfills as

described in 3-12.1.1, “Affidavit of Legal Disposal” shall include all fees and

shall be included in the Contract Price.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 54

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

3-12.2.1 Dust Abatement.

1. You shall carry out effective measures whenever and as often as necessary to

prevent your operation from producing dust in amounts damaging to property,

cultivated vegetation, domestic animals, or causing a nuisance to persons living

or occupying buildings in the vicinity. You shall be responsible for any damage

resulting from any dust originating from your operations. The dust abatement

measures shall be continued until you are relieved of further responsibility by the

Engineer

3-12.4.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Equipment and material storage shall be confined to areas approved by the

Engineer. Disposal of all rubbish and surplus materials shall be at your

expense. Disposal shall be made off the Site and shall be in accordance with:

a) Local codes and ordinances that govern locations and methods of

disposal.

b) All applicable safety laws.

c) Requirements of Subpart H, §1926.252 of the OSHA Safety and Health

Standards for Construction.

ADD:

3-12.4.3 Storage and Staging Areas.

1. If the Plans designate a staging location within the Project or in close proximity,

utilize such area for their use. Otherwise, storage and staging areas are your

responsibility. The storage and staging areas shall be as close as possible to

the Site. You are responsible for obtaining any permits, leases, or any other

items necessary to obtain staging areas.

2. Storage of hazardous wastes, construction equipment material, and parking

and fueling of equipment shall not be allowed in the Multiple Habitat Planning

Area (MHPA) or other biologically sensitive areas. Ensure the fueling of vehicles

occurs only within designated staging areas using appropriate catch basins

and devices.

3. Return the storage and staging area and the adjacent area to an equal or

better condition as deemed necessary by the Engineer, at no additional cost

to the City.

3-12.5.1 General. ADD the following:

1. You shall observe and comply with the City’s policy of zero spills. You shall be

liable for all damages sustained by the City that result from sewage spills

caused by your actions.

2. You shall designate a person responsible for the development and

enforcement of the Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan, and for

ensuring sewer spills are minimized to the maximum extent possible. You shall

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 55

THE “WHITEBOOK”

provide a status of all bypass related Work at biweekly progress meetings as

requested by the City.

3-12.5.2 Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan. ADD the following:

1. You shall submit to the Engineer for approval, a Sewage Bypass and Pumping

Plan at least 15 Working Days prior to the implementation of flow diversion in

compliance with the City’s policy of “Zero Spills”. The Sewage Bypass and

Pumping Plan shall indicate the sequence of diversion operations, all other

operations that you shall establish to maintain wastewater service during the

construction period, and a quality assurance and quality control plan for the

diversion Work. The Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan shall include an

emergency response plan indicating the procedures, equipment, and activities

that shall be implemented in the event of an emergency shutdown or failure

of the flow diversion equipment used for construction. You shall be

responsible for the implementation of the emergency plan in accordance with

3-12.5.3, “Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan”.

2. Your Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan shall be reviewed and approved by the

Wastewater Collection Division of the City before flow can be diverted. No

deviation from the approved Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan shall be

allowed without prior approval from the Engineer.

3. You shall be fully responsible for preventing, containing, recovering, and

legally disposing sewage spills. This shall include any fines, penalties, claims,

and liabilities arising from negligently causing a sewage spill and any violation

of any law, ordinance, code, order, or regulation as a result of the spill.

4. You shall exercise care not to damage existing public and private improvements

and not to interrupt existing services or facility operations which may cause

sewage spills. Any reasonably anticipated utility or improvement which is

damaged by your actions shall be immediately repaired at your expense. In the

event that you damage an existing utility or interrupt an existing service which

causes a sewage spill, immediately call the emergency number at (619) 515-3525.

5. You shall provide all facilities, labor, power, and appurtenances necessary to

divert wastewater flows as necessary to allow proper installation of the

pipeline and/or manhole linings.

6. You shall submit as part of your Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan the

monitoring procedure and frequency and shall continuously monitor the flow

levels downstream and upstream of the flow diversion to detect any possible

failure that may cause a sewage backup and spills. You shall maintain a log of

the monitoring and provide daily copies to the Engineer in a manner

acceptable to the Engineer.

7. You shall inspect and maintain the diversion system daily, including the back-

up system. You shall submit with your Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan the

maintenance procedures and frequency. You shall maintain a log of all

inspection, maintenance, and repair records and shall provide copies to the

Engineer upon request in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 56

THE “WHITEBOOK”

8. You shall size the flow diversion system to handle the peak flow and shall

include a 100% backup in the flow diversion system. You shall provide

temporary means to maintain and handle the sewage flow in the existing

system as required to complete the necessary construction. You shall utilize

the flow diversion system to mitigate any additional wet weather flows,

perform the necessary maintenance and repairs on the flow diversion system,

and exercise and ensure the operation of the backup system. Each pump,

including the backup pumps, shall be a complete unit with its own suction and

discharge piping.

9. You shall operate the backup flow diversion system for a minimum of 25% of the

total diversion time on a weekly basis. The backup flow diversion system shall be

fully installed, operational, and ready for immediate use. The diversion system

shall be hydraulically tested with clean water prior to wastewater flow diversion.

You shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that both the primary

and backup flow diversion systems are fully functional and adequate and shall

certify the same in writing to the Engineer in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

10. If fuel or generator driven pumps are used, you shall provide one dedicated

fuel tank for every single pump or generator. You shall provide an emergency

standby power generator if electric power driven pumps are used. You shall

provide a fuel level indicator outside each fuel tank. While in use, continuously

monitor the fuel level in the tanks and ensure that the fuel level does not drop

below a level equivalent of 2 hours of continuous flow diversion system

operation. You shall take the necessary measures to ensure that the fuel

supply is protected against contamination. This includes but is not limited to

fuel line water traps, fuel line filters, and protecting fuel stores from

precipitation. You shall monitor all hoses and repair leaks immediately.

3-12.5.3 Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan. ADD the following:

1. Prior to the start of construction, you shall develop and submit to the Engineer

for review and approval, a written Spill Prevention and Emergency Response

Plan. The plan shall include a sewage spill response plan, spill containment

and cleanup plan, staging area, and sewage bypass and pumping plan.

2. The Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan shall be developed to

respond to any construction related sewage spills. The plan shall include:

a) Identifying all nearby environmentally-sensitive areas such as

waterways, channels, catch basins, and entrances to existing

underground storm drains.

b) Making arrangements for an emergency response unit stationed at or

near the Site that is comprised of emergency response equipment and

trained personnel to be immediately dispatched in the event of a

sewage spill. If in an environmentally-sensitive area such as a canyon,

this shall include field biologists, archaeologists, or both.

c) An emergency notification procedure that includes an emergency

response team with telephone numbers and arrangements for backup

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 57

THE “WHITEBOOK”

personnel and equipment. The emergency response unit shall be able

to dispatch to the Site 24 hours a day, 7 Days a week including

weekends and Holidays. You shall designate primary and secondary

representatives by their respective phone numbers, pager numbers,

and mobile phone numbers. Your representatives shall be accessible

and available at all times to respond immediately to any sewer spill

event.

d) Identifying any property owners who may be affected such as the City

Park and Recreation Department.

3. At the pre-construction meeting you shall be provided with a list of the City

representatives to contact in case of sewage spills. In case of a sewage spills,

you shall immediately call the Sewage Spill Hotline number at (619) 527-5481

and shall act immediately without instructions from the City, to control the spill

and take all appropriate steps to contain it in accordance with the 3-12.5.3

“Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan” and 3-12.5.2, “Sewage Bypass

and Pumping Plan”. You shall immediately notify the City representatives of

the spill and shall report the Project name, location, Contractor name, Project

Engineer name, and the Engineer name.

4. Within 3 Working Days from the occurrence of the spill, submit to the Engineer

a written report describing the following information related to the spill: the

location, the nature and estimated volume, the date and time, the duration,

the cause, the type of remedial and/or clean up measures taken (including

erosion control measures), the date and time of implementation, the

corrective and/or preventive actions taken to avoid further spills, the

equipment used in the spill response, and the environmentally-sensitive

habitat, such as a water body, if any, that has been impacted and the results

of any necessary monitoring. You shall provide a list of names from the City of

which whom were notified, the date and time of notification, the date and time

you were notified of the spill, and the date and time you arrived on Site.

5. The Engineer may institute further corrective actions, as deemed necessary,

to fully comply with existing laws, ordinances, codes, orders, or other pertinent

regulations. In addition to any penalties provided by federal, state, and local

laws, you shall be responsible for all costs incurred for the corrective actions

including mitigation measures (habitat restoration and etc.) and obtaining

after-the-fact permits, if necessary, in environmentally sensitive areas. These

permits include but are not limited to those from the City Planning

Department Development Services, California Coastal Commission, U.S. Army

Corps of Engineers, and the California Department of Fish and Game.

6. It shall be your responsibility to ensure that all field forces, including

Subcontractors, know and obey all safety and emergency procedures,

including the Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan applicable to the

Work to be maintained and followed at the Site. Impacts shall be minimized if

the Site is in an environmentally sensitive area, such as canyons, streams, or

lagoons. Crews shall be aware at the start of the job of any sensitive

environmental habitats, breeding season restrictions, and etc.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 58

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. You shall prevent spills when working on sewer lines, such as when making

temporary connections and when connecting new lines into the sewer system,

and shall ensure that no laterals are connected to mains being abandoned.

Ensure that diversions are appropriately installed and that diversions are

completely removed when finished so there are no blockages. You shall not

trap debris and discharge rock or debris downstream. Avoidance of streams

is paramount, unless authorized via permits.

8. You shall defend, indemnify, protect, and hold harmless the City, its agents,

officers, and employees, from and against all claims asserted or liability

established for damages or injuries to any person or property resulting from

any sewage spill caused or claimed to be caused by your action or failure to

take measures to prevent a spill. You shall be responsible for the payment of

any fines assessed against the City for such sewage spills. Your duty to

indemnify and hold harmless shall not include any claims or liability arising

from the established active or sole negligence or willful misconduct of the City,

its agents, officers or employees.

9. You shall obtain and maintain an additional insurance coverage for Pollution

Liability with its limits and requirements as set forth in 5-4, “INSURANCE” of

the Contract Documents. The limits and requirements for Pollution Liability

shall be in an amount sufficient to cover potential losses from sudden and

accidental pollution.

ADD:

3-12.5.4 Payment.

1. The payment for the Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan and its

implementation including labor, facilities, equipment, power, appurtenances,

and all incidental Work shall be included in the Bid item for “Sewage Bypass

and Pumping Plan”.

2. Full compensation for the Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan and

its implementation including labor, facilities, equipment, power,

appurtenances, and all incidental Work shall be included in the Contract Price.

3-12.6 Water Pollution Control. DELETE all sections and subsections in its entirety and

SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. See Part 10 - STORM WATER for permanent and construction storm water

requirements.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 59

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

3-12.7 Drinking Water Discharge Requirements.

3-12.7.1 Discharges to Storm Drains.

1. All discharge related to the project of water used for testing and acceptance of

new water mains to the storm drain shall comply with the State Water

Resources Control Board, ORDER WQ 2014-0194-DWQ, STATEWIDE GENERAL

NPDES PERMIT FOR DRINKING WATER SYSTEMS DISCHARGES (Order) found at

the State Boards website at the following location:

http://www.waterboards.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/npdes/docs/drinking

water/final_statewide_wqo2014_0194_dwq.pdf

2. All monitoring, sampling, and reporting for compliance with the Order shall be

completed by a QSP.

3. Best Management Practices (BMPs) shall be in place prior to the start of

discharge. At a minimum, you shall:

a) Sweep the gutter and street in the flow path.

b) Provide inlet protection at all inlets receiving discharge.

c) Provide dechlorination.

d) Implement sediment and erosion control measures such as diffusers,

check dams, flow controls, etc.

e) You shall not allow discharges to flow across unimproved areas prior

to it reaching the inlet.

4. Monitoring and Samples.

a) As required by the Order, you shall monitor, sample and report all

discharges to the storm drain. You shall record the results for each

discharge event on the City’s Drinking Water Discharge Monitoring

form included as an Appendix in the Contract Documents. Submit

completed forms to the Engineer within 5 Working Days of the

discharge event.

b) You shall notify the Regional Water Quality Control Board at (619) 521-

3966 and the Storm Water Department at (619) 235-1000 prior to the

start of any large volume discharge (greater than 1 acre-foot volume).

c) You shall notify The County of San Diego, Department of

Environmental Health (DEH) at (858)495-5579 prior to the start of

discharges 100,000 gallons or more within ¼ mile of the ocean or bay

coastline.

d) Sampling and reporting requirements are outlined in the Order.

i. For superchlorinated discharges, at a minimum you shall

sample chlorine, turbidity, and pH the first 10 minutes of

discharge, between 50 to 60 minutes from the start of the

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 60

THE “WHITEBOOK”

discharge, and at the last 10 minutes of discharge and provide

an estimate of the total volume of water discharged.

ii. For large volume discharges (or discharges greater than 1 acre-

foot in total volume), at a minimum you shall sample chlorine

and turbidity the first 10 minutes of discharge, between 50 to

60 minutes from the start of the discharge, and at the last 10

minutes of discharge and provide an estimate of the total

volume of water discharged.

iii. For discharges that are not superchlorinated and are under 1

acre-foot in total volume, at a minimum you shall provide an

estimate of the total volume of water discharged.

e) Effluent limits for receiving waters are as follows:

i. Total chlorine field measurement of 0.1 mg/L.

ii. Visual turbidity measurement of 20 turbidity units (NTUs) for

surface waters and 225 NTU for ocean.

iii. Total pH field measurement of 6.5 to 8.5.

f) Receiving Water Monitoring: if effluent limits are exceeded, the

discharge shall be stopped immediately, BMPs shall be adjusted until

discharge is no longer exceeding limits. The QSP shall monitor

receiving waters for adverse effects to water quality. The QSP shall

document where the discharge enters the receiving water with

photographs. The QSP shall document if it is unsafe to access or if

unable to determine the location of where the discharge enters

receiving waters. If any adverse effect to water quality is observed, the

Resident Engineer and Regional Water Quality Control Board shall be

notified immediately.

5. Areas of Special Biological Significance (ASBS).

a) Non-storm water discharges including drinking water discharges to

Areas of Special Biological Significance (ASBS) are prohibited. These

are ocean areas requiring protection of species or biological

communities to the extent that alteration of natural water quality is

undesirable and are classified as a subset of State Water Quality

Protection Areas. Non-storm water discharges shall be located outside

of the designated areas to ensure maintenance of natural water

quality conditions in these areas.

b) A map showing ASBS locations can be found in the Storm Water

Standards Manual Part 2 Appendix A. The areas in the San Diego

Region include: La Jolla (ASBS #29), Scripps (ASBS #31), and La Jolla

Shores watershed boundaries.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 61

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3-12.7.2 Discharges to Sewer Systems.

1. If prior approval is obtained to discharge to the sewer system, you shall

discharge the water used for testing and acceptance of new water mains to

the sewer system in accordance with the Contract Documents as shown on

the batch discharge Plans. You shall submit to the Engineer a “Request for

Batch Discharge Authorization to Discharge Potable Pipe Flushing Water to

Sewer” form.

a) The request form is found on the City website at the following location:

https://www.sandiego.gov/sites/default/files/pipe_flush_batch_disch_0.pdf

b) When discharging to the sewer system has been approved, you shall

use a totalizer flow meter to record the total volume discharged to

sewer and shall submit to the Engineer a log of actual discharged water

quantities, dates, and locations. Failure to report this information to

the Engineer is a violation of the authorization for discharge to the

sanitary sewer. Within 5 Working Days of the discharge, the Resident

Engineer shall receive and report actual total flows to the sanitary

sewer to the Public Utilities Department (PUD), Industrial Wastewater

Control Program (IWCP).

c) If the discharge to the sewer system is not approved, you shall

discharge the water used for the testing of new mains to surface

waters, storm drain inlets, or to other approved sources and shall

comply with 3-12.7, “Drinking Water Discharge Requirements”.

3-12.7.3 Payment.

1. The payment for complying with the requirements of drinking water systems

discharge to storm drains shall be included in the Bid item for “Drinking Water

Discharge Monitoring by QSP”.

2. The payment for complying with the discharge requirements for discharges to

sewer systems shall be included in the Bid item for the new water main.

ADD:

3-12.8 Dewatering.

1. The dewatering shall include Site dewatering and the treatment of

contaminated water to lower and control groundwater levels and hydrostatic

pressures to permit excavation and construction to be performed properly

under dry conditions.

2. Dewatering operations shall be adequate to stabilize vertical excavations

during trenching or cofferdam installation and shall provide for sound soil

conditions suitable for subgrade applications for the item being constructed.

3. Where the excavation is below the groundwater table, sheet piles shall be used

and driven to a depth of at least 5 feet (1.5 m) below the bottom of the

excavation. For the groundwater table and other information, refer to the

subsurface information when provided in the Contract Documents for this

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 62

THE “WHITEBOOK”

project. Dewatering shall be performed by you when specifically required by

the Plans or Specifications and as necessary for the construction of the Work.

Dewatering shall be performed in conformance with all applicable local, state,

and Federal laws and permits issued by jurisdictional regulatory agencies.

Permits necessary for the treatment and disposal of accumulated water shall

be obtained by you. Accumulated ground water shall be treated prior to

disposal if so specified in the Special Provisions or required by a permit.

4. You shall be responsible for the integrity of the finished product and the

protection of adjacent structures and facilities impacted by dewatering

operation.

5. Prepare a Community Health and Safety Plan in accordance with 5-15.2,

“Community Health and Safety Plan (CHSP)”.

3-12.8.1 Permits.

1. Unless the type of the permit is specified in the Special Provisions, necessary

permits from regulatory agencies or Public Utilities Department - Wastewater

Section, if applicable, shall be obtained for the disposal of water. If you decide

to discharge into the sewer system, you shall obtain a permit from Public

Utilities Department - Wastewater Section for discharging into the sewer

system as outlined in the Public Utilities Department - Wastewater Section

policy for Ground Water Discharges attached to the Contract. If you choose to

discharge into the storm drain system, you shall obtain and comply with

Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB) permit Order No. R9-2008-

0002 NPDES No. CAG919002 (San Diego Region for groundwater remediation

and dewatering waste discharges to surface waters within the San Diego

region except for San Diego Bay), or Order No. R9-2007-0034 NPDES No.

CAG919001 (discharges tributary to the San Diego Bay), as well as comply with

3-12.7, “Drinking Water Discharge Requirements” as applicable.

3-12.8.2 Dewatering Plan.

1. You shall submit a dewatering plan in accordance with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS”

detailing its proposed plan and methodology of dewatering and treatment and

disposal of accumulated water (when contaminated water is present) prior to

the commencement of excavation.

2. The Dewatering Plan shall include the following:

a) Pump test report.

b) Identification of location, type, and size of dewatering devices such as

head and capacity of dewatering pumps and related equipment, the size

and type of materials composing the collection system, the size and type

of equipment to be used to retain and, if required, treat accumulated

water, and the proposed disposal locations.

c) Number and location of dewatering wells.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 63

THE “WHITEBOOK”

d) Depth and size of dewatering wells.

e) Descriptions of methods and placement of equipment, as well as

supporting calculations signed by a Professional Engineer registered

in the State of California for dewatering of excavations.

f) Field demonstration of proposed system and verification that

adequate personnel, materials, and equipment are readily available.

g) Written evidence of permission from California RWQCB or approved

Public Utilities Department - Wastewater Section discharge permit, if

not obtained by the City, original signed permits from jurisdictional

regulatory agencies, or written evidence that such permits are not

required.

3. The pump test and report shall be conducted under the direct supervision of a

certified hydrogeologist. The pump test shall provide adequate data to support

the groundwater hydrology calculations. This submittal shall include all raw data

and calculations. It shall also be signed and stamped by the certified

hydrogeologist.

4. You shall refer to the reports prepared by the City and included in the Contract

Documents in accordance with 3-9, “TECHNICAL STUDIES AND SUBSURFACE

DATA” for the preparation of the dewatering plan.

3-12.8.3 Equipment.

1. The dewatering system shall include:

a) Well points.

b) Sump pumps.

c) Temporary pipelines for water disposal.

d) Flow meter.

e) Rock or gravel placement.

f) Sedimentation tanks.

g) Equipment necessary for the treatment of contaminated groundwater.

h) Other means and services, including standby pumping equipment

maintained on the Site continuously.

i. The standby pumping equipment shall include at least two

standby pumping units secured on site that are completely

ready to be inserted into a dewatering well to prevent

groundwater from rising during the course of construction.

2. Sufficient dewatering equipment shall be installed to pre-drain the water-

bearing strata below the bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other

excavations.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 64

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. You shall remove equipment when no longer required for dewatering,

monitoring, or water controlling operations.

4. The approved dewatering system shall include a suitably sized pipeline to

transport extracted groundwater from the Work Site to the indicated point of

discharge as applicable under the dewatering permit in force during the

dewatering operations. The alignment of this pipeline shall be subject to the

approval by the Engineer. Where the pipeline is allowed to cross roadways or

parking areas, you shall be required to install a conduit below the traveled surface.

The installation shall provide protection for the temporary pipeline and a smooth

transition across the in accordance with Standard Drawing SDG-107, “Trench

Resurfacing For Asphalt Concrete Surfaced Streets” or a concrete trench cap in

accordance with Standard Drawing SDG-108, “Trench Resurfacing For PCC

Surfaced Streets”.

3-12.8.4 Dewatering Operation.

1. The hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below foundations, drains,

sewers and other excavations shall be reduced to ensure that the water level

and piezometric water levels are below the excavation surface at all times.

Dewatering shall be continuously maintained a minimum of 3 feet (0.9 m)

below the excavation during the entire construction period until the backfill

and compaction is completed.

2. The dewatering system shall be placed into operation prior to excavation

below ground water level to lower the ground water level and shall be

operated continuously 24 hours a Day and 7 Days a week until drains, sewers,

and structures have been constructed, fill materials have been placed, and

dewatering is no longer required.

3. The Site shall be graded to facilitate drainage. Surface runoff shall be diverted

from excavations. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be

collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to

sumps, and pumped or drained by gravity away from the excavation.

4. Adequate control shall be maintained to ensure that the stability of excavated

and constructed slopes are not adversely affected by water, that erosion is

controlled, and that flooding of excavation or damage to structures does not

occur.

5. Where critical structures or facilities exist immediately adjacent to areas of

proposed dewatering, reference points shall be established and observed at

frequent intervals to detect any settlement which may develop.

6. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve

the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed

bottom of excavation.

7. Flotation of structures and facilities shall be prevented by maintaining a

positive and continuous removal of water.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 65

THE “WHITEBOOK”

8. The release of groundwater to its original level shall be performed in such a

manner as not to disturb natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of

compacted backfill, and prevent flotation or movement of structures,

pipelines, and sewers.

9. If foundation soils are disturbed or loosened by the upward seepage of water

or an uncontrolled flow of water, the affected areas shall be excavated and

replaced with drain rock at no additional cost to the City.

10. If well points or wells are used, they shall be adequately spaced to provide the

necessary dewatering and shall be sand-packed and shall prevent the

pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface. Other means may be used

to prevent the pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface. A continual

check shall be maintained to ensure that the subsurface soil is not being

removed by the dewatering operation.

11. Water and debris shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without damage

to adjacent property. No water shall be drained into Work built or areas under

construction. Water shall be filtered to remove sand and fine-sized soil

particles and further treated if required by regulatory agencies before disposal

into any drainage or sewer system.

12. You may discharge water into the sewer system as outlined in the Public Utilities

Department - Wastewater Section policy for Ground Water Discharges attached

to the Contract. When applicable, the discharge points and flow data for the

existing sewer system will be in the Contract Documents.

13. You shall maintain operation of monitoring and settlement measurement

systems until their removal is approved. To the extent approved, well points

and like items may be abandoned in place. Otherwise, all temporary

dewatering, recharging facilities, or both shall be removed in a manner

satisfactory to the Engineer. Any items abandoned in place shall be indicated

on the Red-lines Plans.

14. You shall include adequate time in the schedule to obtain permits prior to the

start of construction. If required by the permitting entity, the City may assist

you in obtaining permit approval.

3-12.8.5 Contaminated Water.

1. Contaminated water shall mean any type of contamination present in the

collected water that precludes direct discharge to the sewer or storm drain as

outlined in the discharge permit issued by the respective regulatory agency.

2. If indicated in the Contract Documents or following groundwater testing

during construction it is found to be contaminated with petroleum, you shall

provide, install, maintain and operate the equipment necessary to treat the

contaminated water to bring it to compliance with the dewatering and

discharging permits from RWQCB, Public Utilities-Wastewater Section, or both.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 66

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. For contaminated water treated as Hazardous Waste refer to 5-15,

“ENCOUNTERING OR RELEASING HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES” and the

specifications in this subsection.

3-12.8.6 Dewatering System.

1. You shall prepare a dewatering system with the contingency of encountering

hazardous materials such as gasoline and other fuel constituents in the

specified areas. The dewatering system plan shall be designed to process

contaminated groundwater with the contingency of processing flammable

liquids.

2. If other types of hazardous constituents are encountered, additionally

encountered along with petroleum constituents, or are indicated in the Contract

Documents, the dewatering system shall be designed to process those

contaminants in order to comply with the regulatory discharge permit.

3-12.8.7 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) Certificate.

1. If flammable liquids or other hazardous wastes are encountered during

dewatering activities, construction staff shall be required to have a HAZWOPER

certificate in accordance with 5-15.1, “General” and in compliance with CCR

Title 8, Section 5192 and 29 CFR, Part 1910.

3-12.8.8 Payment.

1. The payment for preparing a Community Health and Safety Plan shall be paid

in accordance with 5-15.17, “Payment”.

2. The Allowance Bid item for “Dewatering Permit and Discharge Fees” shall cover

all costs for fees and related expenses for obtaining permits.

3. The payment for dewatering hazardous contaminated water shall be included

in the lump sum Bid item for “Dewatering Hazardous Contaminated Water”

and shall include furnishing, setting up and removal, and operating all

equipment necessary to treat and discharge the hazardous contaminated

groundwater.

a) Submit supporting invoices and a Schedule of Values for the Lump

Sum Bid item for “Dewatering Hazardous Contaminated Water” in

accordance with 7-2.1, “Schedule of Values (SOV)”. The SOV shall

itemize the Work to show the following:

i. All costs associated with handling contaminated groundwater

specified in 3-12.8.6, “Dewatering System”, and 3-12.8.7,

“Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

(HAZWOPER) Certificate”.

ii. All costs associated with equipment used for dewatering

hazardous contaminated groundwater, including costs for

mobilization and demobilization.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 67

THE “WHITEBOOK”

iii. All rental and operating costs for equipment used for

dewatering contaminated groundwater.

4. The payment for the handling and disposal of the hazardous contamination

shall be in accordance with 5-15.17, “Payment”.

5. The payment for dewatering non-hazardous contaminated water shall be

included in the lump sum Bid item for “Dewatering Non-Hazardous

Contaminated Water” and shall include furnishing, setting up and removal,

and operating all equipment necessary to complete the Work.

6. The payment for Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

(HAZWOPER) certification and training for construction staff shall be paid in

accordance with 5-15.17, ”Payment”.

3-13.1 Completion. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

You shall submit a written assertion that the Work has been completed

and is ready for Owner Acceptance. If, in the Engineer's judgment, the

Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents,

the Engineer will set forth in writing the date the Work was completed.

This will be the date that you are relieved from responsibility to protect

and maintain the Work and to

which liquidated damages will be computed.

ADD:

3-13.1.1 Requirements Before Requesting Substantial Completion.

1. The following items are required prior to requesting a Substantial Completion:

a) Remove temporary facilities from the Site.

b) Thoroughly cleaning the Site and removing all mark outs and

construction staking.

c) Provide completed and signed Red-lines in accordance with 3-7.3

“Redlines and Record Documents”.

d) Provide all material and equipment maintenance and operation

instructions and/or manuals.

e) Provide all tools which are permanent parts of the equipment installed

in the Project.

f) Provide and properly identify all keys for construction and all keys for

permanent Work.

g) Provide all final Special Inspection reports required by the applicable

building Code.

h) Provide all items specified to be supplied as extra stock. Wrap, seal, or

place in a container all items as necessary to allow for storage by the

City for future use. Verify the specified quantities.

i) Ensure that all specified EOCP and certified wage rate documentations

covering the Contract Time have been submitted.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 68

THE “WHITEBOOK”

j) If the Work includes installing an irrigation system, provide the spare

parts for the proposed irrigation system as specified in the Special

Provisions.

k) If the Work includes sewer and storm drain installations, the

inspection shall include televising in accordance with 306-18, “VIDEO

INSPECTION”.

l) If the Work includes a Plant Establishment Period, Work in accordance

with 801-6, “MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT” shall be

completed prior to requesting Substantial Completion, unless

approved otherwise by the Owner.

m) Notify the Engineer to arrange a final inspection of any permanent

BMPs installed.

ADD:

3-13.1.2 Walk-through and Punchlist Procedure.

1. You shall notify the Engineer 15 Working Days in advance of date of anticipated

Substantial Completion to allow time for Engineer to schedule a Walk-through.

2. After you complete the requirements in 3-13.1.1, “Requirements Before

Requesting Substantial Completion” and when you consider that the Work is

Substantially Complete, you will notify the Engineer in writing that the Project

is Substantially Complete and request a Walk-through. The Engineer will

review your request and determine if the Project is ready for a Walk-through,

by verifying whether you have completed all items as required by 3-13.1.1,

“Requirements Before Requesting Substantial Completion”. Within 7 Working

Days, the City will either reject your request for a Walk-through in writing or

schedule and conduct a Walk-through inspection. The Engineer shall facilitate

the Walk-through.

3. The following documents shall be provided at the time of your Walk-through

request: As-Built markup, Plans, specifications, technical data such as

submittals and equipment manuals, draft final payment, warranties, material

certifications, bonds, guarantees, maintenance service agreements, and

maintenance and operating manuals.

4. Written warranties, except manufacturer's standard printed warranties, shall

be on a letterhead addressed to you. Warranties shall be submitted in the

format described in this section, modified as approved by the City, to suit the

conditions pertaining to the warranty. Lack of submitting these items will delay

start of Walk-through.

5. The Engineer will provide you with the Punchlist within 15 Working Days after

the date of the Walk-through. The City shall not provide a preliminary

Punchlist.

6. If the Engineer finds that the Project is not Substantially Complete as defined

herein, the Engineer will terminate the Walk-through and notify you in writing.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 69

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. If, at any time during the Engineer’s evaluation of the corrective Work required

by the Punchlist, the Engineer discovers that additional corrective Work is

required, the Engineer may include that corrective Work in the Punchlist.

8. You shall remain solely responsible for the Project Site until the Project is

completely operational, all Punchlist items have been corrected, all operation

and maintenance manuals have been approved, all necessary warranty letters

have been received, and the work is formally accepted by the City.

The Engineer shall meet with you within 5 Working Days of notification that all

Punchlist items are corrected. You shall complete the Punchlist within 30

Working Days, and the Working Days will continue to be counted until

Acceptance of the Project.

3-13.2 Acceptance. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. You shall provide the completed, signed, and stamped DS-563 to the Engineer

prior to Acceptance.

2. You shall deliver the final As-builts and final billing upon project acceptance

and prior to filing the project Notice of Completion.

3. You shall assemble and deliver to the Engineer a Final Summary Report and

Affidavit of Disposal upon project acceptance and prior to filing the project

Notice of Completion.

4. Acceptance shall occur after all of the requirements contained in the Contract

Documents have been fulfilled. If, in the Engineer’s judgment, you have fully

performed the Contract, the Engineer will recommend to the City Engineer

that your performance of the Contract be accepted. You shall receive

notification of Acceptance in writing from the Owner and counting of working

days shall cease and Warranty begins.

5. Retention can be released 35 Calendar Days after NOC. Submit your request

for retention to the Resident Engineer and they will mail to you a "Release of

Claims" form which shall be completed and returned before the retention will

be released.

3-13.3 Warranty. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. You shall warranty and repair all defective materials and workmanship for a

period of 1 year. This call back warranty period shall start on the date the Work

was accepted by the City unless the City has Beneficial Use or takes Occupancy

of the project earlier (excluding water, sewer, and storm drain projects).

2. You shall warranty the Work free from all latent defects for 10 years and patent

defects for a period of 4 years.

3. The warranty period for specific items covered under manufacturers’ or

suppliers’ warranties shall commence on the date they are placed into service

at the direction of the Engineer in writing.

4. All express warranties from Subcontractors, manufacturers’, or Suppliers’, of

any tier, for the materials furnished and Work performed shall be assigned, in

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 70

THE “WHITEBOOK”

writing, to the City, and shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to the

Acceptance of your performance of the Contract.

5. Replace or repair defective materials and workmanship in a manner

satisfactory to the Engineer after notice to do so from the Engineer and within

the time specified in the notice. If you fail to make such replacements or

repairs within the time specified in the notice, the City may perform the

replacement or repairs at your expense. If you fail to reimburse the City for

the actual costs, your Surety shall be liable for the cost

6. Items that shall be warrantied free from defective workmanship and materials

for a period longer than 1 year are as follows:

Specified Item

Minimum Warranty Period

Detectable Warning Tile Construction

3 Years of Manufacturer’s

Warranty

All Work Under SECTION 500 – PIPELINE

REHABILITATION

3 Years

Fiber Optic Interconnect Cables

2 Years

Luminaires

10 Years of Manufacturer’s

Warranty

LED Signal Modules

3 Years of Manufacturer’s

Warranty

Field Devices Associated with 700-6.3,

“Adaptive Control Note”

See 700-6.3.9, “Warranty”

* Provide documentation verifying that the induction luminaire models being

offered for the Project are covered by the 10 year warranty.

7. If installed, you shall provide the City and property owner a copy of the

manufacturer’s warranty for private sewer pumps, including the alarm panel

and all other accessories.

a) You shall involve the manufacturer in the installation and startup as

needed to secure any extended warranty required.

b) Nothing in here is intended to limit any manufacturer’s warranty which

provides the City with greater warranty rights than set forth in this

section or the Contract Documents.

c) The warranty shall include all components. The form of the warranty

shall be approved by the Engineer in accordance with 3-13.3.2,

“Warranty Format Requirements”.

8. If, during the warranty period, any item of the Work is found to be Defective

Work, you shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the City

to do so. The warranty period shall be extended with respect to portions of

the Work corrected as part of the warranty requirements.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 71

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

3-13.3.1 Defective Work.

1. If the Engineer finds any part of the Work, to be defective or not in compliance

with the Contract Documents, you shall correct the Defective Work in accordance

with the Engineer’s written instructions and within the specified time limits.

2. The Engineer may order you to stop all or part of the Project if, upon notice,

you fail to immediately correct the Defective Work in conformance with the

Contract Documents. You bear all direct and indirect costs and damages that

result from the City’s Stop Work notice.

3. The Engineer may determine in its sole discretion to accept Defective Work

instead of having you correct the Defective Work. However, you will still be

financially responsible for the Defective Work. The Engineer shall issue a

deductive Change Order and will incorporate the necessary revisions in the

Contract Documents for the Defective Work, the diminished value to the

Project, or for the cost to repair the Defective Work.

4. If you fail to correct Defective Work within the specified time limits, the

Engineer may correct your Defective Work. The City has the right to correct

any Defective Work without notice in the event of an emergency. You shall

bear all direct and indirect costs of the Defective Work that the City corrects.

5. When undertaking remedial action under this section, the City may exclude you

from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend

your Work and or Services, and incorporate into the Project all materials and

equipment stored at the Site or for which the City has paid but you have stored

elsewhere.

6. For Building Projects which require a certificate of occupancy, not including sewer

and water facilities, if you fail to correct the defective Work listed on the City’s

Punchlist within 30 Working Days after the Contract Time, you shall reimburse the

City for all costs to provide inspection services required to monitor Work beyond

the 30 Working Days. The City shall bill you for the additional inspection at the City’s

established rates.

7. If you complete the Project or portions of the Project prior to NOC, you shall

preserve equipment by developing and implementing a preventive maintenance

program in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.

ADD:

3-13.3.2 Warranty Format Requirements.

1. Written warranties, except manufacturer's standard printed warranties, shall

be on yours and your agents’, material suppliers’, installers’, or manufacturers’

own letterhead, addressed to and for the City’s benefit. Submit warranties in

the format described in this section, modified as approved by Engineer to suit

the conditions pertaining to the warranty.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 72

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Obtain warranties, executed in triplicate by responsible Subcontractors and

Suppliers, within 10 Working Days after completion of the applicable item of

Work. Except for items put into use with the Engineer’s permission with date

mutually agreed upon in writing, ensure that the beginning time of the

warranty is the project completion date.

3. Verify that the documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are

notarized.

4. Verify that warranties are signed by both you and the appropriate party.

5. Provide warranties to the Engineer with a neatly typed table of contents,

identifying each warranty with the number and title of the applicable

specification section requiring the warranty and the name of the product or

Work item.

6. Separate each warranty with index tab sheets keyed to the table of contents

listing. Provide complete information using separate typed sheets as

necessary. The information shall include a list of Subcontractors and Suppliers

with the name, address, and telephone number of the responsible principals.

ADD:

3-13.3.3 Long-Term Warranty Contract (LTWC).

1. If specified in the Special Provisions and when a LTWC is included in the

Contract Documents, you shall execute and submit the supplemental

agreement for the extended Project warranty (the LTWC covering the

workmanship and materials).

2. The first 3 years of warranty protection after installation shall be secured by

the faithful performance and payment bonds in accordance with 1-7.2,

“Contract Bonds”.

3. At the conclusion of the initial 3 year bonded warranty period, an “n”-year

subsequent manufacturer’s warranty for labor and materials shall commence

and run concurrently with the LTWC, where “n” is the number of additional

years beyond the initial 3 years as specified in the Special

Provisions. Alternatively and with respect to the 3 year bonded warranty, you

may submit a 2-year bond followed by 1-year bond. If the alternate option is

selected, the 1-year bond shall be submitted to the City at least 90 Days before

the expiration of the original 2-year bond. You shall clearly inform the Contract

Specialist of the option selected. The protection provided shall not be for less

than 3 + “n” years continuously.

4. The manufacturer’s warranty for parts and labor shall secure performance of

the LTWC by you. Additional security in the form of bonds for both the LTWC

and the manufacturer’s extended “n”-year warranty (in years 4 and on

following Acceptance) for labor and materials may, but is not required to be,

provided per the compensation provisions of the LTWC.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 73

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. The manufacturer warranty shall extend to performance of the LTWC by you,

including without limitation the performance of periodic inspections,

preparation of periodic reports, and performance of repairs or replacements

including parts and labor. If the manufacturer warranty does not expressly

extend to the LTWC or is qualified in any way to exclude warranty of the

performance of the LTWC by you, the surety bond shall be provided for the

LTWC in accordance with 1-7.2, “Contract Bonds”.

6. If you are unable to obtain a bond which extends the “n”-year term of the

LTWC, to obtain a manufacturer warranty or both which clearly and

unambiguously extends to secure performance of the LTWC by you for the “n”-

year term, the City shall accept either form of security provided that at least

one of these forms is provided before award.

7. Provision of the manufacturer’s warranty, bonds, or both as specified is a pre-

condition to award of the Contract.

8. Refer to the LTWC for additional information. The provisions of 3-3,

“SUBCONTRACTORS” shall not apply to LTWC.

ADD:

3-14 FORMAL PARTNERING.

1. You may request the formation of a formal partnering relationship

(Partnering) by submitting a request in writing to the Engineer after approval

of the Contract. If your request for Partnering is approved by the Engineer,

scheduling of a Partnering workshop, selecting the Partnering facilitator and

workshop, selecting the Partnering facilitator and workshop site, and other

administrative details shall be as agreed to by both Parties.

2. The establishment of a Partnering shall not change or modify the terms and

conditions of the Contract and shall not relieve either party of the legal

requirements of the contract.

3. The goals of partnering include the following:

a) The Engineer and your representatives, including your Subcontractors,

actively working together as partners.

b) Avoidance of destructive confrontation and litigation among the

parties.

c) Mutual understanding on how the Work is to be conducted.

d) Establishment of mutual key results to facilitate Project success.

e) Establishment of an atmosphere of team work, trust, and open

communication.

3-14.1 Payment.

1. The payment for providing a facilitator and a workshop site shall be borne

equally by the City and you. You shall pay in advance all compensation for the

costs of the facilitator and for the costs of obtaining the workshop site.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 74

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Unless a Bid item has been provided for “Partnering”, the City’s share of such

costs shall be reimbursed to you as Extra Work. Markups shall not be added.

Other costs associated with the Partnering relationship shall be borne

separately by the party incurring the costs.

ADD:

3-15 SITE ACTIVITIES BY THE CITY OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS.

3-15.1 The City’s Right to Award Separate Contracts.

1. The City reserves the right to perform work or operations outside the Scope

of Work of the Contract related to the Project with City Forces, Separate

Contractors, or both. If work to be performed by another party was not noted

in the Contract, the City shall give written notice to you 10 Working Days prior

to the start of any work. If you determine that the work being performed by

the City or others may interfere with or cause damage to Work being

performed by you, notify the Engineer in writing within 3 Working Days of the

Engineer’s notice.

3-15.2 Integration of the Work with Separate Contractors.

1. When specified in the Contract Documents, prepare a plan in order to

integrate the work performed by Separate Contractors, City Forces, or both

with the performance of the Work and submit the plan to the Engineer for

approval. The plan shall be fair and reasonable for you and the Separate

Contractors. Work with Separate Contractors to reach an agreement for the

prepared plan. Arrange the performance of the Work so that the Work and the

work of the Separate Contractors are, to the extent applicable, properly

integrated and jointed in a manner that avoids any damage to the Work or to

the work of the Separate Contractors.

3-15.3 Coordination.

1. Coordinate your activities and the Schedule with the activities and schedules

of the Separate Contractors and make any revisions to the Schedule deemed

necessary to avoid any disruption to the Work or to the work of the Separate

Contractors.

3-15.4 Use of Site.

1. Provide the City and the Separate Contractors reasonable opportunities for

the storage of materials and equipment and performance of their work.

Connect and coordinate Work and operations with the work and operations

of the City and the Separate Contractors as required by the Contract

Documents.

2. Coordinate traffic control with the Separate Contractors for other projects and

minimize the impact to the community. Prior to the start of construction,

submit your plan for coordination.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 75

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3-15.5 Deficiency in Work of Separate Contractors.

1. If part of your Work depends on proper execution or results upon construction

or operations by the City or a Separate Contractor, prior to proceeding with

that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Separate Contractor and the

Engineer any apparent discrepancies or defects in construction that would

render it unsuitable for proper execution and results. Use good faith efforts to

resolve any such discrepancies or defects or any related disagreements. Your

failure to report constitutes your acceptance of the Work of Separate

Contractors as fit, proper, and coordinated with the Work.

3-15.6 Payment.

1. Payment for reporting deficiencies, coordinating, and resolving discrepancies

shall be included in the Contract Price.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 76

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS

4-2 PROTECTION. ADD the following:

1. Repair or replace any equipment and materials in the event of vandalism,

damage, or theft at no additional cost to the City.

4-3.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Materials typically accepted by Certificate of Compliance shall not require

inspection at the source unless specified in the Special Provisions. For a list

of these items or materials, you may refer to the Contract Documents.

2. Location changes to the source of materials requiring inspection without the

required 24 hour notification may result in non-compliant material subject to

rejection. You shall be responsible for staff charges resulting from last minute

changes or cancellations once staff has been deployed. The Engineer shall

issue a deductive Field Order for a minimum of 2 hours of staff time to

reimburse the City for misdirected staff charges. For private contracts, the

permittee shall be notified in writing of the additional staff charges incurred.

3. Steel pipe in sizes larger than 18 inches shall require inspection at the source

of production.

4. City lab staff or a qualified inspection agency approved by the Engineer shall

witness all welding, lining, coating, and testing. You shall incur additional

inspection costs outlined in 4-3.3, “Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced”.

5. All parts of production (including but not limited to product fabrication,

welding, testing, lining, and coating of straight pieces and specials) shall be

performed or produced in the United States.

6. Welding and all testing shall be performed by certified welders and testing

staff with credentials traceable in the United States.

4-3.2 Inspection by the Agency. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The City will provide inspection and testing laboratory services within 200-

mile radius of the geographical limits of the City.

4-3.3 Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with the following:

1. When you intend to purchase materials, fabricated products, or equipment

from sources located more than 200 miles (321.9 km) outside the geographical

limits of the City, City Lab staff or a qualified inspection agency approved by

the Engineer, shall be engaged at your expense to inspect the materials,

equipment, or process.

2. This approval shall be obtained before producing any material or equipment.

City Lab staff or inspector shall evaluate the materials for conformance with

the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. You shall forward reports

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 77

THE “WHITEBOOK”

required by the Engineer. No materials or equipment shall be shipped nor

shall any processing, fabrication or treatment of such materials be done

without proper inspection by City Lab staff or the approved agent. Approval

by said agent shall not relieve you of responsibility for complying with the

requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. The Engineer may elect City Lab staff to perform inspection of an out-of-town

manufacturer. You shall incur additional inspection costs of the Engineer

including lodging, meals, and incidental expenses based on Federal Per Diem

Rates, along with travel and car rental expenses. If the manufacturing plant

operates a double shift, a double shift shall be figured in the inspection costs.

a) At the option of the Engineer, full time inspection shall continue for the

length of the manufacturing period. If the manufacturing period will

exceed 3 consecutive weeks, you shall incur additional inspection

expenses of the Engineer's supervisor for a trip of 2 Working Days to

the site per month.

b) When the Engineer elects City Lab staff to perform out-of-town

inspections, the wages of staff employed by the City shall not be part

of the additional inspection expenses paid by you.

c) Federal Per Diem Rates can be determined at the location below:

https://www.gsa.gov/portal/content/104877

4. Specialty Testing of Foreign Materials.

a) Materials that are manufactured, produced, or fabricated outside of

the United States shall be delivered to a distribution point in California,

unless otherwise specified. Quality Control and related testing shall

be performed to all applicable specified US standards. Manufacturer’s

testing and staff certification shall be traceable to a United States

regulatory agency. Retain the materials for a sufficient period of time

to permit inspection, sampling, and testing. You shall not be entitled

to an extension of time for acts or events occurring outside of, at point

of entry, or during transport to the United States

ADD:

4-3.4 Specialty Inspection Paid for by the Contractor.

1. You shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified inspection agency to

perform specialty inspection services as required by the Contract Documents.

4-3.4.1 Payment.

1. The payment for the specialty inspection service Work shall be included under

the Bid item for “Specialty Inspection Paid For By the Contractor”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 78

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. When an Allowance Bid item for “Specialty Testing Under the Direction of the

Engineer” is provided, you shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified

third party independent laboratory to perform the required testing. You shall

be reimbursed for the cost of testing under this Bid item.

ADD:

4-3.5 Special Inspection.

1. Special Inspection and testing by the Special Inspectors shall meet the

minimum requirements of the prevailing Codes and by the Development

Services Department (DSD) and is referenced at:

http://www.sandiego.gov/development-services/industry/index.shtml

2. Each Special Inspector shall be certified by DSD prior to performing any duties.

Special Inspectors shall carry approved identification, as stipulated by the DSD,

when performing the function of a Special Inspector.

3. Responsibilities:

a) You shall notify the Special Inspector prior to performing any item of

Work that requires Special Inspection and shall review the Contract

Documents and perform any necessary preparatory Work at the Site.

b) You are responsible for providing the Special Inspector access to Plans

and Specifications at the Project’s Site.

c) You are responsible for retaining at the Site all Special Inspection

records submitted by the Special Inspector and providing these

records for review by the DSD inspector upon request.

d) You shall not perform any items of Work that requires Special

Inspection without the presence of the Special Inspector(s) during the

performance of that Work. Work requiring continuous inspection

performed without Special Inspection is subject to removal.

e) You shall employ a sufficient number of Special Inspectors to assure

inspection of all Work requiring Special Inspection without hindering

the progress of the Work.

f) The Special Inspector shall comply with all requirements of DSD and

the building permit.

g) Upon completion of the task requiring Special Inspection, you shall

submit to the Engineer all Special Inspection reports that certify that

the Work requiring Special Inspection has been completed in

accordance with the Contract Documents and the applicable building

codes and approved by the Engineer and DSD.

4. You shall ensure the following requirements are met by the Special Inspectors

employed by you.

a) The Special Inspector is not authorized to do any of the following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 79

THE “WHITEBOOK”

i. Inspect or approve any items of Work for which the building

permit has not been issued.

ii. Inspect or approve any items of Work before DSD has made

the initial inspection. Deviations from this procedure shall be

requested in writing from DSD.

iii. Inspect or approve any items of Work other than that for which

they are specifically certified.

iv. Accept alternate materials, structural changes, or revisions to

the Plans.

b) The Special Inspector shall observe the Work for conformance with the

DSD approved Plans and Specifications. Shop Drawings, Working

Drawings, or both may be used only as an aid to inspection. Special

Inspections shall be performed on a continuous basis. The Special

Inspector shall be on site at all times observing the Work requiring

Special Inspection.

c) The Special Inspector shall bring nonconforming items to your immediate

attention and shall note all such items in the daily report. If any item is not

resolved in a timely manner or is about to be incorporated in the Work,

the Special Inspector shall immediately notify DSD (by telephone or in

person) and the Engineer and shall post a discrepancy notice.

d) Each Special Inspector shall complete and sign both the Special

Inspection record and the daily report form for each daily inspection

to remain at the Site with you for review.

e) The Special Inspector or inspection agency shall furnish weekly reports

of tests and inspections directly to the Engineer, DSD, and others as

designated on the Plans, permits, or in these specifications. These

reports shall include the following:

i. Descriptions of daily inspections and tests made with

applicable locations.

ii. Listings of all nonconforming items.

iii. Reports on how nonconforming items were resolved or

unresolved as applicable.

iv. Itemized changes authorized by the Engineer and DSD if not

included in the nonconformance items list.

f) The Special Inspector shall submit a final signed report to the Engineer

and DSD stating that Work requiring Special Inspection and testing were

inspected, tested, reported, and, to the best of Special Inspector’s

knowledge, is in conformance with the approved drawings and Contract

Documents, approved revisions, and the applicable workmanship

provisions of the building codes, whichever is in effect on the permitted

Plans. Items not in conformance, unresolved items, or any discrepancies

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 80

THE “WHITEBOOK”

in inspection coverage (missed inspections, periodic inspections when

continuous was required, and etc.) shall be specifically itemized in this

report.

g) Final inspection of the structure shall not be scheduled until the final

report for all Work items requiring Special Inspection have been

reviewed and approved by the Engineer and DSD.

4-3.5.1 Payment.

1. The payment for the special inspection and testing Work shall be included in

the Contract Price.

ADD:

4-3.6 Preapproved Materials.

1. Materials such as concrete, asphalt concrete, slurry, backfill and bedding,

gravel, crushed rock, and other materials that are not produced or delivered

until the day they are used do not require a submittal if they are determined

by the Engineer to be standard materials provided in conformance with Part

2, “CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS” and Part 5, “SYSTEM REHABILITATION” unless

specified otherwise. You shall be required to submit if you intend to provide

materials that deviate or does not comply with the standard specifications.

2. For materials listed on the City’s Approved Materials List (AML), in lieu of the

submittal, you shall certify in writing, that the proposed equipment and

material to be incorporated in the Work complies with the Contract

requirements and the AML.

3. You shall submit in writing a list of all products to be incorporated in the Work

that are on the AML.

4-6 TRADE NAMES. ADD the following:

1. Whenever materials or equipment are indicated in the Contract Documents

by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier,

the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, function, and quality

required.

2. Unless stated otherwise, materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be

accepted if sufficient information is submitted to the Engineer for review to

determine whether the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal

to that named.

3. For reviews prior to Bid:

a) The Engineer shall respond to your substitution proposal by at least 3

Working Days prior to the Bid due date. If the Engineer fails to respond

to your substitution proposal within the specified time period, the

substitution proposal shall be deemed denied.

b) You may bring forward a substitution proposal after Award that was denied

based on the Engineer’s failure to respond by submitting a Cost Reduction

Proposal in accordance with 2-6.1, “Cost Reduction Proposal”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 81

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. Include the following information in the request for substitution:

a) Whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work shall

require a change in any of the Contract Documents to adopt the design

to the proposed substitute.

b) Whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection

with the Work is subject to the payment of any license fee or royalty.

c) All variations of the proposed substitute from the items originally

specified shall be identified.

d) Available maintenance, repair, and replacement service requirements.

The manufacturer shall have a local service agency within 50 miles

(80.5 km) of the site which maintains properly trained personnel and

adequate spare parts and is able to respond and complete repairs

within 24 hours.

e) Certifications that the proposed substitute shall perform functions

adequately, achieve the results called for by the general design, be

similar and of equal substance to that indicated, and be suited to the

same use as that specified.

5. There is no guaranteed time frame for the Engineer’s review of the

substitution requests. Any lack of action on the Engineer’s side within your

requested time does not constitute acceptance of the substitution.

6. The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitute

product, material or equipment shall be upon you. The Engineer may require

at your expense additional data about the proposed substitute.

7. Acceptance by the Engineer of a substitute item does not relieve you of the

responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents. If the Engineer

takes no exceptions to the proposed substitution, it shall not relieve you from

your responsibility to the efficiency, sufficiency, quality, and performance of

the substitute material or equipment in the same manner and degree as the

material and equipment specified by name.

8. Refer to the AML standard review process for the substitution review process

or to have materials listed on the AML. See 3-8.1, “General”.

9. The Bid submittal shall be based on the material and equipment specified by

name in the Contract. If the proposal is rejected by the Engineer, you shall not

be entitled to either an extension in Contract Time, an increase in the Contract

Price, or both.

10. As applicable, no Shop Drawing or Working Drawing submittals shall be made

for a substitute item nor shall any substitute item be ordered, installed, or

utilized without the Engineer's prior written approval.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 82

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

5-1 LAWS AND REGULATIONS. ADD the following:

1. If you observe that the Contract Documents are at variance with any laws,

ordinances, rules, or regulations, you shall promptly notify the Engineer in

writing of such variance. The Engineer shall promptly review the matter and, if

necessary, shall issue a Change Order or take any other action necessary to

bring about compliance with the law, ordinance, rule, or regulation in

question.

ADD:

5-1.1 Environmental and Safety Laws.

1. The following is a partial list of specific laws that you shall be aware of and

shall comply with:

a) Environmental Protection Agency regulations (40 CFR, Part 15).

b) Clean Air Act of 1970 [§306 (42 U.S.C. 7606), Executive Order 11738

prohibiting contracting with Clean Air Act violators and §§608 and 609

(42 U.S.C. 7671g, 7671h) as amended November 15, 1990 prohibiting

the intentional release of chlorofluorocarbons into the environment

when performing Work].

c) Clean Water Grant Program Bulletin 76A which augments the National

Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16 U.S.C. 470) as specified under

§01560, "Temporary Environmental Controls" of the General

Requirements.

d) CAL OSHA 5189 “Process Safety Management,” CAL OSHA 3220

“Emergency Action Plan,” Federal OSHA 29, CFR 1910, facilities Process

Safety Management (PSM) manual, and the City’s Risk Management

Plan.

e) California Title 8, §5208 and §1529, and Title 40 CFR Part 61.

f) Flood Disaster Protection Act of 1973 (42 USC 4001 et seq, as

amended).

g) Senate Bill 198 and specifically shall have a written Injury Prevention

Program on file with the City in accordance with all applicable

standards, orders, or requirements of California Labor Code, §6401.7.

This Program shall be submitted to the Engineer at the Pre-

Construction Meeting.

h) State Energy Conservation Plan issued in compliance with the Energy

Policy and Conservation Act (P.L. 94-163) as set forth in Division 15 of

the Public Resources Code of the State.

i) Clean Water Act (CWA) - The Federal Water Pollution Control Act

enacted in 1972 by Public Law 92-500 and amended by the Water

Quality Act of 1987. The Clean Water Act prohibits the discharge of

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 83

THE “WHITEBOOK”

pollutants to Waters of the United States unless said discharge is in

accordance with an NPDES permit. The 1987 amendments include

guidelines for regulating municipal, industrial, and construction storm

water discharges under the NPDES program.

j) Endangered Species Act of 1973 (ESA; 7 U.S.C. §136, 16 U.S.C. §1531 et

seq).

ADD:

5-1.2 California Building Code, California Code of Regulations Title 24 and Americans

with Disabilities Act.

1. You shall warrant and certify that all Project Plans and Specifications prepared

by you in accordance with the Contract meet all current requirements of the

California Building Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, and the

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). As a condition precedent to Award of the

Contract, submit to City the Contractor/Design-Builder Certification for Title

24/ADA Compliance.

2. You shall comply with all portions of the ADA and Title 24. For specific services

and public accommodations, you may contact:

The Office of ADA Compliance

and Accessibility at ADACompliance@sandiego.gov or 619-236-5979.

3. You acknowledge and agree that you are aware of and shall comply with

Council Policy 100-04, incorporated herein by this reference, adopted by

Resolution No. R-282153, relating to the federally-mandated ADA.

4. You and your Subcontractors are responsible for administering your own ADA

and Title 24 program in your Work area. You shall ensure that these ADA

requirements are included in the subcontracts.

5. You shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by the City in

undertaking remedial action to correct your violations of ADA or Title 24. The

City shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if

the Parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the City may

unilaterally issue the Change Order.

6. Code Implementation:

a) The most current and adopted Americans with Disabilities Act

Accessibility Standards.

b) The most current Public Rights – of – Way Accessibility Guidelines.

c) The most current and adopted California Building Code, California

Code of Regulations (Title 24) Accessibility Guidelines – Chapter 11B

Accessibility to Public Accommodations, Commercial Buildings and

Publicly Funded Housing.

7. The City’s Resolution No. R-282153 and Council Policy 100-04 apply equally to

you and all Subcontractors. For the purpose of City’s Resolution No. R-282153

and Council Policy 100-04, the following definitions shall apply:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 84

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) “Qualified individual with a disability” means an individual with a

disability who satisfies the requisite skill, experience, education, and

other job-related requirements of the employment position such

individual holds or desires, and who, with or without reasonable

accommodation, can perform the essential functions of the position.

b) “Employee” means your employee.

8. You shall certify to the City that you shall comply with the ADA by adhering to

all of the provisions of the ADA listed. See Contract Forms.

9. You shall not discriminate against qualified persons with disabilities in any

aspects of employment including recruitment, hiring, promotions, conditions

and privileges of employment, training, compensation, benefits, discipline,

layoffs, and termination of employment.

10. No qualified individual with a disability may be excluded on the basis of

disability, from participation in, or be denied the benefits of services,

programs, or activities by you or your Subcontractors providing services for

the City.

11. You shall post a statement addressing the requirements of the ADA in a

prominent place at the Work Site.

12. You shall require in each subcontract that your Subcontractor shall abide by

these provisions.

13. Questions about the City’s ADA Policy should be referred to the City’s Contract

Specialist.

ADD:

5-1.3 Drug-Free Workplace.

1. The Contract is subject to the City’s Resolution No. R-277952 adopted on May

20, 1991. You shall become aware of the provisions of Council Policy 100-17

which was established by Resolution No. R-277952. The policy applies equally

to you and your Subcontractors. The elements of the policy are outlined below.

2. Definitions:

a) “Drug-free Workplace” means a site for the performance of Work done

in connection with a contract with the City for the construction,

maintenance, or repair of any facility or public work by an entity at

which employees of the entity are prohibited from engaging in the

unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use

of a controlled substance in accordance with the requirements of this

section.

b) “Employee” means your employee.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 85

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) “Controlled substance” means a controlled substance in schedules I

through V of Section 202 of the Controlled Substances Act (21 U.S.C.

Sec. 812).

d) “Contractor” means You.

3. Prior to Award, you shall certify to the City that you shall provide a Drug-free

Workplace by doing all of the following:

a) Publishing a statement notifying employees that the unlawful

manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a

controlled substance is prohibited in the person's organization's

workplace and specifying the actions that shall be taken against

employees for violations of the prohibition.

b) Establishing a drug-free awareness program to inform employees

about all of the following:

i. The dangers of drug abuse in the workplace.

ii. The person's or organization's policy of maintaining a Drug-

free Workplace.

iii. Any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee

assistance programs.

iv. The penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug

abuse violations.

c) Posting the statement required by subsection “a” in a prominent place

at your main office. For projects large enough to necessitate a

construction trailer at the Site, the required signage would also be

posted at the Site.

d) You shall require in each Subcontract that your Subcontractor shall

abide by these provisions. You and your Subcontractors are

individually responsible for your own Drug-free Workplace programs.

e) The requirements of a drug-free awareness program can be satisfied

by periodic tailgate sessions covering the various aspects of drug-

abuse education. Although an in-house employee assistance program

is not required, you should be able to provide a listing of drug

rehabilitation and counseling programs available in the community at

large.

f) Refer questions about the City’s Drug-free Workplace Policy to the

Contract Administrator.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 86

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

5-1.4 Contractor Standards and Pledge of Compliance.

1. The Contract is subject to City’s Municipal Code §22.3004 as amended

10/29/13 by ordinance O-20316.

2. You shall complete a Pledge of Compliance attesting under penalty of perjury

that you complied with the requirements of this section.

3. You shall ensure that all Subcontractors complete a Pledge of Compliance

attesting under penalty of perjury that they complied with the requirements

of this section.

4. You shall require in each subcontract that the Subcontractor shall abide by the

provisions of the City’s Municipal Code §22.3004. A sample provision is as

follows:

“Compliance with San Diego Municipal Code §22.3004: The Subcontractor

acknowledges that it is familiar with the requirements of San Diego

Municipal Code §22.3004 (“Contractor Standards”), and agrees to comply

with requirements of that section. The Subcontractor further agrees to

complete the Pledge of Compliance, incorporated herein by reference.”

ADD:

5-1.5 Equal Benefits.

1. The Contract is subject to the City’s Equal Benefits Ordinance (EBO), Chapter 2,

Article 2, Division 43 of the San Diego Municipal Code (SDMC).

2. In accordance with the EBO, you shall certify that you shall provide and

maintain equal benefits as defined in SDMC §22.4302 for the duration of the

Contract [SDMC §22.4304(f)]. Failure to maintain equal benefits is a material

breach of the Contract [SDMC §22.4304(e)].

3. You shall notify employees of their equal benefits policy at the time of hire and

during open enrollment periods and shall post a copy of the following

statement in an area frequented by employees:

“During the performance of a Contract with the City of San Diego, this

employer shall provide equal benefits to its employees with spouses and

its employees with domestic partners.”

4. You shall give the Engineer access to documents and records sufficient for the

Engineer to verify that you are providing equal benefits and otherwise

complying with EBO requirements.

5. Full text of the EBO and the Rules Implementing the Equal Benefits Ordinance

can be requested from the Equal Benefits Program at (619) 533-3948.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 87

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

5-1.6 Notice of Labor Compliance Program Approval.

1. The City received initial approval as a Labor Compliance Program on August

11, 2003. The Labor Compliance Program Manual is available at

http://www.sandiego.gov/eoc/laborcompliance/#manual

2. The limited exemption from prevailing wages pursuant to Labor Code

§1771.5(a) does not apply to contracts under jurisdiction of the Labor

Compliance Program.

3. Inquiries, questions, or assistance about the Labor Compliance Program

should be directed to: Equal Opportunity Contracting Program, 1200 Third

Ave., Suite 200 MS56P, San Diego, CA 92101, Tel. 619-236-6000.

ADD:

5-1.7 Equal Pay Ordinance.

1. You shall comply with the Equal Pay Ordinance (EPO) codified in the San Diego

Municipal Code (SDMC) in section 22.4801 through 22.4809, unless

compliance is not required based on an exception listed in SDMC section

22.4804.

2. You shall require all of your Subcontractors to certify compliance with the EPO

in their written subcontracts.

3. You shall post a notice informing your employees of their rights under the EPO

in the workplace or job site.

4. By signing this Contract with the City of San Diego, you acknowledge the EPO

requirements and pledge ongoing compliance with the requirements of SDMC

Division 48, section 22.4801 et seq., throughout the duration of this Contract.

5-3.3 Payroll Records. ADD the following:

1. Your attention is directed to the City of San Diego Labor Compliance Program,

Section IV, pages 4-7, and the State of California Labor Code §§1771.5(b) and

1776 (Stats. 1978, Ch. 1249). These require, in part, that you and your

Subcontractors maintain and furnish to the City, at a designated time, a

certified copy of each weekly payroll containing a statement of compliance

signed under penalty of perjury.

2. You and your Subcontractors shall submit weekly certified payrolls reflecting

the wages of all yours and Subcontractors’ employees engaged in the Work

online via Prism®, the City’s web-based labor compliance program.

5-6 PATENTS FEES AND ROYALTIES. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. You shall pay, at no additional cost to the City, all applicable royalties and

license fees arising from the Work. You shall indemnify and defend all claims

and lawsuits for infringement of patent, trademark, and copyrights against the

City and shall hold the City harmless from any loss.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 88

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-7.1.1 General. ADD the following:

1. When trenching, place your name and emergency telephone number adjacent

to the Work at intervals and locations approved by the Engineer. The method

of marking shall be approved by the Engineer.

2. Respond and initiate corrective action in accordance with OSHA and within 24

hours of the notice of the nonconforming Work that poses an imminent threat

to person or property.

ADD:

5-7.1.4 Emergency Drills.

1. When specified, you shall participate in the City’s initiated emergency drills.

Make yourself familiar with the emergency evacuation routes and procedures

in the event of an emergency. Drills are conducted annually and are scheduled

a year in advance. Further information prior to bidding is available upon

request from our Safety and Security Officer or the Facility Managers for the

facility included in the Project. The information includes a listing of dates for

upcoming Emergency Evacuation Drills.

2. Reflect the drill activities in the Schedule. Approved delay times caused by

unscheduled drills may be added to the Schedule and shall be treated as Extra

Work.

3. The payment for complying with this provision shall be included in the Bid item

for “Emergency Drills”.

ADD:

5-7.1.3 Health and Safety Plan (HSP).

1. You are ultimately responsible for the health and safety of your employees

and personnel entering your project site. These specifications shall not be

construed to limit your liability nor to assume that the City, its employees, or

designate shall assume any of your liability associated with Site safety

considerations.

2. You shall have a HSP in effect at least 1 week prior to the commencement of

the Work. The HSP shall comply with all OSHA and other applicable

requirements.

3. The HSP shall specifically address procedures and protocols that shall be

followed to monitor for the presence of hazardous atmosphere, possibility for

engulfment, gasses due to organic soils or proximity to landfills, exposure to

hazardous products such as may be released when grinding, cutting, or

torching galvanized or painted surfaces, contaminated soil, and groundwater.

Identify response actions that shall be taken when these conditions are

encountered.

4. The City shall not assume any role in determining the adequacy of the HSP on

your behalf.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 89

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-7.5.1 Confined Space Entry Program (CSEP). To paragraph (2), subsection “a”, DELETE in

its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

a) Training of personnel including both yours and the Engineer.

ADD:

5-7.7.3 Playground Safety.

1. Provide a secured fence around the playground to prevent use or access. Do

not remove the fence until the independent Playground Safety Audit has been

done by you and the Engineer, the Engineer has accepted the playground

design and installation, and the Punchlist items have been completed.

2. Provide certification by a National Playground Safety Institute (NPSI) certified

playground inspector that confirms that the installed equipment is compliant

with all applicable codes.

ADD:

5-7.7.4 Payment.

1. The payment for security fencing Work for open excavations shall be included

in the Contract Price.

2. The payment for the fencing around the playground and the playground safety

audit is included in the Contract Price.

5-7.8.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Protect transverse or longitudinal cuts, voids, trenches, holes, and excavations

in the right-of-way that cannot be properly completed within 1 Working Day

by adequately designed barricades and structural steel plates (plates) that

shall support legal vehicle loads in such a way as to preserve unobstructed

traffic flow.

2. Secure approval in advance from authorities concerning the use of any

bridging proposed on the Work.

3. Shore the trench adequately to support the bridging and traffic loads.

4. Design plates for HS 20-44 truck loading in accordance with Caltrans Bridge

Design Specifications Manual. Evaluate soil conditions and ensure that the

plate extends enough beyond the trench walls to support traffic loads.

5. Make the surface of the plates skid-resistant with a nominal Coefficient of

Friction (COF) of 0.35 as determined by California Test Method 342.

6. Plates shall provide complete coverage to prevent any person, bicycle,

motorcycle, or motor vehicle from being endangered due to plate movement

causing separations or gaps.

7. Alternative installation methods may be submitted in accordance with

3-8, “SUBMITTALS” for the Engineer’s approval.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 90

THE “WHITEBOOK”

8. You shall install signage and postings with a 2 inch (50.8 mm) minimum letter

height indicating the steel plate cover load limit, the Company’s name, and a

24 hour emergency contact phone number. See 601-1, “GENERAL”.

9. You are responsible for the maintenance of the plates, shoring, and asphalt

concrete ramps or any other approved device used to secure the plates. You

shall immediately mobilize necessary personnel and equipment after being

notified by the Engineer, the City’s “Station 38”, or a member of the public of a

repair needed for such items as plate movements, noise, anchors, and asphalt

ramps. Failure to respond to the emergency request within 2 hours shall be

grounds for the City to perform necessary repairs that shall be invoiced at the

actual cost including overhead or $500 per incident, whichever is greater.

10. When plates are removed, repair any damage to the pavement with fine

graded asphalt concrete mix or slurry seal satisfactory to the Engineer.

ADD:

5-8 INFORMATION SECURITY POLICY (ISP).

1. The Contract is subject to the City’s Information Security Policy as defined in

the City’s Administrative Regulation 90.63. By submitting a Bid, you agree to

fully comply with the ISP. Full text of the ISP and the Administrative Regulation

90.63 can be requested from the Contract Specialist.

2. Your failure to abide by the City’s Administrative Regulation 90.63 shall be a

breach of the Contract. You shall notify employees of their ISP responsibilities

and shall post a copy of the following statement in an area frequented by

employees who access the City’s computer systems:

a) Uses of City computer equipment, network services, electronic

systems, and electronic data, including Email and Internet services, are

for City business or Work-related purposes. The use of City computer

equipment or information technology services for personal use shall

be prohibited.

b) Computer files developed, created, or enhanced within the scope and

course of City contract employment, or a City third-party contractual

relationship, are the property of the City of San Diego regardless of

their physical location or the form in which they are maintained.

c) The City reserves the right to access and disclose all messages and

other electronic data sent over its Email systems or stored in computer

files on City Computer Equipment. The City-related computer files

created, developed, or enhanced on remote access personal

computers shall be provided upon the City’s request in City standard

formats.

d) Users shall be responsible in their use of City computer equipment and

network services. Any action that may cause interference with City

computer systems, exposes the City’s computer systems to risk, or

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 91

THE “WHITEBOOK”

adversely impacts the work of others in using these computer systems

is prohibited.

e) Every end user shall have a single unique user ID and a personal

password which shall be kept confidential. This user ID and password

shall be required for access to all multi-user computer equipment and

network services. User passwords shall comply with the Information

Security Guidelines and Standards.

f) Users accessing City computer systems are prohibited from gaining

unauthorized access to any other computer systems or in any way

damaging, altering, or disrupting the operations of these systems.

Users are prohibited from capturing or otherwise obtaining

passwords, encryption keys, or any other access control mechanism

which could permit unauthorized access.

g) You shall give the Engineer access to documents and records sufficient

for the Engineer to verify that you are complying with ISP

requirements.

ADD:

5-9 INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT.

1. You shall defend, indemnify, protect, and hold harmless the City, the City’s

agents, officers, and employees, from and against all claims asserted, or

liability established for damages or injuries to any person or property resulting

from your action or failure to take the necessary measures to prevent such

damages and injuries.

2. You are responsible for the payment of any fines resulting from citations

issued to the City by either the federal, state, or local environmental and safety

enforcement agencies due to your failure to abide by applicable safety, health,

and environmental standards.

3. You agree to defend, indemnify, protect and hold the City, the City’s agents,

officers, and employees, harmless from and against any dispute between you

and your Subcontractors if the City is made a party to any judicial or

administrative proceeding.

4. The obligation to indemnify shall be effective even if the City, the City’s agents,

officers, or employees established passive negligence contributes to the loss

or claim. You agree that the City may elect to conduct its own defense or

participate in its own defense of any claim related to this project. Your duty to

indemnify and hold harmless does not include any claims or liability arising

from the established active or sole negligence or willful misconduct of the City,

its officers, or employees.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 92

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

5-10 COMMUNITY OUTREACH.

5-10.1 General.

1. To ensure consistency with the City’s community outreach plan for the project,

the City shall work with you to inform the public (which includes, but shall not

be limited to, property owners, renters, homeowners, business owners,

recreational users, and other community members and stakeholders) of

construction impacts. Your efforts to mitigate construction impacts by

communicating with the public require close coordination and cooperation

with the City.

2. You shall perform the community outreach activities required throughout the

Contract Time. You shall assign a staff member who shall perform the required

community outreach services.

3. You shall closely coordinate the Work with the businesses, institutions,

residents, and property owners impacted by the Project.

4. Your example duties include notifying businesses, institutions, and residents

of the commencement of construction activities not less than 5 Working Days

in advance, coordinating access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic to

businesses, institutions, and residences impacted by the Project, reporting

activities at all Project progress meetings scheduled by the Engineer, attending

the Project pre-construction meeting, attending 2 community meetings,

responding to community questions and complaints related to your activities,

and documenting, in writing, as well as logging in all inquiries and complaints

received into the City’s internal public contact tracking system.

5. You shall execute the Information Security Policy (ISP) Acknowledgement Form

- For Non-City Employees within 15 Working Days of the award of the Contract

if any of the following apply:

a) Your contact information is made available on any outreach materials.

b) You will be the primary point of contact to resolve project related

inquiries and complaints.

6. Electronic Communication.

a) All inquiries and complaints shall be logged in to the City’s internal public

contact tracking system within 24 hours of receipt of inquiries and

complaints.

b) Any updates or a resolution of inquiries and complaints shall be

documented in the City’s internal public contact tracking system within

24 hours.

c) Copies of email communications shall be saved individually on to the

City’s internal public contact tracking system in an Outlook Message

Format (*.msg).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 93

THE “WHITEBOOK”

d) All graphics, photos, and other electronic files associated with inquiries

and/or complaints shall be saved into the individual records, located

within the City’s internal public contact tracking system.

5-10.1.1 Quality Assurance.

1. During the course of community outreach, you shall ensure that the character

of all persons that conduct community outreach (distributing door hangers,

attending community meetings, interacting with the public, and etc.) on your

behalf shall:

a) Have the ability to speak and comprehend English and/or Spanish, as

appropriate for the community or public they are informing.

b) Possess and display easily verifiable and readable personal

identification that identifies the person as your employee.

c) Have the interpersonal skills to effectively, professionally, and tactfully

represent you, the project, and the City to the public.

5-10.1.2 Submittals.

1. You shall submit to the Resident Engineer, for review and approval, all drafts

of letters, notices, postcards, door hangers, signs, mailing lists, proposed

addresses for hand-delivery, and any other notices and letters that are to be

mailed and or distributed to the public.

a) Prior to distributing or mailing, you shall submit final drafts of letters,

notices, postcards, door hangers, signs, and any other notices and letters

to the Resident Engineer for final review and approval. Submit a PDF copy

of the approved door hangers to the Engineer.

b) After distributing or mailing, you shall submit verification of delivery and

any copies of returned notices to the Resident Engineer. Submit a PDF

copy of the approved letters and notices to the Engineer.

2. You shall use the City’s internal public contact tracking system to identify and

summarize communications (via phone, in person, and email) with the public

within 24 hours of receipt, even if your response to the individual is still

incomplete. You shall upload to the City’s internal public contact tracking

system copies of all written, electronic, and verbal communications and

conversations with the public.

5-10.2 Community Outreach Services.

5-10.2.1 Public Notice by Contractor.

1. Post Project Identification Signs in accordance with 3-11.2, “Project

Identification Signs”.

2. No less than 5 Working Days in advance of Project construction activities and

utility service interruptions, you shall notify all critical facilities, businesses,

institutions, property owners, residents, or any other impacted stakeholders

within a minimum 300-foot (90 m) radius of the Project and also any other

affected areas as shown on the “Notification of Planned Water Shutdown”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 94

THE “WHITEBOOK”

when you perform the Work. Verbal and written notifications shall be sent to

critical facilities (including but not limited to police stations, fire stations,

hospitals, and schools). A copy of written notifications sent to any critical

facility shall also be sent to the Resident Engineer. You shall keep records of

the people contacted, along with the dates of notification, and shall provide

the record to the Engineer upon request. You shall identify all other critical

facilities that need to be notified.

3. Furnish and distribute public notices in the form of door hangers using the

City’s format to all occupants and/or property owners along streets:

a) Where Work is to be performed at least Working 5 Working Days

before starting construction, or survey activities, or impacting the

community as approved by the Resident Engineer.

b) Within 5 Working Days of the completion of your construction activities

where Work was performed, you shall distribute public notices in the

form of door hangers, which outlines the anticipated dates of Asphalt

Resurfacing, Slurry Seal, Sidewalk, or Curb Ramp Work.

c) 72 hours in advance of the scheduled resurfacing, Sidewalk, or Curb

Ramp Work.

4. Leave the door hanger notices on or at the front door of each dwelling and

apartment unit and at each tenant of commercial buildings abutting each of

the street block segments. Where the front doors of apartment units are

inaccessible, distribute the door hanger notices to the apartment manager or

security officer.

5. Door Hanger Material: You shall use Blanks/USA brand, Item Number

DHJ5B6WH, 1¼ inch (31.8 mm) Holes (removed), 2-up Jumbo Door Hanger in

Bristol White, or approved equal.

6. Mailed Notice Material: You shall use Cougar by Domtar, Item Number 2834,

or approved equal.

7. For all Work on private property, contact each owner and occupant individually

a minimum of 15 Working Days prior to the Work. If the Work has been

delayed, re-notify owners and occupants of the new Work schedule, as

directed by the Resident Engineer.

8. A sample of public notices will be included in the Contract.

5-10.2.2 Communications with the Public.

1. Coordinate access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic to businesses,

institutions, and residences impacted by the Project.

2. You shall provide updates on construction impacts to the Resident Engineer.

You shall notify the Resident Engineer in advance about time-sensitive

construction impacts and may be required to distribute construction impact

notices to the public on short notice.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 95

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. You shall incorporate community outreach activities related to construction

impacts in the baseline schedule and update the Resident Engineer with each

week's submittal of the Three-Week Look Ahead Schedule.

4. At the request of the Resident Engineer, you shall attend and participate in

project briefings at community meetings.

5. You shall coordinate with the Resident Engineer on all responses and actions

taken to address public inquiries and complaints within the 24 hours that they

are received.

5-10.2.3 Communications with Media.

1. The City may allow members of the media access to its construction site(s) on

a case-by-case basis only.

2. Occasionally, uninvited members of the media may show up at construction

Sites. Members of the media (including, but not limited to newspapers,

magazines, radios, television, bloggers, and videographers) do not have the

legal right to be in the construction Site without the City’s permission.

3. In the event that media representatives arrive near or on the construction

Site(s), you shall keep them off the Site(s) in a courteous and professional

manner until a Public Information Officer is available to meet them at an

approved location.

4. You shall report all visits from members of the media to the Resident Engineer as

quickly as possible so that the City’s Public Information Officer can meet with the

members of the media at the construction Site(s).

5. If the City allows members of the media to access a construction Site, you shall

allow the City to escort the media representatives while they are on the

construction Site and shall ensure their safety.

6. You shall require media representatives to sign in and out of the Site Visitor

Log and to use personal protective equipment.

7. You have a right to speak to members of the media about your company and its

role on the project. All other questions shall be referred to the City.

5-10.3 Exclusive Community Liaison Services.

1. When required in the Special Provisions, you shall retain an Exclusive

Community Liaison for the Project whose sole responsibilities shall be to

implement 5-10.2, “Community Outreach Services” and the following:

a) Develop a contact list of community, tenants, property owners, and

agencies with a stake in the project.

b) Prepare and present of materials in coordination with the Resident

Engineer.

c) Respond to community questions and complaints related to your

activities.

d) Write, edit, update, or produce brochures, pamphlets, and news releases.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 96

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) Provide standard telephone inquiries and e-mail responses.

i. Respond to telephone calls and e-mails from the public.

ii. Record calls and e-mails on to the City’s internal public contact

tracking system.

f) Provide a monthly summary report of all inquiries and complaints,

including the name of the person, source of inquiry (via information

line or email), phone number, address, date, and time of inquiry, who

responded, and a summary of resolutions or pending resolutions to

the Resident Engineer.

g) Report Exclusive Community Liaison activities at all progress meetings

scheduled by the Resident Engineer.

h) Attendance at Pre-Construction, community and stakeholders meetings.

5-10.3.1 Exclusive Community Liaison Work Plan.

1. The Work plan for the Exclusive Community Liaison shall address the items of

Work specified in these specifications. When required, present your Exclusive

Community Liaison and submit your exclusive community outreach plan in

writing within 15 Working Days of the award of the Contract.

5-10.4 Payment.

1. The payment for the community outreach services shall be included in the

Contract Price.

2. When required, the payment for the exclusive community liaison services shall

be included in the Bid item for “Exclusive Community Liaison Services”.

ADD:

5-11 NEWSLETTER.

1. If required in the Special Provisions, you shall provide the required

information to create and distribute newsletters for a project including: a

written update on the progress of Work, a 1 month look-ahead schedule,

contact names and phone numbers, and any other information which may be

of interest to the public for this purpose.

5-11.1 Payment.

1. The payment for providing information for the newsletter and all associated

Work shall be included in the Contract Price.

ADD:

5-12 CONFLICT OF INTEREST.

1. Establish and make known to your employees appropriate safeguards to

prohibit employees from using their positions for a purpose that is or gives

the appearance of being motivated by desire for private gain for themselves

or others and particularly those with whom they have family, business, or

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 97

THE “WHITEBOOK”

other relationships. Project personnel shall not accept gratuities or any other

favors from Subcontractors or potential Subcontractors.

2. You are subject to all federal, state, and local conflict of interest laws, regulations,

and policies applicable to public contracts and procurement practices (California

Government Code §§1090, et. seq., and 81000, et. seq., and the City Ethics

Ordinance, codified in the City Municipal Code at §§27.3501 to 27.3595). If, in

performing the Work, you make or participate in a “governmental decision” in

accordance with title 2, §18701(a)(2) of the California Code of Regulations, or

perform the same or substantially all the same duties for City that would

otherwise be performed by a City employee holding a position specified in the

applicable department’s conflict of interest code, you shall be subject to a conflict

of interest code requiring the completion of one or more statements of economic

interests disclosing your relevant financial interests.

3. Statements of economic interests shall be made on Fair Political Practices

Commission Form 700 and filed with the City Clerk. You shall file a Form 700

(Assuming Office Statement) within 30 Calendar Days of the City’s written

determination that you shall be subject to a conflict of interest code. File a

Form 700 (Annual Statement) on or before April 1

disclosing any financial

interests held during the previous calendar year for which you were subject to

a conflict of interest code.

4. If the City requires you to file a statement of economic interests as a result of

the Work performed, you shall be considered a “City Official” subject to the

provisions of the City Ethics Ordinance, including the prohibition against

lobbying the City for 1 year following the expiration or termination of the

Contract.

5. Your personnel employed on the Project shall not accept gratuities or any

other favors from any Subcontractors or potential Subcontractors. You shall

not recommend or specify any product, supplier, or other Contractor with

whom you have a direct or indirect financial or organizational interest or

relationship that would violate conflict of interest laws, regulations, or policies.

6. If you violate any conflict of interest laws or any of these conflict of interest

provisions, the violation shall be grounds for immediate termination of this

Contact. Further, the violation subjects you to liability to the City for all

damages sustained as a result of the violation.

5-13 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION.

1. Unless specified otherwise, Virtual Project Manager shall be used on the

Contract.

2. You shall post all communications addressed to the Engineer concerning

construction including RFIs, submittals, daily logs including the Weekly

Statement of Working Days (WSWD), Storm Water, and transmittals to the

Virtual Project Manager (VPM) website established for the Projects. This shall

not supersede any Federal requirements.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 98

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Maintain a list of scheduled activities including planned and actual execution

dates for all major construction activities and milestones defined in the

approved Schedule.

4. Review and act on all communications addressed to you in the VPM project

website.

5. A user’s guide to the VPM system is available on the City’s website and shall be

provided to you at the Pre-construction Meeting. Refer to the VPM training

videos and forms at the location below:

https://www.sandiego.gov/ecp/edocref/

6. Submit the Sensitive Information Authorization Acknowledgement Form and

VPM User Agreement located in the VPM user’s guide at the Pre-construction

Meeting.

5-13.1 Payment.

1. The payment for electronic communications shall be included in the Contract

Price.

ADD:

5-14 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT.

5-14.1 General.

1. This subsection specifies construction and demolition waste reduction in

compliance with Municipal Code §§66.0601–66.0610 (the City’s Construction

and Demolition Debris Diversion Deposit Program) and the City of San Diego’s

California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) Significance Determination

Thresholds. Pursuant to the City’s Thresholds, projects that result in the

generation of less than 60 tons during the construction phase and 60 tons in

the ongoing project use phase shall be considered to have no significant

impacts. Adherence to the following specifications is intended to ensure

compliance with both the City’s Municipal Code and CEQA.

2. Additional information about the C&D Debris Diversion Deposit Program can

be found online at:

http://www.sandiego.gov/environmental-services/recycling/cd/index.shtml

3. During the construction phase of projects, the minimum waste management

reduction goal is 90% of the inert material (a material not subject to

decomposition such as concrete, asphalt, brick, rock, block, dirt, metal, glass,

and etc.) and 65% of the remaining project waste. You shall provide

appropriate documentation, including a Waste Management Form attached as

an appendix, and evidence of recycling and reuse of materials to meet the

waste reduction goals specified.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 99

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. You shall comply with the City’s Environmentally Preferred Purchasing

Program (EP3), which can be found online at:

http://www.sandiego.gov/environmental-services/recycling/ep3/index.shtml

5-14.2 Submittals.

1. You shall submit the following:

a) The Waste Management Form showing a weight based “good faith”

estimate of each type of construction waste that would be generated

and specifying how construction waste shall be recycled. If space is

limited or non-existing on Site for source separation, the Engineer shall

evaluate the diversion goals after a review of the Waste Management

Form. You shall be responsible for implementation of the measures

specified on the Waste Management Form Part 1 and meeting the

waste reduction goals.

b) Documentation from the recycling services that are not listed in the

City Construction, Demolition, and Yard Waste Recycling Guide

(available from City website) as follows:

i. Identifying where the construction and demolition material is

taken.

ii. The method or process used to recycle the waste material.

iii. Identification of applicable state and local permits held by the

recycling service provider and recycling facility.

iv. The Waste Management Form at the 50% progress payment

and at the completion of the Work.

c) The Waste Management Form Part 2 with each progress payment.

5-14.3 Waste Reduction Program.

5-14.3.1 Waste Diversion Strategy.

1. Use one or a combination of the following waste management methods.

Source separation of construction and demolition materials is required unless

you can demonstrate that separation is not practical due to site size

constraints, safety considerations, or both.

2. Source Separation.

a) For construction and demolition projects, segregated temporary bins

shall be provided for each type of material used on site, including

packaging such as paper, cardboard, and metal. The bins shall be

serviced on a weekly or as-needed basis and the contents shall be

taken to an appropriate local processor.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 100

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Identify and contact processors in the area that accept each type of building

material before construction begins. If not re-used on Site, salvaged materials

shall be taken to the appropriate and proximal facility for recycling. Generating

income through the sale of salvaged materials is permitted. Hand demolition

shall be considered and chosen over mechanical demolition when it is

considered to be cost effective.

4. Commingled or offsite separation.

a) If source separation is not possible due to Site or safety constraints,

materials may be comingled for offsite separation.

5. Time based separation.

a) For phased construction projects, source separation of excess

construction materials shall be required.

6. Backhaul of inert materials and packaging to original source locations shall be

done when trips can be minimized and materials diverted from disposal in this

manner.

7. On Site sales auctions and removal.

a) Architectural items shall be removed and salvaged when practical.

Windows, doors, mirrors, structural metal, or other specialty items

shall be donated or auctioned on-site or at a local urban center.

8. If not reused on Site, excess cut and fill dirt shall be donated to another project

or advertised as available via print ad, online, or any other suitable means.

5-14.3.2 Waste Management Hierarchy.

1. The waste material management hierarchy shall be in the following order:

a) Reuse on Site

b) Recycle on Site

c) Reuse offsite

d) Recycle offsite

5-14.3.3 Alternative Approach.

1. You may use any other innovative approaches as approved by the Engineer to

meet and exceed the minimum diversion goals in accordance with the

Municipal Codes §§66.0601–66.0610 and the City’s thresholds of significance

for solid waste.

5-14.4 Disposal Site, Recyclers, and Waste Materials Processors.

1. Use only facilities properly permitted by the State, County of San Diego, or local

authorities where applicable. Notify the Miramar Landfill at least 24 hours in

advance of bringing in 10 tons or more of waste in any one day or 60 tons or

more in any one month.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 101

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-14.5 Construction and Demolition Waste Management Plan.

1. As part of the Pre-Construction meeting, review and present the Waste

Management Form. Discuss and coordinate procedures, schedules, and

specific requirements for waste materials, recycling, and disposal.

2. Identify potential compliance problems and matters requiring further

resolution. Construction and demolition waste management shall be agenda

items at all future construction meetings. Make the agreed upon revisions to

the proposed Waste Management Form subsequent to the meeting and

submit the revised plan to Engineer for acceptance.

5-14.6 Special Project Conditions.

1. When removal of sediments and debris from channels and storm drains are

required, you shall make a preliminary estimate of the materials that can be

diverted to beneficial use. Receipts from disposal, re-use, and recycling

options shall indicate that 65% of materials are diverted.

2. These uses shall include:

a) Recycling

b) Composting

c) Use as a fill material

d) Alternative daily cover

e) Land application

f) Cement, brick, block, or asphalt constituent

g) Roadbed

h) Beach replenishment

i) Other non-disposal use

3. Projects involving old landfill and contamination site cleanups shall be exempt

from diversion requirements unless specified otherwise in the Special

Provisions.

5-14.7 Implementation.

1. Designate an on Site party responsible for instructing workers and

implementing the Waste Management Form.

2. Distribute copies of Waste Management Form to the Site supervisor and each

Subcontractor.

3. Include waste management and recycling in worker orientations.

4. Provide on Site instruction on appropriate separation, handling, recycling, and

recovery methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the

Work at the Site.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 102

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. Include the discussion of waste management and recycling in regular job

meetings and job safety meetings conducted during the course of Work at the

Site.

6. Remove and relocate reusable materials to be reinstalled or retained in a

manner to prevent damage or contamination.

7. Conduct construction and demolition in such a manner to minimize damage

to trees, plants, and natural landscape environment.

8. Arrange for adequate collection, transportation, and delivery of the recovered

materials to the approved recycling center or processing facility.

9. Maintain records accessible to the Engineer for verification of the diversion of

the recovered waste materials.

5-14.8 Storage and Handling.

1. If Site conditions warrant, provide separate containers for different types of

materials.

2. Label each container with signs, instructions, and a list of all acceptable

materials. The information shall be in English and in Spanish with recycling

signs, stickers, and graphic symbols commonly used by the construction

industry including the National Fire Protection Association labels, recycling

signs, and stickers.

3. Remove all materials for recycling and recovery from the Work locations to

approved containers. Failure to remove waste or recovered materials may be

considered cause for withholding payment.

4. Place containers for recyclable and recoverable materials at the designated

locations on the Site. If materials are sorted on Site, you shall provide a sorting

area and necessary storage containers.

5. Change loaded containers for empty containers as demand requires.

6. Provide adequate security from pilferage if recovered materials are stored on

Site for the Project duration.

7. Deposit indicated recyclable and recoverable materials in storage areas or

containers in a clean (no mud, adhesive, solvents, petroleum contamination) and

debris-free condition. You shall not deposit contaminated materials into the

containers unless the materials have been cleaned.

8. Ensure all recovered materials are safe for handling and storage.

9. Prevent any chemical contamination of recyclable material. If recyclable

material becomes contaminated, you shall report the incident to the Engineer.

You shall not deposit the material into the recycling containers. Contaminated

materials shall be handled in accordance with 5-15, “Encountering or Releasing

Hazardous Substances”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 103

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-14.9 Payment.

1. The payment for construction and demolition waste management shall be

included in the following Bid items:

BID DESCRIPTION UNIT

Preparation of Waste Management Form LS

Site Storage And Handling Of Construction And Demolition Waste TN

Disposal of Construction And Demolition Waste TN

2. If no Bid items have been provided for construction and demolition waste

management, the payment shall be included in the Contract Price.

3. Final payment shall be withheld until you adequately demonstrate the final

disposition, either diverted or disposed, of materials generated by the Project.

A final status report is required before the final payment.

ADD:

5-15 ENCOUNTERING OR RELEASING HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES.

5-15.1 General.

1. If you encounter, cause the release of, or have knowledge of a release or an

imminent release of Hazardous Substances or petroleum products,

construction activities in the area shall immediately cease except in an

emergency.

2. A waste determination shall be performed on all potential Hazardous Waste

or Regulated Waste generated at a Site within 10 Working Days of the

generation to determine if it meets Hazardous Waste or Regulated Waste

criteria in accordance with 22 CCR Division 4.5, 23 CCR Division 3, or any other

pertinent law or regulation which could restrict the disposal of the waste to a

municipal landfill, sewer discharge, or storm drain discharge. The results of all

waste determinations shall be submitted to the City for approval prior to any

disposal or discharge of the waste in question.

3. Incomplete or inconclusive waste determinations conducted by you, as

determined by the City, shall be returned for additional information or testing.

The City’s approval of the final determination of the waste and the disposal or

discharge location shall be required.

4. Substances requiring analytical testing shall be sampled and tested in

accordance with the sampling and analytical testing requirements in these

specifications.

5. If a Community Health and Safety Plan is required for a specific site or Project,

you shall fully comply with all of the requirements. Submit the Community

Health and Safety Plan and the hazardous removal plan in accordance with 3-

8, “SUBMITTALS”. Work shall not start until the plans are approved.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 104

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6. You shall follow and comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws

and regulations and notification requirements.

7. You shall not resume Work in any such affected area until after you have

determined that such condition and any affected area has been rendered safe

for the resumption of Work or until after specifying any special conditions

under which Work may be resumed safely.

8. The business entities related to hazardous substance or petroleum product

management you propose to use shall be in good regulatory standing and

shall have not received regulatory fines totaling more than $25,000 in the past

3 years. These entities shall include:

a) The licensed Hazardous Waste Transporter

b) The Petroleum Contaminated Soil Disposal and Recycling facility

c) The TSDF

d) The handling Facility

9. If you encounter unforeseen Hazardous Substances or petroleum products,

you shall immediately notify the Engineer and the County of San Diego,

Department of Environmental Health (DEH) at (858) 505-6880. If there is an

immediate fire, explosion, or health or safety threat, notify the Fire

Department via 911.

10. If your construction activities have encountered flammable liquids or other

hazardous substances, you shall ensure that construction staff have the

required Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER)

certification. Construction staff shall include: City Engineers, City Laboratory

Technicians, and City staff that perform onsite inspections.

a) If your Work encounters flammable liquids or other hazardous

substances, you shall be responsible for scheduling training for all

construction staff to attend and for submitting verification to the

Engineer that construction staff have the required HAZWOPER

certification prior to continuing that Work in that area. You shall

maintain the HAZWOPER certifications annually until the construction

activities triggering the requirement is complete, as approved by the

Resident Engineer.

b) You shall be responsible for implementing, training, and submitting

verification to the Engineer that construction staff have the required

HAZWOPER certification before the Notice to Proceed (NTP) has been

issued.

11. For asbestos containing materials (ACM), refer to 306-3.3.5, “Asbestos

Materials”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 105

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-15.2 Community Health and Safety Plan (CHSP).

5-15.2.1 General.

1. You shall prepare and submit a CHSP to address the potential of encountering

hazardous substances at the Work Site. These shall include the following:

a) Hazardous Substances and Regulated Waste contaminates, such as

lead or solvents, in soil and in the groundwater as identified in Special

Provisions, historic environmental documents, or on the Geotracker

website.

b) Gasoline and other fuel constituent contaminates with the

contingency of encountering flammable or combustible liquids in the

groundwater during dewatering activities in the areas specified in the

Special Provisions, historic environmental documents, or on the

Geotracker website.

2. The Geotracker website can be found at:

http://geotracker.waterboards.ca.gov/

5-15.2.2 Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH).

1. A Certified Industrial Hygienist shall oversee the CHSP and shall certify and

monitor Site activities to confirm that no health and safety hazardous

conditions exist during the Work. The CIH shall outline, in the CHSP, the actions

to be taken by you and the CIH on how health and safety concerns or

measured contaminants shall be addressed when they are encountered.

5-15.2.3 Monitoring Devices.

1. You shall have the CIH or your other staff trained by the CIH or have received

formal training to utilize the following monitoring devices at the Work Site and

adhere to the action levels for each contaminate identified in the CHSP:

a) Photo Ionization Detector (PID)

b) Combustible gas indicator (CGI)

c) Benzene Monitor (required when gasoline or other petroleum fuels

may be encountered in a specific area)

d) X-Ray Fluorescence (XRF) analyzer (required when lead bearing

contaminated soil may be encountered in a specific area)

5-15.2.4 CHSP Elements.

5-15.2.4.1 Site Identification and Location.

1. Provide a detailed plot plan that identifies all on Site and surrounding structures,

topography, prevailing wind directions, all surrounding land uses, nearby

populations and environments, and any known receptors of special concern.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 106

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-15.2.4.2 Evaluation of Potential Public Exposure to Hazards.

1. Provide a description of the potential public health hazards and exposure pathways

resulting from Work Site activities, including vapors, dust, fires, explosions, and

physical hazards. Consider both immediate and long-term hazards.

5-15.2.4.3 Monitoring Equipment.

1. Provide a description of the Site monitoring equipment specified in 5-15.2.3,

“Monitoring Devices” and any additional equipment identified in the CHSP to

monitor contaminates, the action levels for each contaminate identified in the

CHSP, and the protocol to be used to protect the public.

5-15.2.4.4 Control Methods.

1. Provide a discussion of the administrative and engineering controls that shall

be implemented to prevent or minimize public exposure to chemical and

physical hazards. Include control methods necessary to prohibit public access,

prevent fugitive dust, mist, odors, and vapors. As a part of the administrative

controls, the CIH shall conduct training with all your staff on the requirements

of the CHSP.

5-15.2.4.5 Site Security.

1. Describe the methods that shall be used to exclude the public from, or limit

public access to, the Work area and the Site in general.

5-15.2.4.6 Vapors, Mists, and Odors.

1. Describe the methods that shall be used to minimize public exposure to

potential vapor, mist emissions, and odors resulting from the proposed

activities. Engineering and construction practices can typically reduce such

emissions. Acceptable control methods include, but shall not be limited to,

pumping out non-aqueous phase liquids (NAPL), covering off-gassing

excavations or stockpiles, backfilling off-gassing excavations, using off-gassing

stockpiles as backfill, misting excavations or stockpiles with water, covering

excavations or stockpiles with foam or other vapor suppressing agents,

locating stockpiles away from and downwind of public receptors, and stopping

Work.

5-15.2.4.7 Dust.

1. Describe the methods that shall be used to minimize potential public exposure

to dust generated as a result of the proposed activities. Acceptable control

methods include, but shall not be limited to, covering sources, misting sources

with water, reducing the pace of site activities, and stopping Work.

5-15.2.4.8 Open Excavations.

1. Discuss the management of any excavations that may result from the

proposed activities. Open excavations present a clear risk to the community

and adequate Site security is critical to protect the public.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 107

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-15.2.4.9 Stockpiled or Containerized Soil.

1. Discuss the soil management procedures and the proposed disposition of the

stockpiled and containerized soil including the time frame in which activities

shall occur.

2. Stockpiled soil shall be contained within berms and covered to prevent runoff,

vapor, and dust exposures as specified in 5-15.16.2, “Stockpiling Contaminated

Soil”. Stockpiled and containerized soil shall be stored in a secured area of the

Work Site to prevent public access.

5-15.2.4.10 Other Hazardous Wastes.

1. Discuss the secured storage area for any other hazardous waste generated at

the Site.

5-15.2.4.11 Contact Information.

1. Provide the name and telephone number of a Site safety manager who shall

be available 24 hours a day and who shall have the knowledge and authority

necessary to shut down all on Site activities in the event of an emergency.

2. Provide the name and qualifications of the CIH who shall demonstrate

adequate experience in monitoring and taking action to protect the

community for each type of contaminate identified in the CHSP.

3. Provide the names of the workers assigned to assist in the implementation of

the Plan and the scope of their roles. If a worker is identified to assist in using

a monitoring device or other task to implement the CHSP, provide information

such as resumes, experiences, and training certificates which demonstrate

that the employee has the knowledge, skills, and ability to adequately

complete the task.

5-15.2.4.12 Emergency Planning.

1. Provide a description of the methods and equipment that shall be used to

address possible community emergency situations. The surface collection of a

flammable or combustible substance and the build-up of explosive

concentrations of vapors are examples of community emergency situations

that shall be addressed if methane, gasoline, or other combustible or

flammable chemical constituent are encountered.

2. In the event of a sudden release of a Hazardous Substance or Regulated Waste

to the environment, identify the roles of the Site safety manager, CIH, and

worker(s) for the Site management and cleanup activities. Include in the

procedures how the chemical release or imminent chemical release shall be

evaluated for regulatory reporting and who shall be responsible to report the

incident to all appropriate regulatory agencies according to all applicable laws

as well as to the Engineer.

5-15.2.4.13 Public Notification.

1. Provide a description of the Public Notification Program (Program). The

Program shall include the preparation and distribution of notices to

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 108

THE “WHITEBOOK”

residences and businesses adjacent to, or in the vicinity of, potential impacts

from the Site or area where Work is being performed. Notices shall also be

posted around the perimeter of the Site.

2. At a minimum, the notification shall contain the following information:

a) List the name and 24-hour telephone number of the Site safety

manager and the person(s) to contact regarding problems such as

odors, dust, and noise.

b) Provide a brief description of the proposed activities.

c) Provide the dates and times that the Work shall be conducted and

when the Work shall be completed.

d) Include any requisite Proposition 65 warnings. Proposition 65 (Health

and Safety Code, §25249.6,) requires that a warning be given to any

individual who is exposed to a chemical known to cause cancer. Check

the current Proposition 65 list for chemicals requiring such warnings.

5-15.3 City’s Responsibility.

1. The City shall be responsible for any Hazardous Substances and Hazardous

Waste as defined by §§25316 and 25117 of the California Health and Safety

Code, uncovered or revealed at the Site which existed prior to the date of the

NTP and was not identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope

of the Work. The City shall not be responsible for any such materials brought

to the Site after the NTP.

5-15.4 Terms, Definitions, and Acronyms.

1. Burn Ash - The residual ash that results from the low temperature combustion

of solid waste. Burn ash is generally found at a location where solid waste has

been burned and the resulting debris have been buried or stockpiled.

2. Chemical Release - Any Spilling, leaking, pumping, pouring, emitting,

emptying, discharging, dumping, injecting, escaping, leaching, or disposing

into the environment as defined by HSC 25501 (s), 19 CCR, 40 CFR 302, and any

other applicable regulatory definition.

3. Closed Container - A container is closed when the lid, ring, gaskets, and bung

are latched, screwed, and tightened in such as way that the contents, including

vapors, are confined within the space of the container.

4. Empty Hazardous Materials Containers - A container which previously held

a Hazardous Material shall be considered empty when:

a) The container has no remaining liquid draining when held in any

orientation (inverted, tilted, and etc.).

b) All of the solids have been removed by a physical method so that no

more than a thin uniform film remains in the container.

Empty Hazardous Material containers are Hazardous Waste unless managed

in accordance with 22 CCR 66261.7.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 109

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. Handling Facility - A facility that is not licensed as a TSDF and has been

permitted in California to legally accept a Hazardous Material or recyclable

waste for reuse, recycling, or other legal handling method. This excludes

facilities accepting petroleum contaminated soils. See the Petroleum

Contaminated Soil Disposal and Recycling Facility definition below.

6. Hazardous Material - A material which may cause harm to humans, animals,

or the environment as defined by HSC 25501 (o) and implemented in HSC

Chapter 6.5 and 22 CCR.

7. HMMP – Hazardous Materials Management Program with Environmental

Services Department.

8. Hazardous Substance - A Hazardous Material, hazardous waste, petroleum

products, or any chemical product which a manufacturer or producer is

required to prepare a Safety Data Sheet or as defined by HSC 25501(p) and

25281 (h).

9. Hazardous Waste - A Hazardous Material that can no longer be used for its

intended purpose as defined in HSC 25115, HSC 25117, and HSC 25316 and

implemented in HSC Chapter 6.5 and 22 CCR and 40 CFR Part 260 – 299.

10. Hazardous Waste Determination - The process which shall be used to

determine if a waste is hazardous or non-hazardous as required in 22 CCR and

testing methods in SW-846.

11. Hazardous Waste Manifest - The state and federal approved shipping

document required by law to track the transportation and disposal of

hazardous waste. The document is originated and signed by the generator of

the waste in accordance with 22 CCR.

12. Licensed Hazardous Waste Transporter - A transportation company which

holds all of the following valid permits, identification numbers, licenses, and

registrations:

a) California Department of Toxic Substances Control permit

b) California Department of Motor Vehicles – Motor Carrier Permit

c) U. S. Environmental Protection Agency – Identification number

d) U. S. Department of Transportation – Identification number

e) U. S. Department of Transportation – Hazardous Materials Certificate

of Registration

f) California Highway Patrol – License

13. SDS - Safety Data Sheet.

14. Non-RCRA Hazardous Waste - A waste that is defined and regulated as

Hazardous Waste only within the State of California and defined in California

regulation 22 CCR Division 4.5, Chapter 11, Article 3.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 110

THE “WHITEBOOK”

15. RCRA Hazardous Waste - A waste which is managed as Hazardous Waste within

and outside the State of California and is defined in Federal regulation 40 CFR Part

261 and California regulation 22 CCR Division 4.5, Chapter 11, Article 4.

16. Regulated Waste - A waste that is not considered Hazardous Waste but due

to its chemical or physical properties, petroleum contamination, or other

properties, it shall be disposed of to a facility with Regional Water Quality

Control Board approved Waste Discharge Requirements (WDRs), such as a

municipal Class III landfill or other facility with WDRs that allow disposal of the

Regulated Waste.

17. Spill - Refer to the definition of Chemical Release and Threatened Release.

18. Treated Wood - Wood that has been treated with a chemical preservative for

the purposes of protecting the wood against attacks from insects, microorganisms,

fungi, and other environmental conditions that can lead to decay of the wood and

the chemical preservative is registered pursuant to the Federal Insecticide,

Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (7 U.S.C. §136 and following).

19. Threatened Release – a condition creating a substantial probability of harm

when the probability and potential extent of harm make it reasonably

necessary to take immediate action to prevent, reduce, or mitigate damage to

persons, property, or environment.

20. Universal Waste - An item, substance, or object which shall be stored,

handled, and disposed of as defined by CCR Title 22, Chapter 23, §§66273.1-

66273.90.

5-15.5 Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities (TSDF).

1. TSDF shall be a hazardous waste transfer, treatment, storage, or disposal

facility that has received, at a minimum, a California Department of Toxic

Substances Control permit, grant of interim status, or a variance or is

otherwise authorized by California law and regulations to receive specific

RCRA and/or non-RCRA Hazardous Wastes for Processing, Recycling,

alternative fuel, or Disposal. If the TSDF is located outside the jurisdiction of

California, the agencies with regulatory authority over the TSDF shall have the

same or higher standards for the processing, recycling, or disposal of

hazardous waste as the State of California.

5-15.6 Petroleum Contaminated Soils Disposal and Recycling Facility.

1. Petroleum Contaminated Soils Disposal and Recycling Facility shall be a

recycling or disposal facility which has, at a minimum, a valid California

Regional Water Quality Control Board permit including Waste Discharge

Requirements (DWRs) and air emission permit to receive specific Petroleum

Contaminated Soil for processing, bioremediation, recycling, alternative fuel,

or disposal. If a facility chosen is located outside the jurisdiction of California

or within Indian Tribal lands, the agencies with regulatory authority over the

Petroleum Contaminated Soil Disposal and Recycling Facility shall have the

same or higher standards for the recycling or disposal of petroleum

contaminated soil as the State of California.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 111

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-15.7 Hazardous Substances Management Plan.

1. For general management of Hazardous Materials, hazardous wastes,

petroleum contaminated soil, and Regulated Wastes at the Site, you shall

submit a “Hazardous Substances Management Plan” subject to the following

regulations prior to start of the Work:

a) 49 Code of Federal Regulations (49 CFR)

b) 40 Code of Federal Regulations (40 CFR)

c) California Code of Regulations, Title 22 (22 CCR)

d) California Code of Regulations, Title 19 (19 CCR)

e) California Health and Safety Code, Chapter 6.5 (HSC)

f) Uniform Fire Code (UFC)

2. Your submittal shall include the following:

a) A description on how you shall store, manage, and inspect all

Hazardous Materials brought to the Site including the management of

all containers, drums, and tanks.

b) A listing of all hazardous wastes, petroleum contaminated soils, and

Regulated Wastes anticipated to be generated, or encountered, during

the course of the Project and the name of the trained Hazardous

Waste Contractor(s) who shall perform the testing, removal, storage,

transportation, and disposal activities for each waste type listed.

3. When disposing of the RCRA Hazardous Waste, Non-RCRA Hazardous Waste,

petroleum contaminated soil, and Regulated Waste outside the State of

California or to Indian Country or Indian tribal lands, you shall utilize facilities

as defined in these specifications.

4. The following information for each RCRA Hazardous Waste, Non-RCRA

Hazardous Waste, petroleum contamination soil, and Regulated Waste that is

expected to be encountered during the construction shall be as follows:

a) Name of the RCRA Hazardous Waste, Non-RCRA Hazardous Waste,

petroleum contaminated soil, or Regulated Waste.

b) Disposal Method (recycling, alternative fuel, bioremediation, thermal

desorption incineration, treatment, or Class I, II or III Landfill).

c) Name of Licensed Hazardous Waste Transporter(s).

d) Name of TSDF, Petroleum Contaminated Soil Disposal/Recycling

Facility, or Handling Facility where the waste shall be treated, recycled,

and/or disposed. Include the name(s) of any interim facilities where

the hazardous waste, petroleum contaminated soil, and/or Regulated

Waste shall be stored, handled, or treated prior to shipping to the final

destination facility.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 112

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) Waste Matrix Example: Hazardous Waste, Petroleum Contaminated Soil,

and Regulated Waste Disposal Information Submittal.

Waste

Stream

Disposal

Method

Transporter 1 Transporter 2 Facility Facility

HazWaste #1 Treatment

ABC Haz Waste

Transporter

None

Acme

Neutralization

None

Regulated

Waste #1

Recycle

XYZ

Transporter

HazMat Hauler Smith Recyclers None

HazWaste #2 Incinerate

ABC Haz Waste

Transporter

HazWaste

Transporter

ABC Transfer

Station

Acme

Incineration

Petroleum

Contaminated

Soil

Thermal

Desorption

XYZ

Transporter

None XYZ soil recyclers None

f) For each Hazardous Waste transporter and facility listed, include the

name, address, phone number, company contact and list all

registrations, permits, licenses, and identification numbers as

specified in these specifications.

g) For laboratory testing, if required, provide the following:

i. Name, address, phone number, company contact, and

certification number for each certified Hazardous Waste

testing laboratory used.

ii. A list of the tests each laboratory is certified to perform under

the laboratory’s State certification.

5. After the start of the Work, the following submittals shall be made:

a) Hazardous Waste Storage Logs submitted weekly.

b) Chemical Release Spill Report Forms periodically during Work, as

necessary.

c) Hazardous Waste Disposal and Laboratory Testing, as needed.

d) Draft Hazardous Waste Manifests for approval submitted prior to

scheduling disposal.

e) Two legible copies of each Hazardous Waste Manifest used submitted

immediately after receipt from the transporter.

f) Copies of all other disposal receipts and documentation, such as Bills

of Lading, submitted immediately after receipt from the transporter.

g) Copies of analytical test data submitted within 1 Working Day of

receipt from the laboratory.

h) Approved waste profiles submitted prior to scheduling disposal.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 113

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-15.8 Employee Training.

1. Your employees and Subcontractors shall be trained to ensure compliance

with regulations that govern working with Hazardous Waste. By submitting a

Bid, you certify that you and your Subcontractors are fully informed of all the

applicable regulations which in any manner affect those employed in the Work

involving Hazardous Waste. You shall at all times observe and comply with

such regulations (22 CCR 66265.16).

2. Your employees and Subcontractors working at the Site shall be able to

respond effectively to emergency situations including Chemical Releases.

5-15.9 Sampling and Analytical Testing Requirements.

1. A suspect item or waste that may be hazardous or contain a hazardous or

regulated component or petroleum contamination shall be separated from

other waste for the City’s determination if a Waste Characterization is needed

or if the suspect item, waste, or petroleum contamination had been identified

in the Contract.

2. Each testing method shall be approved by the City as appropriate for the

sample being tested prior to having a certified laboratory conduct the test.

3. Representative samples shall be obtained by you for each waste to be tested

with the sampling procedure and sample naming sequence pre-approved by

the City. The City shall be contacted prior to sampling and may be present to

observe the sampling. Items sampled without the presence or approval of the

City may require the item or waste to be re-sampled.

4. Containers such as jars, bags, and etc. used for sampling shall be certified by

a State licensed Hazardous Waste Laboratory as “pre-cleaned.” Samples shall

be sent to a State licensed Hazardous Waste Laboratory for testing. The

Laboratory shall have a valid State license for each requested test to be

conducted on the sample. The sample testing time and preliminary results

shall be available on the 5

Working Day or other agreed upon date after the

sample was taken.

5. A final copy of all analytical test results and the sampling chain-of-custody

form shall be provided to the City within 1 Working Day of receipt from the

State Hazardous Waste certified testing laboratory.

5-15.10 Hazardous Materials and Wastes Storage and Management.

1. Hazardous Substances, Hazardous Wastes, or items, and equipment

containing Hazardous Substances or Hazardous Wastes shall be handled in

such a way as to minimize the possibility of a release.

2. Hazardous Substances shall always be kept in an approved, compatible, and

closed container with a legible label identifying the contents. Interim

containers such as bags, transfer containers, buckets, or pails shall not be

acceptable.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 114

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Containers used to package Hazardous Waste shall be compatible with the

waste (22 CCR 66265.172), maintained in good condition (22 CCR 66265.171),

and kept closed unless adding or removing waste (22 CCR 66265.173).

4. Different waste types shall be stored in separate containers. Incompatible

wastes shall never be combined or stored near each other.

5. Any packaging used to store and or transport Hazardous Waste offsite such as

a container, roll-off bin, tank or other device shall comply with 49 CFR Parts

173, 178, and 179 and shall be labeled and prepared for transportation in

accordance with 22 CCR Article 3.

6. A Hazardous Waste label shall be affixed to the container and filled out when

the first amount of Hazardous Waste or Hazardous Substance is placed in the

container. The label shall include the generator information, contents of the

container, physical state and hazardous properties of the waste, and the initial

accumulation date. When applicable, a sample Hazardous Waste label will be

included in the Contract Documents.

7. You shall use a numbering system to identify each Hazardous Waste

container. Each Hazardous Waste container shall be marked with an

identification number specific to that individual container.

8. Additional pre-transportation labeling and marking or using placards shall be

conducted prior to transporting Hazardous Waste offsite and in accordance

with 22 CCR Chapter 12, Article 3 and 49 CFR.

9. Containers, containment systems, and tanks of Hazardous Materials and

Hazardous Waste shall be managed in a way which minimizes the threat of

fire, explosion, or any unplanned sudden or non-sudden release of Hazardous

Waste to the air, soil, or surface water which could threaten human health or

the environment (22 CCR 66265.31).

10. Secondary containment shall be provided at a minimum for storage areas

containing 55 gallons (208.2 L) or more of Hazardous Material or hazardous

waste. The secondary containment area shall be capable of holding the

contents of the largest container plus 10% of that volume or in accordance

with applicable regulations (22 CCR 66264.175).

11. Secondary containment areas shall be maintained so that any releases shall

be confined within the secondary containment area. Rips, tears, cracks,

breaks, and etc. that compromise the integrity of the secondary containment

shall be immediately repaired.

12. Secondary containment systems shall be maintained free of dirt, debris, or

liquids of any kind. If any chemical is released into the secondary containment

system, it shall be removed immediately.

13. Material used in or around the secondary containment area which has been

contaminated with a Hazardous Material or Hazardous Waste shall not be disposed

until a Hazardous Waste Determination has been performed in accordance with

these specifications. Contaminated materials include, but are not limited to, plastic

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 115

THE “WHITEBOOK”

sheeting, absorbents, dirt, sand, and kitty litter. Contaminated materials found in

or around containment areas shall be immediately cleaned.

14. When conducting a waste determination on soil, procedures and protocol

specified in the Site Assessment and Mitigation Manual (SAM Manual) shall be

followed.

15. You shall perform weekly inspections of their Hazardous Material and

Hazardous Waste storage areas to comply with the regulations (22 CCR

66265.174). An inventory of Hazardous Waste containers shall be kept that

notes each waste container and its accumulation start date. Inspections shall

be documented and copies provided to the City upon request.

5-15.11 Treated Wood Waste (TWW) Management and Disposal.

1. TWW is regulated under California Code Regulations Title 22, division 4.5,

chapter 34 and Department of Toxic Substances Control (DTSC).

2. TWW contains hazardous chemicals and shall be managed as hazardous waste

or as specified in CCR Title 22, Chapter 34 “Alternative Management Standards

for Treated Wood Waste”. A summary of the regulations can be found on

DTSC’s website:

https://dtsc.ca.gov/regs/alternative-management-standards-for-treated-wood-waste/

3. The generation of TWW during construction projects shall be handled, labeled,

stored, tested, and disposed of as described in CCR Title 22, Chapter 34

“Alternative Management Standards for Treated Wood Waste”. A summary of the

regulations can be found in DTSC’s “Requirements for Generators of Treated

Wood Waste Fact Sheet” under the section noted “Businesses generating TWW

during the normal course of business”.

4. TWW shall be disposed of at an authorized composite lined solid waste facility

or through a licensed hazardous waste facility.

5. An employer resizing, sorting, or segregating TWW shall provide training for all

employees handling TWW and all employees that may reasonably be expected

to contact TWW (22 CCR 67386.10). A record of the training shall be maintained

for a period of 3 years and shall be made available for review. The training

shall include the following:

a) All applicable requirements of the California Occupational Safety and

Health Act of 1973 [Ch. 1, Part 1, Div. 5 (commencing with §6300) of the

Labor Code], including all rules, regulations, and orders relating to

hazardous waste.

b) Procedures for identifying and segregating TWW.

c) Safe handling practices.

d) Requirements of the alternative management standards.

e) Proper disposal methods.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 116

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-15.12 Hazardous Waste, Regulated Waste, Petroleum Contaminated Soil

Accumulation Time.

1. Each container or pile of Hazardous Waste shall be shipped offsite for disposal

by a licensed Hazardous Waste transporter within 90 Days of the date of initial

generation or by the end of the Project, whichever comes first. Regulated

Wastes and petroleum contaminated soils shall be shipped offsite for proper

recycling or disposal within 90 Calendar Days of the initial generation or by the

end of the project, whichever comes first.

5-15.13 Hazardous Waste Transportation Requirements.

1. The City shall provide you with the EPA Generator Identification number for

the Site. This number is Site specific and shall only be used on Hazardous

Waste disposal documentation for the appropriate Site where the waste was

generated.

2. A Hazardous Waste Manifest or, when appropriate, a Bill of Lading, non-

Hazardous Waste Manifest or other appropriate disposal documentation shall

be completed in accordance with 22 CCR Chapter 12, Article 2 and 49 CFR for

any shipment of Hazardous Waste leaving the Site.

3. The Engineer or other designated City representative shall sign the Hazardous

Waste Manifest or disposal documentation as representing the Hazardous

Waste generator at the time the Hazardous Waste is being removed from the

Site. Pre-signed Hazardous Waste Manifests or bills of lading are not

acceptable.

4. You shall only ship Hazardous Waste using a City pre-approved Hazardous

Waste Licensed Hazardous Waste Transporter with valid insurance certificates

in accordance with 5-4, “INSURANCE”. The Hazardous Waste shall be sent only

to a TSDF that is approved by the City in the Hazardous Substances

Management Plan submittal in accordance with 22 CCR Chapter 13. Any

Contractor who allows the transportation or disposal of Hazardous Waste

from a City Site by an unlicensed Hazardous Waste Transporter, upon

conviction, shall be subject to 1 year in prison and fined up to $100,000 per

day (HSC 25163, 25189.5).

5-15.14 Management of Specified Wastes.

1. The Hazardous Material that is removed from Empty Hazardous Materials

Containers shall be used as Hazardous Material or disposed of as a Hazardous

Waste. You shall mark each container with the date it was emptied and

manage the container within one year by one of the following methods:

a) Reclaim the scrap value of the container

b) Send the container offsite for reconditioning or remanufacturing

c) Send the container back to the manufacturer

d) Dispose of as hazardous waste

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 117

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. For containers 5 gallons (18.9 L) capacity or less, once the container is empty,

it may be disposed of to the regular trash.

3. Aerosol spray containers may be disposed of in the regular trash if the

contents and propellant have been emptied to the maximum extent practical

under normal use (the spray mechanism was not defective and thus allowed

complete discharge of the contents and propellant). Aerosol spray containers

shall not be punctured, crushed, or altered in order to remove or release any

remaining contents or propellants for the purpose of emptying the container

for disposal to the trash.

4. A compressed gas cylinder is empty when the pressure in the container

approaches atmospheric pressure.

5-15.15 Regulatory Reporting for Chemical Releases or Threatened Releases.

1. Chemical Releases or Threatened Releases involving a gas, liquid, or solid

Hazardous Material or Hazardous Waste shall be immediately assessed

utilizing the County Department of Environmental Health’s Assessment form

as a guide to determine if the incident requires regulatory reporting to the Cal

OES, County Department of Environmental Health, Hazardous Materials

Division, the National Response Center, and any other pertinent regulatory

agency. See the Contract appendices for a copy of County Department of

Environmental Health’s Assessment form.

2. Lacking in immediately reporting a Chemical Release or Threatened Release

shall be subject to fines and penalties by the County of San Diego and any

other pertinent regulatory agency.

3. Chemical Releases or Threatened Releases involving a gas, liquid, or solid

Hazardous Material or Hazardous Waste shall be immediately reported to the

City after completing all regulatory reporting.

4. Chemical Releases and any contaminated media (rags, absorbents, soil, and

etc.) shall be immediately contained, cleaned up, and handled as Hazardous

Waste at your expense. The waste shall be handled as Hazardous Waste unless

a complete Hazardous Waste Determination, as approved by the City, is

performed indicating that the waste is non-hazardous.

5. A Chemical Release Report Form or similar document shall be completed and

faxed to the City at the designated number within 4 hours of the occurrence

of the chemical release for all incidents of Hazardous Materials or Hazardous

Wastes in quantities equal to or exceeding 5 gallons (19 L) in quantity or for

any size release that required regulatory reporting as determined by the

County Department of Environmental Health’s Assessment form.

5-15.16 Encountering Contaminated Soil.

1. Contaminated soils have specific soil contaminants which cause the soil to be

defined as a RCRA Hazardous Waste, Non-RCRA Hazardous Waste, petroleum

contaminated soil, or Regulated Waste.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 118

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. When encountering petroleum contaminated soil, abandoned underground

storage tanks, petroleum transmission pipelines, Burn Ash, or unidentified

contamination, you shall follow the guidelines of the current edition of the

County of San Diego Department of Environmental Health (DEH) SAM Manual

which is available by contacting the DEH at (858) 505-6880.

3. If you encounter unforeseen contaminated soil, you shall immediately notify

the Engineer when apparent contaminated soils are encountered. Following

notice by you, the Engineer shall contact the City’s Environmental Services

Department, HMMP, at (858) 573-1204.

5-15.16.1 Monitoring of Potentially Petroleum Contaminated Soil.

1. Monitoring for the presence of petroleum contamination shall be your

responsibility and shall be performed in areas of known or suspected

contamination during construction activities. You shall notify the Engineer 5

Working Days prior to excavation in areas of known contamination and shall

immediately notify the Engineer if suspected or unforeseen contamination is

encountered.

2. Use an operational Explosimeter (Combustible Gas Indicator - CGI) calibrated

for and capable of automatically detecting explosive gases at 20% of the Lower

Explosive Limit (LEL). The functional requirements of the CGI shall comply with

the SAM Manual. If 20% or greater of the LEL is detected in an excavation,

surface area, or confined space, the Fire Department and the DEH shall be

notified immediately.

3. In areas of known or suspected contamination, an operational Photo

Ionization Device (PID) shall also be used at all times by your staff formally

trained to operate a PID. Any soil that triggers PID detection shall be

segregated and stockpiled for further characterization.

4. You shall not be reimbursed for costs associated with monitoring activities as the

City considers these efforts to be integral and essential to best management

health and safety practices for trenching and excavation operations.

5-15.16.2 Stockpiling Contaminated Soil.

1. Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer, you shall stockpile all suspect

contaminated soil (as indicated by appearance, odor, or PID detection) at a

location approved by the Engineer and the HMMP and in accordance to the

following procedure. Stockpiled contaminated soil or Hazardous Waste shall be:

a) Placed on a relatively impervious surface such as asphalt, concrete, or

on minimum 8 mil (200 µm) thick polyethylene sheeting.

b) Moistened to minimize dust emissions during stockpiling. However, no

runoff shall be permitted at any time.

c) Securely covered by 8 mil (200 µm) polyethylene sheeting to minimize

vapor emissions and prevent runoff from rain (sheeting shall be

maintained and remain in satisfactory condition).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 119

THE “WHITEBOOK”

d) Configured in such a manner that surface water runoff from the

stockpile does not carry soil, leachate, or both beyond the stockpile

perimeter berm.

e) Separated from uncontaminated soil.

2. You shall manage the contaminated soil properly. The City shall not be liable

for contaminated soil improperly handled or disposed by you.

5-15.16.3 Disposal of Contaminated Soil.

1. Contaminated soil that is a RCRA Hazardous Waste or Non-RCRA Hazardous

Waste shall be transported to a licensed TSDF and as approved in the

Hazardous Substances Management Plan submittal.

2. Contaminated soil that is a Regulated Waste shall be transported to a licensed

treatment facility which meets the California Regional Water Quality Control

Board’s WDRs for that waste type and is approved in the Hazardous

Substances Management Plan submittal in accordance with 5-15.7,

“Hazardous Substances Management Plan”. If the treatment facility shall not

accept the contaminated soil, the Regulated Waste shall then be sent to a State

licensed Class III landfill or other facility with WDRs that accept the Regulated

Waste.

3. You shall obtain pre-approval for your proposed treatment or disposal facility

in accordance with 5-15.7, “Hazardous Substances Management Plan”. You

shall obtain all necessary approvals and authorizations from the treatment or

disposal facility and shall provide them to the Engineer and City’s HMMP a

minimum of 5 Working Days prior to scheduling transport.

4. You shall use a Regulated Waste or Non-Hazardous Waste data form to

document the disposal from the Work Site of the contaminated soil that is

identified as Regulated Waste. You shall use a Hazardous Waste Manifest for

all soils identified as RCRA or Non-RCRA Hazardous Waste.

5. You shall provide the Engineer and City’s HMMP with manifests for each load

at least 48 hours prior to the scheduled pickup date. The City’s HMMP shall

review the manifests for accuracy. All manifests shall be signed off by the

Engineer or HMMP on the date of loading and transport. Copies of executed

manifests and treatment or disposal certificates shall be provided to the

Engineer and City’s HMMP as specified in 5-15.7, “Hazardous Substances

Management Plan”.

6. You shall manage the contaminated soil properly. The City shall not be liable

for contaminated soil improperly handled or disposed by you.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 120

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5-15.17 Payment.

1. The payment for waste management shall be included in the applicable Bid

items as follows:

a) “Preparation of Hazardous Waste Management Plan and Reporting”

(LS).

b) “Monitoring of Contaminated Soil” (HR).

c) “Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, and Handling of Soils Containing RCRA

Hazardous Waste” (TON).

d) “Loading, Transportation, and Disposal of soils containing RCRA

Hazardous Waste” (TON).

e) “Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, and Handling of Petroleum

Contaminated Soil” (TON).

f) “Loading, Transportation, and Disposal of Petroleum Contaminated

Soil” (TON).

g) “Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, and Handling of Soils Containing Non-

RCRA Hazardous Waste” (TON).

h) “Loading, Transportation, and Disposal of Soils Containing Non-RCRA

Hazardous Waste” (TON).

i) Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, Handling, Transportation, and

Disposal of Containerized RCRA Hazardous Waste” (55 Gal DRUMS).

j) “Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, Handling, Transportation, and

Disposal of Containerized Non-RCRA Hazardous Waste” (55 Gal

DRUMS).

k) “Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, Handling, Transportation, and

Recycling/Disposal of Universal Waste” (EACH).

l) “Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, Handling, Transportation, and

Recycling/Disposal of Regulated Waste” (TON).

m) “Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, Handling, Transportation, and

Disposal of RCRA Hazardous Waste Contamination from the

Treatment of Contaminated Ground Water” (GAL).

n) “Testing, Sampling, Site Storage, Handling, Transportation, and

Disposal of Non-RCRA Hazardous Waste Contamination from the

Treatment of Contaminated Ground Water” (GAL).

2. Shorter testing time and availability of preliminary results may be required by

the Engineer and shall be paid as Extra Work.

3. The payment for the management and disposal of TWW shall be paid as Extra

Work unless a separate lump sum Bid item has been provided for

“Management and Disposal of Treated Wood Waste”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 121

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. The payment for the preparation and implementation of the Community

Health and Safety Plan shall be included in the Contract Price unless a Bid item

for “Community Health and Safety Plan” has been provided.

5. The payment for Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response

(HAZWOPER) certification and training for construction staff shall be included

in the allowance Bid item for “Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency

Response (HAZWOPER) ) Certification.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 122

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

6-1.1 Construction Schedule. To paragraph (1), sentence (1), DELETE in its entirety and

SUBSTITUTE with the following:

After notification of award of the Contract and prior to the start of any

Work, you

shall submit your proposed Cost Loaded Construction Schedule to the Engineer at the

pre-construction meeting.

ADD the following:

1. Cost Loaded Construction Schedule (Schedule).

a) You shall be responsible for developing, coordinating, revising,

updating, and maintaining the Cost Loaded Construction Schedule

(Schedule) utilizing the Critical Path Method (CPM).

b) Schedule versions shall be based solely on the Work as awarded and

shall exclude any substitute proposals even if you pursue a

substitution in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

c) Include the approved proposals and approved Change Orders in the

Schedule updates.

d) Total Float is the number of days by which a part of the Work in the

Schedule may be delayed from its early dates without necessarily

extending the Contract Time. The Contract Float is the number of days

between your anticipated date for early completion of the Work, or

specified part, and the corresponding Contract Time. Total Float and

Contract Float belong to the Project and belong to any Party. They are

available to either party to accommodate changes in the Work or to

mitigate the effect of events which may delay performance or

completion.

e) Monthly progress payments are contingent upon the submittal of an

updated Schedule to the Engineer. The Engineer may refuse to process

the whole or part of any monthly payment if you refuse or fail to

provide an acceptable schedule.

f) The Schedule shall show a breakdown of Work into activities and

relationships between the activities to the extent required to

effectively manage the Work. The Schedule shall show the division of

the Work into activities and shall specify the progression from the NTP

to the end of the Contract Time.

g) The Schedule shall include appropriate time allowances and

constraints for submittals, items of interface with Work performed by

others, and specified construction, start-up, and performance tests.

h) Your Schedule shall include 7 Working Days for the Engineer to

schedule and conduct a Walk-through inspection and 15 Working Days

for the generation of the Punchlist. You shall Work diligently to

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 123

THE “WHITEBOOK”

complete all Punchlist items within 30 Working Days after the Engineer

provides the Punchlist.

i) If you modify or change the Schedule for Change Order Work or

otherwise, notify the Engineer in writing with an explanation.

j) Comments made by the Engineer on the Schedule during review shall

not relieve you from compliance with requirements of the Contract.

The Engineer may request that you and your major Subcontractors

(defined herein as being any Subcontractor or Supplier with 5% or

more of the value of the Contract) participate in the review of any

Schedule submission. Submit the Schedule revisions within 10

Working Days after the Engineer’s review.

k) The Schedule shall show work to be done by the City’s personnel, such

as but not limited to: submittal reviews (separate tasks for each), sewer

televising, water main connections, water testing, and operational

performance tests as separate tasks. The Schedule shall show

appropriate time allowances for work performed by the City and other

agencies.

l) If completion of any part of the Work, delivery of equipment or

materials, or provision of your submittals is behind schedule and will

impact the completion date of the Work, you shall submit a written

recovery plan acceptable to the Engineer for completing the Work by

the current Contract completion date.

m) You shall not be entitled to any extension in Contract Time or recovery

for any delay incurred because of extensions in an early completion

date until all Contract Float is used, performance of the Work extends

beyond the corresponding Contract Time, and a recovery plan is

submitted demonstrating that the delay cannot be mitigated or offset

through actions such as rescheduling the Work.

n) Misrepresentation of actual Work durations in order to suppress

available Float Time shall be cause for rejection of the Schedule and

any revisions or updates.

o) The Schedule shall include procurement related activities which lead

to the delivery of permanent materials to the Site in a timely manner.

Procurement activities include activities such as preparation of Shop

Drawings and Working Drawings, review and acceptance of Shop

Drawings and Working Drawings, materials fabrication, materials

delivery, and etc. as appropriate.

p) The Schedule shall be reasonably balanced over the construction

duration. Upon receipt, the Engineer shall review the Schedule and

shall provide comments, as appropriate, for revision.

q) Assign a budget to each Schedule activity. Separate Bid items shall be

separate activities. The Schedule shall show costs for each phase of

the Contract. The cost value of all Schedule activities shall equal the

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 124

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Contract values shown in the Bid both individually and in total. Include

Change Orders.

r) The Engineer may at any time request a Schedule narrative that

describes the approach to the Work and the rationale used to develop

the Schedule relationships and logic.

s) Submit an updated cash flow forecast with every pay request (for each

Project ID or WBS number provided in the Contract) showing periodic

and cumulative construction billing amounts for the duration of the

Contract Time. If there has been any Extra Work since the last update,

include only the approved amounts.

i. Refer to the Sample City Invoice materials attached to the

Contract Documents and use the format shown.

ii. See also the “Cash Flow Forecast Example” at the location

below:

https://www.sandiego.gov/ecp/edocref/

2. For phased funded contracts, the Schedule shall include the Work to be

completed as part of the first phase of the Phased Funding Schedule and all

subsequent phases and shall be in accordance with 6-1.4, “Phased Funding”.

ADD:

6-1.1.1 Contracts Less Than Or Equal To $500,000 In Value.

1. Use a scheduling program such as Microsoft Project or an approved equal

capable of producing the required information in accordance with 6-1,

“CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK” and these

specifications for the computerized CPM scheduling and monthly update

reports.

2. Provide the Schedule to the Engineer at the Pre-Construction meeting and as

required in accordance with 6-1.1, “Construction Schedule”.

3. Provide a fully developed horizontal bar-chart type schedule.

4. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity.

5. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first Working Day of each

week.

6. Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentages in 10%

increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to

indicate actual completion.

7. Graphically indicate sequences necessary for the completion of related

portions of the Work.

8. Be of sufficient size to show data for the entire Contract Time.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 125

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

6-1.1.2 Contracts More Than $500,000 In Value.

1. Provide the Schedule to the Engineer in accordance with 6-1.1, “Construction

Schedule” and 6-1.2, “Commencement of the Work”.

2. Use any scheduling product by ORACLE'S PRIMAVERA or approved equal

program capable of producing the required information in accordance with 6-

1, “CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK” for the

computerized CPM scheduling and monthly update reports. Electronic file

submittals shall be compatible with Primavera P6 format used by the City.

3. In addition to the electronic submittal of the Schedule, submit hard copy

tabular reports.

4. The Schedule shall begin with the date of issuance of the NTP and end at

Acceptance and shall contain as a minimum the following information:

a) Project name, the City’s Project identification numbers, your name,

address and phone number, dates of original schedule and latest

revision, revision number, and Contract Time.

b) Sufficient detail to assure adequate planning has been done for proper

execution of the Work such that, in the sole judgment of the Engineer,

it provides an appropriate basis for monitoring progress.

c) The sequence, duration, both early and actual starts and end dates of

each activity, interdependence, critical path, and percentage of

completion status of all activities required for the complete

performance of Work.

d) Construction activities including submittal review, operation checks,

final Walk-through, and Punchlist generation.

e) The cost associated with each activity and the total cost for each phase

of the Contract. The cost information shown in the Schedule shall be

used for schedule evaluation and budgetary forecasting purposes only

and shall not be construed as entitlement for payment.

f) Graphical reports, when specified or required by the Engineer, in

precedence diagram format and plotted on a time-scaled calendar.

Expressly identify the Contract Time, the critical path(s), and the activities.

g) Activities shall be shown on their early dates with their total float noted

beside them. Connections between activities whether on the same

sheet or on different sheets, shall identify both predecessor and

successor Work. Activity data shall include the description of Work,

activity costs (budget), activity duration, and special codes.

h) Activity data shall include the description of the Work, activity duration,

percent completed, and any special codes required with the following

information:

i. Current status of the activity.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 126

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ii. Remaining duration of the activity.

iii. Actual start and finish dates for the activity in progress or

completed.

i) The Schedule updates shall include both forecast and actual cost and

schedule data.

j) The Schedule of Values (SOV) for lump sum Bid items shown on the

Schedule shall be submitted in accordance with 7-2, “LUMP SUM

WORK”.

k) The Schedule shall indicate the estimated person days and material

quantities for each construction activity.

5. For those activities started but not yet completed at the time of submittal, the

updated Schedule shall reflect the percentage of costs remaining, as agreed

between you and the Engineer, for an estimate of the remaining budget.

6-1.1.3 Payment.

1. The payment for the Schedule shall be included in the Contract Price.

6-1.2 Commencement of the Work. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. Unless specified otherwise, you shall start construction within 5 Working Days

after NTP and shall diligently prosecute the Work to completion within the

Contract Time. Do not start any construction activities at the Site until the Pre-

Construction meeting is held and until the NTP has been issued by the

Engineer.

2. Upon your written request, the Engineer may delay the issuance of the NTP as

described in the following:

a) Up to 5 Working Days from the Pre-construction meeting.

b) Up to 40 Working Days from the LNTP for the preparation, submittal,

obtaining approval for and filing of the Permit Registration Documents

(PRDs) in accordance with 1001-1.8, “Permit Registration Documents

(PRDs)”.

c) Up to 60 Working Days from the LNTP for the preparation, submittal,

and approval of the engineered Traffic Control Plan (TCP) when

specified in 601-2.1.2, “Engineered Traffic Control Plans (TCP)”.

3. For areas that do not require engineered TCP on D-sheets, you may at any

time after the Pre-construction meeting obtain a TCP Permit via Working

Drawings or the City’s over the counter process and start the Work. If you

decide to commence the construction Work before the completion of the D-

sheet TCPs, you shall forfeit the 60 Working Days specified here. The D-sheet

TCP shall be done concurrently and no additional time shall be granted.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 127

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. For paving Work, coordinate the Work to facilitate the installation and

protection of the new curb ramps and associated concrete Work prior to

commencing the asphalt overlay operations. Do not start the Work at a specific

location until all layouts and measurements are agreed upon by you and the

Engineer.

5. You shall submit a Cost Loaded Construction Schedule in accordance with

6-1.1, “Construction Schedule” at the scheduled pre-construction meeting.

6. If a Cost Loaded Construction Schedule is not provided, the pre-construction

meeting will still be held. The Contract Time shall commence at issuance of the

NTP, but you shall be limited to the following activities until the Cost Loaded

Construction Schedule has been submitted to the Resident Engineer with no

exceptions taken:

a) Mobilization of your trailers, associated utility setup, and grading for

trailer area

b) Permit Procurement

c) Fencing and temporary utilities for your storage areas

d) Submittal of anticipated critical path submittals

ADD:

6-1.2.1 Construction Phasing.

1. When project phasing is provided in the Special Provisions do not proceed to

the next phase unless the Engineer has accepted the preceding phase.

2. For mainline projects, use of multiple mainline crews shall require prior

approval from the Engineer.

ADD:

6-1.3 Work Outside Normal Working Hours.

1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or approved by the

Engineer, Work at the Site shall be performed during Normal Working Hours.

The Engineer may approve Work beyond Normal Working Hours in connection

with the safety or protection of persons, property, or the Work at the Site or

adjacent to the Site.

2. The Engineer shall coordinate inspection staff, to the extent possible, to

accommodate Project inspection requirements. If your request for working

during outside Normal Working Hours is approved, you shall be responsible

for reimbursing the City for all costs to provide inspection services outside

Normal Working Hours. The Engineer shall issue a deductive Change Order to

compensate the City.

3. You shall obtain a noise abatement permit and shall install any permit

requirements when such a permit is required to perform the Work outside

Normal Working Hours.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 128

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6-1.3.1 Payment.

1. The payment for the noise abatement permits shall be included in the Contract

Price.

ADD:

6-1.4 Phased Funding.

6-1.4.1 General.

1. Phase Funding means that construction will be broken down into various

phases that will take place over multiple City fiscal years. The decision to utilize

phased funding will be specified in the Contract Documents.

6-1.4.2 Pre-award Schedule.

1. The Pre-Award Schedule, in accordance with 6-1, “CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK”, shall be prepared for the first phase

of the Contract and shall be used as a basis for the first Phased Funding

Schedule Agreement which will be developed by the City.

2. You shall coordinate the estimated construction start date with the City’s

project manager. Upon receipt, the City’s project manager shall review the Pre-

Award Schedule and provide comments, as appropriate, for revision. The

project manager may require backup documentation and calculations to

justify schedules.

6-1.4.3 Phased Funding Schedule Agreement.

1. Once executed by both parties, the Phased Funding Schedule Agreement shall

become part of the Contract Documents. The Phased Funding Schedule

Agreement Form is included in the Bidding Documents.

2. The City reserves the right to award the first phase with duration of fewer than

90 Working Days.

6-1.4.4 Final Phased Funding Schedule Agreement.

1. After Award your approved schedule shall serve as the basis for the final

Phased Funding Schedule Agreement which includes the total contract

amount and all phases. You and the City may mutually agree to revise the first

phase. However, the total funds allocated as part of the previously approved

Pre-Award Schedule shall not be exceeded.

2. The final Phased Funding Schedule Agreement shall define payment

limitations and the respective obligations of the parties in accordance with 7-

3.10, “Phased Funding Compensation”.

ADD:

6-1.5 Excusable Delays.

1. If a delay in the Work occurs and affects Work activities, delays may either be

Excusable Compensable Delays or Excusable Non-Compensable Delays.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 129

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6-1.5.1 Excusable Compensable Delays.

1. If an Excusable Delay meets the requirements of 6-4.2, “Extensions of Time”,

the following circumstances shall be compensable:

a) The City’s failure or inability to make available any portion of the entire

Site in accordance with the requirements of the Schedule.

b) The City’s failure or inability to obtain necessary zoning changes,

variances, code changes, permits or approvals from any governmental

authority, or failure to obtain any street or alley vacations required for

the performance of the Work, except to the extent due to your fault or

neglect as determined by the Engineer.

c) Delays resulting from the acts or omissions of Separate Contractors,

except to the extent Separate Contractors perform their work properly

and in accordance with the Schedule.

d) Differing or concealed site conditions that could not have been

reasonably anticipated at the time of Bid.

e) Delays resulting from the existence or discovery of hazardous

materials or waste on the Site not brought in by you and not included

in the Contract.

f) Delays resulting from any changes made to any City of San Diego

Municipal Code after the date of execution of the Contract.

g) Delays due to the City’s acts or omissions and those within the City’s

control.

h) Delays requested by the City.

6-1.5.2 Excusable Non-Compensable and Concurrent Delays.

1. The City shall only issue an extension of time for Excusable Delays that meet

the requirements of 6-4.2, “Extensions of Time” for the following

circumstances:

a) Delays resulting from Force Majeure.

b) Delays caused by weather.

c) Delays caused by changes to County, State, or Federal law.

2. When a non-excusable delay is concurrent with an Excusable Delay, you shall

not be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for the period the non-

excusable delay is concurrent with the Excusable Delay.

3. When an Excusable Non-Compensable Delay is concurrent with an Excusable

Compensable Delay, you shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time,

but shall not be entitled to compensation for the period the Excusable Non-

Compensable Delay is concurrent with the Excusable Compensable Delay.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 130

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

6-1.6 Pre-construction Meeting.

1. Within 20 Working Days from the LNTP the Engineer shall schedule a

mandatory Pre-construction meeting with you. The agenda shall include items

such as NTP, design services and submittal and review process, critical

elements of the Work schedule, submittal schedule, cost breakdown of major

lump sum items, payment requests and processing, environmental and

community concerns, coordination with the involved utility firms, the level of

record project documents required, and emergency telephone numbers for

all representatives involved in the course of construction.

ADD:

6-2.1 Moratoriums.

1. When moratorium periods are specified in the Special Provisions, you shall

stop work and completely demobilize all construction related activity,

equipment, and materials within the stated limits prior to the beginning of the

moratorium periods at no additional cost to the City. Complete any Work that has

been started prior to the start of the moratorium.

2. You shall restore and clean the site prior to each moratorium. Do not leave

equipment, materials, or traffic control on the Site during the moratorium

periods. Cover trenches during moratorium periods. Do not use temporary

resurfacing.

3. Do not Work within 1 mile from the nearest polling location that would impact

access to the polling location. This construction moratorium applies to Work

that includes, but is not limited to: trench and utility work, saw cutting, and

paving. You shall remove all traffic control that reduces lanes or reduces lane

speeds and shall also remove sidewalk closures within 1 mile of polling

locations. Additionally, you shall not schedule power outages with private

utilities that would impact voters and polling locations. This construction

moratorium shall take effect during all general elections and shall be

considered included in your Schedule. Refer to the San Diego County website

for designated polling locations.

6-2.1.1 Payment.

1. The payment for complying with moratorium requirements shall be included in

the Contract Price.

2. You shall not be entitled to any additional costs for repeated mobilization and

demobilization to continue the Work after the moratorium periods.

6-3.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, the time of completion of the

Contract shall be expressed in Working Days.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 131

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. The number of Working Days specified for the Walk-through, preparation, and

the completion of Punchlist items until acceptance shall be included in the

stipulated Contract Time.

3. For pipeline projects, the following shall be included in the stipulated Contract

Time:

a) 30 Working Days for the first phase and 10 Working Days for each

subsequent phase for City Force high-line work for water mains.

b) 30 Working Days for the City Forces TV inspection of sewer mains.

c) If weather condition is inclement, complete each street segment within

15 Working Days from the day the slurry seal or asphalt overlay is

placed. Each completed segment shall include other incidental Work

items (weed abatement, damaged asphalt pavement replacement,

asphalt patching, resurfacing, striping, markings, raised pavement

markers, and inlet markers).

d) 30 Calendar Days for full depth asphalt final mill and resurfacing work

required per SDG-107, “Trench Resurfacing for Asphalt Concrete

Surfaced Streets”.

e) Where shutdowns of 16 inch and larger pipes are required, there is a

shutdown moratorium from May until October. Plan and schedule

Work accordingly and submit a tentative schedule for the anticipated

shutdowns prior to NTP. No additional payment or Working Days will

be granted for delays due to the moratorium.

4. When specified in the Contract Documents, the Plant Establishment Period

(PEP) is included in the stipulated Contract Time and shall begin with the

acceptance of the installation of the vegetation plan in accordance with Part 8

– LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION.

6-4.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The City shall only grant an extension of time if the Extra Work or unforeseen

condition impacts the Project’s critical path. All requests for an extension in

Contract Time for any Extra Work or unforeseen event shall be demonstrated

by using the Critical Path Method (CPM). No other scheduling method shall be

used to calculate the Project’s schedule.

6-4.2 Extensions of Time. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The Contract Time shall not be modified except by Change Order.

2. You shall notify the City in writing within 1 Working Day after the occurrence

and discovery of an event that impacts the Project Schedule.

a) If you believe this event requires a Change Order, you shall submit a

written Change Order request with a report to the City that explains

the request for Change Order within 5 Working Days. The Change

Order request must include supporting data, a general description of

the discovery, the basis for extension, and the estimated length of

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 132

THE “WHITEBOOK”

extension. The City may grant an extension of time, in writing, for the

Change Order request if you require more time to gather and analyze

data.

3. The Engineer shall not grant an extension of Contract Time in accordance with

6-1.5, “Excusable Delays” unless you demonstrate, through an analysis of the

critical path, the following:

a) The event causing the delay impacted the activities along the Project’s

critical path.

b) The increases in the time to perform all or part of the Project beyond

the Contract Time arose from unforeseeable causes beyond your

control and without your fault or negligence and that all project float

has been used.

4. Any modifications to the Contract Time will be incorporated into the weekly

document that the Engineer issues that stipulates the Contract Time. If you do

not agree with this document, submit to the Engineer for review a written

protest supporting your objections to the document within 30 Calendar Days

after receipt of the statement. Your failure to file a timely protest shall

constitute your acceptance of the Engineer’s weekly document.

a) Your protest will be considered a claim for time extension and shall

be subject to 2-10.1, “Claims”.

6-4.4 Written Notice and Report. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Your failure to notify the Resident Engineer within 1 Working Day OR provide

a Change Order request within 5 Working Days after the event, in accordance

with 6-4.2, “Extensions of Time”, will be considered grounds for refusal by the

City to consider such request if your failure to notify prejudices the City in

responding to the event.

6-6.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The City reserves the right to shut down any trenching operation if you are not

proceeding within a reasonable period of time to restore the pavement and

Site cleanup. A reasonable period of time is considered to be 5 to 10 Working

Days after backfilling any one block, approximately 600 feet (182.9 m), of

pipeline. The Engineer shall determine the period of time allowed which shall

not be subject to dispute.

2. During periods when the Work is suspended, you shall be prepared for any

emergency Work that shall be supervised by your representative, including

site safety and maintenance.

6-6.2 Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries. DELETE in its entirety and

SUBSTITUTE with the following:

6-6.2 Archaeological, Native American, and Paleontological Discoveries.

1. If a Mitigation, Monitoring, and Reporting Program (MMRP) for Historical,

Paleontological, or both resources have been prepared for the Project, then

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 133

THE “WHITEBOOK”

the MMRP shall control in lieu of this subsection (except for reference to 6-4,

“DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME”) unless the MMRP is silent to these issues.

For Paleontological discoveries, either the MMRP or Paleontological

Monitoring and Reporting Program (PMRP) shall control in lieu of this

subsection (whichever is applicable). Refer to the MMRP or the

“Paleontological Construction Monitoring Requirements” attached in the

Contract Documents.

2. If discovery is made of items of Native American, Archaeological, and/or

Paleontological interest, you shall immediately notify the Engineer and cease

any soil disturbing activity in the area of discovery and any nearby area. You

shall also notify the San Diego County Coroner (Medical Examiner) at (858)

694-2895 in accordance with the California Health and Safety Code §§7050.5

and 7051.

3. The City shall not authorize any further excavation or disturbance of the Site

or any nearby area until the medical examiner has concluded an investigation

of the circumstances, manner, and cause of any death and the

recommendations concerning the treatment and disposition of the remains

have been made to the City. Excavation in the areas of interest shall not

resume until authorized by the Engineer in writing as approved by the

Archeologist.

4. You shall make allowances for temporary Work stoppages to evaluate and

salvage Native American, Archaeological, and Paleontological discoveries. If

suspension of construction activities for analysis, salvaging of resources, or

both exceed 5 Working Days along the entire alignment, you shall be entitled

to an extension of time in accordance with the provisions of 6-4, “DELAYS AND

EXTENSIONS OF TIME”.

5. Discoveries encountered may include fossil resources, historic or prehistoric

human bones or remains, animal bones or remains, stone implements or

other artifacts and remnants of dwelling sites, and any items created or

altered by humans more than 45 years ago, excluding pipes, laterals, and

appurtenances.

6. There are severe civil and criminal consequences for failure to treat Native

American, Archaeological, Paleontological, or both discoveries in accordance

with local, State, and Federal laws. You shall notify Subcontractors and

Suppliers of the requirements of this subsection.

7. You shall indemnify and hold the City, its officers, and employees harmless

from any claims asserted or liability established, including penalties from local,

state, or federal agencies arising from your failure or your Subcontractors and

Suppliers failure to notify the Engineer of such discoveries in accordance with

this subsection.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 134

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

6-6.2.1 Archeological and Native American Monitoring Program.

1. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, you shall retain a

qualified archaeologist approved by the City’s Environmental Analysis Section

(EAS). In accordance with City Historical Resources Guidelines and prior to the

Pre-Construction meeting, you shall provide references for at least 1

successfully completed project of the approved archaeologist within the last 5

years of similar size and complexity in Southern California. The City shall verify

the information provided and only qualified monitors shall be accepted. The

Archeologist shall retain the appropriate Native American representative. The

Archeologist and the Native American representative shall attend the Pre-

construction meeting. The areas shown on the Plans subject to monitoring are

approximate. The Archaeologist shall confirm the sites and implement the

required monitoring per the Contract Appendices.

2. If a discovery is made, your archaeological monitor shall make a determination

as to whether excavation in the area shall cease or shall continue. The time

you wait for this determination from their monitor shall not be claimed as

delay time.

3. If any significant archaeological sites are known to exist in the project area,

they shall be shown in the Archaeological Data Recovery Program as part of

Appendix A.

6-6.2.1.1 Payment.

1. The full compensation for the Archaeological and Native American monitoring

program and report preparation, as prescribed in Contract Appendices, shall

be included in the lump sum or linear foot Bid item for “Archaeological and

Native American Monitoring Program” and shall include the payment for Work

performed on laterals and other services, such as potholing and other

trenching. No payment shall be made unless the qualified archaeologist is

present to verify during the performance of the Work.

2. In the event of a significant discovery, foreseen or unforeseen, and if no Allowance

Bid item for “Archaeological and Native American Mitigation and Curation” is

included in the Contract, you shall be entitled to additional compensation in

accordance with 2-8, “EXTRA WORK” for the implementation of a Mitigation

Program as set forth in Contract appendices.

3. The payment for Work delays in excess of the 5 Working Days as described in

item 4 of 6-6.2, “Archaeological, Native American, and Paleontological

Discoveries” shall be included in the Bid item for “Suspension of Work –

Resources”.

ADD:

6-6.2.2 Paleontological Monitoring Program.

1. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, you shall retain a

qualified paleontologist approved by EAS. In accordance with City Historical

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 135

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Resources Guidelines and prior to the pre-construction meeting, you shall

provide references for at least 1 successfully completed project of the

approved paleontologist within the last 5 years of similar size and complexity

in Southern California. The City shall verify the information provided and only

qualified monitors shall be accepted. The paleontologist shall attend the pre-

construction meeting. The areas shown in the Contract Documents that are

subject to monitoring are approximate. The paleontologist shall confirm the

sites and implement the required monitoring in Contract Appendices.

2. If a discovery is made, your paleontological monitor shall make a

determination as to whether excavation in the area shall cease or shall

continue. The time you wait for this determination from their monitor shall not

be claimed as delay time.

6-6.2.2.1 Payment.

1. The full compensation for the paleontological monitoring program and report

preparation, as prescribed in Contract Appendices, shall be included in the

lump sum or linear feet Bid item for “Paleontological Monitoring Program” and

shall include the payment for Work performed on laterals and other services,

such as potholing and other trenching. No payment shall be made unless the

qualified paleontologist is present to verify during the performance of the

Work.

2. In the event of a significant discovery, and if no bid item for “Paleontological

Mitigation and Excavation” is included in the Contract, you shall be entitled to

additional compensation in accordance with 2-8, “EXTRA WORK” for the

implementation of a Mitigation Program as set forth in Contract Appendices.

3. The payment for Work delays in excess of the 5 Working Days as described in

item 4 of 6-3.2.1, “Archaeological, Native American, and Paleontological

Discoveries” shall be included in the Bid item for “Suspension of Work –

Resources”.

ADD:

6-6.2.3 Archaeological and Native American Mitigation and Curation.

1. In the event of a significant Native American or archaeological discovery,

foreseen or unforeseen, and after consultation with EAS staff, you shall

implement a mitigation program as set forth in Appendix A.

2. In accordance with the Mitigation and Monitoring Reporting Program, the

mitigation Work shall include, but shall not be limited to the preparation and

implementation of an Archaeological Data Recovery Program (ADRP), the

following for artifact remains:

a) Excavation for recovery

b) Sorting

c) Cleaning

d) Cataloging/identifying/analyzing

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 136

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) Curation (bagging, placement into archival boxes, delivery to an

appropriate institution, and any fees required by the institution)

f) Reporting

3. The Archaeological Principal Investigator (PI), as defined in the MMRP, shall

make a recommendation if all or a portion (a representative sample) of the

items discovered need to be curated.

4. The excavation Work shall include coordination of all parties involved and

traffic control for a period of up to 2 weeks.

6-6.2.3.1 Payment.

1. The Work for archaeological and Native American mitigation and curation shall

be paid under the Allowance Bid item for “Archaeological and Native American

Mitigation and Curation”. You shall provide the Engineer with invoices for the

Work performed, including the invoice from the archaeological monitor in the

format shown in the attached Appendix, and shall be reimbursed from the

amount allocated.

2. If there is an ADRP or known site that is indicated in the Contract Documents,

the payment shall be included in the Allowance Bid item for “Archeological and

Native American Mitigation and Curation”.

ADD:

6-6.2.4 Paleontological Mitigation and Excavation.

1. In the event of a significant paleontological discovery and after consultation

with EAS staff, implement a mitigation program in accordance with the

Contract Documents. In accordance with the Mitigation and Monitoring

Reporting Program or Paleontological Monitoring and Reporting Program, the

mitigation Work shall include the following for fossil remains:

a) Excavation for recovery

b) Sorting

c) Cleaning

d) Cataloging/identifying/analyzing

e) Reporting

f) Delivery to and any fees required by the appropriate institution

2. The excavation Work shall include coordination of all parties involved and

traffic control for a period of up to 2 weeks.

6-6.2.4.1 Payment.

1. The Work for paleontological mitigation and related excavation shall be paid

under the cubic yard Bid item for “Paleontological Mitigation and Excavation”.

Excavation Work over 10 feet (3 m) deep or, as determined by the

paleontologist, of areas outside of the trench for further recovery of fossils

(test pits) shall be included in this Bid item.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 137

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6-7.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Prior to the Acceptance of the Work, you shall be found in default of the

Contract if:

a) You become insolvent, assign your assets for the benefit of your

creditors, are unable to pay your debts as they become due, or are

otherwise financially unable to complete the Work.

b) You abandon the Work by failing to report to the site and by failing to

diligently execute the Work to completion.

c) You disregard written instruction from the Engineer or materially

violate provisions of the Contract Documents.

d) You fail to execute the Work according to the Schedule approved by

the Engineer.

e) You disregard laws or regulations of any public body having

jurisdiction.

f) You commit continuous or repeated violations of regulatory or

statutory safety requirements.

g) You fail to notify the Engineer upon discovery of items of Native

American, Archaeological, or Paleontological interests.

2. Notices, and other written communications regarding default between the

Contractor, the City, and the Surety shall be transmitted in accordance with

5-2, “SPECIAL NOTICES”.

6-8 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONVENIENCE. DELETE in its entirety and

SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. At any time, the City may at its sole discretion terminate this Contract in whole

or in part. If the City decides to terminate this Contract for convenience, the

City shall issue a written notice of termination for convenience in accordance

with 5-2, “SPECIAL NOTICES”. Upon receipt of this notice, you shall immediately

proceed as follows:

a) Stop Work immediately or in accordance with the Notice of

Termination.

b) Notify Subcontractors and Suppliers to immediately cease their Work

and place no further subcontracts for materials, services, or facilities

except as necessary to complete any authorized continued portion of

the Contract.

c) Terminate all subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the Work

terminated.

d) With approval by the Engineer, settle all outstanding obligations

arising from the termination of subcontracts. This approval shall be

final for the purposes of this section.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 138

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) As directed by the Engineer, transfer and deliver completed or partially

completed drawings, plans, calculations, specifications, and any other

documents and records that, if the Contract had been completed,

would be required to be furnished to the City.

f) Complete the performance of the Work not terminated.

g) Take all necessary steps and actions to minimize all costs to the City as

a result of the termination.

h) Take any action that may be necessary or that the Engineer may direct

for the protection and preservation of the property related to the

Contract that is in your possession and in which the City has or may

acquire an interest.

6-8.1 Termination Cost.

1. The City shall determine and pay you the fair and reasonable amounts for your

termination cost as follows:

a) The Contract Price for completed services accepted by the Engineer

not previously paid or adjusted for any saving of freight and other

charges.

b) The fair and reasonable cost of settling and paying termination

settlements for terminated subcontracts that are chargeable to the

terminated portion of the Contract.

c) The City shall pay you a prorated amount of profit on your Contract for

the amount of Work that you performed. The City shall not pay for lost

profit on Work that was not performed by you.

6-8.2 Termination Settlement.

1. After termination, you shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to

the Engineer no later than 3 months from the effective date of termination,

unless extended in writing by the Engineer.

2. If you fail to submit the proposal within the time allowed, the City may determine

and pay the fair and reasonable amount that may be due you as a result of the

termination. If you do not agree that the amount determined by the Engineer is

fair and reasonable, notify the Engineer within 30 Calendar Days of receipt of

payment.

6-8.3 Determination of Amount Due the Contractor.

1. In determining the amount due you, the City shall deduct the following:

a) The fair value of property destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged that has

become undeliverable to the City.

b) Any claim which the City has against you under the Contract.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 139

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6-8.4 Records and Documents Relating to Termination.

1. Unless otherwise specified or by statute, you shall maintain all records and

documents relating to the terminated portion of the Contract for 3 years after

final settlement. This includes all books and other evidence bearing on your

costs, expenses, and settlement under the Contract. You shall make these

records and documents available to the City, at your office, at all reasonable

times, without any direct charge. If approved by the Engineer, you may

maintain photographs, microphotographs, and other authentic reproductions

instead of original records and documents.

6-8.5 The City’s Right to Terminate or Suspend for Loss of Project Funds.

1. The City may terminate or suspend the Contract at its sole discretion if the

State of California or its agents render the Redevelopment Agency funds being

used to fund this Project unavailable. If the City chooses to suspend the

Contract, that suspension shall last until funds are identified and approved by

the City Council or Mayor, whichever is appropriate, to be used to complete

this project. If the City elects under this provision to terminate the Contract,

then neither Party is entitled to compensation from the other Party for any

costs arising from such termination. The City may also elect to terminate after

invoking a suspension under this provision.

6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Your failure to complete the Work within the time allowed shall result in

damages being sustained by the City. Such damages are, and shall continue to

be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. For each consecutive

Working Day in excess of the time specified for the completion of the Work, as

adjusted in accordance with 6-4, “DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME”, you

shall pay to the City, or have withheld from monies due it, the sum described

in the table below, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

2. The execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement between you the City

that the liquidated damage amount described in the table below is the value

of the damage caused by your failure to complete the Work within the allotted

time. Such sum shall not be construed as a penalty and may be deducted from

your payments if such delay occurs.

Contract Value Liquidated Damage Daily Amount

Less than $100,000 $250

$100,000 and more $1000

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 140

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

6-10 RIGHT TO AUDIT.

6-10.1 General.

1. The City retains the right to review, audit, reasonably access your and all your

Subcontractor’s premises to review and audit your compliance with the

provisions of the Contract. This includes the right to inspect, photocopy, and

retain copies, outside of your premises, of any and all records with appropriate

safeguards if such retention is deemed necessary by the City in its sole

discretion. The City will keep this information in strictest confidence.

2. You shall include the right to audit in the subcontracts and ensure that these

specifications are binding upon all Subcontractors.

6-10.2 Audit.

1. The right to audit includes the right to examine any and all books, records,

documents, and any other evidence of procedures and practices that the City

determines is necessary to discover and verify that you are in compliance with

all requirements under the Contract.

2. If there is a claim for additional compensation or for changes in Work, the right

to audit also includes the right to verify all direct and indirect costs which are

claimed to have been incurred, anticipated to be incurred, or for which a claim

for additional compensation or for changes in the Work have been submitted.

3. You shall maintain complete and accurate records in accordance with

generally accepted accounting practices in the construction industry. Make

available to the Engineer for review and audit all Project related accounting

records and documents and any other financial data. Upon the Engineer’s

request, you shall submit exact duplicates of originals of all requested records

to the Engineer.

6-10.3 Compliance Required Before Mediation and Litigation.

1. As a condition precedent to proceeding with mandatory mediation and further

litigation under 2-10.2, “Dispute Resolution Process” you shall comply with the

audit specifications within 60 Days of the Engineer’s notice to review and audit

compliance. See 5-2, “SPECIAL NOTICES”.

6-10.4 Access to Records on Federally Funded Projects.

1. You shall retain all records, books, papers, and documents directly pertinent

to the Contract for a minimum of 5 years after the City makes final payments

and all other pending matters are closed and shall allow access to those

records to the City, the Federal grantor agency, the Comptroller General of the

United States, or any duly authorized representatives.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 141

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

ADD:

7-2.1 Schedule of Values (SOV).

1. Submit an SOV for the lump sum Bid items of the Work to the Engineer for

review and approval at the Pre-construction meeting.

2. The Schedule of Values shall:

a) Subdivide the Work into its respective parts.

b) Include values for all items comprising the Work.

c) Serve as the basis for monthly progress payments.

3. The Engineer is the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details, and description

of values established. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a greater number of

SOV items than proposed by you is necessary, add the additional items

identified by the Engineer. When requested by the Engineer, provide

substantiating data in support of the SOV.

4. Incorporate the SOV into the cost loading function of the Schedule in

accordance with 6-1, “CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF

THE WORK”. Monthly progress payment amounts for Lump Sum items shall be

determined from the monthly updates of the Schedule activities.

5. Develop the SOV independently but simultaneously with the development of

the Schedule activities and logic. Incorporate phase funding impacts, if

applicable, into the Schedule.

6. Break down the Work not specifically included in the Bid as necessary for

establishment of cost and Schedule activity.

7. Following acceptance of the SOV, incorporate the changes (if any) into the cost

loading portion of the Schedule. Where coordination of the Schedule and the

SOV requires changes made to one or both documents, propose changes to

the SOV and to the Schedule activities to satisfy the Schedule cost loading

requirements.

8. Update and submit these listings in conjunction with the Schedule monthly

submittals.

9. Incorporate issued Change Orders or Field Orders in the Schedule into the SOV

as single units identified by the Change Order or Field Order number.

10. Changes to the Schedule which add activities not included in the original

Schedule but included in the original Work (schedule omissions) shall have

values assigned as accepted by the Engineer. Other activity values shall be

reduced to provide equal value adjustment increases for added activities as

accepted by the Engineer.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 142

THE “WHITEBOOK”

11. In the event that you and the Engineer agree to make adjustments to the

original SOV because of inequities discovered in the original accepted SOV,

increases and equal decreases to values for activities may be made.

ADD:

7-2.2 Payment.

1. The payment for the preparation of the SOV shall be included in the Contract

Price.

7-3.1 General. To paragraph (8), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

If, within the time fixed by law, a properly executed notice to stop payment is filed with

the City, due to your failure to pay for labor or materials used in the Work, all money

due for such labor or materials will be withheld from payment in accordance with

applicable laws.

ADD the following:

1. Unless specified otherwise, the Contract Price includes use, consumer, and

other taxes mandated by applicable legal requirements.

2. As provided in §7105 of the California Public Contract Code, if the Contract is not

financed by revenue bonds, you are not responsible for the cost of repairing or

restoring damage to the Project when damage was proximately caused by an act

of God, in excess of 5% of the Contract Price, if the following occur:

a) The Project damaged was built in accordance with the Contract

requirements.

b) There are no insurance requirements in the Contract for the damages.

3. COST OVERRUN NOTIFICATION FOR TIME & MATERIALS (T&M) CONTRACTS:

You shall promptly notify the City in writing of any potential cost overruns. Cost

overruns shall include, but are not limited to the following:

a) Where the total cost for the performance of the scope of services

defined in the Scope of Work appears that it may be greater than the

maximum compensation for the Contract.

7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. ADD the following:

1. The Final Payment, which is the release of Retention, shall be paid to you after

you have successfully submitted the following required documents:

a) An affidavit that payrolls and bills for materials, equipment, and other

indebtedness connected with the Work for which the City or the City’s

property might be responsible for or encumbered by.

b) A certificate evidencing that insurances required by the Contract

Documents shall remain in force after Final Payment is currently in

effect and shall not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least a 30

Calendar Days prior written notice has been given to the Engineer.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 143

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) Consent of Surety to Final Payment.

d) If required by the Engineer, other data establishing payment or

satisfaction of obligations such as receipts, releases and waivers of

liens, claims, and security interests or encumbrances arising out of the

Contract Documents. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or

waiver required by the City, you may furnish a bond satisfactory to the

Engineer to indemnify the City against such lien.

e) If required in the Contract Documents, the successful completion and

submittal of the required reports such as construction demolition,

waste recycling, and hydrostatic discharge reports.

f) Required EOCP Final Summary Report in accordance with Section 0-

12, “Contract Records and Reports”, record drawings, operations

manuals, test reports, warranty documentation, and UL labels shall be

submitted before requesting the release of retention.

g) Acceptance of the completed Project by the asset owning Department.

2. Submit an invoice for payment after you successfully complete the required

documents and the City will pay the invoice within 30 Calendar Days. The City

will pay 6% annually for late retention payments.

ADD:

7-3.2.1 Application for Progress Payment.

1. By the 10

day of each month, sign, fill out, and submit to the Engineer a partial

payment estimate that identifies acceptable Work performed during the

previous month, or since the last partial payment estimate was submitted. If

requested by the Engineer, provide such additional data as may be required

to support the payment estimate. Such data may include submission of signed

field orders and satisfactory evidence of payment for equipment, materials,

and labor, including payments to Subcontractors and Suppliers.

2. For application for progress payments, you shall use the format required by

the City. An electronic copy of the invoice form is available from the Engineer

upon request. Progress payments shall be signed and the date of the invoice

shall be the date that the invoice is submitted.

3. The City shall not pay progress or partial payments until you submit to the

Engineer an acceptable updated Schedule. It is solely your responsibility to

prepare and submit the Schedule updates.

4. The City shall pay you within 30 Calendar Days after the presentation of

undisputed and properly submitted applications for payment.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 144

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. Disputed or incorrect applications shall be returned to you within 7 Calendar

Days with documentation describing the reason for the rejection of the

payment request.

ADD:

7-3.2.2 Amount of Progress Payments.

1. The City will pay 6% annually for late progress payments.

2. Progress payments will be considered “late” if the following occur:

a) The City does not pay the contractor within 30 Calendar Days from

receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted invoice. A properly

submitted payment invoice means that the City has approved for

payment the entire invoice amount or if the Resident Engineer has not

disputed any portion of the application within 7 Calendar Days of the

date of submission.

b) The application for payment does not require signing of a Contract

Change Order.

3. The Engineer may withhold payment for any of the following reasons:

a) Defective or incomplete Work.

b) Not providing an updated and accurate Cost Loaded Construction

Schedule in accordance with 6-1.1, “Construction Schedule”.

c) Stop notices, wage orders, or other withholdings required by

Applicable Law. Your failure to comply with 5-3.3, “Payroll Records”

and the Contractor Registration and Electronic Reporting System

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. The Engineer may back charge the contract for any of the following reasons:

a) Defective or incorrect Work not remedied.

b) Damage to City property or a third party’s property that was caused by

you.

c) Liquidated Damages.

7-3.2.2.1 Progress Payment for Pipelines.

1. Progress payments for pipelines shall be determined by multiplying the total

number of linear feet of each of the following operations completed during

the payment period, by the corresponding percentage given below, and the

Contract Unit Price for the particular main(s) or drain(s).

2. The progress payment may include payment for items in the Bid proposal,

other than mains, which have been installed complete during the payment

period.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 145

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Payment break-down shall be as follows:

OPERATION PERCENTAGE

WATER:

Trench Excavation, Pipe in Place, Backfill and Cleanup. 80%

Hydrostatic and Bacterial Testing, Pavement Restoration and

Final Cleanup

20%

SEWER:

Trench Excavation, Pipe in Place, Backfill and Cleanup. 80%

Testing (Wayneball and/or Mandrel), Pavement Restoration

and Final Cleanup.

20%

STORM DRAIN:

Trench Excavation, Pipe in Place, Backfill and Cleanup. 80%

Pavement Restoration and Final Cleanup. 20%

SEWER MAIN REHABILITATION:

Cleaning, Televising, liner installation, point repairs, and

lateral reinstatements.

80%

Approval of pipeline rehabilitation verified by Final Video. 20%

4. In asphalt-surfaced streets, the City shall pay 15% for hydrostatic and bacterial

testing, Wayneball and Mandrelling (where necessary), for water and sewer

utility constructions respectively, and operational testing for storm drains,

including the trench cap and cleanup. The City shall pay the remaining 5% after

completing the asphalt wearing surface, Trench Capping per SDG-107 “Trench

Resurfacing for Asphalt Concrete Surfaced Streets”, and final cleanup.

5. Trench excavation, pipe in place, backfill, and cleanup of construction debris

are one operation that shall be complete before the City pays the first 80%.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 146

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

7-3.2.3 Waiver of Claims at Final Payment.

1. Your acceptance of Final Payment constitutes a waiver of affirmative Claims

by you, except those previously made in writing and identified as unsettled at

the time of Final Payment.

ADD:

7-3.3.1 Payment for Stored Materials on Site.

7-3.3.1.1 General.

1. When authorized, you may request payment for materials and equipment

which has not been incorporated into the Work but will be at a later date and

will be delivered and stored at the Project Site.

2. The material shall meet the Contract requirements and the material’s required

test results and certifications shall be filed with the Engineer.

3. Only non-perishable materials for major items of Work or Materials Subject to

Price Adjustment shall be considered for payment for on-site storage.

However, each individual item has a value of more than 1% of the Contract

Price and shall become a permanent part of the Work.

4. Materials cost shall be evidenced by the manufacturer's paid invoice bearing

the statement that you have paid all invoices in full.

5. The payments for the stored materials shall not exceed the invoice price or

60% of the Bid prices for the pay items into which the materials are to be

incorporated, whichever is less, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

6. Apply for the payment for materials stored on a form provided by the Engineer

and attach documentation to show the following:

a) The amount paid on the invoice (or other record of production cost)

for the stored items.

b) The dollar amount of the material incorporated into each of the

various Work items for the month.

c) The amount that should be retained for stored materials.

d) That you have received the materials and equipment free and are clear

of all liens, charges, secured interests, and encumbrances.

e) That the materials and equipment are covered by the appropriate

property insurance in accordance with the insurance provisions and

other arrangements that protect the City’s interest.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 147

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. You shall provide the Engineer, upon request and prior to any partial payment,

documentation which transfers full legal title to such materials to the City

conditional only upon receipt of the Final Payment. Such transfer of title or any

partial payment shall not constitute acceptance by the City of the materials

nor shall it void the right to reject materials subsequently found to be

unsatisfactory in accordance with SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS. This

shall also not relieve you of any obligation arising under the Contract

Documents.

8. The payments for materials on-site are subject to retention as set forth in 7-

3.2, “Partial and Final Payment”.

9. You shall assume all risks associated with the loss or damage to the stored

products for which payment has or has not been received.

10. Equipment and materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations. The stored products shall be in a form ready for

installation. The City shall not pay for raw materials or parts and pieces of

equipment.

11. Any and all surplus materials that are not incorporated in the Work shall

become your property at no additional cost to the City.

12. Unless specifically provided in the contract, payment for the materials on

hand shall not be included when determining the percentage of Work

completed.

7-3.3.1.2 Payment for Stored Materials Offsite.

1. The payment of materials and equipment delivered and stored offsite shall be

contingent upon your compliance with the storage and protective

maintenance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and all other

requirements necessary to preserve equipment warranties for the benefit of

the City.

2. The City reserves the right to refuse approval for the payment of any

equipment or materials suitably stored offsite in its sole discretion, regardless

of whether all conditions herein have been met.

3. Partial payment may be made for products eligible for offsite delivery and

storage only upon your presentation of a bill of sale, a paid invoice, or an

affidavit certifying that the material is received by the contractor fee and clear

of all liens, encumbrances, and secured interested of any kind including offsite

delivery.

4. Partial payment for products delivered and stored offsite shall be contingent

upon your compliance with the storage and protective maintenance

requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and all other requirements

necessary to preserve equipment warranties for the benefit of the City.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 148

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. Costs associated with the delivery to and storage at an offsite facility shall be

at your expense regardless of the Engineer’s approval to deliver and store the

materials.

6. You shall provide written evidence to the Engineer of having made

arrangements for unrestricted access by the City and the City’s authorized

representatives to the materials wherever stored, including provisions for the

City to take control and possession of such materials at any time and without

restriction. You shall furnish the Engineer a permit of entry, from the owner of

the property, for at least 6 months after the NOC has been filed. The permit of

entry shall contain information similar to the following:

PERMIT OF ENTRY: Permission is hereby granted to the City and its

designated employees or agents to enter upon the property described

herein for a period of not less than 6 months after the NOC has been

filed for (Project Name) for the purpose of removing materials for

which advance materials on hand payment has been made to

(Contractor’s Name). The property is owned by (Owner’s Name) and is

described as follows: (Address and Description of Property). (Include

signature(s) and date(s) for owner and lessee or purchaser, and, if

appropriate, attach a copy of a warehouse receipt or contract for

storage.)

7. The material shall be clearly marked and identified as being specifically

fabricated, produced, and reserved for use on the Project. Provide payment

documentation for the materials.

7-3.4 Mobilization. ADD the following:

1. Mobilization consists of Work necessary for the movement of personnel,

equipment, supplies, and incidentals to and from the Site; for establishment

of all offices, buildings, storage yards, and other facilities necessary for the

Work; and for all other Work and operations which shall be performed prior

to beginning the Work and after completion of the Work on the various

Contract items on the Site.

2. You shall properly design the Project parameters to incorporate construction

mobility for moving on and off the Site in a manner that limits disturbance to

the surrounding residences, businesses, and any other citizens. This includes

the designated staging areas, loading areas, and assemblage areas. You shall

consider and address access rights of the public at all times. Prepare a

mobilization plan that shall describe and govern your mobilization activities.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 149

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

7-3.4.1 Payment.

1. When a Bid item has been provided for “Mobilization”, payment for

mobilization Work shall be distributed equally over the first 2 progress

payments up to the bid amount of the “Mobilization” Bid item but shall not

exceed 3% of the Contract Price. If your Bid item for “Mobilization” exceeds 3%

of the Contract Price, then anything above 3% of the Contract Price shall be

paid as a part of the Final Payment.

2. The complete dismantling and removal of all of your properties, temporary

facilities, equipment, materials, construction wastes, and personnel at the Site

referred to as demobilization is included in the payment for mobilization.

3. If a separate Bid item has not been provided for mobilization, the payment for

mobilization is included in the Contract Price.

4. When Phased Paving is required in the Contract Documents, the cost for

mobilization shall exclude the costs for all mobilization and demobilization

Work associated with each paving phase. The costs for all mobilization and

demobilization Work associated with each paving phase shall be paid in

accordance with 306-1.2.1, “Payment”.

7-3.5.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Unit Bid prices shall not be subject to adjustment regardless of quantity used,

or if none is used, for the following Bid items:

a) imported backfill

b) shoring

c) water services

d) house connection sewers

e) water pollution control items

2. Unit Bid prices for “Potholing Existing Utilities Not Shown on Plans (Depth up

to 7 feet)” shall not be subject to adjustment regardless of quantity used or if

none is used.

3. Upon discovery and prior to the Work, you shall notify the Resident Engineer

if there is a change in Bid item quantity that increases the total Contract Price

by 5% or $100,000 or more, whichever is less.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 150

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

7-3.9 Field Orders.

1. If the cumulative total of Field Order items of Work does not exceed the “Field

Orders” Bid Item, the City shall pay those Field Orders as shown below:

TABLE 7-3.9

FIELD ORDER LIMITS

Contract Price

Maximum Field Order Work

Amount

Less than $100,001 $2,500

$100,001 to $1,000,000 $5,000

$1,000,001 to $5,000,000 $10,000

Greater than $5,000,000 $20,000

ADD:

7-3.10 Phased Funding Compensation.

1. For phased funded contracts in accordance with 6-1.4, “Phased Funding”:

a) Total compensation to be paid to you for the Work performed under

each phase of the Contract may not exceed the amount specified for

each phase in the final Phased Funding Schedule Agreement unless

specified otherwise by a Change Order.

b) Identify the Work to be performed as part of the first phase in the Pre-

Award Schedule. The Work elements to be completed as part of each

phase shall be functional and complete for the intended purpose in

the event the subsequent phases are not authorized by the City.

c) The subsequent phases to the first phase are subject to funding

availability by the City. Do not start subsequent phases without prior

written authorization from the Engineer.

d) Fund availability for the performance of Work is described in the first,

subsequent, and final Phased Funding Schedule Agreements. The

amount of funds available at award shall be sufficient for the

performance of the first phase only. When additional funds are

available for the full requirements of the next funding phase, the

Engineer shall notify you. The City may modify the amount of funds as

available for Contract performance in subsequent and final Phase

Funding Schedule Agreements via Change Order.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 151

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) The City is not obligated to provide you any amount over what has

been specified in the first, subsequent, or final Phased Funding

Schedule Agreements for Contract performance and as authorized by

the City Council.

f) You are not obligated to incur costs for the performance of the Work

for any funding phase after the first funding phase until written

notification is received from the Engineer of an increase in the

availability of funds. If notified, your obligation shall increase only to

the extent the Contract performance is required for the additional

funding phase for which funds are made available.

g) If the Contract is terminated in accordance with 6-8, “TERMINATION OF

THE CONTRACT FOR CONVENIENCE” the settlement proposal shall be

determined pursuant to the procedures established in that section for

Work under specific funding phases for which funds have been made

available. If the Contract is terminated for default, the City’s rights

under the Contract shall apply to the entire multi-phase requirements.

h) A notification to you of an increase or decrease in the funds available

for the performance of the Contract under another clause (an “option”

or “changes” clause) shall not constitute the notification contemplated

in subsection “a” above.

ADD:

7-3.11 Compensation Adjustments for Price Index Fluctuations.

1. Unless otherwise specified, the provisions of this section apply only to the

paving asphalt used in the following:

a) Asphalt Concrete Pavement

b) Asphalt Pavement Repair

c) Scheduled and Unscheduled Base Repair

d) Slurry Seal or any other asphalt emulsion

2. The compensation for paving asphalt shall be increased or decreased for paving

asphalt price fluctuations in accordance with 7-3.11 “Compensation Adjustments

for Price Index Fluctuations” in the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

3. The adjustment in compensation shall also be subject to the following:

a) Show the compensation adjustments provided herein separately on

payment estimates. You are liable to the City for decreased

compensation adjustments and the Engineer may deduct the amount

from moneys payable or that may become payable to you.

b) In the event of an overrun of contract time, adjustment in

compensation for asphalt binder included in estimates during the

overrun period shall be determined using the California Statewide

Crude Oil Price Index in effect on the first business day of the month

within the pay period in which the overrun began.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 152

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) In the event that the companies discontinue posting their prices for a

field, the Engineer shall determine an index from the remaining posted

prices. The City reserves the right to include in the index determination

the posted prices of additional fields.

4. You may opt out of the payment adjustments for price index fluctuations

when specified in the SSP by submitting a letter with the Bid.

7-4.1 General. ADD the following:

1. With every request for payment, submit to the Engineer a breakdown showing

monthly and cumulative amounts of the Work performed under the Change

Order by you and your Subcontractors. The reporting format shall be

approved by the Engineer.

7-4.2.1 Labor. ADD the following:

1. The City reserves the right to request the following:

a) Financial records of salaries for an employee.

b) Wage rates.

c) Bonuses and deductions.

2. Use the “PUBLIC WORKS PAYROLL REPORTING FORM” to list the labor rates of

its personnel and Subcontractors who Work on the Project:

www.sandiego.gov/eoc/pdf/payrollreport.pdf

3. Make the initial submittal prior to NTP. The payment for payroll records shall

be included in the Contract Price.

4. If your proposal for Extra Work is based upon services and Work to be

performed outside Normal Working Hours, the labor charges associated with

the Extra Work shall consist of straight time wages and burdens plus the

appropriate overtime or shift premium with no additional burdens, such as

fringe benefits, on the premium portion.

7-4.2.3 Tool and Equipment Rental. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. No payment shall be made for the use of tools which have a replacement value

of $200 or less.

2. Regardless of ownership, the rates to be used in determining equipment

rental costs shall not exceed those listed in the latest edition of the Caltrans

publication entitled "Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates" preceding

the date the Work is accomplished. The latest edition of the Caltrans

publication is available at www.dot.ca.gov

3. You shall be entitled to a rental rate adjustment when you can substantiate

that the rental rates prevailing locally exceed the published rates by more than

15%. For equipment not listed in the Caltrans publication, rental rates shall not

exceed listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies or

distributors at the time the Work is performed.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 153

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. Whenever possible, Extra Work shall be accomplished using equipment

available on Site or owned by you. If a specific piece of equipment shall be

rented to be used exclusively for the Extra Work, the rental rate shall be the

invoiced rate.

5. If rental equipment is not being used and could be returned to its rental source

rather than holding it at the Work site, return the equipment at no expense to

the City unless you elect to keep it at the Work Site at your expense.

6. The reported rental time for equipment already at the Work site shall be the

duration of its use on the Extra Work. This time shall begin when equipment is

first used on Extra Work, plus the time required to move it from its previous

site and back or from its previous site to a closer site.

7. All equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer, in good working condition,

and suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used.

7-4.3 Markup. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Work paid under Allowance Bid items for permits, governmental fees, or direct

payments specified in the Contract Documents shall not be subject to any

markups.

2. The allowance for overhead and profit shall not exceed the values listed in the

table below:

Component Overhead Profit

Labor 10% 10%

Material 10% 5%

Equipment 10% 5%

3. Markups for materials shall be applied to the actual cost of the material before

applying the sales tax.

4. When a Subcontractor is performing Extra Work, the allowance for overhead

and profit shall be applied to the labor, materials, and equipment costs of the

Subcontractor as follows:

a) Regardless of the number of a Subcontractor’s tasks for Extra Work,

you may only apply 10% for the first $50,000 of the Subcontractor’s

portion of accumulated total cost then 5% for any remaining costs. You

shall not apply 10% to any costs after the first $50,000 of accumulated

total costs from performing Extra Work.

b) If the accumulated costs of single or subsequent tasks exceed the

$50,000 threshold, you shall instead only apply 5% to any amounts in

excess of the $50,000.

c) Regardless of the number of hierarchical tiers of Subcontractors, you

may only markup a Subcontractor’s Work once.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 154

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 8 - FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL

ADD:

8-1.1 Field Office Maintenance.

1. Service, maintain, and clean the field office on a weekly basis to the Engineer’s

satisfaction.

2. Service, clean, and maintain the portable chemical toilet and replenish bottled

drinking water supplies.

3. Service and maintain field office equipment. For the air conditioning system,

perform the maintenance at intervals recommended by the supplier or

manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer.

4. You are responsible for the maintenance of all items supplied. Repair or

replace any equipment or furnishing in the event of damage or theft at no

additional cost to the City.

ADD:

8-1.2 Field Office Security.

1. You are responsible for field office security. Provide field office security

measures necessary for personal protection and for the prevention of

vandalism and theft.

ADD:

8-1.3 Submittals to Be Provided.

1. A proposed layout of the interior of the field office showing wall partitions,

doors, and telephone and electrical outlets.

2. A proposed Site plan showing the field office location at the Site.

3. Location and mailing address of the field office.

4. Computer workstation literature specifying peripherals and software included.

5. Manufacturer’s information for the FAX machine.

8-2 FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES. ADD the following:

1. If specified in the Special Provisions, provide field offices for the City’s use.

The field office and contents specified in these specifications shall become

your property upon completion of the Project.

8-2.1 Class “A” Field Office. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. You shall provide the City with an operational field office for use by the City

field personnel for a time period consistent with construction operations and

commencing on the date of issuance of the NTP.

2. The field office shall be a standard office trailer, 10 feet wide by 60 feet long (3

m wide by 18.3 m long) minimum in dimension, with an interior layout

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 155

THE “WHITEBOOK”

providing 2 fully partitioned offices and a fully partitioned conference room

and any other necessary halls or passageways. Locate the field office at the

Site and designate it as the Engineer’s Office.

3. The field office shall be completely outfitted and equipped as specified and

prepared for occupancy before the start of construction.

ADD:

8-2.1.1 Field Office Features and Equipment.

1. Fit windows with screens and blinds or curtains.

2. Provide air conditioning and heating systems capable of automatically

maintaining an office temperature of 72° F (22.2° C) during all seasons.

3. Provide 8 110V duplex convenience outlets.

4. Provide 1 exterior door with an exterior light.

5. Provide a supply of bottled drinking water with a dispenser that provides both

hot and cold water. Maintain the supply of bottled drinking water at all times

during the construction period.

6. Provide 1 portable chemical toilet located nearby, but separately, from the

field office trailer.

ADD:

8-2.1.2 Furnishings.

1. Two (2) matching desks.

2. Two (2) matching cushioned swivel chairs with arms.

3. Three (3) Plan tables with a minimum of 8 feet by 2½ feet (2.4 m by 0.76 m) in

dimension.

4. Two (2) bookcases, 60 inches high by 48 inches wide by 12 inches deep (1.5 m

by 1.2 m by 0.3 m), with 5 adjustable shelves.

5. Eight (8) stacking chairs.

6. One (1) 4 foot by 6 foot (1.2 m by 1.8 m) whiteboard for use by felt tip-type

markers. Provide 3 markers each in red, green, blue, and black colors and 2

erasers.

7. Two (2) 4-drawer, legal-sized, metal filing cabinets with integral drawer locks.

8. Two (2) matching wastebaskets.

9. One (1) high speed internet access line with paid Internet Service Provider

(ISP).

10. One (1) small refrigerator.

11. One (1) telephone line with voice messaging, caller ID, and conference call

capabilities.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 156

THE “WHITEBOOK”

12. One (1) non-coin-operated cordless telephone with a 50 foot (15.2 m) range

capability.

13. One (1) computer desk with 2 drawers. Desk shall be sized to fit the computer,

monitor, and printer.

14. Four (4) swivel chairs for computer workstation.

15. One (1) computer workstation complete with all standard peripherals and

printer and scanner per the City’s IT standards.

16. One (1) photocopier complete with an automatic feeder, sorter, and stand per

the City’s standard IT requirements. Contact the City’s project manager for

more information. Provide a monthly maintenance service. Include all labor

and parts, excluding paper, and including travel and consumable supplies

such as drums, developer toner, and fuser rollers. The maintenance is based

on 5,000 copies per month. Provide an appropriate storage cabinet or stand

with the photocopier.

ADD:

8-2.4 Class “D” Field Office.

1. Provide a field office for the City’s exclusive use, detached from your field

office. The City’s field office shall consist of a minimum 175 ft

(16.3 m

) trailer

equipped with the following:

a) One (1) chemical toilet facility adjacent to the field office.

b) One (1) exterior door and window area of not less than 22 ft

(2 m

). Provide doors and windows with screens.

c) Electric power to include a minimum of 4 duplex convenience outlets.

The office shall be illuminated at the tables and desk. An outdoor

lighting fixture with 300 W bulb or equal installed to effectively light

the area around the field office facility when required by the Engineer.

d) Furniture and equipment:

i. Two (2) desks and 6 chairs.

ii. One (1) file cabinet (2-drawer, legal).

iii. One (1) bookcase.

iv. One (1) computer workstation complete with scanner,

monitor, and printer per the City’s standard systems. The

computer workstation shall become your property at the

completion of Work.

v. One (1) table reference, 30 inches by 60 inches, (0.76 m by 1.5 m).

vi. One (1) non-coin-operated cordless telephone with a 50 foot

(15.2 m) range capability.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 157

THE “WHITEBOOK”

vii. One (1) high speed internet access line with paid Internet

Service Provider (ISP) services for a period consistent with the

construction operations.

viii. One (1) copy machine and supplies.

END OF PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS (A)

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 158

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS (B)

DESIGN-BUILD (DB) AND MULTIPLE AWARD

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (MACC) CONTRACTING ONLY

To Part 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS (A), REVISE with the following:

SECTION 1 - GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE,

AND SYMBOLS

1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS. ADD the following:

111. Apparent Winner - The Design-Builder whose Proposal is selected to be the

most advantageous (best value) to the City.

112. Architect-Engineer - You or your designated Architect-Engineering firm.

113. Bridging Documents - The City’s preliminary and conceptual plans and

specifications that shall be used by you as a minimum basis to design and

construct the Project. See the RFP, Attachment A.

114. Construction Phase - The period set forth in the Schedule beginning with the

issuance of the Construction Notice to Proceed and ending on the date of

Acceptance.

115. Designer - See Architect-Engineer.

116. Design-Builder - See Contractor.

117. Design Work - That portion of the Work consisting of the professional design

services required to be provided in connection with the design of the Project

or portions of the Project as set forth in the Contract Documents.

118. Design Materials - Documents, Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, electronic

information, data, plans, drawings, sketches, illustrations, specifications,

descriptions, models, and other information developed that are prepared,

furnished, delivered or required to be delivered by you to the Engineer under the

Contract Documents and/or or developed or prepared by you specifically to

discharge your responsibilities.

119. Design Phase - The period set forth in the Schedule commencing with your

receipt of a Limited NTP and ending upon the date the Engineer approves the

Construction Documents.

120. Multiple Award Construction Contract (MACC) - Also known as Multiple Award

Design-Build Contracts. Provisions for Design-Build contracts shall apply to MACC

contracting.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 159

THE “WHITEBOOK”

121. Order of Magnitude Documents - The drawings, specifications and other

documents by you for the City’s review and approval prior to the preparation

of the Construction Documents.

122. Request for Proposal (RFP):

a) The City’s solicitation to prospective proposers upon which an

evaluated selection of a Design-Builder shall be made.

b) The standardized form used by the City to request a Proposal from you

for proposed changes in the Work.

123. Request for Qualifications (RFQ) - The City’s solicitation to prospective

Design-Builders for SOQ.

124. Statement of Qualifications (SOQ) - The document you submit for the City’s

consideration in response to the RFQ stating your expertise, experience, and

capabilities and for providing other required information to design and build

the Project.

125. Task - See Task Order.

126. Task Order - A project assigned to a specific As-Needed Contract which shall

be constructed by you in accordance with the terms of the As-Needed Contract

to which it is assigned.

127. Task Order Authorization - For As-needed Contracts, the documents the City

transmit to you which indicate the Work instructions, Scope of Work, and time

duration allotted for a particular Task or Project.

128. Task Order Proposal - For As-needed Contracts, your irrevocable offer to

perform Work associated with a Task Order that refers to your quote for a firm

fixed-price and schedule for the completion of the specified Scope of Work.

Your Proposal shall be on electronic forms provided by the City and shall be in

an electronic version compatible with the City’s systems. The Proposal

Submittal may also require a Work schedule, EOC forms, or other

documentation that the City may require for a specific Task Order.

1-7 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with the following:

1. The award and execution of the Contract shall be as provided for in the Special

Provisions, Instruction to Bidders, Notice Inviting Bids, or the Request for

Proposals (RFP).

ADD:

1-7.1.5 Document Ownership.

1. Once you have received any compensation for the Work performed, all

electronic or hard copy documents, including but not limited to original plans,

studies, sketches, drawings, computer printouts and files, and specifications

prepared in connection with or related to the Work shall become the City’s

property.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 160

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. The City’s ownership of these documents includes use, reproduction, or reuse

of all incidental rights whether or not the item of the Work for which they were

prepared has been performed.

3. The City’s ownership entitlement arises upon payment or any partial payment

for the Work performed and includes ownership of Work products completed

under the Contract.

4. This subsection shall apply whether your services are terminated by the

completion of the Project or in accordance with other provisions of the

Contract. You may make copies of all such plans, studies, sketches, drawings,

computer printouts and files, and specifications.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 161

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF THE WORK

2-1 WORK TO BE DONE. ADD the following:

3. The minimum design requirements for the Project are set forth in the Bridging

Documents, the information provided for sample or model facility, or both. Do

not proceed with nor pay for any Design Work until the City issues a Limited

NTP.

4. Comply with the Final Environmental Document, including incorporating

environmental considerations into the Project design, modifying the Project

design, where applicable, and mitigating impacts.

5. Keep the Engineer informed of the progress and quality of the design and

construction of the Project.

6. Organization of the Design Materials into divisions, sections and articles and

arrangement of drawings is for convenience and does not control dividing the

Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work

performed by any trade.

7. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, provide and pay for

design, labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and

machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and

services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work,

whether temporary or permanent and incorporated in the Work.

8. Respond to, and ensure Subcontractors respond to, RFI, substitution requests,

and Change Order requests. Provide the Engineer with copies of all

correspondence within 24 hours of receipt, and conduct weekly review

meetings with the Engineer to discuss these items.

ADD:

2-1.1 Construction Obligations.

1. Do not perform any construction Work in connection with the Project prior to

receipt of NTP. The City shall make no payment for any construction Work

performed prior to issuance of the NTP and applications for payment for such

Work are not binding on the City.

2. If you desire to begin constructing a portion of the Project prior to achieving

final design of the Project, you shall in writing notify the Engineer at least 3

Working Days in advance of proposed construction activities to seek the

Engineer’s approval and include proof of receipt of all applicable permits. The

Engineer shall provide you with a standard form for this purpose. Do not move

forward with any construction activities without providing such notice and

receiving the Engineer’s approval.

3. If you desire to modify the design documents after they have been approved

by the Engineer, obtain the Engineer’s prior written approval before making

any such modifications and any construction changes based upon such

modifications.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 162

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

2-1.2 Standards of Performance.

1. Use the degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable professionals

practicing in the same field of service in the State of California.

2. The Construction Documents shall be prepared, signed, and stamped by and

under the direct responsible charge of an architect or engineer duly licensed

in the State of California.

3. Perform the Work in accordance with the professional standards applicable to

projects, buildings, or Work of complexity, quality and scope comparable to the

Project.

4. You are the Engineer of Record (Engineer of Work).

ADD:

2-1.3 Use of Design Materials.

1. The Engineer has unlimited rights to copy and use in connection with the

Project all Design Materials, including the right to use them on the Project at

no additional cost to the City regardless of degree of completion provided that

said services performed have been fully paid for, exclusive of the amounts

disputed by the City in good faith, as required by the terms of the Contract.

2. You agree to and grant to the City and any assignee or successor of the City as

owner of the Project a royalty-free license to any such Design Materials as to

which you may assert any rights under the patent or copyright laws. You agree

to assign outright and exclusively to the City all copyrights in the design

appearance of the Project. You, as part of your agreements with

Subcontractors, shall secure such license and use rights from each such entity,

and shall defend, indemnify and hold the City and any successors or assigns

harmless from any claims by such entities for copyright or patent

infringement.

ADD:

2-1.4 Local Conditions.

1. You represent that you have taken steps necessary to ascertain the nature and

location of the Work and that you have investigated and satisfied yourself as

to the general and local conditions which are applicable to the Work such as

the following:

a) Conditions bearing on transportation, disposal, handling, and storage

of materials.

b) The availability of labor, water, power, and roads.

c) Normal weather conditions.

d) Observable physical conditions at the Site.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 163

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) The surface conditions of the ground.

f) The character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during

the performance of the Work.

2. To the extent you encounter subsurface or concealed conditions which differ

materially from those represented in the Contract Documents, you shall notify

the Engineer promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later

than 4 Working Days after the first observance of the conditions if a Change

Order is contemplated by you due to such condition.

3. If the subsurface or concealed conditions are determined to be of Hazardous

Materials or Waste, you shall immediately notify the City no later than 1

Working Day and shall proceed as set forth in these specifications and the

exhibits of the Contract.

4. You shall not be entitled to any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time

or shall have been deemed to have waived your right to such a Claim if:

a) You knew of the existence of such conditions at the time you made a

final commitment to the City in respect to the Contract Price and

Contract Time by becoming bound under the Contract.

b) The existence of such condition could reasonably have been

discovered or revealed as a result of any examination or investigation

of the Site and contiguous areas suggested or required by the Contract

Documents.

c) You failed to give the written notice within the time and as required by

this subsection.

ADD:

2-1.5 Model or Example Facility Information.

1. If any element required by the Contract Documents is not clearly defined, rely

on the model or example facility information provided in the Contract

Documents for the standard requirements. Contact the City’s project manager

for a site visit of facility prior to finalization of Bid.

ADD:

2-1.6 Procedures for Review of Design Materials.

1. The review process for submitted materials shall be as follows:

a) The Engineer shall respond to your Submittals or re-Submittals within

15 Working Days of their receipt unless the Engineer gives you prior

notice. Within 5 Working Days of receipt of the Engineer’s comments,

you shall resolve and discuss with the Engineer any outstanding issues

as a result of the Engineer’s comments.

b) Unless agreed with the Engineer in advance, submit any required

revised or final Submittals within 10 Working Days of the resolution of

the submittal issues.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 164

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) Ensure that the comments of the Engineer are addressed by the

designers. 1 copy of all Submittals reviewed by the designer shall be

provided to the Engineer.

2. Provide shop drawings and material specifications to the Engineer of all

materials to be specified within the final design prior to incorporating them

into the construction documents.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 165

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 3 - CONTROL OF THE WORK

3-3 SUBCONTRACTORS. ADD the following:

6. You shall not hire or allow any entity such as the City’s consultant and any sub-

consultant who participated in creating the Bridging Documents or Contract

Documents for this project to participate in design services, construction

management, and any other construction services related in any way to this

project without the City’s written consent.

7. You shall pay the Subcontractors for your approved invoice amounts out of

amounts paid by the City to you no later than 14 Calendar Days from your

receipt of payment from the City. Nothing in this paragraph is construed to

impair your right and any Subcontractor’s right to negotiate fair and

reasonable pricing and payment provisions among yourselves.

8. In the case of a deficiency in the performance of the Subcontractor’s services,

you shall notify the Engineer in writing of any withholding of payment to the

Subcontractor, specifying the following:

a) The amount withheld.

b) The specific cause under the terms of the subcontract for withholding

payment.

c) The connection between the cause for withholding payment and the

amount withheld.

d) The remedial action the Subcontractor shall take in order to receive

the amount withheld.

9. Once the Subcontractor corrects the deficiency, you shall pay the

Subcontractor the amount withheld within 14 Calendar Days of your receipt

of the City’s next payment.

3-7.2 Precedence of Contract Documents. DELETE in entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. If there is a conflict between any of the Contract Documents, the document

highest in the order of precedence shall control. If there is a conflict between

any of the Contract Documents and the Municipal Code, the most stringent

requirements shall control. The order of precedence, from highest to lowest,

shall be as follows:

a) Permits (issued by jurisdictional regulatory agencies including

environmental documents).

b) Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements; whichever occurs last.

c) The signed written Agreement.

d) Addenda.

e) Bid / Price Proposal.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 166

THE “WHITEBOOK”

f) Request for Proposal (RFP).

g) Supplemental Special Provisions.

h) Project Plans.

i) Standard Drawings.

j) “WHITEBOOK” (City Supplement).

k) “GREENBOOK” (Standard Specifications for Public Works

Construction).

l) Reference Specifications.

2. When additional EOCP requirements by the funding sources are included or

incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents, the funding source’s

requirements shall govern unless specified otherwise in the SSP.

3. With reference to the drawings the order of precedence shall be as follows:

a) Figures govern over scaled dimensions.

b) Detail drawings govern over general drawings.

c) Addenda and Change Order drawings govern over Plans.

d) Plans govern over Standard Drawings.

4. When a conflict exists between the ADA, Title 24, City Standards Drawings, and

the City Supplement, the most restrictive requirement shall be followed.

5. When there is a conflict between 700-1.2, “Standards, Poles, Steel Pedestals,

and Posts” and the current adopted edition of Caltrans Standard Specifications

and/or Standard Plans, the Caltrans standards shall control.

6. The Work instructions on the Task Order Scope of Work shall have the same

rank as “Special Provisions” and “Project Plans” when used in conjunction with

3-7.2, “Precedence of Contract Documents”.

7. Task Order modifications and revised Scope of Work shall have the same rank

as “Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements” when used in conjunction

with 3-7.2, “Precedence of Contract Documents”.

ADD:

3-7.5 As-Builts.

1. You are responsible for the completion of As-Built drawings.

2. The As-Built drawings shall include the information required for various asset

types listed in 3-7.3.2, “Asset Specific Red-lines”.

3. Prior to Acceptance, prepare and submit 1 complete set of full sized, 24 inch by 36

inch, original Mylar final As-Built Drawings (CADD plots) prepared in

accordance with the City’s CADD standards. Each CADD Mylar drawing sheet

shall be wet stamped and signed by qualified responsible engineers registered

in the State of California and shall be stamped and wet signed by the architect

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 167

THE “WHITEBOOK”

or engineer of record as required by law. Other applicable portions of the

drawing title blocks shall also be signed by you.

4. Drawing Mylars shall be 3 mils minimum thickness.

ADD:

3-7.5.1 Payment.

1. The payment for As-Built drawings shall be included in the Contract Price.

ADD:

3-7.6 Order of Magnitude Documents and Construction Documents.

1. After the Limited NTP, prepare the Order of Magnitude Documents for review

and approval by the City and then prepare the Construction Documents.

Develop and detail the Order of Magnitude Documents and Construction

Documents consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Include

documents customarily required for regulatory approval by governmental

agencies.

2. The Order of Magnitude Documents shall show the scale and relationship of

Project components, outline the nature and structural exterior and 3

dimensional scale of the Project, and shall set and describe in detail the

configuration and character of the Project for the complete and final

preparation of the Construction Documents.

3. The Construction Documents shall provide information customarily necessary

for the use of such documents by those in the building trades and shall include

all documents required for the complete and final construction of the Project

other than such details customarily developed in the Working Drawings and

Shop Drawings or otherwise during construction.

4. You are responsible for obtaining all reviews and approvals for building

permit(s) independently of the Order of Magnitude Documents review.

3-7.6.1 Use of Computer Aided Drafting and Design.

1. Use CADD for the preparation of Plans and As-Built drawings in accordance

with the City’s CADD Standards. Conversions of CADD Work from any CADD

format to City standard MicroStation format shall not be acceptable unless

specified otherwise in the Contract Documents.

ADD:

3-7.6.2 Reliance on Approvals.

1. You may rely on the Engineer’s approval for the general scope and purpose

included in the Bridging Documents. The Engineer’s approval is not a specific

approval with respect to the Design Materials. The Engineer has the right to

accept, reject, or suggest changes to the Order of Magnitude Documents to

achieve conformity with the general scope included in the Bridging Documents

with no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 168

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) Any design element that is not in conformance with the performance

requirements included in the Bridging Documents shall be approved

by the Engineer prior to its incorporation into the final design.

b) If the Engineer revokes, modifies, or otherwise changes a material in

any way after such portion of the Work has been designed and

approved or modifies the original Bridging Documents in a material

manner requiring modification to one or more systems which have

been designed and approved, you may request a Change Order in

accordance with SECTION 3 – CONTROL OF THE WORK provided that,

prior to such approval, you have made the City aware of future design

decisions which may be affected by such approval.

2. The Engineer shall not issue a Change Order for Extra Work when the Extra Work

is due to your fault or neglect or unauthorized deviations from the Bridging

Documents.

ADD:

3-7.6.3 Review of Construction Documents and Field Conditions.

1. You are responsible for errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the

Construction Documents. You shall take field measurements, verify field

conditions, and compare such field conditions and other information known

to you with the Contract Documents before commencing activities.

ADD:

3-7.6.4 Shop Drawings and Working Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

1. Maintain at the Site 1 record copy of the Contract Documents, Drawings,

Specifications, Addenda, Construction Documents, and any Change Orders in

good order and marked to record changes and selections.

2. Maintain approved Shop Drawings and Working Drawings, product data,

samples and similar required submittals at the Site.

3. Review and take appropriate actions for Shop Drawings and Working

Drawings, product data, samples, and similar submittals. Upon request by the

Engineer, provide documents for the review of Shop Drawings and Working

Drawings, product data, samples, and similar submittals.

4. Provide a register of all Submittals that are scheduled for review by the City,

designers, or both.

5. You are not relieved of the responsibility for the deviations from requirements

of the Contract Documents by the Engineer's approval of Shop Drawings and

Working Drawings, product data, samples, or similar submittals unless you

have specifically informed the Engineer of such deviations at the time of the

submittal and the Engineer has given written approval to the specific

deviation.

6. You are not relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop

Drawings and Working Drawings, product data, samples, or similar submittals

by the Engineer's approval.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 169

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

3-13.3.4 Latent and Patent Defect Warranty.

a) You shall warrant to the City that the construction, including all materials and

equipment furnished as part of the construction, shall be free of latent and patent

defects in materials and workmanship. The Engineer shall first provide you an

opportunity to correct or replace any latent and patent defect at your own

expense, if notified by the City within 4 years after the date of Acceptance for

patent deficiency and 10 years for a latent deficiency. If you fail to repair and

replace the reported deficiency, the City shall repair the deficiency and charge you

for the repair.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 170

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS

4-6 Trade Names. ADD the following:

11. Provide 1 copy of all designer reviewed submittals to the Engineer.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 171

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

ADD:

5-9.1 Indemnification and Defense.

1. Non-Design Services.

a) Other than in the performance of Services which shall be solely as

addressed in these specifications to the fullest extent permitted by

law, you shall defend with legal counsel reasonably acceptable to the

City, indemnify and hold harmless the City and its officers, agents,

departments, officials, and employees (Indemnified Parties) from

and against all claims, losses, costs, damages, injuries (including

injury to or death of an employee of yours or your Subcontractor),

expense and liability of every kind, nature, and description (including

incidental and consequential damages, court costs, litigation

expenses and fees of expert consultants or expert witnesses

incurred in connection therewith and costs of investigation) that arise

out of, pertain to, or relate to, directly or indirectly, in whole or in

part, any services (including construction services) performed under

the Contract by you, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly

employed by them, or anyone that they control.

b) Your duty to defend, indemnify, protect, and hold harmless shall not

include any claims or liabilities arising from the active negligence,

sole negligence, or willful misconduct of the Indemnified Parties.

2. Design Services.

a) Indemnification.

i. To the fullest extent permitted by law (including, without

limitation, California Civil Code §2782.8), with respect to the

performance of Services, you shall indemnify and hold

harmless the City, the City’s officers, or employees, from all

claims, demands or liability that arise out of, pertain to or

relate to your negligence, recklessness, or willful misconduct

or those of your officers or employees and others hired or

controlled by you.

b) Defense.

i. You shall Work in good faith to procure applicable insurance

coverage for the cost of any defense arising from all claims,

demands or liability that arise out of, pertain to or relate to

your negligence, recklessness, or willful misconduct and

those of your officers or employees.

3. Enforcement Costs.

a) You agree to pay all costs the City incurs enforcing the indemnity and

defense provisions set forth in these specifications.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 172

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. Insurance.

a) The provisions of 5-9, “INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS

AGREEMENT” shall not be limited by the requirements of 5-4,

“INSURANCE” related to insurance.

5. Survival of Obligation.

a) All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees

made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract

Documents as well as all continuing obligations indicated in it, shall

survive completion and acceptance of the Work and termination or

completion of the Contract.

ADD:

5-16 PERSONNEL CHANGES FOR DESIGN-BUILD CONTRACTS.

1. Ensure that key personnel, as identified in your Proposal shall not be replaced or

substituted without the Engineer’s prior approval. You shall be liable for damages

incurred by the City as a result of unauthorized substitution of each key

personnel.

2. The City reserves the right to have any of your employees or Subcontractor’s

employees removed from the Project upon written notice from the City to you

without cause.

3. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create a contractual

relationship between the City and any third party, or Subcontractors. However,

it shall be understood and agreed that the City, as the third party beneficiary,

is an intended third-party beneficiary of all Contracts for design or engineering

services and all Subcontracts, purchase orders, and other agreements

between you and third parties.

ADD:

5-17 DESIGN-BUILDER’S RESPONSIBILITIES.

1. Keep the Engineer informed of the progress and quality of the design and

construction of the Project.

2. You shall assume responsibility for all negligent errors, omissions, or acts

arising from the design and architectural Services you provide under the

Contract, including any negligent errors, omissions, or acts of your agents,

officers, and employees.

3. You are responsible for coordinating all construction means, methods,

techniques, sequences, and procedures including the following:

a) Coordinate scheduling of Submittals and all design and construction

of the Project to ensure the efficient and orderly sequence of the

construction. Monitor and report periodically to the Engineer actual

performance compared to Project Schedule. Prepare and submit to

the Engineer, during both the Design Phase and the Construction

Phase, monthly progress reports, in a manner and format acceptable

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 173

THE “WHITEBOOK”

to the Engineer, on the Work accomplished during the prior monthly

period.

b) Monthly reports shall be furnished at the time of submission of each

monthly Application for Payment. As part of such report, provide an

updated Schedule, including CPM illustrating the progress which has

been made and specifically whether the Work is on schedule or behind

schedule and actions being taken to correct Schedule slippage. The

monthly report shall also set forth your projected progress for the

forthcoming month.

c) Coordinate design and construction requirements with governmental

agencies, utilities, and all other parties either involved in infrastructure

improvements or otherwise affected by the design and construction

requirements.

d) Provide the City with 2 copies of all Submittals approved by you.

e) Assist the City’s staff and reasonably cooperate with the City’s legal,

financial, design and construction consultants and all other designated

representatives during the design and construction of the Project.

f) Implement suitable management systems and Work plans for the

Project relative to safety, quality assurance and managing and

controlling the Work.

g) Be solely responsible for selecting the means, methods, techniques,

sequences, or procedures of performing the Work. If you elect or

choose to adopt or follow, in whole or part, any means, means,

methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of performing the

Work developed or suggested by the City, you do so at your own risk

and bear sole responsibility for such election or choice. The City shall

assume no responsibility thereof and in no way shall be held liable for any

defects in the Work, or increased costs or delays in the Work, which may

result from or be caused by your use of such means, methods,

techniques, sequences, or procedures.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 174

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

6-1.2 Commencement of the Work. ADD the following:

7. Do not begin construction of the Project or any portions thereof until the

Engineer approves the design for the Project or portion thereof, and issues a

Notice to Proceed for Construction, to provide the City the defenses set forth

in California Government Code §830.6.

6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION. ADD the following:

1. You shall complete the Work within the time specified in the Notice Inviting

Bids or RFP for Design-Build or MACC Contracts.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 175

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7-2.1 Schedule of Values (SOV). ADD the following:

12. Provide a cross reference listing in two parts. The first part lists each scheduled

activity with the breakdown of the respective valued items making up the total

cost of the activity. The second part lists the valued item with the respective

scheduled activity or activities that make up the total cost indicated. In the case

where a number of schedule activities make up the total cost for a valued item

(shown in the SOV) indicate the total cost for each scheduled activity. The total

amount of each part shall equate to the Contract Price.

ADD:

7-3.5.4 Proposal.

1. Your post award proposal in response to the City’s RFP shall be on forms

acceptable to the Engineer. Your proposal shall certify in writing that the

amounts included cover all direct, supplemental, indirect, consequential, and

cumulative costs and delays as applicable and that those costs and delays

would be or were necessarily incurred, despite your reasonable and diligent

efforts to mitigate them. Mitigation efforts undertaken by you shall be

described.

2. Where the change in Contract Price is to be determined on the basis of the

“cost of the Work involved”, your itemized estimates shall detail all applicable

elements of cost, including, but not limited to, labor hours and payroll costs,

quantities, crew mixes, production rates, material costs, Subcontractor and

Supplier costs, equipment costs, and supplemental costs. Where the change

in Contract Price arises from changes in the schedule of all or part of the Work

or where a change in Contract Time is sought, the submittal shall include

analysis required by 6-4.2 “Extensions of Time”.

ADD:

7-3.12 Additional Costs.

1. Additional costs are those costs that can be reasonably determined to be

related to your errors or omissions, and may include your, ours, or your

Subcontractors’ overhead, construction, materials, demolition, and related

costs. You shall not be paid for Work or Services required due to your errors

or omissions and you shall be responsible for any additional costs associated

with such errors or omissions.

2. You shall reimburse the City for its additional costs due to your errors or

omissions.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 176

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

7-3.13 Additional Services.

1. The City has the right to direct you to perform additional services beyond

those Services detailed in the Scope of Work and Services (Additional Services).

2. You shall promptly perform any Additional Services as directed by the

Engineer in accordance with the Contract Documents. You shall request a

Change Order when seeking reimbursement for Additional Services requested

by the City.

3. If at any time you contend that the City is asking you to perform Additional

Services which are not specifically identified as such by the City, you shall

immediately give the Engineer written notice within 24 hours prior to

performing the Services in question. The notice shall state that you intend to

seek additional compensation beyond the amount specified in the Bid.

Furnishing timely, accurate, and advance written notices shall be a condition

precedent to your ability to seek additional compensation from the City.

4. You shall not perform and shall not be entitled to compensation for any

Additional Services unless the Engineer has, in advance, authorized in writing

performance of the Additional Service. Under no circumstances shall you be

paid for Additional Costs.

5. Your Compensation Rate Schedule for design professionals is attached to the

Contract. Payment for any Additional Services shall be in accordance with the

Compensation Rate Schedule and no increases to the Compensation Rate

Schedule may be made during the Contract Time.

6. You shall separately submit to the Engineer a certificate and application for

monthly payment of any authorized Additional Services. No markup shall be

allowed for Additional Services.

7-4.1 General. ADD the following:

2. If shown on the Bid Proposal, the contingency funds including City

Contingency and Allowances may be used by you with the Engineer’s prior

approval. The contingency funds shall be available to provide additional funds

for Extra Work. The contingency funds shall not be available for the following:

a) Work required due to you and your officers’, agents’, or employees' failure

to perform Work or Services according to the terms of the Contract.

b) Uninsured losses resulting from your and your officers’, agents’, or

employees’ negligence. The City reserves the right to seek

reimbursement for any costs expended due to the errors or omissions

of your officers, agents, or employees providing Services to the Project.

3. 100% of the unused portions of the City Contingency and Allowances shall

revert to the City upon Acceptance.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 177

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

7-6 PRICE CONDITIONS.

1. If specified in the RFP, the Contract Price shall not exceed the City’s stipulated

estimate of the Project’s total cost.

ADD:

7-7 SERVICES FEE.

1. Except as otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, as full and complete

compensation for performance of all Services and obligations under the

Contract, you shall be compensated only for the following:

a) Architectural, engineering, and other professional Subcontractors

such as structural, civil, mechanical, electrical engineers,

communications, graphics and art Subcontractors, landscape

architects, and acoustical, audio visual, lighting, traffic and security

Subcontractors.

b) Estimating and construction management.

c) Construction supervision and project management personnel such as

superintendents, project managers, project secretaries, project

engineers, project accountants, and all your other personnel wherever

located.

d) On-Site and offsite equipment, supplies and facilities such as

computers, estimating, dictating, communication and accounting

equipment, office space, trailers and storage facilities.

e) Home-office and field overhead costs of any type including document

control and retention.

f) Your profit.

END OF PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS (B)

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 178

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 1

GENERAL PROVISIONS (C)

JOB ORDER CONTRACTING (JOC) ONLY

To Part 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS (A), REVISE with the following:

SECTION 1 - GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE,

AND SYMBOLS

1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS. ADD the following:

111. Adjustment Factor (AF) - Your competitive bid price adjustment to the unit

prices published in the Unit Price Book for Normal Working Hours (NWH) and

Other Than Normal Working Hours (ONWH).

112. Apparent Low Bidder - The Bidder whose Bid, having been publicly opened,

initially meets the material requirements of the Bid Documents, and whose

JOC (or GRC) Composite Adjustment Factor is the lowest received.

113. Contract Documents - The Contract Documents include the signed

Agreement, Addenda, Notice Inviting Bids, funding agency provisions, Bid and

documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-bid documentation

submitted prior to the Notice of Award when attached as an exhibit to the

Contract, Bonds, permits from jurisdictional regulatory agencies,

Supplementary Special Provisions (SSP), City’s EOCP Requirements, Standard

Specifications (The “GREENBOOK”), City Supplement (The “WHITEBOOK”),

Plans, Standard Drawings, Construction Documents, Mitigation and

Monitoring Reporting Program, Reference Specifications listed in the Notice

Inviting Bids or the Request for Proposals (RFP), Task Orders, and Change

Orders.

114. Composite AF - The adjustment factor that is calculated from the

competitively bid NWH AF and the ONWH AF. The Composite AF is used to

determine the Apparent Low Bidder. See the Notice Inviting Bids or the

Bidding Documents for the formula used to calculate the Composite AF.

115. Maximum Contract Amount - The maximum potential value of the JOC

Contract as defined in the Notice Inviting Bids.

116. Minimum Contract Amount - The minimum value of the JOC Contract as

defined in the Notice Inviting Bids.

117. Non-prepriced (NPP) Work Items - The units of Work that are not included

in the Unit Price Book (UPB) but are still within the general scope of Work

requested by the Engineer under the Contract.

118. Pre-priced (PP) Work Items - The units of Work that are included in the Unit

Price Book (UPB) requested by the Engineer under the Contract.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 179

THE “WHITEBOOK”

119. Request for Proposal (RFP) - The City’s request for proposal for a Task Order.

120. Scope Meeting - A meeting at the Task Order location, attended by the

Engineer, you, and any other interested parties to outline and discuss the

Scope of Work for the Task. You are required to make all measurements,

assessments, and evaluations at the Scope Meeting such that a valid, detailed

Proposal will be submitted by the deadline established in the RFP.

121. Task - See Task Order.

122. Task Order - A project assigned to a specific JOC Contract which will be

constructed by you in accordance with the terms of the JOC Contract and the

Scope of Work.

123. Task Order Proposal - See Proposal. Include a listing of all of the Pre-priced and

Non-prepriced Work Items (including competitive quotes) required to

complete the Task Order.

124. Unit Price - The price published in the Unit Price Book (UPB) for a specific

construction or construction-related Work or line item. Each Unit Price

published in the UPB is deemed to be full compensation to accomplish that

specific Work or line item.

125. Unit Price Book (UPB) - A comprehensive listing of specific construction-

related Work or line items identified by the City together with specified units

of measurement and Unit Prices.

ADD:

1-7 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with the following:

1. After the award of the Contract, you shall wait for a Task Order assignment

from the City. The City will initiate a Task Order by scheduling and conducting

a Scope Meeting with you and other interested parties at the location of the

proposed Task Order. The Scope of Work will be transmitted to you prior to

the Scope Meeting so that you may review the Scope of Work prior to the

meeting and invite Subcontractors and Suppliers to the Scope Meeting. At the

Scope Meeting, the Scope of Work for the Task will be presented and discussed

with you and you may seek answers to your questions about the Scope of

Work. Upon completion of the Scope Meeting, the City will issue an RFP which

requires that you prepare and submit a Proposal for the Task Order under

consideration on or before a specified due date.

ADD:

1-7.1.5 Task Orders.

1. The City will fund and execute a Task Order when needed. You may be

required to Work at any of the City’s facilities. The City makes no commitment

as to the award of individual Task Orders. All costs associated with preparing

Proposals shall be your responsibility.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 180

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. You may Work only as authorized by Task Orders. Furnish the supplies or services

specified in the Task Orders up to and including the Maximum Contract Amount

to the City. The City will order at least the Minimum Contract Amount of

construction services designated in the Contract Documents.

3. Individual Task Orders determine the Scope of Work. You shall complete the

Task Order in accordance with 2-1, “WORK TO BE DONE”.

4. Individual Task Orders are subject to the Contract in its entirety. This is an

indefinite-quantity Contract for the supplies or services specified and is

effective for the period of 24 months from the date of the Notice to Proceed

or the expenditure of the Maximum Contract Value Price as stated in the

Notice Inviting Bids, whichever occurs first.

5. Before the issuance of the first Task Order under the Contract, a conference

will be conducted by the City to acquaint you with the City’s policies and

procedures that are to be observed during the execution of the Work and to

develop a mutual understanding relative to the administration of the Contract.

6. Except in an "emergency response" you shall not proceed with any Task Order

without having required permits and an NTP signed by the City.

7. In the event that “immediate emergency response” is necessary, the City may

elect to use an alternative procedure for Task Orders as long as the alternative

procedure is not substantially more burdensome to you than the procedure

described in this subsection.

8. Your proposals are valid for the duration of the Contract.

9. Before ordering any material or doing any Work, you shall verify all

measurements at the Site of a specific Task Order and shall be responsible for

the accuracy of the measurements. Extra charge or compensation shall not be

allowed based on the difference between actual dimensions and the

quantities indicated in the Proposal. You shall verify such items prior to the

submission of the Proposal.

10. The City will not entertain claims for additional money when such claims are

based upon a contention that the Contract fails to mention a specific item or

component of the facility covered by the Task Order and the Work is required

in the normal course of operations. For example, surfaced area repair

statements may not mention culverts. However, culverts are a typical

component of roads, streets, or erosion controls and are shown on the plots

or maps provided. As culverts are a typical component of the system, you are

responsible for providing all necessary repair or replacement of Work or

service.

1-7.1.5.1 Procedure for Ordering Work.

1. As the need for Work arises, the City will send you the Task Order Scope of

Work and schedule a Scope Meeting.

2. Upon receipt of the Scope Meeting Invitation, respond within 1 Working Day

by confirming attendance at the Scope Meeting in writing.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 181

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. The Scope Meeting will include discussion and establishment of the following:

a) Project number and title.

b) Existing site conditions.

c) Methods and alternatives for accomplishing Work.

d) Definition and refinement of requirements.

e) Detailed Scope of Work.

f) Requirements for design drawings, sketches, Shop Drawings, Working

Drawings, submittals, etc.

g) Tentative construction schedule.

h) Preliminary quantity estimates.

4. The City reserves the right to reject your proposal based on unjustifiable

quantities, inappropriate line items, inappropriate adjustments, performance

periods, inadequate documentation, or other inconsistencies on your part.

The City reserves the right to issue the NTP without having a mutual

agreement on a final Task Order price.

5. The City reserves the right to not award a Task Order if it is determined to be

in the City’s best interests or the proposed cost exceeds the City’s estimate. If

we do not award a Task, we will not be liable for Proposal expenses.

6. By submitting a signed Proposal to the City, you are agreeing to accomplish

the Work outlined in the Task Order Scope of Work. You shall include the

necessary scope items in the Proposal prior to delivering it to the Engineer.

7. Each Task Order Acceptance provided to you in writing will state the timeframe

for completion and fixed price of performance. The Task Order Acceptance

signed by the Engineer constitutes the City’s acceptance of your Proposal.

1-7.1.5.2 Processing Time Limits.

1. Upon receiving an RFP, submit a Proposal for each Task Order and Task Order

Modification to the Engineer on or before the due date stated in the RFP.

Proposals are due within 14 Days of the RFP except in the case of accelerated

or emergency projects.

2. Analyze each Task Order and submit all Requests for Information (RFI) and

Requests for Change (RFC) within 7 Days after issuance of any RFP. Submission

of RFI’s or RFC’s will in no way extend the proposal due date unless a proposal

extension is granted by the Engineer in writing.

3. Request all proposal extensions in writing (email or letter) and include backup

information to support the proposal extension. If a proposal extension is not

granted by the engineer in writing prior to the proposal due date, the proposal

will be considered late if a complete proposal is not submitted on or before

the proposal due date.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 182

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. Once you have submitted your proposal, be available for a Proposal

Negotiation Meeting within 24 hours of being notified by the Engineer via fax,

e-mail, or telephone.

5. In the Proposal Negotiation Meeting, the City will discuss with you the line items

and quantities in your proposal in order to determine the validity and

reasonableness of your proposal.

6. After the Proposal Negotiation meeting, the City will provide a proposal

acceptance and either a counter-proposal or a marked-up proposal based on

the proposal negotiation. Within 2 Days of receiving the proposal acceptance

and counter-proposal or marked-up proposal, sign and return to the Engineer

by email the scanned proposal acceptance OR email a list of the disagreed line

items and quantities and the specific reasons for not agreeing with the line item

and quantity. For any disagreed line items, include your proposed line item and

quantity revisions.

7. The City will review any disagreed line items and either accept, reject, or

partially accept your proposed revisions to the counter-proposal or marked-

up proposal. If the City accepts any revisions, the City will provide you a revised

proposal acceptance and counter-proposal or revised marked-up proposal.

You are required to review the revised counter-proposal or marked-up

proposal and shall sign and return the revised proposal acceptance within 1

Working Day.

1-7.1.5.3 Payment.

1. The payment for a Task Order and the Task Order price indicated on your

Proposal Acceptance is determined by summing the value of all of the Pre-

Priced Items (from the UPB) and the Non-Pre-Priced Items (from 2 competitive

quotes) required for completing the Task Order.

a) The price of a PP Item is determined by the following formula:

PP Item Price = Unit Price (from UPB) x quantity x AF (NWH or ONWH)

b) The price of a NPP Item is determined by the following formula:

NPP Item Price = Lowest of two competitive quotes x AF (NWH or ONWH)

c) See the Notice Inviting Bids for the applicable Unit Prices and UPB.

d) Include a list of all the PP Items and NPP Items along with the

required quantities and costs as indicated in the formulas above in

your Proposal for each Task Order. The Proposal format shall be as

indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 183

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF THE WORK

2-6 CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. ADD the following:

3. You may request a modification in the Task Order price or an extension of time

for completion of the Task Order due to changes in the Work that are not

within the scope of the Task Order.

4. You shall not be entitled to compensation for any Extra Work performed unless

the Engineer has issued a written Task Order Modification designating the

following:

a) The Extra Work to be performed.

b) The price of the Extra Work.

c) The time for completion of the Extra Work.

5. If the Engineer agrees that Work is added or deleted, the Task Order price shall

be adjusted using the Procedure for Ordering Work in accordance with 1-

7.1.5.1, “Procedure for Ordering Work”, 1-7.1.5.2, “Processing Time Limits”, and

1-7.1.5.3, “Payment”.

2-7.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. If the Engineer deletes any item of the Work in part or in its entirety, the reduction

in Contract Price shall reflect a credit for the full value of the deleted portion of the

Work, including anticipated profit and overhead.

2. If the Engineer orders Work to be added or deleted, the Task Order price shall be

modified in accordance with 1-7.1.5.1, “Procedure for Ordering Work”, 1-7.1.5.2,

“Processing Time Limits”, and 1-7.1.5.3, “Payment”.

3. The Engineer will adjust the location list provided in the Contract Documents

as needed.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 184

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 3 - CONTROL OF THE WORK

3-7.1 General. ADD the following:

4. There may be no Plans for the purposes of bidding or construction. Specific

Work instructions for each Task Order will be issued to you on the Task Order

Scope of Work.

3-7.2 Precedence of Contract Documents. ADD the following:

6. The Work instructions on the Task Order Scope of Work shall have the same

rank as “Supplemental Special Provisions” and “Plans” when used in

conjunction with 3-7.2, “Precedence of Contract Documents”.

7. Task Order Modifications and revised Scope of Work shall have the same rank

as “Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements” when used in conjunction

with 3-7.2, “Precedence of Contract Documents”.

3-12.6 Water Pollution Control. ADD the following:

2. Based on preliminary assessments by the City, Task Orders may be subject to

Storm Water Pollution Control requirements in accordance with Part 10 -

STORM WATER. Refer to the Task Order Scope of Work.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 185

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

6-1.2 Commencement of the Work. ADD the following:

7. The Work shall be completed within the time specified in the Task Order

Acceptance.

6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION.

ADD the following:

1. You shall complete the Work within the time specified in the Task Order Scope

of Work documents.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 186

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7-3.5.1 General. ADD the following:

4. The Unit Price Book shall be consistent for the entire term of the JOC Contract

including the Task Order Modification Work executed during and after the

Contract expiration. The Adjustment Factors shall not change for a period of 2

years (730 Calendar Days) from the Contract Award Date and for any Task

Order Modifications executed after the expiration of the Contract that are

required to complete a Task Order. See the Contract Documents for the

identification of the Unit Price Book.

END OF PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS (C)

END OF PART 1

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 187

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 188

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 2

CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

SECTION 200 – ROCK MATERIALS

200-1 ROCK PRODUCTS.

200-1.2.1 General. To Table 200-1.2.1 (A), ADD the following:

Percent Passing Sieves

Sieve Size AASHTO No. 57

(1)

ASTM No. 2

(1)

ASTM No. 8

(1)

ASTM No. 89

(1)

ASTM No. 9

(1)

3 in

(75 mm)

- 100 - - -

2.5 in

(62.5 mm)

- 90 – 100 - - -

2 in

(50 mm)

- 35 – 70 - - -

1.5 in

(37.5 mm)

100 0 – 15 - - -

1 in

(25 mm)

95 – 100 - - - -

0.75 in

(19 mm)

- 0 – 5 - - -

0.5 in

(12.5 mm)

25 – 60 - 100 100 -

0.375 in

(9 mm)

- - 85 – 100 90 – 100 100

No. 4 10 max. - 10 – 30 20 – 55 85 – 100

No. 8 5 max. - 0 – 10 5 – 30 10 – 40

No. 16 - - 0 – 5 0 – 10 0 – 10

No. 50 - - - 0 – 5 0 – 5

(1) Material shall be washed cleaned and free of fines.

ADD the following:

1. For ASTM C131 Test Grading C, the Alternate California Test 211 may be used.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 189

THE “WHITEBOOK”

200-1.5.5 Sand Gradations. To Table 200-1.5.5, DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

TABLE 200-1.5.5

Sieve Size

Percentage Passing Sieve

Asphalt

Concrete

Portland Cement

Concrete

Mortar

Choker Sand –

ASTM C33

3/8 inch (9 mm)

100 100 - 100

No. 4 (5 mm)

- 95 - 100 100 95 - 100

No. 8 (2 mm)

75 - 100 75 - 90 95 - 100 80 - 100

No. 16 (1 mm)

- 55 - 75 70 - 95 50 - 85

No. 30 (600 μm)

- 30 - 50 35 - 70 25 - 60

No.50 (300 μm)

- 10 - 25 5 - 35 5 - 30

No. 100 (150 μm)

- 2 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 10

No. 200 (75 μm)

0 - 8

0 - 5 0 - 5 0 - 3

1. May be exceeded to permit a maximum of 12%, provided the sand equivalent of the asphalt concrete sand is

35 or greater.

ADD:

200-1.5.6 Sand for Play Areas.

1. Sand for play areas shall be imported, double washed, manufactured silica

sand #20, #30, or “Pro-Tour” as manufactured by Oglebay Norton Industrial

Sands, Inc. or approved equal, free of deleterious organic material, loam, clay

and debris, with a “mean effective size” between 0.012 inch (0.30 mm)

minimum and 0.025 inch (0.65 mm) maximum and a “mean uniformity

coefficient” between 1.00 and 2.5. You shall submit certification of these

requirements to the Engineer at the time of product submittals. Sand shall

only be installed with filter fabric and drain system. The depth of installed sand

shall be 12 inches (305 mm) minimum to attenuate falls per ASTM F1292.

ADD:

200-1.5.7 Sand for Graded Aggregate Choker Stone.

1. Sand for graded aggregate choker stone shall be washed and shall conform to

the gradation for Choker Sand ASTM C33 in 200-1.5.5 “Sand Gradations”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 190

THE “WHITEBOOK”

200-1.7.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The aggregate shall be from Chandler Aggregates, Inc. or equal. The aggregate

shall have a specific gravity of no less than 2.60.

2. Type I slurry aggregate shall be allowed. The aggregate shall be of such

character that it will not disintegrate from the action of air, water, or the

conditions to be met in handling and placing and shall have a specific gravity

of no less than 2.60. It shall have a minimum sand equivalent of 55.

ADD:

200-1.9 Selection of Riprap and Filter Blanket Material. Riprap and filter blanket material

shall conform to the following requirements:

TABLE 200-1.9

Velocity

(1)

Rock

Class

(2)

RipRap

Thickness

"T"

Filter Blanket Upper Layer(s)

(3)

Filter

Blanket

Lower

Layer

(7)

Option 1

(4A)

Option 1

(4B)

Option 2

(5)

Option 3

(6)

6 – 10

ft/sec

No. 2

Backing

1.1 ft

(0.3 m)

¼"

(6 mm)

B3 D.G.

10 – 12

ft/sec

¼ Ton

2.7 ft

(0.8 m)

¾"

(19 mm)

¾" - 1½"

(19 mm –

37.5 mm)

P.M.B.

SAND

12 – 14

ft/sec

½ Ton

3.5 ft

(1 m)

(25 mm)

¾" - 1½"

(19 mm –

37.5 mm)

P.M.B.

SAND

14 – 16

ft/sec

1 Ton

4.4 ft

(1.3 m)

1½"

(37.5 mm)

TYPE B SAND

16 – 18

ft/sec

2 Ton

5.4 ft

(1.6 m)

(50 mm)

TYPE B SAND

Note: Practical use of this table is limited to situations where Rip-Rap Thickness "T" is less than the inside

diameter of the culvert outletting to the energy dissipater.

(1) Average velocity in pipe or bottom velocity in energy dissipater, whichever is greater.

(2) If desired rip rap and filter blanket class is not available, use next larger class.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 191

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Light Rock Class 200 lb (90 kg)

Facing Rock Class 75 lb (34 kg)

No. 2 Backing Rock Class 5 lb (2 kg)

(3) Filter blanket thickness = 1 foot (305 mm) or "T", whichever is less.

(4A) Option 1 shall meet the requirements of Table 200-1.2.1 (A).

(4B) Option 1 shall meet the requirements of Table 200-1.4 (B).

(5) Option 2 shall meet the asphalt concrete requirements of Table 203-6.5.4 (A).

(6) D.G. = Disintegrated Granite per Table 200-2.7.2

(7) Sand = 25% passing No. 200 sieve (75% retained).

P.M.B.: Processed Miscellaneous Base in accordance with 200-2.5, “Processed Miscellaneous

Base”.

TYPE B: Type B bedding material shall conform to the requirements for ½ inch (12.5 mm) crushed

rock or No. 4 concrete aggregate in 200-1, “ROCK PRODUCTS”, Table 200-1.2.1 (A) or Table

200-1.4 (B).

200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS.

200-2.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Base or subbase materials shall be classified in the order of preference as

follows:

a) Crushed Aggregate Base

b) Crushed Miscellaneous Base

c) Processed Miscellaneous Base

d) Class 2 Aggregate Base

e) Disintegrated Granite Base

f) Select Subbase

2. When base material without further qualification is specified, supply crushed

aggregate base. When a particular classification of base material is specified,

you may substitute any higher classification, following the order of preference

listed above, of base material for that specified. All processing or blending of

materials to meet the grading requirement shall be performed at the plant or

source. The materials shall compact to a hard, firm, unyielding surface and

shall remain stable when saturated with water.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 192

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

200-2.9 Class 2 Aggregate Base.

200-2.9.1 General.

1. Class 2 Aggregate Base shall consist of broken or crushed asphalt, concrete,

Portland cement concrete, railroad ballast, crushed porcelain material,

crushed rock, rock dust, brick, or natural material. The material shall be free

from organic matter and other deleterious substances, and shall be of such

nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a

firm, stable base.

200-2.9.2 Grading.

1. The coarse aggregate material retained on the 0.19 inch (4.75 mm) (No. 4) sieve

shall consist of material of which a minimum of 25% by weight shall be crushed

particles as determined by California Test 205.

2. Aggregate shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 200-2.9.2.

The grading for either the 1.5 inch (37.5 mm) maximum or ¾ inch (19 mm)

maximum may be used, except that once a grading is selected it shall not be

changed without the Engineer's written approval.

TABLE 200-2.9.2 Percentage Passing

Sieve Size

1½ inch (37.5 mm)

Maximum Individual

Test Results

¾ inch (19 mm)

Maximum Individual

Test Results

2" (50 mm) 100 -

1½" (37.5 mm) 87 - 100 -

1" (25 mm) - 100

¾" (19 mm) 45 - 90 87 - 100

No. 4 (4.75 mm) 20 - 50 30 - 60

No. 30 (600 μm) 6 - 29 5 - 35

No. 200 (75 μm) 0 - 12 0 - 12

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 193

THE “WHITEBOOK”

200-2.9.3 Quality Requirements.

1. Class 2 aggregate base shall conform to the following requirements:

TABLE 200-2.9.3

Tests

California Test Individual Test

Resistance (R-value)

Calif. 301 78 Min.

Sand Equivalent

Calif. 217 30 Min.

Durability Index

N/A 35 Min.

ADD:

200-2.10 Infield Mix.

200-2.10.1 General.

1. Infield mix shall be designated for use in sports infield areas. Infield mix shall be free

from organic matter and other deleterious substances and shall be of such nature

that it can be compacted readily under water and rolling to form a firm, stable base.

200-2.10.2 Grading.

1. Infield mix shall meet the following requirements:

Sieve Size % Passing Sieve

4.75 mm (No. 4) 100

2.36 mm (No. 8) 90 – 100

1.18 mm (No. 16) 85 – 95

600 μm (No. 30) 65 – 85

300 μm (No. 50) 35 – 55

150 μm (No. 100) 20 –35

75 μm (No. 200) 10 – 25

Sand Equivalent 15 – 25

pH (7.2 Neutral) 6 – 8.5

Percent Clay 10 – 15

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 194

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 201 – CONCRETE, MORTAR AND RELATED MATERIALS

201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE.

201-1.1.2 Concrete Specified by Class and Alternate Class. ADD the following:

1. Monolithic curb and pavement shall not be allowed.

2. To Table 201-1.1.2, REVISE the following:

a) Concrete class for “Concrete Pavement (not integral with curb)”,

DELETE “520-A-2500” and SUBSTITUTE with “560-C-3250”.

b) Concrete class for “Sidehill Surface Drainage Facilities”, DELETE “500-C-

2500” and SUBSTITUTE with “520-C-2500”.

c) Concrete class for “Fence and Guardrail Post Foundations”, DELETE

“500-C-2500” and SUBSTITUTE with “520-C-2500”.

201-1.1.6.3 Mix Design. ADD the following:

1. The maximum water to cementitious ratio shall be 0.3 lb/lb (136 g/g), unless

otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

201-1.2.1 Cement. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Cement to be used or furnished shall be low alkali and shall be either Type I

or Type II Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, or Type IP (MS)

portland-pozzolan cement conforming to ASTM C595, unless otherwise

specified in the Special Provisions.

2. You shall furnish a Certificate of Compliance for the cement.

3. Cement shall be stored to protect against contamination and moisture. Should

any cement show evidence of contamination or be otherwise unsuitable, the

Engineer may reject it and require that it be removed from the site.

4. Cement used in concrete for any individual structure shall be of the same

brand and type, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

201-1.4.3 Transit Mixers. ADD the following:

1. Time and date of batching shall be machine stamped.

201-9 CEMENT TREATED BASE (CTB).

201-9.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. CTB shall consist of a mixture of untreated base material, a minimum of 2%

Portland Cement by weight of dry aggregate, and water mixed at a central

mixing plant. Aggregate shall not exceed 120°F (11°C) at time of mixing. Water

added shall be at or near optimum as determined by ASTM D 1557, Method C.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 195

THE “WHITEBOOK”

201-9.2.1 Untreated Base Material. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. Untreated base material to be treated shall be conforming to 200-2.2,

“Crushed Aggregate Base”; 200-2.4, “Crushed Miscellaneous Base”; or

conforming to 200-2.8, “Pulverized Miscellaneous Base”, except as modified

herein.

2. Material shall be uniformly graded and shall conform to the following

gradation:

Sieve Size % Passing Sieve

1" (25 mm) sieve 90 – 100

3/8" (9.5 mm) sieve 65 – 85

No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve 45 – 65

No. 30 (600 μm) sieve 15 – 35

No. 200 (75 μm) sieve 3 – 15

Sand Equivalent 30 minimum

201-9.3 Mix Designs. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The materials shall be tested and the mix designs developed in accordance

with ASTM D1557. Compressive strength shall be determined in accordance

with ASTM D1633, Method A or Caltrans Test Method 312, part V except test

specimens shall be compacted in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method A or

B or Caltrans Test Method 312, part III section D using split compaction mold,

no tamping and compression load shall be 2000 psi.

2. The mix design(s) shall show the following:

a) The amount and gradation of the base material to be treated.

b) The amount and type of Portland cement.

c) The amount of water.

d) The required 7 Calendar Day compressive strength shall not be less

than 400 psi.

ADD:

201-10 MANHOLES (MHs).

201-10.1 Pre-fabricated Manhole Bases (PMB).

1. If Prefabricated Manhole Base is shown on the Plans and if the MH is modified

or placed at a new location because of a design change either in the vertical or

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 196

THE “WHITEBOOK”

horizontal position and the PMB does not meet the design criteria, you shall

order a new PMB that complies with the modified alignment, location, or both.

The City will compensate you for the base, restocking costs, and other related

costs.

2. PMB may be allowed, when not shown on the Plans, if you assume all the risk

and additional costs of the MH relocation as a result of unforeseen conditions

or design changes. If the MH is modified or placed at a new location because

of a design change either in the vertical or horizontal position and the PMB

does not meet the design criteria, you shall order a new PMB that complies

with the modified alignment and location. Otherwise, you shall replace the

PMB with a cast in place base at no additional cost to the City.

3. If the PMB channels do not have the proper slopes or configurations as shown

on the Plans or if the installation is not in compliance with the Contract

requirements or the manufacturer’s recommendations, the PMB will be

rejected by the Engineer and you shall cast a new base in place at no additional

cost to the City.

201-10.2 Polymer Mortar.

1. The following products shall be acceptable for use in manhole riser joints:

Material Manufacturer

490 Epoxy Putty Engard Coatings, Huntington Beach, CA

Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel Sika Corporation, Santa Fe Springs, CA

Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod Gel Sika Corporation, Santa Fe Springs, CA

CS-102 Butyl Gaskets (rope form) Concrete Sealants, New Carlisle, OH

201-10.3 Polyurethane Coating.

1. The epoxy primer and polyurethane liner shall be manufactured as listed on

the City’s AML or approved equal.

2. The color shall be white or beige. You shall submit complete manufacturer

specifications, application procedures, and references for review and

approval.

201-10.4 Exterior Waterproofing for Manholes.

1. The coal tar emulsion shall be Kopper-Bitumastic Super Service Black or

approved equal. Application of this material shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 197

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 203 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

203-1.6 Measurement and Payment. ADD the following:

1. The payment for paving asphalt shall be included in the item of Work to which

its use is incidental unless a Bid item has been provided.

203-2.6 Measurement and Payment. ADD the following:

The payment for liquid asphalt shall be included in the item of Work to which

its use is incidental, unless a Bid item has been provided.

203-3.4.4.1 General. To paragraph (2), ADD the following:

e) Be a product of recycled material from the City if unavailable from the San

Diego County region.

203-3.5 Certificate of Compliance. ADD the following:

1. Test reports and certifications shall be made in accordance with 4-4,

“TESTING”; 4-5, “CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE”; and 203-1.3, “Test Reports and

Certification”.

203-3.6 Temperature. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE the following:

1. Emulsified asphalt may be reheated, but at no time after loading shall the

temperature be raised above 160°F (70°C). During reheating, emulsified

asphalt shall be agitated to prevent localized overheating. Emulsified asphalt

shall not be permitted to cool to a temperature less than 40°F (5°C).

2. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, emulsified asphalt

shall be mixed and applied within the temperature range shown in Table 203-

3.6.

3. You shall furnish and keep on the Work site a thermometer capable of

accurately determining the temperature.

TABLE 203-3.6

Grade of Emulsified

Asphalt

Pug Mill Mixing

Temperature °F (°C)

Application

Temperature °F (°C)

Min. Max. Min. Max.

CQS-1h 50 (10) 130 (55) 77 (25) 130 (55)

RS-1, CRS-1 77 (25) 130 (55)

RS-2, CRS-2 110 (45) 160 (70)

SS-1, CSS-1 50 (10) 130 (55) 77 (25) 130 (55)

SS-1h, CSS-1h 50 (10) 130 (55) 77 (25) 130 (55)

CMS-2, CMS-2S, CMS-2h 50 (10) 140 (60) 100 (40) 160 (70)

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 198

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Grade of Emulsified

Asphalt

Pug Mill Mixing

Temperature °F (°C)

Application

Temperature °F (°C)

Min. Max. Min. Max.

RPME 60 (15) 140 (60) - -

ADD:

203-3.8 Distribution Equipment.

Distribution equipment shall conform to 203-2.5, “Distributing Equipment”

except that hand spraying by means of a hose or bar through a gear pump or

air tank is acceptable for uniform application rates up to 0.10 gallon per square

yard (0.45 L/m

) for work on flat surfaces or tacking of vertical edges.

ADD:

203-3.9 Payment.

1. The payment for emulsified asphalt shall be included in the item of Work to

which its use is incidental unless a Bid item has been provided.

ADD:

203-5.6 RUBBER POLYMER MODIFIED SLURRY (RPMS).

203-5.6.1 General.

1. Rubber polymer modified slurry (RPMS) is a crumb rubber asphalt slurry-seal

surface treatment. RPMS shall be a stable mixture of asphaltic emulsion, mineral

aggregate, set-control additives, specially produced and graded crumb rubber,

polymer, mineral fillers, carbon black, and water. The materials for RPMS shall

conform to 203-5.4, “Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry (EAS)” and these specifications.

Mixing and spreading of RPMS shall be as described in 302-4.12, “Rubber Polymer

Modified Slurry (RPMS)”.

203-5.6.2 Materials.

1. The ingredients of RPMS immediately prior to the mixing shall conform to the

following:

a) Asphaltic emulsion shall be a quick-set type and shall conform to the

requirements of CQS-1h and to the following requirements in

accordance with the specified test methods:

Quality Tests

for Emulsion

Test Requirements

AASHTO T59

Residue after

Distillation

60% min.

ASTM D244

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 199

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Quality Tests

for Residue

Test Requirements

AASHTO T49

Penetration at

77° F (25° C)

40% - 90%

ASTM D2397

b) Quick setting Type CQS-1h Asphaltic Emulsion shall test positive for

Particle Charge when tested in accordance with the applicable ASTM

test designation. If the Particle Charge Test result is inconclusive, the

asphaltic emulsion shall meet a pH requirement of 6.7 maximum.

c) Water shall be potable and of such quality that the asphalt will not

separate from the emulsion before the application of slurry seal.

d) If necessary for workability, a set-control agent that will not adversely

affect the RPMS material may be added.

e) Polymer additive shall be SBR Latex or approved equal, which is added

at a minimum of 2% by weight of the asphaltic emulsion.

f) Crumb Rubber.

i. Crumb rubber shall be ambient granulated or ground from

whole passenger tires, truck tires, or a combination only in

conformance with the requirements indicated in Tables 203-

5.6.2 (A), 203-5.6.2 (B), and 203-5.6.2 (C).

ii. Un-curing or de-vulcanized rubber shall not be acceptable.

Rubber tire buffing from either recapping or manufacturing

processes may not be used as a supplement to the crumb

rubber mixture.

iii. In order to remove steel and fabric, an initial separation stage

which subjects the rubber to freezing temperatures may be

used.

iv. The crumb rubber shall not be elongated or hair-like in shape

and individual particles shall not be greater than 1/20 of an

inch in length.

v. The crumb rubber shall be free of contaminants including

fiber, metal, and mineral matter within the following

tolerances: the fiber content shall be less than 0.30% by weight

and the crumb rubber shall be free of metal particles. Metal

imbedded in rubber particles shall not be allowed. The amount

of mineral contaminants allowed shall not exceed 0.10% by

weight.

vi. The crumb rubber shall be dry with a moisture content of less

than 0.75%.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 200

THE “WHITEBOOK”

TABLE 203-5.6.2 (A) CRUMB RUBBER CHEMICAL PROPERTIES SPECIFICATION

Property Specification Limits

Specific Gravity 1.15 ± .05

Percent of Carbon Black 35.0 Maximum

Percent of Rubber Hydrocarbon 55.0 Maximum

Percent Ash 6.0 Maximum

Percent of Acetone Extract 10.0 Maximum

Percent of Chloroform Extract 3.0 Maximum

Percent Natural Rubber 40 Minimum

TABLE 203-5.6.2 (B) CRUMB RUBBER GRADATION REQUIREMENTS

Sieve Size Percent Passing

No. 30 100

No. 40 90 - 100

No. 50 75 - 85

No. 100 25 - 35

No. 200 0 - 10

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 201

THE “WHITEBOOK”

TABLE 203-5.6.2 (C) TESTING METHODS FOR CRUMB RUBBER ANALYSIS

vii. Carbon black solution shall be non-ionic in charge and liquid in

form. The carbon black shall be compatible with the emulsion

system, polymers, and additives being used and shall conform

to the requirements indicated in Table 203-5.6.2 (D) and ASTM

D1511.

TABLE 203-5.6.2 (D)

Specification Tolerances

Total Solids 40 - 44

% Black by Weight 35 - 37

Type Black Medium Furnace Color

Type Dispersing Non-ionic

viii. Additives may be used to accelerate or retard the break-set of

the RPMS. The use of additives shall be in quantities specified

in the mix design.

ix. Mineral filler such as Portland cement, hydrated lime,

limestone dust, fly ash, or other approved filler meeting the

requirements of ASTM D242 shall be used if required by the

mix design and may be used to facilitate set times as needed.

Any cement used shall be considered as part of the dry

aggregate weight for mix design purposes.

x. The mineral aggregate used shall be the type and grade

specified for the particular Type of RPMS. The aggregate shall

be manufactured crushed stone such as granite, slang,

limestone, chat, other high quality aggregate, or a combination

Property Test Method

Specific Gravity ASTM D1817

Carbon Black ASTM D297

Ash ASTM D297

Chloroform Extract ASTM D297

Natural/Synthetic Rubber ASTM D297

Sieve Analysis ASTM C136

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 202

THE “WHITEBOOK”

thereof. Aggregate shall consist of rock dust except that 100%

of any aggregate of combination of aggregates larger than the

No. 50 sieve size used in the mix shall be obtained by crushing

rock. The material shall be free from vegetable matter and

other deleterious substances. The aggregate shall be free of

caked lumps and oversized particles. The aggregate shall also

conform to the following requirements in Table 203-5.6.2 (E).

TABLE 203-5.6.2 (E)

Test California Test Requirements

Sand Equivalent 217 45 min.

Durability Index 229 55 min.

203-5.6.3 Composition and Grading.

1. The percentage composition by weight of the aggregate shall conform to the

requirements indicated in the tables below when determined by California

Test 202 and modified by California Test 105 when there is a difference in

specific gravity of 0.20 or more between blends of different aggregates.

TABLE 203-5.6.3 (A)

TYPE I SLURRY SEAL GRADATION

Sieve Size Percentage Passing Stockpile Tolerance

No.4 100 ± 5%

No.8 90 - 100 ± 5%

No.16 65 - 90 ± 5%

No.30 40 - 60 ± 5%

No.50 25 - 42 ± 4%

No.200 10 - 20 ± 2%

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 203

THE “WHITEBOOK”

TABLE 203-5.6.3 (B)

TYPE II SLURRY SEAL GRADATION

TABLE 203-5.6.3 (C)

TYPE III SLURRY SEAL GRADATION

Sieve Size Percentage Passing Stockpile Tolerance

No.3/8 100 ± 5%

No.4 70 - 90 ± 5%

No.8 45 - 70 ± 5%

No.16 28 - 50 ± 5%

No.30 19 - 34 ± 5%

No.50 12 - 25 ± 4%

No.100 7 - 18 ± 3%

No.200 5 - 15 ± 2%

2. The job mix (target) gradation shall be within the gradation band for the

desired type. After the target gradation has been submitted, the percent

passing each sieve shall not be more than the stockpile tolerance.

3. The aggregate shall be accepted at the Site or stockpile. The stockpile shall be

accepted based on 5 gradation tests according to California Test 202, modified

Sieve Size Percentage Passing Stockpile Tolerance

No.3/8 100 ± 5%

No.4 90 - 100 ± 5%

No.8 65 - 90 ± 5%

No.16 45 - 70 ± 5%

No.30 30 - 50 ± 5%

No.50 18 - 36 ± 4%

No.100 10 - 24 ± 3%

No.200 5 - 15 ± 2%

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 204

THE “WHITEBOOK”

by California Test 105 when there is a difference in specific gravity of 0.2 or

more between blends of different aggregates. If the average of the 5 tests is

within the gradation tolerances, then the material will be accepted. If the test

shows the material to be out of compliance, you may choose to remove the

material or blend other aggregates with the stockpile material to bring it into

compliance with these specifications. Materials used in blending shall meet

the quality test before blending and shall be blended in a manner to produce

a consistent gradation.

4. When the results of either the Aggregate Grading or the Sand Equivalent test

do not conform to the requirements specified, the aggregate shall be

removed. However, if requested in writing and approved by the Engineer, the

aggregate may be used and you shall pay to the agency $1.75 per ton for such

aggregate left in place. No single aggregate grading or sand equivalent tests

shall represent more than 300 tons or one day’s production, whichever is

smaller.

203-5.6.4 Mix Design.

1. Before Work begins, you shall submit laboratory reports of mix designs

performed in accordance with the tests identified in Table 203-5.6.4 at your

expense and shall utilize the specific materials to be used on the project. The

design shall be prepared by a laboratory experienced in designing rubber

asphalt slurry-seal surface treatments. After the mix design is approved, no

substitution shall be made unless approved by the Engineer. The proposed

rubber asphalt slurry-seal surface treatment mix design shall verify

compatibility of the aggregate, emulsion, mineral filler, set-control additive,

and rubber blend.

TABLE 203-5.6.4

Test Description Specification

ISSA T-106 Slurry Seal Consistency Pass

ISSA TB-109 Excess Asphalt 50 grams/ft

maximum

ISSA TB-100 (Type I) The Wet Track Abrasion 50 grams/ ft

maximum

ISSA TB-100 (Type II) The Wet Track Abrasion 60 grams/ ft

maximum

ISSA TB-100 (Type III) The Wet Track Abrasion 60 grams/ ft

maximum

ISSA TB-113 Mixing Time

Controllable to

150 seconds minimum

ISSA TB-114 The Wet Stripping Pass

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 205

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. The Mixing Time test shall be done at the highest temperatures expected

during construction. The original lab report shall be signed by the laboratory

that performed the mix design and shall show the results of the tests on

individual materials. The report shall clearly show the proportions of

aggregate, mineral filler (minimum and maximum), water (minimum and

maximum), additive (s) (usage), asphalt emulsion, and asphalt rubber blend

based on the dry weight of the aggregate.

3. Component materials used in the mix design shall be representative of your

proposed materials. The percentage of each individual material required shall

be shown in the laboratory report. Adjustments may be required during the

construction based on field conditions.

4. The component materials shall be within the following limits:

a) Residual Asphalt Type I, 10% - 16% based on dry weight of aggregate.

b) Residual Asphalt Type II, 7.5% - 13.5% based on dry weight of

aggregate.

c) Residual Asphalt Type III, 6.5% - 12% based on dry weight of aggregate.

d) The crumb rubber will be added to the rubberized slurry mix at a rate

of 5% by volume to the asphalt cement.

e) Polymer additive shall be added at 2% of finished emulsion.

f) Carbon Black shall be added at 1.3% to 2% of the finished emulsion.

g) Mineral filler shall be 0.5% - 2.0% (if required by mix design) based on

dry weight of aggregate.

h) Additives, as needed.

i) Water, as needed to achieve proper mix consistency (total mix liquids

shall not exceed the loose aggregate voids).

203-6.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The content of paving asphalt recovered from the RAP shall be determined in

conformance with California Test 382 each day RAP is used or as approved by

the Engineer.

203-6.3.1 General. ADD the following:

1. You shall submit for approval, mix designs for C2 PG 64-10 (½ inch) (12.5 mm)

and B3 PG 64-10 (¾ inch) (19 mm) asphalt concrete. Asphalt concrete mix

designs shall be submitted to the City Materials Testing Laboratory for

approval.

2. Once the City has approved a mix design, the asphalt binder content shall be

within 0.5% of the identified target binder contents for each mix design

submitted.

3. Asphalt concrete for Job Mix Formula (JMF) and Mix Designs shall be Type III

and shall not exceed 15% RAP.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 206

THE “WHITEBOOK”

203-6.4.3 Combined Aggregates and Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP). To subsection

“a”, DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

a) The combined aggregates shall have a minimum sand equivalent of 50 when

tested in accordance with California Test 217 or ASTM D2419.

203-6.5.4 Composition and Grading. To Table 203-6.5.4 (A), Class B2 and Class B3, DELETE in

its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

CLASS

Sieve Size

Individual

Test Result

Moving

Average

Individual

Test Result

Moving

Average

1" (25.0 mm)

100

3/4" (19.0 mm)

- 100 90 - 100

- 100

1/2" (12.5 mm)

- 95 80 - 90

- 100

- 95

3/8" (9.5 mm)

- 80 60 - 75

- 84

- 80

No. 4 (4.75 mm)

- 60 40 - 55

- 60

No. 8 (2.36 mm)

- 44 27 - 40

- 50

- 45

No. 30 (600 µm)

- 26 12 - 22

- 29

- 25

No. 200 (75 µm)

- 8 3 - 6

- 9

- 7

Asphalt Binder %

4.6

- 6.0

4.6

- 6.0

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 207

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 206 – MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS

ADD:

206-3.3.5 Underdrain Cleanout Lid (For Other Areas).

1. Cleanout lids for cleanouts in the road, sidewalk, or any other area where

water is not expected to pool shall be Alhambra Foundry A-2302-B cast iron

water-tight cover and frame that is rated for traffic applications or approved

equal.

2. The cleanout lid shall have a clear opening of 8 inches (203 mm) and have an

overall diameter of 13 inches (330 mm). The frame shall be 1 inch (25 mm)

deep. The frame shall be set into the concrete collar and the lid shall seat firmly

into the frame without rocking and shall be flush with the surface. Lock screws

shall be provided to lock lid to frame. The cleanout lid shall be stamped “SD

STORM DRAIN”.

ADD:

206-7 STREET NAME SIGN.

1. Street name signs shall conform to the requirements of SDM-102, “Street

Name Sign”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 208

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 207 – GRAVITY PIPE

ADD:

1. Pipe installed as sewer main shall be Vitrified Clay (Extra Strength) or Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC). PVC pipe shall be SDR-35 unless otherwise designated on the

plans.

2. Pipe and fittings for house connection sewer (laterals) shall be Vitrified Clay

(Extra Strength), PVC, or Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) solid wall pipe.

3. Asbestos cement pipe shall not be acceptable.

207-2.9.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The basis for acceptance shall be by the D-load bearing strength test,

compliance with these Specifications, and inspection of the pipe manufacture

and inspection of the completed pipe.

207-17.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The ASTM Designation, SDR, pipe stiffness, and type of joint shall be specified

on the plans and/or specifications.

2. House Connection Sewer Laterals shall use glued, gasketed, or stainless steel

shielded couplings listed on the Wastewater Approved Materials List or

approved equal.

207-17.2.2 Cell Classification. ADD the following:

1. PVC pipes for storm drains and tertiary treated recycled water (“purple pipe”) that

cross existing potable water mains and have a vertical clearance of less than 12

inches (305 mm), or more if indicated on the plans, shall have a PVC cell

classification of 12454 meeting AWWA C900 and CL200 and meeting the

requirements of DR14. No joints are permitted within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the water

line crossing.

207-17.3.2 Elastomeric Gasket Joints. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Pipe with gasketed joints shall be manufactured with a socket configuration

which shall prevent improper installation of the gasket and shall ensure that

the gasket remains in place during the joint operation.

2. The gasket shall be polyurethane or synthetic rubber with equal or greater

resistance to solvency, chemical, or biological attack and shall conform to the

requirements of 208-1.2, “Installation Time Limit” and 208-4, “GASKETS FOR

THERMOPLASTIC PIPE”.

207-17.4.2 Acceptance. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The basis for acceptance shall be the inspection of pipe, fittings, and couplings,

the tests specified in 207-17.4, “Test Requirements”, and compliance with the

Specifications.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 209

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. When the pipe is delivered to the Work site, the Engineer may require

additional testing to determine conformance with the requirements of pipe

flattening, impact resistance, pipe stiffness, and extrusion quality.

3. You shall provide information to the Engineer verifying that the quantity of

pipe, the manufacturing and delivery date, and the pipe stored is the same

material documented on the Certificate of Compliance.

4. You shall provide explanation of pipe markings and shall include

manufacturing date and location.

5. If the pipe will not be installed within 6 months of manufacture date, you shall

protect the pipe from environmental degradation (UV rays and sunlight) in

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

6. You shall insure that the PVC pipe is stored locally within 25 mile (40 km) radius

and that the Engineer has reasonable access to the pipe at the storage

location.

7. The stored pipe shall not be removed from storage for purposes other than

for the Project without the Engineer’s approval.

8. PVC pipe handled and stored in accordance with these specifications will be

acceptable for installation for up to 2 years from the date of manufacture

without repeat testing.

9. The Engineer may process payment for stored PVC pipes in accordance with

7-3.3.1, “Payment for Stored Materials on Site” and 9-3.3.1.2, “Payment for

Stored Materials Offsite”.

10. For PVC pipe older than 6 months from date of manufacture as evidenced by

pipe markings:

a) Prior to installation of PVC pipe, you shall submit to the Engineer a

current (no older than 60 Calendar Days) complete set of third party

independent test results for each separate lot of pipe consisting of:

i. Flattening capability conforming to ASTM D2412.

ii. Extrusion quality by the acetone-immersion method as

specified in ASTM D2152.

b) Test results shall identify the pipe by its markings as provided by the

manufacturer.

c) PVC pipe installation may not proceed prior to your submittal of test

results and prior to the written acceptance by the Engineer.

d) PVC pipe tested as outlined above shall be accepted for installation for

a maximum of 6 months from the date of testing unless it is stored

and handled in accordance with these specifications immediately after

testing.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 210

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) PVC pipe that is not stored locally within a 25 mile (40 km) radius of the

Site or where the Engineer does not have reasonable access to verify

storage and handling shall be retested in accordance with these

specifications within 60 Calendar Days prior to installation in

accordance with 207-15.6, “Installation Time Limit”.

ADD:

207-17.6 Fusible Non-pressure Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Pipe.

207-17.6.1 General.

1. This subsection specifies fusible polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe for sewer mains

and laterals when used for horizontal directional drilling and where shown on

the Plans.

207-17.6.2 Material.

1. Fusible PVC plastic material for pipe shall conform to ASTM D3034 or ASTM

F679, and ASTM D1784 cell classification 12454. Fusible PVC pipe shall be

tested at the extrusion facility for properties required to meet all applicable

parameters.

2. Fusible PVC pipe shall be extruded with plain ends. The ends shall be square

to the pipe and free of any bevel or chamfer. There shall be no bell or gasket

of any kind incorporated into the pipe.

3. Pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and be free of visible cracks, holes,

foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults. Any length of pipe

showing a crack or which has received a blow that may have caused an

incident fracture, even though no such fracture can be seen, shall be marked

as rejected and removed from the Site immediately. Damaged areas or

possible areas of damage may be removed by cutting out and removing the

suspected incident fracture area. Limits of the acceptable length of pipe shall

be determined by the Engineer.

4. Any scratch or gouge greater than 10% of the wall thickness shall be

considered significant and will be rejected unless determined acceptable by

the Engineer.

5. Pipe segments shall be butt fused together in accordance with the

manufacturer’s requirements.

6. Fusible PVC pipe shall be manufactured with 100% virgin resin in a standard

20 feet (6.1 m), 30 feet (9.1 m), or 40 feet (12.2 m) nominal length with the

following general characteristics:

a) Color: Green (for wastewater applications).

b) SDR: 18 minimum, unless otherwise shown on the plans.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 211

THE “WHITEBOOK”

207-17.6.2.1 Submittals.

1. You shall submit the following product data from the pipe supplier or fusion

provider:

a) Name of the pipe manufacturer and a list of the materials to be provided

by manufacturer. This shall include:

i. Pipe Size.

ii. Dimensionality.

iii. Pressure Class per applicable standard.

iv. Color.

v. Recommended Minimum Bending Radius.

vi. Recommended Maximum Safe Pull Force.

b) Written procedural documentation for piping products including proper

handling and storage, installation, tapping, and testing.

c) Couplings to be utilized in the installation.

207-17.6.3 Connections for Gravity Sanitary Sewer Applications.

1. The following connections shall be used in conjunction with tie-ins to existing

gravity sewer piping as shown on the Plans.

207-17.6.3.1 PVC Gasketed Push-on Couplings.

1. Acceptable couplings for joining fusible PVC pipe to other sections of fusible

PVC pipe or other sections of PVC pipe shall include gasketed PVC with push-

on type couplings.

207-17.6.3.2 Sleeve-type Couplings.

1. Sleeve-type mechanical couplings shall be manufactured for use with PVC

pipe, and may be restrained or unrestrained as indicated on the drawings and

in these specifications.

2. Acceptable sleeve-type mechanical pipe couplings shall be from the

Wastewater Approved Materials List or an approved equal.

207-17.6.3.3 Expansion and Flexible Couplings.

1. Expansion-type mechanical couplings shall be manufactured for use with PVC

pipe and may be restrained or unrestrained as shown on the Plans or required

in these specifications.

2. Acceptable expansion-type mechanical pipe couplings shall be from the

Wastewater Approved Materials List or an approved equal.

3. Acceptable flexible couplings shall be from the Wastewater Approved

Materials List or an approved equal.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 212

THE “WHITEBOOK”

207-17.6.3.4 Connection Hardware.

1. Bolts and nuts shall be made of non-corrosive, high-strength, low-alloy steel

having the characteristics specified in ANSI/AWWA C111/A21 regardless of any

other protective coating.

207-17.6.4 Pipe Markings.

1. Delivered pipe markings shall include, as a minimum, the following:

a) Nominal size.

b) PVC.

c) Dimension Ratio, Standard Dimension Ratio or Schedule.

d) Extrusion production-record code.

e) Trademark or trade name.

f) Cell Classification.

g) ASTM D3034 or ASTM F679.

207-17.6.5 Handling and Storage.

1. The pipe shall be handled per manufacturer recommendations and stored at

ambient temperature and protected from ultraviolet light degradation.

ADD:

207-17.7 Perforated PVC Pipe.

207-17.7.1 Materials of Underdrain Pipe.

1. Perforated plastic pipe shall be smooth-wall PVC plastic pipe or corrugated

PVC plastic pipe with a smooth interior surface. All pipes shall comply with 207-

17, “PVC GRAVITY PIPE”.

207-17.7.2 Perforation Requirements.

Hole Size 3/8 inch (9 mm) min.

Center to Center Spacing 5 inches (125 mm) max.

Row of Holes

4 holes per each row and all on the lower half of the pipe.

There shall be 2 holes on each side of the centerline of the

pipe. 1 hole shall be at 45

from the centerline of the pipe

and 1 hole shall be at 80

from the centerline of the pipe

as indicated on the Drawings.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 213

THE “WHITEBOOK”

207-17.8 Underdrain Cleanout.

207-17.8.1 General.

1. All underdrain cleanout PVC Plastic Pipe shall conform to 207-17, “PVC

GRAVITY PIPE”.

2. Underdrain cleanouts shall have watertight, vandal-proof caps.

207-19 POLYETHYLENE (PE) SOLID WALL GRAVITY PIPE. ADD the following:

1. PE pipe used in pipe bursting and horizontal directional drilling applications

shall conform to SDR 17, unless otherwise shown on the Plans.

2. Pipe segments shall be butt fused together.

207-19.2 Material Composition. ADD the following:

1. PE pipe used in pipe bursting and horizontal directional drilling applications

shall have a PPI rating of PE3408, when compounded. The pipe shall have a

minimum cell classification of 345464E. Inner wall shall be light in color.

ADD:

207-26 POLYMER CONCRETE PIPE.

207-26.1 General.

1. This specification applies to microtunneling and jacking pipe for the

construction of gravity sanitary sewers. See 307-1.8, “Jacking Polymer Concrete

Pipe” and 308-7.1, “Microtunneling Polymer Concrete Pipe”. Polymer concrete

pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of ASTM

D6783.

2. Pipe shall be designed to meet D-load requirements of external soil

and hydrostatic loads. Design strength shall be tested in accordance

with the three-edge bearing test method of ASTM D6783.

3. Pipe shall have a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 13,000 psi

when measured in accordance with ASTM C579.

4. Packaging, handling, and shipping shall be performed in accordance with the

Manufacturer’s instructions.

207-26.2 Materials.

1. Resin. The manufacturer shall use only vinyl ester resin systems designed for

the service intended. Pipe shall not contain Portland cement or other

corrodible elements.

2. Filler. All aggregate, sand, and quartz powder shall meet the requirements of

ASTM C 33, where applicable.

3. Additives. Resin additives, such as curing agents, pigments, dyes, fillers and

thixotropic agents, when used, shall not be detrimental to the pipe.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 214

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. Elastomeric Gaskets. Gaskets shall be Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer

(EPDM) or Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) rubber and suitable for the service

intended. All gaskets shall meet the requirement of ASTM F 477.

5. Stainless Steel Sleeve Coupling. Stainless steel joint sleeves/couplings shall

meet the requirements of ASTM A276.

207-26.3 Manufacturing.

1. Pipe shall be manufactured by the vibratory vertical casting process resulting

in a dense, non-porous, corrosion-resistant, homogeneous material.

207-26.4 Dimensions and Tolerances.

1. Lengths. Pipe shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 8 feet or 10 feet. Actual

lay length shall be nominal ±1 inch. Special short lengths may be used where

surface geography or installation conditions require shorter lengths.

2. Wall Thickness. The minimum wall thickness, measured at the narrowest

point along the pipe, shall provide axial compressive strength to withstand

anticipated loads with a minimum factor of safety against ultimate jacking load

of 3:1.

3. Straightness. The pipe shall not deviate from straight by more than the

values indicated in Table 207-26.4.3.

TABLE 207-26.4.3

Nominal Diameter, inches Deviation from Straight, in/ft

39 and below 0.04

42 to 78 0.06

84 to 144 0.08

4. Roundness. The outside diameter shall not vary from a true circle by

more than 1 percent.

5. End Squareness. Pipe ends shall be perpendicular to the pipe axis

with the tolerances listed in Table 207-26.4.5.

TABLE 207-26.4.5

Nominal Diameter, inches Perpendicular Tolerance, inches

39 and below 0.06

42 to 102 0.12

108 to 144 0.20

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 215

THE “WHITEBOOK”

207-26.5 Joints.

1. The pipe shall be connected with a stainless steel sleeve/coupling

utilizing an elastomeric sealing gasket as the sole means to maintain

joint water-tightness.

2. The joint shall meet the performance requirements of ASTM D6783 at

35 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D4161.

3. The joint shall have an outside diameter equal to or less than the

outside diameter of the pipe.

4. When the pipe is assembled, the joints shall be flush with the outside

diameter of the pipe. Joints at tie-ins may use couplings that extend

beyond the outside diameter of the pipe.

5. The ends of the pipe shall be formed that, when the pipes are joints,

they shall make a continuous and uniform line of pipe with a smooth

and regular surface.

207-26.6 Fittings.

1. Elbows, reducers, tees, wyes, laterals and other fittings shall be of the

same structural design as adjoining pipe.

2. Fittings shall be manufactured with mitered sections of pipe and joined

by epoxy bonding or fiberglass overlay.

207-26.7 Causes for Rejection.

1. The pipe fails to meet any of the requirements specified in ASTM D6783

2. Any shattering or flaking of polymer concrete.

3. Air bubble voids (bugholes) on the interior and exterior surfaces of the pipe

exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) in depth unless pointed with mortar or other

approved material.

4. Unauthorized application of any wash coat of resin.

5. A piece broken from the end projections of the pipe which has circumferential

length exceeding 60 degrees of the circle, or extends into the body of the pipe,

or extends into the gasket contact surfaces of gasketed joint pipe for a

circumferential length in excess of 6 inches (150 mm) measured at the

midpoint of the gasket contact surface on the bell end, and at the inner

shoulder of the gasket groove at the spigot end. If 2 or more pieces are broken

from an end projection, the total length of such broken pieces on any end shall

not exceed 90 degrees of the circle; and there shall be a distance of at least 9

inches (225 mm) of sound polymer concrete between breaks. The total length

of broken pieces that extends into the gasket contact surfaces of gasketed

joint pipe shall not exceed a circumferential length of 6 inches (150 mm).

6. If less than 9 inches (225 mm) of sound polymer concrete exists between two

individual breaks, the 2 breaks shall be considered as one continuous break.

Repair of such defects not exceeding above limits shall be made by Method III

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 216

THE “WHITEBOOK”

as described in 207-26.8.3, “Method III - Bonding Mortar Repairs with Epoxy

Resin Adhesives”. Unsound portions of end projections shall be removed, and

if pieces removed do not exceed the above limits, the pipe may be similarly

repaired.

7. Defects that indicate imperfect molding of polymer concrete; or any surface

defect indicating honeycomb or open-texture (rock pockets) greater in size

than an area equal to a square with a side dimension of 2-1/2 times the wall

thickness or deeper than 2 times the maximum graded aggregate size; or a

local deficiency of cement resulting in loosely bonded concrete, the area of

which exceeds in size the limits of area described in items 5 and 6 above when

the defective polymer concrete is removed. Repair of such defects not

exceeding these limits shall be made as provided in e) and f) above. Sand rings

occurring at the ends of the pipe shall be repaired for the full circumference.

8. Delamination of polymer concrete.

9. Separation or “blisters.”

10. Slumped or sagged polymer concrete.

11. Any of the following cracks:

a) A crack having a width of 0.01 inch (0.255 mm) or more throughout a

continuous length of 12 inches (300 mm) or more.

b) Any crack extending through the wall of the pipe and having a length

in excess of the wall thickness.

c) Any crack showing two visible lines of separation for a continuous

length of 2 feet (0.6 m) or more, or an interrupted length of 3 feet (0.9

m) or more anywhere in evidence, both inside and outside, except

where such cracks occur during the external loading test specified in

ASTM D6783. When required by the Engineer, any crack which is 0.01

inch (0.255 mm) wide or wider and is not a cause for rejection shall be

filled with vinyl ester resin.

207-26.8 Repair of Imperfections.

207-26.8.1 Method I - Repair by Hand-Placed Mortar.

1. Preparation of Surfaces to be Repaired. Unsound or imperfect polymer

concrete shall be removed by chipping. Edges where polymer concrete has

been chipped out shall be sharp and squared with the surface, leaving no

feathered edges. The chipped area shall be washed with water to remove all

loose material and concrete dust.

a) Surfaces within the trimmed areas shall be kept wet for several hours,

preferably overnight, before the repair replacement is made.

b) All surfaces in areas to be repaired shall be damp, but not wet, when

the material is applied.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 217

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Placement of Mortar. The mortar used for the repair shall contain the same

proportions of resin and sand as the mix from which the pipe was made.

a) This mortar shall be pre-shrunk by mixing it to a plastic consistency as

far in advance of its use as possible. Trial mixes shall be made and

aged to determine the longest period the mortar's use can be delayed

while retaining sufficient plasticity to permit good workmanship.

b) Immediately prior to the application of the mortar, the damp surface

of the area to be repaired shall be scrubbed thoroughly with a small

quantity of neat vinyl ester resin grout, using a wire brush. Remaining

loose sand particles shall be swept away before application of the

mortar.

c) In applying the mortar, it shall be compacted into the space to be filled,

care being taken to eliminate air pockets and to secure bond at the

edges. The surfaces shall be shaped and finished to correspond with

the adjacent surface of the pipe.

3. Curing. The newly repaired surfaces shall be kept damp for 24 hours after the

repair is completed. A membrane coating of an approved white-pigmented

sealing compound shall then be applied.

207-26.8.2 Method II - Repair by Pneumatically Applied Mortar (PAM).

1. Preparation of Surfaces to be Repaired. Surfaces to which PAM is to be

applied shall be prepared in the same manner as described in item 1, 207-

26.8.1, “Method I - Repair by Hand-Placed Mortar” except that the edges of

the area from which unsound or imperfect polymer concrete is removed shall

be beveled so as not to entrap rebound.

2. Placement of Mortar. No rebound shall be included in the repair. The pipe

shall be turned so that the area being repaired is at the side of the pipe in a

near vertical position to permit rebound to fall clear.

a) The mortar used for the repair shall contain the same properties of

resin and sand as the mix from which the pipe was made.

b) Before repairing grooved polymer concrete spigots, the snap ring shall be

replaced and retained in position until the repair has attained sufficient

strength to assure no damage to the gasket groove by its removal.

c) Areas repaired with PAM shall be filled in excess of the dimension

required and then carefully trimmed to correspond with adjacent

surfaces.

3. Curing. Surfaces to which PAM has been applied shall be cured in the same

manner as described in item 3, 207-26.8.1, “Method I - Repair by Hand-

Placed Mortar”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 218

THE “WHITEBOOK”

207-26.8.3 Method III - Bonding Mortar Repairs with Epoxy Resin Adhesives.

1. Preparation of Surfaces to be Repaired. Unsound or imperfect polymer

concrete shall be removed by chipping.

a) If hand placed mortar is to be used, the edges shall be left sharp and

square with the surface.

b) If PAM is to be used, the edges shall be beveled.

2. Placement of Mortar. The area to be repaired shall be kept dry. Loose

material and concrete dust remaining after the chipping operation shall be

removed by means of an air jet.

a) Epoxy resins previously approved for such use by the Engineer shall

be used in the manner prescribed by the Engineer.

b) The prepared area shall be primed with the epoxy resin compound,

care being taken to ensure intimate contact with the base material.

c) Mortar shall be applied before the epoxy resin compound set in

accordance with 207-26.8.1, “Method II - Repair by Pneumatically

Applied Mortar (PAM)” and 207-26.8.2, “Method II - Repair by

Pneumatically Applied Mortar (PAM)”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 219

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 209 – PRESSURE PIPE

ADD:

1. Asbestos cement pipe shall not be acceptable.

209-1.1.2 Materials. ADD the following:

1. Fittings shall be mechanical joints. Bolt holes in the flanges of the mechanical

joint fitting shall straddle the vertical centerline of the fitting.

2. Glands shall be made of ductile iron and shall be factory-stamped. The ductile

iron used for the production of glands shall have a minimum elongation of

5%. Bolts shall be tee heads made of high-strength low-alloy steel or ductile

iron in accordance with AWWA C111.

3. The pipe for threaded flange ductile-iron extension spools for above ground

and vault shall be Class 53 minimum and cut to allow for ½ inch (12.5 mm)

additional length for Flange x Flange and 0.25 inch (6 mm) additional length

for Flange x Pipe End.

4. Machine tapered pipe thread (NPT) shall comply with ANSI B1.20.1 adapted to

ductile-iron pipe outside diameters.

5. The threaded flange shall be dimensioned in accordance with USA Standard

Taper Pipe and shall be attached to the machined pipe threads. The threaded

flange shall be removed from the pipe and two-part epoxy thread sealant shall

be applied to the pipe threads and the flange threads. Coal tar coating shall

comply with AWWA C203 and epoxy coating shall comply with AWWA C213.

The threaded flange shall be re-attached to the pipe threads and shall be

machine tightened.

6. The threaded joint and spool assembly shall be hydrostatically tested 300 psi,

stamped with the manufacturer’s mark indicating length, weight, and

customer, and stenciled with “Tested at 300 PSI”.

7. Certification of Compliance with all specifications shall be furnished.

8. The outside surfaces of ductile iron pipe and fittings, including valves and

appurtenances for buried service, shall be coated with one of the following:

a) 24 mils minimum dry film thickness (MDFT) liquid epoxy coating in

accordance with AWWA C210. Coal tar epoxies shall not be used.

b) 24 mils MDFT Fusion Bonded Epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA

C213 and AWWA C116.

c) A cold applied three-part system, 80 mils petroleum Wax Tape coating

in accordance with AWWA C217

d) 24 mils MDFT 100% solids Polyurethane coating in accordance with

AWWA C222.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 220

THE “WHITEBOOK”

9. Prior to coating, the iron surfaces shall be blast cleaned in accordance with the

applicable National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF) standard 500-03,

“Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Receiving

Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings”. The entire coated

surface shall be inspected with a holiday detector in accordance with National

Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE International) standard SP0188-

2006, “Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on

Conductive Substrates”.

10. For water facilities, fittings shall be lined with cement mortar and shall be seal-

coated in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. Seal coat shall be NSF/ANSI 61

approved. The interior of bells shall be lined as specified in the Special

Provisions. Cement lining shall be double thickness and shall use cement

conforming to ASTM C150 Type II. For sewer facilities, internal epoxy linings

may be required. The interior of bells shall be lined as specified.

11. Non-cement mortar linings and coatings shall be holiday free on all surfaces

of the fittings, including bells.

12. For buried use, all bare iron and steel components associated with ductile iron

fittings such as bolts, thrust rods, flanges, and restraining components shall

be coated with a three-part wax tape coating system in accordance with AWWA

C217 regardless of the coating system applied to the fitting.

13. When soils have been determined to be in excess of 10,000 ohms-cm through

resistivity testing as specified in the City of San Diego Sewer and Water Design

Guidelines and as approved by the Engineer, the external surfaces of ductile

iron pipe and fittings for general use may be coated with bituminous coating

1 mil (25 um) thick in accordance with AWWA C151 or AWWA C110.

Polyethylene encasement shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C105.

In the absence of such testing, special coatings in accordance with item 8 of

209-1.1.2, “Materials” shall apply.

209-2.2.1 Materials. To Table 209-2.2.1, “Lining and Exterior Coating (Required on exposed steel

surfaces and ring joints)”, “Cement-Mortar Interior Lining and Exterior Coating”,

DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 221

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Cement-Mortar

Interior Lining

(AWWA C205)

Pipe Size Lining Thickness

4 inch - 10 inch (100 mm - 250 mm) pipe ¼ inch (6 mm)

11 inch - 23 inch ( 275 mm - 575 mm) pipe 3/8 inch ( 9.5 mm)

24 inch – 36 inch (600 mm - 900 mm) pipe ½ inch (12.5 mm)

36 inch (900 mm) and Larger pipe ¾ inch (19.1 mm)

Conform to AWWA C205 using Type II/V cement.

Trim lining as necessary to allow full operation of butterfly or check

valves at connections to steel pipe.

Line exposed portions of pipe interior with hand-applied epoxy

conforming to SECTION 212 - WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM VALVES AND

APPURTENANCES.

1 inch (25.4 mm) minimum coating thickness unless otherwise specified

or if soil is identified as corrosive.

Trim coating 6 inch to 12 inch (152.4 mm to 304.8 mm) above grade on

spools penetrating to daylight or vault interiors.

To Table 209-2.2.1, “Joints”, “Flanged Joint”,

DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

Joints

Flanged

Joint

Conform to AWWA C207. Flange joints identified on the plans to receive

dielectric insulation kits shall have the flange bolt holes over-drilled per

section 4.2.3 of AWWA C207. Faced and dimensioned in accordance with

ASME/ANSI B16.5 for the pressure class shown on the Plans or specified

in the Special Provisions.

ADD:

209-4.3 PVC Pressure Water Pipe 4 inch to 12 inch (100 mm to 305 mm).

1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C900. Milled over all (MOA)

PVC pipe having asbestos cement pipe size 8 inch (203.2 mm) through 12 inch

(304.8 mm) may be used only where a shorter than standard length is needed

to make a connection to the existing water main.

2. Design and installation shall comply with AWWA Manual M-23, “PVC Pipe

Design and Installation”, with the following exceptions:

a) Dimensions for PVC pipe shall comply with Table 2 of AWWA C900-07

for CI pipe equivalent OD.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 222

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Pressure and SDR rating shall be class 235 and 18 respectively, unless

a higher pressure class is specified on the Plans.

c) Pipe ends shall be plain by elastomeric gasket bell or plain by plain.

Couplings for plain pipes shall be furnished with 2 elastomeric gaskets.

For pipe to pipe connections, solvent cement or mechanical joints shall

not be accepted.

d) Installation of mechanical joint shall conform to Appendix A of AWWA

C111. Over stressing of bolts to compensate for poor installation shall

be avoided. Bolts and nuts shall be coated with rust-preventive grease.

e) Solvent cement joints or push-on joints shall not be accepted.

ADD:

209-4.4 PVC Pressure Water Pipe 16 inch to 36 inch (406 mm to 914 mm).

1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C905.

2. Design shall comply with accepted standards for PVC pipe and the following

enhancements and exceptions:

a) Pipes shall carry a safety factor of 2.5. Calculations and data from the

pipe manufacturer showing that the pipe conforms to the design

requirements of AWWA C900 shall be submitted to the Engineer for

approval prior to ordering the pipes.

b) Dimensions for PVC water pipe shall comply with Table 2 of AWWA

C905 for CI pipe equivalent OD.

c) Minimum acceptable Pressure Rating(s) (PR) and/or Dimension

Ratio(s) (DR) for pressure water pipes shall be shown on the plans.

Pipes shall have a minimum DR of 18.

d) Fittings shall have mechanical joints in accordance with 209-4, “PVC

Pressure Pipe” as revised herein. Solvent cement joints or push-on

joints shall not be used.

ADD:

209-4.5 Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC).

1. CPVC pipes in ½ inch to 2 inch (12.5 mm to 102 mm) diameters manufactured

by Saudi Industries for Pipes Company Limited (SIP) between March 2007 and

October 2007 shall not be used for potable water unless the piping material

has been clearly certified by NSF International.

ADD:

209-4.6 Pipe (Sewer).

1. Pipes installed as sewer mains shall be Vitrified Clay Extra Strength (VCES) in

accordance with 207-8, “VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE (VCP)” or PVC in accordance with

207-17, “PVC GRAVITY PIPE”. PVC pipe shall be SDR-35 unless otherwise

designated on the Plans.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 223

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Pipes and fittings for house connection sewer (laterals) shall be VCES, PVC, or

Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) solid wall pipe in accordance with 207-

16, “ABS OR PVC COMPOSITE PIPE.”

ADD:

209-4.7 Pipe (Water).

1. PVC pressure pipe shall be acceptable in accordance with 209-4.3, “PVC

Pressure Water Pipe 4 inch to 12 inch (100 mm to 305 mm)” and 209-4.4, “PVC

Pressure Water Pipe 16 inch to 36 inch (406 mm to 914 mm)”.

ADD:

209-8 FUSIBLE PRESSURE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE.

209-8.1 General.

1. This subsection specifies fusible PVC pipe for water mains when used for

horizontal directional drilling and where shown on the Plans.

209-8.2 Material.

1. Fusible PVC plastic material for pipe shall conform to AWWA C900, AWWA

C905, ASTM D2241, or ASTM 1785 for standard dimensions, as applicable.

Fusible PVC pipe shall be tested at the extrusion facility for properties required

to meet all applicable parameters.

2. Fusible PVC pipe shall be extruded with plain ends. The ends shall be square

to the pipe and free of any bevel or chamfer. There shall be no bell or gasket

of any kind incorporated into the pipe.

3. Pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and shall be free of visible cracks,

holes, foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults.

4. Fusible PVC pipe shall be manufactured in a standard 40 foot (12.2 m) nominal

length or custom lengths as specified and DR 18 minimum unless otherwise

shown on the plans.

209-8.2.1 Fusible PVC Pressure Pipe for Potable Water.

1. Fusible PVC pipe shall be blue in color for potable water use and shall be

marked as follows:

a) Nominal pipe size.

b) PVC.

c) Dimension Ratio, Standard Dimension Ratio, or Schedule.

d) AWWA pressure class or standard pressure rating for non-AWWA pipe,

as applicable.

e) AWWA standard designation number or pipe type for non-AWWA pipe,

as applicable.

f) NSF-61 mark verifying suitability for potable water service.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 224

THE “WHITEBOOK”

g) Extrusion production-record code.

h) Trademark or trade name.

i) Cell Classification 12454 and/or PVC material code 1120 may also be

included.

209-8.2.2 Fusible Polyvinyl Chloride Pressure Pipe for Non-Potable Water.

1. Fusible PVC pipe shall be purple in color for reclaim, reuse, or other non-

potable water distribution or conveyance and shall be marked as follows:

a) Nominal pipe size.

b) PVC.

c) Dimension Ratio, Standard Dimension Ratio, or Schedule.

d) AWWA pressure class or standard pressure rating for non-AWWA pipe,

as applicable.

e) AWWA standard designation number or pipe type for non-AWWA pipe,

as applicable.

f) Extrusion production-record code.

g) Trademark or trade name.

h) Cell Classification 12454 and/or PVC material code 1120 may also be

included.

i) For reclaim water service, the wording: “Reclaimed Water, NOT for

Potable Use”.

209-8.3 Quality Assurance.

1. This section contains references to the following documents in Table 209-8.3

below. They shall be a part of this section as specified and modified herein.

2. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the

documents in effect at the time of design, bid, or construction, whichever is

earliest. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing

organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement

documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are

no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was

discontinued.

3. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those

documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that

date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version

with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 225

THE “WHITEBOOK”

TABLE 209-8.3

REFERENCE TITLE

ANSI/AWWA

C110/A21.10

American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48-

inch, for Water and Other Liquids

ANSI/AWWA

C153/A21.53

AWWA Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

ANSI/AWWA

C111/A21.11

American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings

AWWA C605

Standard for Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and

Fittings for Water

AWWA C651 Standard for Disinfecting Water Main

AWWA C900

Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 in. through

12 in. (100mm Through 300mm), for Water Distribution

AWWA C905

Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 14 in. through

48 in. (350mm Through 1200mm), for Water Distribution and Transmission

AWWA M23 AWWA Manual of Supply Practices PVC Pipe—Design and Installation, Second Edition

ASTM D1784

Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC)

Compounds

ASTM D1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2152

Test Method for Degree of Fusion of Extruded (Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Molded

Fittings by Acetone Immersion

ASTM D2241 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)

ASTM D2665 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 226

THE “WHITEBOOK”

REFERENCE TITLE

ASTM F1057

Standard Practice for Estimating the Quality of Extruded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe by

the Heat Reversion Technique

UNI-PUB-08 Tapping Guide for PVC Pressure Pipe

NSF-14 Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

NSF-61 Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects

PPI TR-2 PVC Range Composition Listing of Qualified Ingredients

209-8.4 Submittals.

209-8.4.1 Pre-construction Submittals.

1. Name of the pipe manufacturer and a list of the materials to be provided by

manufacturer. This shall include:

a) Pipe Size.

b) Dimensionality.

c) Pressure Class per applicable standard.

d) Color.

e) Recommended Minimum Bending Radius.

f) Recommended Maximum Safe Pull Force.

g) Fusion technician qualification indicating conformance with this

specification.

2. Written procedural documentation for piping products including proper

handling and storage, installation, tapping, and testing.

3. Couplings to be utilized in the installation.

209-8.4.2 Post-construction Submittals.

1. The following AS-RECORDED DATA shall be required from you and/or the

fusion provider to the Engineer or pipe supplier upon request:

a) Pipe Size and Thickness.

b) Machine Size.

c) Fusion Technician Identification.

d) Job Identification.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 227

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) Fusion Joint Number.

f) Fusion, Heating, and Drag Pressure Settings.

g) Heat Plate Temperature.

h) Time Stamp.

i) Heating and Cool Down Time of Fusion.

j) Ambient Temperature.

209-8.5 Warranty.

1. The pipe shall be warranted for 1 year per the pipe supplier’s standard terms.

2. In addition to the standard pipe warranty, the fusion services shall be

warranted for 1 year per the fusion service provider’s standard terms.

209-8.6 Connections and Fittings for Pressure Applications.

1. The connections in the following subsections shall be used in conjunction with

tie-ins to existing potable water piping as shown on the Plans.

209-8.6.1 Ductile Iron Mechanical and Flange Fittings.

1. Acceptable fittings for use with fusible PVC pipe shall include standard ductile

iron fittings conforming to AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10, or AWWA/ANSI

C153/A21.53 and AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11.

a) Connections to fusible PVC pipe may be made using a restrained or

non-restrained retainer gland product for PVC pipe as well as for

mechanical joints or flanged fittings.

b) Bends, tees, and other ductile iron fittings shall be restrained with the

use of thrust blocking or other means as indicated on the Plans.

c) Ductile iron fittings and glands shall be installed per the

manufacturer’s guidelines.

d) If required, linings for ductile iron fittings shall be the following:

i. Liquid Epoxy in accordance with AWWA C210.

ii. Polyurethane in accordance with AWWA C222.

iii. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy in accordance with AWWA C116.

e) If required, coatings for ductile iron fittings shall meet the following

requirements for buried and/or immersion service duty:

i. Liquid Epoxy in accordance with AWWA C210.

ii. Polyurethane in accordance with AWWA C222.

iii. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy in accordance with AWWA C116.

iv. Wax tape coating in accordance with AWWA C217.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 228

THE “WHITEBOOK”

209-8.6.2 PVC Gasketed Push-On Couplings.

1. Acceptable fittings for use with fusible PVC pipe shall include standard PVC

pressure fittings conforming to AWWA C900 or AWWA C905.

a) Acceptable fittings for use joining fusible PVC pipe to bends, tees, other

PVC fittings or sections of fusible PVC pipe shall include gasketed PVC

push-on type couplings and fittings as shown in the Drawings.

b) Bends, tees, and other PVC fittings shall be restrained with the use

of thrust blocking or other restraint products as indicated on the

Plans.

c) PVC gasketed push-on fittings and mechanical restraints, if used, shall

be installed per the manufacturer’s guidelines.

209-8.6.3 Fusible PVC Sweeps or Bends.

1. Fusible PVC sweeps or bends shall conform to the same sizing convention,

diameter, dimensional tolerances, and pressure class of the pipe being joined

using the sweep or bend.

2. Fusible PVC sweeps or bends shall be manufactured from the same fusible PVC

pipe being used for the installation and shall have at least 2 feet (0.6 m) of

straight section on either end of the sweep or bend to allow for fusion of the

sweep to the pipe installation. There shall be no gasketed connections utilized

with a fusible PVC sweep.

3. Standard fusible PVC sweep or bend angles shall not be greater than 22.5°

and shall be used in nominal diameters ranging from 4 inch (101.6 mm)

through 16 inch (406.4 mm).

209-8.6.4 Sleeve-Type Coupling.

1. Sleeve-type mechanical couplings shall be manufactured for use with PVC

pressure pipe and shall be restrained or unrestrained as indicated on the Plans

or as required in the Special Provisions.

2. Sleeve-type couplings shall be rated at the same or greater pressure carrying

capacity as the pipe itself.

3. Acceptable sleeve-type mechanical pipe couplings shall be any of those listed

on the Water Approved Materials List or approved equal.

209-8.6.5 Expansion and Flexible Coupling.

1. Expansion-type mechanical couplings shall be manufactured for use with PVC

pipe and shall be restrained or unrestrained as indicated on the Plans or as

required in the Special Provisions.

2. Expansion-type mechanical couplings shall be rated at the same or greater

pressure carrying capacity as the pipe itself.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 229

THE “WHITEBOOK”

209-8.6.6 Connection Hardware.

1. Bolts and nuts for buried services shall be made of non-corrosive, high-

strength, and low-alloy steel having the characteristics specified in

ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 regardless of any other protective coating.

209-8.7 Handling and Storage.

1. The pipe shall be handled, stored, and stacked per the manufacturer’s and

supplier’s recommendations, stored at ambient temperatures, and shall be

protected from ultraviolet light degradation.

2. Any length of pipe showing a crack or which has received a blow that may have

caused an incident fracture, even though no such fracture can be seen, shall

be marked as rejected and removed at once from the Work. Damaged areas

or possible areas of damage may be removed by cutting out and removing the

suspected incident fracture area. Limits of the acceptable length of pipe shall

be determined by Engineer.

3. Any scratch or gouge greater than 10% of the wall thickness shall be

considered significant and shall be rejected unless determined otherwise by

Engineer.

4. Pipe shall be handled and supported with the use of woven fiber pipe slings or

approved equal. Care shall be exercised when handling the pipe to not cut,

gouge, scratch, or otherwise abrade the piping in any way.

5. If pipe is to be stored for periods of 1 year or longer, the pipe shall be shaded

or otherwise shielded from direct sunlight. Covering of the pipe that results in

temperature build up shall be strictly prohibited. Pipe shall be covered with an

opaque material while permitting adequate air circulation above and around

the pipe as required to prevent excess heat accumulation.

209-8.7.1 Delivery and Off-Loading.

1. All pipes shall be bundled or packaged in such a manner as to provide

adequate protection of the ends during transportation to the Site. Any pipe

damaged in shipment shall be replaced as directed by Engineer.

2. Inspect each pipe shipment prior to unloading to see if the load has shifted or

otherwise been damaged. Notify the Engineer immediately if more than

immaterial damage is found. Check for quantity and proper pipe size, color,

and type.

3. Pipe shall be loaded, off-loaded, and otherwise handled in accordance with

AWWA M23 and all of the pipe supplier’s guidelines.

4. Off-loading devices such as chains, wire ropes, chokers, or other pipe handling

implements that may scratch, nick, cut, or gouge the pipe are strictly

prohibited.

5. During removal and handling, be sure that the pipe does not strike anything.

Significant impact could cause damage, particularly during cold weather.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 230

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6. If appropriate unloading of equipment is not available, pipe may be unloaded

by removing individual pieces. Care should be taken to ensure that the pipe is not

dropped or damaged. Pipe should be carefully lowered and not dropped from

trucks.

ADD:

209-9 PRIVATE SEWER PUMPS

209-9.1 GENERAL.

1. When noted on the plans you shall furnish and install complete private sewer

pumping systems including factory-built and tested grinder pump station(s).

Each system shall be packaged into a single complete unit consisting of dual

grinder pump(s) suitably mounted in a basin constructed of high density

polyethylene (HDPE) and with a quick disconnect assembly (NEMA 6P), anti-

siphon valve, check valve, ball valve, and wet well within the basin, an electrical

alarm and disconnect panel mounted on a wall or stainless steel pole and

supplied with 240V electricity, 1.25 inch (31.8 mm) force main and all necessary

internal wiring and controls at the locations shown on the approved Working

Drawings. Private pumping systems shall be installed in compliance with the

applicable state and local codes and manufacturer’s recommendations.

209-9.1.1 Manufacturer.

1. The private sewer pump shall be as manufactured by E/ONE Sewer Systems

or an approved equal product for use in low pressure sewage systems. You

shall submit evidence of an established service program, complete parts and

services manuals, and continuous inventory of grinder pump replacement

parts from the manufacturer. You shall provide a reference and contact list

from 3 of the manufacturer’s grinder pump installations completed within the

last 2 years. The private sewer pump manufacturer shall have local service

personnel to replace or repair the private sewer pump during the warranty

period as specified in the Special Provisions.

2. The warranty for the private sewer pump shall be extended to 3 years and

shall be paid for in accordance with 306-17.2, “Payment”.

209-9.1.2 Pump Model.

1. The private sewer pump model shall be a standard height model that is field

adjustable, such as DH152-93, manufactured by E/ONE Sewer Systems or an

approved equal unless specified otherwise in the Special Provisions or

shown on the Plans. The private sewer pump model shall be sized to the

expected discharge flow of the facility measured in gallons per minute and to

the system’s discharge invert elevation. The pump model shall also have a

generator adaptor and load transfer switch to use generator power during

power outages.

209-9.1.3 User Manual and Instructions.

1. Following installation, you shall review with the property owner the pump

system and provide a detailed user manual to the property owner.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 231

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 210– PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

ADD:

210-1.1.1 Anti-graffiti Coating.

1. Anti-graffiti coating shall be as manufactured by Monopole, Inc. or approved

equal.

2. Materials shall be applied as specified:

First Coat Aquaseal ME12 (Item 5200)

Second Coat Permashield Base (Item 6100)

Third Coat

Permashield Premium (Item 5600 for matte finish

or Item 5650 for gloss finish)

Fourth Coat

Permashield Premium (Item 5600 for matte finish

or Item 5650 for gloss finish)

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 232

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 211– MATERIAL TESTS

211-1.1 Laboratory Maximum Density. REVISE “ASTM D1557” to “ASTM D1557 or California

Test Method No. 216”.

211-1.2 Field Density. ADD the following:

1. California Test Methods 216 (Sand Cone) or 231 (Nuclear Gauge) may also be

used.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 233

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 212– WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM VALVES AND APPURTENANCES

212-5 VALVES. ADD the following:

1. Valves shall have internal and external fusion bonded epoxy coating in

accordance with AWWA C116 and C213 and shall be certified “Holiday Free” by

the manufacturer.

2. Gate valves shall conform to the provisions of AWWA Specification C 500 as

modified herein, except that valves 3 inches (75 mm) and under shall be all

bronze and shall conforming to ASTM B62.

3. Valves shall have bottom or side wedging double discs, parallel seats, all

bronze internal working parts, either "O" rings or stuffing box stem seals, and

2 inch (50 mm) square operating nut, and shall open by turning the stem

counter-clockwise. Ends shall be as specified, designed for use with the

connecting pipe. Components made from brass or bronze shall be of a grade

containing not more than 16% zinc and not more than 2% aluminum in

accordance with 5.5 of the AWWA Standard C 500 for waters with specific

conductance exceeding 350 micro Mho per am.

4. Valves 16 inches (406.4 mm) and larger shall be designed for horizontal

mounting with 3 inches (76.2 mm) by-passes and totally enclosed gear case.

Integral or extended gear cases shall be acceptable.

5. External bolts and nuts for valve fittings shall be hexagonal head machine

bolts and hexagonal nuts conforming to ASTM 307 Grade B or SAE Grade 2.

Bolt threads shall be lubricated with graphite and oil prior to installation.

6. By-pass connections for all gate valves over 12 inches (304.8 mm) shall be cast

into the valve and shall not obstruct the water way to the by-pass. Bronze by-

pass valves shall be wheel operated.

7. Only gates, resilient-seated gates, and butterfly valves shall be allowed. Valves

used with PVC pipe shall have mechanical joint ends.

8. 16 inch (406.4 mm) gate valves shall have a 3 inch (76.2 mm) bypass when the

maximum operating pressure is 80 psi or greater. Larger gate valves shall have

bypasses in accordance with AWWA C-5000.

9. The identification and painting of valve well caps shall be in accordance with

SDW-152, “Gate Well Identification”.

10. Valve key extensions shall be installed for butterfly valves and gate valves

when top of gate valve nut is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more below ground or pavement

surface. Types of joints for fittings will be called out on the Plans in the

following order: back, ahead, left, right.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 234

THE “WHITEBOOK”

212-5.2 Butterfly Valves. ADD the following:

1. Butterfly valves and operators shall conform to the provisions of AWWA C504,

“Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves”, as modified and supplemented

herein.

2. Butterfly valves and operators shall be Class 150B and shall be totally enclosed

for direct burial in the ground without a vault. Butterfly valves and operators

shall be designed for installation in a nearly horizontal pipeline with the disc

shaft horizontal and the operating shaft vertical.

3. Butterfly valves shall be either short body or long body with ends as specified.

4. The operator shall be manual with a 2 inch (50.8 mm) square operating nut

and shall open the valve when turned counter-clockwise.

5. The operator, and any other parts requiring lubrication, shall be fully

lubricated at the factory and shall require no additional lubrication for the life

of the valve.

6. The butterflty valve disc may be of cast iron, alloy cast iron, stainless steel,

monel, bronze, or ductile iron. The metal seating surfaces which meet the

rubber seat shall be of stainless steel or bronze.

7. Bolts and nuts for butterfly valve end flanges shall be hexagonal head bolts

and hexagonal nuts conforming to ASTM 307 Grade B or SAE Grade 2. Bolt

threads shall be lubricated with graphite or oil prior to installation.

8. Prior to the installation of working parts, all internal steel or cast iron surfaces

of butterfly valves, except finish or bearing surfaces, shall be coated with

approved epoxy in accordance with AWWA C550, “Protective Interim Coatings

for Valve and Hydrants”. The epoxy surface shall be tested with an approved

holiday detector.

212-5.2.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

212-5.2.1 Class 250B Butterfly Valves.

1. This subsection applies to 16 inch (406.4 mm) through 54 inch (1371.6 mm)

Class 250B butterfly valves.

2. Butterfly valves shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C504 for Class

250B service in terms of performance criteria. Class 250B butterfly valves shall

have flanged ends, be manually operated, tight closing, and shall have rubber

seats.

3. Butterfly valves shall be bubble-tight at the rated pressure with flow in either

direction and shall be satisfactory for applications involving throttling service

and/or frequent operation after long periods of inactivity. Butterfly valves and

valve operators shall be suitable for buried services.

4. Butterfly valves and operators shall comply with these specifications, other

accepted standards for butterfly valves, and the following enhancements and

exceptions:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 235

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) Butterfly valve bodies shall be short and constructed of cast iron

conforming to ASTM A126 Class B. Flanges shall be flat-faced and

flange drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1 Class 125 or Class

250, as required for the design pressure. On butterfly valves 30 inches

(762 mm) and larger the valve port diameter shall not reduce more

than a 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) of nominal diameter. Flow direction shall

be indicated on the butterfly valve body. The use of stops or lugs cast

integrally with or mechanically secured to the body for limiting disc

travel shall not be acceptable.

b) Butterfly valve discs shall have no external ribs transverse to the flow

of water through the valve. The disc shall not have any hollow

chambers that can entrap water. The disc shall be made from cast iron

ASTM A126 Class B or ductile iron ASTM A536. The disc shall be

furnished with a nickel-chrome or stainless steel type 316 seating edge

to mate with the rubber seat.

c) The butterfly valve seat shall be attached to the valve body. Retaining

rings, clamps, screws, and bolts attaching the rubber seat to the valve

body shall be fabricated from stainless steel type 316. For butterfly

valves 24 inches (609.6 mm) and larger, valve seats shall be field

adjustable around the 360° circumference and replaceable without

dismantling the operator, disc, or shaft and without removing the valve

from the pipeline.

d) The butterfly valve manufacturer shall certify the rubber seat is field

replaceable as specified above. Spool-type rubber liners covering the

entire surface of the valve body and extending over any portion of the

flange faces shall not be acceptable. Butterfly valves using snap rings

to retain the rubber seat shall not be acceptable.

e) Rubber for butterfly valve seats shall conform to the applicable

provisions of AWWA C504.

f) Butterfly valve shafts shall be stainless steel ASTM A564 Type 630

Condition H-1100.

g) The butterfly valve/disc connection shall be made through the use of

on-center taper pins. The taper pins shall be of the same material as

the valve shaft.

h) Shaft Seals shall be standard split V packing and be provided where

the shaft projects through the butterfly valve body. Shaft seals shall be

of design allowing replacement without removing the valve shaft.

i) Butterfly valve bearings shall be sleeve type that is corrosion resistant

and self-lubricating. Thrust bearings shall be provided in accordance

with the governing standard. Thrust bearings which are exposed to

water and consist of a metal bearing surface in rubbing contact with

an opposing metal bearing surface shall not be acceptable.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 236

THE “WHITEBOOK”

j) Butterfly valve operators shall be fully grease packed and have stops

in the open/closed position. The operator shall have a mechanical

stop, which will withstand an input torque of 450 foot lbs (610.1

Newton-meter), against the stop. The traveling nut shall engage

alignment grooves in the housing. The operator shall have a built in

packing leak bypass to eliminate possible leakage into the operator

housing. The operator shall be designed to hold the valve in any

intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without

creeping or fluttering. The operator shall be sized to provide adequate

torque to operate the butterfly valve on which it is mounted at the full

pressure rating of the valve. Operators shall meet minimum

requirements for AWWA C504.

k) Butterfly valve operators shall be mounted on the valve at the valve

manufacturer's facility. The valve manufacturer shall ensure proper

operator sizing and satisfactorily testing the operator and valve

assembly prior to shipment to the Site.

l) Butterfly valves shall be hydrostatic and leak tested. The leak test shall

be performed in both directions at a differential pressure of 250 psi

(1.7 Megapascal) with the disc in a closed position. In a slightly open

position, internal hydrostatic pressure equal to 500 psi (3.4

Megapascal) shall be applied to the inside of the valve body for 5

minutes. Proof of a design cycle test in accordance with AWWA C 504

Section 5.2.4.3 shall be submitted before installation.

212-5.3.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Class 250 valves 16 inches (406.4 mm) or larger shall be plug valves. This

grouping includes cone valves, ball valves, and eccentric plug valves.

212-6.1.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Fire hydrants furnished in accordance with these specifications shall conform

to the provisions of AWWA C503 for "Wet Barrel Fire Hydrants", and to the

modifications and supplements herein.

2. Valve seats and stem guides may be threaded into or cast into the hydrant

body or may be secured to the body by means of a lock nut.

3. Unless otherwise specified, fire hydrants for residential areas shall have one 4

inch (101.6 mm) port and one 2.5 inch (63.5 mm) port and fire hydrants for

commercial and industrial areas shall have two 4 inch (101.6 mm) ports and

one 2.5 inch (63.5 mm) port.

4. Hydrant valves shall open counter-clockwise.

5. Threads for pumper and hose nozzles shall conform to the American National

Standard adopted by the American Insurance Association (formerly the

National Board of Fire Underwriters) and the National Fire Protection

Association published in pamphlet No. 194, Fire Hose Couplings, by N.F.P.A. in

1968.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 237

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6. Outer end of all hose coupling threads shall be terminated by the blunt start

of "Higbee Cut" on full thread (to avoid crossing thread).

7. Hydrant body base flange shall be drilled in a 9.5 inch (237.5 mm) bolt circle

with 6 bolt holes, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) in diameter oriented to the center of the

pumper connection.

8. Hydrant bodies shall be solid bronze. The cap materials shall be cast iron or

bronze.

9. Valve stems shall have a pentagon end and shall have a short radius of 33/64

inch (13mm) to center of flat sides.

10. Hydrant components made from brass or bronze shall be of a grade

containing not more than 16% zinc and not more than 2% aluminum in

accordance with Section 2.6.4 of the AWWA Standard C 503 for waters with

specific conductance exceeding 350 micro Mho per am.

11. Exterior surfaces shall be painted with a zinc chromate primer of the same

color as the finished coat. The finished coat shall be of chrome yellow enamel

meeting the requirement of Federal Specification TT-C-595, Color No. 13538.

212-10.1 Copper Tubing. ADD the following:

1. Copper tube shall be Seamless Copper Water Tube, Type K soft. It shall be of

the size specified on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

ADD:

212-10.1.1 Insulation.

1. Copper services which are attached to metallic water mains shall be insulated

as follows: The corporation stop and the copper tube and fittings within a

minimum distance of 3 feet (0.9 m) of the main shall be wrapped tightly with

an approved PVC pipe coating tape combined with the application of a liquid

adhesive primer or finish coating recommended for the purpose by the

manufacturer of the tape.

2. The tape and adhesive or coating shall be applied in the manner and sequence

recommended by the manufacturer. Prior to the application of insulation, the

tubing, fittings, corporation stop and the surface of the main within 4 feet (1.2

m) of the stop shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt and grease, and dried.

Copper tube shall be wrapped with tape 2 inches (50.8 mm) or less in width

lapped not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).

3. The tape shall not be less than 0.25 mm (10 mils) in thickness and shall have

the following characteristics:

Tensile Strength

3,500 psi to 4,200 psi

(24.1 to 29 megapascal)

Tear Resistance High

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 238

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Elongation at Break 300% to 350%

Moisture Absorption 0.03%

Dielectric Strength 750 volts/mil - 1,000 volts/mil

Insulation Resistance 200,000

ADD:

212-10.3.1 Corporation Stops, Curb Stops, and Other Bronze Water Service Fittings.

1. Bronze water service fittings including stops shall be cast of high grade bronze

conforming to the requirements of ASTM B62. The Engineer shall have the

right to take 1 or more from each lot of stops and/or fittings and have it

analyzed. Fittings shall be of makes and models from the Water Approved

Materials List or approved equal.

212-10.6.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Concrete water meter boxes shall be in accordance with the Water Approved

Materials List or approved equal.

ADD:

212-10.6.3 Polymer Concrete Water Meter Boxes.

1. Boxes and covers shall be in accordance with the Water Approved Materials

List or approved equal.

2. Boxes and covers to be installed in traffic areas shall have a reinforced

polymer concrete frame and cover designed for AASHTO H-20 traffic loading.

Boxes and covers to be installed in non-traffic areas shall have reinforced

polymer concrete reader lids designed for A-10 traffic loading in accordance

with ASTM-C857. Traffic areas are defined as any location in which vehicular

traffic is evident or highly likely under normal conditions. Non-traffic areas are

locations with no vehicular traffic.

3. Covers shall have a logo reading “CITY SD” as well as the manufacturer’s name

or logo cast in the polymer concrete surface. A cover and lid selected at

random shall be tested.

212-12.2 Color Scheme. To Sentence (1), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

The color of valves and appurtenances, excluding polyethylene encasements, shall be

in accordance with Table 212-12.2.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 239

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 213 – ENGINEERING GEOSYNTHETICS

213-1 GENERAL. ADD the following:

1. Paving fabric material shall have a proven record that it can be recycled and

milled. Submit written documentation from you and/or the recycling facilities

within the jurisdiction of Work.

213-4 PAVING FABRIC. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. This subsection applies to paving fabric material intended for curb-to-curb

repaving of bituminous or concrete pavements with hot mix asphaltic

concrete.

2. The paving fabric material shall be a fiberglass or a fiberglass and polyester,

single layer, non-woven paving fabric material, shall meet the requirements of

ASTM D7239 Classification Type I, and shall conform to Table 213-4.1.

TABLE 213-4.1

Property Test Method Requirements Units

Breaking Strength ASTM D 5035 200 N/50 mm

Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 5035 ≤ 5 %

Mass per Unit Area ASTM D 5261 125 g/m

Melting Point ASTM D 276 205 °C

213-5 GEOTEXTILES AND GEOGRIDS. REVISE “Table 213-5.2 (A)”, “Table 213-5.2 (B)”,

“Table 213-5.2 (C)”, “Table 213-5.2 (D)”, and “Table 213-5.2 (E)” as follows:

ORIGINAL TABLE NUMBER REVISED TABLE NUMBER

Table 213-5.2 (A) Table 213-5 (A)

Table 213-5.2 (B) Table 213-5 (B)

Table 213-5.2 (C) Table 213-5 (C)

Table 213-5.2 (D) Table 213-5 (D)

Table 213-5.2 (E) Table 213-5 (E)

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 240

THE “WHITEBOOK”

To Table 213-5 (A): NONWOVEN, DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

TABLE 213-5 (A): NONWOVEN

Property Test Reference

Type

1,2

90 N 180 N 250 N

90 N–Modified

“Media Barrier”

Grab Strength

lbs (N), Min. ASTM D4632 90 (400) 180 (800) 250 (1110) 90 (400)

Elongation, Minimum

(at peak load) %, Max.

ASTM D4632 50 50 50 50

Puncture Strength, lbs (N),

Min.

ASTM D3787 45 (200) 80 (355) 115 (510) 65 (290)

Permitivity, Sec.

, Min. ASTM D4491 0.7 0.7 0.7 2.5

Burst Strength psi (kPa), Min.

ASTM D3786 180 (1240) 320 (2205) 360 (2485) 225 (1550)

Toughness, lbs (N), Min.

% Elongation x

Grab Strength

5,500

(24,500)

10,000

(44,500)

14,000

(62,500)

5500 (24500)

Ultraviolet Resistance %

Strength Retained @ 500

Weatherometer Hours

ASTM D4355 70 70 70 70

Apparent Opening Size, US

Sieve # (mm)

ASTM D4751 - - - 70 (0.210)

Flow Rate, Gal/min/ft

(L/min/m

)

ASTM D4491 - - - 175 (7130)

Trapezoid Tear, lbs (N) ASTM D4533 - - - 45 (200)

1. N - Nonwoven.

2. For application and placement, refer to 300-8 or 300-10.

3. Minimum roll average in the weakest principal direction.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 241

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 217 – BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIALS

217-2.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The Resident Engineer will indicate anticipated areas where native material

may be unsuitable for use as trench backfill and may have you install

Imported Trench Backfill as directed.

217-2.2 Imported Trench Backfill. To paragraph (2), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with following:

You shall identify the source of the proposed material to the Resident Engineer no less

than 10 Working Days prior its intended use. The proposed Imported Trench Backfill

material shall be clearly described with descriptive soil properties, plant or location,

street address, and community of origin. The ticket shall include the date, time and

volume of backfill and a copy shall be provided to the Resident Engineer while onsite.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 242

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

SECTION 218 – DETECTABLE WARNING TILES (DWT)

218-1 GENERAL.

1. This section includes specifications for DWT embedded in an inline dome

pattern on all curb ramps and walking surfaces at locations and to the

dimensions shown on the Plans, in accordance with these special provisions,

and the following references:

a) Americans with Disabilities Act, Section 705, “Detectable Warnings”.

b) California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 2, Section 11B-247.1

and 11B-705.1 “Detectable Warnings” and Sections 11B-247.1.2 and

11B-705.1.2.2 “Curb Ramps.”

218-2 MATERIALS.

1. Materials for DWT specified herein shall be per the City's Approved Materials

List (AML).

a) The tiles shall have the manufacturer’s logo stamped permanently on

the product with identifying information such as model number and

type.

b) The Stainless Steel Cast in Place DWT shall be of 16 gauge Type 304L

with an integral micro-texture non-slip surface stamped into the

stainless steel plate on the top of the domes and in the field surface

between the domes. It shall have an ultraviolet stabilized coating.

c) Vitrified Polymer Composite (VPC) Cast in Place DWT shall be an epoxy

polymer composition with an ultraviolet stabilized coating employing

aluminum oxide particles in the truncated domes. VPC Product shall

be provided with a 5-year manufacturer written warranty for materials

and installation.

d) For other materials and a complete listing of material physical

property requirements refer to the City's AML.

218-3 MANUFACTURERS.

1. Materials from the manufacturers listed in the City’s AML do not require a

submittal. In lieu of the submittal, you shall be required to certify in writing

that the material incorporated in the Work complies with the Contract

Documents.

2. Refer to the City’s AML for DWT for any substitutions.

END OF PART 2 - CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 243

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 244

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 3

CONSTRUCTION METHODS

SECTION 300 – EARTHWORK

300-1.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Clearing and grubbing activities shall comply with the CEQA document, and/or

resource agency permits, if applicable, in accordance with SECTION 802 -

NATIVE HABITAT PROTECTION, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, AND

MONITORING.

2. Tree trimming permits shall be obtained from the City.

3. To avoid any direct impacts to raptors and/or any native or migratory birds,

clearing, grubbing, or removal of habitat that supports active nests in the

proposed area of disturbance should occur outside of the breeding season for

these species (February 1 to September 15).

4. If removal of habitat in the proposed area of disturbance must occur during

the breeding season, a Qualified Biologist or City representative shall conduct

a pre-construction survey to determine the presence or absence of nesting

birds on the proposed area of disturbance. The pre-construction (precon)

survey shall be conducted within 10 Working Days prior to the start of

construction activities (including removal of vegetation). The applicant shall

submit the results of the precon survey to City DSD for review and approval

prior to initiating any construction activities. If nesting birds are detected, a

letter report or mitigation plan in conformance with the City’s Biology

Guidelines and applicable State and Federal Law (appropriate follow up

surveys, monitoring schedules, construction and noise barriers/buffers, and

etc.) shall be prepared and include proposed measures to be implemented to

ensure that take of birds or eggs or disturbance of breeding activities is

avoided.

5. The report or mitigation plan shall be submitted to the City DSD for review and

approval and implemented to the satisfaction of the City. The City’s MMC

Section or RE, and Biologist shall verify and approve that all measures

identified in the report or mitigation plan are in place prior to and/or during

construction. If nesting birds are not detected during the precon survey, no

further mitigation is required.

6. It is unlawful to injure or destroy any trees known as the “Pinus Torreyana”

growing upon Pueblo Lots Nos. 1332, 1337, and 1338 or any other public lots

or lands, belonging to and within the corporate limits of the City of San Diego.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 245

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. After the removal of parkway trees, remaining tree roots shall be removed to

a depth of 4 inches (101.6 mm) below the new 4 inch (101.6 mm) thick walk in

all areas between the curb and the property line. New, non-expansive soil shall

be used for backfill and compaction as needed to establish proper grade and

compaction. The new walk and parkway area shall meet existing grade and

provide a positive slope away from the property.

8. Where parkway trees have been left in place, the roots may be partially cut to

allow you to remove the damaged concrete and the underlying roots.

9. Concrete shall not be removed around parkway trees to be removed unless

approved by the Engineer.

300-1.4 Payment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The lump sum or unit acre Bid item for “Clearing and Grubbing” shall include

full compensation for the removal and disposal of all the resulting materials.

2. If a Bid item for “Clearing and Grubbing” is not provided in the Bid, the

payment shall be included in the associated items of Work which require

clearing and grubbing.

300-2.5 Slopes. To paragraph (2), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

The tops of excavation slopes and the ends of excavations shall be rounded where

shown on the Plans.

300-2.7 Selected Material. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Selected material encountered in excavation within the right-of-way shall be

used as shown on the Plans, in the Specifications, or as directed by the

Engineer. Topsoil excavated to a depth specified in the Special Provisions or

as directed by the Engineer within the limits of the project may be considered

as selected material only for the purpose of backfilling areas to be planted.

300-3.5.1 Requirements. ADD the following:

1. Waterproofing and drainage shall be inspected and approved prior to backfill.

2. Backfill for bridge abutments and box culverts shall have a relative compaction

of not less than 95%. The thickness of each layer of backfill shall not exceed

0.67 feet (204.2 mm) before compaction except when compaction is done by

pounding and jetting.

300-4.4 Benching. To sentence (3), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

A minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) horizontal bench shall be constructed to ensure that the

new Work is constructed on a firm foundation free of loose or disturbed material.

300-5.2 Imported Borrow. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Imported borrow shall consist of material required for construction of fills, and

unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. You shall make

arrangements for obtaining imported borrow and shall pay all costs involved.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 246

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of opening any borrow site so that

adequate time will be allowed for testing the material and establishing cross

section elevations and measurements of the ground surface.

300-6.3 Stripping. To sentence (3), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

Soil loosened below the stripping depth specified shall be compacted to not less than

90% relative compaction.

300-8.1 Trench Drains. ADD the following:

1. Geotextile fabric for use with rock slope protection shall be either woven or

non-woven and conform to 213-5, “Geotextiles and Geogrids”. In addition,

fabric weight shall be not less than 6 oz/yd

(0.2 kg/ m

) in accordance with

ASTM Designation D1910.

300-9.1 Bank and Shore Protection. ADD the following:

1. Geotextile fabric for use with rock slope protection shall be either woven or

non-woven and conform to 213-5, “Geotextiles and Geogrids”. In addition,

fabric weight shall be not less than 6 oz/yd

(0.2 kg/ m

) in accordance with

ASTM Designation D1910.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 247

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 301 - SUBGRADE PREPARATION, TREATED MATERIALS, AND PLACEMENT

OF BASE MATERIALS

301-1.2 Preparation of Subgrade. ADD the following:

1. Subgrade soil shall be tested for expansive potential in accordance with ASTM

Test Method D4829. If expansive soil is encountered within the roadway

improvements and extends beyond the limit of paved sidewalks, curb an

gutter, or edge of pavement, then expansive soil subgrade shall be removed

and replaced with a non-expansive material having an expansion index of less

than 20 (ASTM D4829). The “R” value shall be determined on the imported so

r pavement design and shall be approved by the Engineer. The depth of

subgrade removal shall be based on the Expansive Index of the native soil in

accordance with the following table:

Expansive Index of Native

Subgrade Soil

Minimum Depth of Subgrade to be

Removed and Replaced (in inches)

0 - 50 None

51 - 90 18 (450 mm)

91 - 130 24 (600 mm)

Above 130 36 (900 mm)

2. Removal shall extend beyond edge of sidewalk a horizontal distance

equivalent to the minimum depth of removal.

3. You may submit an optional plan for soil treatment to the Engineer for review

and approval.

4. Pavement design shall be based on the resulting combination of “R” values

within the top 36 inches (914.4 mm) of soil.

5. Disintegrated Granite (DG) shall be used as backfill material in the parkway at

commercial locations or high pedestrian traffic access, as directed by the Engineer

at 5% grade or lower.

6. The existing native subgrade material under all permeable pavement

installations shall be minimally compacted and not subject to excessive

construction equipment traffic prior to stone reservoir placement.

Compaction shall be acceptable if an impermeable liner is used over the

subgrade.

301-1.3 Relative Compaction. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. When pavement, base, subbase, or cross gutter is to be placed directly on subgrade

material, the top 12 inches (304.8 mm) of subgrade material in streets and the top

6 inches (152.4 mm) of subgrade material in alleys shall be compacted to a

minimum density of 95% relative compaction. When curb, gutter, driveways, or

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 248

THE “WHITEBOOK”

sidewalks are to be placed on the subgrade material, the top 6 inches (152.4 mm)

of such subgrade material shall be compacted to a relative compaction of 90%.

2. When permeable pavements are to be placed on the subgrade material, the

top 12 inches (304.8 mm) of such subgrade material shall be compacted to a

relative compaction of 95% in road travel lanes and 90% in all other applications

(curb, gutter, alley, driveway, sidewalk, parking lane, and parking lot) unless

otherwise specified.

3. After compaction and trimming, the subgrade shall be firm, hard, and

unyielding.

4. The subgrade shall be tested with a load truck possessing a 10 ton capacity

load or greater. The tire contact area shall have a load capacity of 75 pounds

or more per square inch (≥ 75 psi) (≥ 517 kPa). The subgrade shall support this

load without perceptible indentation or movement. The base, surfacing, or

pavement shall not be scheduled for construction until the subgrade has been

tested as described above and approved by the Engineer.

301-1.6 Not Used. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

301-1.6 Preparatory Repair Work.

1. Prior to the placement of any asphalt concrete or application of slurry, you shall

complete all necessary preparation and repair Work and shall obtain approval by

the Resident Engineer.

2. Unless otherwise specified, preparatory Work shall include tree trimming, weed

spray, weed abatement, crack sealing, asphalt repair, mill and pave, hump and lump

removal, miscellaneous asphalt patching, removal of raised pavement markers,

and removal of pavement markings.

3. You shall repair areas of distressed asphalt concrete pavement by milling or

removing damaged areas of pavement to a minimum depth of 2 inches (50.8

mm) for residential streets and a minimum depth of 3 inches (76.2 mm) for all

others to expose firm and unyielding pavement.

4. You shall prepare subgrade as needed and install a minimum of 2 inches (50.8

mm) for residential streets and a minimum of 3 inches (76.2 mm) for all other

streets of compacted asphalt concrete pavement over compacted native

material as directed by the Engineer.

5. If the base material is exposed in order to achieve the minimum specified

depth, the material shall be compacted to 95% relative compaction (dig out).

Compaction tests shall be made to ensure compliance with the specifications.

6. The Engineer shall determine when and where the test shall occur. The City

will pay for the soils testing required by the Engineer which meets the required

compaction. You shall reimburse the City for the cost of retesting failing

compaction tests. If additional base material is required, you shall use Class 2

Aggregate Base in accordance with 200-2.2, “Crushed Aggregate Base”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 249

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. Recycled base material shall conform to crushed miscellaneous base material in

accordance with 200-2.4, “Crushed Miscellaneous Base”.

8. Prior to replacing asphalt, the area shall be cleaned by removing all loose and

damaged material, moisture, dirt, and other foreign matter and shall be tack

coated in accordance with 302-5.4, “Tack Coat” both preparation steps shall be

performed the same day as the paving occurs.

9. You shall install new asphalt within the repair area or for patches in accordance with

302-5, “ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT”. Asphalt concrete shall be C2-PG 64-10 in

compliance with 203-6, “ASPHALT CONCRETE”.

10. No preparatory asphalt Work shall be done when the atmospheric

temperature is below 50° F (10° C) or during unsuitable weather (rain or heavy

fog).

11. Following the asphalt placement, you shall roll the entire area of new asphalt

in both directions at least twice. The finished patch shall be level and smooth

in compliance with 302-5.6.2, “Density and Smoothness”. After placement and

compaction of the asphalt patch, you shall seal all finished edges with a 4 inch

(101.6 mm) wide continuous band of SS-1H.

12. The minimum dimensions for each individual repair shall be 4 feet by 4 feet

(1.2 m by 1.2 m) and shall be subject to the following conditions:

a) If the base material is exposed to achieve the required minimum

removal thickness, the base material shall be prepared conforming to

301-1, “SUBGRADE PREPARATION”.

b) When additional base material is required, then you shall use Class 2

Aggregate Base in accordance with 200-2.2, “Crushed Aggregate Base”.

Recycled base material shall conform to crushed miscellaneous aggregate

base material in accordance with 200-2.4, “Crushed Miscellaneous Base”.

c) You may use grinding as a method for removal of deteriorated pavement

when the areas indicated for removal are large enough (a minimum of

the machine drum width) and when approved by the Engineer.

d) For both scheduled and unscheduled base repairs, failed areas may be

removed by milling or by excavation provided that the edges are cut

cleanly with a saw. The areas shall be cleaned and tack coated in

accordance with 302-5.4, “Tack Coat” before replacing the asphalt. The

areas for scheduled repairs have been marked on the street.

e) Base Repairs with RAC. Areas where failed paving is removed either by

cold milling or by excavation shall be restored to existing pavement

grade with ¾ inch (19.1 mm) RAC at 8-inch (203.2 mm) depth unless

otherwise directed by the Engineer. These areas have been marked on

the street as “DO”. The asphalt concrete shall be B3-PG 64-10 as

specified in 203-6, “ASPHALT CONCRETE”. Preliminary quantities are

identified in the Contract Appendix but may need to be increased and

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 250

THE “WHITEBOOK”

approved by the Engineer at the time of construction. Base repairs

shall not exceed 15% RAP in content.

f) Unscheduled Base Repair with RAC. If paving operations cause

damage outside of your control and require additional base repair, the

areas shall be removed either by cold milling or by excavation and shall

be restored to existing pavement grade with ¾ inch (19.1 mm) RAC at

8 inch (203.2 mm) depth unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

The asphalt concrete shall be B3-PG 64-10 as specified in 203-6,

“Asphalt Concrete”. Unscheduled base repairs shall not exceed 15%

RAP.

g) A base repair is considered unscheduled when it is not identified on

the pavement with a “DO” or when you are directed by the Engineer to

perform a base repair for the proper placement of an asphalt overlay.

13. Asphalt concrete shall be Type III and shall not exceed 15% RAP in accordance

with 203-6.3.1, “General”.

301-1.6.1 Asphalt Patching.

1. Asphalt patching shall consist of patching potholes, gutter-line erosions, and

other low spots in the pavement that are deeper than ½ inch (12.7 mm) in

accordance with 302-5.6.2, “Density and Smoothness”.

2. The areas requiring patching have been identified in the Contract Documents,

marked on the streets, or as directed by the Engineer. You shall identify any

new areas that may require patching prior to slurry Work to ensure the

smoothness and quality of the finished product.

3. You shall identify and repair any areas that may require patching prior to the

placement of slurry seal for a smooth and finished product.

4. Asphalt overlay shall not be applied over deteriorating pavement. Preparatory

asphalt Work shall be completed and approved by the Engineer before

proceeding with asphalt overlay.

5. You shall remove distressed asphalt pavement either by saw cutting or milling

to expose firm and unyielding pavement, prepare subgrade (as needed), and

install compacted asphalt concrete pavement over compacted native material

as directed by the Engineer.

6. Prior to replacing asphalt, the area shall be cleaned and tack coated in

accordance with 302-5.4, “Tack Coat” both steps shall be performed the same

day as the paving occurs

7. Following the asphalt placement, you shall roll the entire patch in both

directions and shall cover the patch at least twice.

8. After placement and compaction of the asphalt patch, you shall seal all

finished edges with a 4 inch (101.6 mm) wide continuous band of SS-1H.

9. Base repairs shall not exceed 15% RAP in content.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 251

THE “WHITEBOOK”

301-1.7 Payment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. When used, Decomposed Granite (DG) shall be included in the Bid item for

“Remove and Replace Miscellaneous Hardscape with Topsoil”, unless a

separate Bid item has been provided.

2. The payment for grading operations in areas designated as “grade only” shall

be paid for in accordance with 300-2, “UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION”.

3. The payment for adjusting existing manhole and gate valve frames and covers

to grade shall be in accordance with SECTION 403 – MANHOLE, SURVEY

MONUMENT, AND GATE VALVE FRAMES AND COVERS ADJUSTMENT AND

RECONSTRUCTION.

4. The payment for the replacement of existing pavement when required shall

be included in the Bid item for “Asphalt Pavement Repair” for the total area

replaced and no additional payment shall be made regardless of the number

and size of replacements completed.

a) No payment shall be made for areas of over-excavation or outside

trench areas in utility Works unless previously approved by the

Engineer.

b) No payment for pavement replacement will be made when the

damage is due to your failure to protect existing improvements. You

shall reimburse the City for the cost of retesting all failing compaction

tests.

c) The areas and quantities shown on the road segments and in the

appendices are given only for your aid in planning the Work and

preparing Bids. The Engineer will designate the limits to be removed

and these designated areas shall be considered to take precedence

over the area shown in an Appendix to the Contract Documents. The

quantities shown in the appendices are based on a street assessment

survey and may vary.

d) At the end of each day, you shall submit to the Engineer an itemized

list of the asphalt pavement repair Work completed. The list shall

include the location of the Work and the exact square footage of the

repair.

e) The payment for preparatory repair Work and tack coating shall be

included with this Bid item.

5. The payment for milling shall be included in the Bid item for “Asphalt

Pavement Repair” unless separate Bid items for asphalt milling Work have

been provided.

6. The payment for miscellaneous asphalt patching shall be included in the Bid

items for slurry Work and no additional payment shall be made, unless a

separate Bid item for “Miscellaneous Asphalt Patching” has been provided.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 252

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. When required, the payment for subgrade repair and imported material shall

be included in the Bid item for “Subgrade Imported Backfill”.

301-3.2.5.2 Central Plant Mixing. ADD the following:

1. The cement feeder shall be equipped with a device by which the rate of cement

feed can be determined while the plant is in full operation.

301-3.2.5.4 Off-Road Mixing DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. If specified in the Special Provisions or approved by the Engineer, mixing

may be performed off the roadway. Off-road mixing shall conform to 301-

3.2.6, “Placement and Spreading of Central Mixing Plant and Off-Road

Produced Mixtures”.

301-3.2.7 Compaction and Finishing. To paragraph (4), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with the following:

Vibratory rollers shall not be used for finish rolling of cement treated base.

301-3.3.6 Mixing. ADD the following:

1. The cement feeder shall be equipped with a device by which the rate of cement

feed can be determined while the plant is in full operation.

301-3.3.12.2 Finishing. ADD the following:

1. Asphalt concrete paving on Cement-Treated Base shall be permitted in

accordance with the table below:

Compaction Day of CTB Placement After 5 - 7 Days After 7 Days

90% - 95% Paving Not Permitted

Paving Not

Permitted

Paving

Permitted

95% or

Greater

Upon Approval of the

Engineer

Paving Permitted

Paving

Permitted

301-3.3.14 Payment. To paragraph (3), sentence (1), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with

the following:

Cement-treated base shall be paid for by the ton, complete in place as shown on the

Plans, or as directed by the Engineer and shall be paid for under the Bid item for

“Cement Treated Base”.

301-5.2.2 Water. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Water shall conform to 201-1.2.3, “Water” except water shall not contain more

than 2,000 ppm (mg/L) of chlorides calculated as Cl, nor more than 1,500 ppm

(mg/L) of sulfates calculated as SO4. All water used shall be fresh and potable.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 253

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 302 · ROADWAY SURFACING

302-2.5 Temporary Traffic Control. To sentence (1), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with the following:

In addition to the requirements of SECTION 601 - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR

CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES, temporary traffic control shall

also conform to the below requirements.

302-2.5 Temporary Traffic Control. To subsections “d”, “e”, and “f”, REVISE as follows:

OLD TITLE REVISED TITLE

C6 W8-7

W6 G20-5aP with R2-1

302-4.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Due to construction conflicts or community needs that may arise, the City

reserves the right to add, delete, or substitute similar road segments to those

listed in the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to select exact

locations to be substituted. If substantial changes to the Contract Bid

quantities occur, this may allow individual Bid prices to be renegotiated in

accordance with 2-7, “CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY”.

302-4.2 Mix Design. ADD the following:

1. The completed slurry shall have a minimum skid resistance of 40 when tested

per the State of California Department of Transportation California Test 342.

2. If the source of any aggregate or emulsified asphalt is changed, or the mi

design or supporting laboratory reports are over one year old, a new mix

design shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with 3-8.4,

“Supporting Information”.

302-4.3.2.4 ADD the following:

302-4.3.2.4 Latex.

1. The addition and exact percentage of latex to be added shall be as specified

in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans. Latex for cationic emulsified

asphalt shall conform to 203-10.2.2., “Latex” except contain 65±5 percent

rubber solids.

302-4.3.1 General. ADD the following:

1. All metering devices shall be calibrated and certified within the past 12 months.

Calibration certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to

commencing work.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 254

THE “WHITEBOOK”

302-4.6 Aggregate Stockpile. ADD the following

1. Aggregate may be stockpiled on public property sites if approved by the

Engineer.

2. You shall make all arrangements for and shall assume full responsibility of the

rental, preparation, and maintenance of private property at your discretion

and shall obtain the appropriate permits for its usage.

3. You shall clean public and/or private property in a manner satisfactory to the

City and the property owner. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that stockpiles

do not become contaminated with oversized rock, clay, silt, or excessive amounts

of moisture. Segregation of the aggregate shall not be permitted. Aggregate

samples shall be taken from field stockpile locations prior to any addition of

mineral fillers such as cement or lime to determine the sand equivalent value

in accordance with 203-5.4.2, “Materials”. The addition of mineral fillers such as

cement, lime, or sulphates may be added during the application of the slurry

mixture to the City streets.

4. You shall provide suitable storage facilities for the asphalt emulsion. Suitable

heat shall be provided as necessary.

5. Immediately prior to slurry sealing operations, all utilities covers and

monuments shall be covered by heavy plastic material or other means

approved by the Engineer. Covers and voids around frames shall be cleaned of

slurry material by the end of the same Workday. If the utility covers are not

cleaned by the following Day, no additional slurry seal shall be placed until the

covers are cleaned.

6. Prior to the application of slurry to any road segment, you shall complete all

necessary preparatory repair Work in accordance with 301-1.6, “PREPARATORY

REPAIR WORK”.

7. No preparatory asphalt Work shall be done when the atmospheric

temperature is below 50° F (10° C) or during inclement weather (rain or heavy

fog).

8. Decorative and tile walkway crossings shall be protected from slurry seal

operations.

9. Care shall be exercised to ensure the maximum rate of application with no

excess emulsion and leaving no unsightly appearance. You shall be

responsible for the removal of all excess emulsion spread beyond street limits,

on driveways, on sidewalks, and etc.

10. No less than 5 Working Days or more than 30 Working Days following the

placement of slurry seal, the street shall be re-swept to remove the gravel

rebound from vehicular traffic.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 255

THE “WHITEBOOK”

302-4.7 Scheduling, Public Convenience and Traffic Control. Paragraphs (1) and (2), DELETE

in their entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. In addition to the requirements of Part 6, you shall comply with the following:

a) At least 5 Working Days prior to commencing the Work, you shall

submit your proposed Schedule to the Engineer for approval.

b) Based upon the approved schedule, you shall notify residents and

businesses of the Work and post temporary “No Parking" signs 72

hours in advance.

c) Requests for changes in the approved Schedule shall be submitted to

the Engineer for approval at least 3 Working Days before the street is

scheduled to be sealed.

ADD:

302-4.8.1 Slurry Consistency (Slurry Slump Test).

1. Consistency of the mixed slurry shall be measured using a machined-surface

brass cone (per ISSA test 106/ASTM C-128).

2. The cone shall be a hollow 0.03-inch (0.8 mm) minimum metal frustrum, 3

inches (76.2 mm) high, with 1.6 inches (40.6 mm) top inside diameter, and 3.6

inches (91.4 mm) inside base diameter. The flow scale shall consist of 7

concentric circles in 0.4 inch (10.2 mm) increasing radii from the circle formed

by the outside larger end of the slump cone. The material on which the 7

concentric rings appear shall be 8½ inch by 11-inch (215.9 mm x 279.4 mm)

Xerox paper, "Simpson # 7 ID 13351 10 M" or approved equal.

3. The test shall consist of sampling the mixed slurry then immediately pouring

the sample into the top of the cone. Strike the slurry off even with the top of

the cone and then raise the cone immediately. The flow shall be measured at 4

points 194° F (90° C) apart and then averaged. The average shall be between

0.8 inch and 1.2 inches (20.3 mm and 30.5 mm). If the slurry mix is not within

these specifications, the water content of the slurry shall immediately be corrected

to meet these specifications.

302-4.11.1.1 General. ADD the following:

1. If the results of the aggregate grading, the sand equivalent, or both do not

meet the requirements specified, the slurry represented by such tests shall be

removed and shall be reapplied with an acceptable batch.

302-4.11.1.2 Reduction in Payment Based on WTAT. To Table 302-4.11.1.2 (A), table note 1,

DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Slurry seal surfacing with WTAT loss greater than 99.1 gm/ft

(1070.1 gm/m

)

shall be removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

To Table 302-4.11.1.2 (B), table note 1, DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 256

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1. Slurry seal surfacing with WTAT loss greater than 99.1 gm/ft

(1070.1 gm/m

)

shall be removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

ADD:

302-4.12 Rubber Polymer Modified Slurry (RPMS).

302-4.12.1 Mixing.

1. Proportioning equipment of equal capacity to that described herein will be

considered by the City prior to time of Award.

2. The slurry surfacing shall be mixed in a continuous, twin shaft, multi-paddle

pugmill mixer. The pugmill shall be equipped with a hydraulically controlled steel

pugmill gate for positive discharge operations. No dripping of slurry shall be

allowed.

3. Each slurry surfacing unit shall be equipped with independent storage

capabilities for the aggregate, emulsion, crumb rubber, polymer, set-control

additives, and the carbon black.

4. Each slurry surfacing unit shall be equipped with a unit designed to store and

deliver the various required materials to a twin-shafted, multi-paddle pugmill with

a computer-controlled automatic sequencing system that initiates each material

delivery at the precise moment necessary to ensure proper proportioning.

5. Aggregates, asphaltic emulsion, water, polymers, additives, including set-

control agent, if used, and crumb rubber shall be proportioned by volume

utilizing the mix design approved by the Engineer. If more than one kind of

aggregate is used, the correct amount of each kind of aggregate to produce

the required grading shall be proportioned separately, prior to the other

materials of the mixture, in a manner that will result in a uniform and

homogenous blend.

6. Asphaltic emulsion shall be added at a rate within the ranges identified in

Table 302-4.12.1.1 of percent by weight of the dry aggregate. The exact weight

shall be determined by the mix design and the asphalt solids content of the

asphaltic emulsion furnished.

TABLE 302-4.12.1.1

Type of Aggregate Range

Type I 17% - 20%

Type II 14% - 17%

Type III 11% - 14%

7. The aggregate shall be proportioned by a belt feeder operated with an

adjustable cutoff gate. The height of the gate opening shall be readily

determinable. The emulsion shall be introduced into the mixer by a positive

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 257

THE “WHITEBOOK”

displacement pump. Water shall be introduced into the mixer through an

adjustable multi-spray pugmill bar. Water volume shall be displayed by an

electric digital meter registering in gallons delivered.

8. The aggregate belt feeder shall deliver aggregate to the pugmill mixed with

such volumetric consistency that the deviation for any individual aggregate

delivery rate check-run shall be within 2% of the mathematical average of 3

runs of at least 300 gallons (1135.6 L) each in duration.

9. The bitumen ratio (pounds of asphalt per 100 pounds (45.4 kg) of dry aggregates)

shall not vary more than 1.5 pound (0.7 kg) of asphalt above or 0.6 pound (0.3 kg)

asphalt below the amount designated by the mix design and approved by the

Engineer.

10. The polymer additive and the carbon black shall be delivered to the mixer in

the relative proportions required by means of a common shaft dual pump

system. The polymer additive and the carbon black flow rates shall be

independently adjustable by means of diaphragm valves and shall be

sequenced through the computer controlled auto-sequencing system. The

polymer additive and the carbon black shall be blended and mixed prior to

their introduction into the pugmill. Introduction into the twin-shafted pugmill

shall be done through an injection system which delivers the blended material

to the apex of each mixing shaft immediately prior to the introduction of the

asphalt emulsion. The polymer additive and the carbon black delivery system

shall each be equipped with digital electronic flow metering devices that can

read in gallons per minute.

11. The crumb rubber delivery system shall be equipped with an air suspension unit

designed to prevent clumping or bridging of the rubber material. The air discharges

shall be sequenced to avoid over-suspension of the rubber. The rubber shall be

delivered to the pugmill by a hydraulically driven auger and shall be initiated

through the computer controlled auto-sequencing system.

12. The emulsion shall be introduced into the mixer by a positive displacement

pump. The emulsion storage shall be equipped with a device which will

automatically shut down the power to the emulsion pump and aggregate belt

feeder when the level of stored emulsion is lowered to within 2 inches (50.8

mm) of the suction line.

13. A temperature-indicating device shall be installed in the emulsion storage tank

at the pump suction level.

14. The aggregate shall be proportioned using a belt feeder operated with an

adjustable cutoff gate. The height of the gate opening shall be readily

determinable.

15. The aggregate feeder shall be directly connected to the drive on the emulsion

pump. The drive shaft of the aggregate feeder shall be equipped with an

electronic digital belt. The belt delivering the aggregate to the pugmill shall be

equipped with a device to monitor the depth of the aggregate being delivered to

the pugmill. The device for monitoring the depth of aggregate shall automatically

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 258

THE “WHITEBOOK”

shut down the power to the aggregate belt feeder whenever the depth of

aggregate is less than 70% of the target depth of flow. An additional device shall

monitor movement of the aggregate belt by detecting revolutions of the belt

feeder. The devices for monitoring no flow or belt movement shall automatically

shut down the power to the aggregate belt when the aggregate belt movement is

interrupted. To avoid shutdown caused by normal fluctuations in delivery rates, a

delay of 3 seconds between sensing less than desirable storage levels of

aggregate or emulsion shall be permitted.

16. Water delivery shall be adjusted through a diaphragm valve. Water flow rate

shall be electronically displayed through a digital meter.

17. Set control additive flow rate shall be electronically displayed through a digital

meter.

18. The mixer unit shall not be operated unless all electronic display and

revolution counters are in good working condition and functioning and all

metal guards are in place. All indicators required by these specifications shall

be operational at all times.

19. You shall have 2 fully operational mixers and 1 standby mixer for use at the

Project Site at all times for each working crew.

302-4.12.2 Application.

1. General.

a) The Work shall consist of mixing asphaltic emulsions, aggregates, set-

control additives, specially produced and graded crumb rubbers, and

watering and spreading the mixture on the pavement where shown

marked out in the field, as specified in these special provisions, and as

directed by the Engineer. Type II RPMS shall be applied to all streets unless

otherwise specified in the proposed Work Appendix of the Contract or as

directed by the Engineer.

b) RPMS application rates shall be as follows:

TYPE APPLICATION RATE

lb/yd

(lb/sq.m)

I 9 (10.76)

II 13.33 (15.92)

III 15 – 22 (17.97 - 26.25)

1. Based on dry aggregate weight.

c) RPMS shall only be placed when ambient temperature is 50° F or

higher.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 259

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Sequential Slurry Treatment.

a) When slurry treatment is required by the Contract Documents, notify

the Engineer at least 10 Working Days prior to the first application of

slurry. The Engineer, upon assessment of street condition and

classification, will verify the slurry type to be applied.

b) Application of sequential layers of slurry shall not commence until

approved by the Engineer and until the following have been

completed:

i. Mix design and wet track abrasion testing for the first-step

slurry application has been approved by the Engineer. Unless

otherwise directed by the Engineer, this testing may require 4

Working Days from field sampling to reporting of test results

to the Engineer.

ii. Corrective actions have been executed in accordance with 302-

4.11.1.2, “Reduction in Payment Based on WTAT” such as

reductions in payment, non-payment, or removal of material

not meeting specifications, as directed by the Engineer.

3. Spreading.

a) Pre-wetting of streets shall not be required unless streets are subject

to high temperatures and/or dust.

b) The complete mixture, after the addition of water and any set-control

agent used, shall be such that the mixture:

i. Has proper workability.

ii. Shall permit a traffic flow without the occurrence of bleeding

separation or other distress at 78° F (25.6° C) and without pilot-

car-assisted traffic on the slurry seal within one hour after

placement.

iii. Shall prevent the development of bleeding, excessive raveling,

separation, and/or other distress within 7 Calendar Days after

placing the rubberized asphalt surfacing.

c) The slurry mixture shall be spread by means of a controlled spreader box.

The spreader box shall be capable of spreading the slurry to the width of

the traffic lane and shall have strips of flexible rubber belting or similar

material on each side of the spreader that shall be in contact with the

pavement to positively prevent loss of slurry from the ends of the box.

Spreader boxes shall be equipped with reversible motor-driven augers

when placing slurry. Rear flexible strike-off blades (rubbers) shall make

close contact with the pavement and shall be adjustable to the various

crown shapes so as to apply a uniform surfacing coat. Flexible drags to be

attached to the rear of the spreader box shall be provided as directed by

the Engineer. Drags and rubbers shall be cleaned daily if problems with

cleanliness and longitudinal scouring occur. The spreader box shall be

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 260

THE “WHITEBOOK”

clean and shall be free of all slurry and emulsion at the start of each Work

shift.

302-4.12.3 Rolling.

1. Pneumatic rolling shall be required on all streets.

2. Rolling shall commence as soon as the RPMS has set sufficiently to prevent

any material from adhering to the tires.

3. The RPMS surface shall be rolled 2 to 5 times or as directed by the Engineer.

4. Pneumatic rollers shall be operated at a minimum tire pressure of 60 psi

(413.7 kPa).

302-4.12.4 Measurement and Payment.

1. RPMS shall be paid based on the square footage of RPMS applied. The

measurement of RPMS applied shall be calculated by dividing the weight

obtained from Certified Weighmaster Certificates by the spread rate for the

type specified. You shall present Weighmaster Certificates for the amount of

unused material remaining at the completion of the Work at no cost to the

City. The payment shall be determined by deducting the amount of the unused

material from the total amount of material delivered.

2. The payment for RPMS shall be the total square footage used on the project

calculated using the method described and shall be paid under the following Bid

items:

BID DESCRIPTION UNIT

Rubber Polymer Modified Slurry (RPMS) Type I SF

Rubber Polymer Modified Slurry (RPMS) Type II SF

Rubber Polymer Modified Slurry (RPMS) Type III SF

Rubber Polymer Modified Slurry (RPMS) Type I (Bike Lane) SF

3. The Bid items for RPMS shall include full compensation for the specified surface

preparation not included in other Bid items and shall include the Work necessary to

construct the RPMS as specified on the Plans. Sweeping, removals, and furnishing

the aggregate required for the mix design shall also be included in this Bid item.

302-5.2 Not Used. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

302-5.2 Pavement Restoration Adjacent to Trench.

1. The Work for pavement restoration adjacent to trench shall include the following:

a) The replacement of existing pavement adjacent to the proposed trench.

b) The replacement of existing pavement outside the trench limits that

was previously broken or displaced.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 261

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Prior to the commencement of the Work, you shall meet with the Engineer and

determine the limits of the pavement to be replaced. If you do not meet with the

Engineer before removing the pavement, all replacement outside the limits of the

proposed trench resurfacing shall be at your expense.

3. Existing pavement shall be removed in accordance with SECTION 401 - REMOVAL.

Prior to pavement restoration, existing subgrade shall be prepared in accordance

with 301-1, “SUBGRADE PREPARATION”.

302-5.2.1 Measurement and Payment.

1. The payment for pavement restoration adjacent to trench shall be made on a

square foot basis as shown in the Bid in accordance with 302-6.8,

“Measurement and Payment”. Unless separate Bid items have been provided,

the following shall be included in the payment for “Pavement Restoration

Adjacent to Trench”:

a) Saw-cutting existing edges.

b) Removal and disposal of existing pavement.

c) Subgrade repair and preparation including imported backfill material.

Imported subgrade material shall be included in the Bid item for

“Subgrade Imported Backfill”.

d) Form Work.

e) Placement, curing, and protection of new pavement.

302-5.4 Tack Coat. ADD the following:

1. A ‘cold pavement joint’ shall be defined as asphalt concrete pavement which

has cooled below the lower limits of the spreading temperature prescribed in

302-5.5, “Distribution and Spreading”.

2. The tack coat shall be applied the same day of placement of asphalt concrete.

302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading. ADD the following:

1. Resurfacing shall be continuous throughout all intersections between the limits of

the Work segment, unless otherwise shown on the Plans or directed by the

Engineer.

2. If the street intersection has no parallel concrete cross gutters, resurfacing shall

extend to the prolongation of curb or property line as directed by the Engineer.

Where asphalt cross gutters are to be surfaced, furnish and have available a

straight-edge and level the asphalt cross gutters. The drainage flow of the cross

gutter shall be maintained under the direction of the Engineer.

3. Asphalt concrete shall be hand-raked to remove coarse aggregate and feathered

to allow the fine materials to cover the existing street surface adjacent to concrete

gutters and concrete cross gutters. Streets that have had previous overlays shall

be cold planed.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 262

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. If the street intersection has parallel cross gutters, resurfacing shall extend only

to the near edge of the concrete where it shall be feathered.

5. If the street has intersecting concrete cross gutters, the street shall not be

resurfaced. Asphalt shall be feathered at both edges of the concrete.

6. In all cases, extreme care shall be taken to prevent blocking drainage.

7. You shall unplug roof drains plugged by paving operations and shall rake asphalt

into or away from existing driveways to provide smooth access and proper

drainage to the gutter of the resurfaced street.

8. Asphalt alley aprons abutting streets to be resurfaced shall be resurfaced to the

property line.

9. Do not tack coat more surface than can be overlaid on the same day, for areas

that were not overlaid that day an additional tack coat must be applied the day of

the placement of asphalt

10. On streets with grades higher than 5%, the asphalt concrete laydown shall be

placed uphill or as determined by the Engineer.

11. City owned manholes, valve caps, vaults, or monuments within the resurfacing

area shall be exposed for identification.

12. You shall apply systemic herbicide to vegetation growing in pavement cracks in

advance of resurfacing operations. Existing vegetation and growth in pavement

cracks shall not be present at the time of resurfacing.

13. You shall treat any new weed growth with water-soluble contact herbicides and

remove all vegetation matter from the area to be resurfaced a minimum of 24

hours before applying the tack coat or as directed by the Engineer.

14. A paving ski shall be required on all streets except for residential streets.

15. Where the pavement slopes towards a concrete gutter, asphalt concrete shall be

placed such that the pavement surface is ¼ inch ± 1/8 inch (6.4 mm ± 3.2 mm)

above the lip of gutter elevation. Where the pavement slopes away from a

concrete gutter, asphaltic concrete shall be placed such that the pavement

surface is flush with the lip of gutter elevation unless otherwise directed by the

Engineer.

16. The resurfacing shall be done as specified in the resurfacing schedule included in

the Contract Documents, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

17. No Resurfacing work shall be performed during unsuitable weather. Unsuitable

whether includes rain and heavy fog.

302-5.6.2 Density and Smoothness. ADD the following:

1. When a 10 foot (3 m) straight edge is laid on the finished surface transverse to the

centerline of the roadway, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the

straightedge for more than ¼ inch (6.4 mm) except at intersections or at changes of

grade.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 263

THE “WHITEBOOK”

302-5.7 Joints. ADD the following:

1. Joints between longitudinal (parallel) passes shall be tack coated if the

temperature of the preceding pass has cooled below 180° F (82.2° C).

2. The pinched joint method of rolling shall be used for rolling all asphalt

concrete joints. The roller shall be employed in a longitudinal direction on the

first pass of the breakdown roll with the roller entirely on fresh asphalt and 4

inches (101.6 mm) to 6 inches (152.4 mm) from the existing asphalt or

concrete.

3. The second pass shall be made with the roller centered longitudinally on the

4 inches to 6 inches (101.6 mm to 152.4 mm) wide strip. With the approval of

the Engineer, the 4 inches to 6 inches (101.6 mm to 152.4 mm) wide strip may

be compacted on the return trip of the first pass of the roller.

302-5.8 Not Used. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

302-5.8 Manholes and Other Structures.

1. Manhole and other structures shall conform to SECTION 403 – MANHOLE,

SURVEY MONUMENT, AND GATE VALVE FRAMES AND COVERS ADJUSTMENT

AND RECONSTRUCTION.

302-5.9 Measurement and Payment. ADD the following:

1. Small quantities of asphalt concrete placed on pavement reinforcing fabric to

prevent the fabric from being displaced by construction equipment or to allow

traffic to cross over the fabric shall be considered as part of the layer of asphalt

concrete to be placed over the fabric and shall be measured and paid for by

the ton under the Bid item for “Asphalt Concrete”.

ADD:

302-5.10 Sand and Seal Coat.

1. Asphalt concrete surfaces shall not be sand, and seal coated unless

otherwise specified. The sand and seal coat shall consist of a coat of asphaltic

emulsion and a cover coat of sand. The asphaltic emulsion shall be mixing type

conforming to 203-3, “EMULSIFIED ASPHALT”. Sand shall be clean and dry.

2. Immediately before applying asphaltic emulsion, the surface to be sand and

seal coated shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt and loose material. Asphaltic

emulsion shall not be applied when the street is overly wet or when the

atmospheric temperature is below 50° F (10° C).

3. The asphaltic emulsion shall be applied by use of a power-spraying device that

uniformly applies the emulsion to the surfacing at a rate of 0.1 gallon per

square yard to 0.15 gallon per square yard (0.5 L/m² to 0.7 L/m²). The

distributor spray bar shall be equipped with asphaltic emulsion type spray jets.

Curbs, gutters, and other adjoining improvements shall be carefully protected

from the emulsion. Any such improvements spattered or touched with

emulsion shall be carefully cleaned.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 264

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. Immediately after the application of asphaltic emulsion, a cover coat of sand

shall be spread at the rate of 6 lbs/yd2 to 12 lbs/yd2 (3.2 kg/m2 to 6.4 kg/m2).

After the sand has been spread, any piles, ridges, or uneven distributions shall

be broomed to maintain an even layer over the surface.

5. 24 hours after the seal coat has been applied, the surface shall again be

broomed and any excess sand shall be picked up and removed from the Site.

302-5.10.1 Measurement and Payment.

1. Payment for sand and seal coat for asphalt concrete shall be included in the

payment for the asphalt concrete Work unless a Bid item has been provided.

When a Bid item is provided for “Sand and Seal Coat”, the unit of measurement

shall be per square foot.

302-6.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Existing PCC pavement that is broken, displaced, and is outside the trench

limits as shown on the Plans shall be replaced by you in accordance with this

subsection or as designated by the Engineer. After the necessary traffic control

is in place and before any saw cutting or equipment mobilizations, you shall

meet with the Engineer and determine the limits of the existing pavement to

be replaced. If you do not meet with the Engineer before removing the

displaced concrete, all replacements shall be at your expense.

2. The edges of existing pavement for concrete replacement shall be saw cut to

neat trimmed lines.

3. The thickness of the new concrete pavement shall be in accordance with SDG-

108, “Trench Resurfacing for PCC Surfaced Streets”.

4. Prior to placing concrete, existing subgrade shall be prepared in accordance

with 301-1, “SUBGRADE PREPARATION”.

5. If any existing unsuitable subgrade, as determined by the Engineer, is encountered,

it shall be replaced in accordance with 300-2.2, “Unsuitable Material”.

302-7.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Paving fabric material shall have a proven record that it can be recycled and

milled. Submit written documentation from you and/or the recycling facilities

within the jurisdiction of Work.

302-7.2.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Pavement fabric shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations while

the asphalt tack is still liquid. Surface cracks over ¼ inch (6.4 mm) shall be filled

and brought to the level of the existing pavement surface. At the direction of

the Engineer, irregular surface conditions shall be leveled by the use of a

bituminous wedge or scratch course installed by hand or with the use of a

mechanically powered asphalt-paving machine.

2. Pavement fabric shall be installed on the surface using mechanically powered

installation equipment or per the manufacturer’s recommendation.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 265

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Mechanical equipment shall be capable of installing full width rolls of up to

12.5 feet (3.8 m) in width. Installation by hand may also be used in situations

where areas require specially cut sections, where mechanically installed

methods cannot be accomplished, or both. Brooms or squeegees shall be

used to remove any air bubbles and to ensure that the paving fabric is

completely in contact with the tack-coated surface. If wrinkles occur, any

wrinkle greater than 1 inch (25.4 mm) shall be slit and lapped in the direction

of paving and seated into the tack coat to ensure adhesion.

3. Pavement fabric shall be overlapped to provide a minimum of 2 inches

(50.8 mm) overlap longitudinally and a minimum of 4 inches (101.6 mm)

transversely. Overlaps on the transverse roll ends shall be in the direction of the

paving operation to avoid paving fabric pick-up during asphalt installation. All

overlapping of the pavement fabric shall be tack-coated to ensure proper

adhesion.

4. The surface on which the pavement fabric is to be placed shall receive a

minimum ½ inch (12.7 mm) leveling course.

5. All areas which the pavement fabric has been placed shall be paved during the

same day, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.

302-7.2.2.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Tack coat material and application rate shall be per the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Tack coat shall be applied uniformly prior to placing

pavement fabric on the same day. The application rate may be adjusted as

directed by the Engineer. Hand spraying shall be kept to a minimum.

2. Blotting the sealant, spreading sand, or broadcasting bituminous asphalt mix

over the pavement fabric shall be utilized to minimize and prevent

construction and/or paving tires/tracks from adhering to the tack coat and

pulling up the pavement fabric. If the pavement fabric has been displaced

from the surface, additional rolling and/or hand-brushing shall be required to

restore the bond between the surface and pavement fabric. An additional

application of tack may be required to ensure adhesion. Additional tack coat

or labor shall not be paid for as Extra Work and shall be considered incidental

to the installation of the pavement fabric.

3. The width of the sprayer application shall be no more than 6 inches (152.4 mm)

and no less than 2 inches (50.8 mm) wider than the fabric width.

4. The temperature of the tack coat shall not exceed 325° F (162.8° C) when the

fabric is placed.

302-7.4 Payment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The payment for pavement fabric shall be made at the Contract Unit Price

per square yard for the actual area covered and no additional payment shall

be made for overlapped areas. The Bid item for “Pavement Fabric” shall

include the cleaning of the existing pavement, tack coat, calibration of the

truck mounted spray unit, and the furnishing and placing of the Non-woven

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 266

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Fiberglass/Polyester Interlayer Paving Mat. Payment shall not be made for

additional fabric for overlapped areas.

2. The payment for the spreading of asphalt concrete over the pavement fabric

shall be included in the Bid item for the asphalt concrete Work.

3. The payment for the AC asphalt leveling course shall be included in the Bid

item for “Asphalt Concrete ½ Inch Leveling Course”. If no Bid item is provided,

the payment shall be included in the Contract Price.

302-10.2 Screenings. To the sentence (1), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

Following the application of asphalt rubber, screenings conforming to 203-12.3, “Pre-

Coated, Pre-Heated Screenings” shall be placed over all areas receiving asphalt rubber.

302-13.2 Distribution and Spreading. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Distribution and spreading shall conform to 302-5.5, “Distribution and

Spreading” with the following exceptions:

a) Distribution and spreading shall be placed in 2 courses (lifts) with

course depths not exceeding 2 inches (50.8 mm) to ensure proper

compaction

b) Each successive course shall be laid upon previously laid courses as

soon as the previous course has cooled sufficiently to show no

displacement under equipment or loaded material delivery trucks and

preclude the necessity of tack coat between courses.

302-14.8 Payment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Payment for PMAC will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne)

or at the Contract Unit Price per square foot (m

). No separate payment will

be made for tack coat or sweeping.

2. Failure of the Contractor to provide a licensed weighmaster certificate to the

Engineer by the end of the day on which the PMAC represented by such

certificate was delivered to the Work site may, at the discretion of the

Engineer, result in forfeiture of payment.

ADD:

302-15 CRACK SEAL WORK.

302-15.1 General.

1. All cracks in asphalt 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) or wider shall be sealed prior to the

application of slurry. You shall seal only transverse, longitudinal, block, or

reflective cracks. You shall not seal alligator (fatigue) cracked areas or cracks in

PCC.

302-15.2 Materials.

1. Crack sealant material used shall be Road Works 306, CRAFCO Polyflex Type 3,

or an approved equal. Sealant shall be prepared and applied to the pavement

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 267

THE “WHITEBOOK”

cracks in conformance with all manufacturers’ instructions except where

noted otherwise in these specifications.

302-15.3 Equipment.

1. Cracks shall be cleaned using a hot compressed air lance (HCL) apparatus. Air

exiting the HCL shall be heated to a temperature sufficient to remove the

oxidized surface from the crack walls.

2. The HCL shall meet the following specifications:

Compressed Air

Capacity

75 psi to 150 psi (40 cfm to 100 cfm)

Heated Air

Temperatures

600° F to 2,200° F (315.6° C to 1204.4° C)

Exit Heated Air 1,000 ft/second

Propane 5 psi to 20 psi

3. Prior to beginning Work, submit documentation to the Engineer certifying that

each HCL apparatus to be used on the project meets the above specifications.

If a delay in the start of Work exceeds 7 Working Days, re-certification is

required, and documentation shall be resubmitted.

302-15.4 Application.

1. Cracks to be sealed shall be completely clean, dry, and free of all loose

material, weeds, vegetation, and any other foreign substances which may

cause the sealant to not adhere to the crack wall. You shall clean and dry all

cracks with the HCL immediately before sealing.

2. Sealant shall be applied from the bottom of the crack up to the surface in

anner which does not result in sealant bridging or pockets of entrapped air

forming. The sealant shall be applied to a slightly overfilled condition and the

leveled with a squeegee. The width of sealant remaining on the surface shall

not exceed 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) on either side of the crack. Any debris blown

onto adjacent gutters, sidewalks, parkways, medians, intersections, or other

areas shall be removed prior to the end of the Working Day.

302-15.5 Payment.

1. The payment for crack sealing shall be included in the Contract Price unless a

Bid item in pounds has been provided for “Crack Seal”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 268

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 303 - CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

303-1.3 Forms. To paragraph (11), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

Exterior forms are required for structures unless otherwise specified on the Plans or

in the Specifications.

303-1.8.4 Consolidating. ADD the following:

1. As determined by the Engineer, when rock pockets are detrimental to the steel

reinforcement, the Engineer may allow you to repair in accordance with 303-

1.9.2, “Ordinary Surface Finish”.

303-5.1.1 General. To paragraph (2), sentence (1), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with

the following:

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, and except as otherwise specified in 303-5.1.3,

“Driveway Entrances” the minimum thickness of walks shall be 4 inches (101.6 mm).

ADD the following:

1. In areas where field adjustments to the curb and gutters may be required due

to the existing conditions to maintain positive drainage, you shall contact the

Engineer prior to the construction.

2. You shall exercise due caution when working around trees not to damage

either the trunk or any of its limbs. If damage to a tree occurs, you shall notify

the Engineer. Once excavation has occurred, all efforts shall be made to

mitigate the exposure of the tree roots to the air.

3. You shall complete the Work within 5 Working Days after demolition.

4. You shall restore the asphalt along the gutter line only between 7 Days to 14

Days after the placement of the curb and gutter.

5. Unless specified otherwise, the depressed curb and gutter shall be replaced

monolithically with the driveway when the driveway is to be removed and

replaced.

6. If curbs, gutters, or sidewalks are replaced, you shall duplicate the existing

surrounding score pattern and color. The score pattern and color shall be

approved in advance by the Engineer.

7. For the purposes of this section, the terms “walk” and “access ramp” shall be

synonymous with “sidewalk” and “curb ramp and pedestrian ramp”,

respectively.

ADD:

303-5.1.4 Historical and Contractor Stamps and Impressions.

1. You shall remove and relocate the existing historical and contractor date

stamps, impressions, and street name stamps outside the pedestrian travel

way to the parkway area or face of sidewalk. The stamp’s position shall be such

that it can be read from the street and as close as practical to the stamp’s

original location.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 269

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. If it is determined that the date stamps or impressions cannot be relocated or

hey are damaged and the Plans designate the stamps or impressions to b

emoved, you shall saw cut them to full depth at a minimum distance 2 inches

(50.8 mm) away from the edge of the stamp. Carefully remove, bag, label, and set

the date stamps or impressions aside on Site in a location designated by the

Engineer for pickup by others. You shall stamp the current Contractor’s name and

date in concrete.

303-5.3 Placing Concrete. ADD the following:

1. The top and face of the finished concrete surfaces shall be true and straight, of

uniform width, and free of humps, sags, or other irregularities. The finished

concrete surface shall not vary more than 0.02 feet (6.1 mm) from 10 feet (3 m)

straight edge, except at grade changes or curves. No freestanding water will be

permitted on slopes over 1%. No freestanding water deeper than 1/16 inch (1.

mm) shall be permitted on slopes of less than 1%.

2. Concrete placed immediately before rain shall be protected to prevent contact

with rainwater. Protective covering shall be kept on hand at all times for this

purpose.

303-5.5.3 Walk. ADD the following:

1. If the continuous sidewalk length equals a block or more, your name and the

year in which the improvements is constructed shall be stamped therein to a

depth of ¼ inch (6.4 mm) in letters not less than ¾ inch (19.1 mm) high, at a

location determined by the Engineer.

2. You shall coordinate the root pruning activities in accordance with 801-6,

“MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT”.

303-5.5.5 Alley Intersections, Access Ramps, and Driveways. REVISE “wood float” to “steel

trowel followed with a medium coarse broom”.

303-5.6 Curing. To paragraph (3), sentence (2), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

The placement of bituminous pavement or cement treated base adjacent to concrete

curb, gutter, or alley intersections shall not be permitted until the 7th Calendar Day

following the placement of concrete nor shall concrete paving operations be

permitted until 7th Calendar Day where placing or finishing equipment will ride on the

previously placed concrete.

303-5.9 Measurement and Payment. ADD the following:

1. The payment for the preservation of date stamps and impressions shall be

included in the Bid item for “Historical and Contractor Date Stamps and

Impressions”.

2. The payment for removing tree roots, cutting, excavation, disposal, import and

backfilling to grade, and pavement construction shall be included in the items

of Work for which the subgrade is prepared.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 270

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. At locations where the width of the walk is being reduced, the payment for

removing the existing walk shall be included in the Bid item for “Remove and

Replace Existing Sidewalk”.

4. Additional curb and gutter removal, disposal, and replacement adjacent to the

Work on a proposed curb ramp shall be required as directed by the Engineer.

The payment for the additional removal, disposal, and replacement of the curb

and gutter shall be included in the Bid item for “Additional Curb and Gutter

Removal and Replacement”.

5. The payment for the additional removal, disposal, and replacement of

sidewalk shall be included in the Bid item for “Additional Sidewalk Removal

and Replacement”.

6. The measurement shall be made of actual areas and depths authorized by the

Engineer and shall be calculated as cubic yards in place. Excavation, grading,

and backfilling shall be included in the Bid items for the Work of sidewalks,

curb ramps, or curb and gutters.

ADD:

303-5.10 Curb Ramp Construction.

303-5.10.1 Installation.

1. Prior to Bid, you shall evaluate the Site to determine existing conditions and

actual limits of Work to ensure if the installation of compliant curb ramps is

possible. You shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of the layout of the curb

ramp prior to demolition of the existing sidewalk/curb ramp.

2. To allow for proper drainage, the slope of the landing to the street shall not be

less than 1.0% and the drainage pattern of the gutter shall not be altered in a

manner that creates ponding at the approach. The slope of the ramp shall not

exceed 1 unit vertical to 12 units horizontal or 8.33%. The slope of the sides

and flares shall not exceed 1 unit vertical to 10 units horizontal or 10.0%.

3. The Detectable Warning Tile (DWT) shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s specifications by installer certified in writing by the Supplier.

4. The DWT shall be oriented such that the rows of domes are parallel with the

direction of the ramp. When multiple tiles (regardless of size) are used, the domes

shall be aligned between the tiles and throughout the entire detectable surface

installation. The edge of the tile(s) nearest the street shall be between 6 inches

and 8 inches (152.4 mm and 203.2 mm) from the gutter flow line. You shall trim

and refinish the edges of the DWT in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Field trimming of stainless-steel DWT shall not be allowed.

5. The DWT shall be used as shown on the Plans. You shall not change the

material specified without the written approval of the Engineer.

6. You shall submit an approved TCP, including an accessible pedestrian access

plan, through the construction zone with approved signage. You shall not

replace more than 2 curb ramps in one intersection at the same time and shall

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 271

THE “WHITEBOOK”

only demolish those curb ramps that can be replaced within 2 consecutive

Working Days in the same week. You shall provide approved temporary

accessible curb ramps if necessary to provide access to the designated

alternate route areas.

7. Modified curb ramps shall be constructed as shown on the Plans.

303-5.10.2 Payment.

1. The payment for each curb ramp shall include transition areas, landings,

DWTs, demolition and disposal, forming, relocating or raising items in conflict

to grade, protecting and preserving existing survey monuments and

improvements, and restoring pavement.

2. Additional concrete sidewalk and curb quantities beyond 15 feet (4.6 m) shall be

included in the Bid items for “Additional Sidewalk” and “Additional Curb”.

3. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the payment for each

modified curb ramp shall include transition areas, landings, DWTs, demolition

and disposal, forming, relocating or raising items in conflict to grade,

protecting and preserving existing survey monuments and improvements,

and restoring pavement.

4. The payment for completely removing and replacing the existing concrete

spandrel of a cross gutter associated with curb ramp installations, in

accordance with SDG-131 - General Curb Ramp Notes, and as identified on the

Plans, shall be included in the payment for the curb ramp. No additional cost

all be incurred when separate Bid items for cross gutters has been provided.

5. The payment for completely removing and replacing the existing concrete

alley apron associated with curb ramp installations, in accordance with SDG-

131 - General Curb Ramp Notes, and as identified on the Plans, shall be

included in the payment for the Curb Ramp installation. No additional costs

shall be incurred when separate Bid items for alley aprons has been provided.

ADD:

303-6.1.1 Stamped Concrete Pavement.

1. Stamped concrete pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the

following conditions:

a) Prior to construction, a test section at least 5 feet by 5 feet (1.5 m by

1.5 m) shall have approval of the test section it will be designated as

the standard for that particular pattern on the subject Project.

b) When required by the Engineer, skid resistance shall have a minimum

acceptance value of 0.35 for either ASTM E-274 or California Test

Method No. 342.

c) Visual inspection of the Work shall be performed to determine that th

rface texture is as rough as the approved test section and the

surface flatness is as flat as the approved test section.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 272

THE “WHITEBOOK”

d) Concrete color and method of application shall conform to 303-7,

“COLORED CONCRETE”.

e) Coloring and curing compounds used in the Work shall be from the

same manufacturer and batch lot.

f) The thickness of the concrete paving shall be increased by ½ inch

(12.7 mm) over what is required on the Plans.

g) The pavement section shall be PCC, Class 560-C-3250, placed in

accordance with 302-6, “PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT”.

h) There shall be no cold joint between the structural PCC pavement

section and the stamped surface layer. The stamped surface layer shall

not be less than 4 inches (101.6 mm) thick.

i) The final finishing for textured, stamped, or colored concrete paving

shall be in accordance with 302-6.4.4, “Final Finishing” subject to the

following conditions:

i. Stamping shall be performed before the initial set of the

concrete. No water shall be added to the surface.

ii. A flat surface shall be maintained. Rounding shall not be allowed.

iii. Limited to a running bond pattern.

iv. ¼ inch (6.4 mm) wide maximum groove with ¼ inch (6.4 mm)

deep maximum imprint.

v. Portland cement concrete shall not be placed in air

temperatures exceeding 85º F (29.4º C).

vi. A heavy broom finish, perpendicular to the traveled way, shall

be used.

vii. Wax curing or wax sealing shall not be permitted.

303-6.1.2 Measurement and Payment.

1. The Work for stamped concrete pavement shall be included in the square foot

Bid item for “Stamped Concrete Pavement”.

2. Stamped Concrete Pavement that is colored in accordance with 303-7,

“COLORED CONCRETE” shall be included under the square foot Bid item for

“Stamped Colored Concrete”.

303-8.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Work shall be performed by a qualified installer meeting the following

requirements:

a) The installer shall have successfully completed pervious concrete

installation similar in design material and the extent indicated in the

Work.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 273

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Utilize a supervisor holding a current certificate from the National

Ready Mixed Concrete Association Pervious Concrete Installer

Certification program.

c) At least 1 in 3 installers shall hold a current certificate from the National

Ready Mixed Concrete Association Pervious Concrete Technician

Certification program.

2. Proof of installation qualifications shall be submitted prior to pervious concrete

installation.

3. A mandatory pre-placement conference shall take place and shall include, at a

minimum, you, the engineer, the pervious concrete contractor, the concrete

Supplier, and the field-testing agency. All materials and personnel qualifications

ncrete production, preparation, placing, curing, and testing procedures will

be reviewed to ensure specification compliance.

303-8.3 Subgrade. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The subgrade preparation shall follow the requirements of 301-1, “SUBGRADE

PREPARATION”. The subgrade shall not be treated or stabilized with Portland

cement or lime. If the pervious concrete is being installed directly on the

subgrade, the subgrade shall be moistened to prevent it from absorbing

moisture from the concrete.

303-8.5 Placement. To paragraph (2), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

Pervious concrete shall be uniformly deposited over the entire formed area. Strike off

and spreading shall be performed using a self-propelled or manual vibratory roller

screed or a laser screed. Hand-rodding may be used in areas inaccessible to the roller-

screed if so approved by the Engineer. Strike off shall be no greater than ¾ inch (19.1

mm) above the forms to allow for compaction. Compaction shall be performed using

a self-propelled roller screed or a minimum 10 inches (254 mm) steel roller that exerts

at least 10 psi (68.9 kPa) on the concrete surface. Adjacent to the edge of each form,

hand tampers shall be used for compaction.

To paragraph (4), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

After compaction, the surface shall be protected from rapid evaporation by water

fogging, covering with 6 mil (150 µm) polyethylene sheeting, or the application of a

chemical evaporation retardant approved by the Engineer.

303-8.7 Curing. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Curing shall consist of covering the surface and, as necessary, the application

of water. Curing shall begin within 20 minutes of placement or within 1

inutes when the wind is in excess of 5 miles per hour (8 kilometers per hour).

The surface shall be securely covered with polyethylene sheeting having a

minimum thickness of 6 mils (150 µm).

2. Sheeting shall be secured using lumber, rebar, stakes, or by other approved

methods by the Engineer. Sand or dirt shall not be used to secure the sheeting.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 274

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. The cover shall be checked daily to verify that it has not been displaced or

damaged, and that condensation is evident underneath the sheeting.

Damaged sheeting shall be repaired. Displaced sheeting shall be replaced.

When there is no observable condensation, 1.5 gallons of water per square

yard (5.7 L/m

) shall be applied to the surface. The cover shall remain

securely in place for a minimum of 7 Calendar Days.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 275

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 304 - METAL FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION

ADD:

304-6 PAYMENT.

1. The payment for signs shall include footing, post, sign, all required hardware,

and installation in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall be

included in the Contract Price unless a Bid item has been provided.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 276

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 306 - OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION

ADD:

306-1.1 High-line Phasing.

1. Build the Project in accordance with the water high-lining phasing shown on

the Plans and in phases.:

2. When installing pipelines within the City’s streets, for the following streets, the

total time allowed for the completion of Work shall not exceed 10 Working

Days per 500 feet of pipeline installation:

ADD:

306-1.2 Phased Paving.

1. You shall implement phased paving, when directed and approved by the

Engineer.

2. The Engineer will notify you when you can proceed with phased paving Work.

Each phase shall be completed within 90 Calendar Days after the Engineer’s

notification. Plan and schedule your Work accordingly to ensure each phase is

complete.

3. When Phased Paving is initiated, the following Work shall be completed within

the determined areas:

a) Installation of mains and appurtenances.

b) Operational checks and testing.

c) Mains are in service.

d) Trench restoration.

e) Road surface preparatory Work.

f) Installation of concrete sidewalks and curb ramps.

g) Adjustments of gate valves and manholes, survey monuments and

utility boxes.

h) Community Outreach including door hangers and no parking signs

4. You may propose to change the limits of the determined phasing, in writing,

for the Engineer’s review and approval. If approved, there shall be no

additional costs to the City. No additional Working Days will be granted for

delays due to the City’s review and approval of your proposed change and due

to the implementation of that proposed change.

5. You may use multiple crews to complete each phase of paving.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 277

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

306-1.2.1 Payment.

1. The payment for all Work associated with Phased Paving shall be included in

the Bid item for each “Phased Paving” area. This payment shall include the

costs for all mobilization and demobilization for resurfacing and striping

associated with each paving phase regardless of the paving operation. No

additional payment shall be made regardless of the number of mobilizations

and demobilizations required to complete that phase.

306-3.3 Removal and Abandonment of Existing Conduits and Structures. ADD the

following:

1. For 6 inch (152.4mm) and larger conduits, abandoned pipe shall be filled with

sand or CLSM in accordance with 201-6, “CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH

MATERIAL (CLSM)”.

ADD:

306-3.3.1 Removal and Abandonment of Existing Water Facilities.

1. Existing facilities shall be abandoned unless indicated otherwise in the

Contract Documents. Any gate valve to be removed shall be removed entirely

with the valve casing and cover. Any gate valve to be abandoned shall be

abandoned in place by removing the cover and casing to subgrade, filling the

remaining valve casing with sand or Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)

in accordance with 201-6, “CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)”,

and restoring the pavement. Gate valves abandoned prior to construction,

with a lid and casing found within the Project limits, shall be properly

abandoned as stated above and paid for as Extra Work, as approved by the

Engineer.

2. Any existing fire hydrant which is served by a main to be abandoned shall be

abandoned with its services, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Fire hydrant

services to be abandoned shall be blind flange or cut and plugged at least 12

inches (304.8 mm) below finish grade or below the top of curb, whichever is lower.

3. Where portions of the old main, services, or both are abandoned and left in place,

the exposed ends of the abandoned main shall be tightly plugged with concrete

and service ends shall be crimped, unless otherwise shown on the plans.

Abandoned water services shall be located and shut off at the main.

4. Existing meter boxes previously abandoned within the Project limits shall be

removed as specified.

5. Voids resulting from abandoned or removed water services and meter boxes

shall be filled with suitable material compacted to a relative compaction of

90% and concrete capped.

6. For all water mains, the abandoned pipe shall be filled with sand or CLSM in

accordance with 201-6, “CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 278

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. Salvaged material from the abandoned water mains and its appurtenances,

except fire hydrant bodies, shall become your property at the time of removal

from the trench, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans. Such

material shall not be allowed to accumulate along the line of Work, but shall

be removed from the area at the earliest practical time.

8. You shall notify the Public Utilities Department 48 hours in advance of

abandonment to obtain the delivery location for salvaged fire hydrant bodies.

ADD:

306-3.3.2 Abandonment of Sewer Facilities.

1. You shall plug existing sewer mains to be abandoned at downstream locations

identified on the Plans and as approved by the Engineer. You shall monitor the

abandonment for a 48-hour period to ensure that there is no flow in the

existing main or laterals. If there is flow in the existing main, you shall perform

a dye pack test to confirm that the abandonment has been successfully

completed.

2. Sewer mains to be abandoned in place shall be completely filled with CLSM in

accordance with 201-6, “CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)”.

Plug both ends of each pipe segment with concrete plugs. You shall

demonstrate to the Engineer that conduits being abandoned are completely

filled as evidenced by the filler material flowing through ventilation holes and

through the ends of pipe segments. You shall submit the method of

abandonment, the materials to be used, and the locations and sizes of the

ventilation holes to the Engineer.

3. You shall notify the Public Utilities Department 48 hours in advance of

abandonment to obtain the delivery location for salvaged manhole lids and

frames.

4. You shall ensure that the proposed sewer laterals have been successfully

connected to the proposed sewer mains and that watertight capping or

plugging has been completed before abandoning any existing sewer main and

laterals. Sewer laterals to be abandoned shall be plugged with concrete at the

property line or as located in the Site by the Engineer in the vicinity of the

property unless otherwise shown on the Plans.

5. Any existing sewer cleanout accessing a main to be abandoned shall be

abandoned. Cleanouts and risers to be abandoned shall be cut and plugged at

least 3 feet (0.9 m) below finish grade or below the top of curb, whichever is lower.

a) In non-paved areas, the remaining voids shall be filled with suitable

material compacted to a relative compaction of 90% and concrete

plugged.

b) For paved areas, the remaining voids shall be filled with CLSM and shall be

concrete plugged. Pavement shall be restored.

c) You shall reconstruct concrete sidewalk, curb, and gutter to match existing.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 279

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

306-3.3.3 Abandonment of Storm Drain Facilities.

1. You shall plug existing storm drain mains to be abandoned at downstream

locations identified on the Plans and as approved by the Resident Engineer.

2. Storm drains to be abandoned in place shall be completely filled with CLSM in

accordance with 201-6, “CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)”.

Plug both ends of each pipe segment with concrete plugs. You shall

demonstrate to the Resident Engineer that conduits being abandoned are

completely filled as evidenced by the filler material flowing through

ventilation holes and through the ends of pipe segments. You shall submit the

method of abandonment, the materials to be used, and the locations and sizes

of the ventilation holes to the Engineer.

3. You shall notify the Storm Water Department 48 hours in advance of

abandonment to obtain the delivery location for salvaged manhole lids and

frames.

4. Any existing storm drain cleanouts and inlets accessing a main to be abandoned

shall also be abandoned. Cleanouts and risers to be abandoned shall be cut and

plugged at least 3 feet (0.9 m) below finish grade or below the top of curb,

whichever is lower.

a) In non-paved areas, the remaining voids shall be filled with suitable

material compacted to a relative compaction of 90% and then concrete

plugged.

b) For paved areas, the remaining voids shall be filled with CLSM and shall be

concrete plugged. Pavement shall be restored.

c) You shall reconstruct concrete sidewalk, curb, and gutter to match existing.

ADD:

306-3.3.4 Payment.

1. The payment for removing, plugging, and abandoning existing water facilities

and appurtenances within the proposed trench zone shall be included in the

Bid items for the new water facilities Work.

2. The payment for removing, plugging, and abandoning existing water facilities

and appurtenances outside the proposed trench limits as shown on the

Plans shall be included in the Bid item for “Removal or Abandonment of

Existing Water Facilities”.

3. The payment for water mains and appurtenances to be filled and abandoned

outside of the trench limits shall be included in the Bid item for “Abandon

and Fill Existing Water Main Outside of the Trench Limit”.

4. The payment for removing meter boxes previously abandoned within the

Project limits shall be included in the Bid item for “Removal of Abandoned

Water Meter Box”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 280

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. The payment for service laterals to be plugged and abandoned in place shall

be included in the Bid item for the sewer main Work.

6. The payment for sewer mains to be filled and abandoned outside of the

trench limits shall be included in the Bid item for “Abandon and Fill Existing

Sewer Main Outside of the Trench Limit”.

7. The payment for the abandonment of existing manholes outside the trench

limits, including the concrete plugs, shall be included in the Bid item for

“Abandon Existing Manhole Outside of the Trench Limit”.

8. The payment for the abandonment of sewer cleanouts outside of the trench

limits shall be included in the Bid item for “Abandon and Fill Sewer Cleanout

Outside of Trench Limit”.

9. The payment for removing, plugging, and abandoning existing storm drain

facilities and appurtenances within the proposed trench limits shall be

included in the Bid items for the new storm drain facility Work.

10. The payment for storm drain pipes to be filled and abandoned outside of the

trench limits shall be included in the Bid item for “Abandon and Fill Existing

Storm Drain Pipes Outside of the Trench Limit”.

11. The payment for the abandonment of existing storm drain cleanouts and

inlets outside the trench limits, including concrete plug Work, shall be

included in the Bid item for “Abandon Existing Storm Drain Cleanouts and

Inlets Outside of Trench Limit”.

ADD:

306-3.3.5 Asbestos Materials.

1. If you identify asbestos containing materials (ACM) at the Work Site, you shall

immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Engineer unless the

Contract Documents show the presence of such materials.

306-3.3.5.1 Non-Friable Asbestos Cement Pipe (ACP).

1. You shall take adequate care to maintain the materials in a non-friable

state. You shall be responsible for the ACM removal and the associated

contamination clean-up resulting from improper handling.

2. Removal of ACP shall be in whole sections where possible. You shall comply with

the following requirements for ACP that is to be cut or broken:

a) Evacuate the area of unauthorized personnel, post warning signs, and

provide adequate barriers to keep unauthorized personnel out of the

area.

b) Provide the workers performing the cutting or breaking of asbestos

material with personal protective equipment in compliance with

respiratory protection requirements of EPA or Title 8, §5144

(whichever is more stringent) as applicable to the Work.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 281

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) Cutting or breaking of asbestos material to facilitate removal shall be

in compliance with California Regulations, Title 8, §1529. You shall only

perform cutting of ACP using a hydraulic snap cutting method. All

powered and hand operated saws shall not be allowed.

d) If a collar needs to be broken to remove whole ACP sections, a wet

cloth shall be placed on the collar and water shall be used throughout the

process to wet the collar. Minimal force shall be used to break it into as

few large pieces as possible. Areas to be cut or broken shall be adequately

wetted with amended water to reduce fiber emission. Your cutting and

removal method shall minimize fiber release. Related debris from the

cutting or breaking of asbestos material shall be considered friable.

e) ACP shall be wrapped in 6 mil (150µm) polyethylene sheeting or bags,

sealed with appropriate tape, and properly labeled and removed away

from the construction area to prevent damage.

f) You shall transport the wrapped and sealed ACP to a designated secure

disposal bin on the Site no later than the end of each Working Day. The

bin shall be lockable or located within a secure construction area.

g) You shall comply with City of San Diego Miramar Landfill Acceptance

Criteria for the Disposal of Non-Friable Asbestos Waste requirements. A

copy of the requirements is available by calling (858) 573-1415 or online

at:

http://www.sandiego.gov/environmental-services/ep/hazteam/nonfasbestos.shtml

h) You shall be responsible for providing your own certification of non-

friability.

i) A minimum of 5 Working Days prior to the transportation of the ACP

disposal bins or friable asbestos waste, you shall provide notice to and

assist the Resident Engineer in completing the Inspection Work

Request Form for the Asbestos, Lead, and Mold Program. The form is

located below:

https://forms.sandiego.gov/f/gs2064

j) Only the City’s Asbestos and Lead Program representative shall sign

the manifests as the generator.

k) Friable asbestos wastes are regulated as hazardous waste (California

Code of Regulations, Title 22, Division 4.5, Chapter 11, Article 3,

§66261.24) and shall be transported by a licensed hazardous waste

hauler and disposed of at an appropriate landfill.

306-3.3.5.2 Asbestos Cement Pipe Training.

1. You shall comply with the provisions of California Title 8, §5208 and §1529, and

Title 40 CFR Part 61.Your workers handling ACP shall be trained in accordance

with Title 8 CCR §1529 regarding the dangers inherent in handling asbestos

materials and breathing asbestos dust, proper Work procedures, and personal

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 282

THE “WHITEBOOK”

and area protective measures. Topics covered in a state accredited course for

ACP shall include the following:

a) Methods of recognizing asbestos.

b) Health effects associated with asbestos.

c) Relationship between smoking and asbestos in producing lung cancer.

d) Nature of operations that could result in exposure to asbestos.

e) Importance of and instruction in the use of necessary protective controls,

practices, and procedures to minimize exposure including:

i. Purpose, proper use, fitting, instructions and limitations of

respirators as required by 29 CFR 1910.134.

ii. Appropriate Work practices for the ACP Work. Work practices

shall include hands-on training.

306-3.3.5.3 Asbestos Cement Pipe Submittals.

1. You shall submit the following information to the Engineer prior to the start of

the Work:

a) A Work plan showing the means and methods of performing the Work,

disposal bin locations and details on how they will be secured,

information about the disposal transporter and disposal locations,

and information on how you will handle friable asbestos waste if any

is generated.

b) Copies of notifications made to regulatory agencies, if required.

c) Evidence that workers handling ACP have been trained, certified, and

accredited as required by law.

d) If respirators are going to be used for the non-friable Work, submit a

doctor’s report from medical examinations conducted within the last

12 months as part of compliance with OSHA medical surveillance

requirements for each worker who is to enter the Site. You shall

submit, at a minimum, the following for each worker:

i. Name and Social Security Number.

ii. Physician’s written opinion from the examining physician

including the following:

• Whether the worker has any detected medical

conditions that would place the worker at an increased

risk of material health impairment from exposure to

asbestos.

• Any recommended limitations on the worker or

recommendations on the use of personal protective

equipment such as respirators.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 283

THE “WHITEBOOK”

• A statement that the worker has been informed by the

physician of the results of the medical examination and

of any medical conditions that may result from asbestos

exposure.

e) You shall not start Work until the submittals are returned with the City’s

Asbestos and Lead Management Program’s written approval.

2. You shall submit the following information to the Engineer immediately

following the removal and disposal of ACP:

a) Copies of all waste shipment records.

b) Copies of all air monitoring results taken during the removal in

compliance with OSHA. Air sample results shall be submitted to the

Engineer within 24 hours.

306-3.3.5.4 Friable Asbestos.

1. Any friable asbestos (material that can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to

powder in hand) or soil that is contaminated with friable asbestos are regulated as

hazardous waste (California Code of Regulations, Title 22, Division 4.5, Chapter 11,

Article 3, §66261.24). The City reserves the right to select another qualified

Contractor to perform the Work related to friable asbestos materials.

306-3.3.5.5 Payment.

1. The payment for the handling and disposal of asbestos-containing materials

shall be paid for as Extra Work unless a Bid item has been provided for

“Handling and Disposal of Non-friable Asbestos Material”.

ADD:

306-3.7 Imported Backfill.

1. If you elect to import material from a source outside the project limits for use as

backfill, the backfill material, delivery of samples, suitability, and placement

method shall be in accordance with 217-2.2, “Imported Trench Backfill”.

2. Should the imported material not be substantially the same as the approved

sample, it shall not be used for backfill and shall be removed from the Work

site at your expense.

3. The densification method for imported material authorized by the Engineer shall

be dependent upon its composition, the composition of the in-place soil at the

point of placement, and the relative compaction to be obtained.

306-4 SHORING AND BRACING. ADD the following:

1. Shoring is considered to be the adequate sheeting, shoring, bracing, or

equivalent method for the following:

a) The protection of life and limb which shall conform to applicable safety

orders.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 284

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) The protection of existing underground and above-ground private and

public improvements.

c) The remedy of any and all conditions encountered, regardless of

depth, during the construction of the Project.

2. You shall take appropriate measures when trenching adjacent to the existing

utilities to prevent the existing utility trench from sloughing into the new

trench excavation. The wall of the new trench may be adjacent to the edge of

the existing trench and therefore may contain loose material. You are required

to use adequate shoring or other protective construction measures as

required by field conditions to prevent damage to pavement outside the

trench width and to prevent sloughing of the trench wall.

3. You shall be responsible for any sloughing and damage to the road surface or

other utilities that may occur. It shall be your responsibility to repair any

damaged pavement or utilities as a result of the sloughing.

306-6.3 Bedding for Plastic Pipe and Fittings. ADD the following:

1. CLSM shall be used for bedding and backfilling when HDPE pipe is installed in

paved areas, where pipe crosses utility easement, and at locations where pipe

is to be backfilled with concrete as shown on the Plans. CLSM shall conform to

201-6, “CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)” and the following

concrete classes or as designated in the Contract Bid item or shown on the

Plans:

a) 190-E-400 in residential and local streets.

b) 380-E-800 in major and arterial streets.

2. The concrete backfill shall be placed in the trench against undisturbed material

at the sides and bottom of the trench and in a manner that shall prevent floating

or shifting of the pipe and that shall prevent voids in or segregation of the

concrete. Foreign material which falls into the trench prior to or during the

placement of concrete shall be immediately removed. Where necessary, earth

plugs shall be constructed and compacted at the ends of the planned concrete

backfill to contain the concrete within the trench.

3. The surface of the concrete backfill shall be finished with a heavy broom to

produce a uniform rough surface if asphalt concrete is to be placed directly.

4. No material shall be placed on top of the concrete backfill until 24 hours after

placing the concrete backfill.

5. Bedding material for irrigation pipe, direct burial control wire, and electrical conduit

shall be SE 50, plaster, or mortar sand in accordance with 200-1.5, “Sand”.

306-6.5.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. For PVC water pipes:

a) Bedding material shall:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 285

THE “WHITEBOOK”

i. Either be sand, crushed aggregate, or native free-draining

granular material.

ii. 100% of the bedding material shall pass the no. 4 sieve and shall

have an expansion when saturated with water of not more than

0.5%.

iii. Have a sand equivalent of SE 50. SE 30 or higher may be

substituted for SE 50 as bedding material if all of the following

requirements are met:

• The top of the pipe and haunch areas are mechanically

compacted by means of tamping, vibrating roller, or

other mechanical tamper.

• Equipment is of size and type approved by the Engineer.

• 90% relative compaction or better is achieved.

b) When jetting, care shall be exercised to avoid floating of the pipe.

2. PVC sewer pipes shall be bedded in 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) or 1/2 inch (12.5 mm)

crushed rock in accordance with 200-1.2, “Crushed Rock and Rock Dust”. Crushed

rock for PVC sewer pipes may contain recycled Portland Cement Concrete and

shall conform to gradation requirements for 3/8 inch or1/2 inch nominal size as

shown in Table 200-1.2.1 (A).

3. Storm drains and all types of non-PVC sewer mains shall be bedded in 3/4 inch

(19 mm) crushed rock in accordance with 200-1.2, “Crushed Rock and Rock Dust”.

Crushed rock for storm drains may contain recycled Portland Cement Concrete

and shall conform to gradation requirements for 3/4 inch nominal size as shown

in Table 200-1.2.1 (A). Bedding shall be placed to a depth of 4 inches (101.6 mm)

below the outside diameter of the pipe or 1 inch (25.4 mm) below the bell of the

pipe, whichever is greater.

306-7.1 General. To Table 306-7.1, ADD the following:

Gravity Pipe Material

Material

Specification

Installation Specification

Perforated PVC Pipe 207-17.7 1002-4.2

306-7.7.1 General. To paragraph (1), ADD the following:

h) Perforated PVC Plastic Pipe conforming to 207-17.7, “Perforated PVC Pipe”.

ADD:

306-7.7.2.4 Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Mortar (FRPM) Pipe.

1. Each section of pipe shall be moved or installed using approved non-metallic

slings. The slings shall support each pipe section at a minimum of 2 locations

in such a way that the pipe is not damaged by flexure or abrasion. Submit

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 286

THE “WHITEBOOK”

detailed drawings of slings proposed for the handling of the pipe during

production, loading, unloading, and installation.

2. The installation depth of CCFRPM pipe shall be limited to a minimum cover of

5 feet (1.5 m) to a maximum of 15 feet (4.6 m) including cover, unless a special

design is approved by the Engineer.

306-7.8.2.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Testing of the completed pipeline shall be performed in sections between test

bulkheads after all anchors and appurtenances have been installed and after

backfilling has been completed. Install the test bulkheads at locations

approved by the Engineer. Pressure testing against closed valves shall not be

allowed.

2. Pressure testing of pipe and fittings at the lowest elevation shall be performed

at 150% of the specified test pressure and no less than 100% of the specified

test pressure at the highest elevation.

a. Specified test pressure for Class 235 pipe shall be 150 psi and is tested at

225 psi.

b. Specified test pressure for Class 305 pipe shall be 200 psi and is tested at

300 psi.

3. Side outlet valves to be furnished with blind flanges shall be tested while

uncovered to allow visual inspection for valve leakage during the required field

hydrostatic test.

4. An optional field hydrostatic test may be permitted by the Engineer. The

duration of the test shall be 1 hour with pumping discontinued at the specified

pressure.

5. In the event that the rate of loss of water during the test method exceeds the

acceptable rate, you shall locate the leaks and perform the required repairs.

Regardless of the outcome of the test, all detectable leaks shall be repaired by you

at your expense. Additional testing shall be performed until satisfactory results

have been completed. The connections to existing pipelines shall be tested at line

pressure after refilling the existing pipelines. Repair all leaks in the connections

which occur as a result of testing operations.

6. Leakage shall not be allowed for steel (flanged or welded) and ductile iron

(flanged) pipe. You shall provide accurate means for measuring the quantity

of water lost. The allowable leakage for all other pipe shall be 15 gallons per

inch (2.3 L/mm) of diameter per mile of pipeline within 24 hours.

306-7.8.2.4 Air Pressure Test. ADD the following:

1. For PVC sewer mains, minimum gauge pressures, test durations, acceptance

requirements, and gauge certifications shall be in accordance with 306-

7.8.2.4.1, “Air Pressure Test for PVC Sewer Mainlines”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 287

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

306-7.8.2.4.1 Air Pressure Test for PVC Sewer Mainlines.

1. Air pressure test sewer lines after laying, backfilling, and compaction. Air

pressure testing shall not be required for sewer main replacements where live

laterals are connected to the new main.

2. The test section shall be pressurized to 3.5 psi (24.1 kPa) and shall be held

above 3.0 psi (20.7 kPa) for not less than 5 minutes. Air shall be added if

necessary to keep the pressure above 3.0 psi (20.7 kPa).

3. When the prevailing groundwater is above the pipe being tested, air pressure

shall be increased 0.43 psi (3 kPa) for each foot the water table is above the

invert of the pipe.

4. The pressure gauge used shall be supplied by you, shall have minimum

divisions of 0.1 psi (0.7 kPa), and shall have an accuracy of 0.04 psi (0.3 kPa).

Certified testing shall verify the accuracy and the calibration of the gauge firm

annually or when requested by the Engineer.

5. At the end of the 5 minute saturation period, note that the pressure shall be

at a 3.0 psi (20.7 kPa) minimum and begin the same lapse required for the air

pressure drop. If the pressure drops more than 0.5 psi (3.4 kPa) in less than

the time shown in Table 306-7.8.2.4.1, the section of that pipe shall be deemed

to have failed the test.

6. For larger diameter pipe use the following formula:

Minimum time in seconds = 1.2 x diameter in mm.

TABLE 306-7.8.2.4.1

Pipe

Dia

(in/cm)

Min

Time

(sec)

L for

Min

Time

(ft/m)

Time

For

ADD’l

L (sec)

Specification Time for Length (L) Shown (min sec)

100 ft.

30.5 m

150 ft.

45.7 m

200 ft.

61.0 m

250 ft.

76.2 m

300 ft.

91.4 m

350 ft.

106.7 m

400 ft.

121.9 m

450 ft.

137.2 m

4/10.16 1.53 597/181.97 0.190 x L 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53 1:53

6/15.24 2.50 398/121.31 0.427 x L 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:50 2:51 3:12

8/20.32 3.47 298/90.83 0.760 x L 3:47 3:47 3:47 3:47 3:48 4:26 5:04 5:42

10/25.40 4.43 239/72.85 1.187 x L 4:43 4:43 4:43 4:57 5:56 6:55 7:54 8:54

12/30.48 5.4 199/60.66 1.709 x L 5:40 5:40 5.42 7:08 8:33 9:58 11:24 12:50

15/38.10 7.05 159/48.46 2.671 x L 7:05 7:05 8:54 11:08 13:21 15:35 17:48 20:02

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 288

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Pipe

Dia

(in/cm)

Min

Time

(sec)

L for

Min

Time

(ft/m)

Time

For

ADD’l

L (sec)

Specification Time for Length (L) Shown (min sec)

100 ft.

30.5 m

150 ft.

45.7 m

200 ft.

61.0 m

250 ft.

76.2 m

300 ft.

91.4 m

350 ft.

106.7 m

400 ft.

121.9 m

450 ft.

137.2 m

18/45.72 8.30 133/40.54 3.846 x L 8:30 9:37 12:49 16:01 19:14 22:26 25:38 28:51

21/53.34 9.55 114/34.75 5.235 x L 9:55 13:05 17:27 21:49 26:11 30:32 34:54 39:16

24/60.9

11.20 99/30.18 6.837 x L 11:24 17:57 22:48 28:30 34:11 39:53 45:35 51:17

27/68.58 12.45 88/26.82 8.653 x L 14:25 21:38 28:51 36:04 43:16 50:30 57:42 46:54

30/76.20 14.10 80/24.38 10.683 x L 17:48 26:43 35:37 44:31 53:25 62:19 71:13 80:07

33/83.82 15.35 72/21.95 12.926 x L 21:33 32:19 43:56 53:52 64:38 75:24 86:10 96:57

36/91.44 17.00 66/20.12 15.384 x L 25:39 38:28 51:17 64:06 76:55 89:44 102:34 115:23

306-7.8.3.1 General. To Table 306-7.8.3.1, REVISE “Percentage Barrel Deflection Allowed

1,2

” to

“Percentage Barrel Deflection Allowed

1, 2, 3, 4

”

To the Table notes, ADD the following:

3. Deflections of up to 6.5% of the in-field measured diameter are acceptable for

storm drain applications.

4. Inward bell shaped deflection in the pipe barrel shall not be allowed.

306-8.2.2.2 Mechanical Joints. ADD the following:

1. Joints and mechanical couplings and nuts and bolts shall be field wrapped with

a 3-part wax-tape coating system per AWWA C217.

306-8.2.2.3 Installation of Polyethylene (PE) Film Wrap on Iron Fittings. ADD the following:

1. The requirements of this section shall only apply when special coatings are not

required or specified for corrosion protection.

306-8.3.2.3 Butt-Strap Closure Joints. To subsection “b”, DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with

the following:

The joint exterior shall be coated to match the existing main line coating

system. When special coatings are not present, the joint shall be coated with

mortar to a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Immediately prior

to applying mortar to interior or exterior of joints, cement wash shall be

applied to the metal to be coated.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 289

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

306-8.5.4 High Deflection Coupling.

1. High deflection couplings shall be constructed in accordance with the Plans

and Reference Specifications. Working Drawings prepared by a Civil or

Structural Engineer registered in the State of California shall be submitted in

accordance with 3-8.2, “Working Drawings” for any proposed additional high

deflection couplings not indicated on the Plans and Reference Specifications.

306-8.8 Valves, Hydrants, and Appurtenances. ADD the following:

1. Water valve bypasses for mainlines 16-inch and larger shall be constructed in

accordance with the Plans, Reference Specifications, and SDW-154, “Water

Valve Bypass Details For Mainlines 16-Inch And Larger”.

306-8.8.3 Thrust Blocks. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

306-8.8.3 Thrust Blocks and Anchor Blocks.

1. Thrust blocks shall be installed at all bends, tees, dead-ends and reducers. The

use of restrained joints requires approval from the Engineer. The thrust blocks

shall be constructed as follows:

a) Thrust blocks shall be constructed of concrete conforming to 201-1,

“PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE”.

b) Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, concrete thrust blocks shall be

constructed in accordance with SECTION 303 - CONCRETE AND

MASONRY CONSTRUCTION and the Standard Drawings.

c) Concrete blocks shall be constructed between undisturbed ground

and fittings to be anchored.

d) Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the quantity of concrete and the

bearing area of the pipe against undisturbed soil shall be as shown on

the Standard Drawings.

e) Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, concrete shall be placed so pipe

joints and fittings remain accessible to repairs.

2. At least 10 Working Days prior to the construction of thrust blocks and anchor

blocks for 16 inch (406.4 mm) and larger water mains, you shall excavate via

potholing and expose the soil to the depth of the proposed water main at

locations approved by the Engineer. The Engineer will confirm the design when

shown on the Plans or will provide the design details within 10 Working Days

after the Engineer has observed the exposed Site.

3. If there are conflicts with adjacent utilities that prohibit the installation of the

concrete blocks, you shall immediately notify the Engineer.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 290

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

306-8.8.4.1 Water Services.

1. Each service shall have its own meter unless specified otherwise on the Plans.

Water Services shall conform to 209-4, “PVC PRESSURE PIPE” and SECTION 212 -

WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM VALVES AND APPURTENANCES.

ADD:

306-8.8.4.2 Trenchless Method for Water Services.

1. General.

a) Trenchless methods for the installation of water services shall be used

at your discretion or when noted on the Plans.

2. Submittals.

a) You shall submit the following information:

i. Address and schedule of water services.

ii. Method for trenchless construction.

iii. Launch and receiving pit and shaft dimensions.

iv. Proposed drill path alignment (both horizontal and vertical).

v. Tunnel diameter.

vi. Minimum depth of cover.

vii. Construction procedure and operation sequence.

viii. Tunneling equipment.

b) You shall obtain the Engineer’s approval prior to the start of any boring

operations.

3. Water Service Construction.

a) Copper pipe shall be placed in a perforated sleeve and shall not be

pushed or pulled against soil during the installation of water services.

The sleeve shall be installed between meter and main launching pits.

The sleeve shall be cut flush with walls of meter and main launching

pits.

b) The inside diameter of sleeve shall be at least 1 inch (25.4 mm) greater

than the outside diameter of the water service. The sleeve tunnel

diameter shall not exceed the sleeve diameter by more than 2 inches

(50.8 mm) and shall align horizontally within 3 inches (76.2 mm) of

meter inlet location. The sleeve material shall be PVC SDR 35 (or higher

class). HDPE SDR 21 (or higher class) may be used in lieu of PVC.

c) The construction for each service shall be scheduled to minimize water

disruption to the property being served.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 291

THE “WHITEBOOK”

306-8.8.5 Acceptance. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

306-8.8.5 Water Meter Boxes.

1. Water meter boxes that are called out as a Bid items only shall be installed at

locations determined by the Engineer.

ADD:

306-8.8.6 Temporary Blow-offs.

1. Caps and plugs installed by you to temporarily close the ends of new mains

adjacent to points of connection shall contain 2 inches (50.8 mm) outlets with

corporation stops. Corporation stops shall protrude free from thrust blocks

and shall be available for use in relieving pressure in the mains prior to

connecting. Caps and outlets are your property and shall be removed from the

Site after main connections are made.

ADD:

306-8.8.7 Blowoff Valve Assemblies.

1. You shall field verify, with the approval of the Engineer, the final location of

each assembly.

ADD:

306-8.8.8 Air and Vacuum Valve Assemblies.

1. You shall field verify, with the approval of the Engineer, the final location of

each enclosure.

ADD:

306-8.8.9 Out-of-Service Fire Hydrant Discs.

1. The out-of-service hydrant discs shall conform to the following:

a) Constructed of heavy-duty plastic and shall have an inside diameter

large enough to easily slide over the large port of a fire hydrant and a

minimum outside diameter of 11¼ inch (287.8 mm). Refer to Standard

Drawing SDW-104 for “Fire Hydrant Installation”

b) Minimum of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

c) Resistant to tearing, ripping, extreme changes in temperature, and

vandalism.

d) Of a highly visible color of red.

2. Unless specified otherwise in the Special Provisions, you shall maintain City

provided out-of-service hydrant discs on the large port of every newly installed

fire hydrant immediately after it has been bolted in place and existing

assemblies that have been taken out of service. You shall unscrew the cap on

the large port, place the disc on the port, and securely replace the cap.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 292

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. You shall ensure that the out-of-service hydrant discs remain on the fire

hydrants until the new main has been connected to the existing main and

accepted.

4. Once in service, City Forces will remove and retain the out-of-service hydrant

discs.

ADD:

306-8.8.10 Acceptance.

1. Acceptance testing for valves and appurtenances shall conform to 306-8.9.3,

“Testing of Valves and Appurtenances”. Valves and appurtenances shall be

pressure tested at the same time connecting pipelines are pressure tested.

Valves, operators, or control and instrumentation elements whose pressure

rating is less than the test pressure shall be protected or isolated during

pressure testing.

306-8.9.2.3 Allowable Leakage. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. For prefabricated pressure pipe testing requirements, refer to prefabricated

gravity pipe pressure testing requirements in 306-7.8.2, “Pressure Testing and

Leakage Inspection”.

306-8.9.4.1 General. ADD the following:

1. New water mains shall be disinfected and tested in accordance with AWWA

C651 and State Health Department requirements. The City will perform a

chlorine residual test prior to flushing and a bacteriological test after flushing.

No main shall be placed in service until the results of the bacteriological tests

are announced as satisfactory and until a shutdown has been scheduled.

306-8.9.4.5 Dechlorination and Flushing. ADD the following:

1. When you are required to flush water mains using a 4-inch or larger meter,

you shall provide a submittal to the Engineer for review of the proposed

connection point of the meter and a plan demonstrating how flushed water

will be captured or delivered down the storm drain or sewer system.

2. Once the submittal has been approved, you shall be responsible for

coordinating the payment for this meter at Development Services Department

by filling out the DSD form for the need for a construction meter for flushing

purposes. Once paid by you, call Public Utilities Department Coordination

Number at 619-527-7424 to coordinate the delivery and use of the meter in

accordance to the approved submittal.

3. You shall return the meter to the City at the completion of work.

4. The payment for the meter cost shall be reimbursed under the allowance Bid

item for “4-Inch or Larger Meter for Construction Flushing”. All other costs

associated with the purchase of the meter shall be included in the contract

price. Costs associated with flushing operations shall be included under the

costs for the pipeline installation.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 293

THE “WHITEBOOK”

306-9.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Cast-in-place non-reinforced concrete pipe shall not be allowed for use in San

Diego.

306-12.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The Engineer shall have the authority to require further testing when, in the

opinion of the Engineer, the nature of the native backfill material or maximum

dry density of Imported Trench Backfill has changed.

306-12.4.1 General. To paragraph (3), subsection “c”, DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with

the following:

c) The lift of backfill shall not exceed that which can be readily densified by

jetting, but in no case shall the undensified lift exceed 10 feet (3 m).

306-12.4.2 Compaction Requirements. ADD the following:

1. All trench backfill shall be compacted to a minimum 90% relative compaction

except where 95% relative compaction shall be required by 301-1.3, “Relative

Compaction”.

306-13.2 Permanent Resurfacing. ADD the following:

1. A paving machine or spreader box shall be used to place the Class “F” asphalt

concrete wearing surface followed immediately by a roller. Resurfacing shall be

completed within a maximum of 30 Days after traffic is restored.

2. You shall be responsible for removal and replacement of all permanent paving

damaged due to exposition, repair, and replacement of the pipe which has

failed testing. You shall not be entitled to any additional Working Days due to

delays resulting from removal and replacement of permanent paving due to

test failure.

ADD:

306-14.10 Dewatering.

1. The measurement for dewatering shall be in accordance with to 3-12.8.8,

“Payment”.

306-14.11 Perforated PVC Pipe.

1. Perforated PVC Pipes are measured along the longitudinal axis between the

ends as laid and shall include the actual pipe in place and shall not include the

inside dimensions of junction structures.

306-15.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The payment for pipe and conduit Work shall be included under the linear foot

Bid items and shall include the payment for the following:

All wyes, tees, bends, couplings, monolithic catch basin connections,

and specials as shown on the Plans

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 294

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Removal of interfering portions of existing pipelines, sewers, storm

drains, and improvements

Closing or removing of abandoned conduit and structures

Trench excavation

Disposal of excess excavation

Control of surface waters

Preparation of subgrade

Placing and joining pipe

Erection and removal of forms

Reinforcing steel

Pressure testing

Disinfection sample collection and delivery

Backfilling the trench

Permanent resurfacing, Class “F” asphalt concrete wearing surface,

and clean up

Trench shoring and plans, excluding engineered shoring, and

engineered shoring plans

All other Work (excluding temporary resurfacing) necessary to

install the pipe or conduit, complete in-place.

2. No separate or additional payment shall be made for additional bedding or a

higher strength of pipe necessitated by you exceeding the maximum trench

width, unless a bid item has been provided.

306-15.2 Shoring and Bracing. ADD the following:

1. The payment for furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing all sheeting,

shoring, or bracing for conditions encountered that require shoring, excluding

engineered Shoring Plan requirements, shall be included with the Bid items for

the pipe and conduit Work in 306-15.1, “General”.

2. When provided, the Bid item for “Engineered Trench Shoring” shall include full

compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing all sheeting,

shoring, or bracing for any conditions encountered that require shoring including

the preparation of engineered Shoring Plans in accordance with 5-7.2.2, “Shoring

Plan”. No additional payment shall be made.

306-15.3 Dewatering. ADD the following:

1. The payment for dewatering shall be in accordance with 3-12.8.8, “Payment.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 295

THE “WHITEBOOK”

306-15.5 Valves. ADD the following:

1. The payment for water valve bypasses shall be included under the Bid items

for the following:

a) “Water Valve Bypass for T-Mainline 16 Inch and Larger”

b) “Water Valve Bypass for Straight Mainline 16 Inch and Larger”

306-15.6 Hydrants. ADD the following:

1. The payment for fire hydrant assembly and marker, fire service connection,

assembly and backflow preventer, and fire service connection and assembly,

shall be included in the Bid items for the following:

a) Fire Hydrant Assembly and Marker

b) Fire Service Connection, Assembly, and Backflow Preventer for City

Property

c) Fire Service Connection and Assembly

2. Removal of existing fire hydrants within the trench limits and all appurtenant

Work shall be included in the Bid item for “Fire Hydrant Assembly and Marker”.

3. Removal of existing fire hydrants outside of the trench limits and all

appurtenant Work shall be included in the Bid item for “Removal or

Abandonment of Existing Water Facilities” in accordance with 306-3.3.4,

“Payment”.

4. Payment for fire hydrant discs shall be included in the Bid item for “Fire

Hydrant Assembly and Marker”

306-15.7 Buried Structures. To sentence (3), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

The Contract Unit Price shall include excavation, backfill, disposal of all excess

excavation, constructing inverts, furnishing and installing castings, restoration of the

street surface and improvements including but not limited to sidewalk panel, and all

other Work, excluding temporary resurfacing, necessary to construct the buried

structure, complete in-place.

306-15.8 Pipeline Appurtenances. To paragraphs (3) and (4), DELETE in their entirety.

ADD the following:

1. The payment for meter assembly shall be included in the Contract Price unless

a Bid item for each “Meter Assembly” has been provided. Payment for the

meter, unless otherwise furnished by the City, concrete pads, appurtenant

piping and couplings, meter boxes or vaults, and meter box lids shall be

included in this payment.

2. The payment for water services shall be included in the Bid item for each

“Water Service” and includes service tap, corporation stop, lateral, riser, angle

meter valve, service saddle, meter installation, meter box, meter box lid,

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 296

THE “WHITEBOOK”

sidewalk panel, and all other service material shown on the Plans or specified

in the Special Provisions.

3. Payment for water meter boxes and meter box lids shall be included in the Bid

item for “Water Services” unless a Bid item for each “Meter Box” has been

provided. Payment shall include any additional adjustment to place the box

around the meter to ensure the valve is accessible and operating properly

(including adjusting the water service pipe beyond the meter box).

4. The payment for trenchless construction of water services shall be included in

the Bid item for each “Trenchless Water Service”. If your proposed trenchless

installation becomes infeasible or does not comply with these specifications,

the water services shall be installed by open trench methods and shall be paid

by the Bid item for “Water Service”.

5. The payment for water service transfers shall be included in the Bid item for

each “Water Service Transfer” and shall include extensions, corporation stops,

and connections to the existing services.

6. The payment for temporary blow-off valves shall be included in the Bid item

for the water main.

7. The payment for permanent blow-off valves shall be included in the Contract

Price unless a Bid item has been provided for “Blow-Off Valve Assembly”.

8. The payment for air and vacuum (air release) valves shall be included in the

Contract Price unless a Bid item has been provided for “Air and Vacuum (Air

Release) Valve Assembly”.

9. The payment for installing each water quality sampling station shall be

included in the Bid item for “Water Quality Sampling Station” and shall include

all labor, materials, removal of existing station, and other necessary Work

required in order to replace or install the station complete in place in accordance

with SDW-163.

ADD:

306-15.10 Thrust Blocks and Anchor Blocks.

1. Thrust blocks and anchor blocks, and all appurtenant Work, for water mains 12

inches (304.8 mm) and smaller shall be included in the Bid items for the water main

Work.

2. Thrust blocks and anchor blocks for water mains 16 inches (406.4 mm) and

larger shall be included in the Bid item for “Thrust and Anchor Blocks for 16

Inch and Larger Water Mains”.

3. The payment for potholing for thrust blocks and anchor blocks for water mains 16

inches and larger shall be included in the Bid item for the water main Work.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 297

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

306-15.11 Imported Backfill.

1. The Bid item payment for “Imported Trench Backfill” shall be made at the

Contract Unit Price per ton and shall include payment for suitable backfill

material, delivery, installation, and compaction completed in-place. This Bid

item shall also include excavation, removal, and legal disposal of native

material determined to be unsuitable for use as trench backfill. This bid item

will be verified by a printed ticket from the material vendor with a date, time,

volume in tons, and with a description of the material.

ADD:

306-16 MANHOLES.

1. Manholes located outside of public right-of-way or in an unpaved area shall

have covers locked to the frame as shown on SDM-113, “Manhole Cover –

Locking Device”.

2. Where a manhole is to be constructed on unstable native material, a stable

base shall first be constructed with additional bedding material in accordance

with 306-6, “BEDDING” to the dimensions specified in writing by the Engineer.

3. Precast manholes shall not have ladder holes.

306-16.1 Polymer Mortar.

1. Polymer mortar shall be used at the riser joints on all manholes to create

water-tight joints to resist infiltration.

2. The mortar shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturers specifications, but

shall not exceed 5 parts sand to 1 part polymer.

3. Materials shall be in accordance with 201-10.2, “Polymer Mortar”.

4. The concrete or other surfaces that are to adhere to the polymer mortar shall be

free from dust, loose aggregates, oil, grease, or other contaminants.

306-16.2 Plastic Liner.

1. When noted on the Plans, in the Bid Proposal, or both, pre-cast manhole risers

including the cone shall be lined with white polyvinyl chloride sheets. Material

shall be in accordance with 210-2, “Plastic Liner”. Manholes connecting to

mains 18 inches (457.2 mm) or larger in diameter shall be PVC lined.

306-16.3 Polyurethane Lining.

1. When PVC lined manholes and existing manhole reconstruction are noted on

the Plans, in the Bid Proposal, or both bases and exposed concrete mortar

surfaces, including any remaining risers, shall be protected with a

polyurethane coating.

2. Except as otherwise indicated in this subsection, manhole reconstruction shall

conform to 502-6, “CLEANING, INSPECTION, TESTING, AND REPAIR OF

INSTALLED LINER SYSTEMS”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 298

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. The lining application shall be performed only by workers certified by the

manufacturers as trained and experienced with the specified material in

accordance with 201-10.3, “Polyurethane Coating” method and equipment of

application.

4. You shall demonstrate the material on a sample area, which is representative

of a Site application. When approved, the sample area shall serve as a

standard for further work.

306-16.4 Exterior Waterproofing.

1. The exterior surface of all manholes located below plus seven 7 feet (2.1 m)

M.S.L or below ground water level shall be coated with a waterproofing agent

consisting of a coal tar emulsion. The coal tar emulsion shall be applied in no

less than 2 coats to achieve a total dry thickness of 25 mils to 35 mils (625 µm

to 875 µm).

306-16.5 Connection to Existing Manholes.

1. Where connections to existing sewer manholes are required, the manholes

shall be broken out as necessary to accommodate the new sewer pipe and the

base shall be rechanneled, as required, to allow a smooth transition between

the inlet and outlet pipe. The manhole reinforcing steel shall be cut only as

required to allow the connection of the new pipe.

2. The existing concrete surface shall be cleaned and prepared with an approved

concrete epoxy adhesive prior to the connection of the new pipe and

placement of concrete dry pack.

306-16.6 Payment.

1. The payment for manholes shall be included in the Bid item for “Manholes” and

shall include polymer mortar, liner, and/or coatings. The cost of the locking

device when required shall be included in this payment.

2. The payment for connecting to and rechanneling existing manholes shall be

included in the Bid item for “Connection to Existing Manhole and Rechanneling”.

3. Where sewer drop manholes are shown on the Plans the payment shall be included

in the Contract Price unless a Bid item for “Sewer Drop Manhole” is provided.

4. The abandonment of manholes outside of the trench limits shall be paid in

accordance with 306-3.3.4, “Payment”.

5. The payment for water proofing and PVC lined manholes shall be included in

the Bid item for “Manholes” unless a Bid item for “Manholes PVC Lined” has

been provided.

ADD:

306-17 HOUSE CONNECTION SEWER (LATERALS) AND CLEANOUTS.

1. A connecting sewer is commonly known as a sewer lateral and may be so

identified.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 299

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Laterals shall be replaced and shall include a cleanout at the property line. The

Plans show the approximate location of the laterals. Connections shall be

made using a “wye” cut-in. Saddle connections shall not be permitted.

3. Lateral connections at the property line shall be made with stainless steel

shielded couplings. The Plans show the approximate location of the laterals.

4. If the "wye" is in the public right-of-way, each lot shall be reconnected to a new and

separate lateral and shall include separate cleanouts. If the "wye" is out of the public

right-of-way, the lots shall be reconnected to a new lateral with a cleanout. A stub-out

with a cleanout shall be provided to the property line for future reconnection.

5. Lateral records are available to you for inspection at Public Utilities

Department, Maps & Records, (619) 527-7482.

6. If the proposed sewer main alignment is in a different location than the

existing main or the proposed laterals are at a different angle than the existing

laterals, you shall locate the laterals by using a remote locating device,

potholing existing laterals to be connected to the new sewer main, or both.

7. New laterals shall be perpendicular from the new sewer main. You shall

determine the exact location of the lateral at the property line prior to the

installation of the new main and shall install the corresponding wyes at these

locations.

8. Replacement laterals shall be the same size as the existing. The minimum

diameter for a lateral and cleanout shall be 4 inches (100 mm).

9. Concrete base shall be required only for a Vitrified Clay Pipe lateral if the

vertical drop is 6 feet (1.8 m) or greater. Concrete base shall not be required

for PVC or ABS laterals.

10. You shall ensure that sewer laterals have been successfully connected to the

new sewer mains and that water tight capping or plugging has been completed

before abandoning any existing sewer mains. You shall plug the existing sewer

main that is identified on the Plans to be abandoned at a downstream location

approved by the Engineer.

11. You shall monitor it for a 48-hour period to ensure that there is no flow in the

existing main. If there is flow in the existing main, you shall perform dye pack

testing to determine which lateral remains connected and repeat the 48-hour

test once it is replumbed.

306-17.1 Sewer Lateral with Private Replumbing.

1. Where sewer laterals with private replumbing are shown on the Plans, you

shall install a new sewer lateral and new private sewer pipes and connect the

new pipe to the private house plumbing. The Work shall be performed by a

qualified licensed contractor in accordance with current building and

plumbing codes.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 300

THE “WHITEBOOK”

306-17.1.1 Location.

1. The location and details of replumbing Work shown on the Plans are

approximate. You shall locate sewer laterals by using a remote locating device,

potholing existing sewer laterals, or both for the connection to the new sewer

main. The alignment for each new connection shall be selected such that the

required length of pipe and disturbance to the private property are minimized.

2. Prior to any sewer lateral replumbing construction activity, you shall

coordinate with the property owner and arrange for a video recording of existing

conditions of the property in accordance with 400-1.1, “Video Recording of

Existing Conditions”.

306-17.1.2 Permits.

1. It shall be your responsibility to pay for, obtain, and get approval for any required

permits for the Work to be done on private property. Submittal of the approved

permits shall be a condition of Final Payment for each location.

2. The City has obtained the executed replumbing agreements with the property

owners for this project. A copy of the agreements may be obtained from the

City’s Project Manager. You shall meet with the property owner and the

Engineer prior to any Work and coordinate the details of the installation at

each location. You shall notify the property owner a minimum of 10 Working

Days before beginning Work on private property.

306-17.1.3 Submittals.

1. Prior to any sewer lateral replumbing construction activity, you shall submit a

separate Working Drawing of the new connection for each property to the

Engineer. Working Drawings shall include a Plan and profile showing existing

size and type of material to be used and point of connection to the existing

property plumbing. Each Working Drawing submittal shall include a written

approval by the property owner including an acknowledgement that the

property owner has been provided a copy of the Working Drawings by you

including any As-Built conditions.

306-17.1.4 Trenchless Construction.

1. Trenchless methods shall be used for installation if the sewer lateral location

intersects existing structures or as noted on the Plans. The following requirements

shall apply:

a) Pipes used for private replumbing shall be a minimum of 4 inches

(101.6 mm) in diameter and shall conform to SECTION 207 - GRAVITY

PIPE and SECTION 209 - PRESSURE PIPE.

b) Sewer lateral cleanouts shall be constructed at the connections to the

house plumbing and at every bend on private property.

c) The construction schedule for each replumb shall be arranged to

minimize the disruption to the property owner.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 301

THE “WHITEBOOK”

d) You shall ensure 2% fall, avoid existing utilities and foundation, and

maintain alignment within the property boundary while meeting the

end connection. The borehole diameter shall not exceed the pipe

diameter by more than 2 inches (50.8 mm).

e) Submittal Requirements:

i. The proposed method shall be submitted for approval.

ii. Address and schedule of sewer lateral replumbs to be

tunneled.

iii. Launch and receiving pit locations for each sewer lateral

replumbs to be tunneled and shaft dimensions.

iv. Proposed drill path alignment (both horizontal and vertical)

for each sewer lateral replumbs to be tunneled.

v. Pipe physical properties and specifications. Calculations

indicating that the method/process used does not exceed the

allowable tensile and compression limits of the pipe.

vi. Jacking forces and factor of safety.

vii. Tunnel diameter.

viii. Minimum depth of cover for each sewer lateral replumbs to

be tunneled.

ix. Construction procedure and operation sequence.

x. A list of the completed projects and staff experience shall be

included in the submittal.

xi. Tunneling equipment and grade control methods.

xii. Certification that the tunneling method shall be able to

achieve the tolerances; if listed in these specifications.

xiii. If drilling fluid is used, viscosity, density, and composition of

drilling fluid.

xiv. If drilling fluid is used, method of slurry containment and

disposal.

306-17.1.5 Private Pump Installation.

1. Private Pumps shall be installed when:

a) Connection points for replumbs have been verified as stated on the

Plans.

b) The Engineer has determined the elevation of the main in the street

cannot be lowered and sufficient slope is unavailable to replumb a

house by gravity means.

c) When shown on the Plans.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 302

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. You shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 10 Working Days before beginning

Work on the private pump.

3. The electrical wiring from the private pump shall be connected to the

property’s electrical panel, in accordance with all applicable governing codes,

and the City’s electrical standards.

4. Prior to any private sewer pump system construction, you shall submit

Working Drawings and detailed installation instructions for equipment to be

furnished including dimensional data and materials of construction. The

Working Drawings shall include a plan and profile showing location of the private

pump, alarm panel, private force main, and point of connection to the existing

building plumbing. Each Working Drawing shall include written approval by the

property owner.

306-17.2 Payment.

1. The payment for constructing each new sewer lateral and cleanout and for

connecting to the main shall be included in the Bid item for “Sewer Lateral and

Cleanout” and shall include the removal and replacement of concrete curb and

gutter, sidewalk panels, and existing surface improvements as required by the

Engineer.

2. The payment for the plugging, monitoring, and testing of the new sewer main

shall be included in the Bid item for the new sewer main.

3. The payment for sewer lateral cleanouts, including the removal and

replacement of concrete curb and gutter, sidewalk panels, and existing surface

improvements as required by the Engineer, shall be included in the Bid item

for “Sewer Lateral and Cleanout” unless a bid item has been provided for each

“Sewer Lateral Cleanout”.

4. The payment for each cleanout at the end of the sewer main shall be included

in the Bid item for “Sewer Main Cleanout” and shall include the removal and

replacement of concrete curb and gutter, sidewalk panels, and existing surface

improvements as required by the Engineer.

5. The payment for sewer lateral connections shall be included in the Bid item

for “Sewer Lateral and Cleanout” unless a bid item has been provided for each

“Sewer Lateral Connection”.

6. The Bid unit price for the “Sewer Lateral with Private Replumbing” shall include

the installation of new pipes connecting to each existing property, plumbing

to the new sewer main, installation of clean outs, and locating, capping, or

plugging the existing sewer piping. It shall include removal and reinstallation

of fences, irrigation, landscaping, ground cover, excavation, backfill and

compaction, fittings, and permits necessary to install the new sewer lateral

system, in place, and to restore private improvements to pre-Bid condition.

Potholing performed for the replumbs shall be included in the unit Bid price

for the replumbing Work.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 303

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. When required, the payment for the trenchless construction of sewer laterals

with private replumbing shall be included in the Bid item for “Sewer Lateral

with Private Replumbing (Trenchless Method)”.

8. The payment for each sewer lateral with backwater device assembly shall be

included in the Bid item for “Sewer Lateral with Backwater Device Assembly”

and shall include the connection to the main.

9. The payment for the private pump system Work shall be included in the Bid

item for “Private Pump System”. The payment for the private pump system

shall include the pumps and appurtenances, electrical hook ups, pump well,

discharge line to the main, installation of clean outs, locating, capping, or

plugging the existing sewer piping, excavation, backfill and compaction,

fittings, inspection Work, and permits necessary to install the new sewer

lateral system, in place, and to restore private and public improvements such

as the removal and reinstallation of fences, irrigation, landscaping, and ground

cover to pre-Bid condition.

10. Within 10 Working Days after the activation of a pump system, you shall make

a private pump compensation payment of $6,080 for each pump to the

property owner. You shall provide to the City the proof of payment by

submitting a copy of the canceled check and a receipt with the property

owner’s signature. You shall not be entitled to compensation unless this proof

is provided. The private pump compensation payment and all related costs

shall be included in the Bid item for “Private Pump Compensation”.

11. The payment for the extended 3-year warranty and the manufacturer’s

inspections for the private pump shall be included in the Bid item for “Private

Pump Extended Warranty”.

ADD:

306-18 VIDEO INSPECTION.

306-18.1 General.

1. Work under this section, when required, shall consist of investigation of

pipelines by use of digital closed-circuit color video recording to determine

condition of lines following cleaning, rehabilitation, and installation of gravity

pipelines and water lines.

2. In coordination with the Engineer, you shall video record pipelines to:

a) Locate existing laterals.

b) Confirm no flow in existing mains prior to abandonment.

c) Assess the conditions of the existing pipe segments and laterals after

the cleaning process and prior to commencing rehab Work.

d) Accept the newly installed or rehabilitated pipelines.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 304

THE “WHITEBOOK”

306-18.2 Video Inspection Camera.

1. The camera source image shall provide a high-resolution video with a

minimum 30 frames per second producing a continuously-monitored high-

quality picture. All major and minor operational and structural defects in the

pipelines shall be discernible from the source image.

2. The minimum video bit rate shall be 4.7 Mega bits per second (Mbps) and

minimum audio bit rate shall be 128 Kilo bits per second (Kbps).

3. Video equipment shall include a multi-angle camera capable of spanning 360°

circumference and 270° on horizontal axis.

4. Video inspection shall be performed utilizing one of the following video

camera systems:

a) Remote-focus stationary lens cameras.

b) Rotating-lens cameras.

c) Pan-and-tilt cameras.

5. The video camera shall be mounted on a skid, floatable raft system, or

transporter based on the conditions of the pipeline to be recorded. The radial

view camera shall be solid-state color and have remote control of the

rotational lens. The camera shall be capable of viewing the complete

circumference of the pipe and junction structure as applicable. Cameras using

mirrors or exposed rotating heads shall not be acceptable.

6. The camera shall be operative in 100% humidity conditions.

7. Camera lens shall not have less than a 140° viewing angle.

8. Focal distance shall be remotely adjustable through range of 6 inches (152.4

mm) to infinity.

9. The remote-reading footage counter shall be accurate to less than 1% error

over the length of the particular section of pipeline being inspected. This

distance shall be measured from the centerline of the junctions such as a

manhole to the centerline of the next manhole.

10. The camera height shall be adjusted such that the camera lens is always

centered in the pipe being inspected. The equipment shall display on the

monitor the distance of the camera from the centerline of the starting

manhole. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, footage measurements

shall begin at the centerline of the upstream manhole.

11. Lighting and camera quality shall produce a clear, in-focus picture of the entire

periphery of the pipe for a minimum distance of 6 feet (1.8 m). Lighting shall

be remote-controlled and adjusted to minimize reflective glare and to avoid any

dark or shadowy regions appearing on the video file.

12. The video camera and monitor shall be capable of registering a minimum of

400 vertical lines and 460 horizontal lines resolution and be a clear, stable

image with no interference.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 305

THE “WHITEBOOK”

13. The video portion of the digital recording shall be free of electrical interference

and shall produce a clear and stable image. The audio portion shall be

sufficiently free of background and electrical noise providing an oral report

that is clear and discernible.

14. For pipes smaller than 6 inches (152.4 mm) in diameter, you shall use portable

long-range pan and tilt push cameras with a motorized wheel to push the

probe for 180 feet (54.9 m) or more down pipes such as laterals.

15. You shall provide a camera capable of extended video recording lengths and

operation in remotely accessed areas without direct vehicular access.

306-18.3 Inspection Procedure.

1. Video inspection shall show with high resolution operational and structural defects

such as inflows, sags, offset joints, cracks, roughness, and “fins” or folds in the

pipelines. This shall include an audio commentary and inspection log.

2. The Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 2 Working Days in advance of the

video inspecting.

3. Video inspection shall be performed one pipe reach (such as manhole to

manhole) at a time.

4. You shall video inspect the pipeline with the maximum flow diverted from the

pipeline. The pipe reach being inspected shall be isolated from the remainder of

the pipelines with the upstream sewage flow bypassed. In the event that the

existing flow is interfering with the video operation, a bypass shall be performed

by you to lower the flow volume sufficiently to allow for a clear video picture.

Sufficient water shall be supplied to the isolated section to cause drainage

reaching the downstream manhole prior to video inspecting. If existing flows are

high, Pre-construction video inspection can be done with partial flow.

The depth of the flow shall not exceed the following:

a) For pipes 6 inches to 10 inches (152.4 mm to 254 mm) - 20% of the pipe

diameter.

b) For pipes 12 inches to 24 inches (304.8 mm to 609.6 mm) - 25% of the

pipe diameter.

c) For pipes 27 inches (685.8 mm) and up - 30% of the pipe diameter.

5. The camera shall be moved through the pipeline in a downstream direction at a

uniform rate by means of power cable winches or self-propelled tractors at each

manhole and shall stop and rotate the camera head at each lateral connection,

defect, or both to allow for adequate evaluation. When necessary, stop to ensure

proper documentation of the pipe condition has been recorded but in no case shall

the camera be pulled at a speed greater than 30 feet (9.1 m) per minute. A clear

picture looking into each service connection shall be provided. Both pre and post

video inspections shall be submitted to the Engineer.

6. Measurements for the location of defects shall be above ground by means of a

measuring device. Footages shown in the digital files shall coincide with horizontal

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 306

THE “WHITEBOOK”

lengths from the stationing shown on the Plans. Footage measurements shall begin

at the centerline of the upstream manhole or storm drain access point unless

permission is given by the Engineer to do otherwise.

7. You shall clean the sewer mains or storm drains prior to video inspecting as

necessary to adequately perform the video recording operations. If the camera will

not pass through the entire pipeline section, you shall reset the equipment at the

downstream manhole and attempt to inspect the section of pipe from the opposite

direction. If the camera fails to pass through the entire section, it shall be assumed

that an obstruction exists. Efforts to video record that section of pipe shall be

temporarily suspended and you shall notify the Engineer. Upon removal of the

obstruction, you shall complete the inspection.

8. If an obstruction is encountered during the post-construction video

inspection, you shall remove the obstruction by excavation, repair, or other

means approved by the Engineer at your expense so that video inspection may

continue.

9. The system used to move the camera through the pipe shall not obstruct the

camera’s view. You shall calibrate the measuring device each day with a known

distance to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to starting the inspection and

video recording process.

10. You shall obtain the Engineer’s approval for any additional point repairs.

11. See the Contract appendices for additional requirements for video inspection

deliverables.

306-18.4 Reports and Documentation.

1. You shall provide a sample submittal at the start of the video inspection Work

demonstrating the typical video with audio quality and the database to be

provided for approval by the Engineer. This submittal shall note any proposed

changes to these specifications such as video format, data bases,

compression, or other conditions for review and approval by the Engineer.

2. Pre-inspection and post-inspection digital files, log sheets, and reports shall be

submitted to the Engineer and shall become City’s property.

3. Subsequent to recording, use a dual recording system and submit post video

inspection files to the Engineer.

4. You shall use the City’s standard inspection introduction, abbreviations, log

sheet forms, and severity code with legend when recording the line segment

information.

5. The inspection reports shall incorporate and utilize the National Association of

Sewer Service Companies (NASSCO) Pipeline Assessment Certification

Program (PACP), Manhole Assessment Certification Program (MACP), and

Lateral Assessment Certification Program (LACP) to be provided for

comprehensive evaluation of pipeline, manhole, and/or lateral conditions

such as a standardized listing of facility conditions and defect codes. Pipe

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 307

THE “WHITEBOOK”

conditions and faults information tied to pipe locations shall also be recorded

in the Report.

6. Documentation shall consist of color digital video files, log sheets, and a written

report detailing the condition of the pipeline and lateral connections and openings.

Video files shall be provided on external hard drive or on DVD.

7. The video files shall be highly compressed, resulting in an anticipated average

file size of 10 MB per minute of video. The compression shall be in accordance

with Windows Media Video (WMV) or mp4 format. The compression shall not

significantly degrade the still frame quality of the video or audio signal from

the original source video, as judged in a side by side viewing under normal

viewing conditions.

8. The report shall note the time and date of video inspection, street name,

upstream and downstream manholes, direction of view, direction of flow,

surface materials, pipeline lengths, pipe section lengths, pipe sizes, pipe

materials, lateral connections, DVD numbers, counter numbers, and a detailed

logging of defects encountered in tabular form.

9. Each submittal shall include the following:

a) Visuals.

i. Adequate view of the upstream and downstream manholes or

storm drain access points and the direction of the survey

upstream or downstream.

ii. A pause at and zoom in on the lateral connections for at least 15

seconds for identification of the condition of the connection.

iii. A pause at and zoom in on the identified defects sufficient for

identification of the type of problem.

iv. Identified fault conditions or defects, refer to the appendices for

NASSCO PACP, MACP, and LACP.

v. Each pipe section shall be identified by FSN (for sewers) or

Drain Conveyance ID (for storm drains), manhole numbers and

the street name. If shown on the Plans, station numbers and

sheet numbers shall also be identified.

vi. A continuous read-out of the camera distance from the

starting manhole to the end point at all times.

vii. Pipe size.

viii. Pipe or liner material refer to the appendices for Material

Description and Code.

b) Audio.

i. Date of CCTV inspection.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 308

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ii. Confirmation of each section to be CCTV inspected such as

narratives of manholes, storm access points or station

numbers, or FSN’s or Drain Conveyance ID’s, and direction

upstream or downstream.

iii. Description of pipe size lined on post and final videos, material liner

type for post and final videos and pipe joint length.

iv. Description and location of each defect.

v. Description and location of each service connection.

vi. Include brief but informative comments on any data of

significance, including, but not limited to, the locations of unusual

conditions, type and size of connection, collapsed section, the

presence of scale and corrosion, and other discernible features.

vii. A continuous read-out of the camera distance from the

starting manhole.

c) Written Documentation.

i. Date of CCTV inspection.

ii. Printed labels on DVD or storage device number, location

information, date of inspection, and other descriptive information.

iii. Location, size, material, and length of pipe.

iv. Direction of flow and measurement "From" manhole or storm

drain access point or station number "To" manhole or storm

drain access point or station number or FSN or Drain Conveyance

ID.

v. File numbers itemizing individual segments.

vi. Sketch showing the street and cross streets where the CCTV

inspection was made.

vii. Description and location of each defect or deficiency and a list

of all proposed repairs.

viii. Description and location of each connection.

ix. A menu which lists files for each pipe section to be inspected

and the date of the inspection.

10. The reporting software shall be compatible with the City’s format

requirements. The reporting software shall utilize Microsoft Access database.

Only the final database without Facility Sequence Number (FSN) or Drain

Conveyance ID duplicates shall be submitted. The reports shall also show all

service lateral connection locations.

11. The FSN shall be compatible with the data input features of the reporting

software (such as the number of available input digits and/or fields). The file

naming convention for final sewer video files consists of the following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 309

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) “[Upstream MH FSN]-[Downstream MH FSN]-[“U/D” for upstream or

downstream run]-[Date code in yyMMdd_HHmmss]” where the date code

is for year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds.

Example: 12345-12346-U-210617_154830

12. The FSN or Drain Conveyance ID shall be compatible with the data input

features of the reporting software (such as the number of available input digits

and/or fields). The file naming convention for final video files consists of 18 for

storm drains, including the extension. The structure for storm drains includes

the following:

a) “(First Drain Structure ID)-(Second Drain Structure ID)-(Direction (US or

DS).wmv”

Example: 12504-12505-US.wmv

13. Video files will be reviewed by the Engineer for focus, lighting, sound, clarity of

view, and technical quality. Videos recorded while a camera has flipped over in

the process of traveling and the viewing of laterals, obstructions or defects that

are blocked by cables, skids or other equipment shall not be accepted. Sharp

focus, proper lighting, and clear distortion-free viewing during the camera

operations shall be maintained. Failure to maintain these conditions shall result

in the rejection of the submittal.

14. One file shall be provided for each manhole to manhole pipe segment (or for

each manhole to manhole inspection video).

306-18.5 Video Inspection Submittals.

1. You shall make submittals during construction as applicable to the Project.

Each video submittal shall be limited to 20 segments. In the event that any

deficiencies are discovered by the Engineer, either by your video inspection or

the Engineer’s inspection, 5 Working Days shall be allowed for the Engineer to

judge whether the deficiencies or sags are repairable, in place. If the judgment

is made that the deficiencies are non-repairable in place, the affected

portion(s) shall be reconstructed at no cost to the City.

b) Existing Sewer Mains Proposed To Be Replaced - When video

inspecting existing mains proposed to be replaced, you shall provide

the video files and a red-lined set of Plans showing the location of the

existing laterals to the Engineer before constructing the new sewer

mains. Sewer lateral video inspection shall be submitted separately.

c) Post Cleaning Videos Prior To The Rehabilitation Of Mains - You shall

video record the pipe segments after the cleaning process has been

completed and prior to commencing the rehabilitation Work. If point

repairs are necessary, you shall identify the location of the proposed

point repairs and submit the post cleaning video within 5 Working

Days of completion of the segment cleaning and at least 5 Working

Days prior to commencing the rehab Work to obtain prior approval by

the Engineer. The Engineer will review each video submittal within 10

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 310

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Working Days of receiving the submittal. The post cleaning video for

the remainder of the mainline segments shall also be submitted.

d) Post Cleaning Videos Prior to the Rehabilitation of Laterals (Lateral

Launch Videos) - You shall video record the lateral segments after the

cleaning process has been completed and prior to commencing any

Work on laterals. The post cleaning video for lateral launch shall be

submitted within 5 Working Days of segment cleaning. The Engineer

will review each video submittal within 10 Working Days of receiving

each submittal. Each submittal shall be limited to 20 segments. The

video inspection shall include the inspection of service laterals a

minimum of 30 feet (9 m) in length from the mainline or up to the

property line unless an obstruction is encountered.

e) Service Lateral Video - If the property line cleanouts are not known to

exist, the service lateral video may be obtained with camera

equipment designed to launch into the service lateral from the

mainline or access from the private property with the homeowner’s

permission. Each service lateral shall be identified by the FSN of the

mainline, when included in the Contract Documents, and the address

of the property which it serves.

f) Final Video Inspection - New sewer mains or storm drains shall be

video inspected and recorded not less than 22 Working Days after the

completion of permanent trench restoration and finished grading, but

prior to final resurfacing. You shall review the digital file for any

discrepancies or deficiencies in the installation of the pipe or liner. You

shall notify the Engineer at least 30 Working Days in advance of the

anticipated date that Acceptance will be requested. If the specified

advance notice is not given, Acceptance and bond release may be

delayed.

g) For sewer mains only: You shall first clean the line with high pressure

water jetting equipment and a sewer ball and then perform tests as

specified by the Engineer. You shall provide for the collection of debris

from the leaning operation. You shall dispose the water into an

existing sanitary sewer system.

h) For sewer mains only: The camera shall stop at each lateral

connection, focus on the bottom of the opening, and then shall make

one slow clockwise observation around the perimeter of the lateral

which clearly shows the quality of the connection. The camera shall

then focus on the center of the lateral opening for a minimum of 15

seconds before moving on to also adequately show and document

that the saddle has been installed properly for new installations and

that the lateral opening has been reestablished for rehabilitation. Each

lateral shall be identified by the address of the property which it

serves. If you fail to properly show and document within the database

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 311

THE “WHITEBOOK”

any of the lateral openings, you shall be required to repeat the video

recording of that section of pipeline at no additional cost to the City.

i) Post-rehabilitation Videos - Post-rehabilitation videos shall be submitted

within 30 Calendar Days of the completion of the Work in phases not to

exceed 2 mile increments. The final video recording shall clearly show the

condition of the liner with ends sealed at the manholes, service laterals,

and connection seals. The submittal of this final video recording shall also

include MS Access database and marked up Field Book pages or Plans as

attachments.

j) Failure to comply with these specifications, including the failure to

deliver the submittal(s) within the time identified or if a total of more than

20 segments are submitted in a single video, may result in one or more of

the following:

i. A delay of the review and approval of the submittal(s).

ii. A delay in progress payments.

iii. A requirement for you to repeat video recording at no cost to

the City.

306-18.6 Tolerances.

1. Tolerances encountered following inspection shall be addressed as follows:

a) For new underground sewer or storm drain conduit installations, the

maximum operational tolerance for sag shall be ½ inch (12.7

mm). When video recorded inspection is used to check for sag, a

calibrated ¼ inch (6.4 mm) diameter steel bar mounted in front of the

camera shall be used to measure the depth of sag.

b) If the Engineer determines that the deficiencies or sags are non-

repairable in place, the affected portion(s) shall be reconstructed in

accordance with 6-8, “Completion, Acceptance, and Warranty”.

306-18.7 Payment.

1. The payment for the cleaning and video inspection of existing pipelines and

culverts shall be included in the Contract Price unless a Bid item has been

provided for “Cleaning and Video Inspection of Existing Pipelines and Culverts”.

2. The payment for the video inspection of pipelines, culverts, and laterals for

acceptance shall be included in the Contract Price unless a Bid item has been

provided for “Video Inspection for Pipelines and Culverts for Acceptance”.

3. The payment for the cleaning and video inspection of laterals to be

rehabilitated (Lateral Launch Videos) shall be included in the Bid item for

“Cleaning and Video Inspection of Existing Pipelines and Culverts” unless a Bid

item has been provided for “Cleaning and Video Inspection of Existing

Laterals”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 312

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. The payment for the video inspection of rehabilitated laterals for acceptance

shall be included in the Bid item for “Video Inspection for Pipelines and

Culverts for Acceptance”.

5. The payment for post-rehabilitation videos shall be included in the associated

Bid items provided, regardless of the number of phased videos required at 2-

mile increments.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 313

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 307 - JACKING AND TUNNELING

307-1.7 Payment. ADD the following:

1. The payment for jacking operations shall include the casing and the carrier

pipes and shall be included in the Bid item for “Sewer Main by Jacking

Operation with Steel Casing”.

ADD:

307-1.8 Jacking Polymer Concrete Pipe.

307-1.8.1 Material. Polymer Concrete Pipe material shall be in accordance with 207-26,

“POLYMER CONCRETE PIPE”.

307-1.8.2 Installation. The installation of pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with

the project plans and specifications and the manufacturer’s recommended

practices.

307-1.8.3 Pipe Handling. Textile slings, union anchor lifting devices or other suitable

materials and/or a forklift are recommended.

307-1.8.4 Jointing.

1. Pipe end, gasket and sealing surfaces shall be inspected for damage

and cleaned of all debris.

2. Apply joint lubricant to the sleeve coupling interior and the elastomeric

gasket. Use only lubricants approved by the pipe manufacturer.

3. Use suitable equipment and end protection to push the pipes

together.

4. Do not exceed joining or pushing forces recommended by the

manufacturer.

307-1.8.5 Field Tests.

1. Pressure Testing and Leakage Testing. Testing shall conform to

306-7.8.2, “PRESSURE TESTING AN LEAKAGE INSPECTION”.

307-1.8.6 Tolerances. Tolerances shall be in accordance with 307-1.5, “Tolerances”.

307-1.8.7 Measurement and Payment. The measurement and payment for Polymer

Concrete Pipe shall be in accordance with 307-1.6, “Measurement” and 307-

1.7, “Payment”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 314

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 308 - MICROTUNNELING

308-7 PIPE. ADD the following:

1. When required, the carrier pipe shall be constructed as specified on the

Plans and Special Provisions.

ADD:

308-7.1 Microtunneling Polymer Concrete Pipe.

Microtunneling with Polymer Concrete Pipe shall conform to the material, installation,

pipe handling, jointing, and field test requirements in 307-1.8, “Jacking Polymer

Concrete Pipe”.

308-12 PAYMENT. ADD the following:

1. The payment for microtunneling shall include the casing and carrier pipes and

shall be included in the Bid item for “Sewer Main by Microtunneling with Steel

Casing”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 315

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 309 - MONUMENTS

309-2 MATERIALS. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The concrete portion of monuments shall be constructed in accordance with 201-

1, “PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE” and SECTION 303 - CONCRETE AND

MASONRY CONSTRUCTION.

2. Monument markers shall be as approved by the City and furnished by you.

309-3 CONSTRUCTION. ADD the following:

1. Adjustment of Survey Monuments shall be in accordance with 403-4, “SURVEY

MONUMENTS”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 316

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 314 – TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS, AND

PAVEMENT MARKERS

314-4.3.7 Payment. ADD the following:

1. The payment for the removal and replacement of existing traffic striping,

pavement markings, and pavement markers shall be included in the lump sum

Bid item for “Removal and Replacement of Existing Paint Striping”.

2. The payment for the new installations of traffic striping, pavement markings,

and pavement markers, shall be included in the lump sum Bid item for “Paint

Striping”.

314-4.4.5 Measurement. ADD the following:

1. Thermoplastic traffic striping for continental crosswalks shall be measured by

the square foot for the actual area covered with thermoplastic and shall

require RE approval prior to installation.

314-4.4.6 Payment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. No separate payment shall be made for establishing alignment for stripes and

layout Work.

2. The payment for the removal and replacement of existing thermoplastic traffic

striping, pavement markings, and pavement markers shall be included in the

Bid item for “Removal and Replacement of Existing Thermoplastic Striping and

Markings”.

3. The payment for the installation of proposed thermoplastic striping as shown

on the Plans shall be included in the Bid item for “Thermoplastic Traffic

Striping” and shall include the payment for the installation of pavement

markers.

4. The payment for the installation of proposed thermoplastic pavement

markings as shown on the Plans shall be included in the Bid item for

“Thermoplastic Pavement Markings”.

5. The payment for the thermoplastic traffic striping of continental crosswalks

shall be included in the Bid item for “Continental Crosswalks” and shall include

the payment for the removal of existing striping, pavement markers, and

paving markings.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 317

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

SECTION 315 – HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING

315-1 GENERAL.

1. Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) is a multiple pass trenchless construction

technique for installing underground conduits utilizing specialty equipment,

driller’s mud, and directional locating system(s) along a predetermined path.

When specified or as approved by the Engineer, HDD shall be subject to the

specifications in this section.

315-2 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS AND SUBMITTALS.

1. You shall be a certified installer trained and experienced in the use of the HDD

method.

2. You shall submit the following items for the Engineer’s approval prior to

ordering pipe materials and the start of the Work:

a) List of past HDD projects successfully completed by the personnel

leading the Work, including at least 5 miles in the last 5 years, and a

current reference for each project.

b) Certification that you are currently licensed by the HDD system

manufacturer as an installer of their system.

c) Pipe fusion or welding operator current certification by the fusion or

welding equipment manufacturers.

d) Pre-printed machine specifications or a letter from the HDD machine

manufacturer demonstrating that the selected machine(s) is capable

of progressing through the anticipated soil conditions suitable for the

size and scope of the Project. Calculations showing drill rig shall exceed

maximum anticipated pull-back of pushing forces, as measured by the

worst case, by at least 25%.

e) Construction procedure for pipe installation including:

i. Proposed dimensions, locations, methods of excavation,

shoring, bracing and ventilation of insertion and receiving pits.

Pits shall be of the smallest size practical for construction and

shall have a sump to remove incidental construction water.

ii. Pilot hole bore diameter and bore hole diameter.

iii. Equipment technical data and operating procedures.

iv. Method of construction, reconnection and restoration of

existing sewer laterals, if applicable.

v. Sewer bypass plans as required.

f) Contingency plans for approval for the following potential conditions:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 318

THE “WHITEBOOK”

i. Monitoring for loss of ground or heaving.

ii. Encountering an unforeseen obstruction.

iii. Loss of, and return to, line and grade.

g) Manufacturer recommendations for handling, storage, and repair of

pipe and fittings. Pipe physical properties and specifications.

Calculations indicating that the method or process used does not

exceed the allowable tensile and compression limits of the pipe and

the pipe can withstand the final in place loading.

h) Proposed tracking method to be used during construction.

i) Layout of HDD equipment and above ground equipment at each shaft

location. For projects with limited Work area, the HDD machine shall

be a pit launched machine.

j) Driller’s mud mixing and recycling system details. Information about the

drilling fluid to be used (including product information, material

specifications, and handling procedures), material safety data sheet

and special precautions required, methods of mixing and application, and

disposal plan. Circulating pumping capacity as measured by volume,

density, and psi shall exceed maximum anticipated requirements by 20%.

k) Method of spoil removal, spoil disposal, disposal location.

l) Electrical system, lighting system, and onsite power generation.

m) Grade and alignment control system details including direction of

drive.

n) Compressed air plant details if a pneumatic hammer system is used. Air

compressor capacity as measured by volume and psi shall exceed

maximum anticipated requirements by approximately 20%.

315-3 DRILLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT.

1. The directional drilling equipment shall consist of a directional drilling rig of

sufficient capacity to perform the bore(s) and pull-back of the pipe(s), a drilling

fluid mixing and delivery system of sufficient capacity to successfully complete

the Work, and a guidance system to accurately guide boring operations.

315-3.1 Drilling Rig.

1. The directional drilling machine shall consist of a hydraulically powered

system to rotate, push, and pull drill pipe while delivering a pressurized fluid

mixture to a steer-able drill head. The drill rig may include drill steel handling

equipment and grippers for the adding or removal of additional lengths of drill

steel. The machine shall be anchored to withstand the pulling, pushing, and

rotating forces required to complete the project. The drilling rig hydraulic system

shall be self-contained with sufficient pressure and volume to power drilling

operations. The hydraulic system shall be free of leaks. The drilling rig shall have

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 319

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a system to monitor and record maximum pull-back hydraulic pressure during

pull-back operations.

315-3.2 Drill Head.

1. The horizontal directional drilling equipment shall produce a stable fluid lined

tunnel with the use of a steerable drill head. The system shall be able to control

the depth and direction of the pipe. Drill head shall contain all necessary

cutters and fluid jets for the operation and shall be of the appropriate design

for the medium being drilled.

315-3.3 Drilling Fluid System.

315-3.3.1 Drilling Fluid.

1. Drilling fluid shall be composed of clean water and the appropriate additive(s)

for the fluid to be used. Water shall be from a clean source and shall meet the

mixing requirements of the manufacturer. The water and additives shall be

mixed thoroughly to assure the absence of any clumps or clods. No hazardous

additives may be used.

2. Drilling fluid shall be maintained at a viscosity sufficient to suspend cuttings

and maintain the integrity of bore wall(s). Drilling fluid shall be disposed of

offsite in accordance with local, state, and federal requirements and permit

conditions. No additional chemicals or polymer surfactants shall be allowed to be

added to the drilling fluid as submitted for this project without written consent of

the Engineer.

315-3.3.2 Mixing System.

1. A self-contained, closed, drilling fluid mixing system shall be of sufficient size to

mix and deliver drilling fluid for the Project. The mixing system shall be able to

ensure thorough mixing of the drilling fluid. The drilling fluid reservoir tank shall

be sized for adequate storage of the fluid. The mixing system shall continually

agitate the drilling fluid during drilling operations.

315-3.3.3 Drilling Fluid Delivery and Recovery System.

1. The drilling fluid pumping system shall have a minimum capacity to supply drilling

fluid in accordance with the drilling equipment pull-back rating at a constant

required pressure. The delivery system shall have filters or other appropriate in-

line equipment to prevent solids from being pumped into the drill pipe.

2. Used drilling fluid and drilling fluid spilled during drilling operations shall be

contained and properly disposed of. The use of spill containment measures

shall be maintained around drill rigs, drilling fluid mixing system, entry and

exit pits and drilling fluid recycling system, if used, to prevent spills into the

surrounding environment. Pumps, vacuum truck(s), and storage of sufficient

size shall be in place to contain excess drilling fluid.

3. A closed-loop drilling fluid system and a drilling fluid cleaning system shall be

used to whatever extent practical depending upon project size and conditions.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 320

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Under no circumstances shall drilling fluid that has escaped containment be

reused in the drilling system.

4. In the event of a drilling fluid fracture, returns loss, or other loss of drilling

fluid, operations shall immediately cease and you shall be responsible for

restoring any damaged property to original condition and cleaning up the area

in the vicinity of the damage or loss. You shall immediately inform the

Engineer.

315-3.4 Pipe Pull Heads.

1. Pipe pull heads shall be utilized that employ a positive through-bolt design

assuring a smooth wall against the pipe cross-section at all times. Pipe pull

heads shall be specifically designed for use with fusible pipe and shall be as

recommended by the pipe supplier.

315-4 INSERTION OR ACCESS PITS (SHAFT).

1. The pits shall be located such that their total number shall be minimized and

the length of replacement pipe installed in a single pull shall be maximized.

Locations of manholes shall be used for insertion or access pits when feasible.

2. Excavation shall be between the easements or right-of-way lines to the lines

and grades designated on the Drawings. You shall size and locate pits so that

they minimize interferences with vehicular and pedestrian traffic. If the traffic

plans cannot accommodate the location or size of the proposed access pits,

you shall be responsible for the changes or for new plans required in

accordance with 5-7, “SAFETY”.

3. Entry and exit areas shall be excavated so as not to exceed the bending limitations

of the pipe as recommended by the manufacturer. The pit(s) and related

excavations shall be shored to prevent any movement or slippage of earth. You

shall take the necessary precautions, such as chain link fencing or plating, to prevent

unauthorized persons from accidentally entering the pits.

315-5 DRILLING LAYOUT.

1. The drill path shall be accurately surveyed with entry and exit areas placed in

the appropriate locations within the areas indicated on Plans. If using a

magnetic guidance system, drill path will be surveyed for any surface

geomagnetic variations or anomalies. Instrumentation shall be provided and

maintained at all times that accurately locates the pilot hole, measures drill-

string axial and torsional loads and measures drilling fluid discharge rate and

pressure. Entry and exit areas shall be drilled without exceeding the bending

limitations of the pipe as recommended by the manufacturer.

315-6 SITE LOCATION PREPARATION.

1. The Site as indicated on the Plans shall be graded or filled to provide a level

working area. No alterations beyond what is required for operations shall be

made. You shall confine all activities to designated Work areas.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 321

THE “WHITEBOOK”

315-7 DRILLING CONTROL SYSTEM.

1. The system shall be able to control the depth and direction of the pipe.

Calibration of the electronic detection and control system shall be verified

prior to the start of the bore. The drilling head shall be remotely steerable by

means of an electronic or magnetic detection system. The drilling head

location shall be monitored in the three following dimensions:

a) Offset from the baseline.

b) Distance along the baseline.

c) Depth of cover.

315-8 HOLE BORING.

315-8.1 Pilot Hole Bore.

1. Pilot hole shall be drilled along bore path. In the event that the pilot bore does

deviate from the bore path, you shall notify the Engineer and the Engineer may

require you to pull-back and re-drill from the location along bore path before the

deviation.

2. You shall limit curvature in any direction to reduce force on the pipe during

pull-back. The minimum radius of curvature shall be no less than that specified

by the pipe manufacturer and as indicated on the Plans. In the event that a

drilling fluid fracture, inadvertent returns, or returns loss occurs during pilot

hole drilling operations, you shall cease drilling and contact the Engineer.

3. The pilot hole bore alignment shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the

back reaming phase and pipe installation.

315-8.2 Reaming.

1. After successfully completing the pilot hole, the bore hole shall be reamed. A

swivel shall be used between the reaming head and the fusible pipe to

minimize torsion stress on the assembly.

315-9 CARRIER PIPE.

1. Carrier pipe materials shall be approved by the Engineer. You shall use only

HDPE. You shall furnish and install a structurally sound, leak-proof, fusible high

density polyethelene pipe for all piping identified for installation by horizontal

directional drilling. You shall be responsible for the sizing of the carrier pipe to

withstand all installation forces, curvature, residual forces, and final in-place

loading. The selected material shall have an inside diameter no less than what

is stated on the Plans. Individual pipe lengths shall be assembled by butt-

fusion unless otherwise specified.

315-10 GROUND MONITORING.

1. You shall monitor for ground movement associated with the Work and shall

maintain no ground settlement or heave. The pipe shall be installed in a

manner that does not cause upheaval, settlement, cracking, or movement and

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 322

THE “WHITEBOOK”

distortion of surface features. You shall monitor for ground movement

associated with the Work and make all efforts to maintain no settlement or

heave. Monitoring points shall include the centerline of the designed

installation with points on the adjacent foundations, unless otherwise

approved by the Engineer.

2. You shall be responsible for any damage to existing utilities, structures, and

adjacent properties due to settlement or heave and shall repair or replace

them in kind at no cost to the City.

315-11 VIDEO INSPECTION AND CLEANING.

1. You shall inspect the sewer pipe immediately after the pipe installation in

accordance with 500-3.4, “Video Inspection”. Prior to pipeline CCTV inspection,

you shall perform sewer cleaning in accordance with 500-3, “CLEANING AND

PRELIMINARY INSPECTION”.

315-12 QUALITY CONTROL.

1. Pipe not meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be

abandoned and full pressure grouted in place in accordance with 306-3.3,

“Removal and Abandonment of Existing Conduits and Structures” and an

alternate installation shall be done at no cost to the City. The abandoned pipe

shall be properly shown on the Red-lines.

2. Line shall not vary from designed centerline by more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

horizontally and shall always be within the confined right of way. Grade shall

always intersect the tie-in, provide a properly functioning gravity sewer, shall be ±

1% of design grade at all times, and never less than 1% for sewer mains and 2%

for sewer laterals, unless otherwise shown on the plans.

3. If misalignment is encountered during installation due to voids surrounding

the existing pipe, you shall replace the defective section by making point

repairs that shall be acceptable to the Engineer. You shall be compensated for

such corrective measures if the Engineer determines that such difficulties are

due to existing voids. If you do not inform and demonstrate this to the

Engineer, the misalignment shall be considered to be caused by your failure

to follow correct installation procedures and corrective measures shall be

done at your expense.

4. If pre-installation CCTV inspection reveals sag, offset joints, or obstructions in

the existing sewer, you shall install the replacement pipe for an acceptable

finished product. You shall take the necessary measures to eliminate the

unacceptable conditions described in these specifications by making point

repairs in accordance with 500-4, “PIPELINE POINT REPAIR AND/OR

REPLACEMENT”, or by other measures acceptable to the Engineer.

5. You shall re-drill another line at no additional cost to the City if gouges or

excessive surface damage of more than 10% of the wall thickness occur.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 323

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6. The tolerance for the annular space shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm) unless you

demonstrate that a proposed higher tolerance is the minimum possible

without affecting the main pipeline.

7. Testing of materials shall be in accordance with 500-5.1.1, “Sampling, Testing,

and Installation”. Testing of the finished pipe shall be performed in accordance

with 306-7.8, “Gravity Pipeline Testing”.

8. During installation, you shall install a rock trap in the downstream manhole.

Install the trap daily prior to the commencement of Work and monitor it during

Working hours. The trap shall be removed at the end of each Working Day.

315-13 SEWER LATERAL CONNECTIONS.

1. You shall locate and expose sewer lateral connections prior to pipe

installation. Reconnections shall be performed immediately after mainline

horizontal directional drilling. Sewer laterals shall be reconnected to the pipe

by using heat or electro-fusion tee or wye (Y) or strap saddles. Heat or electro-

fusion tees and wye saddles shall be made of a polyethylene pipe compound

that meets the requirements of ASTM D1248, Class C, suitable for fusion

welding to polyethylene pipe. Once saddles are secured in place, a hole shall

be drilled to the size of the full inside diameter of the saddle outlet. Edges shall

be smooth and free of abraded and loose material.

315-14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT.

1. The payment for horizontal directional drilling Work shall include the pipe

material and shall be included in the linear foot Bid item for “Horizontal

Directional Drilling and Pipe”.

2. The payment for each sewer lateral connection associated with Horizontal

Direction Drilling shall be included in the bid item for “Sewer Lateral

Connection to HDD Pipe”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 324

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

SECTION 316 – PIPE BURSTING

316-1 GENERAL.

1. Pipe bursting is the process of bursting the existing pipe and compressing the

old pipe sections into the surrounding soil while simultaneously installing a

new pipe of the same or larger size inside the annulus created followed by

sewer lateral reconnections. When specified or as approved by the Engineer,

pipe bursting shall be subject to these specifications.

316-2 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS AND SUBMITTALS.

1. You shall be a certified installer trained and experienced in the use of the pipe

bursting method. The pipe welding shall be performed by personnel trained,

experienced, and certified in the use of the welding equipment.

2. You shall submit the following items for the Engineer’s approval prior to

ordering pipe materials and the start of the Work:

a) List of past projects successfully completed by the personnel leading

the Work, including at least 5 miles in the last 5 years, and current

reference for each project.

b) Certification that you are licensed by the trenchless pipe replacement

system manufacturer as an installer of their system.

c) Pipe fusion or welding operator certification by the fusion or welding

equipment manufacturers.

d) Construction procedure for pipe installation:

i. Proposed dimensions, locations, methods of excavation,

shoring, and bracing of insertion and receiving pits.

ii. Equipment technical data and operating procedures.

iii. Manufacturer recommendations for handling, storage, and

repair of pipe and fittings.

iv. CCTV inspection performed to locate live services, sags, offset

joints, obstructions, and all other necessary information in

accordance with 500-3.4, “Video Inspection”.

v. Proposed point repair locations and methods.

vi. Method of construction, reconnection, and restoration of

existing sewer laterals.

vii. Sewer bypass plans as required. Provide contingency plans for

approval for the following potential conditions:

• Monitoring for loss of ground or heaving

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 325

THE “WHITEBOOK”

• Encountering an unforeseen obstruction

• Loss of, and return to, line and grade

e) Pipe physical properties and specifications. Calculations indicating that

the method or process used does not exceed the allowable tensile and

compression limits of the pipe. Provide the proposed tracking method to

be used during construction (such as pulling logs).

316-3 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE INSTALLATION.

1. Sections of polyethylene replacement pipe shall be assembled and joined on

the Site above the ground. The replacement pipe shall be joined in appropriate

working lengths near the insertion pit. Jointing shall be accomplished by the

heating and butt-fusion system in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s

printed instructions. The joints shall have a smooth, uniform, double rolled

back bead between 1/8 inch and 3/16 inch (3.2 mm and 4.8 mm) made while

applying the proper melt, pressure, and alignment. The beads shall be

removed prior to pipe installation. The final pipe surfaces shall be smooth

after bead removal. Joints shall be made available for inspection by the

Engineer before insertion.

2. Pipes shall be capable of withstanding all forces imposed in the process of

installation and the final in-place loading conditions. The pipe, including the

ends and joints, shall be protected against damage. Any pipe damaged during

installation shall be replaced by you. The replacement of damaged pipe or

installation of a new pipe shall be at no additional cost to the City.

3. The installed replacement pipe shall be continuous over the entire length of

each pipe segment from manhole to manhole. Replacement pipe with gashes,

nicks, abrasions, or any such physical damage which may have occurred

during storage or handling shall not be used and shall be removed from the

Site. You shall exercise care in handling the pipe and shall not drag the pipe

on pavement.

316-4 INSERTION OR ACCESS PITS (SHAFT).

1. See 315-4, “INSERTION OR ACCESS PITS (SHAFT)”.

316-5 SEWER LATERAL CONNECTIONS.

1. You shall locate and expose sewer lateral connections prior to the pipe installation.

Reconnections shall be performed immediately after mainline pipe bursting.

Sewer laterals shall be reconnected to the pipe by using heat or electro-fusion

tee or wye or strap saddles. Heat or electro-fusion tees and wye saddles shall

be made of a polyethylene pipe compound that meets the requirements of

ASTM D1248, Class C, suitable for fusion welding to polyethylene pipe. Once

saddles are secured in place, a hole shall be drilled to the size of the full inside

diameter of the saddle outlet. Edges shall be smooth and free of abraded and

loose material.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 326

THE “WHITEBOOK”

316-6 GROUND MONITORING.

1. See 315-10, “GROUND MONITORING”.

316-7 VIDEO INSPECTION AND CLEANING.

1. See 315-11, “VIDEO INSPECTION AND CLEANING”.

316-8 QUALITY CONTROL.

1. SEE 315-12, “QUALITY CONTROL”.

316-9 PAYMENT.

1. The payment for pipe bursting Work shall include the pipe material and shall

be included in the linear foot Bid item for “Pipe Bursting”.

2. The payment for each sewer lateral connection associated with Pipe Bursting shall

be included in the Bid item for “Sewer Lateral Connection to Pipe Bursting”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 327

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

SECTION 317 - PIPE FUSION

317-1 PIPE FUSION FOR SEWER MAINS.

317-1.1 Fusion Technician Requirements.

1. Fusible HDPE pipe shall be fused by qualified fusion technicians, as documented

by the pipe supplier. Training records for qualified fusion technicians shall be

available to the Engineer upon request. The fusion technician shall be fully

qualified by the pipe supplier to install fusible HDPE pipe of the type(s) and size(s)

being used.

317-1.2 Fusion Process.

1. Fusible pipe shall be handled in a safe and non-destructive manner before,

during, and after the fusion process and in accordance with these

specifications and pipe supplier’s recommendations.

2. The fusible pipe shall be installed without exceeding the recommended

bending radius.

3. Where fusible pipe is installed by pulling in tension, the recommended safe

pulling force, according to the pipe supplier, shall not be exceeded.

4. Only appropriately sized and outfitted fusion machines that have been

approved by the pipe supplier shall be used for the fusion process.

5. Fusion machines shall incorporate the following properties and elements:

a) HEAT PLATE – Heat plates shall be in good condition with no deep

gouges or scratches within the pipe circle being fused. Plates shall be

clean and free of any contamination. Heater controls shall properly

function and cords and plugs shall be in good condition. The

appropriately sized heat plate shall be capable of maintaining a

uniform and consistent heat profile and temperature for the size of

pipe being fused per the pipe supplier’s recommendations.

b) CARRIAGE – Carriage shall travel smoothly with no binding at less than

50 psi. Jaws shall be in good condition with proper inserts for the pipe

size being fused. Insert pins shall be installed with no interference to

carriage travel.

c) GENERAL MACHINE – Overview of machine body shall yield no obvious

defects, missing parts, or potential safety issues during fusion.

d) DATALOGGER – The current version of the pipe supplier’s recommended

and compatible software shall be used. Protective cases shall be utilized

for the hand held wireless portion of the unit. Datalogger operations and

maintenance manuals shall be with the unit at all times. If fusing for

extended periods of time, an independent 110V power source shall be

available to extend battery life.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 328

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6. Other equipment specifically required for the fusion process shall include the

following:

a) Pipe rollers shall be used for support of pipe to either side of the

machine.

b) A weather protection canopy that allows full machine motion of the

heat plate, fusion assembly, and carriage shall be provided for fusion

in inclement and/or windy weather.

c) Fusion machine operations and maintenance manuals shall be kept

with the fusion machine at all times.

d) Facing blades specifically designed for cutting fusible PVC pipe.

7. Each fusion joint shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring

device (Datalogger) connected to the fusion machine. The fusion data logging

and joint report shall be generated by software developed specifically for the

fusion of fusible PVC pipe. The software shall include fusible HDPE pipe based

dimensional data and fusible PVC pipe based interfacial pressure relationships.

Data not logged by the Datalogger shall be logged manually and be included in

the Fusion Technician’s joint report.

317-1.3 Fusion Joints.

1. Unless otherwise specified, fusible HDPE pipe lengths shall be assembled in

the field with butt-fused joints. You shall follow the pipe supplier’s written

instructions for this procedure. Joint strength shall be equal to the pipe as

demonstrated by the testing requirements. Fusion joints shall be completed

as described in these specifications.

2. All internal and external beads shall be removed prior to installation in

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. The final pipe surfaces

shall be smooth after bead removal. Joints shall be made available for

inspection by the Engineer before insertion.

3. PVC gasketed and push-on fittings and retainer glands shall be installed per

the manufacturer’s recommendations.

317-1.4 Pipe Installation.

1. The pipe, including the ends and joints, shall be protected against damage.

Any pipe damaged during the installation shall be replaced by you. Pipe shall

be fused prior to insertion. The installed replacement pipe shall be continuous

over the entire length from manhole to manhole. Replacement pipe with

gashes, nicks, abrasions, or any such physical damage which may have

occurred during storage or handling shall not be used and shall be removed

from the Site. You shall exercise care in handling the pipe and shall not drag

the pipe on pavement.

317-1.5 Pipe Pull-Back and Insertion.

1. You shall handle the pipe in a manner that will not over-stress the pipe prior

to insertion. Vertical and horizontal curves shall be limited so that the pipe

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 329

THE “WHITEBOOK”

does not over-deflect, buckle, or otherwise become damaged. Damaged

portions of the pipe shall be removed and replaced.

2. The pipe entry area shall be graded if needed to provide support for the pipe

and to allow free movement into the bore hole. The pipe shall be guided into

the bore hole to avoid deformation of or damage to the pipe.

3. The fusible pipe may be continuously or partially supported on rollers or by

other Engineer-approved and friction-decreasing supports during joining and

insertion if the pipe is not overstressed or critically abraded prior to or during

installation.

4. Buoyancy modification shall be at your sole discretion and shall not exceed

the pipe supplier’s recommendations. Damage caused by buoyancy

modifications shall be your responsibility.

5. Once pull-back operations have commenced, the operation shall continue

without interruption until the pipe is completely pulled through the bore hole.

Except for drill rod removal, pull-back operations shall not cease until the pipe

has been completely installed to final position. During the pull-back

operations, excessive pull-back force shall be reported to the Engineer.

317-1.6 Connection to Sanitary Sewer Manholes and Structures.

1. Fusible HDPE pipe shall be connected to manholes and other structures to

provide a leak-free and properly graded flow into or out of the manhole or

structure.

2. For a cored or drilled opening, provide a flexible and watertight connection

that meets or exceeds ASTM C923.

3. For a knockout opening, provide a watertight connection meeting the material

requirements of ASTM C923 that is securely attached to the pipe with stainless

steel bands or other means.

4. For grout openings in manhole walls with non-shrink grout, pour a concrete

collar around the pipe and outside the manhole opening. Provide flexible pipe

joints or flexible connectors within 2 feet (0.6 m) of collar.

5. A flexible and watertight gasket per ASTM C923 shall be cast integrally with

riser section(s) for all precast manhole and structures.

6. Grout internal joint space with non-shrink grout.

317-1.7 Ground Monitoring.

1. See 315-10, “GROUND MONITORING”.

317-1.8 Video Inspection and Cleaning.

1. See 315-11, “VIDEO INSPECTION AND CLEANING”.

317-1.9 Quality Control.

1. See 315-12, “QUALITY CONTROL”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 330

THE “WHITEBOOK”

317-1.10 Payment.

1. The payment for pipe fusion Work shall be included in the linear foot Bid item

for “Fusible HDPE Pipe”.

2. The payment for each sewer lateral connection associated with fusible HDPE

pipe shall be included in the Bid item for “Sewer Lateral Connection” in

accordance with 306-17.2, “Payment”.

317-2 PIPE FUSION FOR WATER MAINS.

317-2.1 Fusion Technician Requirements.

1. Fusible Pressure PVC Pipe shall be butt-fused by qualified fusion technicians,

as certified by the pipe supplier. Training records for qualified fusion

technicians shall be available to the Engineer upon request. The fusion

technician shall be fully qualified by the pipe supplier to install fusible Pressure

PVC pipe of the type(s) and size(s) being used.

317-2.2 Fusion Process.

1. Fusible pipe shall be handled in a safe and non-destructive manner before,

during, and after the fusion process and in accordance with these

specifications and pipe supplier’s recommendations.

2. Fusible PVC pipe shall be butt-fused by qualified fusion technicians, as certified

by the pipe supplier.

3. Each fusion joint shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring

device (data logger) connected to the fusion machine.

4. The fusible pipe shall be installed without exceeding the recommended

bending radius.

5. Where fusible pipe is installed by pulling in tension, the recommended safe

pulling force, according to the pipe supplier, shall not be exceeded.

6. Only appropriately sized and outfitted fusion machines that have been

approved by the pipe supplier shall be used for the fusion process.

7. Fusion machines shall incorporate the following properties and elements:

a) HEAT PLATE – Heat plates shall be in good condition with no deep

gouges or scratches within the pipe circle being fused. Plates shall be

clean and free of any contamination. Heater controls shall properly

function and cords and plugs shall be in good condition. The

appropriately sized heat plate shall be capable of maintaining a

uniform and consistent heat profile and temperature for the size of

pipe being fused per the pipe supplier’s recommendations.

b) CARRIAGE – Carriage shall travel smoothly with no binding at less than 50

psi. Jaws shall be in good condition with proper inserts for the pipe size

being fused. Insert pins shall be installed with no interference to carriage

travel.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 331

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) GENERAL MACHINE – Overview of machine body shall yield no obvious

defects, missing parts, or potential safety issues during fusion.

d) DATALOGGER – The current version of the pipe supplier’s

recommended and compatible software shall be used. Protective

cases shall be utilized for the hand held wireless portion of the unit.

Datalogger operations and maintenance manual shall be with the unit

at all times. If fusing for extended periods of time, an independent 110

V power source shall be available to extend battery life.

8. Other equipment specifically required for the fusion process shall include the

following:

a) Pipe rollers shall be used for support of pipe to either side of the

machine.

b) A weather protection canopy that allows full machine motion of the

heat plate, fusion assembly, and carriage shall be provided for fusion

in inclement and /or windy weather.

c) An infrared (IR) pyrometer for checking pipe and heat plate temperatures.

d) Fusion machine operations and maintenance manual shall be kept

with the fusion machine at all times.

e) Facing blades specifically designed for cutting fusible PVC pipe.

9. Each fusion joint shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring

device (Datalogger) connected to the fusion machine. The fusion data logging

and joint report shall be generated by software developed specifically for the

fusion of fusible PVC pipe. The software shall include fusible HDPE pipe based

dimensional data and fusible PVC pipe based interfacial pressure

relationships. Data not logged by the Datalogger shall be logged manually and

be included in the Fusion Technician’s joint report.

317-2.3 Fusion Joints.

1. Unless otherwise specified, fusible pressure PVC pipe lengths shall be

assembled in the field with butt-fused joints. You shall follow the pipe

supplier’s written instructions for this procedure. Joint strength shall be equal

to the pipe as demonstrated by testing requirements. Fusion joints shall be

completed as described in these specifications.

2. All external beads shall be removed prior to installation in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendation. The final pipe surfaces shall be smooth after

bead removal. Internal beads need not be removed. Joints shall be made

available for inspection by the Engineer before insertion.

3. PVC gasketed and push-on fittings and retainer glands shall be installed per

the manufacturer’s recommendations.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 332

THE “WHITEBOOK”

317-2.4 Pipe Installation.

1. The pipe, including the ends and joints, shall be protected against damage.

Any pipe damaged during installation shall be replaced by you. Pipe shall be

fused prior to insertion. Replacement pipe with gashes, nicks, abrasions, or

any such physical damage which may have occurred during storage or

handling shall not be used and shall be removed from the Site. You shall

exercise care in handling the pipe and shall not drag the pipe on pavement.

2. During installation, comply with the following:

a) Installation guidelines from the pipe supplier shall be followed for all

installations.

b) The fusible PVC pipe shall be installed in a manner so as not to exceed

the recommended bending radius.

c) Where fusible PVC pipe is installed by pulling in tension, the recommended

safe pulling force established by the pipe supplier shall not be exceeded.

317-2.5 Pipe Pull-back and Insertion.

1. You shall handle the pipe in a manner that will not over-stress the pipe prior

to insertion. Vertical and horizontal curves shall be limited so that the pipe

does not over-deflect, buckle, or otherwise become damaged. Damaged

portions of the pipe shall be removed and replaced.

2. The pipe entry area shall be graded if needed to provide support for the pipe

and to allow free movement into the bore hole. The pipe shall be guided into

the bore hole to avoid deformation of or damage to the pipe.

3. The fusible pipe may be continuously or partially supported on rollers or other

Engineer approved friction decreasing implement during joining and insertion,

if the pipe is not over-stressed or critically abraded prior to or during

installation.

4. Buoyancy modification shall be at your sole discretion and shall not exceed

the pipe supplier’s recommendations. Damage caused by buoyancy

modifications shall be your responsibility.

5. Once pull-back operations have commenced, the operation shall continue

without interruption until the pipe is completely pulled through the bore hole.

Except for drill rod removal, pull-back operations shall not cease until the pipe

has been completely installed to final position. During the pull-back

operations, excessive pull-back force shall be reported to the Engineer.

317-2.6 Preparation Prior to Connections to Existing Pipe System.

1. Approximate locations of existing piping systems are shown on the Plans. Prior

to making connections into existing piping systems, you shall:

a) Field verify locations, sizes, piping materials, and piping systems of the

existing pipe.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 333

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Obtain all required fittings, which may include saddles, sleeve type

couplings, flanges, tees, or others as shown on the Plans.

c) Have installed all temporary pumps and/or pipes.

2. Unless otherwise approved, new piping systems shall be completely installed

and successfully tested prior to making connections into existing pipe systems.

317-2.7 Pipe System Connections.

1. Pipe connections shall be installed per the applicable standards and regulations

as well as per the connection manufacturer’s guidelines and as indicated on the

Plans.

2. Pipe connections to structures shall be installed per applicable standards and

regulations as well as per the connection manufacturer’s guidelines.

317-2.8 Tapping for Potable and Non-potable Water.

1. Tapping shall be performed using standard tapping saddles designed for use on

PVC piping in accordance with AWWA C605. Tapping shall be performed only with

use of tap saddles or sleeves. Direct tapping shall not be permitted. Tapping shall

be performed in accordance with the applicable sections for saddle tapping per Uni-

Pub-8.

2. All connections requiring a larger diameter than that recommended by the pipe

supplier shall be made with a pipe connection as specified and indicated on the

Drawings.

3. Equipment used for tapping shall be made specifically for tapping PVC pipe.

a) Tapping bits shall be slotted “shell” style cutters specifically made for

PVC pipe. “Hole saws” made for cutting wood, steel, ductile iron, or

other materials shall be strictly prohibited.

b) Manually operated or power operated drilling machines may be used.

c) Taps may be performed while the pipeline is filled with water and

under pressure (wet tap) or when the pipeline is not filled with water

and not under pressure (dry tap).

317-2.9 Hydrostatic Test for Pressure Pipe.

1. Testing shall comply with 306-8.9.2, “Hydrostatic Pressure Test” and all

applicable jurisdictional building codes, statutes, standards, regulations, and

laws.

a) Hydrostatic and leakage testing for piping systems that contain

mechanical jointing as well as fused PVC jointing shall comply with

AWWA C605.

b) A simultaneous hydrostatic and leakage test following installation with

a pressure equal to 150% of the working pressure at point of test but

not less than 100% of the normal working pressure at highest elevation

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 334

THE “WHITEBOOK”

shall be applied, unless otherwise approved by the engineer. The

duration of the pressure test shall be for 2 hours.

c) If hydrostatic testing and leakage testing are performed at

separate times, follow procedures as outlined in AWWA C605.

d) In preparation for pressure testing, the following parameters shall be

followed:

i. All air shall be vented from the pipeline prior to pressurization.

This may be accomplished with the use of the air relief valves or

corporation stop valves, vent piping in the testing hardware or

end caps, or any other method which adequately allows air to

escape the pipeline at all high points. Venting may also be

accomplished by “flushing” the pipeline in accordance with the

parameters and procedures as described in AWWA C605.

317-2.10 Disinfection of the Potable Water Pipe.

1. After installation and after passing all required testing, the pipeline shall be

disinfected prior to being put into service.

2. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the pipeline shall be disinfected in

accordance with 306-8.9.4, “Disinfection” and in accordance with AWWA C651.

317-2.11 Ground Monitoring.

1. See 315-10, “GROUND MONITORING”.

317-2.12 Payment.

1. The payment for pipe fusion Work shall be included in the linear foot Bid item

for “Fusible Pressure PVC Pipe”.

2. The payment for water service connections associated with fusible pressure

PVC Pipe shall be paid for in accordance with 306-15.8 “Pipeline Appurtenance”

END OF PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION METHODS

3. PART 4PART 4

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 335

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 336

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 4

EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS (A)

SECTION 400 - PROTECTION AND RESTORATION

400-1 GENERAL. Paragraph (2), DELETE in its entirety.

ADD the following:

1. You shall repair or replace all existing improvements within the project area

which are

not designated for removal (curbs, sidewalks, driveways, fences,

walls, signs, utility installations,

pavement, structures, and etc.) that have been

damaged or removed as a result of your operations. When a portion

of a

sprinkler system within the project area must be removed, the remaining lines

shall be capped.

Repairs and replacements shall be at least equal to the

existing improvements and shall match them in finish

and dimension.

2. The City reserves the right to repair damages to the City’s facilities caused by

your operations at your expense.

3. You are responsible for coordinating with property owners for access to be

provided to Work on the private property.

4. Underground Work disturbing and requiring the restoration of loop detectors

and/or other detection systems shall be replaced within 3 Working Days of the

completion of that Work and trench cap. When street overlay Work is required,

replace loop detectors and/or other detection systems in accordance with 404-

9, “TRAFFIC SIGNAL LOOP DETECTORS”.

5. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, you shall act, at

your discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Any change in

Contract Price or Contract Time resulting from emergency Work shall be

determined as provided in SECTION 2 – SCOPE OF THE WORK.

ADD:

400-1.1 Video Recording of Existing Conditions.

1. To document the Site deficiencies for which you are not responsible for, you

shall video record the existing conditions of the Site in advance of the Work.

Examples of the items to be recorded may include, but not be limited to:

a) Property markers.

b) Right-of-Way and easement conditions.

c) Utility markings.

d) Survey conditions.

e) Pavement conditions.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 337

THE “WHITEBOOK”

f) Location and conditions of the existing pavement markers and

striping.

g) Adjacent property conditions.

h) Sidewalk, walk, median, curb, and gutter conditions.

i) Safety conditions.

j) Unusual conditions or equipment.

k) Existing canyon conditions (including vegetation) along the pipe

corridor.

l) Existing vegetation.

m) Existing turf grass conditions.

n) Existing site improvements.

o) Existing fencing, walls and gates.

p) Any defacing, including graffiti.

2. Submit the DVD recordings to the Engineer prior to the mobilization of each

project phase.

400-1.1.1 Payment.

1. The payment for video recording services shall be included in the Bid item for

“Video Recording of Existing Conditions”.

ADD:

400-1.2 Placement and Removal of Markouts.

1. Markouts refer to the temporary marking or painting of the ground, pavement,

or sidewalk by the facility or utility owner or its representative for your

convenience.

2. Do not place Markouts in the public right-of-way more than 30 Days prior to

the commencement of excavation.

3. Remove Markouts from all surfaces in the public right-of-way, including

decorative surfaces, within 30 Calendar Days of the completion of the Work.

400-1.2.1 Payment.

1. The payment for the placement and removal of Markouts shall be included in

the Contract Price.

ADD:

400-1.3 Construction Maintenance and Temporary Improvements.

1. Where construction fencing and other construction appurtenances impact

existing irrigation systems you shall install temporary irrigation improvements

outside of the project boundary to ensure adequate irrigation coverage is

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 338

THE “WHITEBOOK”

maintained. You shall be responsible for the design of temporary irrigation

improvements.

2. You shall be responsible for the maintenance of existing landscaping within

five feet of the construction boundary. At a minimum, maintenance shall

include weed abatement, litter pick-up, mowing and trimming.

3. You shall ensure your operations do not impact City maintenance crews

from completing their work outside the boundaries of the project.

400-2 PERMANENT SURVEY MARKERS. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. Pursuant to Division 3, Chapter 15 of the Business and Professions Code, you

shall not disturb survey monuments that “control the location of subdivisions,

tracts, boundaries, roads, streets, or highways, or provide horizontal or vertical

survey control” until they have been tied out by a Registered Land Surveyor or

Registered Civil Engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the State

of California.

2. Monument Preservation shall be performed by the City’s Construction

Management and Field Services (CMFS) Division on all Projects, unless

permission is obtained for these services in writing by CMFS.

3. You shall submit to the Engineer a minimum of 7 Calendar Days prior to the start

of the Work a list of controlling survey monuments which may be disturbed. CMFS

(or the private owner for Permit Work) shall perform the following:

a) Set survey points outside the affected Work area that reference and

locate each controlling survey monument that may be disturbed.

b) File a Corner Record or Record of Survey with the County Surveyor

after setting the survey points to be used for re-establishment of the

disturbed controlling survey monuments.

c) File a Corner Record or Record of Survey with the County Surveyor

after re-establishment of the disturbed controlling survey

monuments.

400-3 PAYMENT. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

400-3 TREE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION.

400-3.1 General. You shall prevent or minimize the following:

1. Root cutting or damage – root systems of trees are extensive and often

asymmetric. Roots are damaged by:

a) Excavation equipment cutting roots during grade change or other

activities.

b) Trenching equipment used for gas, water, sewer, electrical,

communication, irrigation, and other utility installations.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 339

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) Coring or boring during discovery.

d) Burial of debris.

e) Adding fill soil over roots.

f) Altering water tables, water movement, and drainage patterns.

2. Soil compaction – most soil compaction results from vehicle and equipment

traffic, although foot traffic and rainwater impact may also contribute to a

lesser extent. The severity of compaction depends on the force per area unit

applied to the soil, frequency of application, surface cover, soil texture, and

soil moisture. Soils with a clay or loam texture, high moisture content, or low

levels of organic matter are more susceptible to compaction than are dry,

coarse-textured soils, and those high in organic matter.

3. Injury to the trunk, major roots, and crown – mechanical injury can be caused

by equipment used for land clearing, grading, construction, material delivery

and landscaping. When injury occurs on bark or other conductive and

protective tissues, the capacity of the tree to transport water, nutrients,

carbohydrates and signaling compounds is reduced. Insects are attracted to

wounds and barriers to pathogen entry are compromised in trees with this

type of damage, making them susceptible to future structural and health

concerns.

4. Heat damage – foliage, branches, trunks, and some roots can be injured by hot

equipment exhaust.

5. Chemical damage – certain chemicals, such as cleaning solvents, paint

thinners, oils, and fuels may be lethal to the foliage and roots of trees. These

types of injuries are rarely correctable, and place added stress on the tree.

Contaminated water runoff from concrete trucks or other equipment can alter

soil chemistry and cause root damage or disruption of nutrient uptake.

6. Trunk flare or root collar damage – soil or debris placed against the trunk or

over the buttress roots favor the development of certain root disease

pathogens, insect pests and encourage stem girdling roots.

400-3.2 Defining the Tree Protection Zone.

1. A tree’s Critical Root Zone (CRZ) is the area immediately adjacent to the trunk

where roots essential for the tree’s health and stability are located. A Tree

Protection Zone (TPZ) is an arborist-defined area surrounding the trunk,

intended to protect roots and soil within the CRZ and beyond. When defining

the TPZ the Trunk Diameter Method will be used to calculate the appropriate

TPZ. The trunk diameter method is based on the trunk diameter measured at

DBH (4.5 feet above grade); this measurement is multiplied by a factor of 15

to determine the radius of the TPZ. The unit of measure used to calculate the

DBH (inches) will be the same unit as the radius of the TPZ. For example, a tree

with a 30-inch trunk diameter would have a TPZ radius of 450 inches (37.5

feet).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 340

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Even when the TPZ is placed at a location defined by the Trunk Diameter

Method, large portions of the root system may be lost. The arborist will inspect

the tree and site and alter the TPZ as needed to provide adequate tree

protection. Trees on adjacent properties may also need to have TPZs

established if they are close to construction activities. Compromising the TPZ

and damaging roots within the CRZ will reduce likelihood of long-term tree

survival and increase the risk of tree failure.

400-3.3 Pre-Construction Consultation with Project Arborist.

1. Prior to construction, tree removals, TPZ establishment, or staging of

construction materials and equipment, a pre-construction consultation with

the assigned project Arborist shall take place on site to ensure understanding

of the scope of tree conservation and removal activities. The project managers,

construction contractors, engineers, architects, project arborists and utility

representatives may be included in this meeting.

400-3.4 Tree Protection Zone Fencing and Signage.

1. TPZ barriers shall be erected around the zone’s perimeter before any site work

begins. Fencing shall be sturdy and highly visible to discourage entry into and

disturbance of the area. Fencing shall be 4 to 6 feet tall and solidly anchored

onto the ground. TPZ barriers shall be clearly marked with signs stating that

the area within is a Tree Protection Zone and that entry is prohibited without

prior authorization from the project arborist. Signs shall contain contact

information for the contractor and project arborist.

400-3.5 Soil and Root Protection within the Tree Protection Zone.

1. If foot or vehicular traffic or construction activities cannot be kept outside of

the TPZ for the entire duration of construction, you shall disperse the load and

minimize soil compaction and mechanical root damage using the following

methods:

a) Applying 6 to 12-inch-thick layer of 4-inch mulch to the area.

b) Laying 3/4 -inch minimum thickness plywood or road mats over a 4

inch thick layer of 4-inch mulch.

c) Applying 4 to 6 inches of gravel over a taut, staked, geotextile fabric.

2. Stone, geotextile, and mulch exceeding 4 inches thick shall be removed from

the TPZ once the threat of soil or root damage has passed. Any removal of

vegetation or spreading of mulch materials within the TPZ shall be performed

manually, and all efforts shall be made to protect the soil.

3. Small power equipment or hand tools shall be used any time work is done

within the TPZ to reduce potential for tree damage. Excavations within the TPZ

shall be done using specialized tools designed for root pruning or gentle

excavation methods, including air excavation tools, pressurized water, or hand

tools, as described in the 400-3.6, “Root Pruning within the Tree Protection

Zone”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 341

THE “WHITEBOOK”

400-3.6 Root Pruning within the Tree Protection Zone.

1. Root pruning shall be done when existing tree roots are damaged as a result

of construction activities. The two acceptable methods of root pruning are:

a) Soil excavation using air excavation tools, pressurized water, or hand

tools, followed by selective root cutting using a sharp and sanitary

blade.

b) Cutting through the soil along a predetermined line on the surface

using a tool specifically designed to cut roots. Blades shall be sharp

and sanitary.

2. Damaged roots shall be pruned to result in a flat surface with the adjacent

bark firmly attached. Exposed roots shall be pruned with sharp and sanitary

tools, such as loppers, hand saws, or small chain saws. Pruning paints or

wound dressings shall not be used.

3. You shall not prune roots near the trunk or within the dripline of the tree

unless directed to do so by the Arborist.

400-3.8 Grade Changes and Fill within the Tree Protection Zone.

1. When adding fill soil over an existing tree root system, you shall keep the fill

soil as far from the trunk and in as think a layer as possible. Coarse-textured

fill soils shall be used Compaction of the original site soil and the fill soil shall

be minimized to the greatest extent possible.

2. Place the fill soil in direct contact with the original grade with no geotextile or

gravel layer.

3. If fill is installed over the tree roots, ensure the original root zone soil remains

hydrated. Soil moisture in the fill and native soil shall be monitored and

irrigation provided when needed.

400-3.9 Irrigation and Mulch.

1. Irrigation shall be provided within the TPZ when irrigation was previously

present or when the hydrology of the site has been altered. Ensure irrigation

water penetrates the soil to the depth of the tree roots, generally within the

upper 6 to 18 inches of the original soil surface. Monitor soil moisture with soil

moisture sensors as directed by the Engineer.

400-3.10 Pruning.

1. Removal of dead, diseased, or dying branches before construction is

recommended to reduce the risk of branch failures impacting people,

structures, or equipment in the construction area. Crown raising or reduction

may be required to allow trucks, cranes, and other equipment to access the

site. The assigned Park Arborist will determine what pruning should take place

prior to the start of construction activities. Unless otherwise directed by the

project arborist, you shall not remove live interior branches or reduce the

crown to compensate for root loss.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 342

THE “WHITEBOOK”

400-3.11 Landscape Installation

1. Soil beneath tree canopies shall not be roto tilled, compacted with a lawn

roller, or planted to turf. Alternative methods of seeding shall be used to avoid

root disturbance.

400-4 PAYMENT.

1. No separate or additional payment will be made for 1) protection of existing

improvements, and 2) restoration of existing improvements. Damaged

permanent survey markers will be restored

by the Agency at your expense.

2. Where there is a difference in value between the tree lost and the

replacement tree due to your operation, the difference will be deducted

from the Contract payment. The value of the tree lost shall be determined

by the Engineer and approved Arborist, using the latest International Society

of Arboriculture (ISA) guidelines for value determination.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 343

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 401 - REMOVAL

401-2 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. Bituminous pavement shall be cut and removed in such a manner so as not to

tear, bulge, or displace adjacent paving by use of saw cutting, rockwheel,

jackhammer, or milling machine.

2. Wheel-type pressure cutters and drop hammer cutters shall not be permitted

for final edge cut. Saw cutting of edges to be joined is optional.

3. Where only the surface of existing bituminous pavement is to be removed, the

method of removal shall be approved by the Engineer and a minimum laying

depth of 1 inch (25.4 mm) of new pavement material shall be provided at the

join line.

4. Where bituminous pavement adjoins a trench, the edges adjacent to the

trench shall be trimmed to neat straight lines before resurfacing to ensure that

all areas to be resurfaced are accessible to the rollers used to compact the

subgrade or paving materials.

401-3.1 Concrete Pavement. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Concrete pavement shall be removed to neatly sawed edges.

2. Saw cuts shall be made to a minimum depth of 1½ inches (38.1 mm).

3. The edges of existing concrete pavement adjacent to trenches, where

damaged subsequent to saw cutting of the pavement, shall again be saw cut

to neat, straight lines for the purpose of removing the damaged pavement

areas. Such saw cuts shall be either parallel to the original saw cuts or shall be

cut on an angle which departs from the original saw cut not more than 1 inch

(25.4 mm) in each 6 inches (152.4 mm).

401-3.2 Concrete Curb, Walks, Sidewalks, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Curb Ramps, Driveway,

and Alley Intersections. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. Concrete shall be removed to neatly sawed edges with saw cuts made to a

minimum depth of 1½ inches (38.1 mm).

2. Concrete walk, sidewalk, or driveway to be removed shall be neatly sawed in

straight lines either parallel to the curb or at right angles to the alignment of

the sidewalk. No section to be replaced shall be smaller than 30 inches (760

mm) in either length or width. If the saw cut in sidewalk or driveway would fall

within 3 feet (0.9 m) of a construction joint, expansion joint, or edge, the

concrete shall be removed to the joint or edge, except that where the saw cut

would fall within 12 inches (304.8 mm) of a score mark, the saw cut shall be

made in and along the score mark.

3. Curb and gutter shall be sawed to a minimum depth of 1½ inches (38.1 mm)

on a neat line at right angles to the curb face.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 344

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. You shall expect to encounter a large amount of tree roots to be removed in

accordance with 401-5.1, “Trees, Stumps, Roots, and Other Landscape”. If you

encounter tree roots larger than 16 inches (406.4 mm) in diameter, you shall

notify the Engineer before the roots are removed. Work at a specific location

shall not commence until your measurements have been accepted by the

Engineer.

5. You shall expect to encounter pavement up to a depth of 12 inches.

6. You shall expect to encounter reinforcing steel in concrete pavement.

ADD:

401-5.1 Trees, Stumps, Roots, and Other Landscape.

1. The removal of a tree shall include removing from the site at the end of each

Working Day all trimmings, wood stumps, roots, surface roots, other

vegetation, debris, and litter resulting from your operation. Cut trees shall not

be stacked for future pick-up, chipping, or both. Roots having a diameter of 4

inches (101.6 mm) or more shall be traced out and removed to a minimum of

2 feet (0.6 m) from finish grade. Roots 4 inches (101.6 mm) or more in

diameter, the tops of which are 6 inches (152.4 mm) or less below the existing

soil level, shall be considered a part of the stump and shall be removed except

where such removal is prevented by existing walks, curbs, buildings, or other

improvements.

2. Stumps shall be removed to a minimum of 15 inches (380 mm) below existing

finish grade. Where the stump removal operation intercepts an in-service

utility line, removal of the stump shall be made to the top of said utility line

with the remaining portion of the stump removed to the required 15 inches

(381 mm) minimum depth. No stump shall be left for more than 1 Working Day

following removal and shall be secured with barricades and mounted flashers.

You shall remove and properly dispose of all non-millable material generated

by the removal operation, including stump grinding, as required above.

3. Where holes or depressions resulting from the removal of trees, stumps,

shrubs, or palms occur, you shall supply standard clean topsoil to backfill and

firmly compact the holes or depressions to finish grade and shall make a

smooth transition to the adjacent ground or pavement level as applicable. The

cavities shall be backfilled the same day following the removal, unless

otherwise directed by the Engineer. The topsoil shall be Class A or as specified

otherwise in the Special Provisions. Backfill under paved areas shall comply

with the specifications for paving.

4. If a tower truck will be required in medians, rights-of-way, and at other sites

where the trees can be reached, it shall not be placed on the lawns. Spikes

shall not be used except when approved by the Engineer.

5. Tree root removal shall include cutting, excavation, disposal, and backfill.

Some locations involve the prior removal of an existing tree in the parkway

area and will affect the final Work product. Other locations involve working

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 345

THE “WHITEBOOK”

around a tree that has been root pruned. You shall exercise due caution when

working around the remaining trees and shall prevent damage to the trunk or

any of its limbs. If damage to a limb occurs, you shall immediately notify the

Engineer. Once excavation has occurred, all efforts shall be made to minimize

the exposure of the tree roots to the air by expediting the forming and pouring

of concrete at that location.

6. Ornamental landscape shall be disposed of or relocated at locations approved

by the Engineer for the property owner’s use.

ADD:

401-5.2 Railroad Tracks and Facilities.

1. Notify the Engineer of any location where abandoned railroad tracks or

appurtenances are found to exist within the excavation.

2. When directed, you shall remove and properly dispose of railroad facilities. The

removal shall include rails, ties, and any other associated facilities found within

the excavation.

3. Where the rail line lies only partially within the trench area, the entire width of

the track shall be removed, including the entire length of each affected tie and

both rails.

401-7 PAYMENT. ADD the following:

1. The payment for existing pavement removal and disposal of up to 12 inches

(304.8 mm) thick, within the excavation, shall be included in the Bid item for

the installation of the mains or the Work that requires pavement removal.

2. The payment for the removal and disposal of existing pavement beyond 12

inches (304.8 mm) thick within the excavation shall be included in the Bid item

for “Additional Pavement Removal and Disposal” and no additional payment

shall be made regardless of the total thickness and composition of existing

pavement removed and disposed.

3. The removal and disposal of railroad tracks and associated facilities within the

excavation shall be measured along the centerline of each pair of rails to be

removed. The payment for “Removal and Disposal of Railroad Tracks” shall include

all Work necessary to remove and dispose of the tracks and associated facilities.

4. The demolition, removal, and disposal of various types of existing hardscape in

parkway areas, such as colored concrete, bricks, flagstone in the parkway or right-

of-way, shall be included in the Bid item for “Remove and Replace Miscellaneous

Hardscape with Topsoil” and shall include the payment for Decomposed Granite

(DG) when required unless a separate Bid item has been provided.

5. The payment for the removal and disposal of tree roots shall be included in

the Bid item for “Root Removal and Disposal”.

6. Work related to tree removal and disposal shall be included in the Bid item for

“Tree Removal and Disposal”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 346

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 402 - UTILITIES

402-1.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The City does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the location and

type of existing utilities and substructures shown on the Plans. You are

responsible to accurately locate, by potholing or other suitable methods, all

existing utilities such as service connections and substructures, as shown on

the Plans and marked out by Underground Service Alert (USA) to prevent

damage to such facilities and to identify any conflicts with the proposed Work.

2. You shall fill all potholes on the same day of potholing if no trenching is to be

performed within 10 Working Days of the excavation. Fully restore all potholes

and any damaged surrounding areas to their original condition unless

otherwise specified by the Engineer.

3. Potholing at any specific location as required by the Plans shall be included in

the Contract Price. Neither shall showing some specific locations on the Plans

relieve you of the responsibility to pothole as previously mentioned in this

subsection.

4. You shall notify the Engineer in writing of any conflicts between existing

utilities and the proposed Work a minimum of 5 Working Days and 300 feet

(91.4 m) in advance of the Work to provide adequate time and space for any

changes to the Work needed to avoid unforeseen conflicts.

5. You shall locate and reconnect all House Connection Sewers (laterals). Sewer

lateral locations of the existing buildings as shown on the Plans are

approximate. House Connections Sewer records are available at the Public

Utilities Department, 2797 Caminito Chollas.

6. Elevations shown on the Plans for existing utilities are based on a search of

record information available during design. Actual elevations will need to be

confirmed by potholing.

7. If an underground utility is uncovered, revealed at, or is contiguous to the Site

which was not indicated in the Contract Documents and which you could not

reasonably have been expected to be aware of, identify and notify the utility

owner of such underground utility and inform the Engineer.

8. When the Construction Documents require that you alter, relocate, or

reconstruct a utility, temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of the

indicated utilities shall be your responsibility to coordinate with the utility

owner.

90 Calendar Days prior to any paving work, you shall notify the utility owner to

provide them adequate time to adjust their utility box frame and cover to

finish grade.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 347

THE “WHITEBOOK”

402-2 PROTECTION. ADD the following:

1. You shall repair or replace traffic signal and lighting system equipment within 72

hours after notification of defects by the Engineer.

2. While working in or around meter boxes, you shall protect in place all

Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) devices attached to the water meter

or located in or near water meter boxes, coffins, or vaults in accordance with

the Contract Documents. This includes any antenna installed through the

meter box lid.

a) Avoid damaging the antenna, cable, and endpoints when removing the

meter box lid and when disconnecting AMI endpoints from the register

on top of the water meter.

b) If meters or AMI devices need to be removed or relocated, the AMI

endpoints shall be reinstalled with the Encoder/Receiver/Transmitter

(ERT) pointing upwards.

c) Because the AMI equipment is uniquely matched to each service

location and to specific meter serial numbers, any AMI devices that are

removed or disconnected shall be reinstalled on the same service

lateral as well as to the same meter serial number it was attached to

originally.

d) Do not change or modify the lid if the lid has an antenna drilled

through it.

e) If you encounter damaged, disconnected, buried, or broken AMI

endpoints, cables between the registers, antennae, lids, or ERTs, notify

the Engineer within 24 hours.

f) Any AMI equipment damaged by you shall be repaired or replaced by

City Forces at your expense.

402-3 REMOVAL. ADD the following:

1. Refer to 306-3 for abandonment of utilities.

402-6 COOPERATION. ADD the following:

1. Unless otherwise specified, notify SDG&E at least 10 Working Days prior to

excavating within 10 feet of SDG&E Underground High Voltage Transmission

Power Lines (69 KV and higher).

ADD:

402-7 EXISTING UTILITIES.

1. Where existing underground utilities are undercut, particular care shall be

exercised in selecting, placing, and compacting backfill material under and around

such utility to assure firm support. For at least 12 inches (304.8 mm) all around

the undercut utility, the backfill material shall conform to 306-6, “BEDDING”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 348

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. You shall be responsible for the altering, relocating, or reconstructing of

portions of existing water or sewer connections which may or may not have

been shown on the Plans or not accurately shown on the Plans, but which are

found to interfere with the Work. You shall contact and coordinate the

alteration, relocation, or reconstruction of gas, electric, cable or telephone

service connections with the owners of the utilities.

3. Abandoned water services (stiffs) not shown on the Plans, but found to

interfere with the progress of Work shall be shut off and cut 6 inches (152.4

mm) from the main.

402-7.1 Support for Existing Water Mains.

1. Existing water mains which are not high-lined shall remain in service during

construction. Water mains shall require vertical and horizontal support at tees,

crosses, bends, and etc.

402-7.2 Pipe Separations.

1. Pipe installation shall be in compliance with the State’s health standards for

separation and the following:

a) You shall notify the Engineer immediately if:

i. 1 foot (0.3 m) vertical separation as measured from the outside

of pipe wall to the outside of pipe wall between sewer mains,

water mains, and/or storm drains cannot be maintained.

ii. 10 feet (3.0 m) horizontal separation as measured from the

outside of pipe wall to the outside of pipe wall between sewer

and water mains cannot be maintained.

iii. 5 foot (1.5 m) horizontal separation as measured from the

outside of pipe wall to the outside of pipe wall between storm

drains and water mains cannot be maintained.

iv. 6 inches (152.4 mm) vertical separation and 12” horizontal as

measured from the outside of pipe wall to the outside of pipe wall

between utilities other than sewer mains, water mains, and/or

storm drains cannot be maintained.

v. 3 feet (0.9 m) or more of cover over the top of a distribution

water main (8” to 16” diameter) cannot be maintained.

vi. 5 feet (1.5 m) or more of cover over the top of a transmission

water main (16” and larger) cannot be maintained.

vii. 5 feet (1.5 m) or more of cover over the top of a recycled water

main cannot be maintained.

viii. 2 feet (0.6 m) of cover over the top OR 1 foot (0.3m) of cover

below a pavement subgrade of a storm drain, whichever is

greater, cannot be maintained.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 349

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ix. 1 foot (0.3 m) horizontal separation as measured from the

outside of pipe wall to the outside pipe wall between storm

drains and dry utilities cannot be maintained.

x. The storm drain is located above the water main and below

the sewer main in the same street or easement.

b) If 1 foot (0.3 m) vertical separation cannot be maintained between the

proposed and existing utilities, 6 inches to 11 inches (152.4 mm to

279.4 mm) sand cushions in accordance with 200-1.5, “Sand” and 1

inch (25.4 mm) neoprene pads shall be installed as shown on Plans.

The neoprene pad shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick and wide enough to

extend a minimum of 6 inches (152.4 mm) horizontally beyond the

outside pipe wall. Neoprene pads shall have a hardness between 50-

70 durometers, as manufactured by Hoffmeyer Company, Industrial

Rubber Supply, or approved equal. The neoprene pad shall be

installed immediately below or on top of the existing utility. The sand

cushion shall be placed between the neoprene pad and the proposed pipe.

c) Dimensions shall be measured from the outside of pipe wall to the

outside of pipe wall.

ADD:

402-8 PAYMENT.

1. The payment for items of Work related to SECTION 402 - UTILITIES and utility

location shall be included in the Contract Price.

2. Potholing of existing utilities as shown in the Contract Documents for the

purpose of replumbing Work shall be included in the payment for the

replumbing Work.

3. With the Resident Engineer’s approval, compensation for each existing utility

pothole that is not shown on the Plans but marked out by USA shall be

included in the Bid item for “Potholing Existing Utilities Not Shown on Plans

(Depth up to 7 feet)”. Potholing for existing utilities that have been shown on

the Plans shall be included in the Contract Price.

4. The payment for previously abandoned water services shall be included in the

Contract Price unless a Bid item has been provided for “Abandon Water

Services (Stiffs)”.

5. The payment for supporting existing water mains shall be included in the

Contract Price and no additional payment shall be made.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 350

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 403 - MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT AND RECONSTRUCTION

DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

SECTION 403 – MANHOLE, SURVEY MONUMENT, AND GATE VALVE FRAMES AND

COVERS ADJUSTMENT AND RECONSTRUCTION

403-1 GENERAL.

1. You shall set water, sewer, and storm drain manhole, vault frames, and

covers within areas to be paved or graded to finish grade before paving.

2. You shall remove all debris from the interior of manholes, vaults, and gate

valve covers and shall clean all foreign

material from the top of the frames

and covers.

3. Non-City Utility manhole, vault frames, and covers within an area to be

paved or

graded will be set to finish grade by their owners.

403-2 MANHOLES IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT.

1. You shall set manholes in concrete pavement to finish grade prior to paving.

403-3 MANHOLES AND GATE VALVES IN ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT.

1. Utility structures projecting less than 2 inches (50 mm) above the subgrade

may be paved over and later

adjusted to grade.

2. The top of reset manholes and other utility structures shall conform to the

smoothness

requirement specified in 302-5.6.2, “Density and Smoothness”.

3. You shall temporarily cover all utility structures from which manhole frames

and covers have been removed to facilitate paving with a steel plate.

a) When this procedure is impractical, such as

for large vaults, or

special structures, remodeling or reconstruction shall be completed

to finish

permanent surface prior to paving operations.

4. You shall coordinate your Work in accordance with 3-15, “SITE ACTIVITIES BY

THE CITY OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS” and SECTION 402 – UTILITIES.

5. Castings, pre-fabricated risers, and frames or covers of existing City

manholes or gate valves shall be adjusted to conform to the new grade.

6. Water, sewer, and storm drain manhole covers shall be raised by installing

pre-fabricated risers manufactured in 1 inch (25.4 mm) increments. Minor

adjustments necessary to match existing finish pavement grade may be

made with broken brick as described below. Manhole frames and covers

shall be reset in concrete collar as follows:

a) The pavement shall be cut to a width of no less than 8 inches (203.2

mm) or more than 12 inches (304.8 mm) and a depth of no less than 6

inches (152.4 mm) around the circumference of the manhole frame.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 351

THE “WHITEBOOK”

The outside cut shall be as neat and clean as possible to insure a

smooth joint between asphalt and concrete collar.

b) Once the frame has been broken loose and the debris is cleared away,

the frame shall be shimmed to match the new grade. Only broken

brick shall be used for shimming as it will remain a permanent part of

the frame base. Once the concrete collar is placed, the space between

frame and riser ring or casting shall then be grouted to ensure total

and complete support of the manhole frame.

c) The concrete collar shall be placed with 560-C-3250 concrete and be

finished to ensure a level and smooth connection between the asphalt

pavement and manhole. Grout used under manhole frames shall be

Class "C" mortar.

7. Gate valve caps, casings, and leveling shall be done after resurfacing.

Measurements shall be made from the top of the new grade to the top of the

gate cap to determine the length requirement for the extension of the valve

riser casing. This extension shall be cut from 8 inches (203.2 mm) O.D. by

1/8 inch (3.2 mm) steel casing only. The gate valve cap shall be removed. The

extension shall be placed on the existing riser casing. The gate valve cap

shall be replaced and checked for assurance as to height and levelness. The

extension shall be circumferentially welded to the old casing.

8. In the event that an old style casing of a different size is found, a Cast Iron

Riser Ring to match overlay thickness is not available, or two Cast Iron Riser

rings have already been used, the following procedures shall be followed:

a) Pavement around the gate valves shall be cut to a width within 6 inches

to 8 inches (152.4 mm to 203.2 mm) and to a minimum depth of 8

inches (203.2 mm) around the circumference of the valve casing. The

new casing shall then be placed around or inside the old casing.

b) A concrete collar shall be poured and finished to ensure a level and

smooth connection between the asphalt and gate valve cover. The City

will furnish 8 inch (203.2 mm) gate caps to replace old and oddly sized

caps.

c) Gate valve caps and sewer manholes covered by resurfacing will be

located and marked out by City Forces and shall be raised by you in

the same manner described in these specifications.

d) Except for those areas which have been identified for cold milling in

accordance with 404 - COLD MILLING, you shall be responsible for

locating all metal objects in the area that shall be milled.

403-4 SURVEY MONUMENTS.

1. The casing and cover for survey monuments shall be adjusted to the finish

grade in accordance with M-10A, “Street Survey Monument Overlay

Adjustment”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 352

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Construction of new survey monuments shall be in accordance with SECTION

309 – MONUMENTS.

403-5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT.

1. The payment for adjusting each existing manhole frame and cover to grade,

preparation of subgrade, removal and replacement of DG and other

improvements, and all other necessary items to complete the Work shall be

included in the Bid item for “Adjust Existing Manhole Frame and Cover to

Grade”.

2. The payment for adjusting each existing gate valve frame and cover to grade,

preparation of subgrade, removal and replacement of DG and other

improvements, and all other necessary items to complete the Work shall be

included in the Bid item for “Adjust Existing Gate Valve Frame and Cover to

Grade”.

3. The payment for adjusting each existing survey monument to grade,

preparation of subgrade, removal and replacement of DG and other

improvements, and all other necessary items to complete the Work shall be

included in the Bid item for “Adjust Existing Survey Monument to Grade”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 353

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 404 – COLD MILLING

404-1 GENERAL. ADD the following:

1. Excessive asphalt concrete pavement adjacent to Type “G” and “H” curb and

gutter lines and concrete cross gutters shall be milled in accordance with the City

of San Diego Standard Drawing SDG-107, “Trench Resurfacing for Asphalt

Concrete Surfaced Streets” or as shown on the Plans.

2. Cross gutters shall be cold milled 1 inch ± ¼ inch (25.4 mm ± 6.35 mm) within

24 hours or less of the time the resurfacing is placed. In areas where the curb

height has been diminished by multiple overlays, the milling depth shall equal

the proposed overlay thickness. Cross gutters shall be cold milled a minimum

of 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) within 5 Working Days of the time the resurfacing is

placed.

3. Milled widths of pavement shall be continuous except for intersections at

cross streets where the milling shall be carried around corners and daylighting

at the point of curb return. The header cuts shall daylight at the point of curb

return or as directed by the Engineer.

4. Milled widths of pavement shall be continuous except for intersection at cross

streets where header cuts shall daylight at the point of curb return or as directed

by the engineer. Header cuts shall be 12 feet (3.7 m) in width at intersections, cross

gutters, and paving limits or as directed by the Engineer.

5. You shall cold mill the full width of existing streets to the depths specified in

the Contract Documents or as directed by the Engineer. Cold milled full width

locations shall be paved within 3 Working Days.

6. Existing traffic striping and thermoplastic markings located within the limits of

the area to receive asphalt overlay or slurry seal shall be removed a maximum

of 10 Working Days prior to the application of asphalt overlay or slurry seal by wet

sandblasting or other approved methods. Dry sandblasting may be used in selected

areas only with the permission of the Engineer and with approval of the air pollution

control authority having jurisdiction over the area in which the Work will be

performed. Temporary striping for thermoplastic markings and temporary tabs shall

be applied to any pavement exceeding the 10 Working Day requirement.

7. Transitions from walks, sidewalks, ramps, and curb ramp gutters shall be flush at

the same level. Pavement at the street level shall be milled to achieve a flush

condition in accordance to SDG-131–139.

ADD:

404-1.1 Removal of Irregularities.

1. Removal of humps, lumps, and pavement irregularities include areas 1 inch (25.4

mm) or more above the finish grade of the existing pavement surface as marked

in the street or as directed by the Engineer. The removal of the hump, lumps, or

irregularities may be done either by milling or other means. The required hot mix

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 354

THE “WHITEBOOK”

asphalt concrete patching shall be C2 PG 64-10 in accordance with 203-6,

“ASPHALT CONCRETE”.

2. At the end of each Working Day, you shall submit to the Engineer an itemized list of

the areas where the removal of humps, lumps, and irregularities has been

completed. The list shall include the location of the Work and the exact length in

linear feet.

ADD:

404-1.2 Buried Metal Objects.

1. The City acknowledges that certain unidentified utility facilities (buried metal

objects such as magnetic traffic pads, sewer and storm drain manhole covers,

water valve covers, survey monuments, and etc.) have been inadvertently paved

over on some streets in past projects. These facilities may not be readily apparent

from a visual inspection of the project or from an examination of As-Built records.

You shall be responsible for locating and protecting these facilities in accordance

with SECTION 402 - UTILITIES.

2. You shall locate buried metal objects. You shall examine any available As-Built

records, properly notify “UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT” (USA), and request

that all utility lines, covers, and facilities within 6 inches (152.4 mm) of the

surface be identified and marked. If requested by the Engineer, provide

documentation that this service was completed.

3. You shall sweep all street locations with a metal detector ahead of the milling

operation. Suspected buried metal objects shall be identified by a painted

cross within an outlined area in a manner allowing the milling operation to see

the questionable area and take corrective action. Any damage incurred by the

milling machine striking a buried metal object within a 3 foot (0.9 m) radius of

such a marking shall be at your expense.

4. At each street location screened with a metal detector, you shall note that the

street has been checked by painting a checkmark at a location that is approved

by the Engineer. This mark should be visible to the Engineer and the milling

operator but shall not be placed to divert or confuse public traffic.

5. The Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 24 hours in advance of any street

that is to be swept for buried metal objects. Proper traffic control shall be

erected and maintained for all metal detection operations. If, after any given

street has been checked with the metal detector, the milling operation hits

more than 2 buried objects, then you shall revise your methods and re-check

street locations at your expense.

404-2 MILLING MACHINES.

ADD the following:

1. If approved by the Engineer, equipment other than milling machines may be

utilized to achieve the removal of distressed asphalt pavement.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 355

THE “WHITEBOOK”

404-6 COLD MILLING OF COMPOSITE PAVEMENTS. ADD the following:

1. You shall account for concrete trench caps up to 12 inches (304.8 mm) of

concrete with ¼ inch (6.4 mm) of asphalt.

2. Composite Pavements not shown on the plans shall be measured in

accordance with 404-11, “Measurement”.

ADD:

404-6.1 Cold Milling of Asphalt Concrete with Pavement Fabric Material.

1. Pavement fabric material includes fabrics which conform to Table 213-4.1.

Fiberglass or fiberglass composite fabrics conforming to Table 213-4.1 are not

included. The area of pavement containing pavement fabric material shall be

measured in accordance with 404-11, “Measurement”.

404-9 TRAFFIC SIGNAL LOOP DETECTORS. ADD the following:

1. The Engineer will determine which traffic detector loops and/or other

detection systems shall be replaced unless specified otherwise in the Contract

Documents.

2. Traffic detector loops shall be reinstalled after resurfacing and striping Work

of the related street within 15 Working Days from the completion of all

preparatory Work which includes milling, cutting, and grinding. You shall

contact the City of San Diego’s Street Division in Traffic Signal Maintenance per

the table below to request the loop layout and/or for other detection systems

within pavement.

North of Interstate 8

619-527-8052

South of Interstate 8

619-527-8053

3. Traffic Signal Maintenance shall lay out locations and size of new loops and

will inspect the installation. You shall be responsible for making field

connections. You shall obtain prior approval from the Street Division for each

traffic loop stub out replaced.

4. Traffic detector loops installed either in the new street surface or in the

original street surface after grinding or repairs shall be Caltrans type “E” loops

as described in Caltrans Standard Plan ES-5B. The front loop at the stop line

shall have 4 turns instead of the 3 that is required by Caltrans. Asphaltic

emulsion loop sealants shall not be used when installing traffic loops on the

street surface.

5. If existing traffic detector loops are damaged, disabled, or become ineffective

due to construction activities for a period of 5 or more Calendar Days, install a

City approved temporary video or radar detection system in accordance with

601-1, “GENERAL”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 356

THE “WHITEBOOK”

404-10 PAVEMENT TRANSITIONS. ADD the following:

1. Where transverse joints are milled in the pavement, no drop-off shall remain

between the existing pavement and the milled area when the pavement is

opened to public traffic.

2. If asphalt concrete has not been placed to the level of the existing pavement

before the pavement is to be opened to public traffic, a temporary asphalt

concrete taper shall be constructed. Asphalt concrete for temporary tapers shall

be placed to the level of the existing pavement and tapered on a slope of 15: 1 or

flatter to the level of the planed area. Asphalt concrete for temporary tapers shall

be commercial quality and may be spread and compacted by any method that

will produce a smooth riding surface. Temporary asphalt concrete tapers shall be

completely removed, including the removal of all loose material from the

underlying surface, before placing the permanent surface.

404-11 MEASUREMENT. ADD the following:

1. Measurement for the removal of humps, lumps, and pavement irregularities

prior to the placement of asphalt concrete shall be of actual areas and depths

authorized by the Engineer based on your submitted itemized list and shall be

calculated in lineal feet based on a 1 foot by 6 foot (0.3 m by 1.8 m) drum width.

404-12 PAYMENT. ADD the following:

1. The payment for the replacement of traffic detector loops and appurtenances

shall be included in the Bid item for each “Traffic Signal Loop and

Appurtenance Replacement” as shown in the Bid.

2. The payment for the removal of humps, lumps, and other pavement

irregularities shall be included in the linear foot Bid item for “Removal of

Humps, Lumps, and Pavement Irregularities”. No additional payment shall be

made for incidental asphalt patching required after hump, lump, and

pavement irregularity removal.

3. The payment for cold milling shall be included in the Contract Price unless Bid

items, as applicable, have been provided as follows:

BID DESCRIPTION

UNIT

Cold Mill AC Pavement (0 Inch – 1½ Inch)

Cold Mill AC Pavement (> 1½ Inch – 3 Inch)

Cold Mill AC Pavement (> 3 Inch)

Cold Mill Header Cuts LF

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 357

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. In the event that concrete in excess of the total area milled in a particular street

segment (block) is encountered, payment shall be made at the Bid unit price as

specified in the table below. Prior to paving over the milled areas, you shall notify

the Engineer that the incidental amount has been exceeded.

EXCESS IN

PERCENTAGE

OF TOTAL AREA

TYPE OF

CONCRETE TO BE

MILLED

BID DESCRIPTION UNIT

Composite

Pavements

Cold Milling of Additional

Composite Pavements

Asphalt Concrete

with Pavement

Fabric Material

Cold Milling of Additional

Asphalt Concrete with

Pavement Fabric Material

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 358

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 359

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 4

EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS (B)

DESIGN-BUILD (DB) AND MULTIPLE AWARD

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (MACC) CONTRACTING ONLY

To Part 4 - EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS (A), REVISE with the following:

SECTION 402 - UTILITIES

ADD:

402-1 LOCATION. ADD the following:

1. Coordinate the review of the Project design drawings by the utility agencies at

every design phase submittal.

2. Determine locations and elevations of all active and abandoned underground

utilities in the Project area that may affect Project construction activities.

3. Provide all required information for the construction or relocation of all public

or private utilities that shall be constructed or relocated as a result of this

Project.

4. Provide designs for wet utility crossings.

5. Coordinate utility facility and equipment shutdown requirements with the

Engineer.

ADD:

402-4 RELOCATION. To the paragraph (2), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

Alter, relocate, and reconstruct all utilities, including water and sewer connections, as

necessary to construct the Project. Utilities not indicated on your Plans that are found

to interfere with the Work shall be relocated, altered, or reconstructed by the utility

owner or by you at no additional cost to the City. You shall contact and coordinate

alteration, relocation, or reconstruction of gas, electric, cable, and telephone service

connections with the owner of those utilities.

ADD:

402-5 DELAYS DUE TO UTILITY CONFLICTS. ADD the following:

1. You shall not be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time or for

compensation for Extra Work or delays attributable to utility or substructure

relocations or alterations when the existing utilities or substructures were

identified in the Contract Documents, utility records, As-Built and record

drawings, or other relevant records and archives pertaining to utility

locations that you could reasonably have been expected to be aware of and

when they were marked out by USA.

END OF PART 4 - EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 360

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 361

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 5

PIPELINE SYSTEM REHABILITATION

SECTION 500 – PIPELINE REHABILITATION

500-1 GENERAL. ADD the following:

1. You shall furnish and install a tight-fitting sewer rehabilitation liner between

the limits shown on the Plans or in the Contract Documents. The allowed

rehabilitation methods shall be in accordance with the latest Approved

Material List (AML).

a) Cured-in-Place Pipe Liner (CIPP) shall conform to 500-5.5, “Cured-In-

Place Pipe (CIPP) Liner”.

b) Deformed/Re-formed HDPE Pipe Liner shall conform to 500-5.7,

“Deformed/Re-formed HDPE Pipe Liner”.

c) Folded and Re-formed PVC Pipe Liner shall conform to 500-5.10,

“Folded and Re-formed PVC Pipe Liner”.

d) Spiral Wound Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Liner shall conform to 500-

5.13, “Spiral Wound Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Liner”.

2. Structural requirements as they pertain to each specific material installation

shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation.

3. If the rehabilitation system Work discussed in Part 5 – PIPELINE SYSTEM

REHABILITATION results in failures, the Resident Engineer will provide

direction on repairs and additional Work after consultation with the Public

Utilities Department.

4. Any Cured-in-Place Pipe (CIPP) lining Work within a 1000 foot radius from

school areas shall first be coordinated with the school and shall be performed

outside of school hours at no expense to the City

ADD:

500-1.1 Design Criteria and Testing Requirements.

1. Table 500-1.1 (A) lists the minimum finished pipe liner wall thicknesses and

minimum long-term flexural modulus for the pipeline rehabilitation. The

thickness installed shall be increased as necessary to accommodate the

existing conditions. This accommodation shall result in the minimum

thickness specified for all locations. The felt and resin system shall be selected

from those listed in the City’s AML.

2. The volume of resin used shall be sufficient to fully saturate all the voids of the

fabric tube material and to allow for change in resin volume due to

polymerization and any migration of resin into cracks and pipe joints.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 362

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Structural and chemical tests shall be in accordance with Table 500-1.1 (B) Test

Methods.

TABLE 500-1.1 (A) Minimum Pipe Liner Thickness (Inches)

Material C.I.P.P H.D.P.E. PVC Type A PVC Type B

PVC

SPIRAL

WOUND

Minimum Long Term

Flexural Modulus (psi)

150,000 110,000 280,000 155,000 155,000

Nominal I.D. (inches) Thickness Thickness Thickness Thickness Stiffness

6 0.18 0.20 0.18 0.18 71

8 0.24 0.25 0.19 0.24 151

10 0.30 0.31 0.23 0.30 287

12 0.34 0.38 0.28 0.37 493

15 0.45 0.47 0.34 0.46 953

18 0.51 0.56 0.41 0.50 1,640

1. Modulus of Elasticity is the minimum in accordance with ASTM D790.

2. Minimum pipe stiffness (EI) in accordance with ASTM D2412.

TABLE 500-1.1 (B) Test Methods

Item Description ASTM Method

1(a) ID Wall Thickness ASTM D2122

1(b) Flattening ASTM D3034

1(c) Pipe Stiffness ASTM D2412

2 Impact Strength ASTM D2444

3 Extrusion Quality (PVC only) ASTM D2152 or ASTM F1057

4 Hardness ASTM D2240

5 Tensile Strength/Tensile Modulus ASTM D638

6 Flexural Strength ASTM D790 (Procedure B)

7 Flexural Modulus ASTM D790 (Procedure A) & D2990

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 363

THE “WHITEBOOK”

500-2 SUBMITTALS. ADD the following:

1. You shall submit certified test results from an independent lab for each item

in Table 500-1.1 (B) on the specified structural characteristics of the

rehabilitation systems for the Engineer’s approval.

2. You shall submit bypass locations, bypass system sizing, a proposed

equipment list to ensure that the Work can be accomplished without a sewage

spill, and all other documents in accordance with 3-12.5.2, “Sewage Bypass

and Pumping Plan” and 3-12.5.3, “Spill Prevention and Emergency Response

Plan”.

ADD:

500-2.1 Initial Submittals.

1. Unless specified otherwise, prior to the Pre-construction Meeting, you shall

submit the following required information:

a) Contractor’s Experience and Past Project Documentation.

i. You shall submit documentation that you have performed

similar main rehabilitation projects (of scope and size)

successfully within the last 10 years in the United States. The

scope shall include the same product, installation, and curing.

The proposed product shall have at least 5 years or more of

documented performance records.

ii. You shall identify the employees who will be assigned to this

project and provide references in the format presented in the

Contract Documents. See the Contract attachments for the

required format for the submittal.

iii. Your superintendent shall be assigned full time to this project

and shall be present at the Site while Work is being performed.

If CIPP is used, the superintendent shall have documentation

conveying experience with the proposed resin and felt

combination used and the installation of the proposed lateral

sealing system with the pipe lining system.

b) Authorized Installer - The installation of the lining system shall be

performed by a contractor authorized, certified, or both by the

manufacture or owner of the process. You shall submit a copy of the

authorization from all manufacturers for which they are authorized,

certified, or both and a letter from the manufacturer(s) stating the

name, address, point of contact, and telephone number. The Engineer

will verify these authorizations.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 364

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

500-2.2 Pre-construction Submittals.

1. Within 15 Working Days after Notice to proceed, you shall submit to the City,

design calculations signed and sealed by a California Licensed Engineer for

the pipe liner for approval.

2. The design calculations shall be in accordance with the systems applicable

ASTM requirements for fully deteriorated pipe. The pipe liner shall be

designed to support hydraulic, soil, and live loads based on a minimum 10

feet burial depth to top of pipe and highway loading accordance with

AASHTO (HS 20).If local conditions impose greater loads, the greater loads

shall be used. Local conditions may include depth greater than 10 feet,

railroad loading, groundwater or other loadings.

ADD:

500-2.3 Construction Submittals.

1. You shall submit the following during construction:

a) Daily reports with required attachments - The daily report shall include

the wet-out data sheet, boiler operator cooking worksheet, and

temperature strip charts.

b) Redlines, post cleaning videos (for sewer pipe segments and service

lateral launch), and final videos.

c) Samples - Required samples shall be submitted to the Engineer

immediately following the lining operation.

500-3.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The pipe diameters are nominal dimensions. You shall verify the actual

internal pipe diameters and length of each reach prior to ordering lining

materials.

500-3.4 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with the following:

500-3.4 Video Inspection.

1. An initial video inspection shall be required prior to rehabilitation. A final

video inspection shall be performed to determine if the Work was completed

in accordance with the Contract Documents and that all service connections

have been reinstated, as required. Video inspections shall be performed in

accordance with 306-18, “VIDEO INSPECTION”.

2. During the post-cleaning video you shall identify all existing protruding

materials within the existing main and trim them flush to the main prior to

rehabilitation.

500-4.7 Payment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The point repair Work shall be measured and paid for in the Bid item for each

“Point Repair for Existing Sewer Main”. Measurement shall be made at the pipe

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 365

THE “WHITEBOOK”

and shall be based on the length of pipe repaired. You shall be paid for 1 point

repair for each repair 8 ft (2.43 m) or less in length. Any continuous point repair

greater than 8 ft (2.43 m), shall be paid linearly proportioned to bid item “Point

Repair for Existing Sewer Main”. This payment shall include all necessary labor,

materials, and equipment to clean, repair, excavate, inspect the Point Repair,

backfill and restore pavement.

ADD:

500-5.1.1 Sampling, Testing, and Installation.

1. For pipeline rehabilitation systems, you shall take an 18 inch long sample from

every other rehabilitated pipeline segment (FSN).

2. For rehabilitated service laterals, an 18 inch long sample shall be taken for

every ten service laterals rehabilitated or any part thereof.

3. You shall cut each sample longitudinally in half, create a chain of custody

document for both sample halves, and test one of the sample halves by a

certified third party laboratory in accordance with Table 500-1.1 (B).

4. You shall submit the other sample half for the monthly review and approval of

the Engineer, along with its minimum thickness test results specified by Table

500-1.1 (A), and structural properties as required in each subsection

corresponding to the liner material type.

5. CIPP samples shall be tested for structural properties in accordance with Table

500-5.5.2.

ADD:

500-5.1.2 Order of Work for Rehabilitation Installation.

1. Rehabilitation shall be performed in the following order of Work:

a) First: Rehabilitation of Sewer Main, including sampling and testing.

b) Second: Installation of Sewer Lateral Connections and End Seals.

c) Third: Rehabilitation of Sewer Laterals, including sampling and testing.

2. You shall plan and schedule Work accordingly. Additional payment for

demobilization or mobilization and additional Working Days shall not be

granted for delays due to the order of rehabilitation Work.

500-5.5.1 General. ADD the following:

1. CIPP Liner and resin system shall be selected from the AML.

2. The CIPP Liner shall extend the full length of the pipe reach to be

rehabilitated and shall provide a structurally sound, impermeable, seamless,

joint-less, close-fitting pipe that, when cured, is bonded to the host pipe.

500-5.5.2 Material Composition and Testing. ADD the following:

1. Tube:

a) The tube shall be in accordance with ASTM F1216 or ASTM F1743.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 366

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) The side of the liner exposed to the sewer flow after inversion or pull-

in is completed shall have a layer of polyurethane bonded to it and

shall be pinhole free. Seams and patches in the polyurethane coating

shall be inspected under a black light.

c) The tube shall be placed under a vacuum at the factory and

submerged in a dye bath to verify that it is pinhole free. You shall

provide proof to that effect. No joints or laps shall be permitted

between manholes.

2. Resin:

a) You shall furnish an approved resin and liner system in accordance

with the AML. A compatible catalyst system shall be specified by the

resin manufacturer. The resin manufacturer shall provide you with the

recommended curing cycle and shall submit the same to the Engineer

for approval.

b) Certified copies of all test reports performed by the independent

testing laboratory on the properties of the selected resin and on the

properties of the field liner coupons, in accordance with 4-4, “TESTING”

and these specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer.

500-5.5.5 Installation. ADD the following:

1. The installation procedures may vary with the methods of rehabilitation

techniques and processes approved for the Project.

2. You shall submit in the same format as in 500-5.5.5.1, “The Wet Out”; 500-

5.5.5.2, “Insertion”; 500-5.5.9.1, “Cool Down”; and 500-5.5.9.2, “Finished Pipe”

or give detailed instructions, procedures, and the steps to be followed for the

installation of the CIPP even if the process is named in the specification. Such

instructions and procedures shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer.

3. Material delivered to the Site shall be accompanied by appropriate individual

documentation listing physical properties, curing or reforming temperatures,

and pressures.

ADD:

500-5.5.5.1 The Wet Out.

1. You shall designate a location where the felt tube shall be impregnated (“wetted

out”) with resin. The quantity of resin used for tube impregnation shall be

sufficient to fill the volume of air voids in the tube with additional allowances for

polymerization shrinkage and stretching during installation, and for the loss of

resin through cracks and irregularities in the host pipe according to these

specifications.

2. The calculations for the quantity of resin required shall be submitted and

approved by the Engineer prior to wetting out the liner.

3. A roller system and vacuum shall be used to uniformly distribute the resin

throughout the tube to thoroughly saturate the felt tube prior to its dispatch

for installation. The gap in the roller shall be verified every 50 ft (15.2 m). You

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 367

THE “WHITEBOOK”

shall inform the Engineer at least 4 Working Days in advance to inspect the

materials and the wet out procedure.

4. A catalyst system or additive(s) compatible with the resin and tube may be

used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. They shall

not impair or reduce the resin’s quality to withstand the minimum chemical

resistance criteria.

ADD:

500-5.5.5.2 Insertion.

1. The wetted out tube shall be transported and kept in a refrigerated truck until

it is inserted through an existing manhole or sewer main cleanout by the

approved technique or process of the installer or you. You shall use either an

end-stop or hold-back mechanism to prevent the felt tube from extending into

conduits which are not to be rehabilitated. You shall protect the Site in

accordance with 3-12, “WORK SITE MAINTENANCE” and SECTION 400 -

PROTECTION AND RESTORATION and shall be responsible for repairing or

replacing all existing improvements within the Site which are damaged,

removed, or both as a result of your operations at no cost to the City.

500-5.5.6 Curing. DELETE in its entirety.

500-5.5.8 Service Connections. ADD the following:

1. After the service has been completely established, you shall proceed with

sealing the lateral connection or lateral lining or both as called for in these

specifications.

2. If you cannot reestablish a service connection as specified above within the

specified Normal Working Hours, the following shall apply: You shall open all

live laterals with preliminary cuts to relieve the flow the same day as the

installation. The preliminary cut shall be a smooth round cut, with a

minimum diameter of 1 inch (25.4 mm) less than the lateral’s diameter. Final

cuts shall be completed during Normal Working Hours within 1 week from

the date of the liner installation, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

ADD:

500-5.5.10 Curing.

1. After tube placement is completed, you shall provide a suitable heat source

and distribution equipment to distribute or recirculate hot water throughout

the installed CIPP liner tube. Temperature shall be maintained during the

curing period as recommended by the resin manufacturer and approved by

the Engineer.

2. After the tube is cured, a cool-down period shall be used prior to opening the

downstream end, reconnection of services, and returning normal flow back

into the system. Heat curing of the resin shall occur within the manufacturer's

approved recommended time frame (pot life). The water in the CIPP shall be

cooled to below 100°F (38°C) before discharge.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 368

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. All City water used shall be from a metered supply and paid for by you in

accordance with 2-5.2.1, “Water for Construction Purposes”.

4. The heat source shall be fitted with suitable monitors to gauge the

temperature of the incoming and outgoing heat source. It is required that

thermocouples be placed on the top and bottom of the impregnated tube and

the host pipe at the upstream and downstream manholes as well as in any

intermediate manhole to determine the temperatures during the resin curing

process.

5. Thermocouples shall be connected to a recording device at the heater truck to

have a continuous measurement of the thermocouples on the tube as well as

the intake and output water temperatures at the water heater. The recording

device used to measure all temperatures shall be calibrated prior to use on

the Site. You shall provide all calibration records for all equipment used on the

job upon request by the Engineer.

6. Remotely located thermocouple readings and the temperature of the

circulating water at the downstream end of the liner away from the heater truck

shall be recorded every 3 to 5 minutes until the resin begins and sustains a

thermal reaction and then the interval for recording temperatures shall be every

10 minutes.

7. The initial cure may be considered completed when the exposed portions of

the felt tube appear to be hard and the remote sensing device indicates the

temperatures to be adequate, as recommended by the resin and catalyst

system manufacturer, and approved by the Engineer. You shall be fully

responsible for the accuracy of its Work and for determining when curing has

been completed to meet the specified properties. Care shall be taken during

the elevated curing temperatures so as not to over stress the fiber liner. Curing

temperatures and duration shall comply with data and information previously

submitted and approved by the Engineer.

8. The cured liner shall have a smooth finish inside. Any roughness that may

affect the hydraulic conditions shall be removed by sanding or trimming the “fins”

or folds. Such trimming shall not change the required thickness or structural

strength of the liner. You shall apply an approved sealant compatible with the

material to areas where sanding has taken place or replace the pipe liner from

manhole to manhole as determined and directed by the Engineer at no additional

cost to the City.

ADD:

500-5.5.10.1 Cool Down.

1. You shall cool the hardened pipe to a temperature below 100°F (38°C),

before relieving the water column. Cool water may be added to the water

column while draining hot water from a small hole at the opposite end of

the CIPP so that a constant water column height is maintained until cool-

down is completed. Care shall be taken in the release of the water column

so that a vacuum will not develop that would damage the newly installed

pipe. Coupon samples shall be obtained for testing in accordance with 500-

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 369

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5.1.1, “Sampling, Testing, and Installation” and these specifications. The cool

down process may vary depending on the installation technique.

ADD:

500-5.5.10.2 Finished Pipe.

1. The finished CIPP shall be continuous over the entire length from manhole to

manhole and shall be free from visual defects such as foreign matters, dry

spots, pinholes, wrinkles and other deformities. The liner passing through or

terminating in a manhole shall be carefully cut out. The cut shall be smooth

and parallel to the manhole wall. The finished liner shall not protrude into the

manhole over 2 inch (50.8 mm).

2. If the manhole has been lined through, the top half of the liner pipe shall be

cut off even with the top of the shelf leaving the channel lined unless otherwise

approved by the Engineer. The invert and benches shall be lined for smooth

flow. The area or annular space between the host pipe and the CIPP liner shall

be sealed with the approved epoxy or other material that is compatible with

the CIPP liner and shall provide a watertight seal.

3. The sealant system and materials shall conform to 210-2.3.3, “Chemical

Resistance Test (Pickle Jar Test)” and shall be pre-approved by the Engineer.

4. During the warranty period, any defect specified by the Engineer which will

affect the integrity or strength of the pipe liner shall be repaired at your

expense.

5. Installations shall not be considered complete until the lining is installed, all final

cuts are finished, all channels and benches in the manholes are installed or

refinished, all miscellaneous Work described in the Contract documents are

complete, the final video inspection is performed and As-Built information is

submitted to the City.

ADD:

500-5.5.10.3 Process Limitations.

1. You shall not change any material, thickness, design values or procedural

matters stated or approved in the submittals, without the Engineer’s prior

knowledge and preapproval. You shall submit, in writing, full details about

component materials, their properties, method and procedure of installation

and comply with them fully during the entire course of the Project.

2. The City shall require a continuous, uniform liner 300 feet (91.4 meters) or

greater between maintenance holes, unless otherwise specified. The City shall

not allow intermediate excavations for additional manholes unless otherwise

specified.

500-5.7.1 General. ADD the following:

1. Deformed or reformed HDPE pipe liner shall extend the full length of the pipe

reach to be rehabilitated and shall provide a structurally sound, impermeable,

seamless, joint-less, close-fitting pipe which is tightly adhered to the host pipe.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 370

THE “WHITEBOOK”

500-5.7.2 Material Composition. ADD the following:

1. Before installation, you shall provide to the Engineer appropriate individual

test documentation with the physical properties and information as specified

by the manufacturer for each coil of pipe. The information shall consist

of: Factory test results to show compliance with ASTM D3350 Cell

Classification 345434 C, D, or E and the requirements of 207-19.2, “Material

Composition” reforming temperatures and pressures, a production date for

each coil, and all other appurtenant information which is necessary to conform

to the applicable requirements.

500-5.7.6 Installation. To subsection “f”, ADD the following:

1. 2 (two) 18-inch (457.2 mm) long restrained samples shall be taken by you from

the downstream and intermediate manholes. You shall test one of the

samples in accordance with ASTM D2122 methods to verify the minimum wall

thickness as specified by Table 500-1.1 (A). The HDPE shall have the minimum

values per Table 500-5.7.6 when tested in accordance with ASTM standards by

an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. The other

sample shall be provided to the Engineer.

TABLE 500-5.7.6 HDPE Testing Minimum Values per ASTM Standards

Flexural

Strength

Flexural

Modulus

Tensile

Strength

Tensile

Modulus

Impact

Resistance

ASTM

Test

D 790 D 790 D 638 D 638 D 2444

U-Liner -

110,000 psi -

160,000 psi

3,000 psi -

3,500 psi

- Pass/Fail

2. Certified copies of all test reports performed by the independent testing

laboratory, in accordance with 4-4, “TESTING” and these specifications, shall

be submitted to the Engineer.

3. The finish of the end seals shall comply with 500-5.5.9.2, “Finished Pipe”. The

area or annular space between the host pipe and the HDPE liner shall be

sealed with the approved epoxy that is compatible with the HDPE liner. During

the warranty period, any defect which will affect the integrity or strength of

the liner pipe or cause a problem with service connections, due to improper

finishing of channels or benches, shall be repaired at your expense.

500-5.10.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The minimum thickness of the pipe liner shall be in accordance with 500-

1, “GENERAL”.

2. The factory test results shall show compliance with ASTM D 1784 Cell

Classification 13223-B and the requirements of 500-5.10.2, “Type A” for

Type A, or 500-5.10.3, “Type B” for Type B. The test results for each coil of

pipe shall be submitted to the Engineer before installation.

3. PVC pipe liner when installed and cooled shall have the required minimum

values for the corresponding liner type when tested in accordance with

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 371

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ASTM standards by an independent testing laboratory approved by the

Engineer.

Flexural

Strength

Flexural

Modulus

Tensile

Strength

Impact

Resistance

ASTM Test D 790 D 790 D 638 D 2444

Type A 2,200 psi

280,000 psi -

320,000 psi

5,000 psi -

6,000 psi

Pass/Fail

Type B 1,930 psi

155,000 psi -

280,000 psi

3,500 psi -

5,000 psi

Pass/Fail

4. Certified copies of all test reports performed by an independent testing

laboratory, in accordance with 4-4, “TESTING” and these specifications shall

be submitted to the Engineer.

500-5.10.2 Type A. To subsection “f”, item “i”, ADD the following:

1. You shall furnish and maintain all equipment necessary for the proper

execution of the Work as specified. The method of installation shall be

compatible with the manufacturer’s recommended practices. Before

installation, the pipe coils shall be tested by you in accordance with ASTM

D2122 to verify compliance with the minimum wall thickness.

2. The liner pipe shall be inserted into the existing sewer through existing

manholes, without modification of the manholes.

To subsection f”, item “v”, ADD the following:

1. If the liner fails to form, you shall remove the failed liner and replace it with a

new liner. This Work shall be performed without additional costs to the City.

After the line has been formed, the ends of the liner shall be cut away at both

manholes.

2. The finished liner shall comply with 500-5.5.9.2, “Finished Pipe”. Any defect

which will affect the integrity or strength of the liner pipe or cause a problem

with the service connections, due to improper finishing of channels or

benches, shall be repaired at your expense.

500-5.10.3 Type B. To subsection “f”, ADD the following:

vii. You shall submit factory test results and the date the PVC liner was

manufactured for each coil of pipe prior to installation for approval. No pipe

liner shall be installed later than 6 months from date of manufacture.

viii. You shall furnish and maintain all equipment necessary for the proper

execution of the Work as specified. The method of installation shall be

compatible with the manufacturer’s recommended practices. Before

installation, the pipe coils shall be tested by you in accordance with ASTM

D2122 to verify compliance with the minimum wall thickness.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 372

THE “WHITEBOOK”

500-5.13.1 General. ADD the following:

1. The lining process shall use a continuous PVC profile strip which is machine-

wound directly into the existing pipeline from an existing manhole. The

process shall be continued until the complete length of the existing pipe has

been lined. PVC profile strip for machine spiral-wound liner pipe rehabilitation

of existing sewers shall comply with ASTM F1697 except as modified herein.

500-5.13.6 Installation. ADD the following:

1. Installation of machine spiral-wound PVC liner pipe rehabilitation of existing

sewers shall comply with ASTM F1741 except as modified herein.

2. The existing pipeline shall be cleaned of any obstructions and televised in

accordance with 500-3, “CLEANING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION”. Existing

live service connections shall be precisely located longitudinally, radially, and

in accordance with 500-8, “SERVICE CONNECTION RE-ESTABLISHMENT” and

500-6, “END SEALS” and logged for subsequent reinstatement following

insertion of the PVC strip pipe liner.

3. Coincident with lining forming into a spiral by the winding machine, a bead of

Vulkem 116 Urethane Caulk or equal shall be injected during the winding

process into the double locking elements in a sufficient amount such that

upon cure it will create a watertight seal as tested on a deflected segment of

fully expanded pipe.

4. You shall submit for the Engineer’s approval the method and material

composition for the end sealing and service lateral sealing material.

ADD:

500-5.15 Sewer Main Rehabilitation Identification.

1. Whenever pipes are lined upstream, downstream, or both, a 3 inch x 8 inch (76.2

mm x 203.2 mm) reflective yellow delineator shall be installed above the inlet

and outlet which were lined and shall also be installed 36 inches (0.9 m) below

the manhole cover.

2. For rehabilitated manholes, the delineator shall be installed using a 2-part

epoxy, in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications, compatible with

polyurethane, PVC, epoxy, or any other liner material. Concrete manholes that

are not lined shall have the mounting surface scuffed to sound substrate prior

to installing delineator.

ADD:

500-5.15.1 Payment.

1. The payment for identification tags shall be included in the Contract Price.

500-8 SERVICE CONNECTION RE-ESTABLISHMENT. ADD the following:

1. After curing is complete, you shall reestablish all live service connections in

accordance with this section. After the service has been completely

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 373

THE “WHITEBOOK”

established, you shall proceed with sealing the lateral connection or lateral

lining or both as called for in these specifications.

2. If you cannot reestablish a service connection as specified above within the

specified Normal Working Hours, the following shall apply: you shall open all

live laterals with preliminary cuts to relieve the flow the same day as the

installation. The preliminary cut shall be a smooth round cut, with a minimum

diameter of 1 inch (25.4 mm) less than the lateral’s diameter. Final cuts shall

be completed during Normal Working Hours within 1 week from the date of

the liner installation, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

500-11 MEASUREMENT. DELETE in its entirety.

500-12 PAYMENT. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

500-12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT.

1. The unit price for rehabilitating the sewer main in the manner described shall

be for the length of the liner installed in the field and shall be measured

between the manholes from the wall, next to the insertion invert, to the invert

wall of the downstream manhole, unless you line through the manhole at the

City’s request. Payment for the liner shall also include trimming all other

protruding materials including existing, the cost of end seals, and the re-

establishment of active service connections by a remote control device in

accordance with 500-8 “SERVICE CONNECTION RE-ESTABLISHMENT” and

SECTION 501 - SERVICE LATERAL CONNECTION SEALING.

2. Unless specified otherwise, no separate compensation shall be paid for

testing. The testing costs shall be included in the linear foot price of the pipe

rehabilitation Work. At the Resident Engineer’s discretion, 10% of the price of

the pipe rehabilitation Work shall be withheld until you submit certified third

party laboratory test results and chain of custody documents for each sample

taken, along with the corresponding sample halves, for quality assurance

verification testing by City Lab Staff.

3. Video inspections, before and after rehabilitation, shall be paid for in

accordance with 306-18.7, “Payment”. As-Built information and all other

relevant submittals shall be considered incidental to the Project for payment

purposes. This shall include the cost of the video inspection of the Service

Connection.

4. You shall be responsible for making adequate and suitable arrangements for

any bypass pumping that may become necessary to prevent any backflow onto

private or public property, between the time the liner is inserted, and the service

re-connections have been made, tested, and approved by the Engineer. Unless

provided for, bypass pumping shall be incidental to the cost of the sewer

rehabilitation.

5. No separate or additional payment will be made for the removal of

obstructions encountered during post-installation CCTV inspection nor for any

re-televising necessary due to the digital recording being unacceptable to the

Engineer.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 374

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 501 – SERVICE LATERAL CONNECTION SEALING

DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

501-1 GENERAL.

1. Service Lateral Connection (SLC) is the interface of the house sewer lateral with

the main sewer. SLC to rehabilitated sanitary sewer lines shall be sealed,

normally without excavation, by the installation of a resin-impregnated,

flexible, felt tube or fiberglass tube installed into the existing service lateral.

The tube shall form a “tee” section with a full lap inside the main pipe and shall

extend continuously from the sewer main into the lateral for a minimum of 4

inch (101.6 mm). SLC may be a combination of “tees” or “wyes” of varying angle.

The resin shall be cured to form the tube into a hard impermeable pipe-within-

a-pipe. When cured, the SLC sealing shall seal the connection of the lateral to

the mainline in a continuous tight-fitting, watertight pipe-within-a-pipe to

eliminate any visible leakage between the lateral and mainline and shall

provide a leak-proof seal designed for a minimum 50-year life to prevent root

intrusion, infiltration, and exfiltration between a liner and a host pipe.

2. Prior to cleaning, you shall submit a detailed operational plan for the proposed

cleaning of all roots inside the pipe and around the service connection for the

Engineer’s approval. After cleaning, you shall proceed with lining of the pipe

and reinstating all live service connections. The service connection openings

shall conform to the shape and the size of the inside diameter of the existing

service connection. You shall use a wire brush or other methods and

equipment as recommended by other lining system providers or other

approved means and methods to provide a smooth opening for connecting

the lateral to the newly lined pipeline.

3. You shall trim all existing protruding materials which interfere with the lining

installation as flush with the pipe interior as practicable.

501-2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS.

1. This specification references ASTM test methods which are made a part hereof

by such reference and shall be the latest edition and revision thereof and shall

meet the chemical resistance requirements of 210-2.3.3, “Chemical Resistance

Test (Pickle Jar Test)”.

501-3 GENERAL CORROSION REQUIREMENTS.

1. The finished SLC sealing product shall be fabricated from materials which

when cured shall be chemically resistant to withstand internal exposure to

domestic sewage and shall meet the chemical resistance requirements of 210-

2.3.3, “Chemical Resistance Test (Pickle Jar Test)” and Table 210-2.4.1.

2. The SLC sealing product shall be compatible with the lining system materials

utilized in the main sewer line.

501-4 SLC MATERIALS.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 375

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1. A flexible felt tube shall be fabricated to neatly fit the internal circumference

of the conduit specified by the City. Allowance shall be made for

circumferential stretching during insertion.

2. The SLC sealing shall extend a minimum of 4 inches (101.6 mm) from the

mainline into the lateral.

3. You shall furnish a specially designed, unsaturated polyester or vinyl ester

resin and catalyst system compatible with the SLC sealing process that

provides cured physical strengths specified herein.

501-5 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES.

1. The cured SLC sealing shall conform to the minimum structural standards as

listed in Table 500-5.5.2.

2. No cured-in-place pipe rehabilitation technology shall be allowed that requires

bonding to the existing pipe for any part of its structural strength.

3. Design methods are to be derived for various loading parameters and modes

of failure. Equations shall be modified to include deformation in the shape of

an oval as a design parameter. The design method shall be submitted to the

Engineer for approval prior to the Pre-construction Meeting.

501-6 INSTALLATION PREPARATION.

1. You shall remove internal debris out of the sewer line.

2. Inspection of pipelines shall be performed by experienced personnel trained

in locating breaks and obstacles by closed circuit television. The interior of the

pipeline shall be carefully inspected to determine the location of any

conditions which may prevent proper installation of the SLC sealing into the

pipelines and it shall be noted so that these conditions can be corrected. A

color video and suitable log shall be kept for later reference by the City.

3. When required, provide for the flow of sewage around the section or sections

of mainline pipe where the service lateral designated for SLC sealing is located.

The bypass shall be made by plugging the line at an existing upstream manhole

and pumping the flow into a downstream manhole or adjacent system. The pump

and bypass lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle the flow without

service interruption. The bypass systems shall be approved in advance by the City.

4. The service lateral shall be inactive during the time of installation.

5. You shall clear the line of obstructions that prevent the insertion of the SLC

sealing material. If inspection reveals an obstruction that cannot be removed

by conventional sewer cleaning equipment, you shall make an external point

repair excavation to uncover and remove the obstruction. You shall inform the

Engineer prior to the commencement of the Work.

6. The mainline pipe opening shall be prepared to accept the SLC sealing and the

mainline rehabilitated pipe shall be maximized to obtain the best possible

connection.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 376

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. The transition from the mainline pipe to the service lateral shall be smooth

and continuous to provide adequate support for the SLC sealing during

installation and cure.

501-7 SLC SEALING INSTALLATION.

1. The resin impregnated tube shall be loaded inside a pressure apparatus. The

pressure apparatus, attached to a robotic device, shall be positioned in the

mainline pipe at the service connection. The robotic device, together with a

television camera, shall be used to align the SLC repair with the service

connection opening. Air pressure, supplied to the pressure apparatus through

an air hose, shall be used to invert the resin impregnated SLC sealing into the

lateral pipe. The inversion pressure shall be adjusted to fully invert the SLC

sealing into the lateral pipe and hold the tube tight to the pipe wall. Care shall

be taken during the curing process not to over-stress the tube.

2. The pressure apparatus shall include a bladder which shall inflate in the mainline

pipe, effectively seating the SLC repair against the service connection.

3. After inversion or pull-in is completed, the recommended pressure shall be

maintained on the impregnated tube for the duration of the curing process.

Curing method shall be compatible with the resin selected. An ultraviolet (UV)

light cured, heat cured, or ambient cured resin system is typically used.

4. The initial cure shall be deemed to be completed when the SLC sealing has

been exposed to the UV light or heat source or held in place for the time period

specified by the manufacturer.

5. You shall cool the hardened SLC sealing before relieving the pressure in the

pressure apparatus. Cool-down may be accomplished by the introduction of

cool air into the pressure apparatus. Care shall be taken to maintain proper

pressure throughout the cure and cool-down period.

6. The finished SLC shall be free of dry spots, lifts, and delamination. The lateral

SLC shall not inhibit the final video of the mainline or service lateral pipes.

Frayed ends of the SLC repair shall be removed prior to acceptance.

7. During the warranty period, any defects which shall affect the integrity of

strength of the SLC shall be repaired at your expense in a manner mutually

agreed upon by the manufacturer, City, and you.

8. After the Work is completed, you shall provide the City with a video recording

showing the completed Work including the restored conditions.

501-8 CLEAN-UP.

1. Upon acceptance of the installation Work, you shall reinstate the Site affected

by its operations.

501-9 PAYMENT.

1. The payment for Service Lateral Connection Work shall be made at the

Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for each Service Lateral

Connection. The Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid shall include

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 377

THE “WHITEBOOK”

the furnishing and the installation of the Service Lateral Connection sealing

system, surface preparation and repairs, preparation and tape submittal of all

post cleaning videos and final videos in accordance with 306-18, “Video

Inspection”, bypassing if required, and testing, unless otherwise specified in

the Special Provisions.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 378

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 502 – MANHOLE AND STRUCTURE REHABILITATION

502-5.1.3 Installation. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

All steps shall be removed flush with the inside wall of the host structure. For the

removal of manhole steps for manholes not being lined, the contractor shall remove

the steps flush with the inside wall of the host structure (the manhole riser or wall)

and to seal the holes up with grout approved by the City. Formwork for the lining

system shall be installed in a manner that fits the existing walls and creates an equal

and approximate 3-inch (75 mm) annular space. Portland cement concrete shall be

used to fill the annular space. The installation of the liner shall conform to 311-1.

Prior to placement of the Portland cement concrete, the existing mainline pipe shall

be connected to the host structure as shown on the Plans and/or as specified in

the Special Provisions. Exposed Portland cement concrete surfaces within the host

structure shall be protected as specified in the Special Provisions.

ADD:

502-5.6 Cured-In-Place Manhole (CIPM) Liner.

1. General.

a) CIPM liner for the rehabilitation of a manhole shall include the

furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment for the rehabilitation

of an existing manhole with the installation of tailored fabric liner

system covering the inside surface of manhole wall and shelf. The

fabric shall be impregnated with epoxy resin and placed tight against

the manhole wall and shelf and cured with pressurized steam.

2. Material Composition and Testing.

a) The fabric liner shall contain a PVC membrane and one or more layers

of polyester fleece and fiberglass reinforcement.

b) The material shall be compatible with and capable of carrying epoxy

or epoxy-vinyl-ester resin, be able to withstand installation pressure

and curing temperature between 160° F and 200 °F (71.1 °C and 93.3

°C).

c) The approved epoxy shall be compatible with the application and be

able to cure in the presence of hot steam. The initiation temperature

for cure shall be as recommended by the resin manufacturer and

approved by the Engineer.

d) The CIPM liner shall comply with ASTM D695, ASTM D790, and ASTM

C857 and shall have, as minimum, the structural properties in

accordance with Table 500-5.5.2.

e) You shall provide Field-cured samples as directed by the Engineer.

3. Resin and Fabric Acceptance.

a) Resin and fabric shall comply with 500-5.5.3, “Resin and Tube

Acceptance”. The fabric shall be custom tailored to fit any shape

manhole wall including base, cone, and risers. The fabric shall be

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 379

THE “WHITEBOOK”

tailored such that, after curing, the maximum allowed pliable wrinkles

do not exceed ½ inch (12.7 mm) ply. Excessive wrinkles or plies may be

grounds for rejecting the rehab Work. You shall assure maximum resin

coverage where plies are anticipated.

b) The minimum design thickness of the fabric shall be 20 mils PVC

membrane, 10 oz/yd

of polyester fleece backing, and 18 oz/yd

fiberglass backing. The minimum total composite thickness shall be 88

mils.

c) The fabric shall be completely submerged in resin to allow for

maximum absorption. Resin containment shall be your responsibility.

4. Chemical Resistance.

a) The CIPM liner system shall comply with 500-5.5.4, “Chemical

Resistance Testing”.

5. Installation.

a) Prior to placing the liner, the manhole shall be cleaned in accordance with

502-6.2, “Spark Test”. You shall repair spalled or deteriorated concrete

in accordance with 502-6.3, “Mil Gauge Test”; 502-6.4, “Adhesion

Testing”; and 502-6.5, “Liner Repairs”.

b) Installation shall be by an installer that is qualified by the liner

manufacturer. You shall include the furnishing of all materials,

equipment, tools, and labor as required for the rehabilitation of the

manholes selected, including the installation of the interior liner. The

installation of the approved liner system shall be in strict accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions. This shall include the preparation,

installation, inflation, curing, and finishing operation required for the

completion of the manhole rehabilitation process. Safety rules and

regulations applicable laws and insurance requirements shall be

observed in storing, handling, use and application of the liner materials,

resins, and any solvents. Ventilation shall be provided to the workers at

all times.

c) The liner shall be installed and cured in place via controlled curing by

heat and pressurization (2 psi to 5 psi) in the manhole to complete the

curing process in less than 2 hours.

d) The lining of the manhole shall result in a monolithic structure to the

shape and contour of the existing manhole. The liner shall be installed

and bond to the interior manhole substrate and completely watertight,

free of any joints or openings.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 380

THE “WHITEBOOK”

502-5.6.1 Payment.

1. The payment for manhole rehabilitation Work shall be included in the vertical

foot Bid item for “Rehabilitate Existing Manhole with Cured-In-Place Manhole

Liner” and shall include all necessary labor, material, and equipment to clean,

repair, and line the manhole as specified herein. The vertical foot liner

measurement shall be defined as the distance between the top of shelf to the

manhole cover seat.

ADD:

502-6.6 Chemical Resistance Test (Pickle Jar Test).

1. Epoxy Lining Systems, Polyurethane and Epoxy Protective Lining Systems

shall meet the requirements of 211-2, “CHEMICAL RESISTANCE TEST (PICKLE

JAR) TEST”. Proof of meeting these requirements shall be provided to the

Engineer for approval at least 15 Working Days prior to commencement of

Work.

2. The epoxy primer materials for the polyurethane lining system shall be 100%

solids.

3. The epoxy materials for the epoxy lining system shall be 100% solids.

ADD:

502-6.7 Repair Methods.

1. Defects in the APC shall be repaired in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions or 303-1.10, “Curing” and 200-1, “ROCK PRODUCTS”.

2. Pinholes in the protective lining shall be marked off on surface areas

containing pinholes to a point 6 inch (152.4 mm) beyond all pinholes and

recoated with the epoxy lining or primed with epoxy primer and recoated with

polyurethane to a minimum additional thickness of 30 mils (762 µm).

3. Blisters, uncured lining, and surface imperfections shall be completely

removed and the areas recoated with the epoxy lining or epoxy primer and

polyurethane lining to a point 6 inch (152.4 mm) beyond the repair areas at a

minimum thickness of 100 mils (2540 µm).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 381

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

SECTION 503 – SERVICE LATERAL REHABILITATION

503-1 GENERAL.

1. The rehabilitation shall be accomplished using a fabric or fiberglass tube of

particular length and a thermoset resin with physical and chemical properties

appropriate for the application without excavation and disturbing surface

improvements. The tube is vacuum impregnated with the resin. Access to an

upstream end of the service lateral is made by excavation in the public right

of way. Installation of the resin-impregnated tube into the service lateral may

be performed either by Type A inversion in accordance with ASTM F1216 or by

Type B pull-in in accordance with ASTM F1743 and may be performed from

either the mainline or the excavated end of the lateral.

2. The cured-in-place liner shall extend the entire length of the lateral from the

access point at the property line to the mainline. The location of the cleanout

shall not be modified unless approved in writing by the Engineer. Once the

tube or resin composite is cured, the installation equipment shall be removed

and the protruding end in the sewer main shall be cut using a robotic cutting

device. A sewer cleanout in accordance with Standard Drawing SDS-102,

“Sewer Lateral Cleanout (In Paved Alley, Sidewalk, or Other Areas Subject to

Traffic)” or SDS-103, “Sewer Lateral Cleanout” shall be installed at the access

point and properly backfilled.

3. A lateral rehabilitation including the installation of lateral cleanout and backfill

process shall be completed within 15 Working Days.

4. The liner shall be extended sufficiently to create a water tight seal at the main

and the liner interface.

5. If there is a Service Lateral Connection (SLC) in place, then the cured-in-place

lateral liner shall have a minimum overlap of 2 inches (50.8 mm) over the

previously installed SLC -.

6. Existing ABS and PVC sewer laterals shall not be rehabilitated. These laterals

shall be replaced or shall have point repairs performed on them as directed

by the Engineer.

503-2 MATERIAL.

1. The tube shall consist of one or more layers of flexible needled felt or an

equivalent material. Where the tube is fabricated from non-woven felt, the

longitudinal and circumferential joints are made up by seal bonding. The tube

shall be capable of conforming to bends, off-set joints, bells, and disfigured

pipe sections. The resin and catalyst system as designed for the specific

application shall meet the chemical resistance requirements of 210-2.3.3,

“Chemical Resistance Test (Pickle Jar Test)”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 382

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. The composite of the materials above shall, upon installation inside the host

pipe, exceed the minimum test standards specified in Table 500-5.5.2.

3. The thickness of the lateral lining shall be no less than 0.12 inch (36.6 mm) and

not more than 0.18 inch (54.9 mm) for laterals up to and including 8 inches

(203.2 mm) in diameter. The thickness of the lateral lining shall be in

accordance with Table 500-1.1 (A) for laterals larger than 8 inch (203.22 mm)

in diameter.

503-3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES (ASTM F1216 AND ASTM F1743).

1. The property owner of the lateral being reconstructed shall be informed and

the flow stopped for the period of reconstruction Work.

2. You shall excavate an access pit at the property line cleanout location. The

excavation pit shall be located entirely within the public right-of-way, and shall

not encroach into the private property. You shall replace in kind all existing

improvements impacted by the installation process.

3. You shall clean, video, and determine the structural condition of the lateral line

prior to installation. Roots, debris, and protruding service connections shall be

removed prior to installation.

4. The tube shall be inspected for torn or frayed sections. The tube in good

condition shall then be vacuum impregnated with the thermoset resin.

5. No open pans or uncontrolled open-air pouring of resin shall be allowed

during tube saturation. Resin shall be contained within the inflation bladder

during vacuum impregnation and insertion. You shall ensure that no property

is exposed to contamination by liquid resin compounds or components.

6. The saturated tube along with the inflation bladder shall be inserted into the

installation equipment and the end closed. The entire installation equipment

shall be placed in the pipe access pit and aligned with the exposed end of the

pipe.

7. The resin and tube shall be completely protected during the placement. The

resin shall not be contaminated or diluted by exposure to dirt, debris, or water

during the placement.

8. The tube shall be installed from the installation equipment by controlled air,

water, or steam pressure in accordance with manufacturer instructions. The

tube shall extend the entire reconstruction length and shall be held tightly in

place against the wall of the host pipe until the cure is complete.

9. When the curing process is complete, the pressure is released and the inflation

bladder reverted back into the installation equipment and removed from the

access point.

10. No barriers, coatings, or any material other than the cured tube or resin

composite specifically designed for desirable physical and chemical resistance

properties shall be left in the host pipe. Any materials used in the installation

other than the cured tube or resin composite shall be removed.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 383

THE “WHITEBOOK”

11. Any cured tube or resin composite pipe left protruding from the service

connection into the sewer main shall be trimmed back using a hydraulic-

powered robotic cutting device specifically designed for cutting cured-in-place

pipe made from these materials.

12. A second video inspection shall be performed to verify the proper cure of the

material, the proper trim of service connection, and the integrity of the seamless

pipe.

13. The bypass pumping system shall be removed and the sewer flows restored

to normal flow conditions. The excavation shall be properly backfilled and

compacted. The property owner of the service connection shall be informed

before and after the Work is complete.

503-4 DEVIATIONS.

1. If pre-installation inspection reveals conditions in the service lateral to be

substantially different than those used in the design of wall thickness, tube

construction, tube length, or resin system, then you shall correct the situation

as approved by the Engineer.

503-5 ACCEPTANCE.

1. Upon completion, you shall deliver the video records and written reports to

the Engineer. The Engineer shall review the documentation and the Site to

determine if the Work is complete and if the Work may be accepted.

503-6 PAYMENT.

1. The payment for the service lateral rehabilitation Work of existing sewer

laterals shall include the removal and replacement of sidewalk panels and

restoration of existing surface public/private improvements as required by the

Engineer and excavations are included in the Bid Item “Service Lateral

Rehabilitation with Cleanout”, regardless of sewer lateral material or depth

of cleanout.

2. The Bid items for service lateral rehabilitation Work shall include all necessary

labor, materials, and equipment in order to clean, repair, and line the Sewer

Lateral.

3. The point repair Work for sewer laterals shall be in accordance with 500-4,

“PIPELINE POINT REPAIR AND/OR REPLACEMENT” and shall be included in the

Bid item for each “Point Repair for Existing Sewer Lateral”. Measurement shall

be made at the pipe and shall be based on the length of pipe repaired. You

shall be paid for 1 point repair for each repair 8 ft (2.43 m) or less in length.

Any continuous point repair greater than 8 ft (2.43 m), shall be paid linearly

proportioned to bid item “Point Repair for Existing Sewer Main”. This payment

shall include all necessary labor, materials, and equipment to clean, repair,

excavate, inspect the Point Repair, backfill, pavement restoration including

sidewalks, driveways and any other above ground improvements.

4. The payment for the cleaning of and video inspection for rehabilitated

laterals shall be paid in accordance with 306-18.7, “Payment”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 384

THE “WHITEBOOK”

END OF PART 5 - PIPELINE SYSTEM REHABILITATION

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 385

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 386

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 6

TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

SECTION 600 – ACCESS

DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

SECTION 600 – ACCESS

600-1 GENERAL.

1. Your Work shall cause no unnecessary inconvenience to the public or businesses

in the vicinity of the Work. You shall have no greater length or quantity of Work

under construction than can be prosecuted with a minimum of inconvenience to

the public and other contractors engaged in adjacent or related Work.

2. You shall notify property owners and tenants in accordance with 5-10.2,

“Community Outreach Services” and shall post signs notifying the public a

minimum of 5 Working Days prior to the closure or detour of streets.

3. You shall provide continuous and unobstructed vehicular and pedestrian

access to the adjacent properties unless otherwise specified in the Special

Provisions, Traffic Control Plans, or Traffic Control Permit as approved by the

City.

4. You shall cooperate with the various parties involved in the delivery of mail and

the collection of trash, recycling, and yard waste to maintain existing schedules

for these services.

5. You shall notify Environmental Services Department via email

(trash@sandiego.gov

) of street closures affecting the regular scheduled solid

waste collection at least 3 Working Days prior to the street closure. Include

your business name and phone number, days of closure, time of scheduled

closure, and date of anticipated street reopening in the notification.

a) You shall verify waste collection schedules via the Environmental

Services website at:

http://www.sandiego.gov/environmental-services/collection/index.shtml

b) You shall comply with the following requirements for trash, recycling,

and yard waste collection:

i. Provide advance written notice to every property affected by

blocked public right of way.

ii. Coordinate the relocation of trash, recycling, and yard waste

containers to an accessible public street for the City’s waste

collection crews on collection day.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 387

THE “WHITEBOOK”

iii. When necessary, relocate the containers from the blocked

streets to the accessible public right of way before the City’s

collection vehicles arrive to assist with collection on existing

schedules. Return the containers to their point of origin to

ensure the accuracy of inventory assignment by address.

c) If the City’s crews are unable to provide the citizens with the mandated

services due to your failure to comply with these specifications, you

shall collect trash, recyclables, and yard waste on the City’s schedule

and deliver to the City’s designated locations. If you fail to perform this

Work, you shall incur additional costs for the City to reschedule pick

up of an area.

6. You shall obtain a Right of Entry Permit from Railroad prior to entering or

constructing on property owned, operated, occupied, or controlled by the

Railroad. You shall abide by the terms of the Right of Entry Permit and shall

arrange and pay for inspection as required by the Railroad. The terms of the

Right of Entry Permit control over the Plans and Specifications. Your right to

enter right-of-way owned, operated, occupied, or controlled by Railroad is

subject to the absolute right of Railroad to cause your Work to cease if, in the

opinion of Railroad, your activities create a hazard to Railroad’s patrons,

employees, and operations.

a) The term “Railroad” means an owner, operator, inhabitant or

controller of rail facilities. These include San Diego Metropolitan

Transit System (MTS), San Diego Trolley, Inc. (SDTI), San Diego

Association of Governments (SANDAG), Port of San Diego, San Diego

& Arizona Eastern Railroad (SD&AE), American Track - National

Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRACK), Transit America, Union

Pacific Rail Road Company (UPRR), Burlington Northern Santa Fe

Railway (BNSF), and North County Transit District (NCTD).

b) Information on obtaining a Right of Entry Permit and regarding policies

can be obtained at:

i. MTS Right of Way Services at 619-557-4501 or

http://www.sdmts. com/Business/Permits.asp

ii. NCTD Customer Service at (760) 996-6500 or

http://www.gonctd.com/working-around-the-rails

iii. BNSF Permit Management Office (817) 230-2628

http://www.bnsf.com/about-bnsf/faqs.html

iv. UPRR Customer Service at (402) 501-4941 or

http://www.up.com/real_estate/tempuse/index.htm

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 388

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. Notify and coordinate with Metropolitan Transit System (MTS) and the San

Diego County Regional Airport Authority (Airport Authority) a minimum of 5

Working Days prior to excavation, construction, or temporary traffic control

affecting airport operation and transit stops.

a) MTS (Street Closure and Bus Stops)

(619) 238-0100 Ext 6451

b) MTS (Taxi Zones) / (Trolley Lines)

(619) 235-2644 / (619) 595-4960

c) San Diego County Regional Airport Authority

(619)-400-2880

8. Notify the remaining agencies a minimum of 2 Working Days prior to construction

activities affecting the agencies.

a) Fire Department Dispatch (Street or alley closure)

(858) 573-1300

b) Police Department Traffic (Street or alley closure)

(619) 531-2000

c) Street Division/Electrical (Traffic signals)

(619) 527-7500

d) U.S. Navy (32nd Street Naval Station)

(619) 556-1319

e) Underground Service Alert (Any excavation)

(800) 422-4133

9. Where Work occurs on Harbor Drive or impacts traffic flow to San Diego

International Airport (Airport) from adjacent and contiguous streets such as

Pacific Highway, Laurel Street, Grape Street, Hawthorn Street, and Nimitz Blvd.,

you shall adjust the Schedule to take advantage of the reduced Airport operations

and low vehicular traffic on Harbor Drive and surrounding streets between the

hours of 11:00 PM and 5:00 AM, Monday through Saturday, or as stipulated by

your Traffic Control Permit. Do not interrupt access to the Airport.

10. If Work is located within the flight path of aircrafts landing or taking off at San

Diego airports, you shall obtain a construction permit for tall equipment (such

as cranes) through Federal Aviation Administration (FAA).

11. If weather condition is suitable, complete each street segment within 15 Working

Days from the day of the resurfacing in accordance with 6-3.1, “General”.

600-2 VEHICULAR ACCESS.

1. Vehicular access to private properties and businesses shall be maintained to the

property line except when necessary construction precludes such access.

2. Maintain cross traffic and turning moves at the intersections.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 389

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. If backfill has been completed to the extent that safe access may be provided

and the street is opened to local traffic, you shall immediately clear the street

and driveways and provide and maintain access.

4. Maintain full width of all traffic lanes of the existing roadway during non-working

hours and on Saturday, Sunday, designated Holidays, and when construction

operations are not actively in progress on Working Days.

600-3 PEDESTRIAN ACCESS.

1. See CA MUTCD Chapter 6D for requirements and guidelines.

2. Pedestrian zones and public transportation stops, as well as pedestrian crossings

of the Work site at intervals not exceeding 300 foot (91.4 m) shall be maintained

unless otherwise approved by the City. When sidewalks are closed, an alternate

walkway shall be provided. Pedestrians shall not be directed into direct conflict

with vehicles operating within the Work site or other traffic. Where it is necessary

to divert pedestrians into the parking lane or a street, barricades or temporary

traffic barriers shall be provided to separate the pedestrian walkway from the

adjacent traffic lane.

a) If crosswalk closures are necessary, you shall close only one crosswalk at

a time at intersections having 4 crosswalks. If 2 or more crosswalk

closures at an intersection are necessary, you shall submit a pedestrian

detour plan and obtain approval from the City before implementation of

the closure. Approval from the City shall be obtained before closing any

crosswalks at intersections having fewer than 4 crosswalks.

3. Vertical changes of surface elevations in areas subject to pedestrian traffic of 1/2

inch (12.5 mm) or greater shall have a beveled edge of 12 horizontal to 1 vertical.

4. Walkways within the Work site shall be a minimum of 4 foot (1.2 m) in width and

6 foot (1.8 m) in width in high volume pedestrian area with passing spaces at least

60 inches (1524 mm) by 60 inches (1524 mm) every 200 feet (61.0 m). Obstructions

within walkways shall be illuminated during hours of darkness. The minimum

vertical clearance to any obstruction larger than 4 inches (101.6 mm) within a

walkway shall be 7 feet (2.1 m).

5. The minimum horizontal clearance (buffer space) between walkways within the

Work site and Work areas or operating equipment shall be a minimum of 5 feet

(1.5 m).

600-3.1 ADA Requirements.

1. Temporary facilities shall be detectable by a person with a visual disability

traveling with the aid of a long cane and include accessibility features

consistent with the features present in the existing pedestrian facility. A

detectable barrier shall be placed across the full width of the closed sidewalk.

2. Channelized pedestrian routes shall be clear of obstacles and shall have a

continuous detectable edging. The accessible route shall have the following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 390

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) Clear headroom of at least 80 inches (2032 mm).

b) A surface that is firm, stable, and slip resistant.

c) No level changes in excess of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) vertically (in the

absence of a curb ramp, ramp, elevator, or platform lift).

d) A curb ramp slope of less than 8.3% (1:12).

e) A path of travel slope of less than 5% (1:20) and a cross slope of less than

2% (1:50).

f) Routes that are under scaffolding conforming to ADA requirements.

g) Audible information devices (when shown on Plans or Traffic Control

Permit).

600-4 BICYCLE ACCESS.

1. Bikeway systems interrupted by Temporary Traffic Control (TTC) shall have

signage through or around the TTC back to the bikeway in accordance with

SECTION 601 - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSTRUCTION AND

MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES. Roadways adjacent to the Work site shall be

kept free of obstructions or other hazards to bicyclists.

600-5 PAYMENT.

1. The payment for access Work as specified in SECTION 600 – ACCESS shall be

included in the Contract Price.

2. The payment for MTS Right of Entry Permit procurement Work including

railroad liability insurance, plan reviews, inspections, flagging, and fees shall

be included in the allowance Bid item for “MTS Right of Entry Permit”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 391

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 601 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR

CONSTRUCTION

AND MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES

DELETE in entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

SECTION 601 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSTRUCTION

AND MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES

601-1 GENERAL.

1. Temporary traffic control (TTC) for construction and Work zones shall conform

to Part 6 of the California MUTCD, the specifications, and the Traffic Control

Plan (TCP) if so included with the Plans or if required to be prepared by you

and submitted as a Working Drawing.

2. Working hours are the Normal Working Hours unless otherwise specified.

Work requiring traffic lane closures shall only be performed between the

hours specified in the Special provisions or shown on the TCP.

3. Traffic shall be permitted to pass though the Work site, unless otherwise

specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the TCP.

4. If construction is to be performed in phases, complete the Work in each phase

prior to beginning the Work in the next phase. Approval of temporary Traffic

Control Plans or Working Drawings for hours outside of the Normal Working

Hours does not constitute a guarantee that the City will be available to inspect

the Work.

5. TTC activities and milestones shall be shown as activities on your construction

schedule in accordance with 6-1, “CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND

COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK”.

6. The term “hours of darkness” used in the specifications shall mean the hours

of darkness as defined in Division 1, Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code.

7. Roadways adjacent to the Work site shall be kept clean and free of

obstructions or other hazards. Do not store or allow equipment, material, or

debris to remain in the public right-of-way without prior approval by the City.

Refer to 3-12, “WORK SITE MAINTENANCE”.

8. You shall conduct roadway construction operations in a manner that provides

a surface safe for vehicular traffic. Vertical changes of pavement elevations 1½

inches (37.5 mm) or greater shall have a beveled edge of 4 horizontal to 1

vertical.

9. Pavement surface disruptions in marked bike lanes or routes of ½ inch

(12.5 mm) or more shall have a beveled edge of 8 horizontal to 1 vertical. Signs

indicating the condition of the surface of the pavement shall be posted as

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 392

THE “WHITEBOOK”

shown on the TCP or as specified in the Special Provisions. If the pavement

surface elevation changes are not beveled and signs are not posted, the

bicycle lane or route shall be closed.

10. When a bicycle lane or route is closed, signing shall be installed to terminate

the bike lane or route. Signs shall be posted to advise motorists and bicyclists

that the previously separated bicycle traffic will be in the vehicular traveled

way. Barricades used at the terminus or the closure shall be spaced to prevent

physical passage by bicyclists into the closed bicycle lane or route.

11. Lane restrictions, flagging, or other operations shall not cause traffic to stop

on railroad tracks. Whenever the Work causes traffic to back up across an

active railroad track, a flagger shall be provided.

12. Backfill or cover trenches with steel trench plates at the end of each Workday.

“STEEL PLATE AHEAD” (W8-24) signs shall be present whenever steel plates are

present. Place an asphalt ramp around each trench plate. Upon completion of

excavation backfill, provide a satisfactory surface for traffic. Portable concrete

barriers, additional noticing, and other items may be required when trenching

cannot be secured overnight by backfilling or trench-plating.

13. You shall furnish, install, program, and maintain a City approved temporary

video or radar detection system to provide vehicle detection for intersection

approaches that existing detection systems are damaged, disabled, or become

ineffective due to construction activities for a period of 5 or more Calendar

Days. At the completion of the construction phase, you shall be responsible

for the complete removal of all temporary detection equipment and

restorations or installation of the permanent vehicle detection system.

14. Additional TTC requirements shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.

601-2 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN (TCP).

601-2.1 General.

1. If specified in the Contract Documents, you shall submit a TCP in accordance

with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS”.

2. Traffic Control Plans shall have the project title, phase identification, name of

the firm preparing the TCP, name and stamp of the Registered Civil Engineer

(for engineered TCP), approval block for each jurisdictional agency, north

arrow, sheet number, and number of sheets comprising the TCP. General

notes and symbol definitions shall be included when required.

3. The TCP shall be drawn to a 1 inch = 40 feet (1:500) scale on common size

sheets, either 8½ inches (215.9 mm) x 11 inches (279.4 mm), 8½ inches (215.9

mm) x 14 inches (355.6 mm), or 11 inches (279.4 mm) x 17 inches (431.8 mm)

Plan sheets as dictated by the length of Work. Engineered TCP shall be 2 feet

(609.6 mm) x 3 feet (914.4 mm) in accordance with 601-2.1.2, “Engineered

Traffic Control Plans (TCP)”.

4. The requirements in the Special Provisions shall govern the design of the

proposed TCP. Working Drawings may be approved by the City.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 393

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. The TCP shall clearly show all necessary details and shall be Site-specific. The

City will not accept typical Plans and sections.

6. Prepare TCP in accordance with the City’s Computer Aided Design and Drafting

(CADD) standards. You may use any standard engineering CADD program

(MicroStation or AutoCAD) to prepare the TCP.

7. Allow at least 20 Working Days for the City’s review of each submitted TCP.

8. You are not entitled to Contract Time extensions if you fail to properly produce

the Engineered TCP or Traffic Control Working Drawings to schedule the Work.

601-2.1.1 Traffic Control Permit.

1. Do not begin the Work in the public roadway without the approved temporary

traffic control permit. The TCP is not valid until Work dates are approved and

a temporary traffic control permit is issued by the City.

2. For City Projects, coordinate the traffic control permit application submittal

with the Work so that no items of Work will be delayed. To obtain a temporary

traffic control permit, call the Engineering and Capital Projects’ (ECP)

Construction Management & Field Engineering (CMFE) Division’s Traffic

Control Section, (858) 495-4742 for an appointment a minimum of 2 Working

Days prior to starting the Work and a minimum of 5 Working Days when the

Work will affect a traffic signal. Provide 1 copy of the temporary traffic control

drawings specified in the Contract Documents at the time of the appointment.

Upon approval of your TCP, the Traffic Control Section of CMFE will issue the

permit.

3. For Private Development Projects, the Developer/Contractor shall submit a

Traffic Control Plan (TCP) to Development Services Department (DSD) for

approval prior to starting Work. The Developer/Contractor shall also obtain a

Temporary Traffic Control Permit for the approved TCP from DSD for any Work

in the public right-of-way prior to start of Work. Temporary Traffic Control

Permits can be obtained online on the DSD traffic control permitting website

(https://www.sandiego.gov/development-services/permits/traffic-control-

permit). In person visits will be scheduled only if approved by DSD staff by

calling 619-446-5150. The Developer/Contractor shall obtain a Temporary

Traffic Control Permit a minimum of 5 Working Days prior to starting the Work

and a notification to agencies 5 Working Days in advance if the Work will affect

a bus stop or an existing traffic signal or will require a road or alley closure.

4. Submit proposed changes and deviations from the traffic control plan permit

for the City’s approval. Prior to implementation, the City will observe the

implementation of Traffic Control Plans and reserves the right to require you to

make changes as field conditions warrant. The City may approve the changes to

the Traffic Control Plan Permit or if directed in writing by the City.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 394

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. Any Work impacting traffic to and from the San Diego International Airport

shall be coordinated with the San Diego County Regional Airport Authority and

Working Hours shall be approved by the San Diego County Regional Airport

Authority prior to obtaining a Traffic Control Permit from the City. Refer to

600-1, “GENERAL”.

601-2.1.2 Engineered Traffic Control Plans (TCP).

1. Engineered TCP shall be 2 feet (609.6 mm) x 3 feet (914.4 mm). The engineered

TCP shall be signed and stamped by a Professional Civil Engineer registered in

the State of California (per CA MUTCD 1A.09).

2. Coordinate with the City’s Traffic Control Section of CMFE for the development

and approval of the engineered TCP. Submit a Traffic Control Approach to the

Engineer prior to preparing the engineered TCP. A list of traffic control items

is available upon request from the CMFE Division as a guideline. Prepare the

engineered TCP in accordance with the approved Traffic Control Approach.

You may obtain a copy of the Project area base map through the City. If

extensive additions or corrections are required, the CMFE Traffic Control Section

will return the marked-up print for corrections and re-submission.

3. If no changes or corrections are required, the Traffic Control Section will retain

the original engineered TCP and return 1 copy with the TCP Permit to you.

4. You shall obtain or require your Subcontractor to obtain Architects and

Engineers Professional Insurance (Errors and Omissions Insurance) in

accordance with 5-4, “INSURANCE” as specified in the Special Provisions for

the Work of the engineered TCP.

601-2.1.3 Traffic Control Working Drawings.

1. For those portions of the Work where Engineered TCP are not provided nor

required, prepare and submit traffic control Working Drawings as part of your

Traffic Control Permit package.

2. If extensive additions or corrections are required, the Traffic Control Section

will return the marked-up print for corrections and re-submission.

3. If no change or correction is required, the original Working Drawings will be

retained by the City. One copy, with the TCP Permit attached, will be returned

to you.

4. When required by the City, Traffic Control Working Drawings shall be prepared

and stamped by a Licensed Professional Civil Engineer.

601-2.1.4 Traffic Control for Resurfacing and Slurry Sealing.

1. Prepare TCP for Resurfacing and Slurry Sealing in accordance with 601-2.1.3,

“Traffic Control Working Drawings”.

2. Place temporary reflective pavement markers on all roadways with painted

centerline immediately upon completion of the resurfacing or slurry sealing.

Remove temporary reflective pavement markers only for new permanent

pavement striping.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 395

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. The City will provide you, at the Pre-construction Meeting, with the standard

format for “NO PARKING - TOW-AWAY ZONE” signs for the resurfacing or slurry

seal portion of the Work. You shall furnish the “NO PARKING - TOW-AWAY

ZONE” signs and pedestals for posting on sidewalks and streets.

a) Mount the “NO PARKING - TOW-AWAY ZONE” signs on suitable

pedestals, such as tripods and barricades. Post signs every 50 feet

(15.2 m) on both sides of the block affected by the proposed

resurfacing, slurry sealing, or both.

b) Affix to each “NO PARKING - TOW-AWAY ZONE” sign cards with 2-inch

(50.8 mm) high letters stating the day(s) of the week parking is

prohibited, as well as your company name and telephone number.

Remove the “NO PARKING - TOW-AWAY ZONE” signs immediately

following the completion of the resurfacing, slurry sealing, or both.

c) For each street block segment scheduled for slurry sealing or

resurfacing, the “NO PARKING - TOW-AWAY ZONE” signs shall be

posted for 2 consecutive Working Days. Schedule the slurry sealing on

the first posted Working Day, unless approved by the City. The second

posted Working Day shall be reserved for emergency Work, and may

be used only with the approval of the City. Reschedule street block

segments which are not completed by the second posted Working

Day.

d) Place “NO PARKING - TOW-AWAY ZONE” signs 72 hours in advance of

the scheduled slurry sealing. Reschedule street block segments which

are not completed by the last posted Working Day. If a Work delay of

48 hours or more occurs from the originally scheduled Work date,

remove the “NO PARKING - TOW-AWAY ZONE” signs for a minimum of

24 hours, then reset and re-post for the appropriate Work date.

4. Furnish and distribute door hanger notices in sufficient quantities to advise

the general public of the scheduled parking prohibitions in accordance with 5-

10.2, “Community Outreach Services”.

601-2.1.5 Traffic Control for Street Closures and Detours.

1. You shall comply with all applicable State, County, and City requirements for

the closure of streets.

2. Street closures, detours, barricades lights, other safety devices shall conform

to current requirements covering “signs” as set forth by Caltrans.

3. You shall provide barriers, guards, lights, signs, temporary bridges, flag

persons, and watch persons. You shall be responsible for complying with

additional public safety requirements which may arise. You shall furnish and

install signs and warning devices and promptly remove them upon completion

of the Work.

4. At least 2 Working Days in advance of closing, partially closing or reopening,

any street, alley, or other public thoroughfare, you shall notify the Police, Fire,

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 396

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Traffic and Engineering Departments, and comply with their requirements.

Deviations shall first be approved in writing by the City. Refer to 600-1,

“GENERAL”.

5. You shall secure approval, in advance, from authorities concerned for the use

of any bridges proposed by it for public use. Temporary bridges shall be clearly

posted as to load limit, with signs and posting conforming to current

requirements covering “signs” as set forth in the Traffic Manual published by

the California Department of Transportation. This manual shall also apply to

the street closures, barricades, detours, lights, and other safety devices

required.

6. Maintain, whether shown on the Plan or not, existing traffic control signs or

signals in their proper location on temporary mounting supports until

permanent signs or signals are restored.

7. When constructing a new roadway, install and maintain Type 3 barricades with

flashing yellow lights and “Road Closed” signs, chain link fences, or both until

the new or improved roadway is accepted by the City.

8. For the Work in the vicinity of the Airport as specified in 600-1, “GENERAL”,

perform the following:

a) Perform the Work necessitating closure of 1 or 2 more lanes on Harbor

Drive outside Normal Working Hours unless otherwise specified in

the Contract Documents.

b) When sufficient width is available, maintain a minimum of 2 travel

lanes in each direction at all times unless otherwise specified in the

Contract Documents or agreed upon by Airport representatives.

c) Construct and maintain detours at the proper time. The City will close

down the Work if you fail or refuse to construct and maintain detours as

required.

d) Do not interrupt the operation of the existing traffic signals and

lighting unless otherwise specified.

e) Whenever a portion of the roadway is completed, make that section of

the road available to traffic immediately if it does not conflict with the rest

of the traffic control devises and if it does not compromise public safety.

f) Furnish flag persons, when required, to give adequate warning to

traffic or to the public of any dangerous conditions to be encountered.

601-3 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL (TTC) ZONE DEVICES.

601-3.1 General.

1. TTC zone devices shall conform to NCHRP Report 350 criteria for TTC

crashworthy devices and the California MUTCD. Retro-reflective sheeting used

on TTC devices shall conform to ASTM D4956.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 397

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Furnish, install, and maintain the traffic control devices as shown on the traffic

control permit and approved TCP’s and any additional traffic control devices

as may be required to ensure the safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians

and to provide for the safety of construction workers.

3. Maintain existing traffic control signs and traffic signals in their proper location

on temporary mounting supports until permanent signs or signals are

restored.

4. Your name or the Supplier’s name who owns the traffic control devices shall

be clearly noted on each device.

5. All traffic control devices shall be removed from the work area immediately

following the completion of the Work.

601-3.2 Categories.

1. Category 1. Category 1 TTC zone devices shall be defined as small, lightweight

devices weighing less than 100 pounds (45.4 Kg) certified as crashworthy by

crash testing or crash testing of similar devices. Category 1 temporary traffic

control zone devices include, but are not limited to, traffic cones, plastic traffic

drums, portable delineators, and channelizers.

2. Category 2. Category 2 TTC zone devices shall be defined as small, lightweight

devices weighing less than 100 pounds (45.4 Kg) that are not expected to produce

significant changes in vehicular velocity but could cause harm to impacting

vehicles. Category 2 temporary traffic control zone devices include, but are not

limited to, barricades and portable sign supports.

3. Category 3. Category 3 TTC zone devices shall be defined as temporary traffic-

handling equipment and devices weighing 100 pounds (45.4 Kg) or more that

are expected to produce significant changes in the vehicular velocity of impacting

vehicles. Category 3 temporary traffic-handling equipment and devices include,

but are not limited to, crash cushions, impact attenuator vehicles, temporary

railing, temporary barrier, and end treatments for temporary railings and barriers.

601-3.3 Crashworthiness.

1. Category 1 devices purchased after October 1, 1998 shall be self-certified by

the vendor. Self-certification shall be based on crash testing, crash testing of

similar devices, or years of demonstrable safe performance. The certification

shall be submitted to the City prior to the start of the Work.

2. Category 2 devices shall be those listed on the FHWA’s “Accepted Crashworthy

Category 2 Hardware for Work Zones” that meets NCHRP Report 350 criteria

for crashworthiness. Category 2 devices shall have FHWA acceptance and have

been purchased after October 1, 2000. FHWA acceptance shall be labeled with

the FHWA acceptance letter number and the name of the manufacturer prior

to the start of the Work. The label shall be legible and permanently affixed by

the manufacturer. Category 2 devices without a label shall not be used on the

Work.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 398

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Category 3 devices shall be those that have been tested in accordance with

NCHRP criteria. Category 3 devices shall be as specified in the Special

Provisions or shown on the Plans or Standard Plans.

601-3.4 Operation and Maintenance.

601-3.4.1 General.

1. You shall be responsible for the operation and maintenance of the TTC zone

devices and services.

2. You shall patrol and monitor the Work site to ensure that the TTC devices are

in-place, properly positioned, and operational.

3. You shall ensure that TTC devices are repaired, replaced, and cleaned as

necessary to preserve their appearance and visibility. TTC devices that are

damaged shall be repaired or replaced.

601-3.5.1 General.

1. Unless otherwise specified, signs shall conform to the California MUTCD.

Each sign shall consist of a base, standard or framework, and a sign panel. Sign

units shall be capable of being delivered to the Work site and placed into

immediate operation.

2. Signage shall include all temporary signs required for the direction of traffic

through or around the Work site. Sign placement shall conform to the

California MUTCD and the TCP.

3. Unless otherwise specified, temporary “No Parking” and “No Stopping” signs

shall be installed 72 hours before enforcement. . Signs shall indicate specific

days, dates, and times of restrictions. If violations occur, call Police Dispatch

619-531-2000 to enforce the Tow-Away notice.

601-3.6 Channelizing Devices.

1. General. Channelizing devices shall include cones, tubular markers

(delineators), channelizers, drums, barricades, and temporary barriers.

Channelizing devices shall be placed as shown on the Plans or the TCP.

2. Cones. Tubular Markers and Channelizers. Cones, tubular markers or

channelizers shall be used on short-duration and short-term stationary

temporary traffic control zones. Tubular markers or channelizers shall be used

on intermediate-term stationary temporary traffic control zones and when

additional visibility and stability is required.

3. Drums. Drums shall be used in lieu of cones or tubular markers for long-term

stationary temporary traffic control zones or as shown on the TCP.

4. Barricades.

a) Barricades shall not be placed in a merging lane of traffic without

advance warning. Advance warning shall consist of a “High Level

Warning Device”, arrow panel and other appropriate delineation.

Barricades used at night shall be equipped with flashing lights.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 399

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Type 1 and 2 barricades shall be used on local streets and sidewalks.

Barricades shall be Type 1, Type 2, or Type 3.

c) Type 1 barricades shall not be used where they may be encountered

by the visually impaired unless horizontal tie bars are provided not

more than 6 inches (150 mm) from the bottom of the barricade.

d) Type 2 barricades shall be used in major, secondary, and collector

streets.

e) Type 3 barricades shall be used for closing streets to through traffic

and for other major operations where the barricades shall remain in

place for extended periods.

f) Barricades shall be placed such that there is no gap large enough to

for a vehicle to pass through, except where necessary to provide

access for local traffic or emergency vehicles. Ballasting of barricades

shall be by means of sand filled bags placed on the lower parts of the

barricade frame or stays. Ballasting shall not be placed over any

retroreflectorized rail face facing traffic.

g) Barricades displaced or not in an upright position shall immediately be

replaced or restored to their original location, in an upright position.

h) You shall place “OPEN TRENCH” signs (C27(CA)) on Type 3 Barricade

within the construction Work zone, ahead of any Work areas with open

trenches that are greater than 3 inches in depth, in accordance with

California MUTCD SECTION 6F.103 (CA). The barricades shall be placed

in a continuous manner and shall prevent pedestrian, vehicular, and

biker access to the open trench area.

5. Temporary Traffic Barriers.

a) Temporary traffic barriers and end treatments shall be placed as

shown on the TCP. Water-filled plastic barriers shall be used within

sidewalks and bike paths. Concrete barriers shall be used within the

vehicular way and bike lanes and routes.

b) Temporary traffic barriers shall be placed on a firm and stable

foundation. The foundation shall be paved or graded to provide

uniform bearing throughout the entire length of the barrier.

c) Abutting ends of adjoining segments shall be placed and maintained

in alignment without offset to each other. Segments shall be

positioned straight on a tangent alignment and on a true arc on a

curved alignment. Segments shall be pinned to each adjacent

segment. An impact attenuating device shall be provided on the

approach end.

d) If it is necessary to leave a gap between barrier segments due to

equipment or special drainage features, the gap shall be closed at all

times when the Work is not actively in progress at the location of the

gap.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 400

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) Drilling of holes for concrete barriers shall be as shown on the

Standard Plans or as specified in the Special Provisions. Threaded

rods of dowels shall be bonded in holes drilled in the existing

pavement.

601-3.7.4 Warning Lights.

1. General.

a) Warning lights shall be portable, powered, lens-directed, enclosed

lights with a yellow lens. Warning lights shall consist of a lighting unit,

a flasher unit, visor, backplate, standard, battery power source, and

base. The components shall be assembled to form a complete self-

contained warning light that can be delivered to the Work site and

placed in immediate operation. Warning lights may be mounted on

channelizing devices or on a standard and base.

b) The type of warning light to be used shall be as specified in the

Special Provisions or shown on the TCP.

2. Standards and Bases.

a) Standards shall be adjustable to provide a variable mounting height

between 6 feet (1.8 m) to 10 feet (3.1 m) measured from the bottom

of the base to the center of the lens. Standards shall be securely

attached to the base. Power cables shall be multi-conductor and

jacketed with neoprene and shall be of sufficient length to

accommodate the full-vertical height of the standard.

b) Bases shall be large enough to accommodate a minimum of 2, 12V

automotive-type storage batteries, and shall be of such shape and

mass that the warning light will not roll in the event it is struck by a

vehicle or pushed over.

c) Standards and bases shall be finished with 2 applications of orange

enamel conforming to color No. 12473 of Federal Standard 595B.

3. Assemblies.

a) Warning light assemblies shall be weatherproof and capable of

operating a minimum of 150 hours between battery recharges or

other routine maintenance.

b) Warning lights shall be capable of use in either a steady burn or

flashing mode.

c) Lamps shall be rated at 25W for operation with a 12V battery current.

d) The color of the light emitted shall be yellow.

e) Lens shall glass or plastic and conform to the requirements of

ANSI D.10.1.

4. Visors and Backplates.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 401

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) Warning lights shall be equipped with an 8 inch (203.2 mm) minimum

length visor and a backplate. Visors are not required during the hours

of darkness.

b) The interior of the visor and the front face of the backplate shall be

finished with 2 applications of flat black enamel conforming to 210-1,

“Paint”.

5. Installation.

a) Warning lights shall only be used outside of the Work site to provide

advance warning unless otherwise specified in the Special

Provisions or shown on the TCP. Warning lights used for advance

warning shall be clearly distinguishable from the primary delineation

and shall be positioned above the normal reflectorized barricades.

Warning lights shall be mounted a minimum height of 3 foot (0.9 m)

high measured from the bottom of the lens to the underlying surface.

b) Warning lights shall be used in either a steady burn or flashing mode.

Visors will not be required during the hours of darkness. Torches and

flares shall be used only in patrolled emergency situations.

601-3.7.5 Portable Changeable Message Signs (PCMS).

1. PCMS shall be furnished, placed, operated and maintained at the locations

shown on the Plans, TCP, as specified in the Special Provisions, or as

designated by the City.

2. Remove PCMS after initial placement, from location to location, as directed by the

Resident Engineer.

3. Make PCMS available for use 24 hours per day as required, without any additional

payment for time or number of locations unless otherwise required for changed

conditions.

4. PCMS shall not be used for advertising or as a substitute for temporary traffic

control signs and devices.

5. PCMS messages shall be approved by the City.

6. PCMS shall be installed per CA MUTCD Part 2 Chapter 2L, Part 6 Chapters 6C, 6D,

6F, and 6G.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 402

THE “WHITEBOOK”

601-3.7.6 Flashing Arrow Boards.

1. Flashing arrow boards shall be mounted to provide a minimum of 7 foot

(2.1 m) clearance between the bottom of the panel and the roadway surface.

Flashing arrow boards shall be used when the posted speed is 40 mph or

more, or when curvature of the roadway limits visibility.

601-3.7.7 Flashing Directional Bars.

1. Flashing directional bars shall be vehicle mounted. Flashing directional bars

shall be used to provide traffic control for lane closures as specified in the

Special Provisions or as shown on the TCP.

601-4 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS.

1. General.

a) Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or as shown

on the TCP, temporary traffic striping and pavement markings shall

consist of one coat of paint and glass beads (except black stripes).

b) Glass beads shall conform to 214-3, “GLASS BEADS”. Paint shall

conform to 214-4, “PAINT FOR STRIPING AND MARKING”.

2. Application.

a) Unless otherwise specified, application shall conform to 314-4,

“APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC STRIPING AND CURB AND PAVEMENT

MARKINGS” and the following:

i. Yellow lines shall separate traffic flow in opposing directions.

ii. White lines shall separate traffic flow in the same direction.

iii. Broken lines shall be permissive.

iv. Solid lines shall be restrictive.

v. Line widths indicate degree of emphasis.

vi. Double lines indicate maximum restriction.

vii. Centerlines shall be used to separate opposing traffic.

viii. Traffic striping shall not project into or across a street

intersection.

3. Removal.

a) Removal shall conform to 314-2, “REMOVAL OF TRAFFIC STRIPING AND

CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 403

THE “WHITEBOOK”

601-5 TRAFFIC LANE WIDTHS AND CLEARANCES.

1. General.

a. Traffic lanes and clearances shall conform to the requirements

specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the TCP.

2. Lane Widths.

a) Unless otherwise specified or shown on the TCP, temporary traffic

lanes shall be at least 12 foot (3.7 m) wide. A minimum 14 foot (4.3 m)

wide traffic lane shall be provided next to a curb or vertical drop off.

When only one lane is provided in each direction, wider lanes shall be

provided to separate opposing traffic and to accommodate turning

movements. A minimum 18 foot (5.5 m) wide lane shall be provided if

parking is to be allowed.

b) Bicycle lanes shall have a clear width of not less than 5 foot (1.5 m). Bicycle

lanes less than 5 foot (1.5 m) wide shall be closed. If the Work site is in a

bike path and requires the bike path to be closed, a detour bike path, lane

or route, with appropriate signage, shall be provided.

3. Clearances.

a) Unless otherwise specified or shown on the TCP, clearances to

obstructions shall be as follows:

i. Two (2) feet (609.6 mm) from vertical obstructions including,

but not limited to, longitudinal curbs, guardrails, or temporary

traffic barriers.

ii. Ten (10) feet (3.0 m) from the edge of the traveled way to fixed

objects unprotected by barriers. When the minimum clearance

to fixed objects cannot be provided, temporary barriers shall

be placed to protect the fixed object. On local streets with

speed limits of 40 miles per hour (70 km/hour) or less,

temporary asphalt concrete curb may be used in lieu of

temporary traffic barriers.

iii. Five (5) feet (1.5 m) from any excavation or drop off of 2 inches

(50.8 mm) or greater to allow placement of temporary barriers

to keep traffic out of the Work site and minimize traffic

surcharge on the excavation. When the 5-foot (1.5 m)

clearance to an excavation or drop off cannot be maintained,

temporary traffic barriers shall be placed to separate vehicles,

bicycles, and pedestrians from the excavation or drop off.

b) If the City determines that it is necessary to decrease the minimum

distances specified to allow for the prosecution of the Work, you shall

provide such temporary traffic control devices as required by the City.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 404

THE “WHITEBOOK”

601-6 COVERING OF EXISTING TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNAL FACES.

1. General.

a) Existing traffic signs and signal faces shall be covered as specified in

the Special Provisions or as shown on the Plans or TCP.

b) Covers shall be designed to be installed by hand without the use of

tools. The size of the cover shall closely fit and encapsulate the traffic

control device.

2. Cover Material.

a) Covers shall be made from outdoor grade, weather-resistant cloth,

plastic, or metallic material and be specially fabricated for the intended

purpose.

b) Cover material shall be of sufficient density to block out the sign face

or message so that the sign face or message is not visible to oncoming

traffic.

c) Signal head covers shall be a matte tan color or a contrasting color to

the signal head. Covers for pedestrian indications shall be a matte

black color.

3. Installation.

a) General. Covers shall be secured in place with bolt snaps attached to

elastic straps. Adhesive tape shall not be used. The straps shall be

permanently attached to the cover.

b) Vehicle Heads. You shall cover all non-functioning vehicle heads

utilizing signal head covers. No holes shall be drilled in any indications

to attach the covers. A minimum of 2 vehicle heads for each phase

shall be in operation while Work is being performed at an intersection

except for approved shutdowns.

c) Pedestrian Indications. Pedestrian indications shall be covered. If

audible pedestrian signals are in place, the audible warning device

shall be temporarily disabled for the crossing taken out of service.

d) Pedestrian Push Buttons. Pedestrian push button message signs

shall be removed, reversed, and remounted on the pedestrian push

button assembly. Pedestrian push button assembly covers may be

used instead of reversing and remounting pedestrian push button

message signs.

e) Audible Pedestrian Signals. Audible pedestrian signals shall be

disabled by temporarily removing the load switches for the pedestrian

indications within the traffic signal controller cabinet. The pedestrian

indications shall then be covered.

f) Signs. Sign covers shall be securely fastened to the sign.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 405

THE “WHITEBOOK”

601-7 PAYMENT

1. The payment for traffic control Working Drawings, permits, traffic control

Work including any traffic control devices that may be required by the City,

shall be included in Bid item for “Traffic Control and Working Drawings”.

2. The payment for Engineered Traffic Control Plans, traffic control Work, and

permits shall be included in the Bid item for “Traffic Control and Engineered

Traffic Control Plans”.

3. When included in the Bid proposal, the Bid item for “Traffic Control” shall

include the payment for all traffic control devices, permits, required signs,

notices, and detours as shown in the provided Engineered Traffic Control

Plans.

4. No separate or additional payment shall be made for the operation,

maintenance, repair, or replacement of TTC zone devices.

5. When included in the Bid proposal, the following traffic control devices shall

be measured and paid for separately:

a) K-rails shall be measured and paid for per linear foot along the top

of the rail per location. Maintaining, repairing, replacing, and

removing the K-rail; excavating and backfilling; drilling holes and

grouting threaded rods or dowels when required; removing threaded

rods or dowels and filling drilled holes with mortar; and moving and

replacing removable panels as required, complete in place, as shown

on the Plans and in accordance with these specifications and the

Special Provisions, shall be included in the Bid item for “K-rail”.

b) Crash cushion modules shall be measured per each individual

module (barrel), on a one-time basis, for each location shown on the

Plans. Maintaining, repairing, replacing, and removing the modules,

complete in place, as shown on the Plans and in accordance with

these specifications and the Special Provisions, shall be included in

the Bid item for “Crash Cushion Module”.

c) Flashing arrow boards and electronic message signs shall be

available for use 24 hours per day as required, without any additional

payment for time or number of locations unless otherwise required

for changed conditions. Maintaining, repairing, replacing, and

removing the flashing arrow boards, complete in place, as shown on

the Plans, and in accordance with these specifications and the

Special Provisions, shall be included in the Bid item for “Flashing

Arrow Boards”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 406

THE “WHITEBOOK”

d) PCMS shall be measured by the unit from actual count. The

allowance Bid item for “Portable Changeable Message Signs (PCMS)”

shall include full compensation for furnishing, placing, operating,

maintaining, repairing, replacing, transporting from location to

location, and removing the PCMS as shown on the Plans, in

accordance with these specifications and the Special Provisions,

and as directed by the City.

e) The payment for furnishing, installing, programming, maintaining, and

removing City approved temporary video or radar detection systems

as specified in 601-1, “GENERAL” shall be included in the Bid item for

each “Temporary Detection System” required at each intersection.

END OF PART 6 - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 407

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 408

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 7

STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 700 – MATERIALS

DELETE all sections and subsections in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. All material shall be in accordance with Sections 86 and 87 of the Caltrans

Standard Specifications edition identified in the Contract Documents.

2. Sections that start with “86” or “87” in the following specifications correspond

to the same subsections in and are additional provisions to Section 86 or 87 of

the Standard Specifications of Caltrans.

3. Signal, lighting, and electrical system materials and installation Work shall be

done in accordance with Caltrans Standard Plans, except as herein amended.

4. References to Sections 10 through 95 of the Standard Specifications of the

State of California shall apply where shown in Sections 86 and 87.

5. References in the State Standard Specifications to the State of California, its

agencies, or agents shall be construed to refer to the City, its corresponding

agencies, or agents.

6. These specifications shall be used in conjunction with SECTION 701 -

CONSTRUCTION.

700-1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS.

700-1.1 Foundations.

1. Spacers shall be inserted between the reinforcing steel cage and the form to

ensure that the specified clearance is maintained.

2. Foundation for CIDH pole shall be constructed in accordance with latest

Caltrans standard drawings and specifications.

700-1.2 (86-1.02J) Standards, Poles, Steel Pedestals, and Posts.

700-1.2.1 General.

1. Standards, regardless of diameter, shall be round unless otherwise noted.

Steel standards shall be galvanized (whether or not they are painted).

Aluminum 1-A poles, where indicated on the Plans, shall be fabricated of

seamless tubing conforming to 6063-T6 wrought aluminum alloy

specifications of the Aluminum Association. The base of the post shall be a

minimum of 6 inches (152.4 mm) O.D. tapering to 4½ inches (114.3 mm) O.D.

at the top. The wall thickness of the shaft shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch (6.4

mm). Ornamental anchor bolt nut covers shall be provided for all traffic signals

and/or lighting standards and posts. Edges shall have minimum 1 inch (25.4

mm) radius.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 409

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Standards shall have an aluminum identification plate attached with stainless

steel rivets or screws, as specified on the Plans. Each Standard shall have a

handhole in the base and a handhole cover. The handholes shall conform to the

details shown on the Plans or Standard Plans. The handhole cover shall be

securely attached to the Standard with tamper-resistant hardware or as detailed

on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.

700-1.2.2 Straightness.

1. For street lighting and pedestrian Standards the maximum deviation shall not

exceed the tolerance specified in Table 700-1.2.2 when measured with the

Standard in the vertical position. For traffic signal standards the maximum

deviation shall not exceed the tolerance specified in Table 700-1.2.2 when

measured with the Standard in the horizontal position.

TABLE 700-1.2.2

Length of Standard – Excluding

Base

Maximum Allowable Deviation

From String Line*

Over Equal to or Less

--- 21 feet (6.4 m) ½ inch (12.7 mm)

21 feet (6.4 m) 25 feet (7.6 m) ¾ inch (19.1 mm)

25 feet (7.6 m) 35 feet (10.7 m) 1 inch (25.4 mm)

35 feet (10.7 m) 40 feet (12.2 m) 1¼ inch (31.8 mm)

40 feet (12.2 m) ---

As specified in the Special

Provisions.

* The maximum deviation shall be measured from a string line on the face of the

Standard, in a plane passing through the longitudinal axis.

2. Short deviations in the Standard shall not exceed 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) deviation

from the centerline of the Standard for each 5 feet (1.5 m) of length.

3. Offsets or jogs due to mold extensions or joints shall not exceed 1/16 inch (1.6

mm) in thickness along the surface of the Standard.

700-1.2.3 Mast Arm Replacement or Modification.

1. The welding of mast arms and qualification of welders shall conform to AWS

D1.1, “Structural Welding Code”. Tenon shall be mechanically held in relation

to the mast arm before welding tenon. The Welds and damaged galvanized

surfaces of modified mast arms shall be painted with 2 applications of zinc-

rich primer as provided in Section 75-1.02B, "Galvanizing", of Caltrans

Standard Specifications. The second application shall be applied at the

installation site.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 410

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. At each mast arm replacement location, a new or completely modified mast

arm shall be on hand and ready for installation before closing traffic lanes or

ramps. Luminaires installed on modified mast arms shall be horizontal, with

no tilt, or as directed by the Engineer.

700-1.2.4 Concrete Poles.

1. Under working load (including wind loading) the pole shall not be stressed

beyond the cracking strength. Wind loads shall be as specified in the latest

edition of the AASHTO Standards. The ultimate moment of the poles is calculated

using the PCI “Guide to the Design of Concrete Poles” and validated through

testing. AASHTO (Sections 7 and 3) are used to develop allowable loads for

overturn, shear, and torsion as well as load application.

2. Poles shall be tapered, centrifugally cast, and pre-stressed. They may be round

or octagonal, black and white marble aggregate or natural exposed aggregate,

and direct burial or anchor base type. The minimum outside diameter or

dimension of direct-burial poles shall be 5 inches (127 mm) at the top and

uniformly tapered to the bottom. Pole shape and color shall be uniform for any

one project. Replacement poles shall match existing. Aggregates shall conform

to current requirements of ASTM C33 as required by ASTM C1089, and be free

of Iron particles that could oxidize. No dye or sealer shall be used without

approval of the City.

3. The centrifugal casting process shall produce a center duct throughout the length

of the pole. The duct shall be free from sharp projections or edges which might

injure the wire or cable. It shall have a minimum diameter of 1-inch in 5-inch (25.4

mm in 127 mm) top diameter poles and 1½ inches in 6-inch (38.1 mm in 152.4

mm) top diameter poles. All reinforcing steel shall have a minimum cover of 5/8

inch (15.9 mm).

4. Four galvanized bar studs shall extend approximately 1 inch (25.4 mm) above

top of standard for attachment of bracket arm. These studs shall be

sufficiently embedded so as to provide sound anchorage for the mast arm and

luminaire under working loads. Other methods of attachment may be used,

with the Engineer’s approval.

5. After curing, the surface of the standard shall be treated to remove cement

laitance and develop the surface texture. When finished, poles shall be without

cracks or brazing and shall have a uniform surface (without objectionable

mold marks) and texture throughout the entire length. Maximum deviation

from string line at any point shall not exceed 0.03-inch per foot (2.5 mm per

meter) of length.

6. Direct burial poles furnished with sand and gravel aggregate shall have a

concrete finish free from fins or other imperfections and shall have a finish

equal to Class 1, see 303-1.9.3, “Class 1 Surface Finish” at the base of the

concrete standard, the pre-stressing steel shall be cut flush to the bottom

surface. The exposed ends of the pre-stressing steel and the base of the light

standard shall be heavily coated with roofing asphalt or coal tar enamel.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 411

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. Grounding contacts shall not be bonded to the neutral except as allowed by

the NEC.

700-1.2.5 Metal Standards.

700-1.2.5.1 General.

1. The top of each Standard shall be equipped with an ornamental cap which

shall be securely held in place by a 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) diameter hex head

machine bolt. Provisions shall be made for substituting 3/4 inch (19.1 mm)

diameter steel insulator pin. The cap and cap support surface shall have

sufficient strength to transfer to the Standard, from a point 5 inches (127 mm)

above the top of the cap, a 950 lbs (4,250 N) horizontal loading.

2. Metal standards shall withstand, without permanent deformation, a maximum

horizontal load of 950 lbs (4,250 N) applied to the center of the cap that is attached

to the Standard. In addition, metal standards shall withstand, without exceeding

a deflection of 2-5/16 inches (58.7 mm) a normal horizontal load of 370 lbs (1,650

N) applied to the cap that is attached to the top of the Standard.

3. Exposed edges of plates that comprise the base assembly shall be finished

smooth. Exposed corners shall be rounded unless otherwise shown on the

Plans. Slots or drilled holes shall have a tolerance of 0 to + 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).

4. Metal standards shall be equipped with anchor bolt covers made of metal of

the same type as that used for the shafts or as specified on the Plans or

Standard Plans. Anchor bolt covers shall be equipped with all necessary

fittings and hardware for securing the bolt covers to the Standard.

700-1.2.5.2 Steel Standards.

1. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, steel standards shall

be fabricated from sheet steel of weldable grade having minimum yield

strength, after fabrication, of 40,200 psi (276 MPa). When a single-ply 5/16 inch

(7.9 mm) thick steel standard is specified, a 2-ply steel standard with an

equivalent section modulus may be substituted unless otherwise specified

in the Special Provisions. Certified test reports that verify conformance to

this minimum yield strength shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance

with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS”.

2. Steel standards may be fabricated from full length sheets or shorter sections.

Each section shall be fabricated from not more than 2 pieces of sheet steel.

Where 2 pieces are used, the longitudinal welded seams shall be directly

opposite each other. When the sections are butt welded together, the

longitudinal welded seams on adjacent sections shall be placed to form

continuous straight seams from the base to the top. In addition, butt welded

sections shall be strengthened by inserting a welded sleeve at each joint. The

sleeve shall be fabricated from steel 1/8 inch (3.1 mm) nominal thickness or

thicker of the same composition as the steel used in the Standard. The sleeve

shall have a minimum length of 1 inch (25.4 mm). The sleeve shall be centered

at the joint and have the same taper as the Standard such that the outside of

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 412

THE “WHITEBOOK”

the sleeve is in full contact throughout its length and circumference. The weld

metal at the transverse joint shall extend to the sleeve. No transverse joint shall

occur within 3 inches (76.2 mm) of mast arm fittings.

3. All welds shall be continuous and conform to the requirements of America

Welding Standards D1.1. The welds joining the shafts of Standards to their

base plates shall be as shown on the Plans or Standard Plans. However,

alternative weld joint details may be approved by the Engineer. Approval of

alternative weld joint details will be contingent upon the proposed weld joint

passing both weld procedure and nondestructive testing as deemed

necessary by the Engineer. All costs of the weld procedure and

nondestructive testing shall be borne by you.

4. Longitudinal welds in steel tubular sections will be tested by the Agency in

conformance with the requirements in California Test 664. The sampling

frequency shall be as directed by the Engineer. The welds may be made by the

electric resistance welding process. Exposed welds shall be ground flush with the

base metal.

5. Steel standards shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process conforming to

210-3, “GALVANIZING”, or cadmium plated with Type NS coating conforming

to ASTM B766. If specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans,

steel standards shall be painted in accordance with 210-1, “PAINT”. Painting

shall conform to SECTION 310 - PAINTING.

700-1.2.5.3 Aluminum Standards.

1. Aluminum standards shall be fabricated from seamless tubing conforming to

“6063-T6 wrought aluminum alloy of the Specifications of the Aluminum

Association” or the specifications in Table 700-1.2.5.3.

TABLE 700-1.2.5.3

ITEM ASTM SPECIFICATION NO.

Castings B26/B26M

Luminaire Arm B490-90a

Spun Shaft B241/B241M

Square Extruded Shaft B429

2. The wall thickness of the shaft shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

Aluminum standards shall be supplied with a mill finish, and be uniform and

commercially sound in conformance with ASTM B209M.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 413

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-1.2.6 Fiberglass Standards.

1. Fiberglass standards shall consist of fiberglass-reinforced thermosetting

plastic poles. Fiberglass standards shall be hollow, tapered or with tapered

sections, be non-conductive and chemically inert. Fiberglass standards shall

be in conformance with current AASHTO manual titled “Standard

Specifications for Structural Supports for Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic

Signals” (2013) and ANSI requirements. You shall submit to the Engineer a

Certificate of Compliance from the manufacturer in accordance with 3-8,

“SUBMITTALS”. The certificate shall include a copy of all applicable test reports.

The test reports shall be signed and stamped by the licensed engineer who

supervised the tests. The certificate shall also comply with 4-5, “CERTIFICATE OF

COMPLIANCE”, and certify that the Standards were manufactured in accordance

with an Agency-approved testing and quality control program.

2. Fiberglass standards shall be constructed of continuous fiberglass filaments

combined with thermosetting polyester and ultraviolet-resistant resin. The

fiberglass and resin ratio shall contain at least 65% glass and 35% resin by weight.

The resin shall be pigmented as required by the Standard Plans or Special

Provisions and be of uniform color throughout the entire body of the

Standard. The glass filament shall be helically wound under tension at angles

to provide axial strength. The finish shall be smooth.

3. Fiberglass standards shall be flame resistant in accordance with ASTM D635.

In addition fiberglass standards shall be reinforced in areas of handholes,

conduit entrance openings, and mast arm connections.

4. Fiberglass standards shall be direct burial or have an anchor base as shown

on the Plans or the Standard Plans. The base shall be bonded to the pole with

an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer, and coated with an aliphatic-

type acrylic-modified polyurethane finish. Each Fiberglass standard shall be

equipped with a removable aluminum or galvanized steel pole top cap.

5. An aliphatic-type acrylic-modified polyurethane coating shall be applied to the

exterior of each fiberglass standard. The coating shall be semi-gloss, weather

resistant, and shall match the color of the resin specified in the Special

Provisions. The coating shall have a minimum of 3 mils (75 μm) dry film

thickness. A 1 quart (1 liter) can of the coating that matches the specified color

shall be furnished as specified in the Special Provisions. The polyurethane

coating shall be tested by the manufacturer for adhesion in accordance with

the requirements of ASTM D3359, Method A and shall have a scale rating of

5A. The adhesion testing shall be conducted before and after the accelerated

weathering evaluation by the manufacturer. You shall provide the Engineer

with a copy of the test results from the manufacturer in accordance with 3-8,

“SUBMITTALS”. The test reports shall be signed and stamped by the licensed

engineer who supervised the tests.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 414

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6. Finished surfaces shall be capable of withstanding a minimum of 2,500 hours

of accelerated weathering when tested by the Agency, in accordance with the

requirements of ASTM G154. Testing lamps shall be UV-B (313 nm wavelength).

The testing cycle shall consist of 4 hours of ultraviolet (UV) exposure at 140° F

(60° C), followed by 4 hours of condensate exposure at 100° F (40° C). After

testing, the finished surface of fiberglass standards shall exhibit the following:

a) Fiber Exposure - None

b) Crazing - None

c) Checking - None

d) Chalking - Very slight

e) Change in color - May dull slightly.

7. Each fiberglass standard shall be spiral-wrapped in its entirety with a

weatherproof wrap for protection during shipping and storage.

700-1.2.6.1 Fiberglass Lighting Standards.

1. Where indicated on the Plans, standards utilizing fiberglass-reinforced

thermosetting plastic (FRP) poles may be substituted for steel lighting standards

as provided below:

TABLE 700-1.2.6.1 (A)

Steel Standard FRP Equivalent

Type 15 Type 15F

Type 15 with Slip Base Type 15F (Breakaway)

Type 21 Type 21F

Type 30 Type 21F

Type 30 with Slip Base Type 21F (Breakaway)

2. Fiberglass lighting standards shall consist of round, fiberglass-reinforced

thermosetting plastic poles with aluminum mast arms. FRP poles shall be

hollow, tapered or with tapered sections, non-conductive and chemically inert.

3. FRP lighting standards shall conform to the details shown on the plans, and shall

comply with requirements in the AASHTO manual titled “Standard Specifications

for Structural Supports for Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals” (2013) and

ANSI Roadway Lighting Document C136.20, “Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

Lighting Poles”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 415

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. FRP lighting standards specified as “Breakaway” types shall also comply with

the requirements in the National Cooperative Highway Research Program

Report 230, “Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance

Evaluation of Highway Appurtenances”. Design wind velocity for lighting

standard systems shall be 100 mph (160.9 Km/hr).

5. You shall provide the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance from the

manufacturer in accordance with 4-5, “CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE”, of the

Standard Specifications. The certificate shall also include a copy of all

applicable test reports on the lighting standards. The test reports shall be

signed by the manufacturer's management person responsible for the tests.

The certificate shall also certify that the lighting standards comply with the

requirements of the specifications and were manufactured in accordance with

the approved testing and quality control program.

6. Each standard shall have an identification plate conforming to the provisions

in the second paragraph of Section 86-1.02J, “Standards, Poles, Steel Pedestals,

and Posts”, of Caltrans Standard Specifications. The identification plate shall

show the standard type, manufacturer's name, manufacturer's part number

and the year of fabrication. If the lighting standard is a breakaway type, the

identification plate shall include the word “BREAKAWAY”. The plate shall be

located either on the anchor base or just above the handhole.

7. The pole shall be constructed of continuous fiberglass filaments combined

with thermosetting polyester, ultraviolet-resistant resin. The fiberglass and

resin ratio shall contain at least 65% glass and 35% resin by weight. The glass

filament shall be helically wound under tension at angles to provide axial

strength. The pole shall be flame resistant in accordance with ASTM D635. The

resin shall be pigmented light gray and be of uniform color throughout the entire

body of the pole. The finish of the pole shall be smooth.

8. Each pole shall have a handhole and handhole cover, bearing the name of the

manufacturer. The handhole cover shall be securely attached to the pole with

tamper-resistant hardware. The handhole shall be located on the side away

from the mast arm. The pole shall be reinforced in areas of handholes, conduit

entrance opening, and mast arm connection.

9. The pole shall be smooth, round and uniformly tapered above ground and

anti-rotation shaped below ground. The pole shall be direct burial or anchor

base as specified on the plans. Each standard shall be provided with a

removable aluminum or galvanized steel pole top cap.

10. The base shall be bonded to the pole with a suitable adhesive, and coated with

an aliphatic-type acrylic-modified polyurethane finish. For new installations,

adaptor plates shall not be used to attach the standard to the foundation.

11. FRP lighting standards that are not specified as “Breakaway” types shall not

have the machined groove inside the anchor base casting as shown in the

“Aluminum Anchor Base Elevation” detail shown on the plans.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 416

THE “WHITEBOOK”

12. Direct burial poles shall have a 2-inch x 6-inch (50.8 mm x 152.4 mm), nominal

size, grommetted conduit/conductor entrance located 2 feet ± 1 inch (609.6

mm ± 25.4 mm) below finished grade after installation. The entrance shall be

located directly below the handhole. The butt end of the direct-burial pole shall

be flared or modified by some other acceptable means to increase the

resistance to rotation and pullout and provide additional ground bearing

resistance.

13. The pole, with specified luminaire and mast arm installed, shall withstand the

bending strength test load shown in the following table. The pole shall

withstand this load with the handhole in compression. The pole shall not

exceed a maximum deflection of 13% of the length of the pole above the

ground line when subjected to the deflection test load shown in the following

table:

TABLE 700-1.2.6.1 (B)

Standard Type Bending Strength Test Load Deflection Test Load

Type 15F, Type 15F

(Breakaway)

2406 N (540 pounds) 1606 N (360 pounds)

Type 21F, Type 21F

(Breakaway)

2562 N (575 pounds) 1708 N (385 pounds)

14. Test loads shall be applied according to Section 12, “Pole Deflection

Measurements”, of ANSI C136.20. Poles shall be loaded 12 inches (304.8 mm)

below the tip.

15. In addition to the requirements stated above, aluminum mast arms shall

comply with requirements in the Aluminum Association’s Publication 30,

“Specifications for Aluminum Structures”. Length of mast arm shall be as

shown. Outer end of the mast arm shall be provided with a 2-3/4 inch (69.9

mm) O.D. slipfitter, 6 inches (152.4 mm) long.

16. An aliphatic-type acrylic-modified polyurethane coating shall be applied to the

exterior of the fiberglass pole. The coating shall be semi-gloss, highly weather

resistant and light gray in color matching the color of the resin and shall have

a minimum 0.075 mm (3 mils) dry film thickness. A 1.1 quart (1 liter) can of the

coating to match the poles shall be supplied with each order of poles. The

polyurethane coating shall be tested for adhesion to the pole surface in

accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 3359, Method A and shall have

a scale rating of 5A. The adhesion testing shall be conducted before and after

the accelerated weathering evaluation.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 417

THE “WHITEBOOK”

17. The finished surface of the pole shall be capable of withstanding a minimum

of 2,500 hours of accelerated weathering when tested in accordance with the

requirements of ASTM G 154. Lamps shall be UV-B (313 nm wavelength). The

testing cycle shall be 4 hours of ultraviolet (UV) exposure at 140° F (60° C) and

then 4 hours of condensate exposure at 40° C (100° F).

18. After testing, the finished surface of the pole shall exhibit the following:

TABLE 700-1.2.6.1 (C)

Fiber exposure: None

Crazing: None

Checking: None

Chalking: Very slight

Change in color: May dull slightly

19. Each pole shall be spiral wrapped in its entirety with a weatherproof wrap for

protection during shipping and storage.

20. Installation and backfilling for direct burial poles shall be as provided for wood

poles in Section 56-3.06, “Wood Poles”, of Caltrans Standard Specifications.

The pole butt end shall be embedded into the ground 5 feet (1.5 m) deep.

21. Each FRP lighting standard shall have its luminaire, mast arm, and anchor bolts

effectively grounded as provided in Section 86-1.02F(2)(c)(ii), “Bonding Jumpers

and Equipment Grounding Conductors”, of the Standard Specifications. A

separate bonding connection to the mast arm will not be required provided

there is non-insulated contact between the luminaire and the mast arm.

700-1.2.6.2 Fiberglass Type 1-A Traffic Signal Standards.

1. Fiberglass Type 1-A standards shall conform to dimensions shown on Caltrans

Standard Plan ES-7B.

2. The design of the pole assembly shall use latest edition of AASHTO “Standard

Specification for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic

Signals” when calculating maximum expected wind loading. The pole shall be

designed to not deflect more than 5% when loads are applied.

3. The pole shall be smooth, round and uniformly tapered. The pole shall be

constructed of continuous fiberglass filaments combined with thermosetting

polyester resin. The fiberglass and resin ratio shall contain at least 65% glass

and 35% resin by weight. The glass filament shall be helically wound under

tension at angles to provide axial strength. The pole shall be reinforced in

areas of hand holes. A coating shall be applied to the pole surface to maintain

surface integrity against the effects of sunlight and extremes in the weather.

The pole resin and surface coating shall be gray unless otherwise noted. The

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 418

THE “WHITEBOOK”

pole shall be flame-resistant in accordance with ASTM D635. A 2½-inch by 5-

inch (6.35 cm x 12.7 cm) oval handhole with cover plate shall be located in the

pole a minimum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) above the base plate.

700-1.3 (86-1.02B) Conduit.

1. When approved by the Engineer, conduit runs shown on the plans to be

located behind curbs may be installed in the street, within 4 feet of and parallel

to the curb, by narrow trenching. All pull boxes shall be located behind the

curb or at locations shown on the plans. Narrow trenching shall be performed

in accordance with the latest City Standards. Any changes in conduit location

shall be approved in advance by the Engineer. All narrow trenching shall

conform to the City of San Diego Standard Drawings SDG-117, “Narrow Trench

Resurfacing for Asphalt Concrete Surface Streets”, SDG-118, “Narrow Trench

Resurfacing for PCC Surfaced Streets”, and be inspected prior to backfill.

Trenches behind sidewalks shall be compacted using compaction tools to

ensure no sinking of trench will occur. Trenches wider than 6 inch (15.2 cm)

shall conform to the City of San Diego Standard Drawings SDG-107, “Trench

Resurfacing for Asphalt Concrete Surfaced Streets”, SDG-108, “Trench

Resurfacing for PCC Surfaced Streets”, and SDG–119, “Trench Types G, H & I

Backfill for Dry Utility”. A 3-inch (7.6 mm) bed of fine soil or sand shall be placed

in the trench.

2. Conduit to be installed underground shall be Type 3 unless otherwise

specified. Detector termination conduits shall be Type 3.

3. The conduit in a foundation and between a foundation and the nearest pull

box shall be Type 3.

4. After conductors have been installed, the ends of conduits terminating in pull

boxes and in service and controller cabinets shall be sealed with an approved

type of sealing compound.

5. Pull ropes for use when installing cables in Type 3 conduit shall consist of a

flat, woven, lubricated, soft-fiber polyester tape with a minimum tensile

strength of 8,000 N (1,800 pounds) and shall have printed sequential

measurement markings at least every 3 feet (0.9 m).

6. If you judge it appropriate, the final 2 feet (0.6 m) of conduit entering a pull

box in a reinforced concrete structure may be Type 4.

7. Orange colored conduit shall be used for communication lines and gray

colored conduit shall be used for power lines.

700-1.4 (86-1.02C) Pull Boxes.

1. Christy electrical box shall only be used where specifically shown on the plans.

Pull boxes shall not be installed in surfaces subject to vehicular traffic unless

approved by the Engineer.

2. A No. 3½ pull box shall be installed immediately adjacent to each street light

pole. A No. 3½ pull box shall be installed at each end of a street lighting conduit

run crossing a street. Unless otherwise shown, ¾-inch crushed rock shall be

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 419

THE “WHITEBOOK”

placed 6 inches around the box and shall also be placed, with a minimum of 6

inches, at bottom of pull box edges. The top of the conduit shall be 6 inches

below the lid and 2 inches above crushed rocks

3. A No. 6 pull box shall be installed immediately adjacent to each signal pole or

as otherwise indicated on the Plans. Unless otherwise shown, ¾-inch crushed

rock shall be placed 6 inches around the box and shall also be placed, with a

minimum of 6 inches, at bottom of pull box edges. The top of the conduit shall

be 6 inches below the lid and 2 inches above crushed rocks.

4. The cover of the pull box shall be stamped with the words “TRAFFIC SIGNAL”,

“STREET LIGHT”, or “COMMUNICATIONS”, as appropriate.

5. A 4 inch (10.2 cm) diameter white ceramic raised pavement marker (Type A

Marker) shall be installed on the face of the curb or asphalt dike adjacent to every

pull box installed in landscaped area.

700-1.4.1 Type 15 Pull Boxes.

1. Type 15 pull boxes and extensions shall conform to the Western Underground

Committee Recommended Guide No. 3.6, “Non-Concrete Enclosures”. Type 15

pull boxes shall be 30 inch (0.8 m) wide x 48 inch (1.2 m) long x 18 inch (0.5 m)

deep (nominal inside dimensions). Each pull box shall have one 8 inch (20.3

cm) or 16 inch (40.6 cm) extension.

2. Hold down bolts or cap screws and nuts shall be of brass, stainless steel or

other non-corroding metal material. Cover marking shall be

“COMMUNICATION”. Enclosures, covers and extensions shall be concrete gray

color.

3. Type 15 pull boxes shall be installed where shown on the Plans for

communication system.

700-1.5 (87-19) Fiber Optic Subsystems.

700-1.5.1 Trenching.

700-1.5.1.1 Warning Tape.

1. Warning tape shall be provided and placed in the trench over conduits

containing fiber optic cable as shown on the plans. The warning tape shall be

4 inches (101.6 mm) wide with bold printed black letters of approximately 3/4

inch (19.1 mm) on bright orange color background, and contain the printed

warning “CAUTION - BURIED FIBER OPTIC CABLE” repeated at approximately

30 inch (76.2 cm) intervals. The printed warning shall be non-erasable and shall

be rated to last with the tape for a minimum of 40 years. The construction of

the warning tape shall be such that it will not delaminate when it is wet. It shall

be resistant to insects, acid, alkaline and other corrosive elements in the soil.

It shall have a minimum of 120 pounds (530 N) tensile strength and shall have

a minimum of 700% elongation before breakage.

2. The warning tape shall be the detectable type with a contiguous conductor in

the form of a copper wire or aluminized foil, encased in a protective plastic

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 420

THE “WHITEBOOK”

jacket. The aluminized foil shall be 0.35 mils thick. Separate rolls of the warning

tape shall be electrically connected by corrosion resistant clips or by soldering.

The ends of warning tape shall extend into pull boxes and splice vaults a

minimum of 24 inches (609.6 mm) for future connection to a warning signal

device. The continuity and detectability of the warning tape, for the entire

conduit run, shall be demonstrated prior to, and again after backfilling each

trench, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3. Warning tape shall be Condux International, Inc.; Allen System, Inc.; Reff

Industries, Inc.; or approved equal.

700-1.5.1.2 Trace Wire.

1. Except where a detectable warning tape will be installed, a separate trace wire

shall be installed external and adjacent to the conduit along the entire fiber

optic cable route for use in active cable location. The trace wire shall be a #8

AWG bare-copper solid wire.

2. No insulation or other coating material shall be on the trace wire. The trace

wire shall be terminated by connecting to the ground rods at the pull boxes as

noted in the Plans.

700-1.5.1.3 Colored Concrete Backfill.

1. The concrete backfill for the trenches with conduits that will contain fiber optic cable

shall be a medium-to-dark red or orange color 2 pounds (1 kg) of color pigment per

sack of cement) to clearly distinguish the concrete backfill from other concrete and

soil. The concrete shall be pigmented by the addition of commercial quality cement

pigment to the concrete mix. The red or orange concrete pigment shall be LM

Scofield Company; Orange Chromix Colorant; Davis Colors, or approved equal.

2. For trenches in pavement areas, only the top 4 inches (101.6 mm) of concrete

backfill will be required to be pigmented concrete. If you judge it appropriate,

the full depth may have the pigment.

700-1.5.2 Fiber Optic Cables.

1. Single-mode optical fiber shall be Corning SMF-28

. Each optical fiber shall be

glass and consist of a doped silica core surrounded by concentric silica cladding.

All fibers shall be useable and shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections

and inclusions. The coating shall be a dual layered, UV cured acrylate.

2. The coating shall be able to be stripped mechanically or chemically without

damaging the fiber.

PARAMETERS SM

Core Mode Field Diameter (Petermann II)

@1310 nm 9.3 ± 0.5 µm

@1550 nm 10.5 ± 1.0 µm

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 421

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PARAMETERS SM

Core Diameter Variation ± 3 µm

Core-to-Cladding Offset ≥ 1.0 µm

Cladding Diameter 125 µm ± 2 µm

Cladding Non-circularity defined as: 1- (min. cladding

dia. / max. cladding dia.) x 100 Attenuation

≤ 1.0%

@ 1310 nm ≤ 0.4 dB/km

@ 1550 nm ≤ 0.3 dB/km

Chromatic Dispersion

Zero Dispersion Wavelength 1301.5 to 1321.5 nm

Zero Dispersion Slope < 0.092 ps/(nm

•km)

Maximum Dispersion

@1300 nm - 1330 nm < 2.5 ps/(nm•km)

@1550 nm < 20 ps/(nm•km)

Cut-off Wavelength < 1250 nm

700-1.5.3 Cable Fabrication.

700-1.5.3.1 Cable Certification.

1. The cable manufacturer shall certify that the cable is suitable for direct installation

in 1-1/4 inch to 3-inch (31.8 mm to 76.2 mm) conduit in an underground

environment. You shall submit a sample and its certification submittal prior to

installation. You shall submit laboratory test reports on representative

samples of similar cable design to demonstrate compliance with the following

requirements prior to cable installation:

a) Tensile Strength per EIA -455-33A and EIA-RS-455-28A

b) Jacket Shrinkage per EIA -455-86

c) Cable Twist per EIA -455-85

d) Environmental Temperature Cycling per EIA -455-3A

e) Flexing per EIA -455-104

f) Impact Resistance per EIA -455-25

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 422

THE “WHITEBOOK”

g) Compressive Strength per EIA -455-41

h) Freezing Test per EIA -455-98A

i) Mechanical Bend Test per EIA -455-37

2. You shall provide the manufacturer’s certification that the offered cable shall

comply with all optical and mechanical requirements set forth in this specification.

The cable manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 registered.

700-1.5.3.2 Applicable Documents.

1. The cable shall conform to the latest issue of the following standards

documents which are incorporated by reference into this specification:

a) EIA-455: Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables,

Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices.

b) EIA-359 : Standard Colors for Color Identification and Coding.

c) MIL-202: Test Methods for Electronic and Electrical Component Parts.

d) MIL-454: Standard General Requirements for Electronic Equipment.

e) MIL-810: Environmental Test Methods and Engineering Guidelines.

f) EIA-598: Color Coding of Fiber Optic Cables

2. Fiber optical cables shall be constructed in accordance with EIA-455 and 100%

of all optical fibers and jacketing shall meet or exceed the requirements

contained in this specification.

700-1.5.4 Mechanical Performance.

700-1.5.4.1 Fiber Proof Test. Fibers shall be 100% subjected to a minimum proof stress of 100

ksi prior to being drawn into fiber sub-cables.

700-1.5.4.2 Minimum Bend Radius. The cable shall be able to withstand bending to a minimum

radius of 10 times the cable outer diameter without tensile load applied and 20 times

the cable outer diameter with maximum load applied (during installation only) without

damaging the cable components or degrading the optical fiber performance. The fiber

optic cables shall withstand at least 20 cycles at a minimum bend radius without

damaging the fiber optic cable components or degrading the optical performance. The

cyclic flexing test shall be in accordance with EIA-455.

700-1.5.4.3 Cyclic Flex Resistance. The cable shall withstand cyclic flexing 2,000 times per the

requirements of EIA-455-104.

700-1.5.4.4 Environmental Performance. The fiber optic cable shall comply with the

requirements specified herein when subjected to the following environmental

conditions.

700-1.5.4.5 Temperature.

1. The cable shall comply with the optical and mechanical performance

requirements specified herein up to 95% relative humidity (non-condensing)

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 423

THE “WHITEBOOK”

when subjected to moisture resistance conditioning according to Method

106B of MIL-202 except that the specimen shall not be vibrated.

2. The shipping and storage temperature of the cable shall be -40° F to 160° F (-

40° C to 70° C), and the operating and installation temperature range of the

cable shall be -40° F to 160° F (-40° C to 70° C).

700-1.5.4.6 Moisture Resistance. Optical and mechanical performance shall not be degraded

and the cable shall not be damaged in any way by immersion in ground water.

700-1.5.4.7 Fungus Resistance. The outer jacket material used in construction of this cable shall

be fungus inert as described in requirement 4 of MIL-454.

700-1.5.4.8 Sunlight/UV Resistance. The outer jacket material shall be suitable for long-term

exposure to sunlight and weather with a life expectancy in excess of 20 years.

Suitability shall be determined in accordance with MIL-810, method 505.

700-1.5.4.9 Loose Tube Cables.

1. Optical fibers shall be placed inside loose buffer tubes. Each buffer tube shall

contain between six and twelve single mode fibers. Each fiber shall be

numbered and color coded. The cable shall contain between 1 and 6 buffer

tubes. The tubes shall be color coded.

2. Each fiber shall be distinguishable from other fibers in the same tube by

means of color coding. Each tube shall be distinguishable from other tubes in

the same cable by means of color coding. The colors shall be targeted in

accordance with the Munsell color shades and shall meet EIA-598 “Color

Coding of Fiber Optic Cables”. The color formulation shall be compatible with

the fiber coating and the buffer tube filling compound, and be heat stable. The

colors shall not fade or smear or be susceptible to migration and it shall not

affect the transmission characteristics of the optical fibers and shall not cause

fibers to stick together.

1. Blue (BL) 5. Slate (SL) 9. Yellow (YL)

2. Orange (OR) 6. White (WT) 10. Violet (VL)

3. Green (GR) 7. Red (RD) 11. Rose (RS)

4. Brown (BR) 8. Black (BK) 12. Aqua (AQ)

700-1.5.4.10 Buffer Tubes.

1. Clearance shall be provided in the loose buffer tubes between the fibers and

the inside of the tube to allow for expansion without constraining the fiber.

The fibers shall be loose or suspended within the tubes. The fibers shall not

adhere to the inside of the buffer tube.

2. The loose buffer tubes shall be extruded from a material having a coefficient

of friction sufficiently low to allow free movement of the fibers. Buffer tubes

shall be made of a tough abrasion resistant material to provide mechanical

and environmental protection of the fibers, yet designed to permit safe

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 424

THE “WHITEBOOK”

intentional “scoring” and breakout, without damaging or degrading the

internal fibers.

3. Buffer tube filling compound shall be a homogenous hydrocarbon-based gel

with antioxidant additives and used to prevent water intrusion and migration.

The filling compound shall be non-toxic and safe to exposed skin. The

compound shall be chemically and mechanically compatible with all cable

components, non-nutritive to fungus, non-hygroscopic, and electrically non-

conductive. The filling compound shall be free from dirt and foreign matter

and shall be readily removable with conventional nontoxic solvents.

4. Buffer tubes shall be stranded around a central member by a method that will

prevent stress on the fibers when the cable jacket is placed under strain, such

as the reverse oscillation stranding process.

700-1.5.4.11 Central Member. The central member shall be a glass reinforced plastic rod with

similar expansion and contraction characteristics as the optical fibers and buffer

tubes. A linear overcoat of low density polyethylene shall be applied to the central

member.

700-1.5.4.12 Filler Rods. Fillers shall be included in the cable, where needed, to lend symmetry to

the cable cross-section. The sum of buffer tubes and filler rods shall be equal to six.

Filler rods shall be solid medium or high density polyethylene. The diameter of filler

rods shall be the same as the outer diameter of the buffer tubes.

700-1.5.4.13 Stranding. Completed buffer tubes shall be stranded around the overcoat central

member using stranding methods, lay lengths, and positioning such that the cable shall

meet mechanical, environmental, and performance specifications. A polyester binding

shall be applied over the stranded buffer tubes to hold them in place. Binders shall be

applied with sufficient tension to secure the buffer tubes to the central member without

crushing the buffer tubes. The binders shall be non-hygroscopic, non-wicking (or rendered

so by the flooding compound), and dielectric with low shrinkage.

700-1.5.4.14 Core and Cable Flooding. The cable core interstices shall be filled with a polyolefin-based

flooding compound to prevent water ingress and migration. The flooding compound shall

be homogeneous, non-hygroscopic, electrically non-conductive, and non-nutritive to

fungus. The flooding compound shall also be nontoxic, safe, and compatible with all other

cable components.

700-1.5.4.15 Tensile Strength Member. Tensile strength shall be provided by high tensile strength

aramid yarns and fiberglass which shall be helically stranded evenly around the cable

core.

700-1.5.4.16 Outer Jacket.

1. The jacket shall be smooth, free of holes, splits, blisters, and other surface

flaws, and shall be medium density cross-linked polyethylene (PE) with

minimum nominal jacket thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Jacketing material

shall be applied directly over the tensile strength members and flooding

compound and shall not adhere to the aramid strength material. The

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 425

THE “WHITEBOOK”

polyethylene shall not promote the growth of fungus. The color of the cable

outer jacket shall be solid yellow.

2. The jacket or sheath shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, the date

of manufacture, a cable code to identify the number and type of fibers, and

sequential measurement markings every meter. Additionally, the following

shall be printed on the jacket at regular intervals: “CAUTION Fiber Optic

Cables”.

700-1.5.5 Traffic Signal System Fiber Optic Cable.

1. The actual length of the cable shall be within -0/+1 % of the length marking.

The color of the markings on the cable jacket shall be black. The height of the

marking shall be approximately 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and shall be permanent and

weatherproof. The markings shall be repeated at 39 inch (1 m) intervals.

2. The cable shall contain at least one ripcord under the sheath for easy sheath

removal.

700-1.5.5.1 Fan-out Termination.

1. Individual fibers within the loose tube cable require handling protection inside

the termination cabinets. Fan-out kits shall be installed in the patch panel

enclosures to transition the loose tube fibers to ruggedized tight-buffered

fiber pigtail cables. Fan-out tubes or furcation kits shall not be used. Optical

fusion splices shall connect the loose tube fibers to the tight-buffered pigtail

cables.

2. The colors of the outer jackets of the tight-buffered pigtail cables shall match the

colors of the individual fibers within the loose tubes. The optical splice loss shall

comply with the specifications for optical splices. Splice protection sleeves shall

be employed on all splices to protect the splices. A wall-mountable splice center

shall house the splices and serve to fully protect excess lengths of loose tube

fibers from exposure.

3. The tight-buffered pigtails shall be terminated with ST connectors.

700-1.5.5.2 Fan-out Pigtail Cable Specifications. Single-mode fiber (Corning SMF-28) shall be used

in the pigtails. Optical characteristics shall comply with the optical fiber performance

specifications.

Buffer material: Thermoplastic

Buffer O.D.: 35.43 mil (900 µm)

Strength Member: Kevlar

Jacket Material: Polyethylene

Jacket O.D.: 98.4 mil (2.5 mm)

Temperature Range: -5° F to 160° F (-20° C to + 70° C)

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 426

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-1.5.5.3 Mechanical Performance.

1. Fiber Strippability. The fiber optic jackets shall be easily removed with

commercially available mechanical stripping tools. The cable shall contain at

least one ripcord under the outer jacket layer to facilitate jacket removal.

2. Minimum Tensile Strength. The fiber optic cable shall be rated to withstand

a maximum tensile load of 2,700 N (608 pounds force) during installation

(short term) with no damage and 890 N (200 pounds force) installed (long

term). While these are rated tensile loads, you shall exercise every precaution

in minimizing cable tension during installation.

3. Compressive Load. The fiber optic cable shall withstand a compressive load

of 220 N/cm applied uniformly over the length of the cable. The average

increase in attenuation for the fibers shall be < 0.10 dB/km at 1550 nm for a

cable subjected to this load, and the cable shall not exhibit any measurable

increase in attenuation after load removal. Testing shall be in accordance with EIA-

455-41, Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cable.

4. Tight-buffered Cables. The fiber optic cable shall be of fiber optic sub-cables

encased in an outer jacket. The cable shall contain 18 tight-buffered breakout-

type riser-rated fiber optic sub-cables each comprised of one 9/125µm

(Corning SMF-28

) single-mode (SM) fiber.

700-1.5.5.4 Fiber Optic Cable Description.

1. General Description. Operating wavelengths shall be 1300 nm and 1550 nm

for all fibers. A Polyethylene outer jacket shall be extruded under high

pressure directly over the stranded fiber sub-cable core. This process results

in the internal surface of the cable jacket interlocking with the cable

substructure so that the cable cannot move axially within the cable jacket. The

design shall allow the fully rated tensile load of the cable to be applied with

wire mesh (Kellums-type) grips during installation. The cable shall be flame

retardant UL-listed type ONFR for riser application.

2. Fiber Optic Sub-cables. Each fiber sub-cable shall consist of a central glass

optical fiber surrounded by a 500 µm primary UV-cured acrylate buffer with a

secondary hard elastomeric polymer buffer up to 900 µm. Non-elastomeric

(PVC) materials shall not be used for the buffer materials.

The tight-buffered fiber is surrounded by a synthetic yarn or aramid strength

member (Kevlar or equal) and a color-coded elastomeric polymer jacket. Non-

elastomeric (plastic) materials are not allowed. The strength member shall be

composed of individually and precisely tensioned elements such that tensile

loads are equally shared by each element. The sub-cable outside diameter

shall be 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 427

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Cable Outer Jacket. The jacket shall be smooth, free of holes, splits, blisters,

and other surface flaws, and shall be of flame-retardant Polyvinylchloride

(PVC) with a nominal wall thickness of 3/64 inch (1.2 mm) and a minimum wall

thickness of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) at any point. The outer jacket shall be pressure

extruded over the outer layer of the stranded cable core

4. Cable Marking. The completed cables shall have sequentially numbered length

markers, in a contrasting color to the cable jacket, at regular intervals of not more

than one meter along the outside of the jacket. Printed on the jacket shall be the

cable code to identify the number and type of fibers (for example: 18 Fiber - 18 x

9/125), the manufacturer's name, manufacturer's part number, the year of

manufacture, and the sequential length markings. Additionally, the following shall

be printed on the jacket at regular intervals “CAUTION Fiber Optic Cables”.

700-1.5.5.5 Colors. The color of the cable outer jacket shall be solid yellow. The color of the

markings on the cable jacket shall be black. The single-mode sub-cable outer jackets

shall be color coded in accordance with EIA-598 and designated as shown below. The

colors shall be targeted in accordance with the Munsell color shades. For all

documentation, the individual sub-cables shall be identified by the fiber number.

700-1.5.5.6 Sub-cable Jacket Color Assignments for Fiber Type. Table 700-1.5.5.6 shall be used

to apply the color of the sub-cable to the fiber type and sub-cable number.

TABLE 700-1.5.5.6

Sub-Cable

Number

Sub-Cable Color

Sub-Cable

Number

Sub-Cable Color

1 Blue 10 Orange/Yellow Dash

2 Orange 11 Green/Yellow Dash

3 Green 12 Brown/Yellow Dash

4 Brown 13 Slate/Yellow Dash

5 Slate 14 White/Yellow Dash

6 White 15 Red/Yellow Dash

7 Red 16 Black/Yellow Dash

8 Black 17 Yellow/Black Dash

9 Blue/Yellow Dash 18 Violet/Yellow Dash

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 428

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-2 CABLE INSTALLATION.

700-2.1 Assistance and Technical Support. You shall seek the assistance and technical

support of the supplier of the fiber optic cable in preparation for and during

installation.

700-2.2 Cable Protection.

1. The cable shall be inspected for jacket defects as it is removed from the reel.

If defects are found, the pulling operation shall be terminated immediately

and the Engineer notified. Repair of cable jacket will not be permitted. To

reduce the possibility of damage to the outer jacket of the fiber optic cable,

the following protective measures are recommended.

2. A cable feeder guide shall be used between the cable reel and the face of the

duct and conduit to protect the cable and guide it off the reel and into the duct.

A pulling eye shall be attached to the cable end and be used to pull the cable

through the duct and conduit system. As the cable is pulled off the reel and

into the cable feeder guide, it shall be lubricated with a water-based lubricant

approved by the cable manufacturer. Dynamometers or breakaway pulling

swings shall be used to ensure the pulling line tension does not exceed the

installation tension values specified by the cable manufacturer. Maximum

allowable cable strain during installation shall be 0.75%. The pulling of the

cable shall be hand assisted at each handhole or pull box. The cable shall not

be crushed, kinked, or forced around a sharp corner.

700-2.3 Installation Procedures.

1. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths without intermediate splices

throughout the project. Cable installation personnel shall be familiar with the

cable manufacturer's recommended procedures including, but not limited to

the following:

a) Proper attachment to the cable strength elements for pulling during

installation. Depending on cable design this will involve direct

attachment to internal strength members or attaching an external

“Kellums” or split mesh grip.

b) Cable tensile limitations and tension monitoring procedures.

c) Cable bending radius limitations.

d) Cable twisting limitations.

2. You shall comply with the cable manufacturer's specifications at all times.

3. Cable installation procedures shall conform to Bellcore guidelines.

4. To accommodate long continuous installation lengths, bi-directional “center

pull” techniques for pulling of the cable is acceptable and shall be

implemented as follows:

a) From the midpoint, pull the cable into the conduit from the shipping

reel in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 429

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) When this portion of the pull is complete, the remainder of the cable

shall be removed from the reel to make the inside end available for

pulling in the opposite direction.

c) This is accomplished by hand pulling the cable from the reel and laying

into large "figure eight" loops on the ground. The purpose of the figure

eight pattern is to avoid cable tangling and kinking. The loops shall be

laid carefully one upon the other (to prevent subsequent tangling) and

shall be in a protected area. The inside reel end of the cable is then

available for installation.

d) In some cases, it may be necessary to set up a winch at an intermediate

cable vault. The required length of cable shall be pulled to that point,

and brought out of the cable vault and coiled into a figure eight. The

figure eight is then turned over to gain access to the free cable end. This

can then be reinserted into the duct system for installation into the next

section.

5. At locations noted on the plans, you shall provide 30 feet (9.1 m) of cable slack.

The cable shall be coiled and secured with cable ties. You shall ensure that the

minimum bending radius of the cable is not compromised when preparing this

stored cable slack.

6. The pulling eye/sheath termination hardware on the cables shall not be pulled

over any sheave blocks.

7. When power equipment is used to install cabling, the pulling speed shall not

exceed 100 feet per minute (30 meters per minute). The pulling tension, bending

radius and twist limitation for cable shall not be exceeded under any

circumstances.

8. Large diameter wheels, pulling sheaves, and cable guides shall be used to

maintain the appropriate bending radius. Tension monitoring shall be

accomplished using commercial dynamometers or load cell instruments.

9. Sufficient slack shall be left at each end of the cable to allow proper cable

termination.

700-2.4 Optical Fiber Termination.

1. Termination components shall meet or exceed the applicable provisions of

EIA-455-5. Cables shall have all optical fibers terminated directly at the patch

panel via connectors. All cables shall be routed in each equipment cabinet in

a manner that prevents damage during regular operation and maintenance

functions. All exposed cable and fiber sub-cables shall be secured every 12

inches (304.8 mm) to 18 inches (460 mm) to the equipment frame or cable

tray with nylon ties, hand tighten only.

2. Connectors shall be field-installable and perfectly matched to the cable used.

Optical fiber connectors shall satisfy all of the interface parameters of

equipment components as may be defined by the transmission equipment

specifications.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 430

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. The connectors shall provide tight fitting termination to the cladding/buffer

tubing and to the outer jacket. Epoxy-based or “hot melt” adhesives shall be

used to bond the fiber and buffer to the connector ferrule and body prior to

polishing the end face. No dry-termination or “quick crimp” connectors are

allowed. When termination is authorized by the Engineer, termination shall be

by trained, qualified persons only.

4. After termination with connectors, the fiber ends must be visually inspected

at a magnification of not less than 100 power to check for cracks or pits in the

end face of the fiber. If any irregularities found cannot be removed by further

polishing, the entire process must be redone by cutting off and disposing the

connector body.

5. Connectors shall have a maximum allowable connection loss of 0.3 dB per

mated pair, as measured per EIA-455-34. No index-matching gel is to be used,

dry interfaces only. Single-mode connectors shall be capable of field

installation on 9/125 µm fibers with 900 µm buffers (OD) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)

outer jackets.

6. Each connector shall be of the industry standard SC™ type compatible,

designed for single-mode tolerances, and shall meet or exceed the applicable

provisions of EIA-455-5, 455-2A, and 455-34, and shall be capable of 100

repeated matings with a maximum loss increase of 0.1 dB. Connectors shall

incorporate a key-way design and shall have a zirconia ceramic ferrule.

Connector bodies and couplings shall be made of corrosion-resistant and

oxidation-resistant materials, such as nickel plated zinc, designed to operate

in humid environments without degradation of surface finishes.

7. Each connector shall be labeled for ease of subsequent identification and

testing. Each connector label shall be attached next to the connector strain

relief boot in a manner that will ensure that the label remains permanently

intact. The optical test diagram details the numbering system to be used. The

system employs two numbers, separated by a decimal point. The first number

refers to the sub-cable number. The second number refers to the relative

connector position in the backbone ring.

8. Splicing of fiber optic cable shall not be permitted unless otherwise specified

in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans. When splicing is authorized

by the Engineer, splicing shall be by trained, qualified persons only. Any

allowed splicing of fiber optic cable shall be by fusion splice only, no

mechanical splices are permitted.

9. Fusion splicing equipment shall be in good working order, properly calibrated,

and meeting all industry standards and safety regulations. Cable preparation,

closure installation and splicing shall be accomplished in accordance with

accepted and approved industry standards.

10. The average splice loss shall be 0.1dB or less per splice. The average splice

loss is defined as one-half the summation of the losses as measured in each

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 431

THE “WHITEBOOK”

direction using an OTDR through the fusion splice. No individual splice loss

measured in a single direction shall exceed 0.15dB.

11. Upon completion of the splicing operation, all waste material shall be

deposited in suitable containers, removed from the Work Site, and disposed

of in an environmentally acceptable manner.

700-2.5 Cable Testing. You shall notify the Engineer in writing 10 Working Days prior to

commencing tests. You shall provide information regarding what type test equipment

will be utilized (manufacturer and model number) plus the equipment calibration

procedures that will be utilized.

700-2.6 Test Equipment.

1. An Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) with recording capability shall

be utilized to test for the end-to-end transmission quality of each optical fiber.

Quality tests shall consider both attenuation and localized loss discontinuities.

The OTDR shall be equipped with a switchable, dual-wavelength module with

1300 nm and 1550 nm light sources compatible with single-mode test fibers.

The OTDR shall be capable of writing to a hard drive and configured with an X-

Y plotter to provide a hard copy record of each test measurement. The OTDR

shall be equipped with sufficient internal masking to allow the entire cable

section to be tested. This may be achieved by using an optical fiber pigtail of

sufficient length to display the required cable section, or by using an OTDR

with sufficient normalization to display the required cable section. A hard copy

X-Y plot shall be provided to the City for all OTDR tests. The OTDR shall be

calibrated for correct index of refraction to provide proper length

measurement from a known length of reference fiber.

2. Testing light source: A laser diode (LD) light source with a 1300 nm wavelength

shall be used. The LD shall be stable within 0.1 dB in output power over a time

period sufficiently long to perform the measurement.

3. Power Meter: The detector in the power meter shall have an effective

numerical aperture (NA) and active area that is larger than the fiber under test.

The power meter shall have a sufficient measurement range to measure the

insertion loss of the cable and connectors in the link. The power meter shall

be linear over the range of losses to be measured in the system and have

sufficient resolution for the proposed measurements (0.05 dB). The power

meter shall be able to measure both absolute power in units of dBm and

relative loss in units of dB. The power meter shall also be able to change its

calibration wavelength to match the system operation wavelength (1300 nm).

4. Launch Reference Cable: The patchcord used to connect the fiber optic cable

to the multiplexer shall be used as the launch reference cable for the particular

link under test.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 432

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-2.7 Submittals.

1. Detailed shop drawings and specifications of proposed products shall be

submitted in accordance with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS”. You shall submit the

manufacturing data, pre-shipment test results, and a sample. Representative

samples manufactured to the above specifications shall be submitted.

2. Submittals required by this item shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a) A material staging plan, if you propose City-owned property as a

staging area.

b) Manufacturer's complete specifications for all communication system

cables, connectors, patch panels, fiber optic multiplexers, video

encoders, and associated electronics and hardware components.

c) Manufacturer's complete specifications for optical fiber cable patch

panels.

d) A detailed fiber optic cable and twisted-pair cable installation

procedure including the following:

i. Fiber optic cable cutting lengths reflecting the cable order and

reel allocations.

ii. Detailed installation procedures (cable pulling plan) which

shall contain the staffing and equipment to be used, locations

of the staffing and equipment for each pull, location of figure

eights, and the estimated pulling tensions and which also

identify the physical locations for equipment placement,

proposed equipment setup at each location, and the pulling

methodology for each type of cable. The cable pulling plan

shall be submitted for approval 10 Working Days prior to

pulling in each fiber optic segment.

iii. Staffing proposed for all equipment, safety, and manual assist

operations.

700-2.8 Test Documentation. The results of insertion loss testing shall be recorded along

with the test date, test wavelength, name of person performing the test, and the brand

name, model number and serial number of the equipment used during the test. The

measurements shall be recorded on a form identical to the test table provided in this

specification. OTDR traces shall be generated into a hard copy and in electronic format

for the purpose of developing historical "As-Built" documentation regarding the

cable's condition before and after it was installed. The hard-copy and electronic copy

documentation, along with associated software to reproduce on paper via personal

computer, shall be provided to the Engineer.

700-2.9 OTDR Tests. You shall use OTDR testing to ensure that each fiber is one continuous

length (contains no splices within the cable structure) and meets the attenuation

(dB/km) specifications of the manufacturer and cognizant industry standards. In

addition, OTDR tests shall be performed to measure connector and fiber loss on all

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 433

THE “WHITEBOOK”

terminated fiber links. OTDR measurements shall be made before the cable

installation to provide baseline data for comparison to post-installation OTDR tests.

700-2.10 Required OTDR Trace Information.

1. Traces shall display the entire length of cable under test, highlighting any

localized loss discontinuities (installation-induced losses, connector losses, or

both). The trace shall display fiber length (in kilofeet), fiber loss (dB), and average

fiber attenuation (in dB/km) as measured between two markers placed as near

to the opposite ends of the fiber under test as is possible while still allowing an

accurate reading. Care shall be taken to ensure that the markers are placed in

the linear region of the trace (away from the front-end response and the far-end

Fresnel reflection spike). Time averaging shall be used to improve the display

signal-to-noise ratio. The pulse width of the OTDR shall be set to a sufficient

width to provide adequate injected power to measure the entire length the fiber

under test.

2. If connectors exist in the cable under test, then two traces shall be recorded.

One trace shall record the fiber loss (dB) and average attenuation (dB/km) of

the entire cable segment under test, including connectors. The second trace

shall display a magnified view of the connector regions, revealing the

connector losses (dB). Connector losses shall be measured using the Least

Squares Approximation (LSA) or 5-point splice loss measurement technique.

3. The OTDR trace shall also include the following information:

a) The date and time of the test

b) The cable ID number

c) The cable segment ID number

d) The fiber color or sub-cable number

e) Launch point connector number

f) The optical wavelength used for the test

g) The refractive index setting of the OTDR

h) The pulse width setting of the OTDR

i) The averaging interval of the test

700-2.11 Pre-installation OTDR.

1. Prior to removal of each cable from the delivery reel, all optical fiber sub-cables

within the cables shall be tested by you using an OTDR. The OTDR tests shall

consist of end-to-end length and fiber attenuation (dB/km) measurements to

ensure proper performance of the fiber optic cable. The tests shall be

performed from both ends of each fiber to ensure complete fiber continuity

within the cable structure. Cable sections failing this test shall be disqualified

from subsequent use for installation.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 434

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Pre-installation, “on-reel” test results shall be compared with the

manufacturer's test report delivered with the cable. Gross dissimilarities shall

be noted and remedied between you and the manufacturer.

700-2.12 Post-Installation OTDR.

1. You shall conduct insertion loss testing on all installed and terminated optical

fiber elements. Insertion loss test measurements for each terminated fiber on

each cable shall be documented by you and the results provided to the

Engineer. Testing shall be conducted at 1300 nm for all terminated sub-cables.

Total node-to-node insertion loss for each terminated sub-cable in each cable

shall be within the fiber optic multiplexer manufacturer's allowable loss

budget specifications. The total node-to-node insertion loss, between adjacent

multiplexers, for the single-mode fiber links shall be less than 6dB at 1300 nm.

If it is not, you shall take corrective measures to bring the insertion loss into

compliance with the manufacturer's specifications, including re-mating and re-

termination of the connectors, and/or replacement of the cable.

2. Fiber links shall be measured in both directions in order to measure patch

panel connector and link insertion losses accurately. The Insertion Loss Test

Table shall be used to conduct the insertion loss measurements. The table

calls for inserting light at various insertion points and measuring power out at

other points. Once all of the powers have been measured, the insertion losses

are then calculated and recorded in the table.

700-2.13 Node Equipment.

700-2.13.1 Termination Cabinet.

1. A Model 332L cabinet shall be installed at each location shown on the plans.

You shall submit for review detailed drawings showing the proposed cabinet

layout.

2. The cabinet shall be equipped with a standard ventilation fan and filter,

shelves, rack for mounting the fiber optic and Ethernet network layer 3 switch

and the fiber optic termination patch panel, 120 V AC power for operating

equipment, and terminal blocks for copper cable termination.

700-2.13.2 Fiber Optic Termination Patch Panel.

1. The patch panel enclosure shall be rack-mounted in the cabinet. The enclosure

shall have nominal dimensions of 3.5 inches high x 19 inches wide x 15 inches

deep (88.9 mm high x 482.6 mm wide x 381 mm deep). The enclosure shall

have doors to protect the fiber terminations inside the panel. The inner

connector panel shall be mounted vertically in the enclosure and be

approximately in the center of the enclosure to allow access to both cable

sides. The cable ends shall enter the patch panel enclosure from the bottom.

The patch panel enclosure shall provide cable strain reliefs at the entry ports.

All enclosure hardware shall be stainless steel or aluminum.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 435

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. The fiber optic cable shall terminate inside each of the communications

cabinets on a termination patch panel. The patch panel shall be fitted with

“SC

” type bayonet couplings. All optical fibers within the cable shall be

terminated with “SC

” compatible connectors. The patch panel shall have a

24-fiber capacity, and shall facilitate fiber optic cable cross-connection between

outside plant cables and opto-electronic interface equipment. Unused couplings

shall be fitted with protective dust covers. Factory-terminated, tight-buffered,

aramid-reinforced fiber optic jumper assemblies or interconnect cables,

standard 1-3/16 inch (30.2 mm) O.D., shall connect the optical fiber

terminations to the multiplexer I/O ports via the patch panel couplings.

3. The termination patch panel shall be equipped with a suitable means for

routing and securing of cables and shall provide a suitable means of protection

for the mounted optical fiber connectors to prevent damage to optical fibers and

connectors during all regular operation and maintenance functions. Bend

diameters on cable, sub-cables, and jumpers must be greater than 4 inches (101.6

mm) at all times to ensure optical and mechanical integrity of the optical fibers.

700-2.13.3 Copper Cable Termination Blocks.

1. You shall provide and install 12-pair cable termination blocks in each cabinet

where twisted-pair cable is installed. Termination blocks shall be capable of

accepting #22 AWG insulated solid conductors and be rack mountable on a

standard 19inch (482.6 mm) rack. Termination blocks shall be designed to

operate in unheated outdoor cabinets, capable of resisting corrosion and

oxidation, and capable of preventing open circuits caused by poor metal-to-

metal contact.

2. Each quick connect terminal block and barrier terminal block shall be sprayed

with a PIC restoration spray to retard corrosion. Three coats shall be applied

prior to connecting the wires and three coats shall be applied after all the wire

connectors have been completed. Each coat shall be allowed to dry

thoroughly, as specified by the manufacturer, before the next coat is applied.

You shall terminate all SIC cable on termination blocks in each cabinet where

twisted-pair cable is installed.

700-2.14 Twisted-pair Copper Subsystems. The interconnect cable shall contain the amount

of twisted, #22 AWG solid, copper pairs as specified in the Plans. This cable shall be

constructed for installation in an underground conduit environment with a sheath

consisting of a double coated aluminum shield over which a medium density

polyethylene jacket is extruded, in accordance with REA Standard PE39. This cable

shall be filled with a gel compound to resist water penetration and migration.

700-2.14.1 Cable Performance. The copper twisted-pair cable shall meet or exceed the following

specifications:

1. 22 AWG, solid copper conductor, twisted pair.

2. Insulation: Dual, semi-rigid PVC skin over foamed PE.

3. Core wrap: Polypropylene film.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 436

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. Mutual capacitance of 94 nanofarads per mile, measured at 1 KHz.

5. DC Resistance = 92 ohms per mile.

6. Attenuation = 2.2 dB/1,000 ft. @ 150 KHz.

700-2.14.2 Installation.

1. You shall install cables and the combination connector/protector block. The

same pair assignment shall be maintained. Cables shall be installed at each

location per the Master Interconnect Conductor Assignments shown on the

plans. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from terminal block to

terminal block. There shall be no splicing between terminal blocks.

2. You shall determine a suitable cable installation method to ensure that all

cable installation requirements shall be met in all conduit sections. All Work

shall be carried out in accordance and consistent with the highest standards

of quality and craftsmanship in the communication industry with regard to the

electrical and mechanical integrity of the connections; the finished appearance

of the installation; as well as the accuracy and completeness of the

documentation.

3. You shall make a physical survey of the project site for the purpose of

establishing the exact cable routing and cutting lengths prior to the

commencement of any Work or committing any materials.

4. When ordering cable, you shall ensure that the cable shall be of sufficient

length to pull from terminal block of one traffic signal controller cabinet to the

terminal block of the next traffic signal controller cabinet. A minimum of 3 feet

(0.9 m) of cable shall be provided in each pull box.

5. The cable shall be carefully inspected for jacket defects as it is removed from

the reel. If defects are noticed, the pulling operation shall be terminated

immediately and the Engineer notified. Precautions shall be taken during

installation to prevent the cable from being kinked or crushed. Crushed or

kinked cable shall be replaced with new cable. As the cable is pulled into the

conduit system, it shall be sufficiently lubricated with a lubricant that shall be

the water based type and approved by the cable manufacturer. The

mechanical stress placed upon the cable during installation shall not be such

that the cable is twisted and stretched or exceeds manufacturer's

specifications.

6. The pulling of the cable shall be hand assisted at each handhole or pullbox.

When pulling through intermediate pullboxes, the cable shall be placed on the

ground near the pullbox and care taken to prevent damage by vehicles or other

objects. The cable shall not be crushed, kinked or forced around a sharp corner.

A minimum of 3 feet (0.9 m) slack shall be left in each pullbox and enough left at

each end of the cable to allow proper cable termination. All cable pairs shall be

terminated on terminal block.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 437

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-2.14.3 Cable Testing.

1. You shall perform field acceptance tests on the installed copper cable. The City

shall observe the tests and the test results shall be documented as prescribed

elsewhere in this specification. You shall replace any cable failing these tests

at no additional expense to the City. You shall provide all test equipment

necessary to perform the tests. All pairs of each copper cable shall be tested for

continuity, polarity, shorts, grounds, longitudinal balance, and resistive loss

consistent with the manufacturer's specifications and standard

telecommunication industry requirements.

2. After installation each pair within the cable shall be tested with a Time Domain

Reflectometer (TDR). TDR testing shall be for end-to-end transmission quality,

splices, improper terminal termination, no bridge taps, or pairs that have no

termination, open or shorted pairs. You shall certify that all individual wires

have been terminated consistent with the wire insulation color to termination

pin requirements.

3. You shall document the test results and provide a certification for each cable

that the cable meets or exceeds the manufacturer's published specifications

and otherwise complies with the requirements set forth in this specification.

You shall provide the City with information regarding what type test

equipment will be utilized (manufacturer and model number) plus the

equipment calibration procedures that will be utilized by you prior to

conducting all test routines.

4. Each underground cable shall be tested end-to-end from the termination

block to the terminal block at each cabinet. You shall provide test readings for

each of the following items to verify the cable performance:

a) DC Resistance - The resistance of any conductor in any cable shall not

exceed 92 ohms per mile.

b) DC Resistance Unbalance - The resistance unbalance between the two

conductors of any pair shall not exceed 5%.

c) Mutual Capacitance - The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not

exceed 94 nanofarads per mile at 1 KHz.

Capacitance Unbalance: Pair to Ground - The capacitance unbalance to

ground at 1 KHz of any pair shall not exceed 800 picofarads per 1,000 feet

(304.8 m).

d) Ambient Noise Measurements - You shall measure the ambient noise

level in dBrn0 to determine the level of noise on each cable being

tested. The distant end of the pair being tested shall be terminated

with a 600-ohm resistor. At the near end, a HP3551 or equivalent

transmission measuring set shall be configured for conducting a noise

reading test. Cable pairs being sampled shall provide an ambient noise

figure of 30 dBrn0 (-60 dBm) or better. You shall record all readings.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 438

THE “WHITEBOOK”

e) Attenuation - You shall test the attenuation of all twisted pairs in each

cable at various frequencies. Attenuation shall not exceed 2.2 db per

1,000 feet (304.8 m), measured at 150 KHz.

f) Near-end Crosstalk - The near-end crosstalk (NEXT) coupling loss

between worst pairs within a cable shall be equal to or less than 53 dB

per 1,000 feet, (304.8 m), measured at 150 KHz.

g) Bit Error Rate - You shall conduct a dynamic data transmission test of

each pair in each cable whose application in intended for data

communication applications. The dynamic test shall verify that the

transmission quality of each cable shall support a bit error rate of 1 x

10-6 or better at 1 Mb/s. The results of this test shall be documented

for one pair in each cable.

h) Ground Resistance Measurements - Ground resistance of the single

point ground system shall be measured before and after it is bonded

to the electrical service ground or building earth ground. Resistance

after the bond has been made to the electrical service ground (or

building earth ground) shall not exceed 3 ohms. If the measured

ground resistance exceeds 3 ohms, you shall provide additional

grounding points until this maximum differential has been achieved.

5. TDR traces shall be generated into a hard copy and software file in electronic

format for the purpose of developing historical As-Built documentation

regarding the cable’s condition after it was installed. The hard-copy and

electronic documentation shall be provided to the City.

700-2.15 Conductors. Conductors of size #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Ends of cables

entering the controller shall be marked the same as in the pull boxes adjacent to the

pole the cables serve and shall include the pole served. The cables shall be identified

with one or more wraps of ½ inch (12.7 mm) 7 mil vinyl electrical tape, conforming to

the following color coding:

A B C D E F G H I

Blue Orange Green Brown Grey White Red Yellow Violet

700-2.16 Wiring.

1. Where specified on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, conductors

shall be spliced by the use of “C” shaped compression connectors as shown on

ES-13. A jumper wire with clips shall be provided for continuity of shielded

cables. The completed splice shall be rated for direct burial application and

capable of normal continuous operation at 600 V. Splices shall be insulated

with heat-shrink tubing of the appropriate size.

2. Splices shall be insulated by “Method B” or, if you judge it appropriate, splices

of conductors shall be insulated with heat-shrink tubing of the appropriate size

after thoroughly painting the spliced conductors with electrical insulating coating.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 439

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. The open end of cable jackets or tubing shall be sealed in a manner similar to

the splicing requirements to prevent the entrance of water.

700-2.17 Fused Splice Connectors. A fused splice disconnect shall be installed in the pull box

adjacent to the service point for a street light. Each street light shall have a fuse and

fuseholder.

700-2.18 Service.

1. Install Type III service equipment enclosure for combined 120 V metered traffic

signals and 120 V unmetered street lighting as noted on the plans. Maximum base

size of service equipment enclosure shall not exceed 16 inches x 16 inches

(406.4 mm x 406.4 mm) and service equipment shall meet all SDG&E

requirements. Traffic signal service shall have 50 A, 1P, 120 V main circuit

breaker, and street lighting service shall have 30 A, 1P, 120 V main circuit

breaker, unless noted otherwise on the plans.

2. Continuous welding of exterior seams in service equipment enclosures is not

required.

3. Type III service equipment enclosures shall be the aluminum type.

4. Circuit breakers shall be the cable-in/cable-out type, mounted on non-

energized clips. All circuit breakers shall be mounted vertically with the up

position of the handle being the “ON” position.

5. Dead front panel or panels, and corresponding exterior door, shall be hinged

on one side and shall be openable without the use of tools.

6. A barrier-type terminal block rated for 40 A, minimum, shall be provided in

each service equipment enclosure. The terminal block shall have a minimum

of 12 positions with terminals rated at Size No. 8 or larger, to accept the field

wires indicated on the plans. Field wires shall be terminated using crimped,

insulated loop connectors.

700-2.19 Solar Electric Power System. Where shown on the plans, a solar electric power

system shall be provided. The system shall consist of solar modules, batteries, a

charge regulator, mounting hardware, and the necessary wiring.

700-2.19.1 Solar Electric Modules. Solar electric modules for school zone flashers shall use triple

junction thin film technology. Twenty-four-hour systems may use the thin film or

polycrystalline modules. Thin film module electrical characteristics shall be 16.5 V DC

maximum power voltage and 23.8 V DC open circuit voltage under standard test

conditions of 1000 W/m² at 77° F (25° C). Polycrystalline module electrical

characteristics shall be 16.9 V DC maximum and 21.5 V DC open circuit voltage under

standard test conditions of 1000 W/m² at 77° F (25° C). The cell shall be fabricated on

a stainless steel back sheet. Cells shall include an integral bypass diode. Cells shall

provide the required module wattage and be encapsulated under low-iron glass.

700-2.19.2 Batteries. Systems shall consist of nickel-zinc batteries. Sizing of battery depends on

autonomy and load requirements (minimum of 1000W). Battery rating shall be 120 V AC.

System shall be ethernet capable.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 440

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-2.19.3 Charge Regulator.

1. The unit shall be an integrated system control unit with the capability to

control power and load management functions. Basic features shall include

charging of the system batteries based on voltage and temperature, low

voltage disconnect to protect the batteries from over-discharge, and operation

of the flasher circuit.

2. The unit shall have an external trigger input for system activation by external

sources such as timers, detectors, and devices incorporating a switch/contact

closure and shall include a select switch for this. The controller shall include a

series switch-configured charge controller which controls the flow of array

current to the battery.

3. The charging algorithm shall be a pulse type that features temperature-

compensated charging. On-board short circuit protection shall be standard. The

controller shall have two lamp outputs set for a 50% duty cycle each and

normally calibrated for 50-60 flashes per minute to meet ITE and MUTCD

standards.

4. Outputs shall be complimentary-one on and the other off. Automatic intensity

adjustment of the lamps shall be made by the controller for variance in light

conditions. Dimming circuitry shall be integral to the controller. Electronics shall

be potted or coated to protect against environmental damage.

5. The unit shall feature an integral heat sink and an 8-position terminal strip with

all positions labeled for ease of servicing. Manual switches shall be provided on

the controller to select the lamp activation source (on continuous or external

activation) and the dimming circuit activation. Dimming shall be capable of being

defeated for school zone systems.

700-2.19.4 Mounting Hardware.

1. Solar modules shall include an aluminum frame to allow for ease of mounting

and rigidity. Solar modules shall be mounted to a fixed tilt mounting structure

set to an angle of 45E-50E. The mount shall be constructed of galvanized steel

(ASTM A-153 Class A) or clear anodized aluminum. The mount shall be suitable

for use with a Type 1-A pole. The mount will include appropriate stainless steel

hardware to secure the modules to the mounting structures.

2. The system shall be housed in a gasketed enclosure, constructed of 1/4 inch

(6.4 mm) aluminum, and designed for mounting on a 14 feet (4.2 m) Type 1-A

pole. The enclosure shall have room for a vertical aluminum mounting plate

capable of holding the system controller and the timer module (school zone

systems).

3. The battery section of the enclosure shall feature a minimum of 1/2 inch (12.7

mm) styrofoam insulation material around the battery compartment sides to

minimize transfer of heat from the enclosure wall to the battery. Screen-

covered louvered vents shall be included on each side of the enclosure to allow

circulation of air in the enclosure.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 441

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. The enclosure shall feature one or more PELCO police locks to secure the

contents from unauthorized access. Enclosures shall be capable of holding

either two or four batteries, depending on system requirements. The door

shall have a lock cover plate attached to the door with a rivet. The door shall be

attached to the main enclosure with hinges that are welded or sufficiently riveted

to each piece. Enclosures for four batteries shall feature a continuous hinge. A

mechanical stop shall be included to prevent the door from opening more than

115°.

700-2.19.5 Wiring. The system shall be provided complete with wiring necessary for installation

on a Type 1-A pole. Cabinet and lamp wiring shall be color coded and include a seven-

pin cannon plug in the harness to allow disconnect of the system. The plug shall be

keyed with a locking mechanism to ensure proper connection. Array wiring shall be

coated in UV resistant sheathing and come with cord grips for exiting the module and

entry to the pole. Conductors shall be terminated with either a forked terminal or a

spade terminal. Sealing lock rings or O-rings shall be used to minimize the entry of

water or dust into the junction box. Module interconnect cables, if used, shall be

constructed of #10 AWG with a UV resistant sheath. Cord grips shall be provided at

entry and exit points to the module junction box. Conductors shall be terminated with

forked terminals.

700-2.20 Testing. Testing of control equipment and cabinet wiring, complete, will be

accomplished at a facility by the City of San Diego. Testing of street lighting equipment

shall include a 3-day burn, by you, with the use of shorting caps.

700-2.21 Painting.

1. Where shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, all light

standards, mast arms, luminaire arms, signal heads, luminaires, and electrical

service cabinets shall be painted the specified color. In the Centre City

Community, the specified color is known as CCDC dark blue (Sherwin Williams

F63TXL-1075-4365, Tnemec 75-J6179, or equal).

2. Steel surfaces shall be prepared either by Power Tool Cleaning per 310-2.4,

“Power Tool Cleaning” or Commercial Blast Cleaning conforming to 310-2.5.1,

“General”, subsection “d”. New ungalvanized ferrous and non-ferrous metal

surfaces shall to be prepared in accordance with SECTION 310 - PAINTING.

Coating system shall be Sherwin Williams (as listed below), Tnemec 75-J6179,

or approved equal:

a) Wash Prime Coat: Sherwin Williams, Industrial Wash Primer, P60g2,

0.2-0.4 mil dry film thickness

b) Prime Coat: Sherwin Williams Tile-Clad II Hi-Build Primer, B62N

71/B60V 70, 4mils dry film thickness

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 442

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) First Finish Coat: Specified color, or Sherwin Williams F63TXL-1075-

4365, 2 mils dry film thickness

d) Second Finish Coat: Specified color, or Sherwin Williams F63TXL-1075-

4365, 2 mils dry film thickness

3. You shall touch up marred or abraded areas with a matching paint.

700-3 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLIES.

700-3.1 Controller Assemblies.

1. Traffic signal controllers shall conform with the latest edition of Standard

Specifications, State of California, Department of Transportation, “Section 86”,

and “Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications”, State of California.

Controller assemblies shall be on the current State of California Qualified

Products List (QPL). Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications shall have

precedence over Caltrans Standard Specifications. See TABLE 700-3.1 below:

TABLE 700-3.1

CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY

Model

332L

Cabinet

Model

336

Cabinet

Model

337

Cabinet

Description

1 1 1

Model 2070LX controller unit including:

UNIT CHASSIS, 2070-1C CPU uploaded with

Q-Free MAXTIME software, 2070-2E+ FI/O,

2070-3B FRONT PANEL and 2070 - 4A

POWER SUPPLY modules and one blank

8MB datakey.

1 1 1 Power Distribution Assembly #2 (PDA #2)

1 1 1

Aluminum cabinet wired for and including

the necessary accessories for full operation

except as noted

1 1 1 2010ECLip Conflict Monitor Unit

4 2 2 Model 242 two-channel isolator

12 12 6 Model 200 switch pack

16 8 4

Model 222 two-channel loop detector

sensor unit

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 443

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Model

332L

Cabinet

Model

336

Cabinet

Model

337

Cabinet

Description

1 1 1

Model IEX-408E-2VDSL2-LV-T Moxa Ethernet

or Etherwan ED3575 Hardened Managed

Ethernet Switch/Extender

1 1 1 3’ Cat 5e cable

1 1 1 DIN rail

2. The doors of the cabinets shall be hinged so that the doors swing away from

the curb or street.

3. When the controller assembly is to be furnished in a Model 336 cabinet with

base adaptor, the cabinet shall be constructed in accordance with the

Controller specification for Model 332L aluminum cabinet but with the

configuration shown in Figure 3.

4. Each cabinet shall be equipped with a single fluorescent fixture with front and

rear door activating switches, and slide-out document drawer. Cabinet finish

shall be anodized aluminum with clear anti-graffiti coating except when a paint

finish is specified.

5. Front panel character display modules shall be socket mounted for easy

replacement in the front panel assembly.

700-3.2 Model 200 Switch Packs. Model 200 switch packs shall be capable of operating Type

"G" pedestrian signals without exceeding Model 2010ECLip Conflict Monitor threshold

limits and shall be capable of switching a single L.E.D. head.

700-3.3 2070-1C CPU Module. 2070-1C CPU Module shall be uploaded with Q-Free MAXTIME

software, have open Linux operating system architecture, and shall be Caltrans TEES

2009 compliant. The module shall have a minimum of (3) RJ45 Ethernet ports and (1)

USB port.

700-3.4 School Zone Flashing Beacon System Timer Module. The system timer module shall

have the following minimum standard features:

1. Alphanumeric LCD display.

2. 48-hour capacitive backup.

3. 15 A SPDT relay output.

4. 16-key input keypad.

5. Auto-leap year compensation.

6. Auto-prompt for programming.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 444

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. Crystal clock source.

8. Operating temperature range of -22° F to 165.2° F (-30° C to 74° C).

9. Solid-state construction except for the relay.

10. Auto-daylight savings time adjustment.

11. Compatible with nominal 12 V DC operation.

The unit shall be capable of exception periods when operation can be suspended or

optional programs can be run for periods such as holidays or special events. Program

steps shall allow the programming of a single day, weekend, or week days.

700-4 TRAFFIC SIGNAL FACES AND FITTINGS.

700-4.1 Signal Faces and Signal Heads.

1. Signal head sections, except programmed visibility type heads, shall be metal

with metal visors and metal back plates. Visors shall be tunnel-type, have ears

and be attached to the signal heads with screws. Visors shall interchange with

Econolite, Traffic Control Technologies, McCain, and Automatic Signal

manufactured vehicle heads.

2. All new signal faces and all arrow indications shall be provided with 12 inch (305

mm) sections unless shown otherwise on the plans. Lenses shall interchange

with Econolite, Traffic Control Technologies, Automatic Signal, and McCain

manufactured vehicle heads.

3. Type SV-1-T mountings with 5 sections and SV-2-TD mountings shall be strapped

to the standard using ½ inch (12.7 mm) stainless steel strapping material and a

stainless steel standoff.

4. Except for programmed visibility heads, the red, yellow, and green indications

shall be Type 1 Light Emitting Diode (LED) signal modules conforming to the

latest Caltrans specifications and shall have the "Incandescent Look" LED. All

lenses shall be tinted. A maintenance period is not required. Replacement

modules shall be provided promptly after receipt of modules that have failed

at no cost to the City except cost of shipping of the failed modules. All warranty

documentation shall be given to the Engineer prior to installation. The

replacement modules shall be delivered to the City’s Street Division-Electrical

Section at Chollas Operations Station, 2781 Caminito Chollas, San Diego, CA

92105 within 5 Working Days after notification.

5. Where solar electric power is provided for a flashing beacon, the indication(s)

shall be yellow or red Light Emitting Diode (LED) signal modules conforming to

the latest Institute of Transportation Engineers specifications. A maintenance

period is not required. Replacement modules shall be provided promptly after

receipt of modules that have failed at no cost to the City except cost of

shipping of the failed modules. All warranty documentation shall be given to

the Engineer prior to installation. The replacement modules shall be delivered

to the City’s Street Division/Electrical Section at Chollas Operations Station,

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 445

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2781 Caminito Chollas, San Diego, CA 92105 within 5 Working Days after

notification.

6. Traffic signal heads shall be green with black doors unless otherwise specified

in the plans or specifications.

700-4.2 Programmed Visibility Vehicle Signal Faces. Lamps shall be furnished by you. You

shall arrange to have a signal technician qualified to program the programmed

visibility signal heads present at the time the signal heads are placed in operation.

Lamps for the signal units shall be 150 W, 120 V, incandescent lamps with a minimum

average rated life of 6,000 hours. The lamp and socket shall be the 3-prong type.

700-4.3 Types.

1. Pedestrian signals shall be Type “G”.

2. Each pedestrian signal shall consist of a housing with front screen, a message

plate, and two Light Emitting Diode (LED) modules, Pedestrian signal housings

shall be metal with metal visors and shall conform to provision in Section 86-

1.02S. All pedestrian signals shall incorporate a pedestrian countdown timer

indication.

3. The message plate shall be 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) nominal thickness ultra-violet-

stabilized, prismatic-patterned polycarbonate plastic; 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) nominal

thickness hammered wire glass; or 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) nominal thickness

ultraviolet-stabilized, prismatic-patterned acrylic plastic. The message plates shall

have a flat-black surface over the entire projected area except where the symbols

are located. The material used to mask the message plate shall be hard and

durable and shall bond in such a manner that it will not flake or peel when the

message plate is in use or is washed. The symbols shall be the only illuminated

portion of the message plate. The message plate shall be sealed to a

polycarbonate case to form a dust-tight and weather-proof module.

4. For crossings where the distance from the near curb to the pedestrian signal

indication is 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the luminance of the UPRAISED HAND symbol

shall be 960 cd/m

(280 footlamberts), minimum, and the luminance of the

WALKING PERSON symbol shall be 3,400 cd/m

(990 footlamberts) minimum.

700-4.5 Accessible Pedestrian Signals. Accessible pedestrian signal shall consist of the

Control Unit and a weather-proof integrated push button station assembly with

vibrotactile arrow button, audible programmable verbal message, locator tone with

automatic volume adjustment to ambient noise, and sunlight-visible red LED

latches “ON” along with a tactile feedback “bounce” to confirm the button has been

pushed. When used, accessible pedestrian signals shall be used in combination with

pedestrian signal timing. The audible signal device shall operate continuously during

the protected walk interval of the corresponding visual pedestrian signal when

actuated by the corresponding pedestrian push button. The information provided

by an accessible pedestrian signal shall clearly indicate which pedestrian crossing is

served by each device. The audible pedestrian system should be either a 2-wire

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 446

THE “WHITEBOOK”

system for actuated pedestrian signal and 3-wire system for pedestrian recalled

signal.

700-4.6 Signal Mounting Assemblies. Signal faces installed prior to signal operation shall be

covered with shade cloth, canvas, or similar. Cardboard is not an acceptable cover

material. Mast arm slip-fitters, post top slip-fitters, and terminal compartments shall

be cast bronze.

700-4.7 Flashing Beacons. Flashing beacons installed at school locations shall be equipped

with a solid-state programmable timer with digital display as specified in 700-3.4,

“School Zone Flashing Beacon System Timer Module”.

700-5 DETECTORS.

700-5.1 Vehicle Detectors.

1. Loop wire shall be Type 2. Loop detector lead-in cable shall be Type “B”. Slots

shall be filled with elastomeric sealant, epoxy sealant, or hot-melt rubberized

asphalt sealant, except asphaltic emulsion loop sealant and cold tar loop

sealant are acceptable if the pavement surface will receive an asphaltic

concrete overlay.

2. Vehicle detector loops shall be Type E per Caltrans Standard Plan ES-5B or Type

E Modified per City Standard Drawing SDE-104 as shown on the plans. Refer to

the latest Caltrans Standard Plans and Specifications and latest City of San

Diego Standards. Bicycle detector loops within bicycle lanes shall be Type Q.

For Type E detector loops, sides of the slot shall be vertical and the minimum

radius of the slot entering and leaving the circular part of the loop shall be 1½

inches (38.1 mm). Slot width shall be a maximum of 5/8 inch (15.875 mm). Type

E detector loops shall have three turns of conductor. Limit line vehicle detector

loops (front loops) shall be Type E Modified loops. Type E Modified loops shall

have four turns of conductor.

3. The sand mixed with the epoxy loop sealant shall be clean and dry silica sand

and shall be smaller than 1,520 µm (pass a No. 12 sieve) and be no smaller than

860µm (retained on a No. 20 sieve). The adhesive shall be a black, low viscosity

material consisting of equal parts of modified coal tar epoxy resin and modified

amine-bitumen hardening agent, equal to Epocast H-1136A and 1136B. Adhesive

shall be mixed together mechanically on the Site and shall have 30 to 45 minute

pot life.

4. Fill the slot with sand. Soak the sand with adhesive overflow. Cover the slot

with additional sand. Before the adhesive sets, strike off excess material flush

with pavement and remove from adjacent road surfaces.

5. You shall perform loop drag tests to verify functionality of loops after

installation and splicing and shall be responsible for validating any loops that

are installed or spliced to ensure that they are fully functional prior to leaving

the site. You shall also verify locations of DLC's.

6. You shall follow the “backfill stub out” method as follows:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 447

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) Install duct seal to cover the conduit

b) Place small layer of sand bedding and compacted permanent asphalt

patch.

700-5.2 Pedestrian Push Button Assemblies.

1. Pedestrian push buttons shall be Type “B”. Actuator shall have a minimum

diameter of 2 inches (50.8 mm) and have a raised tactile arrow and an

operating force of 2.5 N to 3.6 N (9 ounces to 13 ounces) and a release force

of 1 N (3.5 ounces).

2. Pedestrian push button signs shall conform to the size shown on Standard Plan

ES-5C. Signs shall display international "Walking Person" symbol and directional

arrow. Pedestrian push button housing shall be mounted with the actuator

button at 3 feet 3 inches ± 1 inch (1 m ± 25.4 mm) above the adjacent finished

grade.

700-5.3 Preformed Inductive Loops.

1. Preformed inductive loops shall be the type shown on the plans. The loop shall

be 6 feet (1.8 m) square unless otherwise shown. The loop shall consist of 4

turns of No. 16, or larger, wire with Type THWN or TFFN insulation. The loop

wires shall be encased in Size 10, minimum size, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80

PVC or polypropylene conduit. The conduit shall be sealed to prevent the

entrance of water and the movement of wires within the conduit. The loop

wires from the preformed loop to the adjacent pull box shall be twisted

together into a pair (at least 7 turns per meter (2 turns per foot)) and encased

in Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 PVC or polypropylene conduit between the

preformed loop and the adjacent pull box or detector handhole. The lead-in

conduit shall be sealed to prevent the entrance of water at the pull box or

handhole end.

2. In new roadways, the preformed loops and lead-in conduits shall be placed in

the base course, with top of conduit flush with top of base, and then covered

with the asphalt concrete or PCC pavement. Preformed loops and lead-in

conduits shall be protected from damage prior to and during pavement

placement.

3. In new reinforced concrete structure decks the preformed loops shall be

secured to the top of the uppermost layer of reinforcing steel using nylon wire

ties. The loop shall be held parallel to the structure deck by using PVC or

polypropylene spacers where necessary. Conduit for lead-in conductors shall

be placed between the uppermost 2 layers of reinforcing steel.

4. In existing pavement, preformed loop installation shall conform to the

following:

a) The preformed loops and lead-in conduits shall be placed in slots, 1/4

inch (6.4 mm) minimum width, cut into the existing pavement. The top

of the conduit shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm), minimum, below the top of

pavement.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 448

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Slots in asphalt concrete pavement shall be filled with elastomeric

sealant, epoxy sealant, or hot-melt rubberized asphalt sealant.

c) Slots in portland cement concrete shall be filled with elastomeric

sealant or hot-melt rubberized asphalt sealant, or shall be filled with

epoxy sealant conforming to the requirements in Section 95-2.09,

“Epoxy Sealant for Inductive Loops” of the Standard Specifications.

5. You shall install a permanent mark (engraved arrow) on the edge of the gutter

or face of the curb to indicate stub-out for loop wires.

700-6 LIGHTING.

700-6.1 Photoelectric Controls.

1. The photoelectric control unit (PCU) shall be Type "IV".

2. Furnish an individual, stand-alone PCU with each fixture. The PCU shall have a

silicon light sensor that complies with ANSI 136.10 – 2010, and have MOV surge

protection. The PCU shall have a minimum ten year warranty. The PCU shall

fail in the “on” control. It shall be capable of inverse ratio controls. It shall be

suitable for roadway applications.

3. The PCU shall be American Electric Lighting model number DLL127-1.5 or

approved equal.

4. Photoelectric units for illuminated signs shall have a “turn-on” level of between

215 lux and 323 lux (20 footcandles and 30 footcandles) corresponding to a

switching level of approximately 430 lux to 646 lux (40 footcandles to 60

footcandles) measured in the horizontal plane. The “turn-off” level shall not

exceed 3 times the “turn-on” level.

5. All components shall be long life with UV inhibitors.

700-6.2 LED Cobra Head Luminaire.

700-6.2.1 General.

1. Each luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LED components as

the light source subject to the following requirements:

a) Operating Temperature: The luminaire shall be designed to operate at

an average nighttime temperature of 70° F (20° C). The ambient

operating temperature range shall be 30° F to 130° F (-5° C to 55° C).

b) UL Listing: The fixtures shall be UL Listed and shall include UL label.

The UL listing shall include the pole mounting assembly.

c) Components: LED components shall be interchangeable amongst

similar wattages for common fixtures without requiring use of special

tools. Troubleshooting components shall not require special

diagnostic tools or individual energy usage metering systems.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 449

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-6.2.2 Electrical Requirements.

1. Operating Voltage: The luminaire shall operate within one of two voltage

categories (95 to 305 and 480) Volts AC (VAC). The fixtures shall be capable of

operating in the range of voltages listed. Fluctuations of line voltage within

these categories shall have no visible effect on the luminous output. External

Transformers are not permissible as components for the luminaire input

voltage.

2. Power Factor: Power supply should have a minimum Power Factor of 0.90.

3. Harmonic Distortion: The total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 20%. An

integral factory installed standard driver is required that includes inherent

thermal protection.

4. Surge Suppression: The luminaire on-board circuitry shall include Surge

Suppression Devices (SSD) to withstand high repetition noise transients as a

result of utility transients, and other interference. SSD shall conform to UL

1449 or UL 1283, depending on the components used in the design.

700-6.2.3 Controls.

1. Photocell Receptacle: Each luminaire shall have a rotatable (so the window can

be adjusted to the north) prewired 7-conductor (twist-lock) ANSI C136.41-2013

photocell receptacle.

2. Furnish a photoelectric control unit (PCU).

3. All components shall be long life with UV inhibitors.

700-6.2.4 Cooling System.

1. Thermal management of the heat generated by the components shall be of

sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the

expected useful life of more than 100,000 hours at specified operating

temperature range and climate zone.

2. The light output variation shall not deviate greater than 15% over 40° F to

130°F (0° C to 55° C) operating temperature variation.

3. Thermal management shall be passive by design and shall consist of a heat

sink with no moving mechanical parts or liquids.

700-6.2.5 Roadway Application Requirements and Optical Assembly.

1. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): CCT shall be 3000 or 4000 Kelvin

depending on location and as indicated on the Plans.

2. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Luminaires shall have a minimum CRI of 70.

3. Optics: The luminaire shall conform to the Illuminating Engineering Society

(IES) definition of “cut-off”, with no illumination above an angle of 90 degrees

above the nadir. The fixtures shall be International Dark-Sky Association (IDA)

compliant. Submittal documentation shall include “Dark Sky” compliance.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 450

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-6.2.6 Physical/Mechanical Requirements.

1. Luminaire Fixture: The luminaire shall be a single, self-contained device, not

requiring on-Site assembly for installation. The power supply for the luminaire

shall be integral to the unit.

2. Maximum Dimensions: 40 inch long by 16 inch wide by 8 inch tall (101.6 cm

long by 40.6 cm wide by 20.3 cm tall).

3. Luminaire shall not weigh more than 40 pounds (18 Kg).

4. Assembly Housing: The housing shall be primarily constructed of dye cast

aluminum or steel corrosion resistant paint. Finish shall be gray in color,

powder coated and rust resistant. The fixture openings and doors shall be

sealed and gasketed. The components within the fixture assembly shall be easily

accessible with a two-piece hinged door separable from the upper assembly. The

lower door shall be removable. All screws shall be stainless steel. Captive screws

are required on accessible components that require maintenance after

installation. Lens discoloration shall be considered a failure under warranty.

5. Access: Provide easy access to internal components. Include an external latch

capable of being operated with one hand. No internal components shall fall

out when the lower door assembly is opened. Seams shall be CNC formed and

TIG welded.

6. Lens Requirements: The lens shall be tempered glass 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick

lens, or approved equal with gasketed door.

7. Mast Arm Mounting Connection Requirements: Luminaires shall mount on

min 1-5/8 inch (4.13 cm) OD to max 2-3/8 inch (6.03 cm) OD horizontal tenon

with no more than four 9/16 inch (1.43 cm) hex bolts and a 2-piece clamp(s).

Luminaire leveling capability shall be integral to the fixture. Multiple mounting

angle adjustments shall be provided to adjust the level of the fixture ± 4° from

the horizontal.

8. Mechanical Requirements: The assembly and manufacturing process for the

induction luminaire shall be designed to assure all internal components are

adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration from

winds.

9. Ingress Protection (IP) Rating: Optical assembly shall have a minimum rating

of IP-65, the exterior shell shall have a minimum IP rating of 54.

10. Terminal Block: Field wires connected to the luminaire shall terminate on a

barrier type terminal block secured to the housing. The terminal screws shall

be captive and equipped with wire grips (serrated strips on the terminal for

conductors up to #6 AWG wire size). Each terminal position and conductor

phase designation shall be clearly identified.

11. Components: All components, including circuit boards, shall conform to

Chapter 1, Section 6 of the “Transportation Electrical Equipment

Specifications” (TEES) UL 1598, and ANSI C 136 requirements. Fixture

components shall be modular in design and recyclable.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 451

THE “WHITEBOOK”

12. Replumbing Painting: Powder coat painting of the housing shall conform to

the requirements of the Caltrans Standard Specifications and the Contract

Documents. Applied coating shall be free of lead and mercury.

13. House Side Shield: The manufacturer shall offer a field installable house side

shield.

14. Luminaire model shall be constructed in accordance with the latest City Standard

or as noted in the Plans.

700-6.2.7 Luminaire Identification.

1. Identification: Each luminaire shall have the manufacturer’s name, trademark,

model number, serial number, date of manufacture including month and year,

and lot number as identification permanently marked inside each unit and the

outside of each packaging box.

2. Identification: The wattage and CCT rating of the luminaire shall be able to be detected

visibly from an observer standing at ground elevation at the base of the pole.

3. Identification of Operating Characteristics: The following operating characteristics

shall be permanently marked inside each unit: rated voltage and rated power in

Watts and Volt-Ampere, and Luminaire Efficiency Rating (LER).

700-6.2.8 Photometric Documentation. IES Files: Submittals shall include IES files for each

fixture type. Submittals shall include photometric iso-foot candle diagram for a 30 feet

(9.14 m) mounting height for each fixture type, and a point to point diagram with

uniformity calculations that identify maximum to minimum illumination ratio.

Photometric diagrams shall be in a scale of 1:20.

700-6.2.9 Quality Assurance. Luminaires shall be manufactured in accordance with ISO9001.

The Manufacturer’s Warranty Certificate shall be in accordance with 3-13.3, “Warranty”

and submitted in accordance with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS”.

700-7 REMOVING, REINSTALLING, OR SALVAGING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.

700-7.1 Removing Electrical Equipment. Salvaged equipment not reused on the Project shall

be delivered to the General Services Transportation Department, Street Division,

Electrical Section at Chollas Operations Station, 2781 Caminito Chollas, San Diego, CA,

and stockpiled. Delivery time and location shall be coordinated with the City at

Telephone No. (619) 527-8031, a minimum of 1 Working Day in advance of desired delivery

date. You shall provide equipment, as necessary, to safely unload and stockpile the

material. You shall obtain an appropriate receipt upon delivery. You shall tag each pole

and mast arm with the size and type using an indelible ink marker.

700-7.2 Reinstalling Removed Electrical Equipment. When removed electrical equipment is

to be reinstalled on a new or different size pole, you shall furnish and install all new

mounting equipment including all necessary signal mounting assemblies, anchor

bolts, nuts, washers and concrete as required for completing the installation.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 452

THE “WHITEBOOK”

700-8 EMERGENCY VEHICLE PREEMPTION EQUIPMENT (EVPE).

700-8.1 General.

1. Each traffic signal, where shown on the Plans, shall have a modulated light

signal detection system which shall conform to the details shown on the plans

and these special provisions. Each modulated light signal detection system

shall consist of an optical detector/discriminator assembly or assemblies

located at the traffic signal. Emitter assemblies are not required for this

project.

2. Each system shall permit detection of two classes of authorized vehicles. Class I

(mass transit) vehicles shall be capable of being detected at any range of up to

1,800 feet (548.6 m )from the optical detector. Class II (emergency) vehicles shall

be capable of being detected at any range up to 2,500 feet (762 m) from the optical

detector.

3. Class I signals (those emitted by Class I vehicles) shall be distinguished from

Class II signals (those emitted by Class II vehicles) on the basis of the

modulation frequency of the light from the respective emitter. The modulation

frequency for Class I signal emitters shall be 9.63855 Hz.

4. A system shall establish a priority of Class II vehicle signals over Class I vehicle

signals, and shall conform to the requirements in Section 25352, of the

California Vehicle Code. Standard emitters for both classes of signals shall be

available from the manufacturer of the system. Range measurements shall be

taken with all range adjustments on the discriminator module set to

“Maximum”.

700-8.2 Optical Detection/Discriminator Assembly.

700-8.2.1 General.

1. Each optical detection/discriminator assembly shall consist of one or more

optical detectors, connecting cable(s), and discriminator module.

2. Each such assembly, when used with standard emitters, shall have a range of

at least 1,800 feet (548.6 m) for Class I signals and 2,500 feet (762 m) for Class

II signals. Standard emitters for both classes of signals shall be available from

the manufacturer of the system. Range measurements shall be taken with all

range adjustments on the discriminator module set to “maximum”.

700-8.2.1.1 Optical Detector.

1. Each optical detector shall be a weatherproof unit capable of receiving optical

energy from two separately aimable directions. The horizontal angle between

the two directions shall be variable from 180° to 5°. The reception angle for

each photocell assembly shall be a maximum of 8 degrees in all directions

about the aiming axis of the assembly. Measurements of reception angle will

be taken at a range of 1,800 feet (548.6 m) for a Type I emitter and at a range of

2,500 feet (762 m) for a Type II emitter. Each optical detector shall be installed,

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 453

THE “WHITEBOOK”

wired, and aimed as specified by the manufacturer. Mast-arm mounted optical

detectors shall utilize clamping hardware shown in the attached, “E.V.P.E. Detector

Mounting Details”.

2. Internal circuitry shall be solid state and electrical power shall be provided by

the associated discriminator module. Each optical detector shall be contained

in a housing which shall include two rotatable photocell assemblies, an

electronic assembly, and a base. The base shall have an opening to permit its

mounting on a mast arm or a vertical pipe nipple, or suspension from a span

wire. The mounting opening shall have female threads for 3/4 inch (19.1 mm)

conduit. A cable entrance shall be provided which shall have male threads and

gasketing to permit a water-proof cable connection. Each detector shall have mass

of less than 2 pounds (1.1 kg) and shall present a maximum wind load area of

36 in

(230 cm

). The housing shall be provided with weep holes to permit

drainage of condensed moisture.

700-8.2.1.2 Cable. Optical detector cable shall meet the requirements of IPCEA-S-61-492/NEMA

WC 5, Section 7.4, 600 volt control cable, 75° C (165° F), Type B, and the following:

1. The cable shall contain 3 conductors, each of which shall be No. 20 (7 x 28)

stranded, tinned copper with low-density polyethylene insulation. Minimum

average insulation thickness shall be 25 mil (0.63 mm). Insulation of individual

conductors shall be color-coded: 1-yellow, 1-blue, 1-orange.

2. The shield shall be either tinned copper braid or aluminized polyester film with

a nominal 20% overlap. Where the film is used, a No. 20 (7 x 28) stranded,

tinned, bare drain wire shall be placed between the insulated conductors and

the shield and in contact with the conductive surface of the shield.

3. The jacket shall be black polyvinyl chloride with minimum ratings of 600 V and

80 EC (175 EF) and a minimum average thickness of 45 mils (1.1 mm). The

jacket shall be marked as required by IPCEA/NEMA.

4. The finished outside diameter of the cable shall not exceed 0.35 inch (8.9 mm).

5. The capacitance, as measured between any conductor and the other conductors

and the shield, shall not exceed 157 pf per meter (48 picofarads per foot) at

1,000 Hz.

6. The cable run between each detector and the controller cabinet shall be

continuous without splices or shall be spliced only as directed by the detector

manufacturer. Provide 20 feet (6.1 m) of slack lead-in cable for each detector.

Coil cable in pull box adjacent to pole on which detector is installed.

700-8.2.1.3 Discriminator Module.

1. Each discriminator module shall be designed to be compatible and usable with

a Model 2070LX controller unit and Q-Free MAXTIME software, and to be

mounted in the input file of a Model 332L or Model 336 controller cabinet, and

shall conform to the requirements of Chapter I of the State of California,

Department of Transportation, “Traffic Signal Control Equipment

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 454

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Specifications”, dated April, 1978, and all addenda thereto, current at the time

of project advertising.

2. Each discriminator module shall be capable of operating 4 channels, each of which

shall provide an independent output for each separate unit. Each discriminator

module, when used with its associated detectors, shall be capable of:

a) Receiving Class I signals at a range of up to 1,000 feet (304.8 m) and

Class II signals at a range of up to 1,800 feet (548.6 m).

b) Decoding the signals, on the basis of frequency, at 9.639 Hz ± 0.119 Hz

for Class I signals and 14.035 Hz ± 0.255 Hz for Class II signals.

c) Establishing the validity of received signals on the basis of frequency

and length of time received. A signal shall be considered valid only

when received for more than 0.50 second. No combination of Class I

signals shall be recognized as a Class II signal regardless of the number

of signals being received, up to a minimum of ten signals. Once a valid

signal has been recognized, its effect shall be held by the module in

the event of temporary loss of the signal for a period adjustable from

4.5 seconds to 11 seconds in at least 2 steps at 5 seconds ± 0.5 second

and 10 seconds ± 0.5 seconds.

d) Providing an output for each channel that will result in a “low” or

grounded condition of the appropriate input of a Model 2070LX

controller unit with Q-Free MAXTIME software. For Class I signals, the

output shall be a 6.25 Hz ± 0.1 % rectangular waveform with a 50 % duty

cycle. For Class II signals, the output shall be steady.

3. Each discriminator module shall receive electric power from the controller

cabinet at either 24 V DC or 120 V AC.

4. Each channel, together with its associated detectors, shall draw not more than 100

mA at 24 V DC nor more than 100 mA at 120 V AC. Electric power, one detector input

for each channel and one output for each channel, shall terminate at the printed

circuit board edge connector pins listed in TABLE 700-8.2.1.3.

TABLE 700-8.2.1.3

BOARD EDGE CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT

A DC ground

B +24 V DC P (NC)

C (NC)

D Detector input, Channel A R (NC)

E +24 V DC to detectors S (NC)

F Channel A output (C) T (NC)

U (NC)

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 455

THE “WHITEBOOK”

H Channel A output (E) V (NC)

J Detector input, Channel B W Channel B Output (C)

K DC Ground to detectors X Channel B Output (E)

L Chassis ground Y (NC)

M AC- Z (NC)

N AC+

(E) Emitter, Slotted for Keying

(NC) Not connected, cannot be used by manufacturer for any purpose.

5. Two auxiliary inputs for each channel shall enter each module through the

front panel connector. Pin assignment for the connector shall be as follows:

a) Auxiliary detector 1 input, Channel A

b) Auxiliary detector 2 input, Channel A

c) Auxiliary detector 1 input, Channel B

d) Auxiliary detector 2 input, Channel B

6. Each channel output shall be an optically isolated NPN open collector transistor

capable of sinking 50 mA at 30 V and shall be compatible with the Model 2070LX

controller unit inputs with Q-Free MAXTIME software.

7. Each discriminator module shall be provided with means of preventing

transients received by the detector from affecting the Model 2070LX controller

assembly.

8. Each discriminator module shall have a single connector board and shall

occupy 2 slot widths of the input file. The front panel of the module shall have

a handle to facilitate withdrawal and the following controls and indicators for

each channel:

a) Three separate range adjustments each for both Class I and Class II

signals.

b) A 3-position, center-off, momentary contact switch, one position

(down) labeled for test operation of Class I signals, and one position

(up) labeled for test operation of Class II signals.

c) A “signal” indication and a “call” indication each for Class I and for Class II

signals. The “signal” indication denotes that a signal above the threshold

level has been received. A “call” indication denotes that a steady, validly

coded signal has been received. These two indications may be

accomplished with a single indication lamp; “signal” being denoted by a

flashing indication and “call” with a steady indication.

9. In addition, the front panel shall be provided with a single circular, bayonet-

captured, multi-pin connector for two auxiliary detector inputs for each

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 456

THE “WHITEBOOK”

channel. Connector shall be a mechanical configuration equivalent to a MIL-C-

26482 with 10-4 inserts arrangement, such as Burndy Trim Trio Bantamate

Series, consisting of:

a) Wall mounting receptacle, G0B10-4PNE with SM 20M-1S6 gold-plated

pins.

b) Plug, G6L10-4NE with SC20M-1S6 gold-plated sockets, cable clamp,

and strainer relief that shall provide for a right-angle turn with 2½ inch

(63.5 mm) maximum from the front panel surface of the discriminator

module.

10. Each discriminator module shall be ethernet capable.

700-8.2.1.4 Cabinet Wiring.

1. The Model 332L cabinet has provisions for connections between the optical

detectors, the discriminator module, and the Model 2070LX controller unit

with Q-Free MAXTIME software.

2. Wiring the Model 332L cabinet shall conform to the following:

a) Slots 12 and 13 of input file "J" have each been wired to accept a 2-channel

module.

b) Field wiring for the primary detectors, except 24 V DC power, shall

terminate on either terminal board TB-9 in the controller cabinet or on

the rear of input file "J", depending on cabinet configuration. Where TB-9

is used, position assignments shall be as follows:

Position

Assignment

Channel A detector input, 1st module (Slot J

-12)

Channel B detector input, 1st module (Slot J

-12)

Channel A detector input, 2nd module (Slot

J-13)

Channel B detecto

r input, 2nd module (Slot J-13)

c) The 24 V DC cabinet power will be available at Position 1 of terminal

board TB-1 in the controller cabinet.

d) Field wiring for the auxiliary detectors shall terminate on terminal

board TB-0 in the controller cabinet. Position assignments are as

follows:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 457

THE “WHITEBOOK”

FOR MODULE 1 (J

-12) FOR MODULE 2 (J-13)

Position

Assignment

Position Assignment

+24 V DC from (J-12E) 7 +24 V DC from (J-13E)

Detector ground from (J-12K) 8 Detector ground from (J-13K)

Channel A auxiliary detector

input 1

9 Channel A auxiliary detector input 1

Channel A auxiliary detector

input 2

10 Channel A auxiliary detector input 2

Channel B auxiliary detector

input 1

11 Channel B auxiliary detector input 1

Channel B auxiliary detector

input 2

12 Channel B auxiliary detector input 2

700-8.2.1.5 System Operation. You shall demonstrate that all of the components of each system

are compatible and will perform satisfactorily as a system.

700-9 RELATED CONSTRUCTION.

700-9.1 Pedestrian Barricade.

1. Protective railings shall be constructed in accordance with SDG-140,

“Protective Railing at Curb Ramps”.

2. Pedestrian Barricades shall be constructed in accordance with SDG-141,

“Pedestrian Barricade - Type A”.

3. Assembly shall be commercial quality galvanized material.

700-9.2 Traffic Signs and Components. Traffic signing shall conform to latest version of the

California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD). Sign panels shall

be 0.080 inch (2 mm) aluminum alloy 5052 mill-produced stable H38 hardness. All

aluminum shall be anodized. The sheeting on the signs shall be 3M™ Scotchlite™ High

Intensity Grade Reflective Sheeting Series 2870/3870, Stimsonite Series 6200, or

approved equal.

700-9.3 Traffic Striping and Marking Removal.

1. Removal of traffic striping and marking shall conform to Section 15, “Existing

Facilities” of the California Standard Specifications.

2. You shall neatly and thoroughly remove all striping and marking from

pavement surfaces at those locations shown. Where conflicting striping and

markings are removed and no overlay will occur, removal shall be by hydro

blasting (water blasting technology) cleaning methods only. You shall furnish

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 458

THE “WHITEBOOK”

all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals as required for

completing the removal of traffic striping and marking. The use of abrasives

other than those specified herein will not be permitted unless approved, in

writing, by the Engineer.

3. When hydro blast cleaning is being performed in areas adjacent to traffic,

people, or property, you shall provide suitable devices and take appropriate

actions to prevent damage or injury. Prior to starting Work, you shall furnish

for approval of the Engineer, a description of all equipment which is to be

utilized in the performance of the Work. Traffic striping and marking shall be

removed regardless of the condition and thickness of the paint per

measurements made by the Engineer prior to removal. The pavement shall be

restored by slurry seal or asphaltic concrete patch.

700-9.4 Traffic Striping and Pavement Markings.

1. Traffic striping and pavement markings shall conform to Section 84 of the

Caltrans Standard Specifications and to the Standard Plans, State of California,

Drawing No. A20A, B, C and D; and to A24A, B, C, D, and E except that

longitudinal traffic lines in City ROW and City assets in CALTRANS ROW shall

remain 4-inches wide as defined in the California Manual on Uniform Traffic

Control Devices (CA MUTCD).

2. The paint shall be rapid dry water-borne (State Spec. No. 8010-91D-30).

Pedestrian crosswalks, limit lines, pavement arrows, buffer area hatch markings

and pavement legends, including bikeways, shall be installed utilizing 125 mil

thermoplastic marking material.

3. You shall contact Construction Management and Field Services Division for

approval prior to striping installation.

4. Continental Crosswalks shall be installed no earlier than 48 hours in advance

of Signal Turn-on.

5. All median noses separating traffic moving in opposite directions shall be

painted yellow. All median noses separating traffic moving in the same

direction shall be painted white.

700-9.5 Raised Reflective Pavement Markers.

1. Raised Reflective pavement markers shall conform to Section 81 of the

Caltrans Standard Specifications.

2. Pavement markers shall be installed on all lane lines and centerline striping on

all new streets, as well as on existing streets where replacement of pavement

markers is necessary. The minimum height of the pavement markers shall be

0.70 inch (18 mm).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 459

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 701 - CONSTRUCTION

DELETE all sections and subsections in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. This section shall be used in conjunction with Sections 86 and 87 of the

Caltrans Standard Specifications edition identified in the Contract Documents

and SECTION 700 - MATERIALS of these specifications.

701-1 INSTALLATION.

701-1.1 General.

1. You shall determine the quantities required to complete the Work. The

quantities and values shall be included in the Schedule of Values in accordance

with 7-2.1, “Schedule of Values (SOV)” submitted to the Engineer for approval

in accordance with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS” within 10 Working Days after Award of

the Contract.

2. No adjustment in compensation will be made in the Contract lump sum prices

paid for the various electrical Work items due to differences between the

quantities shown in the SOV and the quantities required to complete the Work.

3. The SOV shall include the following items:

a) Foundations - Each Type

b) Standards And Poles - List By Each Type

c) Conduit - List By Each Size And Installation Method

d) Pull Boxes - Each Type

e) Conductors - Each Size And Type

f) Service Equipment Enclosures

g) Signal Heads And Hardware - Each Type

h) Pedestrian Signal Heads And Hardware - Each Type

i) Pedestrian Push Buttons

j) Loop Detectors - Each Type

k) Luminaires - Each Type

4. Service Point shall be located less than 10 feet from the SDG&E source and

shall have 30A single/double in-line fuse, ¾-inch x 8-foot copper ground rod,

and neutral-ground bonding (for both 120v and 240v circuits).

701-1.2 Maintaining Existing and Temporary Electrical Systems. Traffic signal system

shutdowns shall be limited to periods allowed for lane closures in accordance with

Part 6 - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL.

701-1.3 Scheduling of Work. No material or equipment shall be stored at the Site until receipt

of notification by the Engineer. Signal poles shall not be installed more than 3 weeks

prior to the scheduled traffic Signal Turn-On date without prior approval of the

electrical inspector. Obtain Electrical Service Orders (ESO) from the Street Lighting

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 460

THE “WHITEBOOK”

coordinator at 619-527-8088 to validate plan locations of all poles and the total

quantity required. This document shall be attached to a copy of the Street Lighting As-

Built Drawings for requesting street lights to be energized.

701-1.4 As-Builts. For Street Light energizing purposes, As-Built drawings shall be attached to

the ESO and shall show all lights numbered accordingly. Feeder system shall be clearly

marked on an SDGE plat map or may be hand drawn on an 11”x 17” sheet. As-Builts

shall show the title of project, work order number, drawing number, and types of

luminaires and poles. You shall also provide contractor’s name, address, and phone

number. Provide 3 legible hard copies of signed and dated As-Built and mail to 9573

Chesapeake Dr, San Diego, CA 92123. You may also send a digital copy to the Resident

Engineer.

701-2 PAYMENT. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the payment

for the street lighting and traffic signal systems Work shall be as follows:

1. If a separate Bid item has not been provided for an item of the Work related

to street lighting and traffic signal systems as described or shown in the

Contract Documents, the payment shall be included in the Contract Price.

2. Street Lighting and Traffic Signal System components, which are required by

the City, not included as separate Bid items, are included in the Contract Price.

3. The payment for the trenching and pavement restoration is included in the

payment for the associated Work.

4. The payment for warning tape, trace wire, and the cement pigment to achieve

the color required shall be included in the Bid item for the conduit.

5. When included in the Bid proposal, the following traffic control devices

shall be measured and paid for separately:

a) The payment for electrical equipment pedestals shall be included in

the Bid item for “Pedestal for Electrical Equipment”.

b) The payment for Type III meter pedestals and wiring shall be included

in the Bid item for “Type III Meter Pedestal”.

c) The payment for costs associated with SDG&E service orders shall be

paid as a lump sum in the Bid item for “SDG&E Service Orders” or

“SDG&E Fee Allowance”.

d) The payment for the 2 inch (50.8 mm) electrical service conduit to

SDG&E service connections and wires shall be included in the Bid item

for “2 Inch PVC Conduit Per SDG&E Standards”.

e) The payment for the 2 inch (50.8 mm) PVC conduit and wires shall be

included in the Bid item for “2 Inch PVC Conduit Per City Standards”.

f) The payment for grounding shall be included in the following Bid

items:

i. “30 AMP Fuses, Cartridges, and Grounding Rod”

ii. “10 AMP Fuses and Cartridges at Street Light”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 461

THE “WHITEBOOK”

g) The payment for the installation of the electrical conduits and wires

shall be included in the Bid item for “Electrical Conduit”.

h) The payment for pull boxes and lids shall be included in the following

Bid items:

i. “Pull Box”

ii. “#3 Pull Box”

iii. “#6 Pull box”

i) When provided in the Bid proposal, the payment for pull box lids shall

be included in the Bid item for “Electrical Pull Box Lid”.

j) The payment for pole base foundations shall be paid for as part of the

pole Work unless a Bid item for “Pole Base Foundation” is provided.

k) The payment for the removal of existing poles and metal structures

shall be paid for as part of the Work for the new pole unless a Bid item

for removal has been provided:

i. “Remove Existing Wood Pool”

ii. “Remove Existing Wayfinding Pole”

iii. “Remove Existing Metal Structure”

iv. “Remove Existing Street Light”

l) The payment for removing equipment or removing and reinstalling

equipment shall include surface restoration, pole base foundation,

and wiring and shall be paid for in the following Bid items:

i. “Remove Existing Street Light”

ii. “Remove and Reinstall Traffic Signs”

iii. “Remove and Reinstall Existing Post Top Street Light Pole”

iv. “Remove and Reinstall Existing Light Pole”

m) The payment for the pole foundation base, pole, mounting hardware,

the sign, and any electrical wiring components for traffic signs on posts

shall be included in the following Bid items:

i. “Install Traffic Sign on Post”

ii. “Install Type K Traffic Sign on Post”

n) The payment for new or modified street lighting systems shall include

all components and Work to provide a functioning system and shall be

included in the following Bid items:

i. “Street Lighting”

ii. “Street Lighting Electrical System”

iii. “Standard Light Pole (Type A)”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 462

THE “WHITEBOOK”

iv. “Standard Light Pole (Type C)”

v. “Type 15 Fixture with Pole”

vi. “Ameron #21CT13 #37 Pole or Equal”

vii. “Remove and Replace Capital Assembly and Luminaire”

o) The payment for new or modified traffic signal systems shall include

all components and Work to provide a functioning system and shall be

included in the following Bid items:

i. “Traffic Signal”

ii. “Traffic Signal Modification”

iii. “Type 15 Pole with Mast Arm”

iv. “Wiring Existing Traffic Signal to New Service”

v. “Upgrade Street Light on Traffic Signal Pole”

vi. “Traffic Signal Street Light Circuit Wire and Connecting to New

Service”

p) The payment for traffic signal system restoration shall be included in

the Bid item for “Traffic Signal System Restoration”.

q) The payment for street light system restoration shall be included in the

Bid item for “Street Light System Restoration”.

r) The payment for cobra head luminaires shall be included in the Work

for street lights unless a Bid item for “Cobra Head Luminaire” has been

provided.

s) The payment for protective railing Work shall be included in the Bid

item for each “Protective Railing at Curb Ramps”.

t) The payment for Type A pedestrian barricade Work in accordance with

700-9.1, “Pedestrian Barricade” shall be included in the Bid item for

each “Pedestrian Barricade (Type A)”.

END OF PART 7 - STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 463

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 464

THE “WHITEBOOK”

PART 8

LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

SECTION 800 – MATERIALS

800-1.1.2 Class “A” Topsoil. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Class “A” topsoil shall be from a selected source outside the limits of the Work.

2. Class “A” topsoil shall have the same relative composition and structure, a

friable sandy loam character, and be free of roots, clods, pockets of coarse

sand, noxious weeds, sticks, brush, and other litter. Class “A” topsoil shall not

be infested with nematodes or other undesirable insects and plant-disease

organisms. All non-organic components of imported Class “A” topsoil shall

pass the 4.75mm (No. 4) sieve. Organic components shall conform to Table

800-1.2.4.

3. Class “C” topsoil being corrected to meet Class “A” topsoil shall be free of

stones larger than ½ inch (12.5mm) in their greatest dimension.

4. The Agronomic Topsoil Test procedure shall be as follows:

a) For Class “A” topsoil, submit the source and location of the soil, a physical

sample, and current test results by a third party independent agronomic

laboratory reflecting compliance with the Contract Documents to the

Engineer within 15 Working Days of the NTP.

b) For Class “A” topsoil a second series of independent third party agronomic

soil tests shall be required 15 Working Days before soil placement to

verify conformance with these specifications. Topsoil that fails to meet

these specifications shall not be shipped to the project site. Under no

circumstances shall the Engineer accept topsoil knowing that additional

amendment is required.

c) For Class “A” and Class “C” topsoils, a series of tests by a third party

independent agronomic laboratory shall be required after soil placement

to verify conformance with this section.

i. The On-site Soil Collection Protocol shall be as follows: You and

the Resident Engineer shall walk the site and collect soil on site.

Once 3 composite samples from different locations from the

field are collected and kept, separate samples shall be

identified and labeled specific to the Project with your contact

information., You shall provide soil samples to the Resident

Engineer with a prepaid and preaddressed shipping bag, box

or envelope addressed to the testing company. The bag, box

or envelope shall be dropped off to the shipping source by the

Engineer to ensure that the material shipped to the testing

company is the actual on-site material tested. Sample

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 465

THE “WHITEBOOK”

locations shall be approved by the Engineer. Samples shall be

taken from a depth of six to twelve inches.

d) No planting shall begin until test results confirm the agricultural

suitability of the topsoil. You are responsible for all third party

independent laboratory testing and shipping expenses. Testing shall

continue until soil passes testing requirements. Final testing shall be

completed within 2 weeks of sod installation to confirm conditions at

time of planting.

e) The test results shall provide the following information:

i. Date of Testing

ii. Project Name

iii. The Contractor’s Name

iv. Source of Material and Supplier’s Name

v. Estimate of Quantity Needed in Cubic Yards

vi. Soil Gradation

vii. Fertility

viii. Heavy Metals

ix. Soil Permeability in Inches per Hour

x. Toxic Elements

xi. Chloride Content

xii. pH

xiii. EcE (electrical conductivity)

xiv. SAR (Sodium Absorption Ratio)

xv. Organic Content by Dry Weight

xvi. Carbon : Nitrogen Ratio

xvii. Water-soluble Nutrient Levels

xviii. Recommendations for adding amendments, chemical

corrections, or both.

f) Physical Testing:

i. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by the following

method according to Soil Science Society of America (SSSA)

"Methods of Soil Analysis – Part 1 - Physical and Mineralogical

Methods":

• Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt,

and clay. Report percentage of gravel, if present.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 466

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ii. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density

according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis – Part 1-Physical

and Mineralogical Methods."

iii. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis

– Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

iv. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of

Soil Analysis – Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85%

compaction according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).

g) Chemical Testing:

i. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's

"Methods of Soil Analysis – Part 3- Chemical Methods."

ii. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of

expandable clay minerals using CEC by ammonium saturation

at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis – Part 1-

Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

iii. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and

quantities of RCRA metals including aluminum, arsenic,

barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium,

and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include

recommendations for corrective action.

iv. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of

phytotoxic minerals including aluminum, arsenic, barium,

cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium,

mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin,

titanium, vanadium, and zinc.

h) Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis according to standard laboratory

protocol of SSSA, including the following:

i. Revise required items for analysis in subparagraphs below to

suit Project; insert additional subparagraphs if required.

ii. Percentage of water in saturation extract.

iii. Electrical conductivity (ECe).

iv. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).

v. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.

vi. Nitrogen ppm.

vii. Phosphorous ppm.

viii. Potassium ppm.

ix. Manganese ppm.

x. Manganese-availability ppm.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 467

THE “WHITEBOOK”

xi. Molybdenum ppm.

xii. Iron ppm.

xiii. Sulfur ppm.

xiv. Boron ppm.

xv. Zinc ppm.

xvi. Zinc availability ppm.

xvii. Copper ppm.

xviii. Chloride ppm.

xix. Sodium ppm and sodium absorption ratio (SAR).

xx. Soluble-salts ppm.

xxi. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts

and metals cited in the Standard protocol. If such problem

materials are present, provide additional recommendations

for corrective action.

xxii. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and

content of each.

i) Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method

according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical

Methods."

j) Recommendations: Based on the test results, testing agency shall

provide interpretation of data and written recommendations for soil

treatments, soil amendments to be incorporated, and required

leaching, to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,

viable plants as indicated on the Plans. Include, at a minimum,

recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium

fertilization, and for micronutrients. Include results of the soil texture

and percent by dry weight of soil organic matter. Include

recommendations for remediation of phytotoxicity elements and

deleterious materials. Include amount and length of time to perform

leaching operations, if required.

i. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations

in weight or volume per

1,000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil and

in weight or volume per cu. yd. of backfill mix.

ii. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising

pH or sulfur for lowering pH according to the buffered acidity

or buffered alkalinity in weight or volume per

1,000 sq. ft. for

6-inch depth of soil and in weight or volume per cu. yd. of

backfill mix.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 468

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. The topsoil shall conform to the following agricultural suitability requirements:

pH 6.0 – 7.5

ECe (electrical conductivity) 0.0 – 3.0

SAR (Sodium Absorption Ratio) 0.0 – 5.0

Chloride Content Less than 300 ppm

Boron Content Less than 1 ppm

Organic Content 5% to 6% by dry weight

Carbon : Nitrogen Ratio 20:1 maximum

Sandy Loam Gradation Limit*

Gravel over 2mm: Less than 10% by weight

Sand: 75% to 85%

Sand finer than 100 mesh (0.15 mm): Less than 15%

Sand finer that 60 mesh (0.25 mm): Less than 40%

Sand larger than 32 mesh (0.5 mm): Minimum 15%

Silt: 20% maximum

Clay: 15% maximum

Permeability Rate** 2 inches to 5 inches per hour at 80% compaction

Aluminum

Available aluminum measured with the Ammonium

Bicarbonate/DTPA Extraction shall be less than 5 parts

per million

Calcium Carbonate Content

Free calcium carbonate (limestone) shall not be

present

Phytotoxic Constituent,

Herbicides, Hydrocarbons

Germination and growth of monocots and dicots shall

not be restricted more than 10 percent compared to

the reference soil. Total petroleum hydrocarbons shall

not exceed 50 mg/kg dry soil measured per the

modified EPA Method No. 8015. Total aromatic

volatile organic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene,

xylene and ethylbenzene) shall not exceed 0.5 mg/kg

dry soil measured per EPA Methods No. 8020

Heavy Metals

The maximum permissible elemental concentration in

the soil shall not exceed the following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 469

THE “WHITEBOOK”

* Per USDA Classification Scheme.

** Tested in accordance with USDA Handbook Number 60, method 34b or other

approved method.

800-1.1.3 Class “B” Topsoil. ADD the following:

1. Topsoil shall be weed free upon delivery or treated as specified for weed

eradication, prior to placement.

2. Prior to placement, Class “B” topsoil shall meet and shall be tested for the

agricultural suitability requirements stated in item 5 of 800-1.1.2, “Class ‘A’

Topsoil”. The soils shall be amended in accordance with 801-2.2, “Topsoil

Preparation and Conditioning” based on recommendations included in the

test results and as approved by the Engineer.

800-1.1.4 Class “C” Topsoil. ADD the following:

1. Prior to placement, the Class “C” topsoil shall meet and shall be tested for the

agricultural suitability requirements stated in item 5 of 800-1.1.2, “Class ‘A’

Topsoil”. The soils shall be amended in accordance with 801-2.2, “Topsoil

1. Total Threshold Concentration Limit (Ammonium

Bicarbonate/DTPA Extraction TTLC Level) parts

per million (mg/kilogram) dry weight basis:

a) Antimony: 150 ppm.

b) Arsenic: 50 ppm.

c) Barium: 1,000 ppm.

d) Beryllium: 7.5 ppm.

e) Cadmium: 10 ppm.

f) Chromium: 50 ppm.

g) Cobalt: 800 ppm

h) Copper: 250 ppm

i) Lead: 50 ppm.

j) Mercury: 2 ppm.

k) Molybdenum: 3,500

l) Nickel: 200 ppm.

m) Selenium: 10 ppm.

n) Silver: 50 ppm.

o) Thallium: 70 ppm.

p) Vanadium: 240 ppm.

q) Zinc: 2,500 ppm.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 470

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Preparation and Conditioning” based on recommendations included in the

test results and as approved by the Engineer.

800-1.2.1 General. To paragraph (2), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Furnish a certificate of compliance stating that the material meets the

specifications.

800-1.2.2 Manure. DELETE in its entirety.

ADD:

800-1.2.3.1 Pre-plant Fertilizer and Tablets.

1. Pre-plant fertilizer shall be granular commercial fertilizer 12-12-12 unless

otherwise recommended by the soil test results.

2. Fertilizer tablets shall be compressed slow release tablets, 20-10-5, and shall

be installed as follows:

Quantity Weight Application

One Tablet 5 grams Per Each Flatted Plant or Cutting

One Tablet 21 grams 1-Gallon Container

Two Tablets 21 grams 5-Gallon Container

Four Tablets 21 grams 15-Gallon Container

One Tablet 21 grams Per Each 2 Inches of Box-Sized Container

ADD:

800-1.2.3.2 Post-plant Fertilizer.

1. Post-plant fertilizer shall be slow release 15-15-15 unless otherwise

recommended by the soil test results.

800-1.2.4 Organic Soil Amendment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Compost shall be well decomposed, stable, and weed-free organic matter

produced by composting feedstock and shall bear United States Composting

Council's "Seal of Testing Assurance” and shall comply with the following:

a) Compost shall be produced at a facility inspected and regulated by the

Local Enforcement Agency for CalRecycle.

b) Comply with Title14 requirements of the Process to Further Reduce

Pathogens (PFRP), Fecal coliform and Salmonella testing and pathogen

and EPA, 40 CFR 503 regulations

c) Feedstock limited to leaves and plant parts only; includes straw and

alfalfa.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 471

THE “WHITEBOOK”

d) Mushroom, manures, peat mosses, green waste and food waste

composts are acceptable.

e) Composted wood products are conditionally acceptable (stable humus

must be present). Wood products based on redwood or cedar are not

acceptable. Wood derivatives, including sawdust and chipped

construction waste are not acceptable.

f) Sewage sludge and animal waste are not acceptable.

g) Compost shall have a dark brown color and a soil like odor.

h) Compost exhibiting a sour or putrid smell, containing recognizable

grass or leaves, or is hot (120° F) upon delivery or rewetting is not

acceptable.

i) Comply with Title14 requirements of the Process to Further Reduce

Pathogens (PFRP), Fecal coliform and Salmonella testing and pathogen

and EPA, 40 CFR 503 regulations.

j) Particle Size: The maximum particle size shall be 0.5-inch

k) Calcium carbonate shall not be present if to be applied on alkaline

soils.

l) The salt content shall be less than 6 millimho/cm @ 25° C. (ECe less

than 6) in a saturated paste extract.

m) Additional Properties:

Property Method Requirement

pH, Units Saturation Paste 5.5 to 8

Soluble-Salt Concentration Less than 5 dS/m

SAR Less than 5

Chloride Method 3a, USDA Less than 1000 mg/l

EC, dS/m Saturation Extract 0 to 10

Boron, ppm Saturation Extract less than 1

Silicone Content (Acid insoluble

ash)

Less than 50%

Moisture content by weight, % Gravimetric 35-55%

Bulk Density, lbs/cubic yard 500 to 1100

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 472

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Property Method Requirement

Organic Matter, % of Dry Weight Loss on Ignition 50-65%

Carbon to Nitrogen Ratio Less than 20:1

Maturity Solvita 5 or above

Stability Solvita 5 or above

Particle Size Sieve Analysis

Pass 3/4 inch sieve 98%

Pass 1/2-inch sieve 90%-100%

Pass #4 screen 80% or more

CA Title 22 Metals Title 22

Antimony (Sb) Less than 150 ppm

Arsenic (As) Less than 50 ppm

Barium (Ba) Less than 1,000 ppm

Beryllium (Be) Less than 7.5 ppm

Cadmium (Cd) Less than 10 ppm

Chromium (Cr) Less than 50 ppm

Cobalt (Co) Less than 800 ppm

Copper (Cu) Less than 250 ppm

Lead (Pb) Less than 50 ppm

Mercury (Hg) Less than 2 ppm

Molybdenum (Mo) Less than 3,500 ppm

Nickel (Ni) Less than 200 ppm

Selenium (Se) Less than 10 ppm

Silver (AG) Less than 50 ppm

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 473

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Property Method Requirement

Thallium (TI) Less than 70 ppm

Vanadium (V) Less than 240 ppm

Zinc (Zn) Less than 2,500 ppm

Pathogen

Salmonella Title 14 < 3 MPN per 4 gms

Fecal Coliform <1000 MPN per 1 gm

Physical contaminants

Plastic Metal and Glass, %> 4mm % by Weight < 1

Sharps, % > 4mm % by Weight 0

800-1.2.5 Mulch. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Mulch shall be designated by Type in accordance with the requirements

herein.

2. Unless otherwise approved, mulch shall be packaged in bulk.

3. Mulch materials shall be free of seed, debris, and deleterious materials as

certified by the Supplier and shall be as follows:

a) Type 1 Mulch (ground wood product) shall conform to Type 1 organic

soil amendment.

b) Type 2 Mulch (sewage sludge product) shall conform to Type 2 organic

soil amendment.

c) Type 3 Mulch (mushroom compost) shall conform to Type 3 organic

soil amendment.

d) Type 4 Mulch (peat) shall be brown compressed sphagnum or

hypnum.

e) Type 5 Mulch (fir or redwood bark chips) shall be fir or redwood bark

chips in the gradation specified.

f) Type 6 Mulch (straw) shall be either threshed new straw or stable

bedding material derived from rice, oats or barley. Straw in an

advanced state of decomposition shall not be acceptable.

g) Type 7 Mulch (wood chips) shall be wood chips in the size and type

specified.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 474

THE “WHITEBOOK”

h) Type 8 Mulch (shredded redwood or cedar bark) shall be either

redwood or incense cedar bark which knits in a manner to minimize

sloughing, floating, or being kicked away.

i) Type 9 Mulch (recycled) shall be recycled and clean green material

processed in accordance with California Code of Regulations, Title 14,

Chapter 3, Article 7, §17868.3. Clean green material shall be tree and

landscape materials that have never been mixed with other waste

materials and have been processed by a permitted compost facility.

Type 9 Mulch size shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.

j) Type 10 Mulch (rock, gravel, or cobble) shall be rock, gravel, or cobble

in the size specified in the Contract Documents.

k) Type 11 Hydro-mulch (wood fiber) shall be of clean and natural non-

recycled wood fibers processed to contain no germination or growth

inhibiting factors using non-toxic dye to facilitate the metering of

materials. Type 11 Hydro-Mulch shall be manufactured in such a manner

that, after its addition to and agitation in slurry tanks with fertilizer, seed,

water, stabilizing emulsion, and other approved additives, fibers in the

material shall be uniformly suspended and shall form a homogeneous

slurry. When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, the homogeneous

slurry shall form a blotter-like ground cover impregnated uniformly with

seed which shall allow moisture and rainfall to percolate to the underlying

soil after application. Suppliers shall certify that their product meets all

foregoing requirements based on testing.

l) Type 12 Hydro-mulch (stabilizing emulsion) shall be a concentrated

liquid chemical that forms a plastic film upon drying and allows water

and air to penetrate. The films shall be non-flammable and shall have

an effective life of at least 1 year. Stabilizing emulsion shall be non-

toxic to plant or animal life and non-staining to concrete or painted

surfaces. In its cured state, the stabilizing emulsion shall not be

re-emulsifiable. The material shall be registered with and licensed by

the State of California, Department of Food and Agriculture, as an

“Auxiliary Soil Chemical”.

m) Type 13 Hydro-mulch (bonded fiber matrix) shall be wood fiber, long

strand, and whole wood fiber thermo-mechanically processed from

clean whole wood chips. The fibers shall:

i. Disperse into a uniform slurry when mixed with water.

ii. Contain ¾ inch (19.1 mm) fiber strands for at least 25% by total

volume.

iii. Be retained 100% when passed through a No. 25 sieve.

iv. Have an initial moisture content of no more than 15% of its dry

weight when tested under CA Test 226. The moisture content

shall be marked on the packaging.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 475

THE “WHITEBOOK”

v. Have a water holding capacity by weight of at least 1,200%

when tested under the procedure designated in the

Department's Final Report, CA-DOT-TL-2176-1-76-36, “Water

Holding Capacity for Hydromulch”, available from METS.

vi. Be non-toxic to plant and animal life.

vii. Be free of synthetic or plastic materials, lead paint, printing ink,

varnish, petroleum products, seed germination inhibitors, and

chlorine bleach.

viii. Contain less than 250 ppm of boron.

ix. Contain less than 7% ash when tested under Technical

Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry, TAPPI Standard T 413.

x. Be colored to contrast with the area on which the fiber is to be

applied. The coloring agent shall be biodegradable, nontoxic,

free from copper, mercury, and arsenic, and shall not stain

concrete or painted surfaces.

The bonding agent for the fiber material shall be a liquid formulation

with polyacrylamide as the primary active ingredient with the following

requirements:

i. Linear, anionic copolymer of acrylamide and sodium acrylate.

ii. Anionic with a residual monomer content that is at most 0.05%

by weight.

iii. Formulated and labeled as one of the following:

• Water-in-oil emulsion containing at least 2.6 pounds of

pure polyacrylamide per gallon (0.3 kg/L). Pure

polyacrylamide shall be at least 30% active.

• Liquid dispersed polyacrylamide containing at least 4.4

pounds pure polyacrylamide per gallon (0.5 kg/L). Pure

polyacrylamide shall be at least 35% active.

ADD:

800-1.2.6 Inorganic Soil Amendments.

1. Iron sulfate shall be ferric or ferrous sulfate in pelleted or granular forms

containing not less than 18% metallic iron. It shall conform to the Agricultural

Code of the State of California.

2. Gypsum shall be commercially processed and packaged CaSo

- 2H

O with a

minimum 80% grade containing 14% minimum combined sulfur.

800-1.3 Seed. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Seed shall be fresh, clean, new crop seed, and mechanically premixed to the

specified proportions.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 476

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Seed shall be delivered to the Work site in original unopened containers bearing

the dealer’s “Guaranteed Analysis”, germination percentage, and a certificate,

stamp, or release by a County Agricultural Commissioner. Any seed tagged

“Warning, Hold for Inspection” shall be inspected and released by the Agricultural

Commissioner of the County within which the seeds are to be planted.

3. All seed used for lawn, erosion control, or other planting specified on the Plans

or listed in the specifications shall be furnished in labeled and sealed standard

containers with duplicate signed copies of a statement from the vendor

certifying that each container of seed delivered is fully labeled in accordance

with the California State Agricultural Code stating the certified percent of

purity and germination.

4. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or

storage shall not be accepted.

5. Custom seed blends shall have the Project name printed on the seed tag. Prior

to the start of any seeding operation, custom seed blends shall be inspected

and approved by the Engineer once delivered to the Site.

6. Unless otherwise specified, turf seed shall be one of the following or

approved equal:

a) 20% Common Bermuda, 10% Hybrid Bermuda, 10% “Barclay”

Perennial Rye, and 60% “Turfstar” Perennial Rye.

i. Seeds shall be hulled when applied from April to September.

ii. Seeds shall be unhulled when applied from October through

March.

b) Agrono-tec Ballfield Mix 2A.

c) OreGro Sports Mix #2.

800-1.4.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Plants shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to planting at the

time of arrival to the job site. Prior to 15 Working Days before installation, you

shall submit photos of all proposed plants to be used in accordance with 3-8.4,

“Supporting Information”.

2. Plants shall have a growth habit normal to the species and shall be sound,

healthy, vigorous, and free from insect pests, plant diseases, sun scalds, fresh

bark abrasions, excessive abrasions, or other objectionable disfigurements.

3. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and well “hardened off”.

4. Plants shall have normal well-developed branch systems and vigorous and

fibrous roots systems which are neither root nor pot bound and are free of

kinked or girdling roots.

5. Other than the normal side pruning during the growth period, pruning shall

not be done prior to inspection at the nursery.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 477

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6. The scientific and common names of plants specified shall conform to the

approved names given in the “Western Garden Book” published by Sunset

Publishing, Menlo Park, CA.

7. When delivered on site, each group of plant materials shall be labeled clearly

from the nursery source as to species and variety. Patented plants (cultivars)

required by the plant list shall be delivered with a proper plant patent

attached. Any plants which are not labeled or are not as indicated on the Plans

and Specifications shall be rejected and shall be removed from the site

immediately.

800-1.4.2 Trees. ADD the following:

1. Trees shall have a uniform trunk taper from the base of the tree, continuing

up the main leader. Palms shall be un-skinned unless specified otherwise.

2. Trees with naturally occurring central leaders shall remain un-pruned or

unaltered from the nursery.

3. Trees Planted In Turf Areas.

a) Trees shall be spaced to permit the most effective use of mechanized

maintenance equipment and operation of the irrigation system.

b) Trees shall have a minimum of 12 horizontal feet between other trees

and vertical objects.

c) Provide a 4 foot diameter mulched area around the base of the tree;

there shall be no mulch within four inches (100 mm) of the tree trunk.

800-1.4.5 Sod and Stolons (Turf Grass). ADD the following:

1. Sod and stolons species shall be as specified on the Plans or in the Special

Provisions. Material shall be delivered and installed within 24 hours of

harvesting with shipping documentation to verify the origin, harvest date,

stolon preparation date, and shipment date. All material shall be from the

same growing ground.

2. Turfgrass Sod: Turfgrass sod shall be Certified Number 1 Quality/Premium,

including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects.

Turfgrass sod shall comply with the "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod

Materials" as found in the Turfgrass Producers International (TPI) "Guideline

Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density,

color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and

development when planted.

3. Turfgrass Species: Turfgrass sod species shall be as indicated on the Plans.

ADD:

800-1.4.7 Vines.

1. Vines shall be of the specified type and size.

800-1.5.3 Tree Stakes. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 478

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1. The tree support stakes shall be 10 feet (3 m) minimum length by two-inch (50

mm) diameter lodgepole stakes.

ADD:

800-1.5.4 Tree Ties.

1. Tree ties shall be manufactured of virgin flexible vinyl meeting ASTM-D412

standards for tensile and elongation strength. Material shall be black or ultraviolet

resistance.

2. Tree ties shall be manufactured with a double back locking configuration and

secured with one galvanized nail to prevent slippage.

3. Tree ties shall elongate with the tree growth and shall prevent damage to the

tree.

ADD:

800-1.6 Erosion Control Matting.

1. Jute.

a) Jute matting shall be of open weave with approximately 1 in

(1 inch x

1 inch) (25.4 mm x 25.4 mm) mesh. It shall be manufactured from

loosely twisted jute yarn varying in thickness no more than half its

normal diameter.

b) Matting shall be made smolder resistant by treatment with chemicals

which are non-leaching and non-toxic to vegetation. An identification

mark to differentiate it from untreated jute cloth shall be present.

2. Excelsior.

a) Excelsior blanket shall consist of a cured wood excelsior mat.

b) Fibers shall be evenly distributed over the entire area of matting. 80%

of fibers shall be at least 6 inches (152.4 mm) long with consistent

thickness.

c) The topside of the matting shall be covered with 2 inch by 1 inch (50.8

mm x 25.4 mm) biodegradable extruded plastic mesh.

d) The blanket shall be made smolder resistant without chemical

additives.

3. Staples.

a) Staples for erosion control matting shall be 11 gage steel wire bent in

a “U” shape with 6 inches (152.4 mm) minimum length.

4. Root Barriers.

a) Root barriers shall be equivalent to the following:

i. Type LB 12-2 or UB 18-2 for installations at existing trees or

approved equal.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 479

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ii. UB 24-2 for installations at new construction, as manufactured

by DeepRoot or approved equal.

iii. 19.5 inch (495.3 mm) root control fabric as manufactured by

Biobarrier, or approved equal.

800-2.1.3 Plastic Pipe for Use with Solvent Weld Socket or Threaded Fittings. ADD the

following:

1. Schedule 40 and Class 315 pipe shall be used for continuously pressurized

pipe on the supply side of control valves as shown on the Plans. Use Schedule

40 pipe for 1-1/2” (38 mm) main line and Class 315 pipe for main line sizes two

inch (50 mm) and larger.

2. Schedule 40 pipe shall be used for installation on the discharge side of control

valve (lateral lines).

3. Fittings and couplings for plastic pipe shall be threaded or slip-fitted tapered

socket solvent weld type. Threaded female adapters shall be provided with

socket pipe for connections to threaded pipe. Plastic pipefitting and coupling

shall be PVC I or PVC I/II material. The type of plastic material and schedule

size shall be indicated on each fitting or coupling.

a) All fittings on pressurized main lines shall be Schedule 80.

b) All threaded fittings shall be Schedule 80.

c) Slip fittings for non-pressure lateral lines shall be Schedule 40.

4. Fittings and couplings shall comply with the following table:

SCHEDULE SOCKET FITTING THREADED FITTINGS

ASTM D2466

ASTM D2467

ASTM D2464

ADD:

800-2.1.3.1 Pipe Primer and Glue.

1. Refer to 207-17.3.3, “Solvent Cement Joints”.

ADD:

800-2.1.3.2 Pipe Sleeves.

1. Pipe sleeves shall be Schedule 40 pipe and shall be 2 times the diameter of the

pipe or wire bundle being sleeved with a minimum size of 2 inches (50.8 mm).

Pipe sleeves shall extend 12 inches (304.8 mm) beyond the edge of hardscape

and shall be required when wires and pipes cross under streets, driveways,

walkways, and access paths. Pull boxes shall be located over the terminus of the

sleeve. At the end of the sleeve, wires shall extend up into the pull box and shall

provide a 2 foot (0.6 m) expansion loop.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 480

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

800-2.1.6 Concrete Thrust Blocks.

1. Refer to 201-1.1.2, “Concrete Specified by Class and Alternate Class”.

800-2.2.3 Manual Control Valves. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

800-2.2.3 Manual Control Globe Valves.

1. Manual control globe valves shall be brass or bronze and shall be straight

pattern globe valves. Valves shall be full-opening, key-operated with a

replaceable compression disc, and shall have ground joint unions on the

discharge end. Valves shall have a brass or bronze cross handle.

800-2.2.4 Remote Control Valves. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Remote control valves shall be:

a) Electrically operated.

b) Brass or bronze with accurately machined valve seat surfaces.

c) Equipped with flow control adjustment and capability for manual

operation.

d) Made so that they may be readily disassembled for servicing.

2. Plastic remote control valves shall be electrically operated and may be used

only when specified or with prior approval from the Engineer. Unless

otherwise specified, the valve body shall be constructed of heavy-duty glass-

filled UV-resistant nylon and have stainless steel studs and flange nuts.

Diaphragms shall be of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber with accurately

machined valve seat surfaces equipped with flow control adjustments and

shall be capable of manual operation. All internal parts shall be removable

from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.

800-2.2.6 Quick-Coupling Valves and Assemblies. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with

the following:

1. Quick coupling valves shall be brass or bronze with self-closing valves and shall

be supplied in 1 inch (25 mm) sizes, unless otherwise specified.

2. When a quick-coupler assembly is specified, it shall consist of the valve, quick-

coupler key and hose swivel.

3. Quick coupling valves shall have a locking rubber cap.

800-2.2.7 Valve Boxes. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Valve boxes shall be constructed of precast concrete.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 481

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Covers shall be cast iron with a non-corrosive metal self-locking device

connected with stainless steel bolts and self-locking nuts. Covers shall be

permanently and legibly labeled with 100% acrylic epoxy white or yellow

waterproof paint on the top of the box indicating the component contained in

the box. The Contractor shall replace the clevis pin with a marine grade

stainless steel nut and bolt. The assembly shall be greased to prevent

corrosion.

ADD:

800-2.2.8 Master Control Valve.

1. The master control valve shall be of a normally open design of solid brass

construction with a waterproof 24 VAC 3-way solenoid coil, self-cleaning

orifice, and one-piece molded construction diaphragm with an integral

O-ring seal reinforced with 600 lb (272.2 kg) test fabric.

2. The master control valve shall be slow closing to prevent water hammer and surge

and shall operate on pressures by valve size in accordance with the table below:

Operating Pressure (psi) Valve Size (Inch)

Up to 200 (1379 kPa) ¾ - 2 (19.1 mm – 50.8 mm)

150 (1034.2 kPa) 2½ - 3 (63.5 mm – 76.2 mm)

ADD:

800-2.2.9 Flow Sensing Device.

1. The flow sensing device shall be an in-line type with a non-magnetic, spinning

impeller as the only moving part. The electronics housing shall be glass-filled.

The impeller shall be glass-filled nylon or Tefzel with a UHMWPE or Tefzel

sleeve bearing. The shaft material shall be tungsten carbide. The electronics

housing shall have two ethylene-propylene O-rings and shall be easily

removed from the meter body.

2. The sensor electronics shall be potted in an epoxy compound designed for

prolonged immersion. Electrical connections shall be 2 single conductor

18AWG leads. Insulation shall be direct burial “UF” type colored red for positive

lead and black for the negative lead. The flow sensing device shall operate in

line pressures up to 100 psi (689.5 kPa) and shall operate in flows of 1 foot per

second (30.5 cm/sec) to 20 feet per second (609.6 cm/sec) with linearity of ±1%

and repeatability of ±1%. The meter body shall be fabricated from Schedule

80 PVC tees with socket end connections.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 482

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

800-2.2.10 Flow Sensor Cable.

1. The flow sensor cable shall be 2 conductor 18 AWG shielded U.L. type PTLC wire

rated to 105° C (221° F), per manufacturer’s specification. Maximum Wire run shall

not exceed 2,000 linear feet (609.6 m) from flow sensor to the irrigation controller.

2. Flow sensor data cable shall be installed in ¾ inch (19.1 mm) PVC electrical

conduit from the controller to the flow sensor.

ADD:

800-2.2.11 Rain Sensing Device.

1. The rain sensing device shall be constructed of high impact thermoplastic

which shall withstand extreme weather conditions. The enclosure shall be

stainless steel and vandal resistant. It shall contain hygroscopic discs which

absorb water and expand proportionally to the amount of rain collected.

Unless otherwise specified, the rain sensing device shall be connected to the

controller and shall operate by interrupting the electrical circuit from the

irrigation controller to the irrigation remote control valves and by restoring the

electrical circuit upon sufficient drying of the hygroscopic discs.

ADD:

800-2.2.12 Locking Manual Valve Cap.

1. The locking manual valve cap shall be molded high-impact plastic body with

locking brass hinged covers as manufactured by Weathermatic or approved

equal.

ADD:

800-2.2.13 Pressure Regulating Valve.

1. The pressure regulating valve shall consist of a bronze body and bell housing, a

separate access cover for the plunger and a bolt to adjust the downstream

pressure. The bronze bell housing and access cap shall be threaded to the body

and shall not require the use of screws. The assembly shall be of the balanced

piston design and shall reduce pressure in both flow and no-flow conditions. The

assembly shall be accessible for maintenance without having to remove the body

from the water line.

ADD:

800-2.2.14 Wye Strainer.

1. The Wye Strainer shall be cast bronze per ASTM B584. The strainer screen shall

be 20 mesh 300 series stainless steel and shall be accessible for cleaning

without removing the device from the water line.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 483

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

800-2.2.15 Backflow Preventer Enclosure.

1. The backflow preventer enclosure frame shall be constructed of 1¼ inch (31.8

mm) tubular stainless steel with formed stainless steel tubing and rod or ½

inch (12.7 mm) #13 flattened mesh expanded stainless steel cage. The

enclosure shall be smooth with no sharp edges or burrs. The enclosure shall

be equipped with stainless steel mounting hardware and locking mechanism

capable of being embedded into a concrete pad. The enclosure shall be of

sufficient size to contain the backflow preventer and any ancillary equipment

such that the inlet and outlet pipes shall be fully within the enclosure.

ADD:

800-2.2.16 Anti-drain Check Valve.

1. Anti-drain check valves shall be capable to compensate for elevation changes

up to 32 feet (9.8 m) and shall meet Schedule 80 pipe specifications. The anti-

drain check valves shall be capable of being adjusted through the top of the

valve.

2. Anti-drain check valves shall be installed within the swing joint below the irrigation

head unless the irrigation head specified has an integral anti-drain check valve or

site conditions warrant additional protection as determined by the Engineer.

ADD:

800-2.2.17 Booster Pump.

1. The water pressure booster pump system shall be designed and fabricated by

Barrett Engineered Pumps or approved equal. The system shall be a completely

prefabricated system with pump, piping, and electrical and structural elements

fully contained within a marine grade aluminum alloy enclosure with a hinged top.

The enclosure shall be secured to the concrete pad with stainless steel hardware.

2. The pump shall be single stage end suction close-coupled centrifugal brass or

bronze fitted construction equipped with mechanical shaft seal and back

pullout design. Impeller shall either be keyed or locked to the shaft with a hex

head impeller nut and washer or shall be threaded directly to the end of the

shaft. Pump shaft shall either be high strength S.A.E. 1045 carbon steel

protected in the stuffing box area by a replaceable bronze shaft sleeve or shall

be stainless steel with no sleeve. Pump shall be directly coupled to a C-face

electric motor.

3. The electric motor shall be of the squirrel cage induction type suitable for full

voltage starting. Motor shall be ODP to aid in cooling. Electric motor shall be

rated for continuous service. The motor bearings shall be of such size that the

average life rating is no less than 3 years (10,000 hours) of B10 life. The motor

shall have horsepower ratings such that the motor shall carry the maximum

possible load to be developed under the designed pumping conditions and

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 484

THE “WHITEBOOK”

not overload the motor beyond the nameplate rating of the motor. Motor shall

have a 1.15 service factor. The motor shall conform to the latest NEMA

Standards for motor design and construction.

4. The pump control panel shall have a NEMA 4X plain front non-metallic

enclosure with padlock latches and shall include power and control resettable

thermal circuit breakers, heavy duty magnetic starter with adjustable overload

protection, Hand-Off-Auto switch to select mode of operation, and heavy duty

numbered terminal strips for power and control wiring lead terminations.

5. The metal oxide varistor protected pump start relay(s) shall be incorporated

in the panel to start the pump with a signal from each irrigation controller.

6. All system piping shall be type “L” copper. All fittings shall be copper or brass

with unions or flanges to allow for system disassembly or major component

removal. The system shall incorporate an integral full pipe size bypass line with a

check valve to allow for pump removal and repair without disrupting water supply

to system.

7. Isolation valves shall be all brass quarter turn ball valves with hard chrome ball

on lines 2 inches (50.8 mm) and less. Isolation valves shall be lug style butterfly

valves with Buna-N elastomeric seats, ductile iron nickel coated disc, and

stainless steel stem with handle and 10 position galvanized memory plate on

lines 2½ inches (63.5 mm) and greater.

8. Check valves shall be all brass spring-loaded disc style with metal-backed

Teflon wafer disc, stainless steel stem, and spring on lines 2 inches (50.8 mm)

and less. Check valves shall be cast iron bronze fitted wafer style silent check

with spring loaded bronze disc, bronze guide shaft, stainless steel spring, and

replaceable bronze seat on lines 2½ inches (63.5 mm) and greater.

9. Gauges shall be 2½ inches (63.5 mm) diameter face, glycerin filled with stainless

casing, and brass internals. Gauges shall be equipped with brass isolation

petcocks.

10. The pump system shall have a flow activated paddle style magnetically

coupled flow switch, sensitive to flows as low as 1 fps, mounted on piping and

interconnected to time delay relay to shut down pump on no-flow conditions.

The time delay relay shall be adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes.

11. Pump system shall be mounted on a structural aluminum skid with mounting

flanges on front and back to allow for mounting of skid to concrete pad. The

skid shall be equipped with pipe support on suction and discharge piping. All

nuts, bolts, and washers shall be heavy zinc coated steel on skid and piping.

Skid shall include mounting hardware for integral aluminum enclosure.

12. The enclosure shall be constructed of marine grade aluminum alloy 5052-H32

or minimum 14 gauge #304 stainless steel including the mounting base and

fastening hardware with #4 polished finish. The system enclosure shall be

vandal and weather resistant. The enclosure shall be low profile hinged top

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 485

THE “WHITEBOOK”

design with padlock provision. The cover shall be secured to the concrete pad

with stainless steel hardware.

13. Power, low voltage, and plumbing connections shall be contained within the

enclosure and shall be fully grounded (with grounding rod).

14. Unless specified otherwise, pump assembly shall include the following

options:

a) Top of Form.

b) Hydraulically controlled, diaphragm actuated pressure-regulating

valve, cast iron bronze trim with epoxy coated body, equipped with

flow clean strainer option. Valve shall provide constant downstream

pressure regardless of pump discharge pressure.

c) Low suction pressure switch mounted on suction manifold and

interconnected to time delay relay adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes to

shut down pump on low suction pressure.

d) High temperature non-adjustable thermostat mounted on pump

discharge to shut down pump on heat buildup in pump casing due to

no-flow situations. Set for 130° F (54.4° C).

e) Electrical current measurement control sensor switch mounted in

control panel to shut down pump on loss of suction fluid or loss of

prime.

15. A factory trained service professional shall be required on the site to certify

proper installation, perform the startup, and instruct operating personnel. A

startup report containing voltage and amperage readings, suction and

discharge pressure readings, estimated flow conditions, and general operating

characteristics shall be submitted to the Engineer.

16. Four (4) physical copies and 1 electronic copy of the operating and

maintenance manuals shall be provided to the Engineer after startup and shall

include parts manuals for components, performance curves for pumps,

general sequences of operations, and electrical schematics for control panels.

800-2.3 Backflow Preventer Assemblies. ADD the following:

1. Include the installation of backflow preventer enclosures in accordance with

800-2.2.15, “Backflow Preventer Enclosure”.

800-2.4 Sprinkler Equipment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Sprinkler heads, bubbler heads, and spray nozzles shall be of the types and sizes

shown on the Plans. Equipment of one type and flow characteristics shall be from

the same manufacturer and all equipment shall bear the manufacturer’s name

and identification code in a position where they can be identified in the installed

position.

2. Fixed heads, shrubbery heads, and bubbler heads shall have adjustable radius

control.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 486

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

800-2.4.1 Low Flow Irrigation Equipment.

800-2.4.1.1 Pressure Regulator/Filter Combination Unit.

1. Pressure regulator/filter combination units shall be as indicated on the Plans.

The pressure regulator shall be pre-set to the manufacturer’s specifications.

The filter shall be a basket type or “wye” type with a stainless steel screen. The

unit shall be serviceable without removal of the unit from the drip valve

assembly. The inlet size shall be 1 inch (25 mm) IPT. The pressure

regulator/filter combination unit along with the remote control valve shall fit

within a standard concrete valve box.

800-2.4.1.2 Pressure Regulator.

1. Pressure regulators shall be preset in line regulators set not to exceed the

manufacturer’s pressure rating of the emitter head or drip tubing. Pressure

regulators shall be constructed of high-impact thermoplastic with fixed

stainless steel compression spring housed in separate chamber from the

normal water flow. The size shall be as specified on the Plans.

800-2.4.1.3 Filter.

1. Filters shall be provided in each valve servicing low flow irrigation systems.

The filter shall be line-size with 2 piece threaded housing with O-ring seal

molded from high heat. The filter shall be chemical resistant ABS plastic and

shall have a ball flush valve connected. The filter screen shall be stainless steel

with 150 mesh size (100 Micron) with the collar molded from vinyl.

800-2.4.1.4 Air Relief Valve.

1. The air relief valve shall be located at the highest end of each lateral for low

flow irrigation systems. Air relief valve shall be manufactured from non-

corrosive material with ½ inch (12.7 mm) male pipe thread. Maximum

operating pressure shall be 100 psi (690 kPa).

800-2.4.1.5 Flush Valve.

1. Flush valve shall automatically operate at the start of each irrigation cycle. The

flushing water volume shall be 1 gallon (3.8 L) per cycle.

800-2.4.1.6 Drip Emitter.

1. The emitters shall uniformly regulate the water discharged from each port at

the rate specified on the plans. The emitter shall be multi-outlet made of UV

resistant polymer and resistant to impact and high temperature. Unless

otherwise specified, the emitter shall have a minimum of 6 independent

barbed outlet ports that are mounted on the bottom of the device and that

securely retain ¼ inch (6.4 mm) distribution tubing. The body shall have a ½

inch (12.7 mm) female pipe thread connection.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 487

THE “WHITEBOOK”

800-2.4.1.7 Drip Tubing.

1. The distribution drip tubing shall be constructed from UV resistant polyethylene

materials. The drip tubing shall be secured with 4 inch (101.6 mm) minimum

length tubing stake and constructed of UV-resistant plastic material sized to

accommodate the drip tubing. Tubing shall be installed with protective

distribution cap (Bug Cap). Bug Cap shall have a barb inlet and a flanged shield.

The barb inlet shall fit into ¼ inch (6.4 mm) distribution tubing with ID of 0.16

inches (4.1 mm). The flanged shield of the Bug Cap shall diffuse water to

minimize soil erosion at emission point. The Bug Cap shall be made of

polyethylene.

2. Drip tubing shall conform to the following:

a) ¼ inch (6.4 mm) tubing designed for use with all drip systems.

b) 60 psi (413.7 kPa) rating.

c) Compatible with all ¼ inch (6.4 mm) transfer fittings and all barbed

outlet ports.

ADD:

800-2.5 Extra Equipment to Be Furnished.

1. You shall provide the following to the City prior to the final Acceptance, unless

otherwise specified on the Plans or Special Provisions:

a) Five (5) irrigation heads with nozzles of each type used for every 100

irrigation heads or portions thereof.

b) Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and

adjusting each type of sprinkler and valve supplied on the project.

c) Two (2) sets of 5 foot (1.5 m) valve keys for every 20 gate valves

installed or portions thereof.

d) Two (2) sets of keys for each automatic controller, locking valve box,

and locking quick coupler.

e) Two (2) sets of keys for each pump.

f) Two (2) sets of valve keys for every 20 quick coupler assemblies

installed or portions thereof.

800-3.2.1 Conduit. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall conform to the requirements of the UL

Standard for Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit, Publication UL 651 (PVC Schedule 80)

and UL 651B (HDPE). Rigid non-metallic conduit connections shall be of the

solvent weld type. For underground installation, conduit shall be UL approved

heavy wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC Schedule 40) unless specified otherwise

on the Plans or Special Provisions.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 488

THE “WHITEBOOK”

800-3.2.2 Conductors. ADD the following:

1. #14 AWG control wires shall be color coded per station as follows:

a) 1 Yellow

b) 2 Orange

c) 3 Blue

d) 4 Black

e) 5 Brown

f) 6 Purple

g) 7 Yellow w/ Black stripe

h) 8 Orange w/ Black stripe

i) 9 Red w/ Black stripe

j) 10 White w/ Red stripe

k) 11 Yellow w/ Red stripe

l) 12 Blue w/ Red stripe

m) 13 Orange w/ Red stripe

n) 14 Purple w/ White stripe

o) 15 Brown w/ White stripe

p) 16 Yellow w/ White stripe

q) 17 Blue w/ White stripe

r) 18 Red w/ White stripe

Repeat the color pattern for valves 19 through 36 and valves 37 through 54.

2. Spare Wires: Spare wires shall be color coded Red, 14 AWG. Provide two spare

wires from the irrigation controller to the furthest valve manifold on each main

line branch. Loop the spare wires into at least one valve box on each valve

manifold. Provide a two-foot loop.

3. A manufactured weatherproof plastic identification tag showing the irrigation

controller and station shall be affixed to the colored conductor wire in each

valve and pull box.

4. Common Wires: Common wires shall be color coded White, #12 AWG.

5. Wire Bundles: Tape wire bundles with colored vinyl electrical tape 10 feet (3

m) OC. Use different color tape for each controller.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 489

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

800-3.2.2.1 Wire Connectors.

1. Wire connectors for direct burial irrigation control wires of 30 volts or less shall

be capable to accommodate #18, #14, #12 and #10 gauge wire sizes and shall

be designed to ensure waterproof connections. The wire connector kit shall

contain a UL and CSA listed copper crimp sleeve, polyethylene connector body,

and polyethylene connector plug. The connector plug shall be filled with blue

color self-curing epoxy resin sealant immediately prior to assembly of the wire

connector to fully waterproof the connection.

2. Wire connectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Wires shall be crimped and soldered together and

inspected by the Engineer prior to placement into the wire connector plug and

sealant.

3. Wire in pull boxes shall be loose and shall not come within 3 inches (76.2 mm)

from the lid. Boxes shall be sized accordingly to accommodate this

requirement.

ADD:

800-3.2.2.2 Wire Solder.

1. Wire solder shall be 60% tin and 40% lead alloy wire with internal flux capable

of quickly turning from a solid state to a liquid state when heated and capable

of quickly returning to a solid state upon cooling.

ADD:

800-3.2.2.3 Trench Marker Tape.

1. Trench marker tape for irrigation systems (for water lines and electrical wiring)

shall be 3 inches wide and consist of a minimum 5.0 mil overall thickness with

a 0.35 mil solid aluminum foil core. Marker tape shall be acid, alkaline and

corrosion resistant. Lettering shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm) height minimum.

Marker tape shall be installed in accordance with Standard Drawing SDM-105,

“Warning/Identification Tape Installation,” SDM-110, “Irrigation Trench PVC or

Copper Pipe,” and SDI-119, “Control Wire Installation.

ADD:

800-3.4 Pull Boxes Materials.

1. Pull boxes shall be constructed of precast concrete.

2. Covers shall be cast iron with a non-corrosive metal self-locking device

connected with stainless steel bolts and self-locking nuts. Covers shall be

permanently and legibly labeled with 100% acrylic epoxy white or yellow

waterproof paint on the top of the box indicating the component contained in

the box. The Contractor shall replace the clevis pin with a marine grade

stainless steel nut and bolt. The assembly shall be greased to prevent

corrosion.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 490

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 801 – INSTALLATION

801-1 GENERAL. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. This section includes specifications for the preparation, planting, and irrigation

system construction for landscape areas shown on the Plans.

2. Unless otherwise specified, walls, curbs, planter boxes, walks, irrigation

systems, and similar improvements shall be constructed following rough

grading and before landscaping and irrigation work.

3. Work on the irrigation system including hydrostatic tests, backfill and

densification of trenches, and other excavations shall be performed before

topsoil placement. Preliminary operational tests of the automatic control

system and coverage tests shall be performed after topsoil placement.

4. Trees or shrubs which have been identified to remain as shown on the Plans

shall be protected in accordance with Section 400-3, “Tree Protection During

Construction”.

801-2.2.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Unless otherwise specified on the Plans or Special Provisions, the topsoil

shall be Class A and shall be 15 inches (381 mm) thick.

2. Planting areas shall be free of weeds and other extraneous materials to a

depth of 12 inches (304.8 mm) below finish grade before topsoil Work.

3. Soil shall not be worked when it is so wet or so dry as to cause excessive

compaction or the forming of hard clods or dust.

4. The existing soil below subgrade for Class “A” and Class “B” topsoils shall be

scarified in a cross pattern to a depth of 6 inches (152.4 mm) prior to

placement of topsoil. Stones over 1 inch (25.4 mm) in greatest dimension shall

be removed from the scarified area. The subgrade depth shall be verified by

the Engineer prior to topsoil import.

5. Class “C” topsoil shall be scarified and cultivated to a finely divided condition to a

depth of 8 inches (203.2 mm) minimum below finish grade. During this operation,

all stones over 1 inch (25.4 mm) in greatest dimension shall be removed.

6. The soil shall be prepared in accordance with the recommendations of the soil

analysis results stated in 800-1.1.2, “Class ‘A’ Topsoil”.

801-2.2.2 Fertilizing and Conditioning Procedures. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with the following:

1. The planting area shall be brought to finish grade before spreading the fertilizers or

soil conditioning materials specified in the soil test recommendations.

2. If leeching is required per the recommendations of the soil test recommendations,

amendments shall be blended into the soil prior to leeching. Leeching shall be

performed until analysis results are in compliance with agriculture suitability

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 491

THE “WHITEBOOK”

standards. Soil amendment materials shall be uniformly spread at the prescribed

rate as recommended in the soil test recommendations.

3. The quantities of materials necessary for the planting areas shall be at the

Work site and verified by delivery tickets furnished to the Engineer before

spreading.

4. After spreading, the soil amendments shall be cultivated into the upper 15

inches (381 mm) of soil by suitable equipment operated in at least 2 directions

at right angles.

5. The resulting soil shall be in a friable condition.

6. All planting areas shall be fertilized in a uniform manner at the application rate

identified in the soil analysis recommendations.

7. Fertilization of turf areas shall be accomplished by uniformly spreading 50%

of the specified quantity in one direction. The remaining 50% of the fertilizer

quantity shall be spread perpendicular to the previous direction, immediately

after the initial application. Each of the applications shall be spread uniformly

in parallel, overlapping passes, to provide uniform results.

801-2.3 Finish Grading. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Finish Grading shall provide a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,

uniformly fine texture. Roll, drag and rake to remove ridges, and fill depressions

to meet finish grades. Rake out and remove all rocks and material 1/2-inch size

and larger. Prior to approval, remove ridges greater than 1/2 inch and fill

depressions greater than 1/2 inch within a 100 sq. ft. (10-foot x 10-foot) area.

2. Finish grades shall be as indicated on the Plans.

3. Finish grades shall be measured at the top surface of surface materials.

4. Molding and rounding of the grades shall be provided at all changes of slope.

5. Take every precaution to protect and avoid damage to new and existing

sprinkler heads, irrigation lines, and other underground utilities during

grading and conditioning operations.

6. Finish grades shall be acceptable to Engineer before planting operations begin.

7. Finish grade shall ensure positive drainage of the site with all surface drainage

away from buildings, other structures, and walls with flow towards storm

drains and catch basins.

8. General planting areas shall be graded with no less than 2 percent surface

slope for positive drainage.

9. Sports Field turf areas (softball fields, baseball fields and multi-purpose fields)

shall be graded with a 1.5% minimum and 2% maximum surface slope for

positive drainage unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Sports Fields

shall be laser graded in accordance with the Sports Turf Managers Association

pamphlet “Laser Grading Sports Fields” available at www.STMA.org.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 492

THE “WHITEBOOK”

10. Compact blended planting soil to 80 percent minimum to 85 percent

maximum of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698

unless otherwise shown on Plans.

11. The finish grade adjacent to paving, curbs, or headers shall be ½ inch

(12.7 mm) in lawn areas and 3 inches (76.2 mm) in shrub and groundcover

areas.

801-3 HEADER INSTALLATION. To paragraph (2), DELETE in its entirety.

801-4.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The types, sizes, and quantities of plant materials shall be as specified in the

Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.

2. All plants shall be reviewed and approved prior to planting, including plants

previously approved at the nursery. You shall be responsible for the condition

of all plants, planted or otherwise, until the completion of the Work.

3. Planting shall be performed with materials, equipment, and procedures

favorable to the optimum growth of the plants and in compliance with these

procedures.

4. Except as noted for specimen planting, all planting shall follow the completion

of the irrigation system.

5. Soil shall be fertilized prior to planting per the recommendations of the soil

analysis results.

6. Application of the herbicides shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.

801-4.2 Protection and Storage. ADD the following:

1. Sun sensitive plants shall be stored in the shade or screened from the sun.

2. Stolons and sod shall not be delivered to the site until the site is ready for

immediate installation.

801-4.3 Layout and Plant Location. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Prior to planting, perform a detailed layout within the planting areas to be

approved by the Engineer.

2. The first row of plants in areas designated for center-to-center spacing of

plants shall be located at one-half of designated spacing form the edge of the

area unless specified otherwise on the Plans or Special Provisions.

3. Plants shall be located to prevent irrigation blockage.

801-4.5 Tree and Shrub Planting. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Planting holes shall be the depth of and twice the width of the plant container

or ball and shall be larger, if necessary, to permit handling and planting

without injury or breakage of the root ball or root system. Any plant with a

broken or cracked root ball before or during planting shall not be planted.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 493

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Plant holes shall not be augured. This produces a smooth wall that deters

lateral root growth. Smooth edges shall be scarified prior to planting.

3. Containers shall be removed in such a manner that the roots are not injured.

Balled plant wrappings shall be loosened or cut back after the plant is

positioned in the planting hole.

4. The native soil at the bottom and sides of planting holes shall be scarified.

5. Prepared backfill mix for shrub planting shall consist of 20% to 40% by volume

of Type 1, 2, or 3 organic soil amendments mixed with native soil, depending

on soil conditions at each site, as approved by the Engineer. On projects

requiring soil analysis of native soil, backfill mix shall be determined by the

recommendation of the soil analysis results and as approved by the Engineer.

6. Planting installation shall conform to the following requirements:

a) The bottom of the planting pit shall be compacted.

b) The plant shall be set at the approximate center of the hole and plumb

so that the crown of the plant is 1 inch (25.4 mm) above finish grade.

c) Backfill shall be added in 6-inch (152.4 mm) lifts and shall be hand

tamped to finish grade.

d) The backfill shall be thoroughly water-settled and additional backfill

added to fill any remaining void below finish grade.

e) After the water has drained, the specified number of fertilizer tablets

shall be placed in the planting hole in the presence of the Engineer.

f) A circular watering basin shall be constructed at the edge of the tree

planting pit. The basin berm shall be 4 inches (101.6 mm) high. The

bottom of the basin shall be at approximate finish grade or slightly lower.

The specified mulch shall be spread at least 3 inches (76.2 mm) thick in

the basin leaving 3 inches (76.2 mm) of clearance around the base of

shrubs and 4 inches (101.6 mm) at tree trunks.

7. Basins of planted container material shall not be planted or seeded.

8. After planting, the plant shall be plumb, with the root crown 1 inch (25.4 mm)

above finish grade.

801-4.6.1 Method “A” Tree Staking. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

801-4.6.1 Tree Staking.

1. Trees shall be staked with the type and length of stake in accordance with 800-

1.5.3, “Tree Stakes”. Tree ties shall be in accordance with 800-1.5.4, “Tree Ties”.

801-4.6.2 Method “B” Tree Staking. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

801-4.6.2 Guying.

1. Guying shall be done as specified on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 494

THE “WHITEBOOK”

801-4.6.3 Guying. DELETE in its entirety.

801-4.7 Ground Cover and Vine Planting. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. Soil preparation and fine grading shall be completed prior to ground cover

planting.

2. Ground cover and vines shall be planted in moist soil and spaced as indicated

on the Plans. Soil shall be moist within the total root zone of the material being

planted.

3. Each plant shall be planted with its proportionate amount of container soil to

minimize root disturbance. Soil moisture shall be such that the soil does not

crumble when removing plants.

4. Following planting, ground cover and vine areas shall be regarded to restore

smooth finish grade and to ensure proper surface drainage. A 3-inch (76.2

mm) layer of the specified mulch shall be spread over the planted areas unless

specified otherwise.

5. When necessary to prevent plant damage from pedestrian traffic during the

initial growing stage, erect temporary protective fencing to be removed at the

end of the Plant Establishment Period.

6. Vines shall be tied to walls, fences, etc., in the manner prescribed in the plans.

801-4.8.2 Seed. To paragraph (2), subsection “a”, “Method A”, ADD the following:

The soil shall be moist for a depth of 6 inches (152.4 mm) before planting. If not, prior

to planting the soil shall be watered to a depth of 8 inches (203.2 mm) and allowed to

dry out to the point soil is moist and shall support labor and equipment without

damage or undue compaction to soil and finish grade.

To paragraph (5), subsection “b”, “Method B”, DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE

with the following:

b) Method B. The seed, fertilizer, fiber, and other materials in the slurry mixture

shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans. All

materials shall be of such character that they shall disperse into a uniform

slurry when mixed with water. The mixture shall be such that an absorbent

and porous mat shall be formed. All materials shall be available for inspection

prior to application. Weights and contents of containers shall be clearly

identified. A green coloring additive shall be used in the slurry for visual

inspection purposes. The slurry shall be applied under pressure at the

specified rates. Areas to be planted by this method shall be moistened to a

depth of 6 inches (152.4 mm). The slurry planted areas shall be kept moist

during the germination period, but ponding shall be avoided.

i. Application Rates for Type 11 (Wood Fiber) Mulch. When specified,

Apply Type 11 (Wood Fiber) Mulch in the locations, rates, and number

of applications shown in the Contract Documents and as follows:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 495

THE “WHITEBOOK”

• Apply in successive passes as necessary to achieve the

required application rate. Form a continuous uniform mat with

no gaps between the mat and the soil surface.

• Apply in two or more directions.

• Mulch application rate shall be 2,000 lbs. per acre.

• Binder application rate shall be 150 lbs. per acre.

• Fertilizer application rate shall be in accordance with the soil

analysis recommendations unless otherwise specified.

• Seed application rate and type shall be specified in the

Contract Documents and/or as specified by the Project

Biologist, when applicable.

ii. Application Rates for Type 13 Hydro-mulch (bonded fiber matrix).

When specified, Apply Type 13 Hydro-mulch (bonded fiber matrix) in

the locations, rates, and number of applications shown in the Contract

Documents and as follows:

• Apply in successive passes as necessary to achieve the

required application rate. Form a continuous uniform mat with

no gaps between the mat and the soil surface.

• Apply in two or more directions.

• Mulch application rate shall be 3,500 lbs. (including the binder)

per acre unless specified otherwise.

• Fertilizer application rate shall be in accordance with the soil

analysis recommendations unless otherwise specified.

• Seed application rate and type shall be specified in the

Contract Documents and/or as specified by the Project

Biologist, when applicable.

ADD the following:

1. Lawn Seed application rate shall be 10 lbs. per 1,000 square feet.

2. Mow lawn areas planted from seed in accordance with the schedule listed

below. Cross cut mow if required to achieve a uniformly smooth lawn surface.

After mowing at 60 Calendar Days the Engineer will determined if lawn areas

need to be re-rolled to achieve a smooth lawn surface. Re-roll as directed by

the Engineer between 60 and 75 Calendar Days after seed installation. Roll as

required with a one-ton ride-on double drum roller to provide a uniformly

smooth lawn surface.

a) First mowing at 60 Calendar Days after installation of seed at a height

of 3 inches (76.2 mm) using a rotary mower.

b) Second mowing at 75 Calendar Days after installation of sod at a height

of 2 inches (50.8 mm) using a reel mower.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 496

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) Third mowing at 90 Calendar Days after installation of sod at a height

of 2 inches (50.8 mm) using a reel mower.

d) Weekly for the remainder of the PEP at a height of 1.5 inches (38.1 mm)

using a reel mower.

801-4.8.3 Sod. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. The type of sod and the areas to be sodded shall be shown on the Plans or

specified in the Special Provisions.

2. Subgrade for sod (topsoil elevation) shall be the specified thickness of the sod

below finish grade. Soil preparation and fine grading shall be completed

before sodding. Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil

according to Agricultural Soil Testing Lab Recommendations. Remove existing

turfgrass, vegetation, surplus soil and waste material, and legally dispose of

them. Do not mix into surface soil.

3. Adjust elevation of planting soil to allow for thickness of sod. Pay special

attention to soil height at irrigation valve boxes, irrigation heads, quick

couplers and mow curbs. Ensure soil is sufficiently compacted and at the

correct elevation.

4. With the exception of equipment required to install rolled sod, no heavy

equipment shall operate over the subgrade after grading is completed.

5. Sod shall be installed within 24 hours after cutting.

6. Soil surface shall be uniformly smooth and shall have a consistent slope or

elevation with no more than 1/2-inch (12.7 mm) deviation within a 100 sq. ft.

(10 ft. x 10 ft.) area. Soil surface shall be free of depressions, pits, and high

spots.

7. Before planting, obtain Engineer acceptance of finish grading to a uniform

smooth soil surface and soil moisture content. Restore planting areas if

eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

8. The subgrade shall be moist but not wet when sod is laid. Sod shall be laid with

closely fitted joints and the ends of the strips shall be staggered. Gaps between

sod pieces will not be accepted. Openings shall be plugged with sod or topsoil.

9. Avoid damage to soil or sod during installation.

10. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 6:1 with steel staples spaced as

recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod

strip to prevent slippage. Lay sod parallel to contours in sloped areas.

11. Within 2 hours after installing sod and before rolling, the sod shall be lightly

irrigated. All seams and joints shall then be rolled until the sod is bonded to

the subgrade.

12. Lawn Surface shall be uniformly smooth and shall have a consistent slope or

elevation with no more than 1/2-inch deviation within a 100 sq. ft. (10 ft. x 10

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 497

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ft.) area. Lawn surface shall be free of depressions, pits, and high spots. Level

of installed sod shall be flush with adjacent surfaces.

13. The areas shall then be watered thoroughly to penetrate the subgrade at least

6 inches (152.4 mm). Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep the sod

moist until rooted into the subgrade.

14. Apply fertilizer at installation per sod supplier recommendations.

15. Sodded areas shall be protected against foot traffic through the Plant

Establishment Period.

16. Within 1 week after laying sod, work fine sand into minor cracks between

pieces of sod or minor depressions that were not otherwise identified and

remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. Sand depth shall

not exceed ¼ inch (6.35 mm). Continue to incrementally sand any low areas

weekly during plant establishment and maintenance periods.

17. If, upon installation, it is identified that areas of sod were installed too high or

too low adjacent to mow curbs, valve boxes, irrigation heads, quick couplers,

catch basins or other items, immediately rectify condition by pulling up sod

and adding or removing approved topsoil to achieve desired elevations.

Assure topsoil at adjusted areas is sufficiently compacted.

18. Mow lawn areas planted from sod in accordance with the schedule listed

below. Cross cut mow if required to achieve a uniformly smooth lawn surface.

After mowing at 30 Calendar Days the Engineer will determined if lawn areas

need to be re-rolled to achieve a smooth lawn surface. Re-roll as directed by

the Engineer between 30 and 45 Calendar Days after sod installation. Roll as

required with a one-ton ride-on double drum roller to provide a uniformly

smooth turf surface.

a) First mowing at 30 Calendar Days after installation of sod at a height

of 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) using a rotary mower.

b) Second mowing at 45 Calendar Days after installation of sod at a height

of 2 inches (50.8 mm) using a reel mower.

c) Third mowing at 60 Calendar Days after installation of sod at a height

of 2 inches (50.8 mm) using a reel mower.

d) Weekly for the remainder of the PEP at a height of 1.5 inches (38.1 mm)

using a reel mower.

19. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 3:1.

20. Contractor shall water new turf areas per the sod manufacturer’s

recommendations for proper turf establishment.

801-4.8.4 Stolon Planting. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Topsoil preparation and finish grading shall be completed before stolon

planting.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 498

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. The area to be planted in stolons shall be thoroughly irrigated to a depth of at

least 6 inches (152.4 mm) before planting.

3. At the time of planting, the top 2 inches (50.8 mm) of soil shall be friable and

shall contain enough moisture to prevent stolons from drying out during the

planting operation. The stolons shall be worked into the soil to a depth of ½

inch to 1½ inches (12.7 mm to 38.1 mm) by a mechanical or hand planter, or

broadcast by hand and covered with ¼ inch (6.4 mm) of topdressing mulch.

4. When the area to be planted exceeds 10,000 ft

(929 m

), a mechanical

spreader shall be used. When less than 10,000 ft

(929 m

) and more than

2,000 ft

(185.8 m

), the use of a hand planter or mechanical planter is optional.

When less than 2,000 ft

(185.8 m

), hand planting or broadcasting with mulch

is optional.

a) Hydrostolon Application Rate.

i. Stolons shall be of the variety specified in the Contract

Documents and shall be applied at a rate of 5 US bushels per

1,000 square feet.

ii. Mulch shall be applied at a rate of 2,000 lbs. per acre.

iii. Fertilization application rate shall be as recommended in the

soil analysis recommendations, unless specified otherwise.

5. The planted stolons shall not be allowed to dry out. Watering shall begin

immediately after planting and the stolons shall be kept moist at all times

throughout the Plant Establishment Period.

6. When overseeding is required, the seed shall be spread as shown on the Plans.

7. Mow lawn areas planted from stolons in accordance with the schedule listed

below. Cross cut mow if required to achieve a uniformly smooth lawn surface.

After mowing at 60 Calendar Days the Engineer will determined if lawn areas

need to be re-rolled to achieve a smooth lawn surface. Re-roll as directed by

the Engineer between 60 and 75 Calendar Days after stolon installation. Roll

as required with a one-ton ride-on double drum roller to provide a uniformly

smooth lawn surface.

a) First mowing at 60 Calendar Days after installation of seed at a height

of 3 inches (76.2 mm) using a rotary mower.

b) Second mowing at 75 Calendar Days after installation of sod at a height

of 2 inches (50.8 mm) using a reel mower.

c) Third mowing at 90 Calendar Days after installation of sod at a height

of 2 inches (50.8 mm) using a reel mower.

d) Weekly for the remainder of the PEP at a height of 1.5 inches (38.1 mm)

using a reel mower.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 499

THE “WHITEBOOK”

801-5.1 General. To paragraph (2), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

You shall be responsible for furnishing the labor and materials for the utility

connections. Utility connections shall be as shown on the Plan or designated by the

utility company.

ADD the following:

1. The installation of the irrigation system shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions unless specified otherwise.

801-5.2 Trench Excavation and Backfill. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. Trenches and other excavations shall be sized to accommodate the irrigation

system components, conduit, and other required facilities. Additional space

shall be provided to assure proper installation and access for inspection.

2. The minimum depth for conduits containing low voltage control wire or

communications wire shall be 21 inches (533.4 mm). Conduit shall be located

with irrigation pressure mains wherever possible.

3. The bottom of trenches shall be true to grade and free of protruding stones,

roots, or other matter which would prevent proper bedding of pipe or other

facilities.

4. Trenches and excavations shall be backfilled so that the specified thickness of

topsoil is restored to the upper part of the trench. Backfill shall be jetted in

accordance with 306-12.4, “Jetted Trench Backfill”. Other methods of

compacting backfill may be approved by the Engineer.

5. Trenches through paved areas shall be resurfaced in accordance with 306-13,

“TRENCH RESURFACING”.

801-5.3.1 General. To paragraph (2), sentence (2), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with

the following:

The pipe shall be surrounded with SE 50 plaster or mortar sand material per 200-1.5.5,

“Sand Gradations”.

To Paragraph (3), ADD the following:

Irrigation mainlines, valves, and supporting equipment shall be located in the planting

areas. Unless otherwise specified no parallel pressure pipelines shall be installed

within 1 foot (0.3 m) of each other.

801-5.3.2 Steel Pipeline. To paragraph (3), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

Joints shall be made with a non-toxic and non-hardening joint compound or Teflon

tape and applied to the male threads only.

801-5.3.3 Plastic Pipeline. ADD the following:

1. Tees shall be installed horizontally at the connection with the main line.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 500

THE “WHITEBOOK”

801-5.3.4 Copper Pipeline. ADD the following:

1. Copper pipe shall have a straight butt square edge with all burrs and fins

removed.

801-5.4 Installation of Valves, Valve boxes, and Special Equipment. DELETE in its entirety

and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. All irrigation equipment, except sprinkler heads and bubblers, shall be located

a minimum of 10 feet (3 m) away from all tree locations. All irrigation

equipment, except sprinkler heads and bubblers, shall be placed in shrub beds

unless otherwise specified.

2. Valves and other equipment shall be installed in a normal upright position

unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, and shall be readily

accessible for operation, maintenance, and replacement.

3. Valves shall be the same size as the pipeline in which they are to serve unless

otherwise shown on the Plans.

4. Isolation valves shall be installed at line depth and shall be equipped with a

sleeve centered on the valve stem. 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller globe valves

shall be in 2-inch (50.8 mm) diameter PVC Schedule 40 sleeves with locking

metal lids in accordance with the Standard Drawings. Isolation valves 2½ (63.5

mm) inch and larger shall be in a 6-inch (152.4 mm) PVC sleeve-centered in a

locking valve box in accordance with the Standard Drawings and 800-2.2.7,

“Valve Boxes”.

5. Quick coupler valves projecting above grade shall be 12 inch (304.8 mm) from

curbs, pavement, and walks. In ground cover and shrubbery areas, quick

coupler valves shall be set 3 inches (76.2 mm) above finish grade. Quick

couplers in lawn areas shall be installed flush with finish grade.

6. Valve boxes and pipe sleeves with caps shall be set to finish grade.

7. Backflow preventers shall be provided with pipe supports and the accessories

necessary to properly secure the assembly.

801-5.5.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Mains and laterals, including risers, shall be flushed and pressure tested

before installing swing joints and sprinkler heads, after which a water coverage

test shall be performed.

801-5.5.2 Location, Elevation, and Spacing. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

1. Sprinkler head spacing shall not exceed the maximum shown on the Plans or

recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Lawn sprinklers shall be installed 3 inches (76.2 mm) clear of adjacent walks,

curbs, paving, headers, and similar improvements, unless otherwise specified.

3. Sprinkler heads shall be installed 24 inches (609.6 mm) from adjacent vertical

elements projecting above grade such as walls, planter boxes, and fences.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 501

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. Sprinkler heads and nozzles on risers shall be installed 12 inches (304.8 mm)

above finish grade, unless otherwise specified.

5. Nozzle lines projecting above finish grade shall be at least 6 inches (152.4 mm)

from adjacent curbs, walk, paving, and similar improvements.

6. Sprinkler heads located adjacent to pavement that do not drain into the

landscaping shall be located a minimum of 24 inches (609.6 mm) away from

the edge of pavement.

801-5.5.3 Riser and Nozzle Line Installation. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the

following:

801-5.5.3 Riser Installation.

1. Risers shall be oriented perpendicular to finish grade.

2. Sprinkler head risers shall be installed as shown on the Plans.

801-5.5.4 Sprinkler Head Adjustment. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. When all sprinkler heads are installed and the irrigation system is operating,

each irrigation station shall be adjusted, with control valves fully open, to

obtain “head-to-head” irrigation coverage.

2. Sprinkler heads having adjustable pin nozzles or orifices shall have the pins

adjusted to a maximum 25% radius reduction to provide uniform distribution

of water over the coverage area. Non-adjustable sprinkler nozzles may require

substitutions of smaller or larger nozzle cores as directed by the Engineer.

3. A water audit of the irrigation system shall be required as specified in the

Special Provisions.

801-5.6 Automatic Control System Installation. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with

the following:

1. You shall install a complete automatic irrigation control system including the

automatic controller, remote control valves and wiring, and all necessary

accessories and utility service connection.

2. Stand-Alone Irrigation Controller: The installation of the automatic controller

shall be certified by the manufacturer upon the completion of installation.

The automatic controller shall be installed outside of the coverage pattern of

the irrigation system at the location shown on the Plans. Each controller shall

have a power ON/OFF switch, with lock-out and tag-out capability and shall

have a separate circuit breaker. The foundation for the controller shall be

concrete, as specified in 201-1, “PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE”, of the size

shown on the Plans or recommended by the manufacturer. The control

components in the controller shall be fused and the chassis shall be

grounded. Remote control valves shall be compatible with the automatic

controller.

3. Irrigation Controller inside Structure: When specified on the plans the

irrigation controller assembly shall be wall-mounted within a maintenance,

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 502

THE “WHITEBOOK”

storage or electrical room as indicated. The irrigation controller assembly

shall be on a stainless steel backboard panel securely anchored to the

building wall. The installation of the automatic controller shall be certified by

the manufacturer upon the completion of installation. Each controller shall

have a power ON/OFF switch, with lock-out and tag-out capability and shall

have a separate circuit breaker. The control components in the controller

shall be fused and the chassis shall be grounded. Remote control valves shall

be compatible with the automatic controller.

4. For the purpose of these specifications, service shall include all material and

equipment necessary to complete the electrical connection between the

terminating point of the serving utility and the irrigation controller. A

separate disconnect switch and circuit breaker shall be installed between the

source of power and the controller. The minimum service wire shall be No.

12 AWG copper 600 volt type TW, TWH or TWHH or larger as required by the

Contract Documents or controller manufacturer. Wire splices shall be

located only in specified pull boxes and shall be made with a packaged

waterproof kit approved for underground use. Pull boxes shall be set on an

un-mortared brick foundation to finish grade in lawn areas and 3 inches (76.2

mm) above finished grade in mulch areas.

5. Control wiring shall be color coded in accordance with 800-3.2.2, “Conductors”.

Unless otherwise specified, all control wiring shall be direct burial, Type UF,

No. 14 AWG copper. At least 2 feet (0.6 m) of slack shall be left at each splice

and point of connection in pull boxes and valve boxes. Wire splices shall be

located in specified pull boxes spaced at maximums of 300 feet (91.4 m).

6. All wiring shall be tested for continuity, open circuits, and unintentional

grounds prior to connecting to equipment. The minimum insulation resistance

to the ground shall be 50 megaohms. In multiple controller installations, the

common control wires shall be separate for each controller. Multiple

controller enclosures shall be sized accordingly. 110 volt wire runs shall not

pass from controller to controller. Each controller shall have a separate

electrical service and circuit breaker through an individual raceway.

7. Upon completion of the Work, a legible reduced copy of the As-Built irrigation

Plans provided by the Engineer shall be color coded by irrigation station,

laminated in plastic, and placed on the inside of each controller enclosure. The

outside of each controller enclosure shall be identified per the Plans with a

black, permanent 2 inch (50.8 mm) stencil. The location of the controller

identification shall be as approved by the Engineer. The color-coded

operational chart shall include the location of the circuit breaker and water

meter feeding the controller. Each installed remote control valve shall be color

coded to its parent controller.

801-5.7.2.1 General. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Pressure testing for leakage shall be performed on newly installed supply

lines, pressure mains, and laterals, except for non-ridged pipelines and

pipelines with spray nozzles installed into the pipe.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 503

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Pressure testing shall be done with all in-line isolation valves, manifold

isolation valves, quick coupling valves and remote-control valves installed. All

gate valves and globe valves shall be completely open. Remote-control valves

shall be completely open with the outlet side capped off.

3. Irrigation lateral line testing (downstream of the control valve) shall be done

with all solvent weld fittings in place. Connections for sprinkler head

assemblies (swing joint assemblies) shall be capped.

4. Pipelines installed by trenching and backfilling and pipelines which are

completely visible after installation shall be tested in accordance with

801-5.7.2.2, “Pipeline Pressure Test Method.”

5. Backfilling of trenches shall not occur prior to pressure testing. Center loading

of the pipes is allowed provided all joints are completely exposed for

observation.

801-5.7.2.2 Method A. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

801-5.7.2.2 Pipeline Pressure Test Method.

1. Pressure testing for leakage shall conform to the following procedure:

a) Notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to performing a pressure

test. Pressure tests shall be performed such that the test periods are

within the working hours specified in the Special Provisions. The

Engineer shall observe each pressure test.

b) Before any portion of the pipeline on the supply side of a control valve

is backfilled, water shall be turned on into that portion of the line and

maintained at full pressure as described in the table below from the

water source for a period of not less than 4 consecutive hours after air

has been expelled from the line.

c) Before any portion of the pipeline on the discharge side of control

valve is backfilled, a similar test shall be performed, except the test

shall be for a period of 2 hours as described in the table below. Leaks

that develop in a tested portion of the system shall be repaired. After

the leaks have been repaired, the pressure test shall be repeated.

Additional repairs shall be made until no leaks occur.

d) The constant test pressure shall be as follows:

Pressurized Mains

125 psi (861.8 kPa) 4 hours

Non-pressurized Laterals 100 psi (689.5 kPa) 2 hours

801-5.7.2.3 Method B. DELETE in its entirety.

801-5.7.3 Sprinkler Coverage Test. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Prior to requesting the sprinkler coverage test, you shall:

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 504

THE “WHITEBOOK”

a) Verify that all irrigation system components such as pumps,

controllers, and electrical connections are connected and automated.

b) Verify that sprinkler heads have been installed and head-to-head

coverage has been achieved.

c) Make adjustments to achieve head-to-head coverage and eliminate

overspray from hardscape elements.

2. Each section or unit in the irrigation system shall be balanced to provide

uniform and adequate coverage of the areas serviced. Correct any deficiencies

in the system in accordance with 801-5.5.4, “Sprinkler Head Adjustment”.

ADD:

801-5.8 Flow Sensing Devices Installation.

1. The flow sensing device shall be installed downstream of the backflow preventer

using the flow sensing cable in accordance with 800-2.2.10, “Flow Sensor Cable”.

ADD:

801-5.9 Rain Sensing Devices Installation.

1. The rain sensing device shall be mounted in an approved location with open

skies and away from other water sources such as the drip line of buildings or

within the spray patterns of the irrigation system. Submit Working Drawings

showing the installation in accordance with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS”.

ADD:

801-5.10 Pressure Regulating Valve Installation.

1. The pressure regulating valve shall be installed downstream of the backflow

preventer and shall be set to the design pressure of the system.

ADD:

801-5.11 Backflow Preventer Enclosure Installation.

1. A backflow preventer enclosure shall be required for each backflow

prevention device and shall be installed level and plumb. Backflow preventer

stall be installed on a level concrete pad with a minimum of four inches of

clearance between the enclosure and the edge of the concrete pad. The

enclosure shall open completely for access without any obstructions.

ADD:

801-5.12 Booster Pumps.

1. Booster pump installations shall be certified by the manufacturer once installed.

801-6 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT. DELETE in its entirety and

SUBSTITUTE with the following:

1. Maintain all planted areas on the continuous basis as they are completed

during the progress of the Work and during the Plant Establishment Period

(PEP).

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 505

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Mowing of lawn areas shall be as specified in 801-4.8, “Lawn Planting”.

3. Any required pruning of plants shall be designated by the Engineer at the start

of the PEP. Perform the pruning as part of the plant establishment Work.

4. After all planting and related Work has been completed in accordance with the

Contract Documents, request a pre-maintenance inspection from the

Engineer. All Punchlist items shall be completed prior to the start of the PEP.

5. After planting is completed, a field notification shall be issued to establish the

effective beginning date of the PEP.

6. The PEP shall be as specified in the table below unless otherwise specified in

the Contract Documents.

90 Calendar Days Permanently Irrigated Plants and Sod Installations

120 Calendar Days Seed or Stolonized Lawn Areas

7. Unless otherwise specified, the Resident Engineer and Project Biologist will

determine that the PEP has been successfully completed when the following

conditions have been met:

a) Site is erosion free.

b) 100-percent container plant survival.

c) Zero-percent weed and invasive plant cover.

d) Best Management Practices (BMPs) are in good condition as

determined by the Resident Engineer.

8. The PEP shall be extended by the Resident Engineer if additional planting is

necessary to achieve the required success criteria above or if other corrective

Work becomes necessary.

9. Unhealthy plant materials shall be replaced within 2 weeks from the Engineer’s

notification.

10. Upon completion of the PEP, a final inspection shall be performed by the

Engineer. If the PEP is satisfactorily completed ahead of other Work included

in the Contract, the maintenance of planted areas shall be continued until all

other Work has been completed.

11. When specified in the Contract Documents, the acceptance of the PEP by the

Engineer shall begin the Long-Term Maintenance and Monitoring period in

accordance with SECTION 802 - NATIVE HABITAT PROTECTION, INSTALLATION,

MAINTENANCE, AND MONITORING.

12. Maintenance shall be performed weekly or as directed by the Engineer and

shall include irrigation inspection and repair, Site cleanup, pruning of

groundcover, shrubs, and trees, mowing, weed control, fertilization every 4

weeks in accordance with 801-2.2.2, “Fertilizing and Conditioning Procedures”,

pest and fungi control, plant replacement, and mulch replenishment.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 506

THE “WHITEBOOK”

13. You are responsible for the scheduling of Work throughout the duration of the

Contract. Early installation of landscape planting does not relieve you of planting

and irrigation maintenance responsibilities prior to the completion of construction

and Final Acceptance by the City. Should the PEP lapse prior to Final Acceptance,

you shall maintain planting until completion and Final Acceptance.

801-7 MEASUREMENT. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

801-7 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING TREES.

1. You shall immediately notify the Engineer if a tree appears to be or may be

unstable as a result of trimming or root pruning activities.

2. All measures will be taken to minimize the removal of tree roots in order to

maintain the health and stability of the tree. Those measures include but are

not limited to ramping over roots, meandering around roots, and reinforcing

sidewalk with rebar to strengthen sidewalk. Removal of tree roots shall be the

last option when the hardscape is being replaced or newly constructed.

ADD:

801-7.1 Tree Trimming.

1. Trees shall be trimmed per ANSI A300 Standards for Tree Care Operations

1 week prior to root pruning or as directed by the Engineer. Tree trimming

shall include:

a) Removal of low branches overhanging residential streets to a height

above the street grade of 14 feet (4.3 m) unless otherwise directed.

b) Removal of low branches overhanging sidewalks shall be trimmed to

a height of 8 feet (2.4 m) unless otherwise directed.

c) Removal of the dead, broken, diseased, and insect-infested branches

and stubs larger than ½ inch (12.7 mm) in diameter.

d) Pruning end branches to lighten end weights where such overburden

appears likely to cause breakage of limbs based upon a certified

arborist report and under their supervision of this Work.

e) Removal of cross limbs and water sprouts (suckers).

2. Final pruning cuts shall be made without leaving a stub. Final pruning cuts shall

be made in a manner to favor the earliest covering of the wound with callous

growth. The wound shall be as small as practicable. The cambium tissues at

the edge of the cut shall be alive and healthy. Extremely flush cuts which

produce large wounds and weaken the tree at the cut shall not be made.

3. Pruning and cutting tools shall be kept sharpened to a condition that shall not

permit leaving a scraped cambium edge on final cuts. Such tools shall also be

kept clean and free from infectious materials.

4. The use of climbing spurs or spike shoes shall not be permitted.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 507

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. Trimming of the trees shall provide adequate clearance from obstructed street

standard, globe, or sign. Trim tree limbs shall clear all adjacent structures by

5 feet (1.5 m).

6. In the event that high voltage aerial utility wires present a hazard to your

personnel or others near the Work Site, the Work shall immediately cease and

you shall notify San Diego Gas & Electric. The Work shall then commence in

accordance with the instructions from the utility company.

ADD:

801-7.2 Root Pruning for Re-configured Sidewalk.

1. At locations where the width of the walk will be reduced or moved over to

enlarge the tree well, the Resident Engineer and certified arborist may arrange

for root pruning after the existing walk has been demolished and removed

and prior to installation of new walk. Coordinate the scheduling of root

pruning within 1 week of the concrete repair Work to start. Roots shall be cut

at the locations established by the Engineer based upon a report from a

certified arborist.

ADD:

801-7.3 Root Pruning for Sidewalk Replacement.

1. Prune the trees roots in accordance with the Contract Documents. You shall

coordinate the scheduling of root pruning within 1 week of the concrete repair Work

to start. The Work includes cutting all roots necessary for satisfactory forming for

replacement sidewalk to a depth of 12 inches (304.8 mm), 21 inches (533.4 mm) on

the curb side, along the edge of the new walk or curb for a distance of 10 feet (3 m)

in each direction from the center of the trunk, unless otherwise directed by the

Engineer based upon a report from a certified arborist. If the walk will not be

replaced, roots shall be cut in straight lines parallel to the walk or the curb. The root

cut shall not be more than 3 inches (76.2 mm) from edge of existing walk or curb

for a length of 10 feet (3 m) in each direction from the center of the trunk.

2. Roots more than 2 inches (50.8 mm) in diameter shall be preapproved for

removal by the Engineer based upon a report from a certified arborist. Roots

shall be cut at the nearest node to encourage roots to grow away from the

walk. Root cutting shall not impact the trunk flare. Roots shall be cleanly cut

from the new walk edge. Backfill excavated areas with Class A topsoil or

decomposed granite as directed by the Engineer to existing grade and

compact sufficiently to not settle when walked upon.

3. In order to protect existing trees, surface roots in the parkway area or planter

strip shall not be damaged or removed outside of the pruning area and no

construction equipment or supplies including spoils shall be placed in or upon

this area.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 508

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

801-7.4 Root Pruning on Curb Side.

1. Prune the tree roots as noted in the Contract Documents based upon a report

from a certified arborist. You shall coordinate the schedule of this Work within

1 week of the concrete repair Work scheduled. Roots shall be cut following the

removal of the existing curb and prior to the installation of the new curb when

practical.

2. The Work includes cutting all roots necessary to a depth of 21 inches (533.4

mm) only along the edge of the new curb line adjacent to the tree, in order to

provide forming area for new curb. This shall be done for a minimum distance

of 10 feet (3 m) on the curb side of tree. In cases where the curb will not be

replaced, roots shall be linear cut no further than 3 inches (76.2 mm) from

edge of existing curb for a minimum length of 10 feet (3 m) from the tree trunk.

ADD:

801-7.5 Equipment.

1. Cuts shall be made with a root cutting machine such as Vemeer, Doscocil Inc.,

or approved equal as approved by the Engineer. Any shredded roots shall be

cut clean to the nearest root node. Use of a tree stump grinder for root

pruning shall not be acceptable.

ADD:

801-7.6 Root Barrier.

1. Install root barriers for trees within 10 feet (3 m) of hardscape for new

construction, where the root pruning and walk construction has been

completed, or as directed by the Engineer. Root barriers installed on either the

curb side or walk side shall be continuous, 20 feet (6.1 m) in length, and centered

on the tree or as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer may allow for

alterations to the root barrier in order to accommodate necessary root locations

based upon an arborist report.

2. Where trees requiring root barriers are 18 feet (5.5 m) or less apart, the barrier

shall be installed continuously between trees. The barrier shall be placed 1 inch

(25.4 mm) above finish grade against the back of the curb or the front edge of

the walk. Vertical raised ribs on barrier shall be faced toward the tree(s). The

barrier shall be installed vertically, or if conditions allow, with the top inclined

towards the tree.

3. The barrier shall not be installed with the top inclined away from the tree. The

root pruning trench shall be backfilled to the top of the barrier. The tree shall be

inspected by the Engineer for stability prior to the backfilling of the root pruning

trench.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 509

THE “WHITEBOOK”

801-8 PAYMENT. DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:

801-8 MEASUREMENT.

1. Landscaping and irrigation Work shall be measured as specified in the

Contract Documents and as shown in the Bid.

2. Tree maintenance Work shall be measured by the tree trimming, root pruning,

or root barrier required for each tree.

ADD:

801-9 PAYMENT.

1. The payment for landscaping and irrigation Work shall be included under the

lump sum Bid items or for the Contract Unit Prices shown in the Bid and shall

also include the payment for the Plant Establishment Period Work.

2. The payment for tree maintenance Work shall be included in the following Bid

items:

a) Tree Trimming

b) Root Pruning

c) Root Barrier

3. When used, Decomposed Granite (DG) shall be included in the Bid item for

“Remove and Replace Miscellaneous Hardscape with Topsoil” unless a

separate Bid item has been provided.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 510

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD:

SECTION 802 – NATIVE HABITAT PROTECTION, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, AND

MONITORING

802-1 GENERAL.

1. This section is specific to any habitat protection, native species plantings for

erosion control, re-vegetation, restoration, or creation of native habitat for

mitigation purposes.

2. The provisions of 1-6.2, “Subcontractor Listing” shall not apply to the

independent supplemental agreement.

3. You shall limit staging and stockpiling areas and access routes to areas

identified in the Contract Documents.

4. Materials shall be non-toxic, biodegradable, and wildlife-friendly to the

maximum extent possible. For example, recycled wood chips shall be used

rather than decomposed granite, erosion control blankets, and wattles shall

not have tight plastic netting, and pest removal shall be non-lethal.

5. You shall comply with any and all applicable environmental regulations

including but not limited to those in the Contract Documents as well as the latest

City Landscape Standards, Biology Guidelines, Sewer Design Guidelines, and

Environmentally Sensitive Lands Guidelines and Municipal Code Landscape

Sections §142.0401. You are responsible for adhering to local, state, and federal

laws including but not limited the Clean Water Act, the Clean Air Act, and the

Migratory Bird Treaty Act.

802-1.1 Terms and Responsibilities. For the purpose of these specifications the following

definitions and descriptions of the responsibilities shall apply:

1. Biological Resources Protection During Construction – Areas on site and in

adjacent locations to be protected during Work activities. These may include

but are not limited to: native plants, sensitive or rare plants, habitat,

jurisdictional areas, preserved areas, or formerly mitigated areas. The

Contract Documents shall specify requirements for Biological Resources

Protection During Construction such as a Biological Monitoring Exhibit, pre-

construction meetings, pre-construction surveys, construction monitoring,

construction limits fencing, flagging, or signage and post-impact reports.

2. City Representative – City staff qualified to perform duties described.

3. Communication – The Resident Engineer shall be the single point of contact

and shall be included in all communication. All directions from the Project

Biologist to you shall come through the Resident Engineer. The Project

Biologist shall have the authority to temporarily stop the Work until the

Resident Engineer can provide further direction to you. The Re-vegetation

Contractor shall contact the Resident Engineer at certain phases detailed in

the Contract Documents to perform inspections. The Project Biologist shall

submit reports to the Resident Engineer at certain phases detailed in the

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 511

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Contract Documents. The Resident Engineer or City representative shall

contact MMC staff and Resource Agencies for site inspections at certain

phases detailed in the Contract Documents.

4. Environmentally Sensitive Lands (ESL) – Environmentally Sensitive Lands

administered by the Development Services Department through the ESL

regulations and the City’s Biological Guidelines. ESL, for the purposes of this

section, can be steep slopes, coastal bluffs, jurisdictional waters, and native

habitat. Work conducted within ESL typically requires monitoring by the

Project Biologist and may require additional special studies or impact

avoidance measures. Refer to the Contract Documents for more information.

5. Installation – Installation of all erosion control, seed, container plants, and

irrigation as specified in the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise directed by

the Project Biologist via the Resident Engineer, installation shall be completed

within 90 Calendar Days of the completion of grading or disturbance. Written

acceptance of installation by MMC staff or City Representative shall commence

the PEP.

6. Invasive Plants – Plants listed in the latest Cal-Invasive Plant Council website

(Cal-IPC) with a rating of “Moderate” or “High” and/or perennial non-native

species regardless of Cal-IPC rating.

7. Maintenance and Monitoring (M&M) Period – The period of time required

to ensure long-term establishment and health of re-vegetation. The M&M

Period shall be 25 months for re-vegetation or erosion control projects and

shall be 60 months for mitigation projects, unless otherwise specified. The

M&M period shall start after the 120 Calendar Day PEP has been considered

complete by MMC staff or City Representative. The M&M Period may be

extended by the Engineer. Written acceptance of the M&M Period by MMC

staff or City Representative and Resource Agencies specified in the Contract

Documents shall close the project.

8. Mitigation and Monitoring Coordination (MMC) Section – A section in the

City’s Development Services Department responsible for the compliance of

the CEQA document and any City environmental permits, the approval of Re-

vegetation Plan changes and for the approval of the completion of success

criteria for installation, the 120 Day Plant Establishment Period, and the 25

month Maintenance and Monitoring Period. MMC staff or a City representative

shall issue internal City memos or punchlists to the Engineer regarding the

Project.

9. Multiple Habitat Planning Area (MHPA) – A mapped system of

environmentally sensitive areas given special protections and administered by

the City’s Multiple Species Conservation Program (MSCP).

10. Plant Establishment Period (PEP) – The specified period of time required to

ensure successful initial establishment of plants. The PEP shall be 120 Calendar

Days for erosion control, re-vegetation, and restoration projects. The PEP may

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 512

THE “WHITEBOOK”

be extended by the Engineer. Written acceptance of the PEP by MMC staff or

City Representative shall commence the Maintenance and Monitoring Period.

11. Plant Supplier – Plant Suppliers shall have at least 2 years experience in the

propagation of native plants in Southern California and shall be responsible

for providing containerized plant materials and required documentation. The

Plant Supplier shall hold a valid Department of Agriculture Inspection

Certificate.

12. Project Biologist – The Project Biologist shall be responsible for overseeing

the Biological Resources Protection During Construction requirements and the

entire re-vegetation program. The Project Biologist shall not be the same

person and shall not be from the same company or organization as the Re-

vegetation Contractor. The Project Biologist shall review and become familiar

with the Contract Documents and shall function under the direction of the

Engineer. The Project Biologist shall be an individual or team of individuals

with 4-year degree(s) in botany, ecology, landscape architecture, or a related

field with demonstrated experience in at least 1 habitat restoration project of

similar type, size, and complexity in Southern California. If required by the

contract documents, the Project Biologist or a sub-consultant shall also be

qualified to perform United States Fish and Wildlife Service protocol focused

sensitive species surveys. The Project Biologist may be hired by you, the City,

or be a City representative as specified in the Special Provisions.

13. Resource Agencies – Local, state, and federal government agencies that

approve Work in and around natural habitat areas.

14. Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor – The planting and plant

establishment Work shall be performed by a qualified contractor (you or your

Subcontractor) with a Class C-27 license. Under the direction of the Project

Biologist via the Resident Engineer, the Re-vegetation Contractor shall

implement the Re-vegetation Plan in accordance with the Contract Documents.

The Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor shall install and maintain the

planting site for the specified Plant Establishment Period. When included in the

Contract Documents, you shall execute the 25-month or 60-month Long-Term

Maintenance and Monitoring Agreement. The Re-vegetation or Restoration

Contractor shall demonstrate knowledge of native vegetation and weed

identification associated with upland and wetland vegetation communities. The

Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor and the personnel working in the re-

vegetation sites shall be familiar with re-vegetation site boundaries, the

requirements of the re-vegetation effort as it pertains to them, and any other

information that the Project Biologist determines is necessary for the success of

the re-vegetation or restoration program (such as the protection of existing

adjacent upland and wetland areas). In the event that the application of

pesticides, insecticides, or herbicides is required, it shall be done by an individual

or firm possessing a valid license.

15. Re-vegetation or Restoration Plan – Plan sheets or documents containing

important details on procedures, materials, and methods applicable to

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 513

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Biological Resources Protection During Construction, re-vegetation or

restoration, and maintenance and monitoring of installed vegetation. It shall

include all elements in the latest City Landscape Standards, including but not

limited to irrigation methods and timing, success criteria, and maintenance

and monitoring schedules. If available, the document will be included in the

Contract Documents. When you are required to prepare the Re-vegetation or

Restoration Plans, they shall be prepared by your Project Biologist and

approved by the City (Development Services Department or City

representative).

16. Seed Supplier – Seed Suppliers shall have at least 2 years experience in

collecting native seeds in Southern California. The Seed Supplier shall hold a

valid Department of Agriculture Inspection Certificate. The Seed Supplier shall

be responsible for providing necessary quantities of specified plant species

and required documentation.

17. Weeds – Plants listed on the latest Cal-IPC with a rating of “Limited”, “Alert”,

“Watch”, or do not have a rating, non-native annual species, and/or non-native

grasses. . In certain circumstances and if approved by the Project Biologist,

non-native species that are not listed may be used to achieve coverage goals.

802-2 BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION.

802-2.1 Project Biologist.

1. Unless otherwise specified in the special provisions, you shall retain the

Project Biologist to perform Biological Monitoring Work. You shall submit

copies of the Project Biologist qualifications as noted in 802-1.1, “Terms and

Responsibilities” and shall obtain the City’s approval prior to the pre-

construction meeting. If the proposed Project Biologist is not approved, you

shall submit and obtain approval of an alternate Project Biologist at no

additional cost to the City prior to the start of the construction Work subject

to the process under Public Contract Code Section 4107.

2. If the City provides a qualified Project Biologist to perform biological

monitoring Work for the Contract, you shall coordinate your activities and

Schedule with the activities and schedules of the Project Biologist.

3. The Project Biologist shall have the authority to issue Stop Work notices and

shall report directly to the Resident Engineer any Site conditions, Work

activities, or Work products that do not comply with the Contract Documents.

4. The Project Biologist shall be responsible for interpreting and communicating

via the Resident Engineer the intent of all Environmental Constraints detailed

in the Contract Documents and all other applicable regulations and laws.

802-2.2 Environmental Constraints.

1. All responsible parties under your control shall have a pre-construction

meeting at the Site with the Engineer, the Project Biologist, and MMC staff

before Work commences to discuss environmental constraints. Environmental

Constraints may include: limits of construction, access, stockpiling, and

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 514

THE “WHITEBOOK”

staging; constraints on methods detailed in Contract Documents; seasonal

noise restrictions, drainage and lighting constraints; and/or Biological

Resources Protection During Construction. The Project Biologist shall provide

recommendations for ongoing protection throughout the Project to the

Engineer.

2. If you impact areas outside the identified limits of construction, cause direct

or indirect impacts to Biological Resources Protection During Construction, or

violate Environmental Constraints detailed in the Construction Documents,

you shall mitigate, in accordance with the direction of the Project Biologist and

Resident Engineer, the areas at your own expense.

802-2.3 Construction Fencing.

1. If detailed in the Construction Documents and approved by the Project Biologist

via the Resident Engineer, construction fencing shall be installed at a minimum of

3 feet (0.9 m) high and shall be staked at no less than 10 feet (3 m) on center with

metal fence stakes. The material shall be fastened with a minimum of two nylon

ties at each stake.

802-2.4 Working in Unpaved Areas.

1. In compliance with federal, state, and local regulations, to avoid any direct

impacts to raptors and/or any native or migratory birds, removal of habitat

that supports active nests in the proposed area of disturbance should occur

outside of the breeding season for these species (February 1 to September

15).

2. If the removal of habitat in the proposed area of disturbance occurs during

the breeding season, the Project Biologist shall conduct a pre-construction

survey to determine the presence or absence of nesting birds within the

proposed area of disturbance. The pre-construction survey shall be conducted

within 10 Calendar Days prior to grading soils and/or clearing, grubbing,

trimming, or crushing vegetation. The applicant shall submit the results of the

pre-construction survey to the Engineer for review and approval prior to

initiating any construction activities. If nesting birds are detected, a letter

report or mitigation plan in conformance with the City’s Biology Guidelines and

applicable State and Federal Laws (appropriate follow up surveys, monitoring

schedules, construction and noise barriers/buffers, and etc.) shall be prepared

by the Project Biologist.

3. Litter, including tobacco debris, from construction or food packaging shall be

prohibited on construction sites.

4. Equipment maintenance and pollution control shall be in accordance with 3-

12, “WORK SITE MAINTENANCE” and Part 10 – STORM WATER.

5. Smoking shall not be allowed within vegetated areas.

6. Additional restrictions may be listed in the Construction Documents.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 515

THE “WHITEBOOK”

802-2.5 Construction Access Routes.

1. Pedestrian, vehicle, and equipment traffic shall be limited to areas identified

in the Contract Documents.

2. Any vegetation in the access route shall be trimmed, pruned, crushed, or

mowed instead of being removed.

3. All temporary areas shall be re-vegetated according to the Contract Documents.

4. You are advised to investigate Site conditions prior to Bid.

802-3 RE-VEGETATION AND RESTORATION.

1. Materials selected by you shall be subject to inspection and approval of the

Project Biologist via the Engineer.

2. For all erosion control or re-vegetation projects, when the PEP is completed to

the satisfaction of the Engineer, the 25-Month Long-Term Maintenance and

Monitoring Agreement shall commence in accordance with the Contract

Documents.

3. Some projects constitute mitigation. For those projects, when the PEP is

completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the 60-Month Long-Term

Maintenance and Monitoring Agreement shall commence in accordance with

the Contract Documents.

4. All requirements in 802-3.10, “Maintenance, Monitoring, and Reporting” shall

apply to this section.

802-3.1 Project Biologist.

1. All specifications in 802-2.1, “Project Biologist” are applicable.

802-3.2 Licensed Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor.

1. When required in the Contract Documents, you shall retain a licensed Re-

vegetation Contractor or Restoration Contractor. You shall submit copies of

the qualifications as noted in 802-1.1, “Terms and Responsibilities” and shall

obtain the Resident Engineer’s approval prior to the pre-construction meeting.

2. If the proposed licensed Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor is not

approved, you shall re-submit and obtain approval of an alternate licensed Re-

vegetation or Restoration Contractor at no additional cost to the City prior to

the start of the Construction Work and subject to the process outlined under

Public Contract Code §4107. The selected Re-vegetation or Restoration

Contractor may be requested to attend the pre-construction meeting.

802-3.3 Mulch.

1. Unless specified otherwise or directed by the Project Biologist, cleared native

vegetation shall be salvaged during construction activities. Vegetation shall be

ground to a coarse grade of mulch for re-application. Weeds shall not be

included in the mulch and shall be disposed of legally.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 516

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. The salvaged mulch shall be stored at a location on Site that is approved by

the Resident Engineer or Project Biologist. The mulch shall be stored

separately, protected, and covered by means of an impermeable tarp and

appropriate Best Management Practices (BMPs).

3. If additional mulch is required, it shall conform to the latest City Landscape

Standards and, if applicable, to the Sewer Design Guidelines and shall be

approved by the Project Biologist via the Engineer.

4. Avoid the creation of brush piles from cut and brushed vegetation. Vegetation

not to be salvaged shall be chipped, cut, or both to pieces of 12 inches (304.8

mm) or less and then shall be removed, buried, or adequately spread out as

directed by the Project Biologist.

802-3.4 Topsoil. For the purpose of this part, ADD the following to 801-2.1, “General”.

1. Prior to any excavation that may occur, vegetation shall be removed and the

top 8 inches (203.2 mm) of topsoil shall be removed and stored.

2. The salvaged topsoil shall be stored at a location on Site that is approved by

the Project Biologist via the Resident Engineer. The topsoil shall be stored

separately, protected, and covered by means of an impermeable tarp and

appropriate BMPs.

3. You shall not use subsurface soils from the deepest parts of the excavation

unless specifically approved by the Resident Engineer and Project Biologist.

4. You shall perform minor ground contouring (grading) at the direction of the

Resident Engineer in accordance with the Project Biologist’s recommendations

and in accordance with the Contract Documents.

5. If import of topsoil is determined to be necessary, Class B topsoil in accordance

with 800-1.1.3, “Class ‘B’ Topsoil” from a comparable Site shall be provided and

tested, as specified. Topsoil quantity, source, and quality shall be approved by the

Project Biologist via the Resident Engineer prior to delivery.

6. Topsoil shall be free of Weeds upon delivery or treated as specified for Weed

eradication.

802-3.4.1 Soils Testing.

1. The Project Biologist shall be responsible for determining the suitability of

topsoil material prior to Installation.

2. If directed by the Project Biologist via the Resident Engineer, the following

specifications shall apply:

a) Soils in areas to be re-vegetated, including sub-soils and existing

topsoil, shall be tested for soil fertility and agricultural suitability in

accordance with 800-1.1.3, “Class ‘B’ Topsoil”. Sample locations shall be

approved by the Project Biologist and Resident Engineer.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 517

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Tests shall be conducted and evaluated by a qualified soils scientist from

an approved soils laboratory approved by the Project Biologist via the

Resident Engineer.

c) The Project Biologist shall evaluate the soils lab recommendations to

determine if additional soil preparation requirements shall be

necessary prior to seeding.

802-3.4.2 Topsoil Preparation and Conditioning Procedures.

1. Topsoil shall be reapplied to the disturbed areas prior to planting and seeding.

2. The topsoil shall be free of rocks and all clods greater than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in

diameter.

3. You shall match existing elevations of adjacent untouched native soils and

shall provide natural drainage to the maximum extent possible.

4. Unless directed otherwise by the Project Biologist and the Resident Engineer,

compaction within re-vegetation areas shall not exceed 70% standard proctor

within the top 8 inches (203.2 mm) of soil. Compaction testing may be required

to verify that these specifications have been achieved. Overly compacted soils

shall be de-compacted by ripping or tilling as directed by the Project Biologist.

5. If soils analysis indicates soil amendments are necessary, specified amendment

materials shall be evenly spread over designated planting areas and shall be

thoroughly incorporated to a uniform soil depth of 8 inches (203.2 mm) by

rototilling a minimum of 2 passes, with the second pass perpendicular to the first

pass. Soil amendment application rates shall be determined by Project Biologist

via the Resident Engineer.

6. Soil Fertilizing and Conditioning Materials shall only be used if specified in the

Contract Documents and under the direction of the Project Biologist.

802-3.4.3 Weed and Invasive Plant Eradication.

1. The Project Biologist shall inspect the re-vegetation or restoration site for

Weed and Invasive Plant coverage prior to planting and throughout the Project

duration.

2. All Weeds and Invasive Plants shall be treated and removed from the Site prior

to the installation of native plant material.

3. All Weeds and Invasive Plants shall be treated and removed from the Site

before attaining a height of 6 inches and/or producing seed, throughout the

Project duration.

4. All areas where Weed and Invasive Plant removal creates bare areas in excess

of 25 feet

x 25 feet (7.6 m x 7.6 m) shall be replanted at the direction of the

Project Biologist via the Resident Engineer.

5. Pulled Weeds, Invasive plants, and debris shall be transported and disposed

of legally offsite immediately to prevent any seed dispersal on the Site.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 518

THE “WHITEBOOK”

6. Herbicides shall be applied under the direction of the Biologist and shall

contain green dye.

802-3.5 Seed.

1. You shall arrange for seed to be delivered to the Site in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

2. The Project Biologist shall inspect the seed and the required documentation

regarding the quantity, quality, and origin before Installation to ensure

compliance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise specified in the

Contract Documents or directed by the Project Biologist, seed shall be collected

from coastal San Diego County. Seed shall be ordered, delivered, separated, and

containerized by species.

3. All seed application rates (lb/acre) stated on the Plans or in the Contract

Documents shall be for pure-live-seed, unless otherwise specified.

802-3.6 Container Stock.

1. You shall arrange for container stock plants to be delivered to the site in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. You shall notify the Project Biologist and Resident Engineer at least 48 hours

before the delivery of the container stock plants.

3. The Project Biologist shall inspect the container stock plants and the required

documentation regarding the quantity, quality, and origin before Installation

to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise

specified in the Contract Documents or directed by the Project Biologist,

container stock plants shall originate from coastal San Diego County.

Container plants shall be ordered, delivered, separated, labeled, and

containerized by species.

4. The quality and size of the container stock plants shall be vigorous, healthy,

and well-proportioned as verified by the Project Biologist via the Engineer.

Plants which are even moderately “overgrown”, or are showing signs of disease,

infestation, fungus, frost damage, root girdling, decline, lack of vigor, or stunted

growth shall be subject to rejection. Plants showing pruning may be rejected.

Plants larger than the sizes specified may be used with the approval of the

Engineer and the Project Biologist. The use of larger plants shall not cause any

change in Contract Price.

5. Plants not approved by the Project Biologist may be rejected by the Engineer.

Replacements shall be furnished by you at your own expense.

802-3.7 Temporary Irrigation.

1. The Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor shall be responsible for providing

temporary irrigation to plant and/or seed material to ensure successful

establishment and to ensure vegetative cover meets success criteria.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 519

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Temporary irrigation via irrigation lines and appurtenances (or alternate

method approved by the Resident Engineer and Project Biologist) shall be

provided by the Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor.

3. The Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor shall responsible for the design,

installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of the temporary irrigation.

4. Irrigation shall deliver water sufficiently and uniformly and shall be

appropriate to the needs of the plant materials.

5. The amount of irrigation shall be adjusted when warranted by site conditions.

802-3.8 Installation.

1. You shall arrange for Installation of seed, erosion control, container stock, and

irrigation in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Installation shall occur under the direction of the Project Biologist and shall

comply with the Contract Documents. Spotting of container stock plants

before planting may be required. Plants shall be planted and watered as

herein specified immediately after the removal from the containers.

Containers shall not be cut prior to placing the plants in the planting area.

3. Planting pits for container plants shall be approximately 1.5 times as deep and

3 times as wide as the container size. All planting pits shall be filled with water

and allowed to completely drain prior to plant installation. After the planting

pits have been presoaked, Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor shall

backfill the hole to the appropriate planting depth and set plants in the center

of the hole, then backfill the hole and thoroughly apply more water.

4. A watering basin, approximately twice the size of the plant canopy shall be

created. Re-vegetation or Restoration Contractor shall apply 3 inches (76.2

mm) of weed free mulch inside the watering basin.

5. Stakes shall be installed on all trees for stabilization.

6. Planting shall not be performed if plant pits contain standing water or if pits are

over saturated to a condition which may result in an unhealthful condition for the

plant.

7. Installation of seed or container plants on Public Utility access paths or over

sewer lines shall follow the latest City Sewer Design Guidelines.

8. Irrigation lines shall not be placed in areas where they can be driven over.

9. Unless specified otherwise or directed by the Project biologist, Installation of

plant and seed material shall occur during the rainy season (Oct 1 - Feb 15).

10. Changes to the Contract Documents regarding the Re-vegetation or

Restoration Plan (installation timing, species, irrigation, and schedules) shall

be first approved by the Project Biologist, Engineer, and MMC staff as

necessary.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 520

THE “WHITEBOOK”

802-3.9 Hydro Seeding.

1. Hydro seeding materials specified in the Special Provisions or as shown on

the Plans shall conform to the Contract Documents, the latest City Landscape

Standards, and shall be inspected and approved by the Project Biologist via

the Engineer.

2. Slurry spilled into areas outside the limits of Work shall be cleaned up at your

expense to the satisfaction of the Project Biologist and the Engineer.

3. You shall schedule an inspection of the installation phase with the Engineer.

4. You shall receive written notification of any deficiencies before the start of the

PEP.

802-3.10 Maintenance, Monitoring, and Reporting.

802-3.10.1 General.

1. You shall notify the Engineer to schedule inspections in accordance with the

schedule in the Contract Documents.

2. If you have hired the Project Biologist, that person shall submit required

reports to the Resident Engineer in accordance with the Contract Documents.

The Project Biologist shall prepare the reports in accordance with the Contract

Documents in a format acceptable to all applicable Resource Agencies.

3. You shall immediately contact the Resident Engineer and shall be responsible

for, under the direction of the Project Biologist, controlling any insect

infestations, herbivore activity, and/or diseases that may spread throughout

the re-vegetated or restored areas. Remedial action, such as fencing and

protective cages, shall be provided at your expense.

4. Native vegetation and branch drops shall be retained in place unless removal

is required by the Project Biologist.

5. You shall remove and dispose offsite all non-organic debris. Removal of trash

and litter shall continue on a regular basis during the project.

6. You shall maintain signage, BMPs, silt, and construction area fences on a

continual basis throughout the project.

7. At any time during the life of the Contract, where insufficient seed germination

occurs or re-vegetation areas show signs of failure to grow, or where plants

are so injured, damaged, dead, or diseased as to render them unsuitable for

the intended purpose, you shall re-vegetate these areas within 2 weeks of

receipt of written notice by the Resident Engineer at no additional cost to the

City. If you fail to replace plants within the time limit, the Resident Engineer

may issue an additional written notice and will replace them at your expense

after 5 Working Days of receipt of the written notice.

8. Seed species used for reseeding or container plants shall be the same species

and quantity in accordance with the original Re-vegetation or Restoration Plan

or be a substitute approved by the Project Biologist and the City.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 521

THE “WHITEBOOK”

9. You shall monitor for erosion within re-vegetation areas and shall prohibit

gullies, ruts, rill and sheet erosion, bare soil areas, and silt deposition from

occurring in the project footprint or from run-off from the project. Erosion

control shall emphasize prevention. Repair of eroded areas shall be directed

by the Project Biologist via the Engineer and may include redirection or

dissipation of the water sources and re-contouring of soil followed by seeding,

mulching, and planting.

802-3.10.2 120 Calendar Day PEP.

1. The PEP Work of this section shall also be performed in accordance with 801-

6, “MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT”.

2. After all planting and related Work has been completed in accordance with the

Contract Documents, request a pre-maintenance inspection from the

Engineer.

3. All Punchlist items shall be completed prior to the start of the PEP.

4. When all deficiencies have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Resident

Engineer and Project Biologist, the 120 Calendar Day PEP shall begin and a

field notification will be issued to establish the effective beginning date of the

PEP.

5. Unless otherwise specified, the Project Biologist will determine that the 120

Calendar Day PEP has been successfully completed when the following

conditions have been met:

a) Site is erosion free.

b) 100-percent container plant survival.

c) Zero-percent weed and invasive plant cover.

d) BMPs are in good condition as determined by the Resident Engineer.

6. The PEP shall be extended by the Resident Engineer if additional planting is

necessary to achieve the required success criteria above or if other corrective

Work becomes necessary.

7. You shall receive written notification of any deficiencies before executing the

25-month or 60-month Long-Term Maintenance and Monitoring Agreement

(LTMMA) in accordance with the Contract Documents.

802-3.10.3 Long-Term Maintenance and Monitoring Period.

1. In addition to 802-3.10.1, “General”, refer to the Long-term Maintenance and

Monitoring Agreement (LTMMA) included in the Contract Documents for

additional M&M period requirements.

802-4 PAYMENT.

1. The payment for items of Work described in 802, “NATIVE HABITAT

PROTECTION, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, AND MONITORING”, shall be

included in the following Bid items as applicable unless specified otherwise

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 522

THE “WHITEBOOK”

in the Special Provisions, Long-Term Maintenance and Monitoring Agreement

(LTMMA), or both:

a) The payment for the removal and disposal of the existing vegetation,

weeds, trash, and other objects shall be included in the associated Bid

items requiring the Work.

b) The payment for the construction of temporary facilities, such as

access routes and fencing, shall be included in the Bid item for

“Construction Fencing and Access Route”.

c) The payment to complete the soil testing, topsoil preparation,

conditioning, preparation of the final grade, installation, and PEP

phases shall be included in the associated Bid items requiring the

Work.

d) The payment for Biological Monitoring and Reporting throughout

installation and the PEP includes the payment for the Project Biologist

when required and shall be included in the lump sum Bid item for

“Biological Monitoring and Reporting”.

e) The payment for the monitoring, reporting, and maintenance Work

required during the maintenance period beyond the PEP in

accordance with the Manholes (LTMMA) included in the Contract

Documents includes payment for the Project Biologist when required,

furnishing the required reports, site observations, and bond(s), and

shall be included in the lump sum Bid item for the “25-Month Re-

vegetation Maintenance and Monitoring Program” or the “60-Month

Re-vegetation Maintenance and Monitoring Program”, unless

otherwise specified.

END OF PART 8 - LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 523

THE “WHITEBOOK”

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 524

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD: PART 9

WATER WORKS

SECTION 900 - MATERIALS

900-1 HIGH-LINING MATERIALS.

900-1.1 General.

1. Materials may have been used previously, but shall be in good working

condition, free of defect, and have only been used to convey potable water.

2. You shall procure pipe, fittings, adapters, materials, and components required

for a complete and operable high-lining system installation.

3. Products and materials shall be suitable for the intended purpose and

recommended by the manufacturer for the application intended.

4. Hoses shall be used only at corners and curves and for connections to user’s

service meter(s).

900-1.2 Galvanized Pipe.

1. Pipes shall be fabricated in sections of 2 inches (50.8 mm) Galvanized steel

pipe and shall conform to the following:

a) ASTM A53 or other equal ASTM galvanized pipe standard.

b) Minimum wall thickness shall be Schedule 40.

c) Pipe ends shall be machine cut or rolled for grooved couplings and

fittings in compliance with ANSI/AWWA C606.

2. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to the following:

a) Fittings and couplings, including tees, wyes, elbows, reducers, caps,

plugs, and adapters, shall have standard flexible grooved mechanical

joint connections in compliance with ANSI/AWWA C606.

b) Minimum pressure rating shall be 200 psig.

c) Housing material shall be ductile iron coated with the manufacturer’s

standard painting system. Coupling gasket material shall be standard

Ethylene-Polypropylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) rubber.

d) Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 78 or approved equal.

e) The branch outlet of reducing tees shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm) male pipe

thread. Connections of standard tees shall be grooved.

f) Grooved elbows with 11¼°, 22½°, 45°, and 90° bend angles shall be

required to configure the high-line piping system to existing bends and

contours at the Site.

g) Manufacturers shall be Victaulic, Mech-Line, or approved equal.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 525

THE “WHITEBOOK”

900-1.3 Grooved-End PVC Pipe.

1. Pipes shall be fabricated in sections of 2 inch (50.8 mm) fusible PVC pipe and

shall conform to the following:

a) ASTM A53 or other equal ASTM fusible PVC pipe standard.

b) Minimum wall thickness shall be Schedule 80.

c) Pipe ends shall be grooved for couplings and fittings in compliance

with ANSI/AWWA C606.

2. Fittings shall be PVC and shall conform to the following:

a) Fittings and couplings, including tees, wyes, elbows, reducers, caps,

plugs, and adapters, shall have standard flexible grooved mechanical

joint connections in compliance with ANSI/AWWA C 606.

b) Minimum pressure rating shall be 200 psig.

c) Housing material shall be ductile iron coated with the manufacturer’s

standard painting system. Coupling gasket material shall be standard

Ethylene-Polypropylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) rubber.

d) Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 78 or approved equal.

e) The branch outlet of reducing tees shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm) male pipe

thread. Connections of standard tees shall be grooved.

f) Grooved elbows with 11¼°, 22½°, 45°, and 90° bend angles shall be

required to configure the high-line piping system to existing bends and

contours at the Site.

900-1.4 Yelomine Pipe.

1. Pipes shall be fabricated in sections of 2 inches (50.8 mm) Yelomine pipe and

shall conform to the following:

a) Designed and Manufactured in accordance with ASTM (D2241) and

ASTM (D1784).

b) Performance requirement for SDR 17, rated 250 psi for 2 inches (50.8

mm) - 8 inches (203.2 mm) diameter pipe.

c) Field cut is permissible when necessary to configure the high-line

piping system to existing bend and contours at the Site.

2. Fittings shall be Certa-Lok Yelomine material (or compatible) and shall

conform to the following:

a) Coupling and fittings shall be Yelomine pipe including tees, elbows,

reducers, caps, plugs, flange adapters and tapped couplings, shall

have standard flexible grooved mechanical joint connections in

compliance with ASTM D3139.

b) Minimum pressure rating shall be 250 psi.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 526

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) Manufacturers shall be CertainTeed Certa-Lok Yelomine, or approved

equal.

900-1.5 Miscellaneous Materials.

1. Meter Connections.

a) For meters up to 1 inch (25.4 mm) in size:

i. The connections shall be 90°, long radius, brass elbow

couplings with a swivel meter nut on one end and male pipe

threads on the other.

ii. The swivel meter nut shall be sized to fit the specific meter. The

male pipe thread end shall be fitted with a galvanized steel

“Chicago” 2-lug, quarter-turn, quick disconnect hose fitting-to-

female pipe thread fitting.

iii. Manufacturers shall be James Jones Co., Ford Meter Box Co.,

Inc., or approved equal.

b) For meters larger than 1 inch (25m.4 m) in size:

i. The connections shall be elbows with a 2-bolt Class 125 flange

on one end and female pipe threads on the other.

ii. The flange shall be sized to fit the specific meter. The female

pipe thread end shall be fitted with a short pipe thread to

grooved connection adapter nipple.

iii. Alternately, the assembly shall be a 2-bolt Class 125 flange-to-

male pipe thread fitting, a threaded pipe elbow, and a short

pipe thread-to-grooved connection adapter nipple.

iv. Manufacturers shall be James Jones Co., Ford Meter Box Co.,

Inc., or approved equal.

2. Bushings, Reducers, and Adapters.

a) The City Forces will be responsible for all fit-up and connections in the

system.

b) You shall provide all bushings, reducers, and adapters required to

connect the high-line system to the existing fire hydrants, meters, and

other facilities at the Site. Bushings, reducers, and adapters shall be

provided at no additional cost to the City.

c) For pipe-to-hose adapters, when 1-inch (25.4 mm) hoses are used, the

adapter shall be a 1 inch (25 mm), galvanized steel, “Chicago” 2-lug,

quarter-turn, quick disconnect hose-to-female pipe thread fitting.

d) For fire hydrant-to-pipe connectors, the actual connection to the live

fire hydrant shall be a brass or bronze 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) female fire

hydrant thread to 2 inches (50.8 mm) male pipe thread fitting.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 527

THE “WHITEBOOK”

3. Bolts and Fasteners.

a) Bolts and fasteners, including bolts, nuts, and washers, shall meet the

minimum requirements of ASTM A 307, and shall be hot dipped

galvanized according to ASTM A 153.

b) Bolts shall be installed with nuts face down.

4. Valves.

a) Pipe shutoff valves shall be 2 inches (50.8 mm), lever handle, two-position,

manual butterfly valves with grooved mechanical connections in

compliance with ASTM C 606. Minimum pressure rating shall be 200 psig.

b) Housing material shall be ductile iron coated with the manufacturer’s

standard painting system. Seal material shall be standard EPDM

rubber.

c) Manufacturers shall be Victaulic, Mech-Line, or approved equal.

5. Curb Stop Valves.

a) Curb Stop Valves shall be bronze full-port ball valves without handles.

b) Seats shall be molded Buna-N rubber or other approved material. The

ball shall be Teflon-coated brass or bronze. Approved plastic ball

materials shall be considered as substitutes.

c) Size shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm), with female pipe thread connections.

Other sizes and end connections may be required to accommodate

specific user connections.

d) Manufacturers shall be James Jones Co., Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., A. Y.

McDonald Mfg. Co., or approved equal.

6. Hoses.

a) User Connection (Service Meters).

i. For meters up to 1 inch (25.4 mm), the hose shall be 1 inch

(25.4 mm) potable water hose with 300 WP rating. End

connections shall be galvanized steel, “Chicago” 2-lug, quarter-

turn, quick-disconnect fittings banded to the hose.

ii. Materials shall meet the NSF/ANSI 61 certification for potable

water use in conformance with AWWA C651-14.

b) Curves and Curbs.

i. Hose shall be 2 inch (50.8 mm) potable water hose with 300

WP rating. End connections shall be galvanized steel grooved

mechanical end fittings in compliance with ASTM C606 banded

to the hose.

ii. Materials shall meet the NSF/ANSI 61 certification for potable

water use in conformance with AWWA C651-14.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 528

THE “WHITEBOOK”

7. Check Valves.

a) Check valves shall be swing check type with grooved mechanical

connections in compliance with ASTM C606. Minimum pressure rating

shall be 200 psig.

b) Housing material shall be ductile iron coated with the manufacturer’s

standard painting system. Seal material shall be standard EPDM

rubber.

c) Manufacturers shall be Victaulic, Mech-Line, or approved equal.

8. Backflow Preventers.

a) Backflow preventers shall meet the requirements of AWWA C511.

b) Manufacturer and model shall be approved by the Department of Public

Health.

9. Pressure Regulators.

a) If required, you shall provide 2-inch (50.8 mm) pipe size of bronze or

ductile iron construction. Materials, coatings, seals, diaphragms, and

trim shall be approved for potable water service. Connections shall be

pipe threaded union couplings.

b) Pressure ratings and regulation ranges shall be approved for the

pressure zones involved.

c) Manufacturer shall be Braukmann or approved equal.

10. Pipe Supports:

a) Supports shall be adjustable type and fabricated from galvanized

carbon steel.

b) Manufacturers shall be Grinnell, Tolco, or approved equal.

900-1.6 High-lining Materials for City Forces Work.

1. If required in the Contract Documents and if a Bid item is provided for

“Contractor Furnished Materials for the City Forces High-line Work”, you shall

furnish the necessary materials for the City Forces high-line Work to the City,

as shown on the Plans. You shall coordinate with the City Forces for the

delivery of the materials. The delivery location for furnished materials shall be

determined by the City Forces.

2. Materials shall not be delivered to the City until the City Forces are ready to

install high-lining. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents,

the City will retain the high-lining materials at the end of construction.

900-1.7 High-lining Materials for Contractor Work.

1. You shall furnish all necessary materials for your high-line Work as shown on

the Plans.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 529

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, you shall retain the

high-lining materials at the end of construction.

900-1.8 Submittals for High-lining.

1. Prior to the start of the Work, you shall submit the following:

a) An itemized list of high-lining materials to be used, including

information on:

i. which parts are new and which have been used before

ii. verification that used parts have only been used to convey

potable water

b) Catalog data for all high-lining materials and components required.

c) High-line system installation and detail drawings (shop and Working

Drawings) prior to ordering or purchasing material.

d) High-lining schedule prior to ordering or purchasing material of any

part of the high-lining system.

e) One (1) set of Traffic Control Plans to the Traffic Control Section. You

shall obtain a permit a minimum of 2 Working Days (5 Working Days

when the Work affects a traffic signal) prior to ordering or purchasing

material of each phase of the high-lining system in accordance with

601-2, “TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN (TCP)”.

900-1.9 Payment.

1. The payment for furnished materials for the City Forces high-line Work shall

cover materials (fittings, valves, and hardware) and shall include delivery and

unloading. You shall be paid under the Bid item for “Contractor Furnished

Materials for the City Forces High-line Work”. If you request the City Forces to

high-line in excess of what is shown on the Plans, those costs incurred,

including additional materials due to excess high-lining, shall be at your

expense. Costs incurred by the request of excess high-line Work shall be billed

at the current hourly rates (loaded) according to the schedule available from

the Public Utilities Department. Any request for additional high-lining material

shall have prior approval by the Engineer.

2. The Payment for your high-lining materials (fittings, valves, and hardware),

including delivery and unloading, shall be paid for under the linear foot Bid

item “Furnished Materials for Contractor High-line Work”.

900-2 CONNECTION, CUT AND PLUG, AND CUT-IN MATERIALS.

900-2.1 Connection, Cut and Plug, and Cut-in Materials Provided by the Contractor for

City Forces Work.

1. If required in the Contract Documents, you shall furnish the necessary

materials for the City Forces’ connection, cut and plug, and cut-in Work as

shown on the Plans to the City.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 530

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. You shall coordinate closely with the City Forces for the delivery of materials.

The delivery location for furnished materials shall be determined by the City

Forces.

3. Materials shall not be delivered to the City until the City Forces are ready to

perform their work, unless otherwise specified in writing by the City.

900-2.2 Connection, Cut and Plug, and Cut-in Materials for Contractor Work.

1. You shall furnish the necessary materials for your connection, cut and plug,

and cut-in Work as shown on the Plans to the City.

900-2.3 Payment.

1. Unless specified otherwise, the material for City Forces connection, cut and

plug, and cut-in Work for mains smaller than 16-inch (406.4 mm) shall be

provided by City Forces.

2. If required, payment for furnishing materials for City Forces connection, cut and

plug, and cut-in Work for mains 16-inch (406.4 mm) and larger, as shown on the

Plans, shall be paid under the bid item for “Contractor Furnished Materials for City

Forces Connection, Cut and Plug, and Cut-in Work for Mains 16-inch and Larger”.

3. The payment for furnishing materials for your connection, cut and plug, and

cut-in Work shall cover all necessary materials (fittings and hardware,

excluding valves and pipes), delivery, and unloading. The payment shall be

included within the Bid item of the Work involved and no separate payment

for furnishing those materials shall be made. The payment for furnishing valve

and pipe materials for your connection, cut and plug, and cut-in Work shall be

included in the separate Bid items for each valve and pipe.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 531

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 901 – INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION

901-1 HIGH-LINING INSTALLATION.

901-1.1 General.

1. Only City Forces will isolate the water system, and perform all shutdowns by

closing valves on water mains. Trial shutdowns will be performed by the City

at all shutdown locations. The City is responsible for the cost of the City Forces

work.

2. The Engineer will coordinate all interactions between you and the City Water

Operations Division, the City Water Quality Laboratory, and other City

organizations. Upon your request, the Engineer shall notify the City's Public

Utilities Department’s staff as noted below which shall be required at least 20

Working Days prior to the beginning of Work that involves shutting down

pipelines, high-lining, cutting and plugging of, or making connection to the

existing water mains. Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, contact the

below:

a) Transmission Mains (16 inches and larger) – Senior Water Distribution

Operations Supervisor (619-527-7438)

b) Distribution Mains (less than 16 inches) – Water Systems District

Manager (619-527-7539)

c) Water Facilities – Water Production Superintendent (619-527-7465)

and Senior Water Distribution Operations Supervisor (619-527-7438)

901-1.1.1 High-lining Installation by City Forces.

1. City Forces shall be responsible for notifying and providing the residents with

water services, by means of high-lining (temporary above ground supply lines),

during construction and as shown on the Plans, unless otherwise specified

in the Contract Documents.

901-1.1.2 High-lining Installation by the Contractor.

1. If specified and when a bid item is provided for “High-lining Installation

by the Contractor”, you shall be responsible for notifying and providing the

residents with water services, by means of high-lining (temporary above

ground supply lines), during construction and as shown on the Plans.

2. You shall bypass sections of the existing water main line with a temporary

above-ground supply line (high-line) to services affected by the water main

replacement and in phases shown in the contract documents.

3. You shall provide the Engineer a schedule for the high-line Work at least 20

Working Days prior to work required by the City Forces (connections or

disconnects).

4. You shall phase the Project such that all structures in the area are within 1,000

feet (304.8 m) of an active fire hydrant, measured using streets, private roads,

or other routes driven by emergency vehicles. The Work includes shutoff

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 532

THE “WHITEBOOK”

valves at intersections to isolate sections of the high-line if there is a leak or

break to minimize the water service shutdowns.

5. The high-line system shall have a dual feed and provide continuous full service

to connected water services until the new water main line is installed and in

operation. The Work shall be coordinated, scheduled, and performed to

minimize disruption of water services during installation and removal of the

high-line system.

6. You shall flush, disinfect, and leak test the high-line in accordance with the

applicable codes and regulations prior to connection Work beginning.

7. You shall perform connections to high-lining system and disconnects to

meters and fire hydrants, after the City has verified the high-lining system has

passed bacteriological testing. Connections shall be properly covered with

cold mix asphalt for protection.

8. Bacteriological sampling and testing will be performed by the City Water

Quality Laboratory.

9. You shall ensure proper installation, pressure control, and operation of the

high-line to avoid damage to water users’ property and related public health

and safety issues.

10. You shall transfer the new fire services and water services to the meter after

the new mains have been accepted. While making the transfers and once

service is interrupted, you shall continuously work until service is fully

restored.

11. You shall notify the Engineer 5 Working Days prior to any Work that will affect

water service. You shall prepare and distribute, after approval by the City,

written notification 5 Working Days prior to starting Work on any water main

that will affect water service. This notification shall be delivered door-to-door

to water users in the affected area. A copy shall be delivered to the Engineer

on the date of user notification.

12. For each service connection, you shall also notify the customer immediately

prior to beginning Work which will interrupt service and shall again notify the

customer immediately after the service is restored.

13. You shall notify all consumers with fire services 20 Working Days in advance

of any shutdown.

14. You shall dismantle and remove the high-line system from the Site, and

restore streets, gutters, fire hydrants, other disturbed facilities, and surface

improvements within 5 Working Days from the time the reconnections are

completed.

15. Parallel mains, fire services, and water services which are not high-lined shall

be connected to the meter only after the adjacent sections of the new main

have been fully constructed, hydrostatic and chlorine residual tested, and

certified acceptable by the Public Utilities Department.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 533

THE “WHITEBOOK”

16. Cleanliness of the main shall not be compromised. The Engineer will decide

whether re-disinfection is required at your expense.

17. Services shall be thoroughly flushed by you prior to restoration of water supply

to customer's premises.

901-1.1.2.1 Construction.

1. Workmanship:

a) High-lining system shall be installed and maintained such that it is

neat, orderly, and leak-free, and shall be arranged to minimize

interference with or present a hazard to normal usage of streets,

sidewalks, driveways, and other affected facilities.

b) High-lining system shall be installed in such a manner that does not

cause flooding or erosion to the surrounding area.

c) Excess materials and debris shall be removed from the Site by the end

of the Working Day on which they are generated.

d) Highlining crossings and run at curb ramps shall be installed and

maintained per SDW-174.

2. Water Users Notification: You shall coordinate the Work to minimize the

duration of water shutdowns and outages.

3. Emergency Telephone:

a) The 24-hour Emergency Services telephone number which shall be

listed in user notifications, imprinted on safety barricades, and posted

in the Work area shall be your emergency number.

b) On receipt of notification of a problem in the Work area, you shall

immediately notify the Engineer and Water Operations Division (City

Forces). In case of emergency such as life threatening situations, you

shall contact Emergency Services.

4. Repair and Maintenance:

a) You shall maintain the temporary asphalt (coldmix) protective ramps

for the duration of the high-line installation. You shall repair coldmix

damage on the day of discovery.

b) You shall repair and maintain the high-line system during Normal

Working Hours.

c) You shall provide replacement parts needed for highline repairs. Leaks

or damage shall be repaired within one hour of discovery or

reporting. These repair criteria shall apply to leaks or damage arising

for any reason, including vandalism and damage by your personnel,

equipment, or Work activities.

d) If the repair involves any disassembly of the system, you shall disinfect

and flush the affected components according to AWWA C651. This

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 534

THE “WHITEBOOK”

shall be done in the presence of the City Public Utilities Department,

Water Operations Division employee familiar with the water system.

e) Repair Work shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer and the

City Public Utilities Department, Water Operations employee familiar

with the water system. At the sole discretion of the Engineer, you shall

be billed separately for non-responsive or otherwise unacceptable

repair and maintenance Work that the City must do to restore any

service.

5. Problem Reporting: High-line system problems discovered or reported and

corrective actions taken shall be documented in your daily log.

6. Traffic Control: You shall provide traffic control for all high-line Work.

7. Schedules and Timing:

a) The time required to furnish and install the high-lining system as a

whole or in accordance with phases, shall be included in the Contract

Time. The high-lining schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for

review and approval.

b) You shall coordinate high-lining operations such that the Project’s

Schedule is not affected or delayed.

8. Installation of High-line Piping System:

a) The high-line piping system shall be installed in accordance with the

approved schedule.

b) Piping phases shall be installed in loop systems, with a fire hydrant

connection to the water supply at each end.

c) The high-line piping system shall be inspected and approved by the

City Public Utilities Department, Operations Division familiar with the

water system via the Engineer prior to the City Forces charging the

system with potable water or connecting to any user service line.

d) The high-line piping shall be installed along both sides of streets to

supply water service connections to water meters. Meter service

connection shall not be routed across a roadway, driveway, or other

area subject to vehicular traffic.

e) Shutoff valves shall be installed at each fire hydrant connection, along

the piping runs at the check valve, on either side of high-line tee fittings

for user connections to all meters and at the ends of cul-de-sac blind

runs to permit flushing. The lever handles shall be removed from the

valves to prevent unauthorized operation.

f) The 2-bolt grooved couplings shall be installed with the bolts oriented

as shown on SDW-173, “Highlining Crossing & Run at Driveways and

Curbs”. This orientation permits the pipe to be laid closer to the curb

and is less susceptible to damage by auto traffic. To prevent damage

to auto tires, coupling bolts shall not extend beyond the thickness of

the nut when installed and tightened.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 535

THE “WHITEBOOK”

9. Fire Hydrant Connection:

a) The fire hydrant connection shall be laid as shown in SDW-171, “4–Inch

Fire Hydrant High-lining Connection”. You shall make the final

connection to the fire hydrant system.

b) You shall use elbows of different bend angles as required to align the

connection fittings parallel to the sidewalk or curb.

c) In situations where the fire hydrant is located such that piping must

cross a sidewalk, piping shall be routed under the sidewalk surface in

a 6 inches wide x 6 inches deep (152.4 mm x 152.4 mm) saw cut trench

by you. The trench backfill and temporary asphalt surface shall be

tamped and compacted to provide a smooth, safe surface for the

duration of the high-lining by you. Routing the pipe above the sidewalk

shall not be permitted.

10. User Connection (Service Meters):

a) You shall furnish and install all material and labor as specified. Connect

the water services to the system in accordance with SDW-172,

“Residential User Highlining Connection”.

b) Connection to meters sized up to 1-inch (25.4 mm) shall be as shown

in or the details included in the Contract Documents for Residential

User High-lining Connection.

c) Connection to meters 1½ inches (38.1 mm) and larger shall be made

with 2 inches (50.8 mm) galvanized steel pipe with grooved

connections.

d) A shutoff valve in the user connection line shall be provided at the

high-line tee fitting.

e) Meters 1½ inches (38.1 mm) and larger typically have 2-bolt flanged

connections. Provide adapters as required to connect to specific

meters.

f) Sidewalk crossings may be routed above ground and covered with an

ADA compliant cable cover and ramp. Details shall be included in the

Working Drawings for Driveway High-lining Crossing or Curb Ramp

High-lining Crossing, Type Driveway or Accessible Crossing, and as

required elsewhere in this subsection.

g) Field cut, groove, and fit pipe as required to make user connections.

Sections of the high-line piping shall be cut such that service tees are

as close as possible to the user meters and service connection hose or

piping length is minimized.

h) Provide barricades and cones as required by the approved Traffic

Control Plan at service tees and meters and as required to ensure

public safety.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 536

THE “WHITEBOOK”

11. Roadway Crossing and Trenching:

a) Portions of the high-line system shall be trenched and buried to avoid

interference with roadways.

b) Wherever piping is required to cross a roadway, piping shall be routed

below the roadway surface in a 6 inches wide x 6 inches deep (152.4

mm x 152.4 mm) (approximate dimensions) trench. Routing the pipe

above the roadway shall not be permitted. The trench backfill and

temporary asphalt surface shall be tamped and compacted to provide

a smooth, safe surface for the duration of the high-lining.

12. Vehicle Driveway or Curb Ramp Crossing: Wherever the high-line piping

crosses a vehicle driveway or curb ramp crossing, the piping shall be provided

with temporary asphalt crossing ramps as shown in the Standard Drawings or

the details included in the Contract Documents for Typical Driveway or Curb

Ramp Crossing. The temporary asphalt crossing ramps shall be tamped and

compacted to provide a smooth, safe surface for the duration of the high-

lining. The temporary asphalt crossing ramps shall be constructed such that

they do not interfere with normal storm water or other drainage flows. They shall

not divert drainage flows either into the street or onto adjacent properties. Where

required to achieve proper drainage, sections of galvanized steel piping shall be

installed in the crossing ramp parallel to the high-line piping to allow for drainage

past the crossing ramp. Crossing ramp installations shall be inspected and

approved by the Engineer.

13. Corners and Curves:

a) Routing the high-lining system around corners and curves shall be

accomplished by the use of 2 inches (50.8 mm) hose or PVC pipe.

b) A 2 inches (50.8 mm) shutoff valve shall be installed at each end of the

curve.

c) Portions of corners and curves with driveways or curb ramps shall be

crossed with galvanized steel or PVC pipe as shown on the Standard

Drawings or the details included in the Contract Documents for

Driveway or Curb Ramp High-lining Crossing. Use of hose shall not be

permitted at these crossings.

d) Corners and curves with bend radii too short to be accommodated by

hose shall be routed with short sections of pipe and grooved elbows

of different bend angles. Pipe shall be cut, grooved, and fitted in the

field as required.

e) Portions of the piping and fittings extending 12 inches (304.8 mm) or

more from the curb shall be protected with temporary asphalt

covering of not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) thickness above the pipe

and fittings. The temporary asphalt covering shall be sloped over the

pipe and tamped in place to provide a durable surface.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 537

THE “WHITEBOOK”

901-1.1.2.2 Start-up Procedures.

1. System Leak Test:

a) You shall charge the system with available water pressure, bleed the

system of air, and verify that the entire system is filled.

b) You shall visually inspect the system for leaks and repair any leaks

discovered. The system will not be accepted by the Engineer until all

leaks are repaired.

2. Flushing, Disinfection, and Bacteriological Testing of High-line Mains:

a) You shall not use the high-lining system to fill and flush any main or

piping.

b) After the high-line system is fully assembled but not hooked-up to the

consumer meters, you shall flush the piping with potable water from

a commercial metered source until the effluent is clear and free of dirt

and debris. You shall designate the disposal of flushing water via

approved methods.

c) You shall disinfect the high-lining piping according to AWWA C651 and

306-8.9.4, “Disinfection.”

d) The transport, storage, and handling of disinfection materials shall be

in accordance with the CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations

and Emergency Response, CFR 49.12 Hazardous Materials

Regulations, and the General Industry Safety Orders of the California

Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5194.

e) Pipeline disinfection shall be accomplished with calcium hypochlorite

tablets. Short pipe sections, valves, fittings, and similar small portions

of the system shall be disinfected with a solution of sodium

hypochlorite.

f) You shall notify the Engineer 5 Working Days in advance of the date

that the high-line system will be disinfected and ready for

bacteriological testing.

g) The City Water Quality Laboratory will collect samples from three

points in the high-lining piping. Two points shall be from taps near the

fire hydrant connections at each end and one from a tap near the

center of the piping.

h) The City Water Quality Laboratory shall perform bacteriological testing

in accordance with AWWA C651 and the City standards.

i) The high-line system shall not be accepted until two consecutive sets

of acceptable samples collected 24 hours apart pass tests

administered by the City Water Quality Laboratory, and until written

notice of acceptance is issued by the Engineer. The City Water Quality

Laboratory shall be the sole judge as to whether or not the test

samples meet or exceed the established test criteria.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 538

THE “WHITEBOOK”

j) In the event that the high-line piping system fails to pass the required

bacteriological testing, you will be expected to help investigate and

perform corrective actions if warranted by the findings and you shall

re-flush and re-disinfect the lines for re-testing at no additional cost to

the City. Disposal of chlorinated water for retesting shall be in

accordance with the City standards and regulations. Indiscriminate

disposal of chlorinated water shall not be permitted.

k) On acceptance of bacteriological testing, you shall drain and flush the

highline piping system according to AWWA C651 and the City

standards. Disposal of chlorinated water shall be in accordance with

the City standards and regulations. Indiscriminate disposal of

chlorinated water shall not be permitted.

3. Restoration of Normal Service:

a) You shall not flush the new main line with water from the high-line

system.

b) Restoration of user service to the new water main line shall be done

only after installation, disinfection, and bacteriological testing of the

new water main line is verified by the City and when user connection

lines are completed.

c) Transfer of the water service from the high-line to the new water main

line shall be performed by you.

901-1.1.2.3 High-lining Removed by the Contractor.

1. After restoration of normal service to water users, you shall disconnect high-

lining from all services, breakdown and fully disassemble the high-line system

and remove all high-line construction materials and debris from the area by

the end of the Working Day.

2. After removing all high-lining construction material and debris, you shall

restore streets, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, fire hydrants, and other disturbed

facilities in accordance with PART 4 - EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS. Street

resurfacing shall be restored in accordance with the SDG-107, “Trench

Resurfacing for Asphalt Concrete Surfaced Streets” and SDG-108, “Trench

Resurfacing for PCC Surfaced Streets”.

901-1.2 Reference Specifications, Codes, and Standards.

1. Reference specifications, codes, and standards shall be the latest unless a

specific code issue date, edition, or adoption date is specified.

2. The Work shall be done in accordance with the applicable AWWA standards

and State Department of Public Health codes and shall be in accordance with

the applicable parts of the following codes and safety regulations:

a) California Fire Code.

b) California Mechanical Code.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 539

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) California Plumbing Code.

d) City of San Diego Water and Municipal Sewer Approved Materials List,

where applicable.

e) State Department of Public Health, Office of Drinking Water

publication titled, “Approved for Service Isolation in California Public

Water Systems.”

f) Applicable City, local, state, and federal codes and regulations.

3. The Work shall be in accordance with the following commercial and industrial

standards:

a) ANSI/AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Pipe Joints.

b) ASTM A53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc

Coated, Welded and Seamless.

c) ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

d) ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dipped) on

Iron and Steel Hardware

e) ASTM A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 6,000 psi

Tensile Strength.

f) ASTM A395 & 536 - Specification for Snap-Joint Coupling grade 65 45-

15 and grade 64-45-12 coating orange enamel.

g) AWWA C511 - Standard for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow

Prevention Assembly.

h) AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains

901-1.3 Payment.

1. The Bid item provided for the high-line installation Work by the Contractor as

described in 901-1.1.2, “High-lining Installation by the Contractor” shall be full

compensation for installing, maintaining, and repairing the high-lining system

during normal working hours. High-lining materials shall be paid for separately

in accordance with 900-1.9, “Payment”.

2. The Bid item provided for the removal of high-lining shall cover the Work

described in 901-1.1.2.3, “High-Lining Removed by the Contractor”. The

payment for removing high-lining shall include the removal of the high-lining

material and the restoration of existing improvements and trenches shall be

included under the Bid item for “High-lining Removed by the Contractor”.

3. The payment for the temporary asphalt material and temporary resurfacing

Work for the protection of high-lining shall be included under the Bid item for

“Temporary Resurfacing” in accordance with 306-15.9, “Temporary

Resurfacing”.

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 540

THE “WHITEBOOK”

901-2 CONNECTIONS TO THE EXISTING SYSTEM.

901-2.1. Coordination During Connections to the Existing System by City Forces.

901-2.1.1 General.

1. The City Forces shall be responsible for making connections and cut-ins to the

existing mains as part of the base Bid, unless otherwise specified in the

Contract Documents.

901-2.1.2 Utility Verification for Connection Location.

1. You shall provide information about the condition of the pipes and valves prior

to connections.

2. You shall pothole the location and depth of all utilities to verify that there are

no utility conflicts prior to excavation.

3. You shall locate and confirm vertical and horizontal locations, size, condition,

materials, types of fittings and joints of existing water mains to which

connections are to be made.

901-2.1.3 Submittals.

1. You shall submit Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and other information

prior to start of construction.

2. The drawings and other descriptive material shall adequately describe

procedures to be used, materials to be furnished, any related pipeline

appurtenances, and trench shoring.

3. Each drawing shall be reproducible original, accompanied by 6 copies of all

submitted information. If approved without change or correction, two

approved copies will be returned to you.

901-2.2 Connections to the Existing System by the Contractor.

901-2.2.1 General.

1. If shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, you shall make

the connection (cut-in or tie-in) to the existing mains as shown on the Plans,

specified in these specifications, and in conformance with the latest standards

of the State Department of Public Health.

2. Suitable facilities shall be provided by you for proper de-watering, drainage,

and disposal of all water removed from the excavation and pipe without

damage to adjacent property.

3. You shall locate and expose the existing water main to which connection is to

be made prior to and in advance of trenching to permit grade and alignment

changes as approved by the Engineer.

4. In the presence of the Engineer or an authorized City Public Utilities

Department, Water Operations Division employee familiar with the water

system), you shall make the connections as shown on the Plans regardless of

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 541

THE “WHITEBOOK”

the condition or location of the existing pipe, valves, and fittings with no

adjustment in the Contract Price.

5. The Engineer will coordinate all interactions between you and the City Water

Operations Division, the City Water Quality Laboratory, and other City

organizations. Upon your request, the Engineer shall notify the City's Public

Utilities Department as noted below which shall be required at least 20

Working Days prior to the beginning of Work that involves shutting down

pipelines, high-lining, cutting and plugging of, or making connection to the

existing water mains. Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, contact the

below:

a) Transmission Mains (16 inches and larger) – Senior Water Distribution

Operations Supervisor (619-527-7438)

b) Distribution Mains (less than 16 inches) – Water Systems District

Manager (619-527-7539)

c) Water Facilities – Water Production Superintendent (619-527-7465)

and Senior Water Distribution Operations Supervisor (619-527-7438)

901-2.2.2 Submittals.

1. You shall submit Shop Drawings and Working Drawings for the cut and plug of

existing water mains larger than 16 inches (406.4 mm) diameter prior to the

start of construction.

2. The submittals shall adequately describe procedures to be used, such as

distance from valves, thrust blocks for temporary plugs, materials to be

furnished, any related pipeline appurtenances, and trench shoring. Each

drawing shall be reproducible original, accompanied by 6 copies of all

submitted information.

3. If approved without change or correction, 2 approved copies will be returned

to you.

4. You shall submit traffic control drawings and obtain the Traffic Control Permit

from the City prior to the start of the cut and plug and reconnection

operations.

901-2.2.3 Notification and Timing of Shutdowns.

1. You shall coordinate the Work with the City Water Operations Division, and

notify them a minimum of 20 Working Days after the Engineer’s approval of

your Work plan and prior to any shutdown of an existing water line. The City

Forces will perform all shutdowns including trial and final attempts.

2. If you fail to keep the field appointments, the City will bill you for City Forces

waiting or standby time and the costs incurred by the City for notification of

its customers for the subsequent appointment.

3. You shall schedule the requested shutdowns during low demand

times. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, you shall assume residential

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 542

THE “WHITEBOOK”

areas may be done during the day and shall assume that all commercial,

industrial, school, and business areas shall be shut down at night.

4. No shutdowns to the system shall be scheduled for the week of Thanksgiving

Day, between Christmas Day and New Year’s Day, and any moratoriums

specified in the Contract Documents.

5. You shall coordinate with the City’s Public Utilities Department to verify the

appropriate times of shutdowns prior to construction. The City may refuse to

shut down a water line on the day requested by you due to operational

circumstances.

6. You shall notify the Engineer 5 Working Days prior to any Work that will affect

water service.

7. You shall prepare and distribute, after approval by the City, written notification

5 Working Days prior to starting Work on any water main that will affect

service. This notification shall be delivered door-to-door to water users in the

affected area. A copy shall be delivered to the Engineer on the date of user

notification.

8. You shall notify all consumers with fire services 20 Working Days in advance

of any shutdown.

901-2.2.4 Preparation for Connection.

1. Prior to connecting to the existing water main, you shall have all personnel,

material, and equipment ready to connect the fittings to the existing mains to

minimize the shutdown time.

2. The City may postpone or reschedule any shutdown operation if, for any

reason, the City determines that you are not prepared with competent

personnel, equipment, or materials to proceed with the connection.

3. When installing a cut-in tee or cross with new valves, reducers, or other fittings

that are larger than the existing pipe, the new assembly shall be installed at

the depth sufficient to allow the valve to remain below the subgrade of the

street which may necessitate lowering the existing pipe.

4. You shall provide and install the entire assembly (valves, reducers, and any

other hardware) necessary under the City inspection in accordance with the

City Standards.

5. The entire assembly shall be connected in advance to facilitate the expedient

connection to the existing main.

6. You shall clean and disinfect the connection in accordance with AWWA C651.

7. Upon receiving notification of a shutdown date by City Water Operations

Division for your planned connection, you shall trench and steel plate the pit(s)

necessary to make the connection(s) prior to the start of the scheduled

shutdown to facilitate an expedient connection to the existing main. Shutdown

of the water main and connection shall be completed within the timeline

agreed upon and as specified by City Water Operations staff so that water is

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 543

THE “WHITEBOOK”

restored in accordance with the shutdown notification and as needed for

operation of the water system.

8. If you anticipate connection operations exceed the time as identified in the

notification, causes health and safety risks, or disrupts water services to the

consumers, you shall notify the Engineer and the City’s Station 38 at (619) 527-

7500 as soon as possible for assistance to provide potable water and

temporary high-lines to restore water to the affected consumers.

9. The City will order necessary corrective measures. All costs for corrective

measures shall be paid by you. You shall be liable to the City for the costs of

the City Forces’ emergency work.

10. If existing valves leak excessively once they have been closed during the

isolation of the segment that is going to be connected, you shall use methods

at your disposal to work with the resulting leakage.

11. If the influx of water cannot be controlled with two 2-inch (50.8 mm) pumps

sufficiently to complete the Work, then the shutdown shall be rescheduled, as

agreed upon by you and the City.

12. After the connection operation (for mains or services), you shall request the

Engineer notify City Water Laboratory take water samples for bacteriological

tests in accordance with Section 7 of the AWWA C651. If the test does not pass,

you will be expected to help investigate and perform corrective actions if

warranted by the findings.

13. Bacteriological Testing (Bac-T) sample results are valid only for 14 Calendar

Days from the date the results are first made available. If any system is not

placed into service within the 14 Calendar Days, then bacteriological testing

shall be reinitiated.

901-2.3 Cut and Plug of the Existing Main.

901-2.3.1 General.

1. Prior to the cutting and plugging of existing water mains, you shall have all

personnel, material, and equipment ready to minimize the shutdown

time. You shall organize its workforce, equipment, and operations to protect

the existing water main while performing the Work.

2. Shutdown of water main and cut and plug operations shall be coordinated

with high-lining operations, shall be performed during low demand times, and

shall be completed within the timeline specified.

3. If the existing valves leak once closed during the isolation of the segment that

is going to be plugged, you shall use methods at your disposal to Work with

the resulting leakage. If the influx of water cannot be controlled with two 2-

inch pumps sufficiently to complete the Work, then the shutdown shall be

rescheduled, as agreed upon by you and the City.

4. If the cut and plug operations exceed the time as identified in the notification,

causes health and safety issues, or disrupts water service to the consumers,

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 544

THE “WHITEBOOK”

you shall notify the Engineer and the City’s Station 38 at (619) 527-7500 for

assistance. The City will provide potable water and or temporary high-lining to

restore water to the affected consumers. The City will order necessary

corrective measures.

5. All costs for corrective measures shall be paid by you. You shall be liable to the

City for the costs of the City Forces’ emergency work.

901-2.3.2 Utility Verification for Cut and Plug Location.

1. You shall pothole the location and depth of all utilities to verify that there are

no utility conflicts prior to excavation.

2. You shall locate and confirm vertical and horizontal locations, sizes, condition,

and materials of existing water mains.

901-2.3.3 Cut and Plug of the Existing Main by City Forces.

1. The City Forces will isolate existing water mains to be replaced by you. The

City Forces will mark locations, elevations, and approximate grades of existing

mains on street pavement and will record this information for future use. You

shall consult and cooperate with the City Forces’ supervisor to ensure that the

information is understood and used correctly.

2. Within the last 10 feet (3 m) to be installed by you, you shall install bends,

concrete thrust blocks, short lengths of pipe, and other appurtenances

necessary to put the new installation on line and grade with the existing pipe.

901-2.3.4 Cut and Plug of the Existing Main by the Contractor.

1. You shall expose the existing water main where the Work ends.

2. You shall be responsible for determining the elevations of existing water

mains and fittings.

3. The new water main shall be at the same grade and alignment as the existing

main and shall be no farther away than 10 feet (3 m) from the existing water

main.

901-2.3.4.1 Quality Control.

1. Cut and plug of existing water lines shall be completed in a safe, neat, and

orderly manner. Plugs shall be capable of blocking the pressurized main with

no visual leak detected. You shall take every precaution necessary to prevent

trench water, dirt, or debris from entering the water mains during the capping

or plugging operation.

2. Cut and plug Work shall not proceed if the City Public Utilities Department

Operations Division employee familiar with the water system is not present

for the duration of the cut and plug Work.

3. After the cut and plug operation, the water main and its appurtenances shall

be disinfected and field tested by you in accordance with the latest edition of

AWWA C651. You shall also request the Engineer to notify the City Water

Laboratory to take water samples for bacteriological tests in accordance with

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 545

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Section 7 of the AWWA C651. If the test does not pass, you will be expected to

help investigate and perform corrective actions if warranted by the findings.

4. Suitable facilities shall be provided for proper de-watering, drainage, and

disposal of all water removed from the excavation or pipe without damage to

adjacent property.

901-2.3.4.2 Water Main Repairs During Cut and Plug Operations.

1. If the water main is damaged by your operations, you shall immediately notify

the Engineer and the City Water Operations Division representative or the

City’s Station 38.

2. The City Forces will perform all necessary repairs to the water main. You shall

be liable to the City for the costs of the City Forces’ repair work.

901-2.3.4.3 Operation of Valves.

1. Valves on the City’s water main system shall be cleaned and operated only by

the City Forces.

2. You may exercise valves on services as necessary to complete the Work.

901-2.4 Pavement Restoration.

1. You shall restore surfaced areas to its original grade and condition in

accordance with Part 4 - EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS.

2. After the final connection is completed, you shall remove all temporary

resurfacing, compact sub-grade and restore affected area with permanent

resurfacing in accordance with the Standard Drawings or as shown on the

Plans.

901-2.4.1 Compaction.

1. Compaction of the trench after installation of the water main shall be in

accordance with 306-12, “BACKFILL”.

2. If the Work is located within a different jurisdiction or agency other than the

City or private easement, compaction shall meet the requirements of that

agency or utility granting the permit.

901-2.5 Payment.

1. The payment for connecting to the existing system (cut-in or tie-in Work),

regardless of the time or the day of the scheduled shutdown, excluding new

main interconnections between various phases, shall be included under the

Bid items for the connection (cut-in or tie-in Work) and shall include the

following:

a) Trenching, furnishing, and installing all materials and labor to

complete the Work, including up to 10 feet of new water pipe

b) Potholing

c) Protecting the water main while performing the Work

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 546

THE “WHITEBOOK”

d) Coordinating your Work with the City Forces

e) Coordinating with the community (community outreach including

door hangers)

f) Traffic control and construction BMPs

g) Pavement Restoration

2. The payment for cut and plug Work of the existing system, regardless of the

time or the day of the scheduled shutdown, shall be included under the Bid

item for “Cut and Plug by the Contractor” and shall include coordination of

Work with City Forces, any scheduling impact costs, community outreach,

furnishing and installing of materials, and traffic control. Potholing and

protecting the water main while performing the Work shall be included in this

payment.

3. Traffic control, saw cutting the trench area, trench caps, and other spot repairs

in the vicinity of the disturbed area at each restored connection shall be

included in the square foot Bid item for “Pavement Restoration for Final

Connection”. Asphalt overlay and slurry seal Work shall be paid for under

separate Bid items.

4. Interconnections between various phases of newly installed watermains shall

be included in the associated pipeline bid items.

END OF PART 9 - WATER WORKS

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 547

THE “WHITEBOOK”



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 548

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ADD: PART 10

STORM WATER

SECTION 1000 - GENERAL

1000-1 GENERAL.

1. You shall comply with the most current City of San Diego Storm Water

Standards. The municipal permit requires development and implementation

of a Standard Urban Storm Water Mitigation Plan (SUSMP) to reduce the

negative impacts from development runoff to receiving waters.

2. You shall apply the San Diego Regional Water Quality Control Board standards

to the project and shall provide all design and technical documentation

needed to comply with these standards.

3. Unless specified otherwise, you shall obtain the regulatory approvals and

permits required for the Project.

4. All costs, fines, penalties, additional mitigation, or litigation costs associated

with your negligence to comply with any of the permit conditions, federal,

state, and local laws, ordinances, codes, orders and regulations, shall be your

responsibility.

5. As-Built Drawings shall accurately record the final location and configuration

of permanent BMPs.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 549

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 1001 – CONSTRUCTION BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPs)

1001-1 GENERAL.

1. The Project will be subject to the Storm Water Pollution control requirements

listed on the Plans or as specified in the SSP.

2. For Contracts subject to the Construction General Permit (CGP), your QSD shall

verify the City’s assessment prior to Bid submittal.

3. These specifications set the City’s minimum requirements. You shall comply

with the requirements of the City’s Storm Water Standards Manual, Municipal

Permit, and Construction General Permit for any construction or demolition

activity that results in a land disturbance.

4. You shall pay the City for regulatory or court imposed fees, fines, or penalties

imposed on the City arising from your failure to complete the Work in

compliance with the requirements of the City’s Storm Water Standards

Manual, Municipal Permit, and CGP.

5. You shall be responsible for delays associated with your failure to complete

the Work in compliance with the requirements of the City’s Storm Water

Standards Manual, Municipal Permit, and CGP.

6. Conform to all applicable local, state, and Federal regulations and laws

pertaining to water pollution control. You shall conduct and schedule its

operations and follow and implement best management practices in such a

manner as to prevent water pollution.

You shall provide the City with email addresses (Owner, Project Manager,

Superintendent,Foreman,QSP/QCP,etc.)tobelinkedtotheBMP/Stormwater

Module. You shall notify the City within 24 hours if any of the contact

person/email address has been changed/updated so the City can update the

projectcontactinformation.

1001-1.1 Terms, Definitions, and Acronyms.

1. The terms, definitions, and acronyms listed in Appendices 5 and 6 of the CGP

shall apply except as follows:

a) Attachments - Attachments referenced in these specifications are

from the CGP. Attachments can be viewed at the following website:

http://www.swrcb.ca.gov/water_issues/programs/stormwater/constpermits.shtml

b) Best Management Practice (BMP).

i. A method that is implemented to protect water quality and

prevent or reduce the potential for pollution associated with

storm water runoff and construction activities. Examples

include scheduling of activities, prohibitions of practices,

maintenance procedures, and other management practices.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 550

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ii. Any program, process, siting criteria, technology, treatment

requirement, or operating method, measure, or device that

controls, prevents, removes, or reduces pollution.

c) Construction General Permit (CGP) - National Pollutant Discharge

Elimination System permit for Storm Water Discharges associated with

the construction and land disturbance activities (State Water

Resources Control Board Permit, Order No. 2009-0009 DWQ).

d) Discharger - The Contractor (You).

e) Legally Responsible Person (LRP) - The City of San Diego for the City’s

Public Works projects.

f) Linear Utility/Overhead Project (LUP) - LUPs include the following:

i. Any conveyance, pipe, or pipeline for the transportation of any

gaseous liquid including water, wastewater for domestic

municipal services, liquescent, or slurry substances.

ii. Any cable line or wire for the transmission of electrical energy.

iii. Any cable line or wire for communications such as telephones,

telegraphs, radios or television messages.

iv. Associated ancillary facilities.

g) Maximum Extent Practicable (MEP) - The technology-based

standard established by the United States Congress in the Clean Water

Act 402(p)(3)(B)(iii) that municipal discharges of urban runoff shall

meet. MEP generally emphasizes pollution prevention and source

control BMPs primarily as the first line of defense in combination with

treatment methods serving as backup and additional lines of defense.

h) Municipal Permit - Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4)

permit for San Diego Region. Order Number R9-2013-0001 and all

other subsequent amendments.



i) Numeric Effluent Limitation (NEL) - Any numeric or narrative

restriction imposed on quantities, discharge rates, and concentrations

of pollutants, which are discharged from point sources into waters of

the United States, the waters of the contiguous zone, or the ocean. The

CGP contains both narrative Effluent limitations and numeric Effluent

limitations for pH and Turbidity.

j) Permit Registration Documents (PRD) - Includes a Notice of Intent

(NOI), Risk Assessment, Site Map, Storm Water Pollution Prevention

Plan (SWPPP), Annual Fee, and a signed Certification Statement.

k) Qualified Contact Person (QCP) - The trained and competent person

you employ that shall be responsible for the implementation of a

WPCP.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 551

THE “WHITEBOOK”

l) Rainfall Erosivity Waiver - For projects subject to the CGP, the EPA’s

Small Construction Erosivity Waiver applies to sites between one and

five acres demonstrating that there are no adverse water quality

impacts. Projects which qualify for a Rainfall Erosivity Waiver shall

submit a WPCP in lieu of a SWPPP as part of the PRDs.

m) Rain Event Action Plan (REAP) - A Rain Event Action Plan (REAP) is a

written document, specific for each rain event. A REAP shall be

designed that when implemented it protects all exposed portions of

the site within 48 hours of any likely precipitation event forecast of 50%

or greater probability. The CGP requires Risk Level 2 and 3 dischargers

to develop and implement a REAP designed to protect all exposed

portions of their sites within 48 hours prior to any likely precipitation

event. The REAP requirement is designed to ensure that the discharger

has adequate materials, staff, and time to implement erosion and

sediment control measures that are intended to reduce the amount of

sediment and other pollutants generated from the active site. A REAP

shall be developed when there is likely a forecast of 50% or greater

probability of precipitation in the project area.

n) Storm Water Multiple Application and Report Tracking System

(SMARTS) - The Storm Water program regulates storm water

discharges from locations such as industrial facilities, construction

sites, and small linear projects. SMARTS is also responsible for

processing, reviewing, updating, terminating Notices of Intent (NOIs),

annual reports, and maintaining the billing status of each discharger.

SMARTS has been developed to provide an online tool to assist

dischargers in submitting their NOIs, NOTs, and Annual Reports, as

well as, viewing/printing Receipt Letters, monitoring the status of

submitted documents, and viewing their application/renewal fee

statements. The system shall also allow the Regional Board and State

Board staff to process and track the discharger’s submitted

documents. SMARTS is a user account and password protected system

where a valid user account and password is needed to access the

system.

o) Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) - Site specific

document required by the CGP and Municipal Permit.

p) Water Pollution Control Plan (WPCP) - A plan required by the City

Storm Water Standards Manual for projects with less than 1 acre of

ground disturbance, inclusive of any unpaved areas associated with

the Project or for projects which exceed an acre and qualify for a

Rainfall Erosivity Waiver, which is determined to have a potential to

impact water quality during construction.

q) Water Quality Sensitive Area - Areas that include, but are not limited

to, all Clean Water Act 303(d) impaired water bodies (“303[d] water

bodies”); areas designated as an “Area of Special Biological



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 552

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Significance” (ASBS) by the State Water Resources Control Board

(Water Quality Control Plan for the San Diego Basin (1994) and

amendments); water bodies designated as having a RARE beneficial

use by the State Water Resources Control Board (Water Quality Control

Plan for the San Diego Basin (1994) and amendments), or areas

designated as preserves or their equivalent under the Multiple Species

Conservation Program (MSCP) within the Cities and County of San

Diego. The limits of ASBS are those defined in the Water Quality

Control Plan for the San Diego Basin (1994 and amendments). The City

of San Diego has identified the Los Penasquitos Lagoon as an impaired

water body (CWA 303(d)) for sediment. The City of San Diego has two

(2) areas of ASBS, La Jolla (#29) and San Diego-Scripps (#31).

r) WDID # - Waste Discharge Identification number required prior to the

start of any construction activities for projects that disturb more than

one acre.

WeatherTriggeredActionPlans(WTAP)‐AWTAPisawrittendocument

andcorrespondingsitemapdesignedtobeusedasaplanningtoolfor

theQualifiedContactPerson(QCP)toprotectareasofexposedsoilsand

materialspriortoforecastedrain.Allprojectsthatrequiredevelopment

ofapollutioncontrolplanpertheStormWaterStandardsManualand

havealanddisturbancegreaterthan5,000squarefeetorgreaterthana

5‐footelevationdifferentialovertheentireprojectareaarerequiredto

developaWTAP.

1001-1.2 Illegal Discharges.

1. Any discharge to the MS4 that is not composed entirely of storm water except

discharges allowed under an NPDES permit and discharges conditionally

allowed under the MS4 permit, as set forth in San Diego Municipal Code

section 43.0305. Illicit discharges include irrigation runoff discharged to the

MS4.

1001-1.3 Additional Control Requirements for Areas of Special Biological Significance.

1. These are ocean areas requiring protection of species or biological

communities to the extent that alteration of natural water quality is

undesirable and are classified as a subset of State Water Quality Protection

Areas. For construction sites located within the La Jolla Shores sub-watershed,

non-storm water discharges are prohibited from entering the City’s storm

water conveyance system, including, but shall not be limited to, natural

drainages, ditches, roads, streets, constructed channels, aqueducts, storm

drains, pipes, street gutters, or catch basins. The method for the removal and

disposal of non-storm water discharges shall be included with detail in the

WPCP or SWPPP.

1001-1.4 Training.

1. You shall ensure that all persons responsible for compliance with the San

Diego Municipal Code Section §43.03, City’s Storm Water Standards Manual,



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 553

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Municipal Permit, and CGP shall be appropriately trained in accordance with

the CGP. Training shall be both formal and informal, occur on an ongoing

basis, and shall include training offered by recognized governmental agencies

or professional organizations. You shall include documentation of all training

to the Engineer and as required by the Annual Report.

1001-1.5 Legally Responsible Person (LRP).

1. For projects with coverage under the CGP the City has identified the LRP for

the regulated Site and designated at least one Approved Signatory (AS) in the

event that the LRP is unavailable. Only the LRP or the AS may certify the final

submittal of the PRDs, Annual Reports, SWPPP Amendments, and Notice of

Termination using SMARTS.

1001-1.6 Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD).

1. For projects subject to the CGP, you shall appoint a QSD to prepare the SWPPP

with site specific BMPs and pertinent information in accordance with the CGP

prior to uploading onto SMARTS. The verification of the certification shall be

included in the SWPPP.

2. The QSD shall have the certification and appropriate experience as required

for in the CGP Section VII.B.1.

1001-1.7 Qualified SWPPP Practitioner (QSP).

1. For projects subject to the CGP, you shall appoint a QSP. The QSP shall be

responsible for non-storm water and storm water visual observations,

sampling and analysis, the preparation of the annual compliance evaluation,

and the elimination of unauthorized discharges. The QSP shall be on-Site daily

to evaluate the conditions of the Site with respect to storm water pollution

prevention.

2. The QSP shall have one of the certifications and appropriate experiences as

required for in the CGP Section VII.B.3.

1001-1.8 Permit Registration Documents (PRDs).

1. For projects subject to the CGP, you shall prepare and upload the PRDs into

SMARTS. The PRDs shall be reviewed, certified, and filed by the LRP or

designee following the review of your submittal. You shall submit the PRD’s to

the Engineer for review prior to the Pre-construction Meeting. The Contract

Time shall start in accordance with 6-1.2, “Commencement of the Work” or as

determined by the Engineer. The Work shall not commence without a valid

WDID number.

2. The City shall initiate the NOI form application process and set up the project

in SMARTS. You shall complete the Developer, Risk Assessment, Billing

Information, and Additional Site Info tabs in SMARTS. The LRP/AS shall certify

the NOI application.

3. A preliminary Risk Assessment has been calculated for design purposes based

on the Site’s characteristics and the CGP requirements. You shall perform a



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 554

THE “WHITEBOOK”

separate Risk Assessment to verify the City’s Preliminary Risk Assessment. The

Risk Assessment shall be completed by the QSD using the Risk Determination

Worksheet in Appendix 1 of the CGP.

4. You shall prepare the Site maps with the PRDs as described in the CGP. As

phases of the construction change, the Site Map shall be adjusted to

correspond to each phase. A copy of each Site Map shall be included in the

SWPPP. At a minimum, the Site Map shall include:

a) The project’s surrounding area (vicinity).

b) Site layout.

c) Construction site boundaries.

d) Drainage areas.

e) Discharge locations.

f) Sampling locations.

g) Areas of soil disturbance (temporary or permanent).

h) Active areas of soil disturbance (cut or fill).

i) Locations of all runoff BMPs.

j) Locations of all erosion control BMPs.

k) Locations of all sediment control BMPs.

l) ATS location (if applicable).

m) Locations of sensitive habitats, watercourses, or other features which

are not to be disturbed.

n) Locations of all post-construction BMPs.

o) Locations of storage areas for waste, vehicles, service,

loading/unloading of materials, access (entrance/exits) points to

construction site, fueling, water storage, water transfer for dust

control, and compaction practices.

For LUPs, at least 3 Site Maps shall be submitted. The first map shall be a

zoomed 1000 feet - 1500 feet (304.8 m – 457.2 m) vicinity map that shows the

starting point of the project. The second map shall be a zoomed map of 1000

feet - 1500 feet (300 m - 450 m) showing the ending location of the project. The

third map shall be a larger view vicinity map, 1000 feet - 2000 feet (304.8 m –

609.6 m), displaying the entire project location depending on the project size

and indicating the LUP type (1, 2, or 3) areas within the total project footprint.

5. For LUPs only, submit construction drawings that show the locations of storm

drain inlets and waterbodies that may receive discharges from the

construction activities and that shows the locations of BMPs to be installed.

6. The SWPPP shall be prepared using the guidelines in Appendix G of the City’s

Storm Water Standards Manual and in accordance with the requirements of



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 555

THE “WHITEBOOK”

the CGP. CASQA and Caltrans SWPPP Templates are available online

electronically and may be used for this purpose. The SWPPP and each

amendment shall be prepared and signed by the QSD and shall be submitted

to the Engineer for review. If extensive additions or corrections are required,

the Engineer shall return the submittal for corrections and re-submission.

After the SWPPP is revised to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the SWPPP shall

be uploaded through SMARTS. The QSD shall notify the Engineer no later than

24 hours from when the upload is complete.

7. The SWPPP shall be implemented by you and updated as necessary to address

Site conditions. Make the SWPPP available at the Site during working hours

while construction is occurring and make it available immediately upon

request by a State inspector or the Engineer.

8. You shall be responsible for paying the required permit fee to the State Water

Resources Control Board immediately following the filing of the PRDs by the

LRP. The QSD shall notify the Engineer when the payment is mailed to the State

Water Board.

9. Once all PRDs are submitted to SMARTS and payment is received by the State

Water Board, the LRP shall receive a notification to certify the PRDs. You shall

allow for 5 Working Days for Certification by the LRP or AS.

1001-1.9 Effluent Standards.

1. For projects subject to the CGP, refer to the CGP for the applicable effluent

standards pertinent to Risk Levels 2 and 3 and LUP Types 2 and 3. Site

evaluations and testing and sampling results shall be documented in the

SWPPP in accordance with requirements of the CGP.

1001-1.10 Record Retention.

1. As required in the CGP, you shall submit a completed SWPPP with all

inspection reports, annual reports, and updated Site Maps to the Engineer at

the completion of the project.

1001-1.11 Post-construction Requirements.

1. You shall comply with the post-construction storm water requirements when

post-construction requirements have been identified in the Contract

Documents.

2. You shall mark every storm drain inlet and catch basin within the projects

boundaries with painted stencils or imbedded concrete stamps. You shall use

stencils on existing inlets and concrete stamps on new inlets. On curb inlets,

the concrete stamp or stencil shall be placed on the top of curb at the inlet

roof. On catch basins, the concrete stamp or stencil shall be placed next to the

inlet grate.

3. Final site stabilization requirements shall be as follows:

a) The site shall not pose any additional sediment discharge risk than it

did prior to the commencement of construction activity.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 556

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) There shall not be any potential for construction-related storm water

pollutants to be discharged into site runoff.

c) All final landscaping and hardscaping has been installed.

d) Construction materials and wastes have been disposed of properly.

e) Post-construction storm water management measures have been

installed and a long-term maintenance plan has been established.

f) All construction-related equipment, materials, and any temporary

BMPs that are no longer needed are removed from the site.

4. For projects subject to the CGP, the QSP shall notify the Engineer immediately

if the removal of the construction BMP shall expose the Site to conditions that

would impair the water quality and put the City at risk of violations to the CGP

and/or Municipal Permits.

1001-1.12 Notice of Termination (NOT).

1. For projects subject to the CGP, within 90 days from the completion date

shown on SMARTS you shall terminate coverage of a site by uploading an

electronic NOT, a final site map, and photos onto SMARTS. The final site map

and photos shall be submitted to the Engineer as a submittal for review prior

to the upload to SMARTS. By uploading a NOT, you shall be certifying that

construction activities are complete and that the Project is in full compliance

with the requirements of the CGP. The LRP shall be notified by SMARTS that a

NOT was submitted for certification. You shall allow for 5 Working Days for the

LRP or AS to certify the NOT. Upon approval by the appropriate Regional Water

Board office, permit coverage shall be terminated and communicated to the

LRP. Approval of the NOT does not relieve you of the responsibility for the

submittal of Annual Reports and the payment of the Annual Fee.

1001-1.13 Annual Reports and Annual Fee.

1. For projects subject to the CGP, you are responsible for the submittal of the

Annual Reports and for the payment of the Annual fee in accordance with

requirements of the CGP. If the Project is enrolled for more than one

continuous 3-month period, you shall electronically upload an Annual Report

through SMARTS no later than August 1

of each year. SMARTS shall notify the

City of submittals and reviews for certification. You shall allow the City 5

Working Days for review. If extensive additions or corrections are required, the

Engineer shall notify you of corrections and re-submission. After the Annual

Report is revised to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Annual Report shall

be uploaded through SMARTS. You shall allow for 5 Working Days for the LRP

or AS to certify the Annual Report. Copy of all Annual Reports shall be retained

on Site and included in the SWPPP and be made available to the Engineer or

the State authorized inspector immediately upon request. The annual reports

shall include the following:

a) Storm water monitoring information as listed in Section XVI.D of the

CGP.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 557

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Training information for all individuals responsible for Permit

compliance (Section XVI.E).

2. You shall pay the Annual Fee to the State Water Board within 30 Calendar Days

of the Invoice Date. Your failure to pay within this timeframe will place the City

of San Diego (City) at a risk of receiving a Notice of Violation and the

assessment of penalties from the San Diego Water Board. Should this occur,

the City will exercise its rights and seek reimbursement for the penalties

including all soft costs associated with the case.

1001-1.14 Change of Information.

1. For projects subject to the CGP, you are responsible for updating SMARTS to

reflect the most current project schedule, to submit revised Site Plans, to

reflect changes to types of BMPs, and any changes to the QSD and/or QSP.

This includes, but shall not be limited to, changes of information to the

Developer, Risk, and Billing Info tabs. At least 5 Days prior to updating SMARTS,

you shall notify the Engineer as to the nature of the change(s).

2. If the scope of work has not been completed and the NOT cannot be filed

within 90 days of the completion date in SMARTS, the contractor must file for

a Change of Information (COI) to extend the completion date.

1001-1.15 Risk Assessment.

1. For projects subject to the CGP, you shall update the project schedule in the

Risk tab of SMARTS monthly to match the schedule provided at the monthly

progress meetings. If during construction, the Risk level or LUP type is increased

you shall comply with the additional requirements required by the CGP.

1001-1.16 Rainfall Erosivity Waiver Expiration.

1. For projects subject to the CGP, 30 Days prior to expiration of the Rainfall

Erosivity Waiver, you shall update the project schedule in the Risk Assessment

tab of SMARTS. Should the project construction extend beyond the projected

completion date given on the waiver certification, you shall recalculate the

rainfall erosivity factor for the new project duration and submit this

information through the SMARTS system.

2. If the new R factor is below 5, you shall update all applicable information on

the waiver certification through SMARTS and retain a copy of the revised

waiver onsite.

3. If the new R factor is 5 or above, you shall immediately notify the Engineer. The

Engineer shall initiate the NOI application process and set up the project in

SMARTS to obtain coverage under the CGP. You shall complete the Developer,

Risk, Billing Information, and Additional Site Info tabs in SMARTS. You shall be

required to retain a QSP, shall prepare and submit a SWPPP, Site Map, and

Drawings (for LUPs), and shall pay the permit fee.

4. Should the Rainfall Erosivity Waiver expire prior to obtaining permit coverage

(active WDID#), you shall cease all construction Work. No additional payment

to you shall be made as a result of the delay in Work.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 558

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1001-1.17 Risk Levels and LUP Types.

1. You shall refer to the Risk Level or LUP Type identified for the Contract and the

following to determine the applicable requirements of the CGP:

a) Risk Levels (Traditional).

i. Risk Level 1 (Baseline for all Risk Levels). See Attachment C of

the CGP.

ii. Risk Level 2. See Attachment D of the CGP.

iii. Risk Level 3. See Attachment E of the CGP.

b) LUP Types (Linear Underground/Overhead Projects). See

Attachment A of the CGP.

i. Type 1 LUP.

ii. Type 2 LUP.

iii. Type 3 LUP.

1001-2 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPS).

1. Implement and maintain such BMPs as are relevant to the Work and as are

specifically required by the Plans or Special Provisions.

2. You shall be responsible throughout the duration of the Contract for installing,

constructing, inspecting, maintaining, removing, and disposing of BMPs for

wind erosion control, tracking control, erosion and sediment control, non-

storm water control, and waste management and materials pollution control.

Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, you shall be responsible for BMP

implementation and maintenance throughout any temporary suspension of

the Work.

1001-2.1 Construction BMP.

1. As required by the City’s Storm Water Standards Manual and Municipal Permit,

BMPs shall be installed in accordance with California Stormwater Quality

Association (CASQA) BMP handbooks:

https://www.casqa.org/

or Caltrans Construction Site BMP Manual:

http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/construc/stormwater/details.htm

2. You shall store and have readily accessible, sufficient and appropriate standby

BMP materials necessary to protect the Site against erosion, to prevent

sediment discharge, and to prevent non storm water discharges.

1001-2.2 Erosion Control.

1. You shall control the Site erosion through the implementation of effective

wind erosion control and effective soil cover for Inactive Areas, all finished

slopes, open spaces, utility backfills, and completed lots.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 559

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Erosion shall be prevented. Erosion-susceptible slopes and denuded areas

shall be stabilized, covered, planted, or otherwise protected in a way that

prevents displacement.

3. You shall protect unpaved areas, including landscaping, from erosion-using

vegetation or other physical stabilization.

4. Exposed soils that are actively eroding, or prone to erosion due to disturbance,

shall be protected from erosion. Significant accumulations of eroded soil shall

be removed or contained to prevent sediment transport in runoff to the storm

drain system.

5. Such temporary measures shall be maintained and replaced as needed until

such time a permanent solution can be implemented.

6. The SWPPP/WPCP shall include the sequencing of the Work activities and the

implementation of effective Erosion Control BMPs while taking local climate,

such as rainfall and wind, into consideration thereby reducing the amount and

duration of soil exposed to erosion by wind, rain, runoff, and vehicle tracking.

7. The SWPPP/WPCP shall:

a) Describe when Work shall be performed that could cause the

discharge of pollutants in storm water.

b) Describe the water pollution control practices associated with each

construction phase.

c) Identify the soil stabilization and sediment control practices for all

disturbed soil area.

1001-2.3 Good Site Management “Housekeeping”.

1. You shall ensure construction-related materials, wastes, spills, or residues are

prevented from discharging from the Work Site to streets, drainage facilities,

receiving waters, or adjacent properties by wind or runoff.

2. You shall ensure non-storm water runoff from equipment, vehicle washing, or

any other activity shall be contained within the Work Site using appropriate

BMPs.

3. You shall assess the potential pollutant sources, identify areas of the Site

where additional BMPs are necessary, and ensure the effectiveness of existing

BMPs.

4. You shall stabilize and berm all stockpiled construction materials that are not

actively being used (soil, spoils, concrete debris, aggregate, fly-ash, stucco,

hydrated lime, and etc.).

5. You shall store chemicals in watertight containers (with appropriate secondary

containment to prevent any spillage or leakage) or in a storage shed

(completely enclosed).

6. You shall minimize exposure of construction materials to precipitation. This

does not include materials and equipment that are designed to be outdoors



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 560

THE “WHITEBOOK”

and exposed to environmental conditions (poles, equipment pads, cabinets,

conductors, insulators, bricks, and etc.).

7. You shall implement BMPs to prevent the offsite tracking of loose construction

and landscape materials.

8. You shall prevent the disposal of any rinsed or washed waters or materials on

impervious or pervious site surfaces or into the storm drain system.

9. You shall ensure that the containment of sanitation facilities, such as portable

toilets, prevent discharges of pollutants to the storm water drainage system

or receiving water.

10. You shall provide secondary containment for all temporary sanitary facilities.

Water must not be left in the secondary containment and You shall ensure

that it is free of sediment and debris.

11. You shall clean or replace sanitation facilities and inspect them regularly for

leaks and spills.

12. You shall cover waste disposal containers at the end of everyday and prior to

a rain event. You shall inspect waste disposal containers for leaks on a daily

basis and you shall empty them when they become 95% full. Wash down of

waste containers is prohibited onsite.

13. You shall prevent waste disposal containers from discharging to the storm

water drainage system or to receiving water.

14. You shall contain and securely protect stockpiled waste material from wind

and rain at all times unless actively being used.

15. You shall implement procedures that effectively address hazardous and

nonhazardous spills.

16. You shall develop a spill response and implementation element of the

SWPPP/WPCP prior to commencement of construction activities. The

SWPPP/WPCP shall require the following:

a) Equipment and materials for cleanup of spills shall be available on site

and that spills and leaks shall be cleaned up immediately and disposed

of properly.

b) Appropriate spill response personnel are assigned and trained.

17. You shall ensure that concrete washouts are watertight and fitted with

secondary containment to prevent any concrete waste from being able to

discharge on to the ground or offsite. You shall ensure that concrete washout

containers are emptied or exchanged when containment reaches 75%

capacity. Concrete washout containers must be covered securely at the end of

every work day.

18. You shall contain stockpiled materials, such as mulches and topsoil, when they

are not actively being used.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 561

THE “WHITEBOOK”

19. You shall contain fertilizers and other landscape materials when they are not

actively being used.

20. You shall discontinue the application of any erodible landscape material within

2 Days before a forecasted rain event or during periods of precipitation.

21. You shall apply erodible landscape material at quantities and application rates

according to manufacture recommendations or based on written

specifications by knowledgeable and experienced field personnel.

22. You shall stack erodible landscape material on pallets and shall cover or store

such materials when not being used or applied.

23. You shall maintain vehicles and equipment to prevent leaks and spills.

24. You shall prevent storm water, ground water, and soil contamination by

capturing leaks and spills before they contact the ground. Collect fluid leaks

using drip pans or sealable containers and prevent spills using funnels, rags,

and/or drop cloths when performing maintenance.

25. You shall control potential sources of water pollution before they come in

contact with storm water systems or watercourses by implementing the

measures specified in CGP for the following sources:

a) Delivery, inventory, storage, stockpiling, and use of construction

material.

b) Air depositions from the Work which include pollutants such as

particulates as sediment, nutrients, trash, metals, bacteria, oil, grease,

and organic matters.

1001-2.4 Non-Storm Water Management.

1. For projects located in an ASBS, you shall refer to 1001-1.3, “Additional Control

Requirements for Areas of Special Biological Significance” for additional

requirements.

2. You shall identify all non-storm water discharges and either eliminate, control,

or treat them.

3. You shall wash vehicles and clean streets in such a manner as to prevent

unauthorized non-storm water discharges from reaching surface water or

drainage conveyance systems.

4. You shall prevent oil, grease, or fuel to leak into the ground, street, gutter,

paved areas, storm drains, or surface waters.

5. You shall place all equipment or vehicles which are to be fueled, maintained,

and stored in a designated area fitted with appropriate BMPs.

6. You shall clean leaks immediately and dispose of leaked materials properly.

1001-2.5 Sediment Control.

1. You shall control sources of sediment associated with the performance of the

Work to the MEP.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 562

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. You shall install and maintain effective perimeter controls along the perimeter

of the construction site or limits of grading, the stabilization of construction

entrances and exits, and the protection of storm drain inlets with the potential

to receive runoff from the Site.

3. Sediments shall not be discharged to a storm drain system or receiving waters.

4. Sediments generated on the Work Site shall be contained at the Work site

using appropriate BMPs.

5. Storm drain inlet protection must be implemented during dry weather at

every storm drain inlet that has the potential to receive construction related

pollutants from active construction areas. Inlet protection in the public right-

of-way for streets open to the public must be temporarily removed prior to

rain to ensure no flooding occurs and reinstalled after rain is over. Inlet

protection must be removed during emergency water main breaks. If rain is

forecast after working hours or over the weekend, contractor must remove

inlet protection and replace prior to the resuming construction work.

6. The storm drain inlet sediment control measures shall be of sufficient weight

so as not to shift out of place or shall be secured in place against movement.

Inlet sediment control measures shall be maintained daily and/or as often as

needed. Maintaining inlet sediment control measures shall include replacing

damaged BMPs and removing and disposing of accumulated sediment, trash,

and debris at the end of every workday and prior to rain.

7. You shall design the sediment basins according to the method provided in

CASQA’s Construction BMP Guidance Handbook.

1001-2.6 Run-on and Runoff Controls.

1. You shall effectively manage run-on, runoff within the Site, and runoff that

discharges off the Site. Run-on from offsite shall be directed away from

disturbed areas or shall collectively be in compliance with the effluent

limitations in the CGP, as applicable.

2. Calculations and design details as well as BMP controls for site run-on and

runoff shall be included in the SWPPP/WPCP and shall be shown on the Site

Map.

1001-2.7 Construction Entrance and Exit Area.

1. Temporary construction entrance and exit areas shall be on level and

stabilized ground. Stabilized construction entrance/exits must be sufficiently

implemented at every construction project to control and prevent sediment

tracking from the site. Construction entrances/exits must be constructed with

a length of 50 feet or as allowable by project site conditions and a minimum

width of 10 feet or greater to accommodate vehicles.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 563

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1001-2.7.1 Payment.

1. The payment for the construction, maintenance, and removal of entrance and

exit areas shall be included in the Bid items for “WPCP Implementation” or

“SWPPP Implementation”.

1001-2.8 Performance Standards.

1. You shall be responsible for implementing water pollution control measures

based on performance standards. The performance standards shall be the

following:

a) Non-storm water discharges from the Site shall not occur to the MEP.

Storm water discharges shall be free of pollutants including sediment

to the MEP.

b) Erosion shall be controlled by acceptable BMPs to the MEP. If rills and

gullies appear, they shall be repaired and additional BMPs shall be

installed to prevent a reoccurrence of erosion.

c) An Inactive Area shall be protected to prevent pollutant discharges. A

Site or portions of a Site shall be considered inactive when

construction activities have ceased for a period of 14 Days or more.

2. BMPs shall be implemented and maintained at all times during construction.

You are responsible for the cleanup of debris, concrete waste, sweeping, and

dust control. Construction debris and waste shall be contained and disposed

of properly. Access locations shall be kept clean and swept daily and/or as

needed to ensure that sediment will not leave the construction site. The

surrounding public streets shall be kept clean and swept daily and/or as

needed to keep sediment out of the storm drain conveyance system.

1001-2.9 Additional BMP Control Requirements for Significant Threat to Water Quality.

1. You shall include and implement additional controls as part of the WPCP or

SWPPP for all construction sites tributary to a CWA section 303 (d) water body

impaired for sediment or within, directly adjacent to, or discharging directly to

a receiving water with a Water Quality Sensitive Area as follows:

a) Use of high-performance erosion control methods including, but shall

not be limited to, bonded fiber material or anchored erosion control

blankets on all exposed slopes.

b) Ensure a sufficient vegetated buffer between the construction activity

and the protected water body.

c) Where construction site drainage is directed to an inlet or other

drainage structure that conveys flow to an impaired or sensitive water

body or to a down gradient perimeter near the impaired or sensitive

water body, there shall be at least 2 lines of defense for sediment

control. Such defenses shall include, but shall not be limited to, two

parallel lines of silt fence along the perimeter or silt fence barriers

strategically located upstream of a protected inlet. Each line of defense



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 564

THE “WHITEBOOK”

shall be designed to independently control sediment to the maximum

extent practicable.

d) Stockpiles shall be fully protected and shall be located at a sufficient

distance from the site perimeter that is near the sensitive water body.

1001-2.10 BMP Inspection, Maintenance, and Repair.

1. Inspection, maintenance, repair, and sampling activities on-site shall be

performed by the QSP or QCP.

2. At a minimum, inspections shall be performed weekly and at least once each

24-hour period during extended storm events, Pre-storm (within 48 hours

before) and Post-storm (within 48 hours after).

3. Inspections and observations shall identify BMPs that need maintenance to

operate effectively, have failed, or could fail to operate as intended.

4. You shall complete implementing repairs or design changes to BMPs within 72

hours of identification. However, if BMP deficiencies impact the MS4

conveyance system, operations, services, facilities, or public health and safety,

you shall complete the repairs within 24 hours of identification or sooner as

directed by the Resident Engineer.

1001-2.11 Weather Triggered Action Plan (WTAP).

1. T

heWTAPmustbepreparedbytheQSP/QCP48hourspriortoanyrainevent

forecastof50%orgreaterprobabilitytoallowforadequatetimetoimplement

BMPs.

For projects subject to CGP, the WTAP must be developed by the QSP for all

phasesofconstruction.

AWTAPtemplatefromAppendixDoftheStormWaterStandardsManualmust

beusedforCityprojects(bothCGPandnon‐CGPprojects).

TheWTAPmustbekeptonsitewiththeSWPPP/WPCPdocumentandbemade

available to the Engineer or the State authorized inspector immediately upon

request.

YoushallensurethattheimplementationofWTAPbeginsnolaterthan24hours

priortoanyraineventforecastof50%orgreaterprobability.

Whilethe CGP only requires Risk Level 2 and 3 dischargers to develop and

implement a REAP.

The Storm Water Standards Manual requires all projects

subjecttoSWPPPandWPCPtodevelopaWTAP.

AlldevelopedWTAPsshallbesubmittedtotheEngineeratthecompletionofthe

Project.

1001-3 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP).

1. When so specified in the Special Provisions or if so required by a

jurisdictional regulatory agency, you shall prepare and submit in accordance

with 3-8, “SUBMITTALS” a storm water pollution prevention plan. The SWPPP



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 565

THE “WHITEBOOK”

shall conform to the requirements specified in the Special Provisions and

those of the jurisdictional regulatory agency.

1001-3.1 SWPPP Risk Level 1.

1. The detailed requirements for Risk Level 1 are in Attachment C of the

CGP.

2. The SWPPP shall address the following objectives:

a) Control all pollutants and their sources associated with the Work.

b) Identify and either eliminate, control, or treat all non-storm water

discharges.

c) Reduce or eliminate pollutants in storm water discharges and

authorized non-storm water during and after construction through the

implementation of appropriate BMPs.

3. The SWPPP shall include supporting information such as the conclusions,

selections, use, and maintenance of BMPs.

4. A copy of the SWPPP and the BMP maps shall be kept at the Site and be made

available to the Engineer or the State authorized inspector immediately upon

request.

1001-3.1.1 Monitoring and Reporting.

1. You shall develop and implement a written Site-specific Construction Site

Monitoring Program (CSMP) as required by CGP. The CSMP shall be developed

prior to the commencement of construction activities and shall be revised as

necessary to reflect Project revisions. The CSMP shall be a part of the SWPPP

and shall be included as an appendix or separate SWPPP chapter. The CSMP

shall address the objectives specified in CGP Attachment C Section I.2.

2. The CSMP shall include monitoring procedures and instructions, location

maps, forms, and checklists, which shall cover the following requirements:

a) Visual Monitoring for Qualifying Rain Events.

b) Visual Observation Exemptions.

c) Monitoring Methods.

d) Non-Storm Water Discharge Monitoring.

e) Non-Visible Pollutant Monitoring.

f) Particle Size Analysis for Project Risk Justification.

1001-3.2 SWPPP Risk Level 2.

1. The detailed requirements for Risk Level 2 are in Attachment D of the CGP.

2. Risk Level 2 sites are subject to items required for Risk Level 1 and the

following subsections.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 566

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1001-3.2.1 Sediment and Erosion Control.

1. Implement appropriate Sediment and Erosion Control BMPs for areas under

active construction as defined in the CGP.

2. Implement appropriate erosion control BMPs (runoff control and soil

stabilization) in conjunction with sediment control BMPs for areas under active

construction.

3. Apply linear sediment controls along the toe of the slope, face of the slope,

and at the grade breaks of exposed slopes to comply with sheet flow lengths

in accordance with Table 1 of Attachment D of the CGP.

4. Ensure that construction activity traffic to and from the Project is limited to

entrances and exits that employ effective controls to prevent offsite tracking

of sediment.

5. Ensure that all storm drain inlets and perimeter controls, runoff control BMPs,

and pollutant controls at entrances and exits, such as tire wash-off locations,

are maintained and protected from activities that reduce their effectiveness.

6. At a minimum, inspect on a daily basis all immediate access road. Prior to any

rain event, the discharger shall remove any sediment or other construction

activity related materials that are deposited on the roads by vacuuming or

sweeping.

1001-3.2.2 Rain Event Action Plan (REAP).

1. A REAP shall be developed by a QSP in accordance with Attachment D Section

H of the CGP for all phases of construction. You shall ensure that a paper copy

of each REAP is available on-Site in compliance with the record retention

requirements of the CGP.

2. You shall ensure that the QSP begins implementation of the REAP no later than

24 hours prior to the likely precipitation event.

3. All developed REAPs shall be submitted to the Engineer at the completion of

the Project.

4. The WTAP that is required for all projects supersedes the REAP requirement.

1001-3.2.3 Monitoring and Reporting Requirements.

1. You shall develop and implement a written Site-specific Construction Site

Monitoring Program (CSMP) as required by CGP. The CSMP shall be developed

prior to the commencement of construction activities and shall be revised as

necessary to reflect Project revisions. The CSMP shall be a part of the SWPP

and shall be included as an appendix or separate SWPPP chapter. The CSMP

shall be subject to the objectives specified in the CGP, Attachment D, Section

I.2.

2. The CSMP shall include the following requirements:

a) Visual Monitoring for Qualifying Rain Events.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 567

THE “WHITEBOOK”

b) Water Quality Sampling and Analysis.

c) Storm Water Discharge Water Quality Sampling Locations.

d) Storm Water Sampling and Handling Instructions.

e) Monitoring Methods.

f) Analytical Methods.

g) Non-Storm Water Discharge Monitoring.

h) NAL Exceedance Report, when applicable.

3. Water Quality Sampling and Analysis

a. At a minimum, the QSP shall collect three samples per day of the qualifying

event from each of the sampling locations. The QSP shall electronically

submit all storm event sampling results to the State Water Board no later

than 10 Days after the conclusion of a qualifying event to be certified by

the LRP or designee.

4. NAL Exceedance Report

a. The QSP shall develop a NAL Exceedance Report in the event that any

effluent sample exceeds an applicable NAL and a copy of each report shall

be retained on Site and included in the SWPPP and be made available to

the Engineer or the State authorized inspector immediately upon request.

1001-3.3 SWPPP Risk Level 3.

1. The requirements for Risks Level 3 are in Attachment E of CGP.

2. Risk Level 3 sites are subject to the requirements for Risk Levels 1 and 2 and

the following subsections.

1001-3.3.1 Monitoring and Reporting Requirements.

1. You shall comply with all requirements for a Risk Level 3, with emphasis on the

following requirements:

a) You shall develop and implement a written Site-specific Construction

Site Monitoring Program (CSMP) as required by CGP. The CSMP shall

be developed prior to the commencement of construction activities

and shall be revised as necessary to reflect Project revisions. The CSMP

shall be a part of the SWPPP and shall be included as an appendix or

separate SWPPP chapter. The CSMP shall address the objectives

specified in CGP Attachment E, Section I.2.

b) The CSMP shall include the following requirements:

i. Visual Monitoring for Qualifying Rain Events.

ii. Water Quality Sampling and Analysis.

iii. Storm Water Discharge Water Quality Sampling Locations.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 568

THE “WHITEBOOK”

iv.

Storm Water Sampling and Handling Instructions.

v. Monitoring Methods.

vi. Analytical Methods.

vii. Non-Storm Water Discharge Monitoring.

viii. NAL Exceedance Report, when applicable.

ix. Bio-assessment, when applicable.

1001-3.4 SWPPP LUP Type 1.

1. The SWPPP shall be designed in accordance with the objectives specified in

Section K.1 of Attachment A of the CGP.

2. The QSD shall include information in the SWPPP that supports the conclusions,

selections, use, and maintenance of BMPs.

3. You shall comply with the narrative effluent standards listed in Section J.1 of

Attachment A of the CGP.

4. A minimum of three LUP site maps shall be prepared as specified in B.2 of

Attachment A of the CGP.

1001-3.4.1 Construction BMP Requirements.

1. Refer to LUP Type 1 requirements specified in Attachment A of the CGP.

1001-3.4.2 BMP Inspection, Maintenance and Repair.

1. You shall at all times properly operate, inspect, maintain, and repair BMPs in

accordance with Section x, Performance Standards and Section J.7 of

Attachment A of the CGP.

1001-3.4.3 Monitoring and Reporting Requirements.

1. You shall prepare a Monitoring and Reporting Program as required by Section

M of Attachment A of the CGP and shall immediately implement the program

at the start of construction. The monitoring program shall be implemented at

the appropriate level to protect water quality to the MEP at all times

throughout the life of the Project. The Monitoring and Reporting Program shall

be a part of the SWPPP, included as an appendix, or shall be a separate SWPPP

chapter.

2. You shall conduct visual inspections daily during working hours and in

conjunction with other daily activities in areas where active construction is

occurring.

3. You shall take photographs of the site before, during, and after rain events

while conducting inspection and submit reports through SMARTS once every

three rain events. The QSP’s reporting through SMARTS shall not be subject to

a LRP certification.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 569

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. The Monitoring and Reporting Program shall address the following:

a) Monitoring Requirements for Non-Visible Pollutants.

b) Visual Observation Exemptions.

c) Particle Size Analysis for Project Risk Justification.

1001-3.5 SWPPP LUP Type 2.

1. You shall follow the requirements listed for LUP Type 1 and the following

subsections.

1001-3.5.1 BMP Inspection, Maintenance and Repair.

1. You shall at all times properly operate, inspect, maintain and repair BMPs in

accordance with Section 1001-2.8, Performance Standards and Section J.7 of

Attachment A of the CGP.

1001-3.5.2 Monitoring and Reporting Requirements.

1. You shall follow the following requirements from Section M.4 of

Attachment A of the CGP:

a) Inspection Requirements.

b) Effluent Monitoring and Sampling.

c) Monitoring Requirements for Non-Visible.

d) Monitoring Methods.

e) Analytical Methods.

f) NAL Exceedance Report.

1001-3.6 SWPPP LUP Type 3.

1001-3.6.1 BMP Inspection, Maintenance, and Repair.

1. You shall follow the requirements listed for SWPPP LUP Type 2.

1001-3.6.2 Monitoring and Reporting Requirements.

2. You shall follow the following requirements from Section M.4 of

Attachment A of the CGP. Also, you shall follow the requirements listed

for LUP Type 1 and LUP Type 2 and the following:

a) Storm Water Effluent Monitoring Requirements.

b) Receiving Water Monitoring Requirements.

c) RW Sampling Locations.

d) Analytical Methods.

e) NAL Exceedance Report.

i. You shall electronically submit all storm event sampling results to

the State Water Board no later than 10 Days after the conclusion

of the qualifying storm event to be certified by the LRP or



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 570

THE “WHITEBOOK”

designee. In addition, you shall provide an NAL Exceedance

Report when requested by the Regional Water Board.

1001-3.7 Payment.

1. The payment for SWPPP Development, SWPPP Implementation, and

compliance with the requirements of the CGP and these specifications shall be

included in the Bid items for “SWPPP Development” and “SWPPP

Implementation”. The payment for the pertinent required trainings and

certifications shall be included in these Bid items.

2. The payment for the permit to obtain coverage under the Construction

General Permit shall be made under the Allowance Bid item for “SWPPP Permit

Fee”.

3. You shall submit a Schedule of Values in accordance with 7-2.1 “Schedule of Values

(SOV)”. The SOV shall itemize the Work further, as applicable, as follows:

a) Development and Amendment of PRDs.

b) Good Site Management “Housekeeping” BMPs.

c) Non-Storm Water Management.

d) Erosion Control.

e) Sediment Control.

f) Run-on and Runoff Management.

g) BMP Inspection, Maintenance, Repair, and Construction BMP

Maintenance Log.

h) Development and Implementation of CSMP.

i) Annual Report.

j) Change of Information.

k) Notice of Termination.

l) Development and Implementation of Sampling and Analysis Portion of

CSMP.

m) Development and Implementation of Monitoring and Reporting

Program.

n) Street Sweeping.

o) Development and Implementation of Rain Event Action Plan (for Risk

Level SWPPPs) and Weather Triggered Action Plan.

p) Development and Implementation of Active Treatment System (Risk

Level 3 only).

q) When specified, Post Construction Requirements (such as Inlet

Markers).



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 571

THE “WHITEBOOK”

4. For private projects, disregard references to the measurement and payment

and refer to the permit conditions for additional requirements.

1001-4 WATER POLLUTION CONTROL PLAN (WPCP).

1. A WPCP shall be prepared for construction activities that result in land surface

disturbances of less than 1 acre (0.4 hectare) according to the guidelines of the

City Storm Water Standards Manual, for projects over 1 acre (0.4 hectare)

determined to be exempt from the CGP, or if a project qualifies for a Rainfall

Erosivity Waiver.

2. The WPCP shall include Erosion and Sediment Control BMPs, Good

Housekeeping Measures, and Site management.

3. The WPCP shall identify all construction BMP requirements listed in the City

Storm Water Standards Manual, Construction BMPs, including routine

monitoring and maintenance of the BMPs.

4. The WPCP shall also show the BMPs to be implemented during construction

to reduce or eliminate discharges of pollutants to the storm drain conveyance

system.

5. The WPCP shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer prior to the Pre-

construction meeting and shall be kept at the Site and made available at all

times during normal business hours. Land disturbance can only occur when

there are no exceptions taken to the WPCP by the Engineer.

6. The WPCP shall be amended when there is a change of QCP or whenever there

is a change in construction or operations which may affect the discharge of

pollutants to surface waters, groundwater, or to the City’s MS4, or are deemed

necessary by the Engineer. Amendments shall be documented in the

Amendment Log (Appendix A). Copy of each amendment shall be retained

on site and included in the WPCP and be made available to the Engineer

or the State authorized inspector immediately upon request.

7. The WPCP shall be prepared by a qualified WPCP preparer if the project is not

subject to the State Construction General Permit requirements, is a Priority

Development Project, and is classified under any of the following scenarios:

a) The project is located in the Los Penasquitos or Tijuana River

Watershed.

b) The project discharges directly to or is located adjacent to an

Environmentally Sensitive Area.

c) The project discharges to an Area of Special Biological Significance

(ASBS). Refer to Appendix A of the Construction BMP Standards in the

Storm Water Standards Manual for more details.

8. A qualified WPCP preparer shall be at least one of the following:

a) A California registered civil engineer.

b) A California registered geologist.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 572

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) A California registered landscape architect.

d) A professional hydrologist registered through the American Institute

of Hydrology.

e) A certified professional soil scientist registered through the Soil

Science Society of America.

f) A certified professional in erosion and sediment control registered

through EnviroCert International, Inc.

g) A certified professional in storm water quality registered through

EnviroCert International, Inc.

h) A certified professional in erosion and sediment control registered

through the National Institute for Certification in Engineering

Technologies.

9. The WPCPs that do not require a Qualified WPCP Preparer must be prepared,

certified, and amended by a Qualified Contact Person (QCP).

10. Any hydrology or hydraulic calculations, soils report or geotechnical reports

prepared in support of the WPCP must be prepared by a professional

engineer with appropriate registration qualifications issued by the State of

California.

1001-4.1 Site Management.

1. You shall implement and update the WPCP and BMP maps with each phase of

construction activity, monitor the Site, and shall maintain BMPs in effective

working condition. A copy of the WPCP and the BMP maps shall be kept at the

site and be made available to the Engineer or the State authorized inspector

immediately upon request.

2. You shall do the following:

a) Designate a Qualified Contact Person (QCP) who shall be responsible

for the development, implementation, maintenance, and

improvement of the BMPs and WPCP. The QCP shall be trained and

competent in the use of BMPs.

i. The QCP shall be on-Site daily to evaluate the conditions of the

Site with respect to storm water pollution prevention.

ii. The QCP shall be responsible for monitoring the weather and

for the implementation of any emergency plans that shall be

activated when there is a 50% or greater chance of rain. The

weather shall be monitored with the National Weather on a 5-

day forecast plan.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 573

THE “WHITEBOOK”

iii. The QCP shall be responsible for overseeing any site grading

and construction operations and for evaluating the

effectiveness of the BMPs. The QCP shall ensure the

modification of the BMPs, as necessary, to keep the Site in

compliance and to ensure adequate routine maintenance of

the BMPs.

b) Educate all Subcontractors and employees about storm water

pollution prevention measures required during construction activities

to prevent the impact of construction discharges to the storm water

conveyance system. Education requirements shall be in accordance

with Section E.7 of the San Diego Regional Water Quality Control Board

(SDRWQCB) Order No. R9-2013-0001 NPDES NO. CAS0109266. You

shall ensure that all personnel are trained in basic storm water

construction management. A log of the trained staff and the

educational materials shall be kept in the WPCP file and shall be

available to the Engineer at all times.

c) Protect new and existing storm water conveyance systems from

sedimentation, concrete rinse, or other construction related debris

and discharges with the appropriate BMPs that are acceptable to the

Engineer and as indicated in the WPCP.

d) Indicate in the WPCP the locations of BMPs like concrete wash outs,

vehicle maintenance, staging and storage area protection, and etc. to

be implemented. You shall ensure that these areas shall be utilized

properly and maintained regularly.

e) Ensure that all waste and debris generated from the project and public

during the period of construction within the storage, staging area, and

designated area is contained and properly disposed of. Perimeter and

runoff control measures shall be installed around the storage and

staging area. The entrance to the construction storage and staging

area shall be stabilized to prevent any tracking to impervious or paved

surfaces

f) Inspect and document weekly or as directed by the Engineer the

condition of all BMPs during the dry season (May 1

through

September 30

). Inspect and document daily or as directed by the

Engineer the condition of all BMPs during the rainy season (October

through April 30

). You shall include documentation in the WPCP

that BMPs were inspected at the intervals required and shall update

and maintain this documentation for the duration of the Project.

g) Conduct visual inspections daily and maintain all BMPs as needed.

Visual Inspections and maintenance of all BMPs shall be conducted

before, during, and after every rain event and every 24 hours during

any prolonged rain event. You shall maintain and repair all BMPs as

soon as possible as safety allows.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 574

THE “WHITEBOOK”

h) Return the land areas disturbed during construction to the pre-

construction or equivalent protection at the end of each workday to

eliminate or minimize erosion and the possibility for discharge of

sediment or other pollutants during a rain event.

3. If non-storm water discharge leaves the Site, you shall immediately stop the

activity and repair the damages. You shall immediately notify the Engineer of

the discharge. Any and all waste material, sediment, and debris from each

non-storm water discharge shall be removed immediately from the storm

drain conveyance system and shall be properly disposed of at no cost to the

City.

1001-4.2 Payment.

1. The payment for the development of the Water Pollution Control Plan shall be

included in the Bid item for “WPCP Development”.

2. The payment for the implementation of the Water Pollution Control Plan shall

be included in the Bid item for “WPCP Implementation”.

3. Submit a Schedule of Values for these Lump Sum Bid items in accordance with

7-2.1, “Schedule of Values (SOV)”. The SOV shall itemize the Work further to

show the following details:

a) Development and Amendment of WPCP.

b) Good Site Management “Housekeeping” BMPs.

c) Non-Storm Water Management.

d) Erosion Control.

e) Sediment Control.

f) BMP Inspection, Maintenance, and Repair.

g) Street Sweeping.

h) When specified, Post Construction Requirements such as Inlet

Markers.

1001-5 MINOR WATER POLLUTION CONTROL PLAN.

1. A Minor WPCP (DS-570) shall be prepared for construction activities that

result in land surface disturbances of less than 5,000 square feet and

have less than a 5-foot elevation differential over the entire project area.

2. The Minor WPCP shall identify all required construction BMP requirements

listed in the City Storm Water Standards Manual, Construction BMPs.

3. The Minor WPCP shall also show the BMPs to be implemented during

construction to reduce or eliminate discharges of pollutants to the storm drain

conveyance system.

4. The Minor WPCP shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer at or prior to the

Pre-construction meeting and shall be kept at the Site and made available at

all times during normal business hours.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 575

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1001-5.1 Payment.

1. The payment for the development and implementation of the Minor Water

Pollution Control Plan shall be included in the Bid item for “Minor WPCP

Development and Implementation”.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 576

THE “WHITEBOOK”

SECTION 1002 – PERMANENT BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPs)

1002-1 PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS.

1002-1.1 General.

1. Permeable interlocking concrete pavers shall consist of the paving unit, joint

fill and bedding aggregate, base aggregate, and subbase aggregate.

1002-1.2 Materials.

1. Permeable Interlocking Concrete Paver. All paver material shall comply with

ASTM C 936. Paver color pigment material shall comply with ASTM C 979. For

vehicular applications, the minimum allowable paver thickness shall be 3

inch (80

mm). For pedestrian applications the minimum allowable paver thickness shall be 2

inch (60 mm). The joints and/or openings shall comprise a minimum of 5% of the

paver surface.

2. Crushed Stone Joint Filler and Bedding. The joint filler and bedding material

shall conform to 200-1, “ROCK PRODUCTS”. The gradation shall conform to Table

200-1.2.1 (A) and ASTM No. 8. When the joints are narrow, gradation permitted

shall conform to Table 200-1.2.1 (A) and ASTM No. 89 or ASTM No. 9.

3. Base Aggregate. The base aggregate shall conform to 200-1, “ROCK

PRODUCTS”. The aggregate gradation shall conform to Table 200-1.2.1 (A) and

AASHTO No. 57.

4. Subbase Aggregate. The subbase aggregate shall conform to 200-1, “ROCK

PRODUCTS”. The aggregate gradation shall conform to Table 200-1.2.1 (A) and

ASTM No. 2.

1002-1.3 Storage.

1. Store materials in protected areas such that they are kept free from mud, dirt,

and other foreign materials. Store concrete paver cleaners and sealers per the

manufacturer’s instructions.

1002-1.4 Bedding.

1002-1.4.1 General.

1. Permeable interlocking concrete pavers bedding layer shall be constructed of

material conforming to Table 200-1.2.1 (A) ASTM No. 8, ASTM No. 89, or ASTM

No. 9 as directed by the Plans.

1002-1.4.2 Spreading.

1. Imported aggregate bedding shall be delivered to the roadbed as uniform

mixtures and each layer shall be spread in 1 operation. Segregation shall be

avoided, and the bedding shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine material.

2. Aggregate bedding shall be deposited on the roadbed at a uniform quantity

per linear foot (meter) which quantity will provide the required compacted

thickness within the tolerances specified herein without resorting to spotting,

picking up, or otherwise shifting the aggregate bedding material. At the time



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 577

THE “WHITEBOOK”

the aggregate is spread, it shall have a moisture content sufficient to obtain

the required compaction. Such moisture shall be uniformly distributed

throughout the material.

3. The bedding thickness shall be installed at 2 inches (50.8 mm). The layer may

be spread and compacted in 1 layer.

4. The surface tolerance of the screeded bedding material is ± 3/8 inches over 10

feet (± 9.5 mm over 3 m).

1002-1.5 Construction Methods.

1. Work shall be performed by a qualified installer meeting the following

requirements:

a) Submit documentation showing comparable concrete paver

installation similar in scope, design material, and extent indicated on the

Plans has been successfully installed within the past 5 years or more of

documented performance record for the proposed product and has

been successfully performed by the installer and its personnel

assigned to the concrete paver installation for this project.

b) Holds a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement

Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program.

1002-1.5.1 Construction Test Section.

1. Construct a test section using the same method and crew performing the

installation.

2. The test section shall be used to determine the surcharge of the bedding layer,

joint sizes, and lines, laying pattern, color, and texture of the job.

3. The test section shall be a minimum of 100 ft

(9.3 m

4. The test section may be incorporated in the Work if approved by the Engineer.

5. The Engineer shall be notified at least 24 hours in advance of construction of

the test section.

1002-1.5.2 Subgrade.

1. The subgrade preparation shall conform to 301-1, “SUBGRADE PREPARATION”.

1002-1.5.3 Base/Subbase.

1. The base/subbase aggregate installation shall comply with 1002-2,

“PERMEABLE PAVEMENT STRUCTURAL BASE AND SUBBASE”.

1002-1.5.4 Bedding.

1. The bedding aggregate installation shall comply with 1002-1, “Permeable

Interlocking Concrete Pavers Bedding”. Do not subject screeded bedding

material to any pedestrian or vehicular traffic before paving unit installation

begins.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 578

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1002-1.5.5 Paving Unit Placement.

1. Paving units can be installed by manual methods or with mechanical

equipment. The paving units shall be laid in the pattern(s) and joint widths

shown in the Plans. The straight pattern lines shall be maintained.

2. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut paver units. Cut pavers subject

to tire traffic shall be no smaller than 1/3 of a whole unit.

3. Openings and joints shall be filled with the fill material identified in the Plans. Excess

fill aggregate on the surface shall be removed by sweeping the pavers clean.

4. The pavers shall be compacted and seated into the bedding material using a low-

amplitude, 75-90 Hz plate compactor capable of at least 5,000 lbf (22 kN)

centrifugal compaction force. At least 2 passes with the plate compactor shall

be required. Compaction within 6 feet (1.8 m) of an unrestrained edge shall

not be performed.

5. After compaction, additional filling aggregate shall be applied as needed and

the cleaning and compaction process repeated.

6. The final surface tolerance of compacted pavers shall not deviate more than ±

3/8 inches over 10 feet (± 9.5 mm over 3 m).

1002-1.5.6 Acceptance.

1. Permeable interlocking concrete pavers shall have an infiltration rate of a

minimum of 100 inches per hour (254 cm/hr) when tested.

2. Adjacent pavers shall be no greater than 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) difference in

height. Final elevations shall be checked for conformance to the Plans.

1002-1.6 Measurement and Payment.

1. The payment for quantities of structural bedding shall be measured by the

square yard (square meter) or cubic yard (cubic meter) in place as shown on

the Plan or as directed by the Engineer and shall be included in the Bid item

for “Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavers Bedding”. The volumetric

quantities of bedding material shall be those compacted in place within the

limits of the dimensions shown on the Plans.

a) The weight of material to be paid for shall be determined by deducting

(from the weight of material delivered to the Work) the weight of water

in the material (at the time of weighing) in excess of 1% more than the

optimum moisture content. No payment shall be made for the weight

of water deducted as provided in this subsection.

2. The payment for permeable interlocking concrete pavers and installation

Work as shown on the Plan or as directed by the Engineer shall be included

under the square foot Bid item for “Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavers”.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 579

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1002-2 PERMEABLE PAVEMENT STRUCTURAL BASE AND SUBBASE.

1002-2.1 General.

1. Permeable pavement structural base shall be constructed of material

conforming to Table 200-1.2.1 (A) and AASHTO No. 57.

2. The permeable pavement structural subbase shall be constructed of material

conforming to Table 200-1.2.1 (A) and ASTM No. 2.

3. Rounded river material shall not be used for vehicular applications.

1002-2.2 Spreading.

1. Imported aggregate bases/subbases shall be delivered to the roadbed as uniform

mixtures and each layer shall be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be

avoided, and the base/subbase shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine

material.

2. Aggregate bases/subbases shall be deposited on the roadbed at a uniform

quantity per linear foot (meter) which quantity will provide the required

compacted thickness within the tolerances specified herein without resorting to

spotting, picking up, or otherwise shifting the aggregate base/subbase material.

At the time the aggregate is spread, it shall have a moisture content sufficient to

obtain the required compaction. Such moisture shall be uniformly distributed

throughout the material.

3. The base thickness shall be installed to a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and a

maximum of 6 inches (150 mm). The layer may be spread and compacted in 1

layer.

4. The subbase thickness shall be installed to a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

Where the required thickness is more than 6 inches (150 mm) the subbase

material shall be spread and compacted in 2 or more layers of approximately

equal thickness and the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall

not exceed 6 inches (150 mm). Each layer shall be spread and compacted in a

similar manner.

1002-2.3 Compacting.

1. Each lift shall be compacted with a minimum 10 ton roller to be firm and

unyielding. A minimum of 2 passes with a vibratory roller and then 2 passes

with a static roller shall be performed until there is no visible movement of the

base/subbase. The aggregate shall not be crushed.

1002-2.4 Measurement and Payment.

1. The payment for quantities of structural base and subbase will be measured

by ton and shall be included under the Bid item for “Permeable Pavement

Structural Base And Subbase”. The volumetric quantities of base and subbase

material shall be those compacted in place within the limits of the dimensions

shown on the Plans.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 580

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. The weight of material to be paid for shall be determined by deducting (from the

weight of material delivered to the Work) the weight of water in the material (at

the time of weighing) in excess of 1% more than the optimum moisture content.

No payment shall be made for the weight of water deducted as provided in this

subsection.

1002-3 PLASTIC LINER.

1002-3.1 General.

1. This section shall apply to all areas that receive a plastic liner to provide an

impermeable barrier to prevent water or other liquids from infiltrating into the

subgrade. This section shall also apply for the material required to provide a

seal at each utility penetration through the plastic liner that is associated with

water service, gas service, sewer lateral, and underdrain crossings.

1002-3 Submittal.

1. You shall submit a Manufacturer’s Certificate in accordance with 3-8,

“SUBMITTALS” that the material complies with this specification.

1002-3.3 Materials.

1. Flexible Plastic Liner.

a) PVC liners used for the lining of green infrastructure shall meet the

requirements of ASTM D-7176 Standard Specification for PVC

geomembranes used in buried applications and shall conform to the

requirements in Table 1002-3.3 (1).

b) The PVC liner shall be ultraviolet light resistant and shall be sufficiently

flexible to cover and closely conform to all edges and corners of the

filter bed excavation at ambient temperatures as low as 45° F (7.2° C)

without application of heat.

c) A geotextile fabric shall be placed on the top and bottom of the

membrane for puncture protection. The geotextile fabric shall be

nonwoven geotextile fabric meeting the requirements indicated in

Table 213-5.2 (A): NONWOVEN.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 581

THE “WHITEBOOK”

TABLE 1002-3.3 (1)

Property Test Unit PVC 30

Thickness ASTM D-5199 in ± 0.030

Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D-882 kN/m (lb/in) 12.8 (73)

Tensile Elongation ASTM D-882 % 380

Tensile Modulus ASTM D-882 kN/m (lb/in) 5.6 (32)

Tear Strength ASTM D-1004 N (lb) 35 (8)

Dimensional Stability ASTM D-1204 % 3.0

Low Temp. Impact ASTM D-1790 C -29°

Index Properties

Specific Gravity ASTM D-792 g/cc 1.2

Water Extraction % Loss (Max.) ASTM D-1239 % 0.15

Avg. Plasticizer Molecular

Weight

ASTM D-2124 — 400

Volatile Loss ASTM D-1203 % 0.7

Soil Burial Break Strength G160 % 5.0

Soil Burial Elongation G160 % 20

Soil Burial Modulus at 100% G160 % 20

Hydrostatic Resistance ASTM D-751 kPa (psi) 690 (100)

UV Resistance ASTM D-4355 % 70

Seam Strengths

Shear Strength ASTM D-882 kN/m (lb/in) 10 (58.4)

Peel Strength ASTM D-882 kN/m (lb/in) 2.6 (15)



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 582

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Clay Liners.

a) A geosynthetic clay liner (GCL) is a woven fabric-like material, primarily

used for the lining of green infrastructure. Geosynthetic clay liners

shall conform to the requirements in Table 1002-3.3 (2).

TABLE 1002-3.3 (2) Geosynthetic Clay Liner Specifications

Property Test Method Unit

GCL

Specification

Bentonite Mass per unit Area (min) ASTM D-5890 g/m

3,700

Swell index (min) ASTM D-5891 ml/2g 24

Fluid loss (max) ASTM D-5890 ml 18

Peel Strength (min) ASTM D-6496 N/m 360

Index Flux (max) ASTM D-5887 (m

)/s 1 x 10

-8

Permeability (max) ASTM D-5887 m/sec 1 x 10

-8

Tensile Strength (min) ASTM D-6768 kN/m 4.0

Total Mass per unit Area (min) ASTM D-5993 g/m

4,000

3. Field-welded Joints.

1. All joints shall be field-welded using adhesive, chemical fusion, or

thermal fusion welding methods or in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Adhesives shall be in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Hose Clamps.

a) All hose clamps shall be 1 piece 300 series stainless steel with worm

gear. The hose clamps shall be suited for water environments.

Alternative clamps may be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

1002-3.4 Plastic Liner Construction Methods.

1. Plastic liners or PVC geomembranes that are placed within green

infrastructure shall be placed in accordance with the following provisions:

a) Pre-Installation Examination and Preparation. Prior to beginning

Work, you shall examine previous Work, related Work, and conditions

under which this Work is to be performed. This shall include the

following:

i. Verify the subgrade is at correct depths, lines, and dimensions

for installing the liner.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 583

THE “WHITEBOOK”

ii.

Ensure that overly wet conditions do not exist or are not

anticipated to occur during installation, as they will contaminate

the liner. Prior to placement, the trench shall have no standing

water, mud, debris, or excessive moisture. No liner shall be

placed on a subgrade that has become softened by water or

overly dried until the subgrade has been properly reconditioned,

restored, and re-inspected.

iii. Clear any construction debris present within the placement

area which may damage the liner. Work is to be sequenced to

avoid construction traffic on the exposed liner at any time.

b) Placement.

i. Liner shall be cut, fit to the dimensions, and placed in the

trench in accordance with the Plans. Trench sides and bottom

shall be excavated to provide a smooth surface, free of

obstructions and debris.

ii. The liner shall be installed on the bottoms and the sides of the

trench and/or on top of the permeable aggregate base and to the

elevations in accordance with the plan details. To prevent lateral

flow, the hydraulic restriction layer shall extend the full depth of

the media to the base of the drainage layer in situations where

underdrains are required. In situations where underdrains are

not required, the vertical hydraulic restriction layer shall extend

to a depth in accordance with the Right-Of-Way Design Manual.

At locations where liners are not required in the vertical surfaces

of the trench, the liners in the horizontal placements shall be

extended and turned up minimum 6 inches (152.4 mm) on the

vertical surfaces to provide tight layer separation.

iii. Voids between liner and excavation sides shall be prevented

during construction. Removing boulders or other obstacles

from the trench walls may create such voids. Natural soils shall

be placed in these voids at the most convenient time during

the construction to ensure liner completely and uniformly

conform to the sides of the excavation.

iv. During construction, waterproofing membrane shall be held in

place by backfilling or other means without puncturing the

material. Other methods of pinning can also be used as

allowed by the Engineer.

v. No traffic or other equipment shall be allowed directly on the

liners.

vi. The liners shall have minimum longitudinal and vertical

overlaps. Unless specified otherwise, when overlaps are

required between rolls, the upstream roll shall overlap the



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 584

THE “WHITEBOOK”

downstream roll in order to provide a shingled effect. If

chemical seams are used, the panels shall overlap by 6 inches

to 8 inches (152.4 mm to 203.2 mm) with a 4 inches (101.6 mm)

wide seam. If thermal seams are used, the single track weld

shall overlap 4 inches to 6 inches (101.6 mm to 152.4 mm) with

a minimum 2 inches (50.8 mm) wide seam. All seams shall be

made in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendation. If at all possible, seams shall not be located

at low points in the subgrade unless the geometry requires

seaming to be done at these locations. Field seams shall be

inspected and, when ordered by the Engineer, shall be tested

and pass the Vacuum Box Test.

vii. Before covering with backfill material, the conditions of the

liner including all factory seams shall be observed by the

inspectors to determine that there are no holes or rips that

exist in the liner and all piping or conduit penetrations are

properly sealed and welded. Damaged liner material shall be

repaired at your expense by placing new material that meets

overlap requirements over the damaged area. The liner shall

be covered as soon as possible after being inspected, but not

later than 7 Days after placement. Material left uncovered for

more than 7 Days shall be removed and rejected.

viii. All liners shall have a minimum of 3 inches (76.2 mm) top soil

and/or mulch covers and they shall not be exposed to any

sunlight. After placement of granular fill and soil media, two

edges of the liner protruding at the top of the trench shall be

anchored to concrete curb or sidewalk. Excess material shall be

trimmed neatly such that it is not exposed. Excess liner shall not

be trimmed until the site is fully stabilized.

c) Pipe Penetrations and Pipe Sealant.

i. Provide pipe penetrations and joint sealant sealing systems for

all utilities and underdrain penetrations through the liner.

ii. Penetrations shall be sealed using the same plastic liner or PVC

geomembrane material, flat stock and accessories as shown on

the Plans and specified hereon.

iii. The field fabricated assembly shall be field welded to the main

liner as shown on the Plans so as to prevent leakage. These field

welds shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

iv. All sealed areas shall be Air Lance tested using ASTM D-4437 and

verified to be leak free.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 585

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Adhesive and stainless-steel hose clamps shall be included as

indicated on Plans.

1002-3.5 Payment.

1. The payment for the plastic liner shall be measured by the area of fabric placed,

not including any material for overlaps and splices. The square foot Bid item for

“Plastic Liner” shall include testing, transportation, seams, overlaps, staking,

embedment, protection measures, and the lining used for pipe penetrations and

joints.

1002-4 PERFORATED PVC UNDERDRAINS.

1002-4.1 General.

1. Trenches for underdrains where perforated PVC pipes are located shall be

excavated, the plastic liner placed in accordance with 1002-3, “PLASTIC LINER”,

the pipe installed, and the trench backfilled with permeable material according

to the dimensions and details shown on the plans. When underdrains are

installed in trenches outside the subgrade area, the top 6 inches (152.4 mm)

of the trench shall be backfilled, as shown on the plans, with structure backfill

conforming to 300-3, “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”.

2. The underdrain system shall be located above the invert of adjacent storm

water systems.

3. To prevent clogging of underdrain from construction sediments, the

associated storm water facilities shall be excavated to rough grade. After the

contributing drainage area is stabilized, the underdrains and the storm water

facilities shall be constructed to achieve the final elevation.

4. Materials shall be in accordance with 207-17.7, “Perforated PVC Pipe”.

1002-4.2 Installation.

1. The solid and perforated PVC pipe shall be installed in accordance with

SECTION 306 - OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION.

2. The perforated PVC pipe shall be placed such that the perforations are pointed

downward. The drainage stone shall be placed and compacted so that it is firm

and unyielding prior to placing the pipe. Subsequent backfill shall be in lifts no

greater than 8 inches (203.2 mm) and compacted to be firm and unyielding.

The underdrain shall be encased in a layer of clean, double washed ASTM D448

No.57 or smaller (No. 68, 8, or 89) stone.

1002-4.3 Jointing.

1. Jointing of solid PVC pipe shall be securely made in accordance with 306-

7.7.2.3, “Jointing of Injection-Sealed PVC Pipe”. Where there is less than 12

inches (304.8 mm) of vertical clearance between the underdrain and the

existing water line (or more if indicated on the plans), then no joints shall be

within 4 feet (1.2 m) of either side of the existing water line.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 586

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Perforated PVC pipe shall be connected with belled ends, or with sleeve-type or

stop-type couplings under AASHTO M 278. Solvent cementing of joints shall be

required.

1002-4.4 Measurement and Payment.

1. Perforated PVC Pipes are measured along the longitudinal axis between the

ends as laid and shall include the actual pipe in place and shall not include the

inside dimensions of junction structures.

2. The linear foot Bid item for “Perforated PVC Pipe (Underdrain Pipe)” shall be

considered full compensation for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and

incidentals (including pipe risers, caps, fittings, pipe penetrations, and joint

sealants). The payment quantity includes the length of elbows, outlets, risers, tees,

wyes and other branches to the point of intersection.

1002-5 UNDERDRAIN CLEANOUTS.

1002-5.1 General.

1. Underdrain cleanout structures shall include in-line wye fittings and stub for

access where called for in the plans.

1002-5.2 Installation.

1. The wells/cleanouts shall be connected to the perforated underdrain with the

appropriate manufactured connections. The wells/cleanouts shall be capped

with a lockable screw cap. The ends of underdrain pipes not terminating in an

observation well/cleanout shall also be capped.

1002-5.3 Test Methods and Acceptance.

1. When construction is complete, you shall test all completed underdrain

systems for continuous, unimpeded flow.

2. The test methods for each pipe run are as follows:

a) At highpoint or upstream end of underdrain pipe, open cleanout and

insert hose from water source.

b) Turn on water.

c) Acceptance of pipe run consists of free flow of water through drain

outlet into the existing storm drain structure.

3. Any sections of the underdrain that are clogged or crushed shall be replaced

at your expense.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 587

THE “WHITEBOOK”

1002-5.4 Payment.

4. The payment for underdrain cleanouts shall be included in the Bid item for “Underdrain

Cleanout” and shall include shoring, backfill, compaction, installation of cleanout including

wyes and jointing, pipe risers, gaskets, frames and covers or screw caps, and concrete

encasements. This payment shall also include the Work required for testing and

acceptance.1002-6 CHECKDAMS.

1002-6.1 General.

1. Checkdams for green infrastructure are intended to slow the velocity of the

water to prevent erosion within the system.

1002-6.2 Materials.

1. Cast-in-place Concrete.

a) The checkdams (cast-in-place concrete) material shall conform to

201-1, “PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE”.

2. Mason Blocks.

a) The checkdams (mason blocks) material shall conform to 202-2,

“CONCRETE BLOCK”.

3. Recycled Concrete.

a) Checkdams may reuse pieces of demolished driveways, sidewalks, and

other flatwork for construction.

b) The sizes of the recycled concrete material shall be as specified on the

Plans.

1002-6.3 Sequence of Work.

1. Placement.

a) Cast-in-place Concrete. Concrete work shall conform to the

requirements in 303-1, “CONCRETE STRUCTURES”.

b) Mason Blocks. Mason work shall conform to the requirements in

303-4, “MASONRY CONSTRUCTION”.

c) Recycled Concrete.

i. All work shall be laid true, level, and plumb in accordance with

the Plans.

ii. Mortar joints shall be straight, clean and uniform in thickness.

Horizontal and vertical joints shall be a maximum of 3/8” thick

with full mortar coverage.

iii. Stacked units shall have mortar joints offset at 6 inches

minimum.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 588

THE “WHITEBOOK”

iv.

Units shall be laid with push joints. No slushing or grouting of

a joint will be permitted nor shall a joint be made by working

in mortar after the joints have been laid.

v. All joints shall be tooled with a round bar to produce a dense,

slightly concave surface well-bonded to the block at the edges.

Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set but still

sufficiently plastic to bond. All tooling shall be done with a tool

which compacts the mortar, pressing the excess mortar out of

the joint rather than dragging it out.

1002-6.4 Protection and Curing.

1. During construction operations, all adjoining Work shall be protected from

mortar and/or concrete droppings.

2. The checkdams shall be protected from surrounding work and kept free from

mud, dirt, and other foreign materials.

3. Recycled concrete work shall be protected from the sun and rain.

1002-6.5 Measurement and Payment.

1. The payment for checkdams shall be included under the square foot Bid item

for “Checkdams” and shall include but shall not be limited to labor, materials,

and other appurtenances as shown on Plans.

1002-7 BIORETENTION SOIL MEDIA (BSM).

1002-7.1 General.

1. Bioretention Soil Media (BSM) is a formulated soil mixture that is intended to

filter storm water and support plant growth while minimizing the leaching of

chemicals found in the BSM itself.

2. BSM consists of 70% to 85% by volume washed sand and 15% to 30% by

volume compost or alternative organic amendment.

3. Alternative proportions may be justified under certain conditions. BSM shall

be mixed thoroughly using a mechanical mixing system at the plant site prior

to delivery.

4. In order to reduce the potential for leaching of nutrients, the proportion of

compost or alternative organic amendment shall be held to a minimum level

that will support the proposed vegetation in the system.

1002-7.2 Sand for Bioretention Soil Media.

1. The sand shall conform to ASTM C33 “fine aggregate concrete sand”

requirements. A sieve analysis shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C

136, ASTM D 422, or approved equivalent method to demonstrate compliance

with the gradation limits shown in TABLE 1002-7.2 below.

2. The sand shall be thoroughly washed to remove fines, dust, and deleterious

materials prior to delivery. Fines passing the No. 200 sieve shall be non-plastic.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 589

THE “WHITEBOOK”

TABLE 1002-7.2: Sand Gradation Limits

Sieve Size

(ASTM D422)

Percent Passing (by weight)

Minimum Maximum

3/8 inch 100 100

#4 95 100

#8 80 100

#16 50 85

#30 25 60

#50 5 30

#100 0 10

#200 0 5

Note: Coefficient of Uniformity (Cu = D60/D10) equal to or greater than 4.

1002-7.3 Compost.

1. Compost shall be certified by the U.S. Composting Council’s Seal of Testing

Assurance Program or an approved equivalent program.

2. Compost shall comply with the following requirements:

a) Organic Material Content shall be 35% to 75% by dry weight.

b) Carbon to nitrogen (C:N) ratio shall be between 15:1 and 40:1,

preferably above 20:1 to reduce the potential for nitrogen

leaching/washout.

c) Physical contaminants (manmade inert materials) shall not exceed 1%

by dry weight.

d) pH shall be between 6.0 and 7.5.

e) Soluble Salt Concentration shall be less than 10 dS/m (Method TMECC

4.10-A, USDA and U.S. Composting Council).

f) Maturity (seed emergence and seedling vigor) shall be greater than

80% relative to positive control (Method TMECC 5.05-A, USDA and U.S.

Composting Council).

g) Stability (Carbon Dioxide evolution rate) shall be less than 2.5 mg CO2-

C per g compost organic matter (OM) per day or less than 5 mg CO2-C



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 590

THE “WHITEBOOK”

per g compost carbon per day, whichever unit is reported. (Method

TMECC 5.08-B, USDA and U.S. Composting Council). Alternatively, a

Solvita rating of 6 or higher is acceptable.

h) Moisture shall be 25%-55% wet weight basis.

i) Select Pathogens shall pass US EPA Class A standard, 40 CFR Section

503.32(a).

j) Trace Metals shall pass US EPA Class A standard, 40 CFR Section

503.13, Tables 1 and 3.

k) Shall be within gradation limits in Table 1002-7.3 (ASTM D 422 sieve

analysis or approved equivalent).

Table 1002-7.3: Compost Gradation Limits

Sieve Size

Percent Passing

(by weight)

16 mm (5/8”) 99 to 100

6.3 mm (1/4”) 40 to 95

2 mm 40 to 90

1002-7.4 Alternative Mix Components and Proportions.

1. Alternative mix components and proportions may be utilized, provided that

the whole blended mix (1002-7.5) conforms to agricultural, chemical, and

hydraulic suitability criteria, as applicable. Alternative mix designs may include

alternative proportions, alternative organic amendments and/or the use of

natural soils. Alternative mixes are subject to approval by the City Engineer.

2. Additional mix components, such as granular activated carbon, zeolite, and

biochar may be considered to improve performance for other parameters.

1002-7.5 Whole BSM Testing Requirements and Criteria.

1. You shall submit the following information to the City Engineer at least 30

Calendar days prior to ordering materials:

a) Source/supplier of BSM

b) Location of source/supplier

c) A physical sample

d) Available supplier testing information

e) Whole BSM test results from a third party independent laboratory

f) Description of proposed methods and schedule for mixing, delivery,

and placement of BSM



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 591

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Test results shall be no older than 120 Calendar Days and shall accurately

represent the materials and feed stocks that are currently available from the

supplier.

3. Test results shall demonstrate conformance to 1002-7.6, “BSM Agricultural

Suitability”, 1002-7.7, “BSM CHEMICAL SUITABILITY”, and 1002-7.8, “BSM

Hydraulic Suitability”.

4. No delivery, placement, or planting of BSM shall begin until test results confirm

the suitability of the BSM.

5. You shall submit a written request for approval which shall be accompanied

by written analysis results from a written report of a testing agency. The testing

agency shall be registered by the State for agricultural soil evaluation which

indicates compliance stating that the tested material proposed source

complies with these specifications.

6. Third party independent laboratory testing shall be paid at your expense.

1002-7.6 BSM Agricultural Suitability.

1. The BSM shall be suitable to sustain the growth of the plants specified and

shall conform to the following requirements:

a) pH range shall be between 6.0-7.5

b) Salinity shall be less than 3.0 millimho/cm (as measured by electrical

conductivity)

c) Sodium adsorption ration (SAR) shall be less than 3.0

d) Chloride shall be less than 150 ppm

2. The test results shall show the following information:

a) Date of Testing

b) Project Name

c) The Contractor’s Name

d) Source of Materials and Supplier’s Name

e) pH

f) E

g) Total and plant available elements (mg/kg particle concentration):

phosphorus, potassium, iron, manganese, zinc, copper, boron,

calcium, magnesium, sodium, sulfur, molybdenum, nickel, aluminum,

arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, mercury,

selenium, silver, strontium, tin, and vanadium. Plant available

concentration shall be assessed based on weak acid

extraction(ammonium Bicarbonate/DTPA soil analysis or similar)

h) Soil adsorption ratio



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 592

THE “WHITEBOOK”

i) Carbon/nitrogen ratio

j) Cation exchange capacity

k) Moisture content

l) Organic content

m) An assessment of agricultural suitability based on test results

n) Recommendations for adding amendments, chemical corrections, or

both.

3. BSM which requires amending to comply with these specifications shall be

uniformly blended and tested in its blended state prior to testing and delivery.

1002-7.7 BSM Chemical Suitability.

1. For systems with underdrains, the BSM shall exhibit limited potential for

leaching of pollutants that are at levels of concern. Potential for pollutant

leaching shall be assessed using either the Saturated Media Extract Method

(aka, Saturation Extract) that is commonly performed by agricultural

laboratories or the Synthetic Precipitation Leaching Procedure (SPLP) (EPA SW-

846, Method 1312). The referenced tests express the criteria in terms of the

pollutant concentration in water that is in contact with the media. In areas in

which a pollutant or pollutants are associated with a water quality impairment

or a TMDL, BSM in systems with underdrains shall conform to the following

Saturation Extract or SPLP criteria for applicable pollutant(s):

a) Nitrate < 3 mg/L

b) Phosphorus < 1 mg/L

i. Alternative mixtures may be considered for systems with

underdrains in areas where phosphorus is associated with a

water quality impairment or a TMDL or where the BSM does

not achieve the Saturation Extract or SPLP criteria of < 1 mg/L

total phosphorus as specified. Details regarding alternative

mixtures requirements and potential components are

included in 1002-7.4, “Alternative Mix Components and

Proportions”.

c) Zinc < 0.1 mg/L

d) Copper < 0.025 mg/L

e) Lead < 0.025 mg/L

f) Arsenic < 0.02 mg/L

g) Cadmium < 0.01 mg/L

h) Mercury < 0.01 mg/L

i) Selenium < 0.01 mg/L



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 593

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Criteria shall be met as stated where a pollutant is associated with a water

quality impairment or Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) in any downstream

receiving water. Criteria may be waived or modified, at the discretion of the

Resident Engineer, where a pollutant does not have a nexus to a water quality

impairment or TMDL of downstream receiving water(s). Criteria may also be

modified at the discretion of the Resident Engineer if you demonstrate that

suitable BSM materials cannot be feasibly sourced within a 50-mile radius of

the project site and a good faith effort has been undertaken to investigate

available materials.

3. The chemical suitability criteria listed in this section do not apply to systems

without underdrains, unless groundwater is impaired or susceptible to

nutrients contamination.

1002-7.8 BSM Hydraulic Suitability.

1. The saturated hydraulic conductivity or infiltration rate of the whole BSM shall

be measured by one of the following methods:

a) Measurement of hydraulic conductivity (USDA Handbook 60, method

34b) (commonly available as part of standard agronomic soil

evaluation)

b) ASTM D2434 Permeability of Granular Soils (at approximately 85%

relative compaction Standard Proctor, ASTM D698)

2. BSM shall conform to hydraulic criteria associated with the BMP design

configuration that best applies to the facility where the BSM will be installed:

a) Systems with unrestricted underdrain system (i.e., media

control). For systems with underdrains that are not restricted, the

BSM shall have a minimum measured hydraulic conductivity of 8

inches per hour to ensure adequate flow rate through the BMP and

longevity of the system. The BSM shall have a maximum measured

hydraulic conductivity of no more than 20 inches per hour. BSM with

higher measured hydraulic conductivity may be accepted at the

discretion of the Resident Engineer. In all cases, an upturned elbow

system on the underdrain, measuring 9 to 12 inches above the invert

of the underdrain, shall be used to control velocities in the underdrain

pipe and reduce potential for solid migration through the system.

b) Systems with restricted underdrain system (i.e., outlet control).

For systems in which the flowrate of water through the media is

controlled via an outlet control device (e.g., orifice or valve) affixed to

the outlet of the underdrain system, the hydraulic conductivity of the

media shall be at least 15 inches per hour and not more than 40 inches

per hour. The outlet control device shall control the flowrate to

between 5 and 12 inches per hour.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 594

THE “WHITEBOOK”

c) Systems without underdrains. For systems without underdrains, the

BSM shall have a hydraulic conductivity at least 4 times higher than the

underlying soil infiltration rate, but shall not exceed 12 inches per

hour.

1002-7.9 Delivery, Storage and Handling.

1. You shall not deliver or place soils in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. You

shall protect soils and mixes from absorbing excess water and from erosion

at all times. You shall not store materials unprotected during large rainfall

events (>0.25 inches). If water is introduced into the material while it is

stockpiled, you shall allow the material to drain to the acceptance of the

Resident Engineer before placement.

2. BSM shall be thoroughly mixed prior to delivery using mechanical mixing

methods such as a drum mixer. BSM shall be lightly compacted and placed in

loose lifts approximately 12 inches (300 mm) to ensure reasonable settlement

without excessive compaction. Compaction within the BSM area shall not

exceed 75 to 85% standard proctor within the designed depth of the BSM.

Machinery shall not be used in the bioretention facility to place the BSM. A

conveyor or spray system shall be used for media placement in large facilities.

Low ground pressure equipment may be authorized for large facilities at the

discretion of the Resident Engineer.

3. Placement methods and BSM quantities shall account for approximately 10%

loss of volume due to settling. Planting methods and timing shall account for

settling of media without exposing plant root systems.

4. The Resident Engineer may request up to three double ring infiltrometer tests

(ASTM D3385) or approved alternative tests to confirm that the placed material

meets applicable hydraulic suitability criteria in accordance with 1002-7.8,

“BSM Hydraulic Suitability”.

5. In the event that the infiltration rate of placed material does not meet

applicable criteria, the Resident Engineer may require replacement and/or

decompaction of materials.

1002-7.10 Quality Control and Acceptance.

1. Close adherence to the material quality controls herein are necessary in order

to support healthy vegetation, minimize pollutant leaching, and assure

sufficient permeability to infiltrate/filter runoff during the life of the facility.

2. Amendments may be included to adjust agronomic properties.

3. Acceptance of the material will be based on test results certified to be

representative.

4. Test results shall be conducted no more than 120 Calendar Days prior to

delivery of the blended BSM to the project site.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 595

THE “WHITEBOOK”

5. For projects installing more than 100 cubic yards of BSM, batch-specific tests

of the blended mix shall be provided to the Resident Engineer for every 100

cubic yards of BSM along with a site plan showing the placement locations of

each BSM batch within the facility.

1002-7.11 Measurement and Payment.

1. The payment for quantities of Bioretention Soil Media shall be measured by

the cubic yard in place as shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer

and shall be included under the Bid item for “Bioretention Soil Media”. This Bid

item shall include all labor, placement, soil mixture as specified herein, testing

and all other incidentals necessary to install the BSM.

1002-8 AGGREGATE MATERIALS FOR BSM DRAINAGE LAYERS.

1002-8.1 Drainage of BSM. Drainage of BSM requires the use of specific aggregate materials

for filter course (aka choking layer) materials and for an underlying drainage and

storage layer.

1002-8.2 Rock and Sand Products for Use in BSM Drainage.

1. Size classifications detailed in Tables 1002-8.2 (1) and 1002-8.2 (2) shall apply

with respect to BSM drainage materials. All sand and stone products used in

BSM drainage layers shall be clean and thoroughly washed.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 596

THE “WHITEBOOK”

TABLE 1002-8.2 (1): Crushed Rock and Stone Gradation Limits

Sieve Size

Percent Passing Sieves

AASHTO No. 57 ASTM No. 8

3 in - -

2.5 in - -

2 in - -

1.5 in 100 -

1 in 95 – 100 -

0.75 in - -

0.5 in 25 – 60 100

0.375 in - 85 – 100

No. 4 10 max. 10 – 30

No. 8 5 max. 0 – 10

No. 16 - 0 – 5

No. 50 - -



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 597

THE “WHITEBOOK”

TABLE 1002-8.2 (2): Sand Gradation Limits

Sieve Size

Percent Passing Sieves

Choker Sand - ASTM C33

0.375 in 100

No. 4 95 – 100

No. 8 80 – 100

No. 16 50 – 85

No. 30 25 – 60

No. 50 5 – 30

No. 100 0 – 10

No. 200 0 – 3

1002-8.3 Graded Aggregate Choker Stone.

1. Graded aggregate choker material shall be installed as a filter course to

separate BSM from the drainage rock reservoir layer. This ensures that no

migration of sand or other fines occurs.

2. The filter course consists of two layers of choking material increasing in

particle size. The top layer of the filter course shall be constructed of

thoroughly washed ASTM C33 fine aggregate sand material conforming to

gradation limits contained in Table 1002-8.2 (2). The bottom layer of the filter

course shall be constructed of thoroughly washed ASTM No. 8 aggregate

material conforming to gradation limits contained in Table 1002-8.2 (1).

1002-8.4 Open-Graded Aggregate Stone.

1. Open-graded aggregate material shall be installed to provide drainage for

overlying BSM and filter course layers, provide additional storm water storage

capacity, and contain the underdrain pipe(s). This layer shall be constructed of

thoroughly washed AASHTO No. 57 open graded aggregate material

conforming to gradation limits contained in Table 1002-8.2 (1).

1002-8.5 Spreading.

1. Imported BSM drainage material shall be delivered to the BMP system

installation site as uniform mixtures and each layer shall be spread in one

operation. Segregation within each aggregate layer shall be avoided and the

layers shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine material.



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 598

THE “WHITEBOOK”

2. Aggregate shall be deposited on underlying layers at a uniform quantity per

linear foot (meter), which quantity will provide the required compacted

thickness within the tolerances specified herein without resorting to spotting,

picking up, or otherwise shifting the aggregate material.

3. The thickness of the aggregate storage layer (AASHTO No. 57) will depend on

site specific design and shall be detailed in contract documents.

4. The bottom layer of the filter course (ASTM No.8) shall be installed to a

thickness of 3 inches (75 mm). The layer shall be spread in one layer. The top

layer of the filter course (ASTM C33) shall be installed to a thickness of 3 inches

(75 mm). The layer shall be spread in one layer. Marker stakes shall be used to

ensure uniform lift thickness.

1002-8.6 Compacting.

1. Filter course material and aggregate storage material shall be lightly

compacted to approximately 80% standard proctor without the use of

vibratory compaction.

1002-8.7 Measurement and Payment.

1. The payment for quantities of graded aggregate choker material shall be

included under the cubic yard Bid item for “Graded Aggregate Choker Stone”

and shall include all labor, installation, compaction, and other incidentals

necessary to install the graded aggregate choker material. The volumetric

quantities of graded aggregate choker stone material shall be those placed

within the limits of the dimensions as shown on the Plans.

2. The payment for quantities of open-graded aggregate storage material shall

be included under the cubic yard Bid item for “Open-Graded Aggregate Stone”

and shall include all labor, installation, compaction, and other incidentals

necessary to install the open-graded aggregate storage material. The

volumetric quantities of open-graded storage material shall be those placed

within the limits of the dimensions as shown on the Plans.

3. The weight of material to be paid for will be determined by deducting (from

the weight of material delivered to the Work) the weight of water in the

material (at the time of weighing) in excess of 1% more than the optimum

moisture content. No payment will be made for the weight of water deducted.

END OF PART 10 – STORM WATER

City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 599

THE “WHITEBOOK”

INDEX



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 600

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Abandonment, 275, 296, 301, 302, 345

Adjustment Factor, 178, 186

Air Pressure Test, 284

Allowance, 11, 27, 66, 78, 122, 136, 153, 176,

290, 362, 370, 383, 399, 452, 560

Approvals (Design-Build), 170

Approved Materials List (AML), 18, 44

Archaeological, Native American, and

Paleontological Mitigation, 135

Asbestos Materials, 278

As-Builts, 11, 166

Bedding For Plastic Pipe and Fittings, 282

Best Management Practice (BMP), 59, 496, 507,

539, 548, 566

Blowoff Valve Assemblies, 289

Bonds (Payment and Performance), 23

Building Permit, 26, 78, 167

Butterfly Valves, 233, 475, 518

Cable Installation, 413, 420

CADD, 166, 386

Caltrans, 12, 26, 40, 89, 151, 152, 166, 194, 353,

388, 400, 451, 544, 548

Cement Treated Base (CTB), 193, 267

Certificate of Compliance, 12, 76, 193, 196, 208,

405, 461

City Forces, 12, 74, 131, 290, 345, 349, 517, 519,

522, 525, 531

Claims, 21, 24, 30, 55, 58, 69, 83, 87. 91, 132,

143, 146, 162, 171, 180

Class 2 Aggregate Base, 191, 246

Cleanouts, 42, 206, 212, 276, 297, 308 576

Community Outreach, 92, 274, 388, 537

Compensation Adjustments For Price Index

Fluctuations, 151

Conductors, 409, 427, 445, 479, 493, 549

Conflict of Interest, 96

Construction and Demolition Waste

Management, 98, 101

Construction Documents (Contract Documents,

Bridging Documents), 13, 167, 184

Construction General Permit (CGP), 539

Contract Time Extensions, 386

Control Valves, 41, 470, 492

Controller Assemblies, 434

Correction of Work, 69, 401, 553, 587

Cost Reduction Proposal, 28, 80

Crack Seal Work, 264

Curb Ramp, 94, 241, 268, 274, 340, 351, 383,

449,, 524, 588

Damages Caused By Act Of God, 142

Defective Work, 13, 70

Delays, 128, 356

Design-Build Contracting, 158

Detectable Warning Tiles, 19, 241

Disinfection, 292, 332, 524, 528

Dispute Resolution Process, 32

Earthwork, 242

Emergency Vehicle Preemption

Equipment, 44

Encountering or Releasing Hazardous

Substances, 103

Fertilizers, 458, 481, 450

Fiber Optic Subsystems, 411

Field Orders, 141

Fire Hydrants, 235, 290, 293, 517, 523, 529

Flow Sensing Device, 472, 495

Foreign Materials, 77, 566, 577

Formal Partnering, 73



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 601

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Fusible Non-Pressure Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe,

209

Gate Valves, 232, 274, 348, 478, 494

Graffiti Control, 53, 230, 334, 435

Health and Safety Plan, 88

Holiday, 14

Horizontal Directional Drilling, 209, 212, 222,

315

House Connection Sewer (Laterals), 207, 222,

296

Humps, Lumps, and Pavement Irregularities,

351, 354

Indemnification, 91, 171

Infield Mix, 192

Job Order Contracting (JOC), 178

Joint Venture, 12, 15

Laws, 11,26, 53, 82

Legally Responsible Person (LRP), 540, 543

Liquidated Damages, 139

Long-Term Warranty Contract (LTWC), 72

Long-Term Maintenance and Monitoring

Agreement, 503, 506, 512

Manholes, 194, 260, 274, 295, 305, 309, 318,

327, 348,362, 373, 513

Markouts, 334,

Markup, 153

Mobilization, 148, 275

Moratoriums, 130

Mulch, 464, 484, 493

Normal Working Hours, 15

Notice of Completion, 15

Notice of Termination (NOT), 137, 543, 546

Paint, 230, 314

Patents, Trademarks, and Copyrights, 87, 162

Payment, 143

Payroll Records, 87, 144, 152

Pedestrian Barricade, 467

Permit Registration Documents (PRDs), 126,

540, 543

Permits, Fees, and Notices, 26

Phased Funding, 124, 128, 150

Pipe Bursting, 212, 322

Pipeline System Rehabilitation, 357

Plug Valves, 235

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 223

Pre-Award Schedule, 128

Pre-construction Meeting, 46, 57, 82, 92, 98, 101,

122, 130, 134, 141, 359, 371, 388. 501,

Precedence of Contract

Documents, 39, 165, 184

Private Pump, 229, 300

Public Notice By Contractor, 93

Pull Boxes, 410, 451, 470, 480,

Punchlist, 11, 16, 68, 89, 122, 131, 496, 512

Rain Sensing Device, 473, 495

Raised Reflective Pavement Markers, 450

Red-lines, 11, 16, 40, 65, 67, 166, 320,

Remote Control Camera Inspection, 36

Removing, Reinstalling, or Salvaging Electrical

Equipment, 443

Replumbing, 297, 347

Resurfacing, 64, 94, 130, 145, 259, 291, 308,

340, 349, 351, 351, 381, 387, 410, 490, 531

Retention, 16, 24, 69, 140, 457, 545,

Re-vegetation, 42, 501

Right To Audit, 140

Rock Materials, 187

Root Barriers, 469, 499



City Supplement (Rev. 2021) Page 602

THE “WHITEBOOK”

Sanitation, 53, 550

Schedule, 16, 66, 122

Schedule of Values (SOV), 126, 141, 175, 451,

560

Scope of Work (SOW), 16

Seal Coat, 219, 261

Separate Contractors, 17, 74, 129, 348

Shoring, 281

Signs, 51, 93,102, 206, 273,278, 333, 379, 384,

388,397, 405, 449

Soil Amendments, 458, 482, 508

Special Inspection, 78

Specialty Inspection, 77

Spill Prevention, 54

Sprinkler Equipment, 476

Stop Work, 71, 130, 137, 278, 504

Storage and Staging Areas, 54

Stored Materials, 146, 208,

Subcontractors, 21, 23, 34, 69, 73, 86, 91, 137,

140, 143, 152, 161, 165, 172

Subsurface Data, 50

Survey Monuments, 269, 274, 313, 335, 349, 352

SWPPP, 43, 45, 540,

Technical Studies, 50

Temporary Blow-offs, 63

Termination of the Contract, 97, 137, 151

Time of Completion, 174, 185

Topsoil, 455, 48, 507

Trade Names, 80, 170

Traffic Signal Faces and Fittings, 436

Traffic Signal Loop Detectors, 353

Traffic Signs and Components, 449

Traffic Striping, Curb and Pavement

Markings, and Pavement Markers, 314

Tree Removal, 22, 343,

Trench Marker Tape, 480

Trenchless Method, 288, 298, 301

Underground Conduit

Construction, 274

Underground Service Alert

(USA), 344, 381

Video Inspection, 301, 320, 360

Video Recording of Existing Conditions, 298

Virtual Project Manager (VPM), 97

Waiver of Claims, 146

Walk-through, 68

Warranty, 46, 69, 71, 169, 226, 229, 301

Water Discharges, 60, 83, 540, 551

Water Meter Boxes, 237, 289, 345

Water Pollution Control, 44, 58, 82, 184, 539, 54,

561

Water Services, 288, 293, 346, 522

Withholding of Payment, 165

Work Outside Normal Working Hours, 165

Work To Be Done, 26, 161

Standard Specications For

Public Works Construction

2021

Edition

THE “WHITEBOOK” |

THE

“WHITEBOOK”

ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING & PARKS DIVISION

STANDARDS & CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION

525 B STREET STE. 750

SAN DIEGO, CA 92101

DOCUMENT NUMBER: ECPI010122-02

Standard Specications

For Public Works Construction

2021 Edition